Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

Non-Repatriable Investment by NRIs/OCIs under FEMA: An Analysis – Part 2

NON-REPATRIABLE INVESTMENTS: EASY ENTRY, TRICKY EXIT!

In Part I, we explored how NRIs and OCIs can invest in India under Schedule IV, enjoying the perks of domestic investment while sidestepping FDI restrictions. We saw how this route offers flexibility in entry—with no foreign investment caps, no strict pricing rules, and freedom to invest in LLPs, AIFs, and even real estate (as long as it’s not a farmhouse!). But, much like a long-term relationship, once you commit, FEMA expects you to stay for the long haul.

Now, in Part II, we address the big question: Can you transfer, sell, or gift these investments? Will FEMA allow you a graceful exit? We’ll dive into the rules governing transfers, repatriation limits, downstream investments, and more—so buckle up, because while the non-repatriable entry was smooth, the exit is where the real thrill begins!

TRANSFER OF SHARES/INVESTMENTS HELD ON NON-REPATRIATION BASIS

Just as important as the entry is the ability to transfer or exit the investment. FEMA provides certain pathways for transferring shares or other securities that were held on a non-repatriation basis:

  •  Transfer to a Resident: An NRI/OCI can sell or gift the securities to an Indian resident freely. Since the resident will hold them as domestic holdings, this is straightforward. No RBI permission, pricing guideline, or reporting form is required. For instance, if an NRI uncle wants to gift his shares (held on a non-repat basis) in an Indian company to his resident Indian nephew, it’s permitted and no specific FEMA filing is triggered (aside from perhaps a local gift deed for records). Similarly, suppose an NRI non-repat investor wants to sell his stake to an Indian co-promoter. In that case, he can transact at any price mutually agreed upon (pricing restrictions don’t apply as this is essentially a resident-to-resident transfer in FEMA’s eyes), and no FC-TRS form is required.
  • Transfer to another NRI / OCI on Non-Repat basis: NRIs / OCIs can also transfer such investments amongst themselves, provided the investment remains on non-repatriation. For example, one OCI can gift shares held under Schedule IV to another OCI or NRI (maybe a relative) who will also hold them under Schedule IV. This is allowed without RBI approval, and again, no pricing or reporting requirements apply. The only caveat is that the transferee must be eligible to hold on a non-repat basis (which generally means they are NRI / OCI or their entity). Gifting among NRIs / OCIs on the non-repat route is quite common within families. Note: If it’s a gift, one should ensure it meets any conditions under the Companies Act or other laws (for instance, if the donor and donee are “relatives” under Section 2(77) Companies Act, as required by FEMA for certain cross-border gifts – more on that below).
  •  Transfer to an NRI / OCI on a repatriation basis (i.e., converting it to FDI): This scenario is effectively an exit from the non-repatriable pool into the repatriable pool. For instance, an NRI with non-repat shares might find a foreign investor or another NRI who wants those shares but with repatriation rights. FEMA permits the sale, but since the buyer will hold on a repatriation basis (Schedule I or III), it must conform to FDI rules. That means sectoral caps and entry routes must be respected, and pricing guidelines apply to the transaction. If it’s a gift (without consideration) from an NRI (non-repat holder) to an NRI / OCI (who will hold as repatriable), prior RBI approval is required and certain conditions must be met. These conditions (laid out in NDI Rules and earlier in TISPRO) include: (a) the donee must be eligible to hold the investment under the relevant repatriable schedule (meaning the sector is open for FDI for that person); (b) the gift amount is within 5% of the company’s paid-up capital (or each series of debentures / MF scheme) cumulatively; (c) sectoral cap is not breached by the donee’s holdings; (d) donor and donee are relatives as defined in Companies Act, 2013; and (e) the value of securities gifted by the donor in a year does not exceed USD 50,000. These are designed to prevent the abuse of gifting as a loophole to transfer large foreign investments without consideration. If all conditions are met, RBI may approve the gift. If it’s a sale (for consideration) by NRI non-repat to NRI/OCI repatriable, no prior approval is needed (sale is under automatic route) but pricing must be at or higher than fair value (since NR to NR transfer with one side repatriable is treated like an FDI entry for the buyer). Form FC-TRS must be filed to report this transfer, and in such a case, since the seller was holding non-repat, the onus is on the seller (who is the one changing their holding status) to file the FC-TRS within 60 days. Our earlier table from the draft summarizes: Seller NRI-non-repat -> Buyer NRI-repat: pricing applicable, FC-TRS by seller, auto route subject to caps.
  •  Transfer from a foreign investor (repatriable) to an NRI/OCI (non-repatriable): This is the reverse scenario – a person who holds shares as foreign investment sells or gifts to an NRI / OCI who will hold as domestic. For example, a foreign venture fund wants to exit and an OCI investor is willing to buy but keep the investment in India. FEMA allows this as well. Since the new holder is non-repatriable, the sectoral caps don’t matter post-transfer (the investment leaves the FDI ambit). However, up to the point of transfer, compliance should be there. In a sale by a foreign investor to an NRI on a non-repat basis, pricing guidelines again apply (the NRI shouldn’t pay more than fair value, because a foreigner is exiting and taking money out – RBI ensures they don’t take out more than fair value). FC-TRS reporting is required, and typically, the buyer (NRI / OCI) would report it because the buyer is the one now holding the securities (the authorized dealer often guides who should file; it has to be a person resident in India and as non-repat investment is treated as domestic investment, it has to be filed by NRI / OCI acquiring it on non-repat basis). If it’s a gift from a foreign investor to an NRI / OCI relative, RBI approval would similarly be needed with analogous conditions (the NDI Rules conditions on gift apply to any resident outside to resident outside transfer, repatriable to non-repat likely treated similarly requiring approval unless specified otherwise). The draft table indicated: Buyer NRI-non-repat from Seller foreign (repat) – gift allowed with approval, pricing applicable, FC-TRS by buyer, and subject to FDI sectoral limits at the time of transfer.

In all the above cases of change of mode (repatriable vs non-repatriable), one can see FEMA tries to ensure that whenever money is leaving India (repatriable side), fair value is respected and RBI is informed. But when the money remains in India (purely domestic or non-repat transfers), the regulations are hands-off.

Downstream Investment Impact: A critical implication of holding investments on non-repatriation basis is how the investing company is classified. FEMA and India’s FDI policy have the concept of indirect foreign investment – if Company A is foreign-owned or controlled, and it invests in Company B, then Company B is considered to have foreign investment to that extent. However, Schedule IV investments are excluded from this calculation. The rules (as clarified in DPIIT’s policy) state that if an Indian company is owned and controlled by NRIs / OCIs on a non-repatriation basis, any downstream investment by that company will not be considered foreign investment. In other words, an Indian company that has only NRI / OCI non-repat capital is treated as an Indian-owned company. So if it later invests in another Indian company, that target company doesn’t need to worry about foreign equity caps because the investment is coming from an Indian source (deemed). This is a major benefit – it effectively ring-fences NRI domestic investment from contaminating downstream entities with foreign status. This clarification was issued to remove ambiguity, especially in cases where OCIs set up investment vehicles. Now, an NRI / OCI-owned investment fund (registered as an Indian company or LLP) can invest freely in downstream companies without subjecting them to FDI compliance, provided the fund’s own capital is non-repatriable.

From a practical standpoint, when structuring private equity deals, if one of the investors is an NRI / OCI willing to designate their contribution as non-repatriable, the company can be treated as fully Indian-owned, allowing it to invest into subsidiaries or other companies in restricted sectors without ceilings. This has to be balanced with the investor’s interest (since that NRI loses repatriation right). Often, OCIs with a long-term commitment to India might be agreeable to this to enable, say, a group structure that avoids FDI limits.

Summary of Transfer Scenarios: For quick reference:

  •  NRI / OCI (Non-repat)-> Resident: Allowed, gift allowed, no pricing rule, no reporting.
  •  Resident -> NRI / OCI (Non-repat): Allowed, gift allowed, no pricing rule, no reporting (essentially the mirror of above, turning domestic holding into NRI non-repat).
  •  NRI / OCI (Non-repat) -> NRI / OCI (Non-repat): Allowed, gift allowed, no pricing, no reporting.
  •  NRI / OCI (Non-repat) -> Foreigner / NRI (Repat): Allowed, the gift needs RBI approval (with conditions), if sale then pricing applies; report FC-TRS.
  •  Foreigner / NRI (Repat) -> NRI / OCI (Non-repat): Allowed, gift possibly with approval; sale at pricing; report FC-TRS.

The key is whether the status of the investment (domestic vs foreign) changes as a result of transfer, and ensuring the appropriate regulatory steps in those cases.

Comparative Interplay Between Schedules I, III, IV, and VI

To fully understand Schedule IV in context, one must compare it with other relevant schedules under FEMA NDI Rules:

Schedule I (FDI route) vs Schedule IV (NRI non-repat route)

  •  Nature of Investment: Schedule I covers FDI by any person resident outside India (including NRIs) on a repatriation basis. Schedule IV covers investments by NRIs / OCIs (and their entities) on a non-repatriation basis. Schedule I investments count as foreign investment; Schedule IV do not.
  •  Sectoral Caps and Conditions: Schedule I investments are subject to sectoral caps (% limits in various sectors) and sector-specific conditions (like minimum capitalization, lock-ins, etc., in sectors like retail, construction, etc.). By contrast, Schedule IV investments are generally not subject to those caps/conditions because they are treated as domestic. For example, multi-brand retail trading has a 51% cap under FDI with many conditions – an OCI could invest 100% in a retail company under Schedule IV with none of those conditions, as long as it’s on a non-repatriation basis. Similarly, real estate development has minimum area and lock-in requirements under FDI, but an NRI could invest non-repat without those (provided it’s not pure trading of real estate).
  •  Prohibited Sectors: Schedule I explicitly prohibits foreign investment in sectors like lottery, gambling, chit funds, Nidhi, real estate business, and also limits in print media, etc. Schedule IV has its own (smaller) prohibited list (Nidhi, agriculture, plantation, real estate business, farmhouses, TDR) but notably does not mention lottery, gambling, etc. Thus, some sectors closed in Schedule I are open in Schedule IV, and vice versa (as discussed earlier).
  •  Valuation / Optionality: Under Schedule I, any equity instruments issued to foreign investors can have an optionality clause only with a minimum lock-in of 1 year and no assured return; effectively, foreign investors cannot be guaranteed an exit price. Under Schedule IV, these restrictions do not apply – one can issue shares or other instruments to NRIs/OCIs with an assured buyback or fixed return arrangement since it’s like a domestic deal. Likewise, provisions like deferred consideration (permitted for FDI up to 25% for 18 months) need not be adhered to strictly for non-repat investments – an NRI investor and company can agree on different terms as it’s a private domestic contract in FEMA’s eyes.
  •  Reporting: FDI (Sch. I) transactions must be reported (FC-GPR, FC-TRS, etc.), whereas Sch. IV initial investments are not reported to RBI as noted.
  •  Exit / Repatriation: Schedule I investors can repatriate everything freely (that’s the point of FDI), whereas Schedule IV investors are bound by the NRO / $1M rule for exits.

Bottom line: Schedule IV is far more liberal on entry (no caps, any price) but restrictive on exit, whereas Schedule I is vice versa. A legal advisor will often weigh these options for an NRI client: if the priority is to eventually take money abroad or bring in a foreign partner, Schedule I might be preferable; if the priority is flexibility in investing and less regulatory hassle, Schedule IV is attractive.

Schedule III (NRI Portfolio Investment) vs Schedule IV (NRI Non-Repatriation)

Schedule III deals with the Portfolio Investment Scheme (PIS) for NRIs / OCIs on a repatriation basis, primarily buying/selling shares of listed companies through stock exchanges.

  •  Listed Shares via Stock Exchange: Under Schedule III (PIS), an NRI / OCI can purchase shares of listed Indian companies only through a recognized stock broker on the stock exchange and is subject to the rule that no individual NRI / OCI can hold more than 5% of the paid-up capital of the company. All NRIs / OCIs taken together cannot exceed 10% of the capital unless the company passes a resolution to increase this aggregate limit to 24%. These limits are to ensure NRI portfolio investments remain “portfolio” in nature and do not take over the company. In contrast, under Schedule IV, NRIs / OCIs can acquire shares of listed companies without regard to the 5% or 10% limits because those limits apply only to repatriable holdings. An NRI could, for instance, accumulate a larger stake by buying shares off-market or via private placements under Schedule IV.
  •  Other Securities: Schedule III also allows NRIs to purchase on a repatriation basis certain government securities, treasury bills, PSU bonds, etc., up to specified limits, and units of equity mutual funds (no limit). On this front, both Schedule III and Schedule IV allow NRIs to invest in domestic mutual fund units freely if the fund is equity-oriented. So whether repatriable or not, an NRI can buy any number of units of, say, an index fund or equity ETF.
  •  Nature of Investor: Schedule III is meant for NRIs investing as portfolio investors (often through NRE PIS bank accounts), whereas Schedule IV is not limited to portfolio activity – it can be FDI-like strategic investments too.
  •  Trading vs Investment: Under PIS (Sch. III), NRIs are typically not allowed to make the stock trading their full-time business (they cannot do intraday trading or short-selling under PIS; it’s for investment, not speculation). Schedule IV has no such restriction explicitly; however, if an NRI were actively trading frequently under non-repatriation, it might raise questions – usually, serious traders stick to the PIS route for liquidity.

In summary, Schedule III is a subset route for market investments with tight limits, whereas Schedule IV offers NRIs a way to invest in listed companies beyond those limits (albeit off-market and non-repatriable). As a strategy, an NRI who sees a long-term value in a listed company and wants significant ownership may choose to buy some under PIS (repatriable) but anything beyond the threshold under the non-repat route, combining both to achieve a
larger stake.

SCHEDULE VI (FDI IN LLPs) Vs SCHEDULE IV (NRI INVESTMENT IN LLPs)

Schedule VI allows foreign investment in Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs) on a repatriation basis. It stipulates that FDI in LLP is allowed only in sectors where 100% FDI is permitted under automatic route and there are no FDI-linked performance conditions (like minimum capital, etc.). This effectively bars FDI in LLPs in sectors like real estate, retail trading, etc., because those sectors either have caps or conditions. For example, multi-brand retail is 51% with conditions – so a foreign investor cannot invest in an LLP doing retail. Real estate business is prohibited entirely for FDI – so no LLP can be structured. Even an LLP in construction development is problematic under FDI if conditions (like a lock-in) are considered performance conditions.

However, Schedule IV imposes no such sectoral conditionality for LLPs (apart from the same prohibited list). Therefore, NRIs / OCIs can invest in the capital of an LLP on a non-repatriation basis even if that LLP is engaged in a sector where FDI in LLP is not allowed. For instance, an LLP engaged in the business of building residential housing (construction development) — FDI in such an LLP would not be allowed repatriably because construction development, while 100% automatic, had certain conditions under the FDI policy. Under Schedule IV, an NRI could contribute capital to this LLP freely as domestic investment. Another concrete example: LLP engaged in single-brand or multi-brand retail – FDI in LLP is not permitted because retail has conditions, but NRI non-repat funds could still be infused into an LLP doing retail trade. The only caveat is if the LLP’s activity falls under the explicit prohibitions of Schedule IV (agriculture, plantation, real estate trading, farmhouses, etc., which we already know). As long as the LLP’s business is not in that small prohibited list, NRI / OCI money can be invested on non-repatriable basis.

Thus, Schedule IV significantly expands NRIs’ ability to invest in LLPs vis-à-vis Schedule VI. It allows the Indian-origin diaspora to use LLP structures (which are popular for smaller businesses and real estate projects), which are otherwise off-limits to foreign investors. The outcome is that an LLP which cannot get FDI can still get funds from NRI partners, treated as local funds, potentially giving it a competitive edge or needed capital infusion. As noted earlier, an LLP receiving NRI non-repat investment remains an “Indian” entity for downstream investment purposes as well, so it could even invest in other companies without being tagged as foreign-owned.

SCHEDULE IV Vs SCHEDULE IV (FIRM/PROPRIETARY CONCERNS)

There is also a provision (in Part B of Schedule IV) for investment in partnership firms or sole proprietorship concerns on a non-repatriation basis. There is no equivalent provision under repatriation routes – meaning NRIs cannot invest in a partnership or proprietorship on a repatriable basis at all under NDI rules. Under Schedule IV, an NRI/OCI can contribute capital to any proprietorship or partnership firm in India provided the firm is not engaged in agriculture, plantation, real estate business, or print media. These mirror the older provisions from prior regulations. The exclusion of print media here is interesting, as discussed: an NRI cannot invest in a newspaper partnership but could invest in a newspaper company. This is likely a policy decision to keep sensitive sectors like news media more closely regulated (partnerships are unregulated entities compared to companies which have shareholding disclosures, etc.).

For completeness, Schedule V under NDI Rules is for investment by other specific non-resident entities like Sovereign Wealth Funds in certain circumstances, and Schedule VII, VIII, IX cover foreign venture capital, investment vehicles, and depository receipts respectively.

PRACTICAL CHALLENGES AND LEGAL IMPLICATIONS

While the non-repatriation route offers flexibility, it also presents some practical challenges and considerations for legal practitioners advising clients:

  1.  Exit Strategy and Liquidity: Perhaps the biggest issue is planning how the NRI/OCI will exit or monetize the investment if needed. Since direct repatriation of capital is capped at USD 1 million per year, clients who invest large sums must understand that they can’t easily pull out their entire investment quickly. Case in point: if an OCI invests $5 million in a startup via Schedule IV and after a few years the startup is sold for $20 million, the OCI cannot take $20 million out in one go. They would either have to flip the investment to a repatriable mode before exit (e.g. sell their stake to a foreign investor prior to the main sale, thereby converting to FDI at fair value and then repatriating through that foreign investor’s sale) or accept a long repatriation timeline using the $1M per year route, or approach RBI (which historically is reluctant to approve a big one-shot remittance). This illiquidity needs to be clearly explained to clients
  2.  Mixing Repatriable and Non-Repatriable Funds: Often, companies have a mix of foreign investment – say, a venture capital fund (FDI) and an NRI relative (non-repat). In such cases, accounting properly for the two classes is key. From a corporate law perspective, both hold equity, but from an exchange control perspective, one part of equity is foreign, and one part is domestic. The company’s compliance team must carefully track these when reporting foreign investment percentages to any authority or while calculating downstream foreign investment. Misclassification can lead to errors – e.g., a company might erroneously count the NRI’s holding as part of FDI and think it breached a cap, or conversely ignore a foreign holding, thinking it was NRI domestic. It’s advisable in company records and even on share certificates to mark non-repatriable holdings distinctly. Some companies create separate folios in their register for clarity..
  3.  Corporate Governance and Control: Because Schedule IV allows NRIs to invest beyond usual foreign limits, we see scenarios of foreign control via NRI routes. For example, foreign parents could nominate OCI individuals to hold a majority in an Indian company so that it is “Indian owned” but effectively under foreign control through OCI proxies. Regulators are aware of this risk. The law currently hinges on “owned and controlled by NRIs / OCIs” as the test for deeming it domestic. If an OCI is truly acting at the behest of a non-OCI foreigner, that could be viewed as a circumvention. In diligence, one should ensure OCI investors are bona fide and making decisions independently, or at least within what law permits. If an Indian company with large NRI non-repat investment is making downstream investments in a sensitive sector, one must document that control remains with OCI and not via any agreement handing powers to someone else, lest the structure be challenged as a sham.
  4.  Changing Residential Status: An interesting practical point – if an NRI who made a non-repat investment later moves back to India and becomes a resident, their holding simply becomes a resident holding (no issue there). But if they then move abroad again and become NRI once more, by default, that holding would become an NRI holding on a non-repat basis (since it was never designated repatriable). That person might now wish it were repatriable. There isn’t a straightforward mechanism to “retroactively designate” an investment as repatriable; typically, the person would have to do a transfer (e.g., transfer to self through a structure, which is not really possible) or approach RBI. It’s a corner case, but it shows that once an investment is made under a particular schedule, toggling its status is not simple unless a third-party transfer is involved.
  5.  Evidence of Investment Route: Down the line, when an NRI / OCI wants to remit out the sale proceeds under the $1M facility, banks often ask for proof that the investment was made on a non-repatriation basis (because if it was repatriable, the sale proceeds would be in an NRE account and could go out without using the $1M quota). Thus, maintaining paperwork – such as the board resolution or offer letter mentioning the shares are under Schedule IV, or a copy of the share certificate with a “non-repatriable” stamp, or the letter to AD bank at the time of issue – becomes useful to avoid confusion. If records are lost or unclear, the bank might fear to allow remittance or might treat it as some foreign investment needing RBI permission. So, documentation is a practical must.
  6.  Taxation Aspect: Though not directly a FEMA issue, note that dividends repatriated to NRIs will be after TDS, and any gift of shares etc. might have tax implications (gift to a relative is not taxable in India, but to a non-relative, it could trigger tax for the recipient if over ₹50,000). Also, the favourable FEMA treatment doesn’t automatically confer any tax residency benefit – e.g., just because OCI investment is deemed domestic doesn’t make the OCI an Indian resident for tax

BEFORE WE ALL NEED A REPATRIATION ROUTE, LET’S WRAP THIS UP!

Before we exhaust ourselves—or our dear readers start considering their own non-repatriable exit strategies—let’s conclude. The non-repatriation route under FEMA is like a VIP pass for NRIs and OCIs to invest in India while enjoying the perks of domestic investors. It’s a fine balancing act by policymakers: welcoming diaspora investments with open arms but keeping foreign exchange reserves snugly in place.

For legal practitioners, Schedule IV is both a playground and a puzzle—offering creative structuring opportunities while demanding meticulous planning for exits and compliance. Done right, it’s a win-win for investors and Indian businesses alike, seamlessly blending “foreign” and “domestic” investment. So, whether you’re an NRI looking for investment options or a lawyer navigating these rules—remember, patience, planning, and a strong cup of chai go a long way!

Non-Repatriable Investment by NRIs and OCIs under FEMA: An Analysis – Part – 1

This is the 11th Article in the ongoing NRI series dealing with “Non-repatriable Investment by NRIs and OCIs under FEMA — An Analysis.”

Summary

“What cannot be done directly, cannot be done indirectly – Or can it be?”

FEMA’s golden rule has always been that what you cannot do directly, you cannot do indirectly—but then comes Schedule IV, sneaking in like that one friend who always finds a way out. It’s the ultimate legislative exception, allowing NRIs and OCIs to invest in India as if they never left, minus the luxury of an easy exit. Curious? Dive into the fascinating world of non-repatriable investments — you won’t be disappointed (unless, of course, you were hoping to take the money back out quickly!)

INTRODUCTION AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

Non-resident investors — including Non-Resident Indians (NRIs), Overseas Citizens of India (OCIs), and even foreign entities — can invest in India under the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 (FEMA). FEMA provides a broad statutory framework, which is supplemented by detailed rules and regulations issued by the government and the Reserve Bank of India (RBI). In particular, the Foreign Exchange Management (Non-Debt Instruments) Rules, 2019 (NDI Rules) (issued by the Central Government) and the Foreign Exchange Management (Mode of Payment and Reporting of Non-Debt Instruments) Regulations, 2019 (Reporting Regulations) (issued by RBI) lay down the regime for foreign investments in “non-debt instruments.” These are further elaborated in the RBI Master Direction on Foreign Investment in India, which consolidates the rules and is frequently consulted by practitioners.

Under this framework, foreign investment routes are categorised by schedules to the NDI Rules. Of particular interest are Schedule I (Foreign Direct Investment on a repatriation basis), Schedule III (NRI investments under the Portfolio Investment Scheme on a repatriation basis), Schedule IV (NRI / OCI investments on non-repatriation basis), and Schedule VI (Investment in Limited Liability Partnerships). This article focuses on the nuances of non-repatriable investments by NRIs / OCIs under Schedule IV, contrasting them with repatriable investments and other routes. We will examine the legal definitions, eligible instruments, sectoral restrictions, compliance obligations, and the practical implications of choosing the non-repatriation route, with a structured analysis suitable for legal professionals.

DEFINITION OF NRI AND OCI UNDER FEMA; ELIGIBILITY TO INVEST

Non-Resident Indian (NRI) – An NRI is defined in FEMA and the NDI Rules as an individual who is a person resident outside India and is a citizen of India. In essence, Indian citizens who reside abroad (for work, education, or otherwise) become NRIs under FEMA once they cease to be “person resident in India” as per Section 2(w) of FEMA. Notably, this definition excludes foreign citizens, even if they were formerly Indian citizens – such persons are not NRIs for FEMA purposes once they have given up Indian citizenship.

Overseas Citizen of India (OCI) – An OCI for FEMA purposes means an individual resident outside India who is registered as an OCI cardholder under Section 7A of the Citizenship Act, 1955. In practical terms, these are foreign citizens of Indian origin (or their spouses) who have obtained the OCI card. OCIs are a separate category of foreign investors recognized by FEMA, often extending the same investment facilities as NRIs. In summary, NRIs (Indian citizens abroad) and OCIs (foreign citizens of Indian origin) are both eligible to invest in India, subject to the FEMA rules.

Eligible Investors under the Non-Repatriation Route – Schedule IV specifically permits the following persons to invest on a non-repatriation basis):

  •  NRIs (individuals resident outside India who are Indian citizens);
  •  OCIs (individuals resident outside India holding OCI cards);
  •  Any overseas entity (company, trust, partnership firm) incorporated outside India which is owned and controlled by NRIs or OCIs.

This extension to entities owned / controlled by NRIs / OCIs means that even a foreign-incorporated company or trust, if predominantly NRI / OCI-owned, can use the NRI non-repatriation route. However, as discussed later, such entities do not enjoy certain repatriation facilities (like the USD 1 million asset remittance) that individual NRIs do. Moreover, it is important to note that while these NRI / OCI-owned foreign entities are eligible for Schedule IV investments, they cannot invest in an Indian partnership firm or sole proprietorship under this route — only individual NRIs / OCIs can do so in that case.

NRIs and OCIs have broadly two modes to invest in India: (a) on a repatriation basis (where eventual returns can be taken abroad freely), or (b) on a non-repatriation basis (where the investment is treated as a domestic investment and cannot be freely taken out of India). Both modes are legal, but they carry different conditions and implications, as explained below.

WHAT ARE NON-DEBT INSTRUMENTS? – PERMISSIBLE INVESTMENT INSTRUMENTS

Under FEMA, all permissible foreign investments are classified as either debt instruments or non-debt instruments. Our focus is on non-debt instruments, which essentially cover equity and equity-like investments. The NDI Rules define “non-debt instruments” expansively to include:

Equity instruments of Indian companies – e.g. equity shares, fully and mandatorily convertible debentures, fully and mandatorily convertible preference shares, and share warrants. (These are often referred to simply as “FDI” instruments.)

Capital participation in LLPs (contributions to the capital of Limited Liability Partnerships).

All instruments of investment recognized in the FDI policy, as notified by the Government from time to time (a catch-all for any other equity-like instruments).

Units of Alternative Investment Funds (AIFs), Real Estate Investment Trusts (REITs), and Infrastructure Investment Trusts (InvITs).

Units of mutual funds or Exchange-Traded Funds (ETFs) that invest more than 50 per cent in equity (i.e. equity-oriented funds).

• The junior-most (equity) tranche of a securitization structure.

• Immovable property in India (acquisition, sale, dealing directly in land and real estate, subject to other regulations).

Contributions to trusts (depending on the nature of the trust, e.g. venture capital trusts, etc.).

Depository receipts issued against Indian equity instruments (like ADRs / GDRs).

All the above are considered non-debt instruments. Thus, when an NRI or OCI invests on a non-repatriation basis, it can be in any of these forms. In practice, the most common instruments for NRI / OCI non-repatriable investment are equity shares of companies, capital contributions in LLPs, units of equity-oriented mutual funds, and investment vehicles like AIFs / REITs.

It is important to note that debt instruments (such as NCDs, bonds, and government securities) are governed by a separate set of rules (the Foreign Exchange Management (Debt Instruments) Regulations) and generally fall outside the scope of Schedule IV. NRIs / OCIs can also invest in some debt instruments (for example, NRI investments in certain government securities on a non-repatriation basis are permitted up to a limit, but those are subject to different rules and are not the focus of this article.

REPATRIABLE VS. NON-REPATRIABLE INVESTMENTS: MEANING AND LEGAL DISTINCTION

Repatriable Investment means an investment in India made by a person resident outside India which is eligible to be repatriated out of India, i.e. the investor can bring back the sale proceeds or returns to their home country freely (net of applicable taxes) in foreign currency. In other words, both the dividends/interest (current income) and the capital gains or sale proceeds (capital account) are transferable abroad in a repatriable investment without any ceiling (subject to taxes). Most foreign direct investments (FDI) in India are on a repatriation basis, which is why repatriable NRI investments are treated as foreign investments and counted towards foreign investment caps. For instance, if an NRI invests in an Indian company under Schedule I (FDI route) or Schedule III (portfolio route) on a repatriable basis, it is counted as foreign investment (FDI / FPI), with all attendant rules.

Non-Repatriable Investment means the investment is made by a non-resident, but the sale or maturity proceeds cannot be taken out of India (except to the limited extent allowed). The NDI Rules define it implicitly by saying, “investment on a non-repatriation basis has to be construed accordingly” from the repatriation definition. In simple terms, this means the principal amount invested and any capital gains or sale proceeds must remain in India. The investor cannot freely convert those rupee proceeds into foreign currency and remit abroad. Such investments are essentially treated as domestic investments –— the NDI Rules explicitly deem any investment by an NRI / OCI on a non-repatriation basis to be domestic investment, on par with investments made by residents. This distinction has crucial legal effects: NRI/OCI non-repatriable investments are not counted as foreign investments for regulatory purposes. They do not come under FDI caps or sectoral limits (since they are treated like resident equity). This was confirmed by India’s DPIIT (Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade) in a clarification that downstream investments by a company owned and controlled by NRIs on a non-repatriation basis will not be considered indirect FDI. Effectively, non-repatriable NRI / OCI investments enjoy the flexibility of domestic capital but with the sacrifice of free repatriation rights.

Advantages of Non-Repatriation Route: The non-repatriable route (Schedule IV) offers NRIs and OCIs significant advantages in terms of flexibility and compliance:

  •  No Foreign Investment Caps: Since it is treated as domestic investment, an NRI/OCI can invest without the usual foreign ownership limits. For example, under the portfolio investment route, NRIs cannot exceed 5 per cent in a listed company (10 per cent collectively), but under non-repatriation, there is no such limit — an NRI could potentially acquire a much larger stake in a listed company under Schedule IV (outside the exchange) without breaching FEMA limits. Similarly, total NRI / OCI investment can go beyond 10/24 per cent aggregate because Schedule IV holdings are not counted as foreign at all.
  •  Simplified Compliance: Many of the onerous requirements applicable to FDI – e.g. adherence to pricing guidelines, filing of RBI reports, sectoral conditionalities, mandatory approvals — are relaxed or not applicable for non-repatriable investments (since regulators treat it like a resident’s investment). We detail these compliance relaxations below.
  •  Current income can be freely repatriable: Current income arising from such investments like interest, rent, dividend, etc., is freely repatriable without any limits and is not counted in the $1mn threshold.
  •  Deemed Domestic for Downstream: As noted, if an NRI/OCI-owned Indian entity invests further in India, those downstream investments are not treated as FDI. This can allow greater expansion without triggering indirect foreign investment rules.

Drawbacks of the Non-Repatriation Route: The obvious trade-off is illiquidity from an exchange control perspective. The investor’s capital is locked in India. Specifically:

  •  Inability to Repatriate Capital Freely: The principal amount and any capital gains cannot be freely
    converted and sent abroad. The investor must either reinvest or keep the funds in India (in an NRO account) after exit, subject to a limited annual remittance (discussed later).
  •  Perpetual Rupee Exposure: Since eventual proceeds remain in INR, the investor bears currency risk on the investment indefinitely, which foreign investors might be unwilling to take for large amounts.
  •  Exit Requires Domestic Buyer or Special Approval: To actually get money out, the NRI / OCI may need to convert the investment to repatriable by selling it to an eligible foreign investor or seek RBI permission beyond the allowed limit. This adds a layer of uncertainty for the exit strategy.
  •  Not Suitable for Short-Term Investors: This route is generally suitable for long-term investments (often family investments in family-run businesses, real estate purchases, etc.) where the NRI is not looking to repatriate in the near term. It is less suitable for foreign venture capital or private equity, which typically demand an assured exit path.

INVESTMENT UNDER SCHEDULE IV: PERMITTED INSTRUMENTS AND SECTORAL CONDITIONS

What Schedule IV Allows: Schedule IV of the NDI Rules (titled “Investment by NRI or OCI on the non-repatriation basis”) lays out the scope of investments NRIs / OCIs can make on a non-repatriable basis. In summary, NRIs/OCIs (including their overseas entities) can, without any limit, invest in or purchase the following on a non-repatriation basis:

  •  Equity instruments of Indian companies – listed or unlisted shares, convertible debentures, convertible preference shares, share warrants – without any limit, whether on a stock exchange or off-market.
  •  Units of investment vehicles – units of AIFs, REITs, InvITs or other investment funds — without limit, listed or unlisted.
  •  Contributions to the capital of LLPs – again, without limit, in any LLP (subject to sectoral restrictions discussed below).
  •  Convertible notes of startups – NRIs / OCIs can also subscribe to convertible notes issued by Indian startups, as allowed under the rules, on a non-repatriation basis.

Additionally, Schedule IV explicitly provides that any investment made under this route is deemed to be a domestic investment (i.e. treated at par with resident investments). This means the general FDI conditions of Schedule I do not apply to Schedule IV investments unless specifically mentioned.

Sectoral Restrictions – Prohibited Sectors: Despite the broad freedom, Schedule IV carves out certain prohibited sectors where even NRI / OCI non-repatriable investments are NOT permitted. According to Para 3 of Schedule, an NRI or OCI (including their companies or trusts) shall not invest under non-repatriation in:

  •  Nidhi Company (a type of NBFC doing mutual benefit funds among members);
  •  Companies engaged in agricultural or plantation activities (this covers farming, plantations of tea, coffee, etc., and related agricultural operations);
  •  Real estate business or construction of farmhouses;
  •  Dealing in Transfer of Development Rights (TDRs).

These mirror some of the standard FDI prohibitions, with a key addition: agricultural / plantation is completely off-limits under Schedule IV (whereas under FDI policy, certain agricultural and plantation activities are permitted up to 100 per cent with conditions). The term “real estate business” is defined (by reference to Schedule I) to mean dealing in land and immovable property with a view to earning profit from them (buying and selling land/buildings). Notably, the development of townships, construction of residential or commercial premises, roads or infrastructure, etc., is specifically excluded from the definition of “real estate business”, as is earning rent from property without transfer. So, an NRI / OCI can invest in a construction or development project or purchase property for earning rent on a non-repatriation basis (since that is not considered a “real estate business” for FEMA purposes) but cannot invest in a pure real estate trading company.

Implication – Some Sectors Allowed on Non-Repatriation that are Prohibited for FDI, and vice versa: Because Schedule IV’s prohibited list is somewhat different from Schedule I (FDI) prohibited list, there are interesting differences:

  •  Additional Sectors Open under Schedule IV: Certain sectors like lottery, gambling, casinos, tobacco manufacturing, etc., which are prohibited for any FDI under Schedule I, are not mentioned in Schedule IV’s prohibition list. This may imply that an NRI / OCI could invest in such businesses on a non-repatriation basis. For example, a casino business in India cannot receive any FDI (foreign investor money on a repatriable basis), but it could receive NRI/OCI investment as a domestic investment under Schedule IV. However, such investments may be subject to provisions or prohibitions in various other laws and Statewise restrictions in India, and therefore, one must be careful in making such investments.
  •  From a policy perspective, this leverages the idea that an Indian citizen abroad is still treated akin to a resident for these purposes. Thus, apart from the specific exclusions in Schedule IV, all other sectors (even those barred to foreign investors) are permissible for NRIs / OCIs on non-repatriation. This provides NRIs/OCIs a unique opportunity to invest in sensitive sectors of the economy, which foreigners cannot, theoretically increasing the investment funnel for those sectors via the Indian diaspora.
  •  Conversely, Some Investments Allowed via FDI Are Barred in Non-Repatriation: There are cases where FDI rules are more liberal than the NRI non-repatriable route. A prime example is plantation and agriculture. Under FDI (Schedule I), certain plantation sectors (like tea, coffee, rubber, cardamom, etc.) are allowed 100 per cent foreign investment under the automatic route (with conditions such as mandatory divestment of a certain percentage within time for tea). However, Schedule IV flatly prohibits NRIs from investing in agriculture or plantation without exception. Thus, a foreign company could invest in a tea plantation company on a repatriable basis (counting as FDI), but an NRI cannot invest in the same on a non-repatriable basis, ironically. Another example: Print media — FDI in print media (newspapers / periodicals) is restricted to 26 per cent with Government approval under FDI policy. If an Indian company is in the print media business, an NRI / OCI could still invest on a non-repatriable basis (since Schedule IV’s company restrictions don’t list print media) — meaning potentially up to 100% as domestic investment. However, if the print media business is structured as a partnership firm or proprietorship, Schedule IV (Part B) prohibits NRI investment in it. We see a regulatory quirk: an NRI can invest in a print media company on non-repatriation (domestic equity, no specific cap) but not in a print media partnership firm. These inconsistencies require careful attention when structuring investments.

In summary, NRIs / OCIs have a broader canvas in some respects under Schedule IV, but must be mindful of the specifically forbidden areas. As a rule of thumb, apart from Nidhi, plantation / agriculture, real estate trading, and farmhouses / TDRs, most other activities are allowed. NRIs have leveraged this to invest in real estate development projects, infrastructure, and even sectors like multi-brand retail by ensuring their investments are non-repatriable (thus not triggering the foreign investment prohibitions or caps). On the other hand, they cannot use this route for farming or plantation businesses even if foreign investors could via FDI.

Special Case – Investment by NRIs / OCIs in Border-Sharing Countries: In April 2020, India introduced a rule (now embodied in NDI Rules) that any investment from an entity or citizen of a country that shares a land border with India (e.g. China, Pakistan, Bangladesh, etc.) requires prior Government approval, regardless of sector. This was to curb opportunistic takeovers. This rule applies to NRIs / OCIs as well if they are residents of those countries. However, notably, that restriction is relevant only for investments on a repatriation basis. If an NRI / OCI residing in, say, China or Bangladesh wants to invest under the non-repatriation route, Schedule IV does not impose the same approval requirement. In effect, an NRI/OCI in a neighbouring country can still invest in India as a de facto domestic investor under Schedule IV without going through government approval, whereas the same person investing under a repatriable route would face a clearance hurdle. This exception again underscores the policy view of NRI non-repatriable funds as akin to Indian funds. Whilst permissible, in view of authors, considering the geo-political climate, care and caution need to be exercised. Loophole or policy openness may not be the final answer, as national interest always comes first.

PRICING GUIDELINES AND VALUATION — ARE THEY APPLICABLE?

One significant compliance relief for non-repatriable investments is in pricing regulations. Under FEMA, when foreign investors invest in or exit from Indian companies on a repatriation basis, there are strict pricing guidelines to ensure shares are not issued at an unduly low price or purchased at an unduly high price (to prevent outflow/inflow of value unfairly). For instance, the issue of shares to a foreign investor must typically be at or above fair market value (as per internationally accepted pricing methodology), and transfer from resident to foreign investor cannot be at less than fair value, etc. These pricing restrictions do not apply to investments under Schedule IV. Since Schedule IV investments are treated as domestic, the law does not mandate adherence to the pricing formulae of Schedule I.

Practical effect: Indian companies can issue shares to NRIs / OCIs on a non-repatriation basis at face value or book value or any concessional price they choose, even if that is below the fair market value, without contravening FEMA. Similarly, NRIs/OCIs could potentially buy shares from resident holders at a negotiated price without being bound by the ceiling that would apply if the NRI were a foreign investor on a repatriation basis. This flexibility is often useful in family arrangements or preferential allotments where prices may be deliberately kept low for the NRI (which would otherwise trigger questions under FDI norms). For example, an Indian family-owned company can allot shares to an NRI family member at par value under Schedule IV, even if the fair value is much higher — a practice not allowed if the NRI were taking them on a repatriable basis. The only caution is that the Income Tax Act’s fair value rules (for deemed income on undervalued transactions) might still apply, but from a FEMA standpoint, it’s permissible.

To illustrate, the RBI Master Directions explicitly note that pricing guidelines are not applicable for investments by persons resident outside India on a non-repatriation basis, as those are treated as domestic investments. Thus, NRIs / OCIs have an advantage in valuation flexibility under Schedule IV.

REPORTING AND COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

Another area of divergence is in regulatory reporting. Normally, any foreign investment coming into an Indian company must be reported to RBI (through its authorised bank) via forms on the FIRMS portal (previously Form FC-GPR for new issues, Form FC-TRS for transfers, etc.). However, investments by NRIs / OCIs on a non-repatriation basis do not require filing the typical foreign investment reports like FC-GPR. The rationale is that since these are not counted as foreign investments, the RBI does not need to capture them in its foreign investment data.

Indeed, no RBI reporting is prescribed for a fresh issue / allotment of shares under Schedule IV. An NRI/OCI investing on a non-repatriable basis can be allotted shares without the company filing any form to RBI (By contrast, if the same shares were issued under FDI, a Form SMF/FC-GPR would be required within 30 days.) That said, it is a best practice for the investee company or the NRI to intimate the AD bank in a letter about the receipt of funds and the fact that the shares are issued on a non-repatriation basis. This helps create a record, so that if in future any question arises, the bank/RBI is aware those shares were categorized as non-repatriable from the start.

One exception to the no-reporting rule is when there is a transfer of such shares to a person on a repatriation basis. If an NRI/OCI holding shares on a non-repatriable basis sells or gifts them to a foreign investor or NRI on a repatriable basis, that transaction does trigger reporting (Form FC-TRS) because now those shares are becoming foreign investments. The responsibility for filing the FC-TRS lies on the resident transferor or transferee, as applicable. We will discuss transfers shortly, but in summary: no reporting when NRIs invest non-repatriable initially, but reporting is required when the character of investment changes to repatriable via a transfer.

It’s important to maintain proper records in the company’s books classifying NRI / OCI holdings as non-repatriable. Practitioners note that if a company mistakenly records an NRI’s holding as repatriable FDI and files forms or treats it as a foreign holding in compliance reports, it could lead to regulatory confusion or even penalties. For instance, it might appear the company exceeded an FDI cap when, in reality, the NRI portion should have been excluded. Therefore, both the investor and investee company should internally document the nature of the investment (e.g. through a board resolution noting the shares are issued under Schedule IV, non-repatriation).

In summary, compliance for Schedule IV investments is lighter: no entry-level RBI approvals (it’s an automatic route in all cases), no pricing certification, and no routine filing for allotments. Contrast that with Schedule I investments, where one must comply with valuation norms and file forms within the prescribed time. This ease of doing business is a key attraction of the non-repatriable route for many NRIs.

Mode of Payment and Repatriation of Proceeds

Funding the Investment: An NRI/OCI investing on a non-repatriation basis can fund the investment through any of the standard channels for NRI investments. Permissible modes include:

  •  Inward remittance from abroad through normal banking channels (i.e. sending foreign currency, which is converted to INR for investment).
  •  Payment out of an NRE or FCNR account maintained in India (these are rupee or foreign currency accounts which are repatriable).
  •  Payment out of an NRO account in India (Non-Resident Ordinary account, which holds the NRI’s funds from local sources in INR).

Use of an NRO account is notable — since NRO balances are non-repatriable (beyond the USD 1 million a year), routing payment from NRO naturally aligns with the non-repatriable nature of the investment. But even if funds came from an NRE/FCNR (which are repatriable accounts), once invested under Schedule IV, the money loses its repatriable character for the principal and becomes subject to Schedule IV restrictions.

Credit of Sale / Disinvestment Proceeds: When an NRI / OCI eventually sells the investment or the Indian company liquidates, the sale proceeds must be credited only to the NRO account of the investor. This rule is crucial — it ensures the money remains in the non-resident’s ordinary rupee account (NRO), which is not freely repatriable. Even if the original investment was paid from an NRE account, the exit money cannot go back to NRE; it has to go to an NRO (or a fresh NRO if the investor doesn’t have one). Once in NRO, those funds are under Indian jurisdiction with limited outflow rights.

Repatriation of Proceeds — The USD 1 Million Facility: FEMA does provide a limited facility for NRIs / OCIs to remit out funds from their NRO accounts/sale proceeds under the Remittance of Assets Regulations, 2016. A Non-Resident Indian or PIO is allowed to remit up to USD 1,000,000 (One Million USD) per financial year abroad from an NRO account or from the sale proceeds of assets in India, including capital gain. This is a general limit for all assets combined per person per year. This means an NRI who sold shares that were on a non-repatriable basis can utilise this route to gradually repatriate the money, up to $ 1M (USD One Million) annually. Notably, this facility is only available to individuals (NRIs / PIOs) and not to companies or other entities. So, if an NRI made a large investment and eventually exited, they could take out $1M each year (approximately ₹8.75 crore at current rates) from India. Any amount beyond that in a year would require special RBI approval.

In practice, RBI approval for exceeding the USD 1M cap is rarely granted except in exceptional hardship cases. RBI typically expects the NRI to stagger the remittances within the allowed limit across years. Therefore, investors should plan accordingly if the sums are large – it could take multiple years to fully repatriate the corpus unless they find some other mechanism (like transferring the shares to a repatriable route investor before sale, etc.). It has been observed that RBI is generally not inclined to allow one-time large remittances beyond the automatic limit, emphasizing that the non-repatriable route is meant for money that essentially stays in India with only a slow trickle out.

No $1M facility for foreign entities: As mentioned, if the investor was not an individual but an overseas company or trust owned by NRIs / OCIs, that entity does not qualify as an NRI or PIO under the Remittance of Assets rules. Thus, it cannot directly avail of the $1M automatic repatriation. Such entities would have to apply to RBI for any repatriation, which is uncertain. This is why advisors often recommend that if repatriation might eventually be desired, the investment should be structured in the individual NRI’s name (or at least eventually transferred to the individual NRI before exit). By keeping the investor as a natural person, the exit flexibility using the $1M per year route remains available.

Repatriation of Current Income: Importantly, current income (yield) from the investment is freely repatriable even if the investment itself is non-repatriable. FEMA distinguishes between repatriation of capital versus repatriation of current income such as dividends, interest, or rent. As a general rule, any dividend or interest earned in India by an NRI can be remitted abroad after paying due taxes, irrespective of whether the underlying investment was on a non-repatriation basis. RBI Master Circular confirms that authorised dealers may allow remittance of current income (like dividends, pension, interest, rent) from NRO accounts, subject to CA certification of taxes paid. This means an NRI who invested in shares under Schedule IV can still have the company declare dividends, and the NRI can get those dividends out of India without dipping into the $1M capital remittance limit. Likewise, interest on any NRO deposits of the sale proceeds is repatriable as current income. This provision is a relief because it allows NRIs/OCIs to enjoy returns on their investment globally, even though the principal stays locked.

To summarize, the inflow of funds for non-repatriable investments is flexible (NRE/FCNR/NRO all allowed), but the outflow of funds is tightly controlled. NRIs should channel the exit money into NRO and then plan systematic remittances of up to $1M a year unless they intend to reuse the funds in India. Many simply reinvest in India, treating it as part of their India portfolio.

“And That’s a Wrap… for Now!”

Congratulations! If you’ve made it this far, you’re officially a FEMA warrior—armed with the wisdom of Schedule IV and the art of non-repatriable investments. We’ve explored how NRIs and OCIs can invest in India like residents and enjoy the flexibility that even FDI can’t offer. But wait—what happens when it’s time to exit? Can you sell, transfer, or gift these investments? Will FEMA let you walk away freely, or will it make you fill out just one more RBI form?

All this (and more!) is in Part 2, where we unlock the secrets of transfers, repatriation limits, downstream investments, and compliance puzzles. Stay tuned—because just like FEMA regulations, this story isn’t over yet!

Investment by Non-Resident Individuals in Indian Non-Debt Securities – Permissibility under FEMA, Taxation and Repatriation Issues

EDITOR’S NOTE ON NRI SERIES:

This is the 10th article in the ongoing NRI Series dealing with “Investment in Non-Debt Securities – Permissibility under FEMA. Taxation and Repatriation Issues”. This article attempts to cover an overview of investments in non-debt securities that can be made by an NRI / OCI under repatriation and non-repatriation route, the nuances thereof, and issues relating to repatriation. It also covers the tax implications related to income arising out of investment in Indian non-debt securities and the issues relating to repatriation of insurance proceeds, profits from Limited Liability Partnership (“LLP”), and formation of trust by Indian residents for the benefit of NRIs / OCIs.

Readers may refer to earlier issues of BCAJ covering various aspects of this Series: (1) NRI – Interplay of Tax and FEMA Issues – Residence of Individuals under the Income-tax Act – December 2023; (2) Residential Status of Individuals – Interplay with Tax Treaty – January 2024; (3) Decoding Residential Status under FEMA – March 2023; (4) Immovable Property Transactions: Direct Tax and FEMA issues for NRIs – April 2024; (5) Emigrating Residents and Returning NRIs Part I – June 2024; (6) Emigrating Residents and Returning NRIs Part II – August 2024; (7) Bank Accounts and Repatriation Facilities for Non-Residents – October 2024; (8) Gifts and Loans – By and To Non Resident Indians Part I – November 2024; and (9) Gifts and Loans – By and To Non Resident Part -II – December 2024.

1. INTRODUCTION

A person resident outside India may hold investment in shares or securities of an Indian entity either as Foreign Direct Investment (“FDI”) or as a Foreign Portfolio Investor (“FPI”). While NRIs can make portfolio investments in permitted listed securities in India through a custodian, one of the important routes by which a Non-resident individual can invest is through the FDI Route. Individuals can invest directly or through an overseas entity under this route.

Since 1991, India has been increasingly open to FDI, bringing about time-to-time relaxations in several key economic sectors. FDI has been a major non-debt financial resource for India’s economic development. India has been an attractive destination for foreign investors because of its vast market and burgeoning economy. However, investing in shares and securities in India requires a clear understanding of the regulatory framework, particularly the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 (“FEMA”) regulations. This article highlights the income tax implications and regulatory framework governing FDI in shares and securities in India and repatriation issues.


#Acknowledging contribution of CA Mohan Chandwani and CA Vimal Bhayal for supporting in the research.
#Investment in debt securities and sector specific conditionality are covered under separate articles of the series.

2. REGULATORY ASPECTS OF NON-RESIDENTS INVESTING IN INDIA

FDI is the investment by persons resident outside India in an Indian company (i.e., in an unlisted company or in 10 per cent or more of the post-issue paid-up equity capital on a fully diluted basis of a listed Indian company) or in an Indian LLP. Investments in Indian companies by non-resident entities and individuals are governed by the terms of the Foreign Exchange Management (Non-Debt Instruments) Rules, 2019 (“NDI Rules”). With the introduction of NDI Rules, the power to regulate equity investments in India has now been transferred to the Ministry of Finance from the central bank, i.e., the Reserve Bank of India (“RBI”). However, the power to regulate the modes of payment and monitor the reporting for these transactions continues to be with RBI. Investments in Indian non-debt securities can be made either under repatriation mode or non-repatriation mode. It is discussed in detail in the ensuing paragraph. Securities which are required to be held in s dematerialised form are held in the NRE demat account if they are invested/acquired under repatriable mode and are held in the NRO demat account if they are invested/acquired in a non-repatriable mode.

3.INVESTMENT IN NON-DEBT SECURITIES, REPATRIATION AVENUES AND ISSUES

3.1. Indian investments through repatriation route

Schedule 1 of NDI Rules permits any non-resident investor, including an NRI / OCI, to invest in the capital instruments of Indian companies on a repatriation basis, subject to the sectoral cap and certain terms and conditions as prescribed under Schedule 1. Such capital instruments include equity shares, fully convertible and mandatorily convertible debentures, fully convertible and mandatorily convertible preference shares of an Indian company, etc. Further, there will be reporting compliances as prescribed by the RBI by Indian investee entities, by resident buyers/sellers in case of transfer of shares and securities, and by non-residents in some cases, such as the sale of shares on the stock market. A non-resident investor who has made investments in India on a repatriable basis can remit full sale proceeds abroad without any limit. The current income, like dividends, remains freely repatriable under this route.

Essential to note that if a non-resident investor who has invested on a repatriation basis returns to India and becomes a resident, the resultant situation is that a “person resident in India” is holding an Indian investment. Consequently, the repatriable character of such investment is lost. As such, all investments held by a non-resident on a repatriable basis become non-repatriable from the day such non-resident qualifies as a “person resident in India”; and the regulations applicable to residents with respect to remittance of such funds abroad shall apply. When a non-resident holding an investment in an Indian entity on a repatriable basis qualifies as a “person resident in India”, he should intimate it to the Indian investee entity, and the entity should record the shareholding of such person as domestic investment and not foreign investment. Subsequently, the Indian investee entity needs to get the Entity Master File (EMF) updated for changes in the residential status of its investors through the AD bank.

If the investment by a non-resident in Indian shares or securities is made on a repatriable basis, albeit not directly but through a foreign entity, any subsequent change in the residential status of such person should not have any impact or reporting requirement on the resultant structure. In this case, an Indian resident now owns a foreign entity which has invested in India on a repatriable basis. Consequently, such investment shall continue to be held on a repatriable basis and dividend and sale proceeds thereon can be freely repatriated outside India by such foreign entity without any limit. Had the NRI or OCI directly held Indian shares and subsequently become resident, the repatriable character would have been lost, as highlighted above.

3.2. Indian investments through non-repatriation route

NRIs / OCIs are permitted to invest in India on a non-repatriable basis as per Schedule IV of NDI Rules (subject to prohibitions and conditions under Schedule IV). Such investment is treated on par with domestic investments, and as such, no reporting requirements are applicable. Essential to note that Schedule IV restricts its applicability specifically only to NRIs and OCI cardholders (referred to as OCIs hereon). Also, the definition of NRI and OCI, as provided under NDI Rules, does not include a ‘person of Indian origin’ (“PIO”) unless such person holds an OCI Card. As such, it may be considered that a PIO should not be eligible to invest in Indian shares or securities on a non-repatriable basis as per Schedule IV unless such a person is an OCI Cardholder. Permissible investment for NRIs / OCIs under Schedule IV includes investments in equity instruments, units of an investment vehicle, capital of LLP, convertible notes issued by a startup, and capital contribution in a firm or proprietary concern.

In case such NRIs / OCIs relocate to India and qualify as “person resident in India,” there is no change in the character of holding their investment. This is because such investment was always treated at par with domestic investment without any reporting requirement. Additionally, there is no requirement even for an Indian investee entity regarding the change in the residential status of such shareholders if the investment is on a non-repatriation basis. However, under the Companies Act 2013, the Indian company has to disclose various categories of investors in its annual return in Form MGT, including NRIs. It does not matter whether holding is repatriable or non-repatriable. Hence, for this purpose, the Indian company should change its record appropriately.

Typically, the Indian investee entity should collate the details of the residential status of the person along with a declaration from such investor that the investment is made on a non-repatriable basis. It is mandatory that a formal record is kept even by the Indian investee entity where an NRI / OCI, holding shares on a non-repatriable basis, transfers it by way of gift to another NRI / OCI, who shall hold it on a non-repatriable basis. In such cases, a simple declaration by the transferee to the Indian investee entity may suffice, providing that the shares have been gifted to another NRI / OCI, and such transferee shall hold investment on a non-repatriable basis.

Investment under the non-repatriation route at times is less cumbersome, not only for an NRI / OCI investor, but also for the Indian investee entity as well, considering it saves a great amount of time and effort as there is no reporting compliances, no need for valuation, etc. This route has also benefited the Indian economy, as the NRIs / OCIs have been using the monies in their Indian bank accounts to invest in Indian assets (equity instruments, debt instruments, real estate, mutual funds, etc.) instead of repatriating them out of India. Such investments on a non-repatriable basis are typically made via NRO accounts by NRIs and OCIs. RBI has introduced the USD Million scheme under which proceeds of such non-repatriable investments can be remitted outside India per financial year. The prescribed limit of USD 1 Million per financial year per NRI / OCI is not allowed to be exceeded. In case a higher amount is required to be remitted, approval shall be required from RBI. Basis practical experience, such approvals are given in very few / rare cases by RBI based on facts. However, any remittance of dividend and interest income from shares and securities credited to the NRO account will be freely allowed to be repatriated, being regarded as current income, and shall not be subject to the aforesaid USD 1 Million limit.

The repatriation by NRI / OCI from the NRO account to their NRE / foreign bank account does not contain any income element and, accordingly, should not be chargeable to tax in India. Thus, there should not be any requirement for filing both Form 15CA and Form 15CB. However, certain Authorised Dealer banks insist on furnishing Form 15CA along with Form 15CB along with a certificate from a Chartered Accountant in relation to the source of funds from which remittance is sought to be made. In such case, time and effort would be incurred for reporting in both Form 15CA and Form 15CB, along with attestation from a Chartered Accountant who would analyse the source of funds for issuing the requisite certificate.

It is essential to note that any gift of shares or securities of an Indian company by an NRI / OCI, who invested under schedule IV on a non-repatriation basis, to a person resident outside India, who shall hold such securities on a repatriation basis, shall require prior RBI approval. On the other hand, if the transferee non-resident continues to hold such securities on a non-repatriation basis (instead of holding it on a repatriation basis), no such approval shall be required.

Schedule IV also permits any foreign entity owned and controlled by NRI / OCI to invest in Indian shares/securities on a non-repatriation basis. In such a case, sale proceeds from the sale of securities of the investee Indian company shall be credited to the NRO account of such foreign entity in India. However, any further repatriation from the NRO account by such foreign entity shall require prior RBI approval since the USD 1 Million scheme is restricted to only non-resident individuals (NRIs / OCIs / PIOs) and not their entities.

3.3. Repatriation of Insurance Proceeds

While the compliances/permissibility to avail various types of insurance policies in and outside India by resident/non-resident individuals is the subject matter of guidelines as per Foreign Exchange Management (Insurance) Regulations, 2015, we have summarised below brief aspects of repatriation of insurance maturity proceeds by a non-resident individual.

The basic rule for settlement of claims on rupee life insurance policies in favour of claimants who is a person resident outside India is that payments in foreign currency will be permitted only in proportion to which the amount of premium has been paid in foreign currency in relation to the total premium payable.
Claims/maturity proceeds/ surrender value in respect of rupee life insurance policies issued to Indian residents outside India for which premiums have been collected on a non-repatriable basis through the NRO account to be paid only by credit to the NRO account. This would also apply in cases of death claims being settled in favour of residents outside India assignees/ nominees.

“Remittance of asset” as per Foreign Exchange Management (Remittance of Assets) Regulations, 2016, inter-alia includes an amount of claim or maturity proceeds of an insurance policy. As per the said regulation, an NRI, OCI, or PIO may remit such proceeds from the NRO account under USD 1 Million scheme. As such, proceeds of such insurance will have to be primarily credited to the NRO account.

Residents outside India who are beneficiaries of insurance claims / maturity / surrender value settled in foreign currency may be permitted to credit the same to the NRE/FCNR account, if they so desire.

Claims/maturity proceeds/ surrender value in respect of rupee policies issued to foreign nationals not permanently resident in India may be paid in rupees or may be allowed to be remitted abroad, if the claimant so desires.

3.4.Repatriation from LLP by non-resident partners

Non-residents are permitted to contribute from their NRE or foreign bank accounts to the capital of an Indian LLP, operating in sectors or activities where foreign investment up to 100 per cent is permitted under the automatic route, and there are no FDI-linked performance conditions.

The share of profits from LLP is tax-free in the hands of its partners in India. Further, such repatriation should typically constitute current income (and hence current account receipts) under FEMA and regulations thereunder. Recently, some Authorised Dealer (AD) banks in India have raised apprehension and have insisted on assessing the nature of underlying profits of Indian LLP to evaluate whether the same comprises current income (interest, dividend, etc.), business income, or capital account transactions (sale proceeds of shares, securities, immovable property, etc).

In relation to the evaluation of the nature of LLP profits, AD banks have been insisting i furnishing a CA certificate outlining the break-up of such LLP profits, which has to be repatriated to non-resident partners. Where the entire LLP profits comprise current income, it has been permitted to be fully repatriated to foreign bank accounts of non-resident partners. In case such LLP profits comprise of capital account transactions such as profits on the sale of shares, immovable property, etc., some AD banks have practically considered a position to allow such profits to be credited only to the NRO account of non-resident partners. The subsequent repatriation of such profits from the NRO account is permissible up to USD 1 million per financial year, as discussed above. Certain AD banks emphasise that any such share of profit received by a non-resident as a partner of Indian LLPs should be classified as a capital account transaction only and subject to a USD 1 million repatriation limit.

It is essential to note that since dividends are in the nature of current income, there are no restrictions per se for its repatriation from an Indian company to non-resident shareholders, irrespective of whether such dividend income comprises capital transactions such as the sale of shares, immovable property, etc. In such a case, where an Indian company has been converted to LLP, any potential repatriation of profit share from such LLPs will have different treatment from AD banks vis-à-vis company structure. Consequently, though both dividends from the Indian company and the distribution of the share of profits from LLP are essentially the distribution of profits, with respect to repatriation permissibility, they are treated differently. This may lead to discouraging LLPs as preferable holding cum operating vehicles for non-residents.

It may be possible that the aforesaid position was taken by some AD banks to check abuse by NRIs, as has been reported recently in news articles. Thus, the interpretation of repatriation of profit share of LLPs varies from one AD bank to another, thereby indicating that there may not be any fundamental thought process in the absence of regulation for such repatriation or some internal objection / communication from RBI with respect to share of profits from LLP as a holding structure. However, NRI / OCI investors should note the cardinal principle of “What cannot be done directly, cannot be done indirectly.” Thus, capital account transactions should not be abused by converting them into current account transactions, such as profits whereby they can be freely repatriated without any limit.

3.5. Repatriation from Indian Trusts to Non-resident Beneficiaries

Traditionally, trusts were created for the benefit of family members residing solely in India. However, with globalisation, several family members now relocate overseas, pursuant to which compliance with NDI rules between trusts and such non-resident family members as beneficiaries can become a complex web.

Setting up of family trust with non-resident beneficiaries has been the subject matter of debate, specifically in relation to the appointment of non-resident beneficiaries, settlement of money and assets in trust, subsequent distribution, and repatriation from trusts to non-resident beneficiaries. There are no express provisions under FEMA permitting or restricting transactions related to private family trusts involving non-resident family members. For most of the transactions where non-residents have to be made beneficiaries, it amounts to a capital account transaction. The non-resident acquires a beneficial interest in the Indian Trust. Without an express permissibility for the same under FEMA, this should not be permitted without RBI approval. Further, generally, RBI takes the view that what is not permissible directly under the extant regulations should not be undertaken indirectly through a private trust structure. FEMA imposes various restrictions vis-a-vis transfer or gift of funds or assets to non-residents, as well as repatriation of cash or proceeds on sale of such assets by the non-residents. As such, AD banks and RBI have been apprehensive when such transactions / repatriations are undertaken via trust structures.

If a person resident in India wants to give a gift of securities of an Indian company to his / her non-resident relative (donor and donee to be “relatives” as per section 2(77) of the Companies Act, 2013), approval is required to be taken from RBI as per NDI rules. From the plain reading of the said Regulation, a view may be considered that the said RBI approval is also required in a case where the gift of shares or securities of an Indian company is to his NRI / OCI relative who shall hold it on non-repatriation basis even though such investments are considered at par with domestic investment. The reason for the said view is NRIs / OCIs holding shares or securities of Indian companies on non-repatriation can gift to NRIs / OCIs who shall continue to hold on non-repatriation without RBI approval. Consequently, since the gift of shares by a person resident in India to a person resident outside India who shall hold it on non-repatriation is not specially covered, it is advisable to seek RBI approval in such cases. Further, up to 5% of the total paid-up capital of shares or securities can be given as gifts per year and limited to a value of $50,000. This restriction per se affects the settlement of shares and securities by a resident as a Settlor in trust with non-resident beneficiaries (The effect of the transaction is that a non-resident is entitled to ownership of Indian shares or securities via trust structure). However, certain AD banks have considered a practical position that settlement of Indian shares and securities is a transaction per se between Indian settlor and trust and ought not to have any implications under NDI rules as long as trustee/s, being the legal owner of trust assets, are person resident in India. Considering that RBI has apprehensions with cross-border trust structures, it is always advisable to apply to RBI with complete facts before execution of such trust deeds and obtain their prior comprehensive approval for both settling/contribution of assets in the trust as well as subsequent distribution of such assets to non-resident beneficiaries.

The aforesaid uncertainty for settlement of assets in the Indian trust may also occur in another scenario where the trust was initially set up when all beneficiaries were persons resident in India and subsequently became non-resident on account of relocation outside India. In such cases, a practical position may be taken that no RBI approval or threshold limit as specified above shall apply since the trust was settled with resident beneficiaries. Essential to evaluate whether any reporting or intimation is required at the time when such beneficiaries become non-residents. In this regard, a reference may be considered to section 6(5) of FEMA, which permits a person resident in India to continue to hold Indian currency, security, or immovable property situated in India once such person becomes a non-resident. This provision does not seem to specifically cover a beneficial interest in the trust. However, a practical view may be considered that as long as the assets owned by the trust are in nature of assets permissible to be held under section 6(5), there ought not be a violation of any FEMA provisions. Still, on a conservative note, one may consider intimating the AD Bank by way of a letter about the existence of the trust and subsequent changes in the residential status of the respective beneficiaries. Also, subsequent distribution to non-resident beneficiaries by such trust shall be credited to the NRO account of non-resident beneficiaries (refer to below para for detailed discussion on repatriation issues).

Repatriation of funds generated by such trust from sale of Indian assets viz shares and securities has been another subject matter of debate and there is no uniform stand by AD banks on this issue. Under the LRS, the gift of funds by Indian residents to non-residents abroad or NRO accounts of such NRI relatives is subject to the LRS limit of USD 2,50,000. Consequently, any repatriation of funds from trusts to foreign bank accounts / NRO accounts of non-resident beneficiaries is being permitted by some AD banks only up to the aforesaid LRS limit. Alternatively, a position has been taken that repatriation of funds, which predominantly consist of current income generated by trusts, should be freely permissible to be remitted without any limit, and the remaining shall be subject to LRS. In other cases, the remittance of funds from the trust to the NRO accounts of non-resident beneficiaries is considered permissible to be transferred without any limit (since subsequent repatriation from the NRO account is already subject to USD 1 Million limit per year).

3.6. Tabular summary of our above analysis on the gift of Non-debt Securities and settlement and Repatriation issues through a Trust structure

a. Settlement and repatriation issues through trust structure

Sr. No. Scenarios View 1 View 2 View 3
1. Setting up trust with non-resident beneficiaries
i. Settlement of shares and securities in trust by resident settlor Subject to prior RBI approval and threshold limits Permissible during settlement –  subsequent distribution of shares subject to  approval and threshold limit (in case RBI approval is not granted or rejected, there is a possibility that set up of trust may also be questioned) No third view to our knowledge
ii. Repatriation of funds generated by a trust from the sale of shares Subject to LRS limit irrespective of nature of trust income Only income from capital transactions is subject to the LRS limit.

 

 

No limit on remittance to an NRO account, irrespective of the nature of the income
to a foreign bank account / NRO account of beneficiaries Current income is freely repatriable to the foreign bank account
2. Setting up trust with resident beneficiaries – subsequently, beneficiaries become non-resident.
i. Settlement of shares and securities Settlement permissible and even distribution to be arguably permissible in light of section 6(5) No second view to our knowledge

b. RBI approval under various scenarios of gift of Non-debt Instruments

Sr. No. Gift of securities Regulation RBI approval
1. By a person resident outside India to a person resident outside India 9(1) Not required
2. By a person resident outside India to a person resident in India 9(2) Not required
3. By a person resident in India to a person resident outside India 9(4) Required
4. By an NRI or OCI holding on a repatriation basis to a person resident outside India 13(1) Not required
5. By NRI or OCI holding on a non-repatriation basis to a person resident outside India 13(3) Required
6. By NRI or OCI holdings on non-repatriation basis to NRI or OCI on non-repatriation basis 13(4) Not required

4. TAX IMPLICATIONS FOR NON-RESIDENTS ON INVESTMENT IN INDIA SECURITIES

The taxability of an individual in India in a particular financial year depends upon his residential status as per the Income-tax Act, 1961 (“the Act”). This section of the article covers taxability in Indian in the hands of NRI in relation to their investment in shares and securities of the Indian company. It should be noted that all incomes earned by an NRI / OCI are allowed to be repatriated only if full and appropriate taxes are paid before such remittance.

We have summarised below the key tax implications in the hands of NRIs under the Act on various shares or securities. For the purpose of this clause, the capital gain rates quoted are for the transfers which have taken place on or after 23rd July, 2024.

5. TAX RATES FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF SECURITIES FOR NON-RESIDENTS

In India, the taxation of shares and securities in the hands of non-residents depends on several factors, including the type of security, the nature of income generated, and the relevant Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement (“DTAA”) entered with India.

5.1 Capital Gains on the ransfer of Capital Assets being Equity Shares, Units of an Equity Oriented Fund, or Units of Business Trust through the stock exchange (“Capital Assets”):

Short-term capital gain (STCG): If a capital asset is sold within 12 months from the date of purchase, the gains are treated as short-term. As per section 111A of the Act, the tax rate on STCG for non-residents is 20 per cent (plus applicable surcharge and cess) on the gains.

Long-term capital gains (LTCG): If the capital asset is sold after holding it for more than 12 months, the gains are treated as long-term. LTCG on equity shares is exempt from tax up to ₹1.25 lakh per financial year. However, gains above ₹1.25 lakh are subject to 12.5 per cent tax (plus applicable surcharge and cess) without indexation benefit.

5.2 Capital Gains on Transfer of Capital Assets being Unlisted Equity Shares, Unlisted Preference Shares, Unlisted Units of Business Trust: Short-term capital gains:

If a capital asset is sold within 24 months from the date of purchase, the gains are treated as short-term. As per the provisions of the Act, STCG shall be subject to tax as per the applicable slab rates (plus applicable surcharge and cess).

Long-term capital gains:

If the capital asset is sold after holding it for more than 24 months, the gains are treated as long-term. LTCG on capital assets is subject to 12.5 per cent tax (plus applicable surcharge and cess) without indexation benefit.

5.3 Capital Gains on Transfer of Capital Asset being Debt Mutual Funds, Market Linked Debentures, Unlisted Bonds, and Unlisted Debentures:

As per the provisions of section 50AA of the Act, gains from the transfer of capital assets shall be deemed to be STCG irrespective of the period of holding of capital assets, and the gains shall be subject to tax as per the applicable slab rates (plus applicable surcharge and cess).

5.4 Capital Gains on Transfer of Capital Assets being Listed Bonds and Debentures:

Short-term capital gains: If a capital asset is sold within 12 months from the date of purchase, the gains are treated as short-term. As per the provisions of the Act, STCG shall be subject to tax as per the applicable slab rates (plus applicable surcharge and cess).

Long-term capital gains: If the capital asset is sold after holding it for more than 12 months, the gains are treated as long-term. LTCG on capital assets is subject to 12.5 per cent tax (plus applicable surcharge and cess) without indexation benefit.

5.5 Capital Gains on Transfer of Capital Assets being Treasury Bills (T-Bills):

T-Bills are typically held for short durations (less than 1 year), so any sale of T-Bills before maturity will result in short-term capital gains. The capital gain from the sale of T-Bills will be subject to tax at the applicable slab rates (plus applicable surcharge and cess).

5.6 Capital Gain on Transfer of Capital Assets being Convertible Notes:

If the convertible note is sold within 24 months, the gain is treated as short-term and taxed at the applicable slab rates (plus applicable surcharge and cess).

If the convertible note is held for more than 24 months, the gain is considered long-term. LTCG on convertible notes is taxed at 12.5 per cent (plus applicable surcharge and cess) without the indexation benefit.

5.7 Capital Gains on Transfer of Capital Assets being GDRs or Bonds Purchased in Foreign Currency:

If capital assets are sold within 24 months, thegain is treated as short-term and shall be taxed at the applicable slab rates (plus applicable surcharge and cess).

If a capital asset is sold after holding for more than 24 months, the gain is treated as long-term. As per the provisions of section 115AC of the Act, LTCG shall be subject to tax at the rate of 12.5 per cent (plus applicable surcharge and cess) in the hands of non-residents without indexation benefit.

5.8 Rule 115A: Rate of Exchange for Conversion of INR to Foreign Currency and vice versa:

The proviso to Section 48 of the Act specifically applies to non-resident Indians. It prescribes the methodology of computation of capital gains arising from the transfer of capital assets, such as shares or debentures of an Indian company. The proviso states that capital gain shall be computed in foreign currency by converting the cost of acquisition, expenditure incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with such transfer, and the full value of the consideration as a result of the transfer into the same foreign currency that was initially used to purchase the said capital asset. The next step is to convert the foreign currency capital gain into Indian currency.

In this connection, the government has prescribed rule 115A of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 (“the Rules”), which deals with the rate of exchange for converting Indian currency into foreign currency and reconverting foreign currency into Indian currency for the
purpose of computing capital gains under the first proviso of section 48. The rate of exchange shall be as follows:

  •  For converting the cost of acquisition of the capital asset: the average of the Telegraphic Transfer Buying Rate (TTBR) and Telegraphic Transfer Selling Rate (TTSR) of the foreign currency initially utilised in the purchase of the said asset, as on the date of its acquisition.
  • For converting expenditure incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with the transfer of the capital asset: the average of the TTBR and TTSR of the foreign currency initially utilised in the purchase of the said asset, as on the date of transfer of the capital asset.
  •  For converting the consideration as a result of the transfer: the average of the TTBR and TTSR of the foreign currency initially utilised in the purchase of the said asset, as on the date of transfer of the capital asset.
  •  For reconverting capital gains computed in the foreign currency into Indian currency: the TTBR of such currency, as on the date of transfer of the capital asset.

TTBR, in relation to a foreign currency, means the rates of exchange adopted by the State Bank of India for buying such currency, where such currency is made available to that bank through a telegraphic transfer.

TTSR, in relation to a foreign currency, means the rate of exchange adopted by the State Bank of India for selling such currency where such currency is made available by that bank through telegraphic transfer.

5.9 Benefit under relevant DTAA:

It is pertinent to note that the way the article on capital gain is worded under certain DTAA, it can be interpreted that the capital gain on transfer / alienation of property (other than shares and immovable property) should be taxable only in the Country in which the alienator is a resident.

For example, Gains arising to the resident of UAE (as per India UAE DTAA) on the sale of units of mutual funds could be considered as non-taxable as per Article 13(5) of the India UAE DTAA subject to such individual holding Tax Residency Certificate and upon submission of Form 10F.

6. TAXABILITY OF DIVIDENDS

As per section 115A of the Act, dividends paid by Indian companies to non-residents are subject to tax at a rate of 20 per cent (plus applicable surcharge and cess) unless a lower rate is provided under the relevant DTAA. Thus, the dividend income shall be taxable in India as per provisions of the Act or as per the relevant DTAA, whichever is more beneficial. It is important to note that the beneficial rate under the treaty is subject to the satisfaction of the additional requirement of MLI wherever treaties are impacted because of the signing of MLI by India.

In most of the DTAAs, the relevant Article on dividends has prescribed the beneficial tax rate of dividend (in the country of source – i.e., the country in which the company paying the dividends is a resident) for the beneficial owner (who is a resident of a country other than the country of source).

It is pertinent to note that as per Article 10 on Dividend in India Singapore DTAA, the tax rate on gross dividend paid / payable from an Indian Company derived by a Singapore resident has been prescribed at 10 per cent where the shareholding in a company is at least 25 per cent and 15 per cent in all other cases However, Article 24 –Limitation of Relief of the India Singapore DTAA, limits / restricts the benefit of reduced/ beneficial rate in the source country to the extent of dividend remitted to or received in the country in which such individual is resident. The relevant extract of Article 24 of India-Singapore DTAA on Limitation of Relief has been reproduced below:

“Where this Agreement provides (with or without other conditions) that income from sources in a Contracting State shall be exempt from tax, or taxed at a reduced rate in that Contracting State and under the laws in force in the other Contracting State the said income is subject to tax by reference to the amount thereof which is remitted to or received in that other Contracting State and not by reference to the full amount thereof, then the exemption or reduction of tax to be allowed under this Agreement in the first-mentioned Contracting State shall apply to so much of the income as is remitted to or received in that other Contracting State.”

Therefore, one will have to be mindful and have to look into each case / situation carefully before availing of benefits under DTAA. In order to claim the beneficial tax rate of relevant DTAA with India (which is of utmost importance), non-resident individuals will have to mandatorily furnish the following details / documents:

  •  Tax Residency Certificate from the relevant authorities of the resident country and
  •  Form 10F (which is self-declaration — to be now furnished on the Income-tax e-filing portal).

In case dividend income is chargeable to tax in the source country (after applying DTAA provisions) as well as in the country of residence, resulting in tax in both countries, then an individual (in the country where he is resident) is eligible to claim the credit of taxes paid by him in the country of source.

Practical issue:

One should be careful in filling the ITR Form for NRIs with respect to dividends received so that the correct tax rate of 20 per cent is applied and not the slab rates. Further, the surcharge on the dividend income is restricted to 15 per cent as per Part I of The First Schedule. Practically, the Department utility is capturing a higher surcharge rate (i.e., 25 per cent) if the dividend exceeds ₹2 crores.

Taxability on Buyback of shares

Prior to 1st October, 2024, the buyback of shares of an Indian company is presently subject to tax in the hands of the company at 20 per cent under Section 115QA and exempt in the hands of the shareholders under Section 10(34A).

As per the new provision introduced by the Finance Act, 2024, the sum paid by a domestic company for the purchase of its shares shall be treated as a dividend in the hands of shareholders.

The cost of acquisition of such shares bought back by the Company should be considered as capital loss and shall be allowed to be set off against capital gains of the shareholder for the same year or subsequent years as per the provisions of the Act.

Because of these new provisions introduced by the Finance Act, two heads of income, viz. capital gains and income from other sources, are involved. It becomes important to understand, especially in the case of non-residents, to decide which article of DTAA to be referred, i.e. Capital gains or dividends.

A view could be taken that the article on dividends should be referred and the benefit under relevant DTAA, wherever applicable, shall be given to the non-residents.

7. INSURANCE PROCEEDS

a. Life Insurance Proceeds: As per section 10(10D) of the Act, any sum received under a life insurance policy, including bonus, is exempt from tax except the following:

i. Any amount received under a Keyman insurance policy.

ii. Any sum received under a life insurance policy issued on or after 1st April, 2003 but on or before 31st March, 2012 if the premium payable for any year during the term of the policy exceeds 20 per cent of the actual sum assured.

iii. Any sum received under a life insurance policy issued on or after 1st April, 2012 if the premium payable for any year during the term of the policy exceeds 10 per cent of the actual sum assured.

iv. Any sum received under a life insurance policy other than a Unit Linked Insurance Policy (ULIP) issued on or after 1st April, 2023 if the premium payable for any year during the term of the policy exceeds five lakh rupees.

v. ULIP issued on or after 1st February, 2021 if the amount of premium payable for any of the previous years during the term of such policy exceeds two lakh and fifty thousand rupees.

However, the sum received as per clause ii to v in the event of the death of a person shall not be liable for tax.

Summary of Taxability of Life Insurance Proceeds:

Issuance of Policy Premium in terms of percentage of sum assured Taxability of sum received during Lifetime Taxability of sum received on Death
Before 31st March, 2003 No restriction Exempt Exempt
From 1st April 2003 to 31st March, 2012 20% or less Exempt Exempt
More than 20% Taxable Exempt
On or After 1st April, 2012 10% or less Exempt Exempt
More than 10% Taxable Exempt
On or after 1st April, 2023, having a premium of more than ₹5 lakh NA Taxable Exempt
ULIP issued on or after 1st February, 2021, having a premium of more than ₹2.5 lakh NA Taxable Exempt

b. Proceeds from Insurance other than Life Insurance:

Where any person receives during the year any money or other asset under insurance from an insurer on account of the destruction of any asset as a result of a flood, typhoon, hurricane, cyclone, earthquake, other convulsions of nature, riot or civil disturbance, accidental fire or explosion, action by an enemy or action taken in combating an enemy, the same is covered by the provisions of section 45(1A) of the Act.

Any profits or gains arising from receipt of such money or other assets shall be chargeable to income-tax under the head “Capital gains” as per section 45(1A).

For the purpose of computing the profit or gain, the value of any money or fair market value of other assets on the date of receipt shall be deemed to be consideration. Further, the assessee shall be allowed the deduction of the cost of acquisition of the original asset (other than depreciable assets) from the money or value of the asset received from the insurer.

The above consideration shall be deemed to be income of the year in which such money or other asset was received.

The profit or gain shall be treated as LTCG if the period of holding the original asset is more than 24 months, or else the same shall be treated as STCG.

LTCG shall be subject to tax at the rate of 12.5 per cent, whereas STCG shall be subject to tax at the applicable slab rates (including applicable surcharge and cess).

8. CHAPTER XII-A: SPECIAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO CERTAIN INCOMES OF NON-RESIDENTS

This chapter deals with special provisions relating to the taxation of certain income of NRIs. These provisions aim to simplify the tax obligations of NRIs and provide certain benefits and exemptions to encourage investments in India.

Applying the provisions of this chapter is optional. An NRI can choose not to be governed by the provisions of this chapter by filing his ITR as per section 139 of the Act, declaring that the provisions of this chapter shall not apply to him for that assessment year.

For the purpose of understanding the tax implications under this chapter, it is important to understand certain definitions:

  •  Foreign exchange assets: means the assets which the NRI has acquired in convertible foreign exchange (as declared by RBI), namely:

Ο Shares in an Indian Company;

Ο Debentures issued by or deposits with an Indian Company which is not a private company;

Ο Any security of the Central Government being promissory notes, bearer bonds, treasury bills, etc., as defined in section 2 of the Public Debt Act, 1944.

  •  Investment income: means any income derived from foreign exchange assets.
  •  Non-resident Indian: means an individual being a citizen of India or a person of Indian origin who is not a resident.
  •  “specified asset” means any of the following assets, namely:—

(i) shares in an Indian company;

(ii) debentures issued by an Indian company which is not a private company as defined in the Companies Act, 1956 (1 of 1956);

(iii) deposits with an Indian company which is not a private company as defined in the Companies Act, 1956 (1 of 1956);

(iv) any security of the Central Government as defined in clause (2) of section 2 of the Public Debt Act, 1944 (18 of 1944);

(v) such other assets as the Central Government may specify in this behalf by notification in the Official Gazette.

a. Section 115D – Special provision for computation of total income under this chapter:

In computing the investment income of a NRI, no deduction of expenditure or allowance is allowed.

If the gross total income of the NRI consists of only investment income or long-term capital gain income from foreign exchange assets or both, no deduction will be allowed under Chapter VI-A. Further, the benefits of indexation shall not be available.

b. Section 115E – Tax on Investment income and long term capital gain:

  •  Investment income – taxed at the rate of 20 per cent
  •  Long-term capital gain on foreign exchange asset: taxed at the rate of 12.5 per cent.
  •  Any other income: as per the normal provisions of the Act.

c. Section 115F – Exemption of long-term capital gain on foreign exchange assets:

  •  Where the NRI has, during the previous year, transferred foreign exchange assets resulting into LTCG, the gain shall be exempt from tax if the amount of gain is invested in any specified asset or national savings certificates within 6 months after the date of such transfer. Further, if the NRI has invested only part of the gain in the specified asset, then only the proportionate gain will be exempt from tax. In any case, the exemption shall not exceed the amount of gain that arises from the transfer of foreign exchange assets.

If the NRI opts for this Chapter, then he is not required to file an income tax return if his total income consists of only investment income or long-term capital gain or both, and the withholding tax has been deducted on such income.

Further, NRIs can continue to be assessed as per the provisions of this Chapter ever after becoming resident by furnishing a declaration in writing with his ITR, in respect of investment income (except investment income from shares of Indian company) from that year and for every subsequent year until the transfer or conversion into money of such asset.

CONCLUSION

As discussed in this article, the foreign exchange regulations with respect to the permissibility of non-residents investing in Indian non-debt securities and the tax laws covering the taxation of income of non-residents arising from investment in Indian securities are complex and need to be carefully understood before a non-resident makes investments in India securities. Further, implications on changes in residential status also need to be looked into carefully to appropriately comply with them.

Framework Convention of the United Nations

Editor’s Note:

Bombay Chartered Accountants Society (BCAS) has obtained a special accreditation to participate in the “Ad Hoc Intergovernmental Committee on Tax” at the United Nations as an Academia. CA RadhakishanRawal is representing BCAS at this forum and has been actively participating in discussions. In this write-up, he shares his experiences and updates on discussions at the UN on various tax issues.

OECD’S DOMINANCE AND RELATED ISSUES

For more than two decades, with first the project of attribution of profits to the permanent establishment and then with the BEPS project, the OECD has played a key lead role and dominated international tax agenda. However, not all countries or even the majority of the countries, seem to be happy with the outcome of these projects. OECD is perceived to be a club of rich developed countries, which largely favours residence country taxation as against giving taxing rights to the source country. This approach is generally visible in the output of the OECD’s work, and as a result, the developing countries feel aggrieved. The general perception is that the solutions developed by OECD protect the interests of only the developed countries and offer unfair treatment to the developing countries.

While the OECD’s output (BEPS, P1, P2) is under the Inclusive Framework, the ‘inclusiveness’ and ‘effectiveness’ of such output are questioned. Inclusive and effective international tax cooperation requires that all countries can effectively participate in developing the agenda and the rules that affect them, by right and without pre-conditions. Thus, ideally, procedures must take into account the different needs, priorities and capacities of all countries to meaningfully contribute to the norm-setting processes without undue restrictions and support them in doing so. Interestingly, for the BEPS project, a few countries first set up the agenda and standards and then invited other countries to join the Inclusive Framework (IF). The countries joining IF had the obligation to follow the standards.

While the Inclusive Framework works on a ‘consensus’ basis, such consensus may be illusionary. This is because several developing countries may not have the ability to effectively participate in the IF’s work due to the complexity of the documents produced and the speed at which the work happens / responses are required. As per the procedure followed, unless a country objects to a particular document within the prescribed time, the country is deemed to have agreed, and hence, resultant consensus may not be real consensus.

The countries implementing OECD recommendations are mainly developed countries and not the developing countries. Hence, the developing countries may not find adequate returns / revenues from these. For example, doubts are expressed regarding how much additional tax revenue Pillar One could generate for developing countries as compared to the revenues arising from domestic digital services taxes is not clear.

Common Reporting Standard on Automatic Exchange of Information (CRS) is a mechanism to help countries identify tax evasion and aggressive tax planning. The Global Forum on Transparency and Exchange of Information for Tax Purposes currently has 168 member jurisdictions. However, developing countries do not benefit from this. This is because many developing countries find it difficult to comply with the reciprocity requirements or meet the high confidentiality standards necessary for them to participate in exchanges under the CRS. Resultantly, a developing country may share information but may not be able to receive information due to its inability to maintain systems for confidentiality. The CRS was developed to allow seamless use of exchanged information in countries’ electronic matching systems; many developing countries are still in the process of developing such matching systems. Some countries may not find commensurate returns from the exchange of data, and hence, upgrading / adopting systems may not be their priority.

UN AS AN ALTERNATIVE FORUM

Such problems in the OECD-led system resulted in the developing countries attempting to find an alternative system led by the United Nations (UN). In the year 2022, Nigeria proposed a resolution in the UN General Assembly for the Promotion of Inclusive and Effective International Tax Cooperation at the UN. Consequently, the General Assembly, in its resolution 77/244, took, by consensus, a potentially path-breaking decision: to begin intergovernmental discussions at the UN on ways to strengthen the inclusiveness and effectiveness of international tax cooperation. This resulted in a report dated 26th July, 2023, which the Secretary-General submitted. Some findings of the report are summarised in the succeeding paragraphs.

Subsequently, the Ad Hoc Committee1, at its second session2 prepared draft Terms of Reference (ToR). The marathon session consisted of several technical and political debates. The developed / OECD countries attempted to dilute the scope of UN work on various grounds and insisted that the UN work should not contradict the work of the OECD / Inclusive Framework. The developing countries, on the contrary, did not want the scope of UN work to be so restricted. Finalisation of the draft ToR involved the ‘silence procedure’. The silence was broken by some member states and voting by the member states was required to finalise the draft ToR. Preparation of a basic five-pager draft ToR took 15 days, and this suggests the political resistance to the development of a Framework Convention.


1   Ad Hoc Committee to Draft Terms of Reference for a United Nations Framework Convention on International Tax Cooperation

2   New York, 29th July – 16th August, 2024

After considering the debates and inputs of the member state and other stakeholders, the Chair of the session prepared a final draft and initiated the ‘silence procedure’. It is understood that if the silence were not broken (i.e., if any member did not object to the draft), then the draft would have been finalised unanimously or by consensus. The voting gave interesting results whereby 110 member states voted in favour of the draft, 8 member states voted against it, and 44 member states abstained. The OECD countries largely abstained, and this may be interpreted to mean that if OECD’s Pillar One fails, these countries would want a solution from the UN. The approach of the US is not to sign up for OECD / IF’s Pillar One and, at the same time, oppose the UN’s work. This is interesting but understandable. If the status quo is maintained, only the US continues to levy tax on US MNCs earning income from digital businesses, and DSTs are threatened with USTR proceedings.

Once the General Assembly approves this draft, the next committee will work on the UN Multilateral Instrument based on the ToR so approved.

UN TAX COMMITTEE

The UN Tax Committee3 is a subsidiary body of The Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC) and continues its work on various international tax issues (e.g., addition of new Articles to the UN Model, amendment of its Commentary, etc.). The members of the UN Tax Committee (25 in number), although appointed by the government of the respective countries, operate in their personal capacity and do not represent the respective countries. Resultantly, the work done by the UN Tax Committee does not follow intergovernmental procedures.


3  The Committee of Experts on International Cooperation in International Taxation.

UN FRAMEWORK CONVENTION

Key elements of the draft ToR are summarised in the subsequent paragraphs.

The draft ToR essentially contains a broad outline of the UN Framework Convention. The Preamble of the Framework Convention should make reference to the previous related resolutions4 of the General Assembly.


4  78/230 of 22nd December, 2023, 77/244 of 30th December, 2022, 70/1 of 25th September and 69/313 of 27th July, 2015.

The Framework Convention should include a clear statement of its objectives, and it should establish:

a) fully inclusive and effective international tax cooperation in terms of substance and process;

b) a system of governance for international tax cooperation capable of responding to existing and future tax and tax-related challenges on an ongoing basis;

c) an inclusive, fair, transparent, efficient, equitable and effective international tax system for sustainable development, with a view to enhancing the legitimacy, certainty, resilience, and fairness of international tax rules while addressing challenges to strengthening domestic resource mobilisation.

The Framework Convention should include a clear statement of the principles that guide the achievement of its objectives. The efforts to achieve the objectives of the Framework Convention, therefore, should:

a. be universal in approach and scope, and should fully consider the different needs, priorities and capacities of all countries, including developing countries, in particular countries in special situations;

b. recognise that every Member State has the sovereign right to decide its tax policies and practices while also respecting the sovereignty of other Member States in such matters;

c. in the pursuit of international tax cooperation be aligned with States’ obligations under international human rights law;

d. take a holistic, sustainable development perspective that covers in a balanced and integrated manner economic, social and environmental policy aspects;

e. be sufficiently flexible, resilient and agile to ensure equitable and effective results as societies, technology and business models, and the international tax cooperation landscapes evolve;

f. contribute to achieving sustainable development by ensuring fairness in the allocation of taxing rights under the international tax system;

g. provide for rules that are as simple and easy to administer as the subject matter allows;

h. ensure certainty for taxpayers and governments; and

i. require transparency and accountability of all taxpayers.

The Framework Convention should include commitments to achieve its objectives. Commitments on the following subjects, inter alia, should be:

a. fair allocation of taxing rights, including equitable taxation of multinational enterprises;

b. addressing tax evasion and avoidance by high-net-worth individuals and ensuring their effective taxation in relevant Member States;

c. international tax cooperation approaches that will contribute to the achievement of sustainable development in its three dimensions, economic, social and environmental, in a balanced and integrated manner;

d. effective mutual administrative assistance in tax matters, including with respect to transparency and exchange of information for tax purposes;

e. addressing tax-related illicit financial flows, tax avoidance, tax evasion and harmful tax practices; and

f. effective prevention and resolution of tax disputes.

While the Framework Convention is like an umbrella agreement, each specific substantive tax issue may be addressed through a separate Protocol. Protocols are separate legally binding instruments under the Framework Convention. Each party to the Framework Convention should have the option of whether or not to become party to a Protocol on any substantive tax issues, either at the time they become party to the Framework Convention or later.

Negotiation and preparation of Protocols could take some time, whereas certain unresolved international tax issues need to be addressed at the earliest. Accordingly, it is thought appropriate to negotiate a couple of Protocols simultaneously along with the Framework Convention itself. As per the earlier resolution, the Ad Hoc Committee was also required to consider the development of simultaneous Early Protocols, and for this purpose, issues such as measures against tax-related illicit financial flows and the taxation of income derived from the provision of cross-border services in an increasingly digitalised and globalised economy were treated as priority issues.

The draft ToR specifically identifies taxation of income derived from the provision of cross-border services in an increasingly digitalised and globalised economy as one of the priority issues. The subject of the second Early Protocol should be decided at the organisational session of the intergovernmental negotiating committee and should be drawn from the following specific priority areas:

a. taxation of the digitalised economy;

b. measures against tax-related illicit financial flows;

c. prevention and resolution of tax disputes; and

d. addressing tax evasion and avoidance by high-net-worth individuals and ensuring their effective taxation in relevant Member States.

The ToR also identifies the following additional topics which could be considered for the purpose of Protocols:

a. tax co-operation on environmental challenges;

b. exchange of information for tax purposes;

c. mutual administrative assistance on tax matters; and

d. harmful tax practices.

PARTICIPATION BY ACCREDITED OBSERVERS

The UN is an open and inclusive organisation. It encourages participation by various stakeholders, such as Civil Society, Academia, Corporates / Industry Associations, etc., in their tax-related work as Observers. The participants in these sessions can be broadly divided into two categories: Government Representatives and Observers. The Observers are allowed to participate in most5 of the meetings. The Observers get a fair opportunity to make interventions and give their inputs in the discussions. As a protocol, the Observers get a chance to speak only after the member states (i.e., Government Representatives). Ordinarily, an intervention could be three minutes and a person may be allowed to make more than one intervention in the discussion. Only the Government Representatives can vote and not the Observers. The proceedings of the session are simultaneously translated into the official UN languages6, and hence, a person can speak in any of these languages depending on his comfort. Further, the proceedings of these meetings are recorded, and it is possible to view them at a subsequent stage.


5   About 5–7 per cent of the sessions could be closed sessions only for government officials when the discussions are sensitive.

6   Arabic, Chinese, English, French, Russian, Spanish

From the Indian side, the CBDT officials participate, and the officials of the Indian Mission to the UN in New York also support. The Observers are able to interact with the Government Officials of various countries and exchange views. The inputs given by the Observers are generally appreciated and acknowledged. The government or the UN officials are not required to immediately address the issues raised by the Observers, but in several cases, they react.

The interventions made by the Observers would typically depend on their background. For example, certain civil society members stress a lot on human rights and environmental issues. The substantive inputs7 given by the BCAS representative included the following:


7 This is not a verbatim reproduction. Appropriate changes / paraphrasing is done to enable the readers of the article to understand the issue.
  •  The most important aspect of giving certainty to business houses (MNCs) is getting lost while the tax authorities of countries continue to battle for their taxing rights in different forums. Even more than a decade after the initiation of the BEPS project, there is no solution for the taxation of the digital economy. Business houses generate employment opportunities, economic activities and generate wealth for the shareholders and stakeholders. These business houses need to plan well in advance, but they have no clarity on whether they will pay tax on Amount A, Digital Service Taxes (without corresponding credit in the country of residence) or increased tariffs resulting from trade wars.
  •  Considering the large group involved and the time taken, the Early Protocols should focus predominantly on issues which result in the reallocation of taxing rights.
  •  While Resolution 78/230 requires the Ad Hoc Committee to ‘take into consideration’ the work of other relevant forums, it does not mean one has to necessarily follow or adopt it. The Ad Hoc Committee can certainly improvise on it or ensure that the deficiencies contained in it are not adopted. The work of the intergovernmental negotiating committee should, however, not be constrained by the work of other relevant forums.
  •  Human rights are certainly important, but a tax committee may have a very limited role in the protection of human rights. It should be ensured that the discussion on human rights does not derail the main discussion on the distribution of taxing rights to developing countries. Further, issues such as (i) whether corporates would be treated as ‘humans’ for this purpose and (ii) whether taxing rights can be denied to a country, if there are allegations of human rights violation, etc., should be addressed.
  •  The ability to levy tax on the income generated in the source country should be treated as ‘tax sovereignty’. This sovereignty should be reflected in the allocation of taxing rights under the tax treaties.
  •  It is not advisable to remove the words “fairness in the allocation of taxing rights” from the principles. ‘Fairness’ is a subjective concept, and some objective parameters can be developed. For example, Where the per capita GDP of a country is below a certain threshold, such a country should be given exclusive taxing rights or at least source country taxing rights. This will improve the quality of human life in these countries.
  •  Experience of participating in the work of the UN Tax Committee suggests that a lot of time is spent in ensuring that such provisions are not adopted. These are political discussions. Subsequently, a decision is taken to accept the provision, but the time spent on technical work on the article is too less. If more time is spent on the technical aspects of the provisions, the qualitative outcome can be achieved.
  •  OECD has a large pool of technical resources. These resources could be used to develop technical documents and solutions which could be further adopted as per the UN intergovernmental processes to achieve the desired objective of fair allocation of taxing rights.
  •  The Committee can adopt an ‘if and then’ approach for its future work, especially on Early Protocols. Thus, the Early Protocols could depend on whether OECD’s Pillar One becomes operational.
  •  Before deciding on issues for Early Protocols, a brainstorming session could be conducted. When topics such as taxation of HNIs are suggested, if the solution is seen as a levy of capital gains under domestic law, that cannot be a priority for the Ad Hoc Tax Committee.

The background of some of these comments is that several OECD countries do not want the UN to work on areas on which the OECD is working or has worked. Hence, the approach of introducing topics and spending more time on such topics, which do not result in the allocation of taxing rights to developing countries, becomes obvious.

TIMELINES

The Framework Convention would be negotiated by an intergovernmental member-state-led committee. This committee is expected to work during the years 2025, 2026 and 2027 and submit the final Framework Convention and two Early Protocols to the General Assembly for its consideration in the first quarter of its 82nd session. Thus, it will take more than 36 months before the final Framework Convention and two Early Protocols are available. Further, it should be noted that the availability of these documents does not necessarily resolve any issue. The issue would get resolved only if a substantial number of relevant countries sign and ratify these documents. However, it is fair to assume that if the OECD Inclusive Framework’s Pillar One fails, the resistance from the developed countries (other than the USA) to the Framework Convention and at least to the protocol addressing digital economy taxation would cease to exist, and the outcome could be much faster.

29TH SESSION OF THE UN TAX COMMITTEE

This session was conducted in Geneva in October 2024 and several important workstreams have significantly progressed. Some of these workstreams are briefly summarised in the subsequent paragraphs.

New Article dealing with taxation of “Fees for Services”

Most Indian tax treaties contain a specific article dealing with “fees for technical services”. Such an article does not exist in the OECD Model and historically did not exist in the UN Model as well. The 2017 update of the UN Model included Article 12A, which deals with “fees for technical services”. The 2021 update of the UN Model included Article 12B, dealing with fees for automated digital services. Further, Article 14 of the UN Model deals with independent personal services, and Article 5(3)(b) of the UN Model is a Service PE provision.

The UN Tax Committee has recently finalised new Article XX (yet to be numbered), which deals with “fees for services”. The structure of this new provision is broadly comparable to Article 11 and gives taxing rights to the source country, which could be exercised on a gross basis. The existing Article 12A and Article 14 would be withdrawn.

New Article dealing with Insurance Premium

The UN Tax Committee has finalised new Article 12C, which gives taxing rights on the insurance and reinsurance premiums to the source country, which could be exercised on a gross basis. The structure of this new provision is broadly comparable to Article 11, etc.

New Article dealing with Natural Resources

The UN Tax Committee has finalised new Article 5C which gives taxing rights to the source country on Income from the Exploration for, or Exploitation of, Natural Resources.

As per this provision, a resident of a Contracting State which carries on activities in the other Contracting State which consist of, or are connected with, the exploration for, or exploitation of, natural resources that are present in that other State due to natural conditions (the ‘relevant activities’) shall be deemed in relation to those activities to be carrying on business or performing independent personal services in that other State through a permanent establishment or a fixed base situated therein, unless such activities are carried on in that other State for a period or periods not exceeding in the aggregate 30 days in any 12 months commencing or ending in the fiscal year concerned.

The term “natural resources” is defined to mean natural assets that can be used for economic production or consumption, whether non-renewable or renewable, including fish, hydrocarbons, minerals and pearls, as well as solar power, wind power, hydropower, geothermal power and similar sources of renewable energy. While it was orally clarified that telecom spectrum would not be treated as a ‘natural resource’, no clarification was given on humans and livestock. One will have to wait for the final version of the Commentary for this purpose.

Other major changes to the provisions of the UN Model

The UN Tax Committee is also making significant changes to the provisions of Articles 6, 8 and 15.

Fast Track Instrument

Adoption of these new provisions in the existing tax treaties would require a BEPS MLI-type instrument. For this purpose, the UNTC has already prepared a Fast Track Instrument, which will be sent to ECOSOC.

Other workstreams

Other workstreams of the UNTC include environment taxes, wealth and solidarity taxes, crypto assets, transfer pricing, tax and trade agreements, indirect taxes, extractive industries, etc.

WAY AHEAD

The Intergovernmental Member-State Committee will continue its work on the Framework Convention. It is expected that the Committee will prepare the final Framework Convention and two Early Protocols over the next three years and will submit them to the General Assembly for its consideration. If, for any reason, the OECD-led, Inclusive Framework Nations fail to implement the solutions of Pillar One, then the work on the Framework Convention may be expedited. We shall keep a close watch on these developments and will bring you updates from time to time. In the meantime, readers are welcome to share their ideas and inputs for the consideration of BCAS representatives at the UN.

Gifts and Loans — By and To Non-Resident Indians – II

Editor’s Note:

This is the second part of the Article on Gifts And Loans — By and to Non-Resident Indians. The first part of this Article dealt with Gifts by and to NRIs, and this part deals with Loans by and to NRIs. Along with the FEMA aspects of “Loans by and to NRIs”, the authors have also discussed Income-tax implications including Transfer Pricing Provisions. The article deals with loans in Indian Rupees as well as Foreign Currency, thereby making for interesting reading.

B. LOANS BY AND TO NRIs

FEMA Aspects of Loans by and to NRIs

Currently, the regulatory framework governing borrowing and lending transactions between a Person Resident in India (‘PRI’) and a Person Resident Outside India (‘PROI’) is legislated through the Foreign Exchange Management (Borrowing and Lending) Regulations, 2018 (‘ECB Regulations’) as notified under FEMA 3(R)/2018-RB on 17th December, 2018.

PRIs are generally prohibited from engaging in borrowing or lending in foreign exchange with other PROIs unless specifically permitted by RBI. Similarly, borrowing or lending in Indian rupees to PROIs is also prohibited unless specifically permitted. Notwithstanding the above, the Reserve Bank of India has permitted PRIs to borrow or lend in foreign exchange from or to PROIs, as well as permitted PRIs to borrow or lend in Indian rupees to PROIs.

With this background, let us delve into the key provisions regarding borrowing / lending in foreign exchange / Indian rupees:

B.1 Borrowing in Foreign Exchange by PRI from NRIs

∗ Borrowing by Indian Companies from NRIs

  •  According to paragraph 4(B)(i) of the ECB Regulation, eligible resident entities in India can raise External Commercial Borrowings (ECB) from foreign sources. This borrowing must comply with the provisions in Schedule I of the regulations and is required to be in accordance with the FED Master Direction No. 5/2018–19 — Master Direction-External Commercial Borrowings, Trade Credits, and Structured Obligations (‘ECB Directions’).
  •  Schedule I details various ECB parameters, including eligible borrowers, recognised lenders, minimum average maturity, end-use restrictions, and all-in-cost ceilings.
  •  The key end-use restrictions in this regard are real estate activities, investment in capital markets, equity investment, etc.
  •  Real estate activities have been defined to mean any real estate activity involving owned or leased property for buying, selling, and renting of commercial and residential properties or land and also includes activities either on a fee or contract basis assigning real estate agents for intermediating in buying, selling, letting or managing real estate. However, this would not include (i) construction/development of industrial parks/integrated townships/SEZ, (ii) purchase / long-term leasing of industrial land as part of new project / modernisation of expansion of existing units and (iii) any activity under ‘infrastructure sector’ definition.
  •  It is important to note that, according to the above definition, the construction and development of residential premises (unless included under the integrated township category) will be classified as real estate activities. Therefore, ECB cannot be availed for this purpose.
  •  To assess whether NRIs can lend to Indian companies, we must consider the ECB parameters related to recognised lenders. Recognised lenders are defined as residents of countries compliant with FATF or IOSCO. The regulations specify that individuals can qualify as lenders only if they are foreign equity holders. The ECB Directions in paragraph 1.11 define a foreign equity holder as a recognized lender meeting certain criteria: (i) a direct foreign equity holder with at least 25 per cent direct equity ownership in the borrowing entity, (ii) an indirect equity holder with at least 51 per cent indirect equity ownership, or (iii) a group company with a common overseas parent.
  •  In summary, lenders who meet these criteria qualify to become recognized lenders. Consequently, NRIs who are foreign equity holders can lend to Indian corporates in foreign exchange, provided they comply with other specified ECB parameters.

∗ Borrowing by Resident Individual from NRIs

  •  An individual resident in India is permitted to borrow from his / her relatives outside India a sum not exceeding USD 2,50,000 or its equivalent, subject to terms and conditions as may be specified by RBI in consultation with the Government of India (‘GOI’).
  •  For these regulations, the term ‘relative’ is defined in accordance with Section 2(77) of the Companies Act, 2013. This definition ensures clarity regarding who qualifies as a relative, which typically includes family members such as parents, siblings, spouses, and children, among others. This clarification is crucial for determining eligibility for borrowing from relatives abroad.
  •  Additionally, Individual residents in India studying abroad are also permitted to raise loans outside India for payment of education fees abroad and maintenance, not exceeding USD 250,000 or its equivalent, subject to terms and conditions as may be specified by RBI in consultation with GOI.
  •  It is also noteworthy that although the External Commercial Borrowings (ECB) regulations were officially introduced in 2018, no specific terms and conditions necessary for implementing these borrowing provisions have been prescribed by the RBI. The absence of detailed guidelines indicates that, although a framework is in place for individuals to borrow from relatives or obtain loans for educational purposes, potential borrowers may experience uncertainty about the specific requirements they need to adhere to.

B.2 Borrowing in Indian Rupees by PRI from NRIs

∗ Borrowing by Indian Companies from NRIs

  •  Similar to borrowings in foreign exchange, Indian companies are also permitted to borrow in Indian rupees (INR-denominated ECB) from NRIs who are foreign equity holders subject to the satisfaction of other ECB parameters.
  •  Unlike the FDI regulations, RBI has not specified any mode of payment regulations for the ECB. The definition of ECB, as provided in ECB regulations, states that ECB means borrowing by an eligible resident entity from outside India in accordance with the framework decided by the Reserve Bank in consultation with the Government of India. Further, even Schedule I of the ECB Regulation states that eligible entities may raise ECB from outside India in accordance with the provisions contained in this Schedule. Hence, based on these provisions, it is to be noted that the source of funds for the INR-denominated ECB should be outside of India.
  •  Hence, the source of funds should be outside of India, irrespective of whether it is a  foreign currency-denominated ECB or INR-denominated ECB.

∗ Borrowing by Resident Individuals from NRIs

  •  PRI (other than Indian company) are permitted to borrow in Indian Rupees from NRI / OCI relatives subject to terms and conditions as may be specified by RBI in consultation with GOI. For these regulations, the term ‘relative’ is defined in accordance with Section 2(77) of the Companies Act, 2013. It is also noteworthy that although the External Commercial Borrowings (ECB) regulations were officially introduced in 2018, the specific terms and conditions necessary for implementing these borrowing provisions have yet to be prescribed by the RBI.
  •  Additionally, it is to be noted that the borrowers are not permitted to and utilise the borrowed funds for restricted end-uses.
  •  According to regulation 2(xiv) of the ECB Regulations, “Restricted End Uses” shall mean end uses where borrowed funds cannot be deployed and shall include the following:
  1.  In the business of chit fund or Nidhi Company;
  2.  Investment in the capital market, including margin trading and derivatives;
  3.  Agricultural or plantation activities;
  4.  Real estate activity or construction of farm-houses; and
  5.  Trading in Transferrable Development Rights (TDR), where TDR shall have the meaning as assigned to it in the Foreign Exchange Management (Permissible Capital Account Transactions) Regulations, 2015.

B.3 Lending in Foreign Exchange by PRI to NRIs

∗ Branches outside India of AD banks are permitted to extend foreign exchange loans against the security of funds held in NRE / FCNR deposit accounts or any other account as specified by RBI from time to time and maintained in accordance with the Foreign Exchange Management (Deposit) Regulations, 2016, notified vide Notification No. FEMA 5(R)/2016-RB dated 1st April, 2016, as amended from time to time.

∗ Additionally, Indian companies are permitted to grant loans in foreign exchange to the employees of their branches outside India for personal purposes provided that the loan shall be granted for
personal purposes in accordance with the lender’s Staff Welfare Scheme / Loan Rules and other terms and conditions as applicable to its staff resident in India and abroad.

∗ Apart from the above, the current External Commercial Borrowing (ECB) regulations do not include specific provisions that allow Non-Resident Indians (NRIs) to obtain foreign exchange loans for non-trade purposes, either from individuals or entities residing in India. For example, lending in foreign exchange by PRI to their close relatives living abroad is not permitted under FEMA.

B.4 Lending in Indian Rupees by PRI to NRIs

∗ Lending by Authorised Dealers (AD)

  •  AD in India is permitted to grant a loan to an NRI/ OCI Cardholder for meeting the borrower’s personal requirements / own business purposes / acquisition of a residential accommodation in India / acquisition of a motor vehicle in India/ or for any purpose as per the loan policy laid down by the Board of Directors of the AD and in compliance with prudential guidelines of Reserve Bank of India.
  •  However, it is to be noted that the borrowers are not permitted to utilise the borrowed funds for restricted end-uses. The list of restricted end-use has already been provided in paragraph B.4 of this article.

∗ Other Lending Transactions

  •  A registered non-banking financial company in India,a registered housing finance institution in India, or any other financial institution, as may be specified by the RBI permitted to provide housing loans or vehicle loans, as the case may be, to an NRI / OCI Cardholder subject to such terms and conditions as prescribed by the Reserve Bank from time to time. The borrower should ensure that the borrowed funds are not used for restricted end uses. The list of restricted end-use has already been provided in paragraph B.4 of this article.
  •  Further, an Indian entity may grant a loan in Indian Rupees to its employee who is an NRI / OCI Cardholder in accordance with the Staff Welfare Scheme subject to such terms and conditions as prescribed by the Reserve Bank from time to time. The borrower should ensure that the borrowed funds are not used for restricted end uses.
  •  Additionally, a resident individual is permitted to grant a rupee loan to an NRI / OCI Cardholder relative within the overall limit under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme subject to such terms and conditions as prescribed by the Reserve Bank from time to time. The borrower should ensure that the borrowed funds are not used for restricted end uses.
  •  Furthermore, it’s important to note that even the revised Master Direction on the Liberalized Remittance Scheme (LRS) still outlines the terms and conditions for NRIs to obtain rupee loans from PRI. The decision to retain these terms and conditions in the LRS Master Direction may indicate a deliberate stance by the RBI, especially since the RBI has not yet specified the terms and conditions mentioned in various parts of the ECB regulations.
  •  Specifically, Master Direction LRS states that a resident individual is permitted to lend in rupees to an NRI/Person of Indian Origin (PIO) relative [‘relative’ as defined in Section 2(77) of the Companies Act, 2013] by way of crossed cheque / electronic transfer subject to the following conditions:

i. The loan is free of interest, and the minimum maturity of the loan is one year;

ii. The loan amount should be within the overall limit under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme of USD 2,50,000 per financial year available for a resident individual. It would be the responsibility of the resident individual to ensure that the amount of loan granted by him is within the LRS limit and that all the remittances made by the resident individual during a given financial year, including the loan together, have not exceeded the limit prescribed under LRS;

iii. the loan shall be utilised for meeting the borrower’s personal requirements or for his own business purposes in India;

iv. the loan shall not be utilised, either singly or in association with other people, for any of the activities in which investment by persons resident outside India is prohibited, namely:

a. The business of chit fund, or

b. Nidhi Company, or

c. Agricultural or plantation activities or in the real estate business, or construction of farm-houses, or

d. Trading in Transferable Development Rights (TDRs).

Explanation: For item (c) above, real estate business shall not include the development of townships, construction of residential/ commercial premises, roads, or bridges;

v. the loan amount should be credited to the NRO a/c of the NRI / PIO. The credit of such loan amount may be treated as an eligible credit to NRO a/c;

vi. the loan amount shall not be remitted outside India; and

vii. repayment of loan shall be made by way of inward remittances through normal banking channels or by debit to the Non-resident Ordinary (NRO) / Non-resident External (NRE) / Foreign Currency Non-resident (FCNR) account of the borrower or out of the sale proceeds of the shares or securities or immovable property against which such loan was granted.

B.5 Borrowing and Lending Transactions  between NRIs

∗ ECB Regulations do not cover any situation of borrowing and lending in India between two NRIs.

∗ However, in line with our view discussed in paragraph A.3.f, NRI may grant a sum of money as a loan to another NRI from their NRO bank account to the NRO bank account of another NRI, as transfers between NRO accounts are considered permissible debits and credits. The expression transfer, as defined under section 2(ze) of FEMA, includes in its purview even a loan transaction. Similarly, granting a sum of money as a loan from an NRE account to another NRE account belonging to another NRI is also allowed without restrictions.

∗ However, a loan from an NRO account to the NRE account of another NRI, or vice versa, may not be allowed in our view, as the regulations concerning permissible debits and credits for NRE and NRO accounts do not specifically address such loan transactions.

B.6 Effect of Change of Residential Status on Repayment of Loan

∗ As per Schedule I of ECB Regulations, repayment of loans is permitted as long as the borrower complies with ECB parameters of maintaining the minimum average maturity period. Additionally, borrowers can convert their ECB loans into equity under specific circumstances, provided they adhere to both ECB guidelines and regulations governing such conversions, such as compliance with NDI Rules, pricing guidelines, and reporting compliances under ECB regulations as well as NDI Rules.

∗ Additionally, there may be situations where, after a loan has been granted, the residential status of either the lender or the borrower changes. Such situations are envisaged in the Regulation 8 of ECB Regulations. The following table outlines how the loan can be serviced in those situations of changes in residential status:

∗ Furthermore, it is to be noted here that not all cases of residential status have been envisaged under ECB Regulations such as those given below and, therefore, may require prior RBI permission in the absence of clarity.

INCOME TAX ASPECT OF LOAN

B.7 Applicability of Transfer Pricing Provisions under the Income Tax Act, 1961

Section 92B(1), which deals with the meaning of international transactions includes lending or borrowing of money. Further, explanation (i)(c) of Section 92B states as follows: capital financing, including any type of long-term or short-term borrowing, lending or guarantee, purchase or sale of marketable securities or any type of advance, payments or deferred payment or receivable or any other debt arising during the course of business.

As per Section 92A of the Income Tax Act, NRI can become associated enterprises in cases such as (i) NRI holds, directly or indirectly, shares carrying not less than 26 per cent of the voting power in the other enterprise; (ii) more than half of the board of directors or members of the governing board, or one or more executive directors or executive members of the governing board of one enterprise, are appointed by NRI; (iii) a loan advanced by NRI to the other enterprise constitutes not less than fifty-one per cent of the book value of the total assets of the other enterprise, etc.

Hence, the borrowing or lending transaction between associated enterprises is construed as an international transaction and is required to comply with the transfer pricing provisions. Section 92(1) states that any income arising from an international transaction shall be computed having regard to the arm’s length principle. Consequently, financing transactions will be subjected to the arm’s length principle and are required to be benchmarked based on certain factors such as the nature and purpose of the loan, contractual terms, credit rating, geographical location, default risk, payment terms, availability of finance, currency, tenure of loan, need benefit test of loan, etc.

For benchmarking Income-tax Act does not prescribe any particular method to determine the arm’s length price with respect to borrowing/ lending transactions. However, the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (‘CUP’) method is often applied to test the arm’s length nature of borrowing/ lending transactions. The CUP method compares the price charged or paid in related party transactions to the price charged or paid in unrelated party transactions. Further, it has been held by various judicial precedents1 that the rate of interest prevailing in the jurisdiction of the borrower has to be adopted and currency would be that in which transaction has taken place. In this case, it would be the international benchmark rate.

To simplify certain aspects, Safe Harbour Rules (‘SHR’) are also in place, which now cover the advancement of loans denominated in INR as well as foreign currency. The SHR specifies certain profit margins and transfer pricing methodologies that taxpayers can adopt for various types of transactions. The SHR is updated and periodically extended for application to the international transactions of advancing of loans.


1   Tata Autocomp Systems Limited [2015] 56 taxmann.com 206 (Bombay); 
Aurionpro Solutions Limited [2018] 95 taxmann.com 657 (Bombay)

B.8 Applicability of Section 94B of the Income Tax Act, 1961

Further, to address the aspect of base erosion, India has also introduced section 94B to limit the interest expense deduction based on EBITDA. Section 94B applies to Indian companies and permanent establishments of foreign companies that have raised debt from a foreign-associated enterprise. The section imposes a limit on the deduction of interest expenses. The deduction is restricted to 30 per cent of the earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA). This provision may apply when NRI, being an AE, advances a loan to an Indian entity over and above the application of transfer pricing.

B.9 Applicability of Section 40A(2) of the Income Tax Act, 1961

Section 40A(2) of the Income Tax Act deals with the disallowance of certain expenses that are deemed excessive or unreasonable when incurred in transactions with related parties. When transfer pricing regulations are applicable for transactions with associated enterprises, the provisions of Section 40A(2) are not applicable.

As a result, in scenarios where transfer pricing provisions apply (for instance, when shareholding exceeds 26 per cent), both transfer pricing regulations and Section 94B will come into effect. In such cases, Section 40A(2) will not apply. Conversely, in situations where transfer pricing provisions do not apply (for example, when shareholding is 25 per cent, which is the minimum percentage required under ECB Regulations to be considered a foreign equity holder eligible for granting a loan), Section 40A(2) will be applicable, and the provisions of transfer pricing and Section 94B will not become applicable.

B.10 Applicability of Section 68 of the Income Tax Act, 1961

Same as discussed in the gift portion in paragraph A.8 of this article. Additionally, the resident borrower also needs to explain the source of source for loan availed by NRIs.

B.11 Applicability of Section 2(22)(e) of the Income Tax Act, 1961

In a case where the loan is granted by the Indian company in foreign exchange to the employees of their branches outside India (who are also the shareholders of the company) for personal purposes as permitted under ECB Regulations, implications of Section 2(22)(e) need to be examined.

C. Deposits from NRIs — FEMA Aspects

Acceptance of deposits from NRIs has been dealt with in Notification No. FEMA 5(R)/2016-RB – Foreign Exchange Management (Deposit) Regulations, 2016, as amended from time to time.

According to this, a company registered under the Companies Act, 2013 or a body corporate, proprietary concern, or a firm in India may accept deposits from a non-resident Indian or a person of Indian origin on a non-repatriation basis, subject to the terms and conditions as tabled below:

It may be noted that the firm may not include LLP for the above purpose.

CONCLUSION

FEMA, being a dynamic subject, one needs to verify the regulations at the time of entering into various transactions. An attempt has been made to cover various issues concerning gifts and loan transactions between NRIs and Residents as well as amongst NRIs. However, they may not be comprehensive, and every situation cannot be envisaged and covered in an article. Moreover, there are some issues where provisions are not clear and/or are open to more than one interpretation, and hence, one may take appropriate advice from experts/authorized dealers or write to RBI. It is always better to take a conservative view and fall on the right side of the law in case of doubt.

Gifts and Loans – By and To Non-Resident Indians: Part I

Editor’s Note on NRI Series:

This is the 8th article in the ongoing NRI Series dealing with Income-tax and FEMA issues related to NRIs. This article is divided in two parts. The first part published here deals with important aspects of Gifts by and to NRIs. The second part will deal with important aspects of Loans by and to NRIs. Readers may refer to earlier issues of BCAJ covering various aspects of this Series: (1) NRI — Interplay of Tax and FEMA Issues — Residence of Individuals under the Income-tax Act — December 2023; (2) Residential Status of Individuals — Interplay with Tax Treaty – January 2024; (3) Decoding Residential Status under FEMA — March 2023; (4) Immovable Property Transactions: Direct Tax and FEMA issues for NRIs — April 2024; (5) Emigrating Residents and Returning NRIs Part I — June 2024; (6) Emigrating Residents and Returning NRIs Part II — August 2024; (7) Bank Accounts and Repatriation Facilities for Non-Residents — October 2024.

INTRODUCTION

The Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA) of 1999 is a significant piece of legislation in India that governs foreign exchange transactions aimed at facilitating external trade and payments while ensuring the orderly development of the foreign exchange market.

Enacted on 1st June, 2000, FEMA replaced the earlier, more restrictive Foreign Exchange Regulation Act (FERA) of 1973, reflecting a shift toward a more liberalized economic framework. The Act establishes a regulatory structure for managing foreign exchange and balancing payments, providing clear guidelines for individuals and businesses engaged in such transactions.

It designates banks as authorized dealers, allowing them to facilitate foreign exchange operations. FEMA distinguishes between current account transactions and capital account transactions. Current account transactions, which include trade in goods and services, remittances, and other day-to-day financial operations, are generally permitted without prior approval, reflecting a more open approach to international commerce. In contrast, capital account transactions, which encompass foreign investments and loans, are subject to specific regulations. Furthermore, the Act includes provisions for enforcement through the Directorate of Enforcement, establishing penalties for violations.

This article will delve into the provisions governing gifting and loans involving Non-Resident Indians (NRIs), including the relevant implications under the Income Tax Act, 1961 (ITA) as applicable. Understanding these provisions is crucial for NRIs, as they navigate financial transactions across borders while remaining compliant with Indian tax laws. Further, within the gifting and loan sections, respectively, we will first deal with the FEMA provisions and, after that, Income Tax provisions dealing with gifting or loans as the case may be.

To start, it’s essential to understand the definition of NRIs. The term NRI has been defined in several notifications issued under the Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA), as outlined in the table below:

In essence, the term NRI is defined in several notifications issued under the Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA) to refer specifically to an individual who holds Indian citizenship but resides outside of India. This definition captures a broad range of individuals who may live abroad for various reasons, including employment, business pursuits, education, or family commitments.

Further, kindly note that we are not dealing with the provisions concerning the overseas citizen of India cardholder (‘OCIs’) in this article. Overseas Citizen of India means an individual resident outside India who is registered as an overseas citizen of India cardholder under section 7(A) of the Citizenship Act, 1955.

FEMA ASPECT OF GIFTING

A. Gifting to and from NRIs

Let us briefly delve into whether the gifting transaction is a capital or a current account transaction. A capital account transaction means a transaction that alters the assets or liabilities, including contingent liabilities, outside India of persons resident in India or assets or liabilities in India of persons resident outside India and includes transactions referred to in sub-section (3) of section 61. A current account transaction means a transaction other than a capital account transaction and includes certain specified transactions. In our view, gifting transactions can be classified as either capital or current account transactions, depending on the specific circumstances. For instance, when an Indian resident receives a gift as bank inward remittance from a non-resident, this transaction does not change the resident’s assets or liabilities in any foreign jurisdiction nor alters the assets or liabilities of a non-resident in India. As a result, it can be viewed as a current account transaction, primarily affecting the resident’s income without altering any existing financial obligations abroad. On the other hand, if an Indian resident gifts the sum of money in the NRO account in India of a non-resident, this situation will be categorized as a capital account transaction since this impacts the non-resident’s assets in India.


  1. Though the definition refers to section 6(3) of FEMA, section 6(3) of FEMA is omitted asof the date of this article. Instead, Section 6(2) and Section 6(2A) are amended to covertheerstwhile provisions of Section 6(3) of FEMA.

Now that we have clarified the meaning of the term NRI, we can proceed to explore the provisions under FEMA related to gifting various assets by individuals residing in India to NRIs, whether those assets are located in India or abroad. Understanding these provisions is essential for both residents and NRIs, as they outline the legal framework governing the transfer of gifts across borders. Under FEMA, certain guidelines specify how and what types of assets can be gifted, along with the necessary compliance requirements to ensure that these transactions adhere to regulatory standards.

A.1 FEMA Provisions — Gifting from PRI to NRI

a. Gifting of Equity Instruments of an Indian company

i. The expression equity instruments have been defined in Rule 2(k) of FEM (Non-debt Instruments) Rules, 2019 (‘NDI Rules’) as equity shares, compulsorily convertible preference shares, compulsorily convertible debentures, and share warrants issued by an Indian company.

ii. NDI Rules categorically include the provision concerning the transfer of equity instruments of an Indian company by or to a person resident outside India (‘PROI’)/ NRIs.

iii. Specifically, Rule 9(4) of NDI Rules provides that a person resident in India holding equity instruments of an Indian company is permitted to transfer the same by way of gift to PROI after seeking prior approval of RBI subject to the following conditions:

  •  The donee is eligible to hold such a security under the Schedules of these Rules;
  •  The gift does not exceed 5 per cent of the paid-up capital of the Indian company or each series of debentures or each mutual fund scheme [Paid-up capital is to be calculated basis the face value of shares of an Indian company.]
  • The applicable sectoral cap in the Indian company is not breached;
  • The donor and the donee shall be “relatives” within the meaning in clause (77) of section 2 of the Companies Act, 2013;
  •  The value of security to be transferred by the donor, together with any security transferred to any person residing outside India as a gift during the financial year, does not exceed the rupee equivalent of fifty thousand US Dollars [For the value of security, the fair value of an Indian company is required to be taken into consideration;]
  • Such other conditions as considered necessary in the public interest by the Central Government.

iv. Consequently, it is clear that when a Person Resident in India (PRI) intends to gift equity instruments to a Non-Resident Indian (NRI), this action is permitted only after obtaining prior approval from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) and subject to satisfaction of terms and conditions as mentioned in Rule 9(4) of NDI Rules.

v. This leads us to a critical question under FEMA: does gifting equity instruments on a non-repatriable basis also necessitate prior approval from the RBI, considering the fact that non-repatriable is akin to domestic investment?

  •  Rule 9(4) of the Non-Debt Instruments (NDI) Rules does not clearly specify whether prior approval from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) is required for either repatriable or non-repatriable transfers of equity instruments. Hence, the first perspective is that since Rule 9(4) of NDI Rules does not distinguish between repatriable and non-repatriable investments, even gifting of shares on a non-repatriable basis should be subjected to the terms and conditions specified in Rule 9(4) of NDI Rules.
  •  The second perspective is that non-repatriable investments are viewed as analogous to domestic investments, suggesting that they operate similarly to transactions conducted between two resident Indians. In this light, the gifting of equity instruments of an Indian company should be permitted under the automatic route, thereby eliminating the need for prior RBI approval. This interpretation aligns with the notion that since the funds remain within India’s borders and are not intended for repatriation, the transaction should not pose risks to the foreign exchange regulations.

vi. Additionally, it is to be noted that LRS provisions do not apply in the case of gifting of equity instruments of Indian companies by PRI to NRI.

b. Gifting of other securities such as units of mutual fund, ETFs, etc

i. Schedule III of the NDI Rules addresses the sale of units of domestic mutual funds, whereas the FEMA (Debt Instruments) Regulations, 2019, focuses specifically on the purchase, sale, and redemption of specified securities. Neither of these regulations explicitly mentions the gifting of such units or securities. Further, the term ‘transfer’ is also not used under these provisions to permit the gifting of such assets. As a result, a question arises regarding whether these securities can be gifted to Non-Resident Indians (NRIs) under the automatic route.

ii. Given that the rules and regulations do not explicitly outline the provisions for gifting, it is prudent to seek prior approval from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) before proceeding with such transactions. This approach helps mitigate the risk of violating FEMA provisions, ensuring compliance and legal clarity in the transaction process.

c. Gifting of immovable property in India

i. Acquisition and transfer of immovable property in India by an NRI is governed by the provisions of the NDI Rules.

ii. Rule 24(b) of NDI Rules permits NRI to acquire any immovable property in India (other than agricultural land or farmhouse in India) by way of a gift from a person resident in India who is a relative as defined in section 2(77) of Companies Act, 2013. Thus, NRI cannot receive agricultural land or farm house by way of a gift from PRI even if it is from a relative.

iii. The relative definition of the Companies Act, 2013 covers the following persons:

iv. As a consequence, gifting by only relatives as covered above is permitted in the case of immovable property in India. Thus, if the resident grandfather wishes to gift immovable property to his NRI grandson, such gifting will not be permitted under the contours of FEMA.

v. This limitation on gifting can have significant implications for families, particularly when it comes to wealth transfer and estate planning. For instance, if the resident grandfather wants to ensure that his grandson benefits from the property, he will not be able to gift property to his grandson.

vi. Additionally, it is to be noted that LRS provisions do not apply in the case of gifting of immovable properties by PRI to NRI.

d. Gifting of immovable property outside India

i. The acquisition and transfer of immovable property outside India are governed by the provisions set forth in the Foreign Exchange Management (Overseas Investments) Rules, 2022 (‘OI Rules’).

ii. This brings up an important question: are resident individuals permitted to transfer immovable property outside India to Non-Resident Indians (NRIs)?

iii. Rule 21 of the OI Rules specifically addresses the provisions related to the acquisition or transfer of immovable property located outside India. Within this rule, Rule 21(2)(iv) explicitly states that a person resident in India can transfer immovable property outside the country as a gift only to someone who is also a resident of India. This means that the recipient of the gift must reside in India to qualify for such a transfer. Consequently, gifting immovable property outside India by a resident individual to an NRI is not permitted within the framework of FEMA regulations.

e. Gifting of foreign equity capital

i. To determine whether gifting of foreign equity capital from a PRI to an NRI is allowed, it is essential to consider the provisions outlined in the OI Rules and the Foreign Exchange Management (Overseas Investment) Regulations, 2022 (‘OI Regulations’). Additionally, RBI has also issued Master Direction on Foreign Exchange Management (Overseas Investment) Directions, 2022, specifying/detailing certain provisions concerning overseas investments.

ii. Rule 2(e) of the OI Rules defines equity capital as equity shares, perpetual capital, or instruments that are irredeemable, as well as contributions to the non-debt capital of a foreign entity, specifically in the form of fully and compulsorily convertible instruments. Therefore, it primarily includes equity shares, compulsorily convertible preference shares, and compulsorily convertible debentures.

iii. Schedule III of the OI Rules addresses the provisions related to the acquisition of assets through gifts or inheritance. However, it does not explicitly mention the scenario where a Person Resident in India (PRI) gifts foreign securities to a Non-Resident Indian (NRI). This implied that PRI is not permitted to gift foreign equity capital to NRI under the automatic route. This interpretation is also supported by the Master Direction, which clearly states that resident individuals are prohibited from transferring any overseas investments as gifts to individuals residing outside India. The definition of the term ‘overseas investment’ includes financial commitment made in foreign equity capital.

f. Gifting through bank / cash transfers

i. Master Direction on Liberalised Remittance Scheme (‘LRS Master Direction’) outlines the provisions concerning gifting by PRIs to NRIs through bank transfers.

ii. As per the LRS Master Direction, a resident individual is permitted to remit up to USD 250,000 per FY as a gift to NRIs. Whereas, for rupee gifts, a resident individual is permitted to make a rupee gift to an NRI who is a relative (as defined in section 2(77) of the Companies Act) by way of a crossed cheque/ electronic transfer. However, it is to be noted that the gift amount should only be credited to the NRO account of the non-resident.

iii. A significant question arises regarding whether a resident individual who has opened an overseas bank account under LRS is permitted to gift funds from that account to a person residing outside India. This question involves two differing interpretations of the regulations. One perspective posits that when a resident individual gifts money from an overseas LRS bank account, it alters their overseas assets. This change is seen as a capital account transaction, which is subject to stricter regulations under FEMA. Since gifting is not explicitly allowed under FEMA for capital account transactions, this view concludes that such gifts cannot be made. Additionally, the LRS Master Direction states that funds in the LRS bank account should remain available for the resident individual’s use, suggesting that any transfer of those funds, including gifting, would not be permissible. Conversely, another view is that LRS intends to allow the utilization of funds for both permitted capital account transactions and current account transactions. Thus, gifting being a permitted transaction under LRS, it should be permitted from overseas bank accounts too. For example, since residents are allowed to use their overseas LRS bank accounts to cover travel expenses, it stands to reason that gifting funds from these accounts should also be acceptable.

iv. Furthermore, concerning the gifting of cash to any person resident outside India by the PRI, it is crucial to that emphasize PRI is not permitted to give cash gifts to individuals residing outside India while the PROI is present in India or abroad. This prohibition stems from Section 3(a) of FEMA, which specifically forbids any person who is not an authorized person from engaging in transactions involving foreign exchange. The term ‘transfer’ under FEMA encompasses a wide range of transactions, including gifting. This means that any act of gifting cash or other forms of foreign exchange to a non-resident is treated as a transfer and is, therefore, subject to the same restrictions.

v. Thus, in a nutshell, while gifts in foreign currency can be sent to any person resident outside India, irrespective of their relationship with the donor, rupee gifts are strictly limited to those individuals defined as relatives. Also, cash gifting is prohibited.

g. Gifting of movable assets such as jewelry, paintings, cars, etc

i. Given that the FEMA regulations do not clearly outline provisions for gifting such movable assets located either in India or outside India, it is prudent to seek prior approval from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) before proceeding with such transactions. This approach helps mitigate the risk of violating FEMA provisions while ensuring compliance at the same time.

A.2 FEMA Provisions — Gifting from NRI to PRI

a. Gifting of Equity Instruments of an Indian Company

i. Rule 13 of NDI Rules, which specifically covers the provisions concerning the transfer of equity instruments by NRIs, does not contain any specific provision wherein NRIs are permitted to transfer by way of gift equity instruments of Indian companies to a person resident in India. However, Rule 9 of NDI Rules, which covers the transfer of equity instruments of an Indian company by or to a person resident outside India, covers the provision concerning the transfer of equity instruments of an Indian company by way of a gift from a person resident outside India to a person resident in India. Since NRIs are categorized as a person residing outside India, Rule 9 can also be said to apply to the aforesaid situation.
ii. Specifically, Rule 9(2) of NDI Rules provides that a person resident outside India holding equity instruments of an Indian company is permitted to transfer the same by way of sale or gift to PRI under automatic route subject to fulfillment of certain conditions such as pricing guidelines, compliance if repatriable investment, SEBI norms as applicable, etc.

iii. As a consequence, NRI is freely permitted to
transfer equity instruments of an Indian company by way of a gift to PRI in accordance with FEMA rules and regulations.

b. Gifting of other securities such as units of mutual fund, ETFs, etc

i. As discussed in paragraph A.1.b, Schedule III of NDI Rules, as well as FEMA (Debt Instruments) Regulations, 2019, do not clearly outline provisions for gifting of these instruments. Hence, it is advisable to seek prior approval from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) before proceeding with such transactions.

c. Gifting of immovable property in India

i. The acquisition and transfer of immovable property in India by non-resident Indians (NRIs) are regulated by the NDI Rules.

ii. According to Rule 24(d) of these rules, NRIs can transfer any immovable property in India to a resident person or transfer non-agricultural land, farmhouses, or plantation properties to another NRI.

iii. However, an important point of consideration is that Rule 24(d) does not explicitly mention whether transfers can occur through sale or gift. This ambiguity necessitates a closer examination of the term ‘transfer’ to determine if it encompasses gifts.

iv. Although the term ‘transfer’ is not defined in Rule 2 of the NDI Rules, Rule 2(2) states that terms not defined in the rules will carry the meanings assigned to them in relevant Acts, rules, and regulations. Thus, we need to check if ‘transfer’ is defined in the Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA). Section 2(ze) of FEMA defines ‘transfer’ to encompass various forms, including sale, purchase, exchange, mortgage, pledge, gift, loan, and any other method of transferring rights, title, possession, or lien. Therefore, gifts are included within the definition of ‘transfer’ under FEMA.
v. As a result, NRIs are allowed to transfer immovable property in India to any resident person in accordance with Rule 24(d) of the NDI Rules, along with Rule 2(2) and Section 2(ze) of FEMA.

d. Gifting of immovable property outside India

i. The acquisition and transfer of immovable property outside India are governed by the Foreign Exchange Management (Overseas Investments) Rules, 2022 (referred to as the OI Rules).

ii. Rule 21 of the OI Rules specifically addresses the acquisition and transfer of immovable property outside India. Notably, Rule 21(2)(ii) permits PRIs to acquire immovable property outside India from persons resident outside India (PROIs). However, this rule does not explicitly allow for acquisition through gifting from NRIs; it only permits acquisition through inheritance, purchase using RFC funds, or under the Liberalized Remittance Scheme (LRS), among other methods. Rule 21(2)(i) allows PRIs to acquire immovable property by gift, but only from other PRIs.

iii. Thus, it emerges that PRIs are not permitted to receive immovable property as a gift from NRIs.

e. Gifting of foreign equity capital

i. To determine whether gifting foreign equity capital from a person resident in India (PRI) to a Non-Resident Indian (NRI) is allowed, it is essential to consider the provisions outlined in the OI Rules and the Foreign Exchange Management (Overseas Investment) Regulations, 2022 (‘OI Regulations’).

ii. Rule 2(e) of the OI Rules defines equity capital as equity shares, perpetual capital, or instruments that are irredeemable, as well as contributions to the non-debt capital of a foreign entity, specifically in the form of fully and compulsorily convertible instruments.

iii. Schedule III of the OI Rules outlines the provisions regarding how resident individuals can make overseas investments. It specifically allows resident individuals to acquire foreign securities as a gift from any person residing outside India. However, this acquisition is subject to the regulations established under the Foreign Contribution (Regulation) Act, 2010 (42 of 2010) and the associated rules and regulations.

iv. As a result, PRIs are permitted to receive foreign securities as a gift from NRIs.

f. Gifting through bank/ cash transfers

i. Under FEMA, there are no restrictions on receiving gifts via bank transfer by PRI from NRI. However, it is to be noted that PRI is not permitted to accept gifts from a person resident outside India/ NRI in their overseas bank account opened under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme since the LRS account can only be used for putting through all the transactions connected with or arising from remittances eligible under the LRS.

ii. Similar to what has been discussed in paragraph A.1.f.iv, gifting cash by NRI to PRI is not permitted.

g. Gifting of movable assets such as jewelry, paintings, cars, etc

i. Given that the FEMA regulations do not clearly outline provisions for gifting such movable  assets located either in India or outside India, it is advisable to seek prior approval from the  Reserve Bank of India (RBI) before proceeding with such transactions.

A.3 FEMA Provisions — Gifting between NRIs

a. Gifting of Equity Instruments of an Indian Company

i. Rule 13 of NDI Rules, which specifically covers the provisions concerning the transfer of equity instruments by NRIs, contains the provisions for gifting equity instruments to another NRI.

ii. Rule 13(3) of NDI Rules specifically permits NRI to transfer the equity instruments of an Indian Company to a person resident outside India (on a repatriable basis) by way of gift with prior RBI approval and subject to the following terms and conditions:

  • The donee is eligible to hold such a security under the Schedules of these Rules;
  • The gift does not exceed 5 per cent of the paid-up capital of the Indian company or each series of debentures or each mutual fund scheme [Paid-up capital is to be calculated basis the face value of shares of an Indian company.]
  • The applicable sectoral cap in the Indian company is not breached;
    • The donor and the donee shall be “relatives” within the meaning in clause (77) of section 2 of the Companies Act, 2013;
  • The value of security to be transferred by the donor, together with any security transferred to any person residing outside India as a gift during the financial year, does not exceed the rupee equivalent of fifty thousand US Dollars [For the value of security, the fair value of an Indian company is required to be taken into consideration;]
  •  Such other conditions as considered necessary in the public interest by the Central Government.

iii. Further, as per Rule 13(4) of NDI Rules, NRI is permitted to transfer equity instruments of an Indian company to another NRI under the automatic route provided such NRI would hold shares on a non-repatriation basis.

iv. Hence, in a nutshell, for repatriable transfer of shares by way of gift, prior RBI approval is required whereas, in the case of non-repatriable transfers, RBI approval is not required.

b. Gifting of other securities such as units of mutual fund, ETFs, etc

i. As discussed in paragraph A.1.b, Schedule III of NDI Rules, as well as FEMA (Debt Instruments) Regulations, 2019, do not clearly outline provisions for gifting of these instruments. Hence, it is advisable to seek prior approval from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) before proceeding with such transactions.

c. Gifting of immovable property in India

i. According to Rule 24(e) of NDI Rules, NRI is permitted to transfer any immovable property other than agricultural land or a farmhouse or plantation property to another NRI. However, an important point of consideration is that Rule 24(e) does not
explicitly mention whether transfers can occur through sale or gift.

ii. As discussed in paragraph A.1.c, section 2(ze) of FEMA defines ‘transfer’ to encompass various forms, including sale, purchase, exchange, mortgage, pledge, gift, loan, and any other method of transferring rights, title, possession, or lien. Therefore, gifts are included within the definition of ‘transfer’ under FEMA.
iii. As a result, NRIs are allowed to transfer immovable property in India to another NRI in accordance with Rule 24(e) of the NDI Rules read with Rule 2(2) of NDI Rules and Section 2(ze) of FEMA. It is to be noted that the transfer of agricultural land or a farmhouse or plantation property by way of gift to another NRI is prohibited.

d. Gifting of immovable property outside India

i. This transaction falls outside the regulatory framework of FEMA, meaning it is not subject to its restrictions or requirements. As a result, it is permitted and can be carried out without any regulatory concerns or limitations imposed by FEMA.

e. Gifting of foreign equity capital

i. This transaction falls outside the regulatory framework of FEMA, meaning it is not subject to its restrictions or requirements. As a result, it is permitted and can be carried out without any regulatory concerns or limitations imposed by FEMA.

f. Gifting through bank/ cash transfers

i. Under FEMA, NRI can freely gift money from their NRO bank account to the NRO bank account of another NRI, as transfers between NRO accounts are considered permissible debits and credits. Similarly, gifting money from one NRE account to another NRE account belonging to another NRI is also allowed without restrictions.

ii. However, the question comes up regarding whether it is allowed to gift money from an NRO account to the NRE account of another NRI or from an NRE account to the NRO account of another NRI. In our view, this may not be permissible, as the regulations regarding permissible debits and credits for NRE and NRO accounts do not explicitly cover this type of gifting transaction and restrict it to the same category of accounts.

iii. Furthermore, concerning the gifting of cash to any person resident outside India, as discussed in paragraph A.1.f.iv, gifting cash by NRI to NRI is not permitted.

g. Gifting of movable assets such as jewelry, paintings, cars, etc

i. Given that the FEMA regulations do not clearly outline provisions for gifting such movable assets situated in India, it is advisable to seek prior approval from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) before proceeding with such transactions.

A.4 Applicability of the Foreign Contribution (Regulation) Act, 2010

The Foreign Contribution (Regulation) Act, 2010 (‘FCRA’) governs the acceptance and utilization of foreign contributions by individuals and organizations in India. As per the Foreign Contribution (Regulation) Act, 2010, foreign contribution means the donation, delivery, or transfer made by any foreign source of any article, currency (whether Indian or foreign), or any security as defined in Securities Contracts (Regulations) Act, 1956 as well as foreign security as defined in FEMA. Thus, receipt of the above assets by PRI from foreign sources will trigger the applicability of FCRA. Hence, it is pertinent to analyze the definition of the term ‘foreign source’ as specified in FCRA.

It is important to highlight here that NRIs are not classified as a ‘foreign source’ under the provisions of FCRA. This distinction is crucial because it implies that gifts received from NRIs are not subjected to the stringent regulations that govern foreign contributions. Consequently, PRIs can freely acquire such gifts without falling under the scrutiny of FCRA.

INCOME TAX ASPECTS OF GIFTING

A.5 Applicability of Section 56 of the Income Tax Act, 1961

The framework of Section 56:

Section 56 of the Income-tax Act, of 1961, is primarily concerned with income that does not fall under other heads of income, such as salaries, house property, or business income. This section covers “Income from Other Sources” and serves as a residual category for various types of income that cannot be specifically classified under other heads.

This section deals, inter alia, with the taxability of gifts and the transfer of property under specific “conditions.This section was introduced to prevent tax avoidance by transferring assets or property without proper consideration (gifting) as a method to evade taxes.

Applicability:

As per this section, any person who receives income from any individual or individuals on or after 1st April, 2017, will have that income chargeable to tax. The ‘income’ types are outlined in the table below:

*Proviso to section 56(2)(x)(b)
** The Finance Act 2018 introduced a safe harbor limit set at 5 per cent of the actual consideration. However, the Finance Act 2020 increased this limit to 10 per cent of the actual consideration.

Exemption:

Though the list of exemptions is exhaustive, we have included key exemptions that are specifically pertinent concerning the gifting aspects only.

1. Any sum of money or any property received from any relative

The term “relative” shall be construed in the same manner as defined in the explanation to clause (vii) of Section 56(2), which delineates the definition of “relative” as follows:

Relative means:

i. In the case of an individual—

(A) spouse of the individual;

(B) brother or sister of the individual;

(C) brother or sister of the spouse of the individual;

(D) brother or sister of either of the parents of the individual;

(E) any lineal ascendant or descendant of the individual;

(F) any lineal ascendant or descendant of the spouse of the individual;

(G) spouse of the person referred to in items (B) to (F); and

ii. in the case of a Hindu undivided family, any member thereof,

2. Any sum of money or any property received on the occasion of the marriage of the individual

a. Scope of Exemption: Money or property received by the individual on their marriage is exempt under Section 56(2)(x), excluding gifts to parents. Further, the gifting of money or property, etc. will eventually be subjected to FEMA applicability as well in cross-border transaction cases.

b. No Monetary Limit: No limits on the value of gifts.

c. Sources of Gifts: Gifts can come from anyone, not just relatives.

d. Timing of Gifts: Gifts received before or after the wedding are exempt if related to the marriage.

A.6 Applicability of Clubbing Provisions under the Income Tax Act, 1961

Section 64 of the Income Tax Act, 1961, (ITA) addresses the taxation of income that arises from the transfer of assets to certain relatives, specifically focusing on preventing tax avoidance strategies that involve shifting income-generating assets. It aims to ensure that income from such assets is ultimately taxed in the hands of the original owner, thereby maintaining fairness in the taxation system.

The provisions of Section 64 concerning the clubbing of income is summarised in the table below:

Particulars Provisions
Income of Spouse Transfer of Assets:

If a non-resident individual (let’s say Mr. A) transfers an asset such as an immovable property located outside India or equity shares of Apple Inc. to his Indian resident spouse (Mrs. A) without adequate compensation, any income generated from that asset — such as rental income from the house or dividends from shares — will be treated as Mr. A’s income.

 

Whether capital gains pre-exemption or post-exemption to be clubbed:

The High Court of Kerala, in the case of Vasavan2, while interpreting Section 64 of ITA, held that the assessing authority was bound to treat the ‘capital gains’ which, but for Section 64 should have been assessed in the hands of the wife, as the capital gains of the assessee was liable to be assessed in his hands in the same way in which the same would have been assessed in the hands of the wife”.

Therefore, based on the above judicial pronouncements, one may claim that the capital gain income first needs to be computed in the hands of the spouse, and thereafter, capital gain income remaining net of allowable exemptions under Section 54/ Section 54F needs to be clubbed in the hands of husband for computing his total income in India.

Income of Minor Child Clubbing of Income:

Any income earned by a minor child, including income from gifts received, will be clubbed with the income of the parent whose total income is higher. This applies to all minor children of the individual.

Exemption:

There is a specific exemption of up to ₹1,500 per child for income derived from the assets of the minor. If the income exceeds this limit, the excess amount is clubbed with the income of the parent.

Income of Disabled Child Separate Assessment:

If a minor child is physically or mentally disabled, their income is not subject to clubbing provisions, allowing the child’s income to be assessed separately. This recognition acknowledges the unique circumstances and financial burdens that may arise from disability.

Income from Assets Transferred to Daughter-in-Law If an individual transfers assets to his daughter-in-law, any income generated from those assets will also be clubbed with the income of the transferor.
Transfer of Assets and Adequate Consideration The clubbing provisions apply specifically to transfers made without adequate consideration. If the transferor receives fair value in exchange for the asset (like selling an asset), the income generated from that asset will not be subject to clubbing.

 


2   [1992] 197 ITR 163 (Kerala)

A.7 Applicability of Section 9(i)(viii) of the Income Tax Act, 1961

1. Introduction:

Till AY 20–21, no provision in the Act covered income of the type mentioned in section 56(2)(x) if it did not accrue or arise in India (e.g. gifts given to a non-resident outside India). Such gifts, therefore, escaped tax in India. To plug this gap, the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2019 inserted section 9(1)(viii) with effect from the assessment year 2020–21 to provide that income of the nature referred to in section 2(24)(xviia) arising outside India from any sum of money paid, on or after 5th July, 2019, by a person resident in India to a non-resident or foreign company shall be deemed to accrue or arise in India.

2. Key Provisions:

a. Conditions for Deeming Income:

i. There is a sum of money.

ii. The sum of money is paid on or after 5th July, 2019.

iii. The money is paid by a person resident in India.

iv. The money is paid to a non-resident3, not a company or to a foreign company.


3. We have not mentioned applicability to resident and not ordinarily resident since we are 
dealing with provisions concerning NRIs in this article.

b. Exclusions from Coverage:

i. Gifts of property situated in India are expressly excluded from the purview of this section: Section 56(2) refers to the sum of money as well as property. However, section 9(1)(viii) reads as ‘income … being any sum of money referred to in sub-clause (xviia) of clause (24) of section 2’. Thus, it refers only to the sum of money. Hence, a gift of property is not covered by section 9(1)(viii).

ii. The provision does not apply to gifts received by relatives or those made on the occasion of marriage, as specified in the proviso to section 56(2)(x) of the Income Tax Act.

iii. Gift of the sum of money by NRI to another NRI.

c. Threshold Limit:

i. Any monetary gift not exceeding ₹50,000 in a financial year remains exempt from classification as income under section 9(1)(viii).

A.8 Applicability of Section 68 of the Income Tax Act, 1961

Section 68 of the Income Tax Act imposes a tax on any credit appearing in an assessee’s books when the assessee fails to satisfactorily explain the nature and source of that credit. This provision operates as a deeming fiction, treating unexplained credits as income if the explanation provided is inadequate.

Under Section 68, the initial burden is on the assessee to demonstrate the nature and source of the credit. Judicial precedents have established that to satisfactorily explain a credited amount, the assessee must prove three key elements:

  •  Identity of the payer: The assessee must provide clear identification of the person or entity that made the payment. This includes details such as the payer’s name, address, and any relevant identification numbers.
  •  Payer’s capacity to advance the money: The assessee must show that the payer had the financial capacity to provide the funds. This could involve demonstrating that the payer had sufficient income, savings, or assets that would allow them to make such a payment.
  •  Genuineness of the transaction: Finally, the assessee needs to prove that the transaction was genuine and not a façade to disguise income. This could include providing documentation such as bank statements, agreements, or other relevant evidence supporting the legitimacy of the transaction.

It is also critical to understand that just because a transaction is taxable under Section 56(2)(x), it does not exempt it from consideration under Section 68. For example, consider Mr. A, who receives a gift of Rs. 1 crore from his non-resident son. This amount will not be taxable under Section 56(2)(x) because it falls within the definition of a relative, exempting it from tax. However, Mr. A will still have an obligation to prove the identity, capacity, and genuineness of this gifting transaction under Section 68 to ensure compliance with tax regulations.

When it comes to taxation, there are significant differences between these sections. If an addition is made under Section 56(2)(x), the income will be taxed at the individual’s applicable slab rate, allowing the taxpayer to claim deductions for any losses incurred as well as set-off of losses. In contrast, if the addition is made under Section 68, Section 115BBE applies, imposing a much higher tax rate of 60 per cent on the added income, with no allowance for any deductions or set-offs for losses.

A.9 Applicability of TCS Provision under the Income Tax Act, 1961

In order to widen and deepen the tax net, the Finance Act 2020 amended Section 206C and inserted Section 206(1G) to provide that an authorized dealer who is receiving an amount for remittance out of India from the buyer of foreign exchange, who is a person remitting such amount under LRS is required to collect tax at source (‘TCS’) as per the rates and threshold prescribed therein. Gifting to a person resident outside India either in foreign exchange or in Indian rupees is very well covered within the purview of LRS remittances.

As per the TCS provision as applicable currently, at the time of gift by PRI to NRI either in foreign exchange or in Indian rupees, the authorized dealer bank of PRI will collect the tax at source @ 20 per cent in case the gift amount is in excess of ₹7 lakh. The second part of this Article will deal with important aspects of “Loans by and to NRIs”.

Bank Accounts and Repatriation Facilities for Non-Residents

In this article, we have discussed the rules and regulations related to NRO, NRE, FCNR and other accounts pertaining to Non-residents under Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 (FEMA).

BANK ACCOUNTS

Opening, holding and maintaining accounts in India by a person resident outside India is regulated in terms of 6 section 6(3) of the FEMA, 1999 read with Foreign Exchange Management (Deposit) Regulations, 2016 (‘Deposit Regulations’) issued vide Notification No. FEMA 5(R)/2016-RB dated 1st April, 2016, Master Direction – Deposits and Accounts FED Master Direction No. 14/2015-16 dated 1st January, 2016 and FAQs on Accounts in India by Non-residents, updated from time to time, provides further guidance on the same.

An Authorised Dealer (AD) bank is permitted to open in India the following types of accounts for persons resident outside India:

i) Non-Resident (External) Account Scheme (NRE account) for a non-resident Indian (NRI) – Schedule 1 of the Deposit Regulations;

ii) Foreign Currency (Non-Resident) Account Banks Scheme, (FCNR(B) account) for a non-resident Indian – Schedule 2 of the Deposit Regulations;

iii) Non-Resident (Ordinary) Account Scheme (NRO account) for any person resident outside India – Schedule 3 of the Deposit Regulations;

iv) Special Non-Resident Rupee Account (SNRR account) for any person resident outside India having a business interest in India – Schedule 4 of the Deposit Regulations;

v) Escrow Account for resident or non-resident acquirers – Schedule 5 of the Deposit Regulations.

Currently, a company or a body corporate, a proprietary concern or a firm in India may accept deposits from an NRI or PIO on a non-repatriation basis only1 – Other conditions that apply to such deposits include:

  • Deposit should be for a maximum maturity period of three years.
  • Deposit can be received from NRO account only.
  • Rate of interest should not exceed the ceiling rate prescribed under the Companies (Acceptance of Deposit) Rules, 2014 / NBFC guidelines / directions issued by RBI.
  • Deposit shall not be utilised for relending (other than NBFC) or for undertaking agricultural/plantation activities or real estate business.
  • The amount of deposits accepted shall not be allowed to be repatriated outside India.

Under the current regulations, a company or a body corporate is not permitted to accept any fresh deposits on repatriation basis from an NRI or PIO. However, it is only permitted to renew the deposits which had already been accepted under the erstwhile Notification.


1 Refer Schedule 7 of the Deposit Regulations

KEY FEATURES OF NRE, FCNR (B) AND NRO ACCOUNTS

NRIs usually have majority of their earnings in foreign currency and thus their financial and investment objectives differ from residents. NRIs and PIOs are permitted to open and maintain accounts with authorised dealers and banks (including co-operative banks) authorised by the Reserve Bank to maintain such accounts. The major types of accounts that can be opened by an NRI2 or PIO3 in India include NRE, NRO and FCNR accounts. The key features of these accounts are as under:

NRE ACCOUNT

  • This account is denominated in Indian rupees, wherein proceeds of remittances to India can be deposited in any permitted currency;
  • The monies held in this account can be freely repatriated outside India;
  • Current income in India like rent, dividend, pension, interest, etc. can be deposited subject to payment of income taxes;
  • This account is subject to exchange rate fluctuations since the foreign currency earnings deposited into this account are converted into INR using the current exchange rate of the receiving bank;
  • Interest income earned from the NRE account is tax-free.

NRO ACCOUNT

  • A resident account needs to be redesignated as a NRO account when a person becomes non-resident. For this, the person becoming non-resident needs to submit the documentary evidences to prove his intentions to leave India for the purpose of employment, business or vocation or an uncertain period. Additionally, NRO account can be opened by a non-resident for any bonafide transactions. For further details, refer to the table below.
  • This account allows you to receive remittances in any permitted currency from outside India through banking channels or permitted currency tendered by the account holder during his temporary visit to India or transfers from rupee accounts of non-resident banks;
  • Repatriation from the NRO account can be done to the extent of USD 1 million for every financial year;
  • Income earned in India in the form of interest, dividend, rent, etc. can be deposited into this account;
  • This account is also subject to exchange rate fluctuations since the foreign currency deposited into this account are converted into INR using the current exchange rate of the receiving bank;
  • Interest income earned from the NRO account is not tax-free.

2 A ‘Non-resident Indian’ (NRI) is a person resident outside India who is a citizen of India.
3 ‘Person of Indian Origin (PIO)’ is a person resident outside India who is a citizen of any country other than Bangladesh or Pakistan, or such other country as may be specified by the Central Government, satisfying the following conditions: [PIO will include an OCI cardholder]
a) Who was a citizen of India by virtue of the Constitution of India or the Citizenship Act, 1955 (57 of 1955); or
b) Who belonged to a territory that became part of India after the 15th day of August, 1947; or
c) Who is a child or a grandchild or a great grandchild of a citizen of India or of a person referred to in clause (a) or (b); or
d) Who is a spouse of foreign origin of a citizen of India or spouse of foreign origin of a person referred to in clause (a) or (b) or (c)

ACCOUNT OPENED BY FOREIGN TOURISTS VISITING INDIA

In case of a current / savings account opened by a foreign tourist visiting India with funds remitted from outside India in a specified manner or by sale of foreign exchange brought by him into India, the balance in the NRO account may be paid to the account holder at the time of his departure from India provided the account has been maintained for a period not exceeding six months and the account has not been credited with any local funds, other than interest accrued thereon.

FCNR ACCOUNT

  • This is a term deposit account and not a savings account;
  • Monies can be deposited in any currency permitted by RBI i.e., a foreign currency which is freely convertible;
  • The deposits can range from a period of one to five years;
  • The principal amount and interest earned from the deposits are fully repatriable;
  • This account is not subject to exchange rate fluctuations since deposits and withdrawals are in foreign currency.
  • Income earned from FCNR account is tax-free.

A tabulated comparison of the three accounts is provided below for your reference:

Particulars NRE Account FCNR (B) Account NRO Account
NRIs and PIOs (Individuals / entities of Pakistan and Bangladesh require prior RBI approval) Any person resident outside India for putting through bonafide transactions in rupees.

Individuals / entities of Pakistan nationality / origin and entities of Bangladesh origin require prior RBI approval.

A Citizen of Bangladesh / Pakistan belonging to minority communities in those countries i.e., Hindus, Sikhs, Buddhists, Jains, Parsis, and Christians residing in India and who has been granted LTV* or whose application for LTV is under consideration, can open only one NRO account with an AD bank.

* Long Term Visa

Type of Account Savings, Current, Recurring, Fixed Deposit Term Deposit only Savings, Current, Recurring, Fixed Deposit
  From one to three years. However, banks are allowed to accept NRE deposits for a longer period i.e., above three years from their Asset-Liability point of view. For terms not less than 1 year and not more than 5 years. As applicable to resident accounts.
Permissible Credits i. Inward remittance from outside India.

ii. Proceeds of foreign currency/ bank notes tendered by account holder during his temporary visit to India.

iii. Interest accruing on the account

iv. Transfer from other NRE / FCNR(B) accounts.

v. Maturity or sale proceeds of investments (if such investments were made from this account or through inward remittance).

vi. Current income in India like rent, dividend, pension, interest, etc. is permissible subject to payment of taxes in India.

i. Inward remittances from outside India.

ii. Legitimate dues in India.

iii. Transfers from other NRO accounts.

iv. Rupee gift / loan made by a resident to an NRI / PIO relative within the limits prescribed under LRS may be credited to the latter’s NRO account.

As a benchmark, credits to NRE / FCNR(B) account should be repatriable in nature.
Permissible Debits

 

i. Local disbursements.

ii. Remittance outside India.

iii. Transfer to NRE / FCNR (B) accounts of the account holder or any other person eligible to maintain such account.

iv. Permissible investments in India in shares / securities / commercial paper of an Indian company or for purchase of immovable property.

i. Local payments in rupees.

ii. Transfers to other NRO accounts.

iii. Remittance of current income abroad.

iv. Settlement of charges on International Credit Cards.

v. Repatriation under USD 1 million scheme is available only to NRIs and PIOs.

vi. Funds can be transferred to NRE account within this USD 1 million facility.

Permitted Joint Holding May be held jointly in the names of two or more NRIs / PIOs.

NRIs / PIOs can hold jointly with a resident relative on ‘former or survivor’ basis. The resident relative can operate the account as a PoA holder during the lifetime of the NRI / PIO account holder.

May be held jointly in the names of two or more NRIs / PIOs.

May be held jointly with residents on ‘former or survivor’ basis.

Loans in India AD can sanction loans in India to the account holder / third parties without any limit, subject to the usual margin requirements.

The loan amount cannot be used for re-lending, carrying on agricultural / plantation activities or investment in real estate.

In case of loan to account holder the loan can be used for personal purposes or for carrying on business activities or for making direct investments in India on non-repatriation or for acquiring a flat / house in India for his own residential use.

In case of loan to third parties, loans can be given to resident individuals / firms / companies in India against the collateral

of fixed deposits held in NRE account.

The loan should be utilised for personal purposes or for carrying out business activities. Also, there should be no direct or indirect foreign exchange consideration for the non-resident depositor agreeing to pledge his deposits to enable the resident individual / firm / company to obtain such facilities.

These loans cannot be repatriated outside India and can be used in India only for the purposes specified in the regulations.

The facility for premature withdrawal of deposits will not be available where loans against such deposits are availed of.

Loans against the deposits can be granted in India to the account holder or third party subject to usual norms and margin requirement.

The loan amount cannot be used for relending, carrying on agricultural / plantation activities or investment in real estate.

The term “loan” shall include all types of fund based / non-fund-based facilities.

  Loans outsid AD may allow their branches / correspondents outside India to grant loans to or in favour of non-resident depositor or to third parties at the request of depositor for bona fide purpose against the security of funds held in the NRE / FCNR (B) accounts in India.

The term “loan” shall include all types of fund-based/ non-fund-based facilities.

 

Not permitted

 

Rate of Interest There is no restriction on the rate of interest. It varies across banks and is generally based on the repo rate of RBI.
Operations by Power of Attorney in favour of a resident Operations in the account in terms of PoA is restricted to withdrawals for permissible local payments or remittances to the account holder himself through normal banking channels.

The PoA holder cannot repatriate outside India funds held in the account under any circumstances other than to the account holder himself, nor to make payment by way of gift to a resident on behalf of the account holder nor to transfer funds from the account to another NRE or FCNR(B) account.

Operations in the account in terms of PoA is restricted to withdrawals for permissible local payments in rupees, remittance of current income to the account holder outside India or remittance to the account holder himself through normal banking channels. While making remittances, the limits and conditions of repatriability will apply.

The PoA holder cannot repatriate outside India funds held in the account under any circumstances other than to the account holder himself, nor to make payment by way of gift to a resident on behalf of the account holder nor to transfer funds from the account to another NRO account.

IMPACT OF CHANGE IN RESIDENTIAL STATUS

  • All non-resident accounts i.e., NRE / NRO (wherein, you are the primary account holder) need to be converted / re-designated as resident accounts immediately upon the return of the account holder to India for taking up employment or return of the account holder to India for any purpose indicating his intention to stay in India for an uncertain period or upon change in the residential status. The account holder should provide appropriate documentation to the bank for conversion of NRE / NRO account into resident account.
  • FCNR (B) deposits may be allowed to continue till maturity at the contracted rate of interest, if so desired by the account holder. Authorised Dealers should convert the FCNR(B) deposits on maturity into resident rupee deposit accounts or RFC accounts (if the depositor is eligible to open RFC account), at the option of the account holder.

With respect to the above, it would be relevant to refer to the compounding order C.A. No. 4578 /2017 dated 30th January, 2018 in the matter of Mr. Gaurav Bamania for compounding of contravention of the provisions of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 (the FEMA) and the Regulations issued thereunder. The compounding was on account of violation on two grounds viz; payment of consideration towards investment in an Indian company by an NRI through a resident account and the applicant had not re-designated his existing account as a NRO account on becoming NRI. As per the RBI, there was a contravention of the provisions of Para 8(a) of Schedule 3 of FEMA 5 and Para 3 of Schedule 4 of FEMA 20, and applicant was required to apply for regularis ation of the contraventions subject to compounding. The RBI has quoted Para 8(a) of Schedule 3 of FEMA 5 in the compounding order which states as under:

“When a person resident in India leaves India for a country (other than Nepal or Bhutan) for taking up employment, or for carrying on business or vocation outside India or for any other purpose indicating his intention to stay outside India for an uncertain period, his existing account should be designated as a Non-Resident (Ordinary) account.”

The matter was compounded in terms of the Foreign Exchange (Compounding Proceedings) Rules, 2000 and a sum of ₹26,530/- was levied as compounding fees by RBI as the amount of contravention involved was ₹56,850/-.

Further, it would also be useful to note the compounding order C.A. No. 85 /2019 dated 18th March, 2019 in the matter of Mr. Thakorbhai Dahyabhai Patel wherein the contravention sought to be compounded related to transfer of funds from NRE account to ordinary savings account thereby resulting in contravention of the provisions under Regulation 4(C) of Schedule 1 to Notification No. FEMA.5/2000-RB dated May 3, 2000, as amended from time to time. While the contravention was with respect to transfer of funds from NRE account to ordinary savings account, the same could have been mitigated if the applicant had converted / re-designated his ordinary savings account into NRE / NRO account after becoming a non-resident since the applicant, being a non-resident, is not eligible to open or maintain an ordinary savings account as per extant FEMA guidelines.

It would also be pertinent to note that the decision of the Hon’ble High Court of Delhi in the case of Basant Kumar Sharma vs. Government of India [2013] 33 taxmann.com 282 (Delhi), which has been rendered in the context of Section 2(p)(ii)(c) of the Foreign Exchange Regulations Act, 1973 (‘FERA’). In this case, the petitioner was an NRI who had returned to India for exploratory purposes and the petitioner had approached State Bank of India (‘SBI’) to convert his subsisting NRE account into NRO account and also to obtain necessary approval from RBI for sale of his investments. The SBI informed him that after becoming a resident, he was not allowed to keep a NRE account and his NRE account would have to be re-designated as a ‘Resident Account’ under Section 2(p)(ii)(c) read with Regulation A.15 of the Foreign Exchange Manual. The Petitioner did not agree with the stand adopted by SBI that he was a ‘Resident’ since he had come to India for exploring possibilities of resettlement but had also kept the doors open for overseas relocation in case, he would find a job outside India. The Petitioner wrote to various authorities, which included RBI, and requested their intercession in this matter and after a series of communications with various authorities, the Petitioner filed a writ petition with the Hon’ble Delhi High Court. The Hon’ble Delhi High Court affirmed the view adopted by SBI that the Petitioner had attained the status of a Resident in India within the meaning of Section 2(p)(ii)(c) of the FERA since his stay in India was for an uncertain period and thus his NRE account was required to be re-designated as a Resident Account due to change in residential status.

The provisions of residential status under FEMA and key differences vis a vis the Income-tax Act, 1961 (ITA) is covered in detail in earlier issue of this series titled Residential Status of Individuals — Interplay With Tax Treaty published in January 2024.

A person can be Resident or Non-Resident under both ITA and FEMA or a person can be Resident under one Act and Non-Resident under the other Act. In such a scenario, it would be pertinent to analyse the impact of taxability of an individual under the ITA where his / her residential status is different under ITA and FEMA.

The interplay of residential status under ITA and FEMA comes into light at the time of claiming income tax exemption under Section 10(4)(ii) of the ITA for a person earning interest from his NRE account in India. As per Section 10(4)(ii) of the ITA, interest received on NRE account is exempt from tax in India, if the account holder is a Person Resident Outside India as defined under Section 2(w) of the FEMA or is a person who has been permitted by the Reserve Bank of India to maintain such account. Thus, the residential status under the ITA is not required to be looked into for claiming such exemption.

Say, an individual having NRE account in India when he was a Person Resident Outside India as per FEMA and a Non-Resident as per the ITA comes to India for good during December 2023. It would be important to dwell into the change in residential status under each Act to determine eligibility for exemption u/s 10(4)(ii) of the ITA with respect to interest received from NRE account. The individual becomes a person resident in India as per FEMA from December 2023 onwards, however, he would be regarded as a Non-Resident under the ITA during Financial Year 2023-24 (assuming his stay in India was below the threshold as required under ITA). In order to claim exemption from tax u/s 10(4)(ii) of the ITA, a person has to be resident outside India under FEMA. Thus, even though the individual is a Non-Resident under the ITA, he would be entitled to claim exemption under Section 10(4)(ii) of the ITA only up to December 2023 (i.e till he was a Person Resident Outside India as per FEMA), as he would become resident of India under FEMA from the date of his return for good. Further, such individual shall be required to redesignate his NRE account to resident account on account of change in his residential status under FEMA.

On the contrary, interest earned on FCNR account by a Non-Resident or Resident but Not Ordinarily Resident (‘RNOR’) under the ITA is exempt from tax under Section 10(15)(iv)(fa) of the ITA. Thus, the exemption from tax in this case is determined by a person’s residential status under the ITA and not under FEMA. If a Non-Resident holding FCNR account in India returns to India on a permanent basis in a particular financial year, he would become a Person Resident in India under FEMA immediately upon his return, but may continue to be a Non-Resident or RNOR under ITA for that particular year. Accordingly, such person can continue to claim exemption of tax for interest earned from FCNR account since the residential status under FEMA shall not impact his eligibility to claim exemption. The exemption can continue to be claimed till the residential status is RNOR and the deposit has not matured.

With respect to the above, we would like to draw your attention to the decision of the Hon’ble Chennai Tribunal in case of Baba Shankar Rajesh vs. ACIT 180 ITD 160 (Chennai ITAT) [2019] wherein Assessee was denied exemption under Section 10(4)(ii) of the ITA by the Hon’ble Tribunal on the ground that the Assessee was a ‘Person Resident in India’ under Section 2(v) of the FEMA as he was a Non-Resident who had come to India for taking up employment in India.

Another important decision was rendered by the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India in the case of K. Ramullan vs. CIT 245 ITR 417 (SC) [2000] in the context of Section 2(p) & (q) of the Foreign Exchange Regulation Act, 1973 (‘FERA’) which was in favour of the Assessee. The Assessee was earlier denied exemption under Section 10(4A) of the ITA by the High Court with respect to interest earned from NRE account and the Supreme Court set aside the order of the Hon’ble High Court holding that under erstwhile clause (c) casual stay with spouse should not be included and hence unless the stay was for uncertain period or with some permanence the Assessee was a ‘Person Resident Outside India’ under Section 2(q) of the FERA and was thus entitled to claim exemption under Section 10(4A) [erstwhile section] of the ITA.

Of course, determination of residential status under FEMA depends upon facts and circumstances of each case.

Furthermore, the following two types of accounts are also permitted to be opened by persons resident outside India for specific purposes as explained:

i) Special Non-Resident Rupee Account (SNRR Account)

Any PROI having a business interest in India may open, hold and maintain with an Authorised Dealer (AD Banks) in India, a SNRR account for the purpose of putting through bona fide transactions in rupees. SNRR accounts shall not earn any interest.

For the purpose of SNRR account, business interest, apart from generic business interest, shall include INR transactions relating to investments permitted under FEM (NDI Rules), 2019 and FEM (DI Regulations) 2019, import and export of goods and services, trade credit and ECB and business-related transactions outside International Financial Service Centre (IFSC) by IFSC units.

AD bank may maintain a separate SNRR account for each category of transactions or a single SNRR Account as per their discretion.

The tenure of the SNRR account should be concurrent to the tenure of the contract / period of operation / the business of the account holder and in no case should exceed seven years in case of generic business transactions.

SNRR account is often used by foreign entities to obtain income tax refunds on account of earning passive income from India or foreign entities undertaking turnkey projects in India. Earlier foreign entities were required to establish project offices (as regulated by RBI) in India to execute turnkey projects awarded to joint ventures between Indian entity and foreign entity also known as unincorporated joint venture. Now, with the introduction of the SNRR account, foreign companies can execute projects without establishing a project office in India.

ii) Escrow Account

Resident or non-resident acquirers may open, hold and maintain Escrow Account with ADs in India as permitted under Notification No. FEMA 5(R)/2016-RB. The account can be opened for acquisition/transfer of capital instruments / convertible notes in accordance with Foreign Exchange Management (Non-Debt Instrument) Rules, 2019.

The accounts shall be non-interest bearing. No fund / non-fund-based facility would be permitted against the balances in the account.

PPF AND SSY ACCOUNT FOR NRIS

The Ministry of Finance has issued updated guidelines for Public Provident Fund (PPF), Sukanya Samriddhi Yojana (SSY), and other small savings schemes, effective from 1st October, 2024. One of the key changes under the new guidelines in relation to PPF accounts of NRIs are as under:

  • For NRIs, PPF accounts which were opened under the Public Provident Fund Account Scheme, 1968 where Form H did not require the residency details of the account holder and the account holder became an NRI during the account’s tenure, the Post Office Savings Account (‘POSA’) interest rate shall be granted to the account holder until 30th September, 2024. However, after this date, the interest on these accounts will drop to 0 per cent.

Further, it is pertinent to note that an NRI cannot open a new PPF account. If an account was opened by an individual while he / she was a resident who subsequently became an NRI, the account can continue until maturity. This rule has been there from quite some time, however, there have been cases where NRIs have even continued holding PPF accounts for another 5 years after completion of 15 years. In such cases, banks have denied interest in such accounts.

PPF interest is tax-free in India under Section 10(11) of the ITA for both residents and non-residents. However, the said PPF interest might be taxed in the residence country of the NRIs if it taxes its citizens / residents on their worldwide income.

Further, NRIs are not eligible to open and operate a Sukanya Samriddhi Yojana Account under the erstwhile Guidelines. There has been no change in this respect under the updated guidelines as well.

REMITTANCE FACILITIES UNDER FEMA

We have further discussed below the options available for persons resident outside in India to remit funds outside India under the Foreign Exchange Management (Remittance of Assets) Regulations, 2016 [Notification No. FEMA 13(R)/2016-RB dated 1st April, 2016]. As explained, current income in NRE and FCNR(B) account is freely repatriable outside India. For other balances and accounts pertaining to capital account transactions which are not repatriable in nature, the RBI has provided the following options:

i) Remittances by NRIs / PIOs:

Popularly known as USD 1 Million scheme / facility which covers only capital account transactions. ADs may allow NRIs / PIOs to remit up to USD one million per financial year:

  • out of balances in their NRO accounts / sale proceeds of assets / assets acquired in India by way of inheritance / legacy;
  • in respect of assets acquired under a deed of settlement made by either of his / her parents or a relative as defined in the Companies Act, 2013. The settlement should take effect on the death of the settler;
  • in case settlement is done without retaining any life interest in the property i.e., during the lifetime of the owner / parent, it would be as remittance of balance in the NRO account;

The NRI or PIO should make such remittances out of balances held in the account arising from his / her legitimate receivables in India and not by borrowing from any other person or a transfer from any other NRO account.

Further, gift by a resident individual to an NRI / PIO after turning non-resident in a particular year may not be permitted under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (‘LRS’) since such remittances under LRS are only permissible for resident individuals. However, such remittance can be made under the 1 million Dollar scheme by the residential individual after turning non-resident.

The prescribed limit of USD 1 million is not allowed to be exceeded. In case a higher amount is required to be remitted, approval shall be required from RBI. In our experience such approvals are given in very few / rare cases based on facts.

ii) Remittances by individuals not being NRIs/ PIOs:

ADs may allow remittance of assets by a foreign national where:

  • the person has retired from employment in India (upto USD 1 million per financial year);
  • the person has inherited from a person referred to in section 6(5) of the Act4 (up to USD 1 million per financial year);
  • the person is a non-resident widow / widower and has inherited assets from her / his deceased spouse, who was an Indian national resident in India (up to USD 1 million per financial year);
  • the remittance is in respect of balances held in a bank account by a foreign student who has completed his / her studies (balance represents proceeds of remittances received from abroad through normal banking channels or out of stipend / scholarship received from the Government or any organisation in India).
  • Salary income earned in India by individuals who do not permanently reside in India5.

However, these facilities are not available for citizens of Nepal or Bhutan or a PIO.

iii) Repatriation of sale proceeds of immovable property:

A PIO/ NRI / OCI, in the event of sale of immovable property other than agricultural land / farmhouse / plantation property in India, may be allowed repatriation of the sale proceeds outside India provided:

  • the immovable property was acquired by the seller in accordance with the provisions of the foreign exchange law in force at the time of acquisition;
  • the amount for acquisition of the immovable property was paid in foreign exchange received through banking channels or out of funds held in FCNR(B) account or NRE account.

4 “person resident in India” means 
(i) a person residing in India for more than one hundred and eighty-two days during the course of the preceding financial year but does not include— 
(A) a person who has gone out of India or who stays outside India, in either case— 
   (a) for or on taking up employment outside India, or 
   (b) for carrying on outside India a business or vocation outside India, or (c) for any other purpose, in such circumstances as would indicate his intention to stay outside India for an uncertain period; 
(B) a person who has come to or stays in India, in either case, otherwise than— 
   (a) for or on taking up employment in India, or 
   (b) for carrying on in India a business or vocation in India, or (c) for any other purpose, in such circumstances as would indicate his intention to stay in India for an uncertain period; 
(ii) any person or body corporate registered or incorporated in India, 
(iii) an office, branch or agency in India owned or controlled by a person resident outside India, 
(iv) an office, branch or agency outside India owned or controlled by a person resident in India;
5 “ As per Explanation to Regulation 5 of the Remittance of Asset Regulations, 2016, ‘not permanently resident’ means a person resident in India for employment of a specified duration (irrespective of length thereof) or for a specific job or assignment, the duration of which does not exceed three years.

In the case of residential property, the repatriation of sale proceeds is restricted to a maximum of two such properties in the lifetime of the NRI / PIO. The non-resident seller shall be liable to TDS @ 20 per cent under Section 195 of the ITA on the sale consideration of the property. In such cases, non-resident sellers may apply for a Lower Deduction or Nil Deduction Certificate from the tax authorities under Section 197 of the ITA in order to minimise their tax liability and retain a higher portion of the sale proceeds. If the non-resident seller does not obtain a lower / nil deduction certificate, he / she can claim a refund by filing a return of income, in case the actual tax liability works out to be lower than the tax withheld by the buyer.

Further, the seller repatriating sale proceeds outside India may be required to obtain Form 15CB from the Chartered Account for repatriation of sale proceeds outside India.

Foreign Remittance by NRIs / OCIs — Compliances under ITA

The relevant provisions governing taxability of foreign remittances and the compliance requirements with respect to the same are provided under Section 195 of the ITA and Rule 37BB of the Income-tax Rules, 1962.

Section 195 of the ITA states that any person responsible for paying to a resident, not being a company or foreign company, any interest (excluding certain kinds of specified interest) or any other sum chargeable under the provisions of the ITA (not being the income under salaries) shall at the time of credit of such income to the payee in any specified mode, deduct income-tax thereon at the rates in force. The provisions of Section 195 of the ITA are applicable only if the payment to non-residents is chargeable to tax in India.

Further, Section 195(6) of the ITA requires reporting of any payment to a non-resident in Form 15CA / 15CB irrespective of whether such payments are chargeable to tax in India. Rule 37BB defines the manner to furnish information in Form 15CB and making declaration in Form 15CA. In terms of Rule 37BB, the information for payment to a non-resident is required to be provided in Form 15CA in four parts as under:

  • Part A – For payment or aggregate of payments during the FY not exceeding ₹5,00,000.
  • Part B – When a certificate from Assessing Officer is obtained u/s 197, or an order from an Assessing Officer is obtained u/s 195(2) or 195(3) of the ITA.
  • Part C – For other payments chargeable under the provisions of the ITA – To be filed after obtaining a certificate in Form 15CB from a practicing Chartered Accountant.
  • Part D – For payment of any sum which is not chargeable under the provisions of the ITA.

Form 15CA is a declaration by the remitter that contains all the information in respect of payments made to non-residents and Form 15CB is a Tax Determination Certificate in which the Chartered Accountant (‘CA’) examines a remittance with regard to chargeability provisions. These forms can be submitted both online and offline (bulk mode) through the e-filing portal. A CA who is registered on the e-filing portal and one who has been assigned Form 15CA, Part-C by the person responsible for making the payment is entitled to certify details in Form 15CB. The CA should also possess a Digital Signature Certificate (DSC) registered with the e-filing portal for e-verification of the submitted form.

Form 15CB has six sections to be filled before submitting the form which are as under:

  1. Certificate
  2. Remittee (Recipient) Details
  3. Remittance (Fund Transfer) Details
  4. Taxability under the Income-tax Act (without DTAA)
  5. Taxability under the Income-tax act (with DTAA relief)
  6. Accountant Details (CA’s details)

The foreign remittances by NRI / OCI would generally comprise of payments to NRIs / foreign companies / OCIs / PIOs towards royalty, consultancy fees, business payments, etc., where the payment contains an income element or transfer from one’s NRO bank account to NRE / foreign bank account i.e., transfer to own account. Sub-rule (3) of Rule 37BB of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 provides a specific exclusion for certain remittances under Current Account Transaction Rules, 2000 or remittances falling under the Specified List provided thereunder6.


6. https://incometaxindia.gov.in/pages/rules/income-tax-rules-1962.aspx

The transfer from NRO to NRE / foreign bank account may fall within one of the purposes under the category of remittances which may not contain an income element and thus would not be chargeable to tax in India. Thus, there should not be any requirement of obtaining Form 15CB and reporting would only be required in Part D of Form 15CA. However, certain Authorised Dealer banks insist on furnishing Form 15CA along with Form 15CB for source of funds from which remittance is sought to be made in order to process the remittance. In such case, reporting would be required in Part C of Form 15 CA and the CA would be required to report the taxability of such remittance under Section 4 (which deals with taxability under ITA without DTAA) or Part D, Point No. 11 under Section 5 (which deals with taxability under the ITA with DTAA relief).

It may be noted that furnishing of inaccurate information or non-furnishing of Form 15CA can trigger penalty of sum of Rupees 1 lakh under section 271-I of the ITA. Thus, in order to avoid any future litigation and to be compliant from an income-tax perspective, it would be advisable to comply with the reporting obligation under Part C of Form 15CA and obtain Form 15CB from a CA at the time of making remittance from NRO account to NRE / foreign bank account.

When dealing with certification on taxability of funds from which remittance is sourced, a CA may need to bifurcate into separate certificates and also travel back several years. A CA must analyse the following aspects before issuing certificate for remittances from one’s own NRO bank account to NRE account:

  • Find out the source of funds lying in the NRO account by tracing them back to the incomes comprised therein which may trace back to several years;
  • Income-tax returns filed by the NRI in India for the period concerned;
  • Relevant year’s Form 26AS and TDS certificates;
  • Documents and issues pertaining to each type of income.

Third parties transferring money to NRE / NRO accounts of NRIs (for e.g., payment of rent or a sale consideration of an immovable property), may ask for certain documents from NRI before making transfers, such as a certificate under section 197 of the ITA from the Assessing Office (AO) of NRI, undertaking/ bond from NRI, certificate from the CA in case of certain controversial issues. Further, such third-party payers shall be required to obtain Form 15CA / Form 15CB at the time of remittance to the NRI. NRIs should pre-empt such documentation requirements of tax authorities at the time of receiving remittances from third parties in their NRI / NRO account and thus obtain such documents in advance and keep them on their records, in case required to be furnished before tax authorities at the time of remittances / transfers by NRI’s between their own accounts i.e., NRO to NRE.

Such documentation may also be helpful to CA issuing Form 15CA / CB to the NRI in future for remittance between own accounts.

It is not possible nor intended to cover all aspects of the important topic of Bank Accounts in India by non residents and Repatriation of Funds. In view of the dynamic nature of FEMA and other laws, readers are well advised to get an updated information at the time of advising their clients and / or undertaking transactions relating to bank accounts or repatriation of funds outside India.

Digital Tax War and Equalisation Levy

RECENT DEVELOPMENT

The Finance (No. 2) Act 2024 has dropped the provision of Equalisation Levy (EQL) of the year 2020 on e-commerce supply of services and goods. (Finance Act 2016, Chapter VIII has been suitably modified.) What we call equalisation levy is a part of Digital Taxation. Digital Taxation has been the subject of deep discussions, since 1997, and a global tax war, since 2013. In this tax war, the US Government has been on one side, China has been neutral, and the rest of the world has been on the other side. The USA has been insisting that there should be no digital taxation on non-residents of a country; in other words, digital commerce income should be taxed only by the Country of Residence (COR). India resisted this demand from the USA, but finally, with the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2024 India has succumbed to US pressures. Even before the Indian withdrawal, U.K., France, etc. have deleted their unilateral digital tax laws.

With the withdrawal of EQL 2020, in the Global Digital Tax War, USA has emerged as ‘The Winner’…. for the time being. Let us see how the situation develops. 

The Global Digital Tax War and earlier, Digital Tax discussions have engaged many tax commissioners as well as professionals and a huge amount of intellectual work has been done. Since 2013, there was a huge discussion on BEPS Action 1 and, since the year 2017, on Pillar 1. The USA wants to bury all this. In this brief article I am just giving a timeline of what has happened, with some insights.

REASON FOR THE DIGITAL TAX WAR

Most of the prominent Digital Corporations (DCs) are from USA and China. They are the providers of digital services and sellers of goods and services through digital platforms. Hence one can say that broadly, USA and China are the Countries of Residence (COR) for digital commerce. The rest of the world constitutes Countries of Market (COM). The USA, as the COR, is taxing its digital corporations and collecting vast amounts of tax. It does not want COM to tax these corporations. Because, if COMs tax DCs (digital corporations) then under the Double Tax Avoidance Treaty (DTA), the USA would have to give set off / credit for COM taxes. This would be a significant loss of revenue for the USA. Hence, the USA is determined that no COM should have any digital tax law. It may be noted that the USA is able to tax DCs resident in USA without any change in existing tax law.

Under existing OECD and UN model treaties (which are outdated and need major modifications), COMs cannot tax non-resident DCs doing digital business without a PE in the COM. Hence, COMs want to change the model treaty. The USA does not allow change in the model treaty. This is the reason for the Digital Tax War. This is a COR vs. COM Digital Tax War.

A TIMELINE OF DIGITAL TAX DEVELOPMENTS

History

In the year 1997, OECD at its Ottawa Conference (Canada) published a report that E-commerce is going to be very important, and OECD should work on drafting special provisions for E-Commerce taxation in OECD model of DTA.

In the year 2000, the CBDT, Government of India appointed an E-commerce Committee consisting of Commissioners and Professionals to study the subject and report.

The Committee reported that E-commerce is really an important business, and it will grow fast. Existing tax laws and Treaty Models cannot be applied to it because the definition of Permanent Establishment (PE) was outdated. The Committee recommended that the concept of PE should be reviewed.

In the year 2005, OECD published a report and said that E-Commerce is not significant. There is no need for any further discussion on it. This was an “about turn” by OECD from its 1997 report.

Background

The US Government already knew that if E-Commerce tax law came in, then USA would be the loser. Hence, it convinced OECD not to proceed further. Normally, the G7 nations — USA, UK, France, Germany, Canada, Italy, and Japan hold similar views on such international matters.

Amazon, Google, Facebook, and other Digital Corporations (DCs) were earning hundreds of millions of Pounds / Euros from the COM — U.K., France, Germany, etc. And they were not paying any significant tax to the COM Governments. In the year 2013 Ms. Margaret Hodge, Chair of the British Public Accounts Committee clearly expressed her anger at the Corporate Tax Avoidance. The committee was clear in its view that the revenue that was rightfully due to them as COM was not coming to them. They had no solution and were frustrated, because the OECD model DTA did not permit them to tax non-resident DCs. These nations pushed and finally, G20 asked OECD to redraft the OECD model of DTA so that even DCs pay taxes to the COM.

In the year 1997, the use of computers and internet was limited. Mobile phones were not in use. In any case, nobody had thought of using mobile phones to conduct commerce. In those times, this business was called Electronic Commerce or E-commerce. Within about 15 years, the whole world started doing business on the internet. Mobile phones became so common that smallest transactions to large transactions started happening on mobile phones. In essence, commercial communication happens through a device — computer-mobile phones; internet and intermediary servers. By the year 2013, however, OECD and other experts found it difficult to call mobile phone commerce as E-commerce. Hence, they developed a new name- Digital Commerce. In essence, it is a business carried out by the seller of goods or services without having a permanent establishment in COM.

In 2013, OECD again took an about turn when UK, France and other nations could not tolerate loss of tax revenue on digital commerce and G20 pushed OECD. They declared that E-commerce was a very big business. The existing OECD model was inadequate to deal with Digital Commerce. COM nations were losing their due tax revenue and hence OECD model needed a review.

The project to draft new DTA provisions was called: “Base Erosion & Profit Shifting” or BEPS. In simple words, a project to curb international “Tax Evasion” and “Tax Planning”.

USA again played its game. It declared that there are several forms of tax evasion and OECD should work on trying to control all tax evasions & avoidances. Hence the BEPS work was divided into fourteen different subjects. Focus was expanded from a single subject of Digital Taxation to fourteen different subjects. For each subject, a separate report would be prepared. Separate committees were constituted for different subjects. (Instead of “Committee” they used the word “Task Force”). There would be a fifteenth report which would give a draft Multi-Lateral Instrument (MLI). All the parties to BEPS agreement would sign MLI. Since the exercise started with E-commerce, the very first report was titled BEPS Action One report on E-Commerce. It was given maximum importance, and the expectation was that the report would be published in the year 2014. In other words, OECD model DTA was expected to be modified to take care of E-Commerce taxation.

BEPS committees had expert senior Income-tax officials as well as tax professionals. They put in a huge amount of work. Eventually, BEPS Action reports from No. 2 to 15 were published. However, BEPS Action One report on E-commerce could not come up with draft rules for taxation of Digital Income. The main reason for this failure was that the US Government kept on stone walling the project. The USA insisted that:

(i) the basic right to tax business income should always be with COR;

(ii) the concept of PE cannot be modified;

(iii) the committee and all countries must work within the Framework of OECD;

(iv) whatever amendments may be made in the tax treaty model, must be applicable to all the businesses. One cannot make separate rules for E-commerce and other rules for “Brick & Mortar” businesses. In other words, “Ring Fencing” was not acceptable. (It may be noted that in Pillar One, US proposal for Digital Tax involves “Ring Fencing”.)

In 2015, the BEPS Action One Committee came up with an interim report. There was a reference in the interim report that some tax system like EQL may be imposed by the governments. Government of India (GOI) took this opportunity and immediately appointed a new E-commerce committee – 2015. The Committee gave a report and made suggestions. In the Finance Act 2016, GOI brought EQL 2016. USA was unhappy with it but could not object because the law brought in by GOI was in line with the interim report. This was a tax essentially on advertisement charges paid by Indian residents to non-residents who published their advertisements on the internet. The rate was 6 per cent, to be deducted at source by the payer. This provision came as chapter VIII of the Finance Act 2016 – Sections 163 to 165. EQL 2016 was not a part of the Income-tax Act. If it were a part of the Income-tax Act, DTA would override EQL. There is no provision in DTA for EQL, which could frustrate GOI’s efforts to tax DCs.

Government of India wanted to tell the world that it was serious about bringing in the E-Commerce tax. The revenue that GOI would get from Equalisation Levy may be insignificant, but the world must realise that it cannot go on negotiating forever.

BEPS ON E-COMMERCE FRUSTRATED

The BEPS Action One was started for E-commerce taxation, it could not bring in the necessary draft for amending the OECD model. U.K., France and other countries in OECD that pushed for BEPS Action One could not levy any tax on DCs. Their efforts were completely wasted. This was one more success for the USA.

DTA TRADITIONS CHANGED

So far, the history of DTAs has been as under:

Double tax Avoidance Agreement is an agreement between two countries. OECD and United Nations (UN) have given their model treaties to be used as templates. The two negotiating countries would make such modifications as they like. Thus, OECD and UN models had absolutely zero binding power. They were just suggestions. Countries were free to either adopt UN model or OECD model or develop their own model.

The USA insisted for huge change in the system. In the BEPS group of discussions even non-OECD & Non-G20 countries were invited. It was called “Inclusive Framework”. Total OECD members were 36 in the year 2013. Total number of countries that participated in BEPS negotiations went up to 136. The USA further insisted that once a person signs MLI, that country should not adopt UN model, or any other model and it should largely follow the BEPS model – MLI. In addition, the MLI would also expect signatories to modify their domestic laws in line with the MLI.

Initially, several countries were happy that they could participate in tax treaty drafting negotiations even though they were not OECD members. Later they realised that signing the BEPS agreement amounted to restriction on their freedom.

By now, 102 nations have signed MLI. The USA was the main architect of important clauses of the Agreement. But USA has not signed MLI; and will not sign MLI. This is US Unilateralism.

UNILATERAL DIGITAL TAX LAW

While the BEPS negotiations were going on, some COMs were frustrated. Every year, huge revenue was going out of their countries without payment of any taxes. Hence, some countries started their own unilateral digital tax law. Britain, France and India are some of the prominent countries who passed unilateral tax laws. This was clearly contrary to the US demand that any digital tax provision must be within the OECD framework.

The US Government started action under Super 301 (section 301 of United States Trade Act of 1974) and alleged that all the countries that had passed unilateral digital tax law had caused damage to US digital commerce. Hence, these countries were summoned as “guilty of violating the BEPS principles”. They were asked to drop the unilateral tax laws or face a trade war with USA. None of the countries could afford trade war with USA. Hence, all these countries agreed to drop their unilateral laws. The provision in Finance Act 2024 is a result of India succumbing to US pressures and thus dropping a unilateral digital tax law — EQL-2020.

After the demise of BEPS One, USA came out with another proposal around the year 2020. Pillar 1 was to provide a draft for digital taxation. Pillar 2 was to provide for curbing tax avoidance through tax havens and other matters. These reports drafted are so complex, arbitrary and unjust that again years were spent on discussions without any conclusion. As on the date of writing this article, Pillar 1 has seen no conclusion. Until Pillar 1 is concluded; OECD model does not get modified; and COMs cannot tax DCs’ digital incomes. COMs have been forced to abolish their Unilateral digital tax laws. Hence US DCs do not face digital taxes outside the USA.

There have been no agreements on BEPS-Action One and on Pillar 1. Hence, technically, one can say that India is free to choose OECD model or UN model on Digital Taxation. However, this would be a “technical” statement and not “practical”. The US may never modify India-USA DTA. And hence UN provisions cannot come into effect.

U.N. has its own model DTA. The UN Expert Committee has drafted its own digital tax provision as Article 12B. It is a fairly simple provision to understand, to administer (department) and to comply with (taxpayer). Countries are free to adopt it. However, everyone is scared of the US Govt., and there is not much progress on Article 12B.

There is a Union of African Nations named Economic Commission for Africa. This association has criticised OECD tax reform process.

India wanted to tell the world and mainly the USA that “India is serious about imposing Digital tax”. This declaration has been made by three legal provisions – EQL 2016, EQL 2020 and Significant Economic Presence – SEP. The last provision is part of the Income-tax Act (ITA) – Section 9(1)(i) Explanation 2A. Since this provision is part of the ITA, it will not work unless the relevant DTA includes a provision for digital tax. Hence, at present this provision has no practical effect.

EQL 2016 CONTINUES

It may be noted that while the Finance Act 2024 has dropped EQL 2020, the earlier provision of EQL 2016 still continues. The reason may be that practically EQL 2016 is suffered by the Indian advertiser making the TDS from payments for advertising charges.

EUROPEAN HELPLESSNESS

Remember the North Stream Gas Pipeline which starts from Russia, passes through the Baltic Sea and lands in Germany? It was meant to supply cheap Russian gas to Germany and Europe. This gas was very important for German and European economies.

In September, 2022, both North Stream 1 and North Stream 2 were blown up. It is rumoured that this was done by the USA. Russian gas supply was damaged. Germany went into recession and suffered heavily. Still, German politicians could not criticise the U.S. Government. This is the extent to which Europe has lost its independence to USA.

When important issues like energy supply and economy are surrendered to US pressures; what do we expect for a smaller issue like Digital Tax?

This article gives a glimpse of important Digital Tax War. In essence, US stonewalling has succeeded, and at present, the world has no way to tax digital incomes of non-residents.

Emigrating Residents and Returning NRIs – Part-II

This article is part of the ongoing series of articles dealing with Income-tax and FEMA issues related to NRIs. This is the second part of the two-part article on the interplay of Income-tax and FEMA issues for Emigrating Residents and Returning NRIs. Part-I of this article was published in the June 2024 edition of the BCAS Journal. It dealt with concepts and controversies related to migrating residents and change of citizenship. One can refer to Paragraphs 1 to 4 at the start of Part-I for introductory points in relation to movement from one country to another. Part-II — this part — is in continuation to Part-I and covers issues related to Returning NRIs. At the end of this article certain considerations which are common to both sets of people — migrating residents and returning NRIs — are also dealt with in Para C.

B. Returning NRIs

A recent survey highlights that at least 60 per cent of NRIs in the US, UK, Canada, Australia, and Singapore are considering returning to India after retirement1 . Apart from retirement, there are several other reasons due to which NRIs return to settle back in India — to stay with family members in India; due to their or their family members’ health reasons; citizenship issues in the foreign country; political instability in the foreign country; etc. In our experience, some of them are also returning for new and better business opportunities which are available in India now.

Under FEMA, there are different and overlapping classifications for non-residents like Non-resident Indian (NRI), Persons of Indian Origin (PIO), and Overseas Citizen of India (OCI) cardholders. This article covers all such people and collectively refers to all non-residents of India who come to India and become Indian residents as “Returning NRIs.” Such persons, if they are foreign citizens, should also refer to Para 11 to 16 in Part-I of this Article2 , which covers issues pertaining to change of citizenship.


1. https://retirement.outlookindia.com/plan/news/60-of-nris-consider-returning-to-india-after-retirement-sbnri-survey
2. Refer June 2024 issue of the BCAJ – 56 (2024) 251 BCAJ

The Income-tax and FEMA issues pertaining to Returning NRIs are explained in detail below:

B.1 Income-tax issues of Returning NRIs

17.13 Residential status

If a Returning NRI is determined to be Resident & Ordinarily Resident (ROR), their global incomes are taxable in India. Further, such a person needs to disclose all their foreign assets (including those which were acquired when the person was non-resident) and foreign incomes in their tax return. Any non-compliance exposes the person not only to interest and penalties under the Income-tax Act, but also the penal provisions under the Black Money Act4 for non-disclosure of foreign incomes and assets. Therefore, the first and foremost step under the Income-tax Act is to ascertain the residential status of the individual. Section 6, sub-sections (1), (1A) and (6), are relevant to determine the residential status of individuals.


3. The paragraph references continue from Part-I of this article
4. Black Money (Undisclosed Foreign Income and Assets) and Imposition of Tax Act, 2015

17.2 In the case of Returning NRIs, the individual is coming back for good. He is not coming on a visit to India. Hence, the relief pertaining to “being outside India and coming on a visit to India” provided under Explanation 2 to Section 6(1)(c) of the Income-tax Act (ITA) is not available. Consequently, the relief of staying up to 181 days in India is not available to them. In other words, the basic “60 + 365 days test”5 applies to Returning NRIs, and if it is met, the individual becomes a resident u/s. 6(1) of the ITA. A couple of nuances pertaining to this were dealt with in detail in the December edition of the BCAS Journal. For completeness’s sake, they are briefly touched upon below:

a. Benefit of visit not allowed:

A person returned to India after resigning from her employment in China. The Authority for Advance Rulings (AAR) held6 that relief under Expl. 2 to S. 6(1)(c) of the ITA will not be available to her since the facts and circumstances show that the reason for coming to India is not just a visit. Hence, the “60 + 365 days test” test will apply.

b. Is hair-splitting between visit and permanent stay allowed during the same year?

Karnataka High Court has held7 that when the individual – being outside India, was on a visit to India – such stay should be tested against the 182-day test and not considered for the “60 + 365 days test.” Later, during the year, if the person returns to India, only the stay after such return needs to be considered for the “60 + 365 days test.” However, in the decision by AAR referred to herein above in sub-para (a), the hair-splitting between a visit and a permanent stay in India was not allowed. Hence, hair-splitting of a person’s stay between ‘visit’ and ‘permanent stay’ during the same year is litigious.


5. “60 + 365 days test” means that the individual has stayed in India for 60 days or more during the relevant previous year and for 365 days or 
more during the four preceding years
6. Mrs. Smita Anand, China [2014] 42 taxmann.com 366 (AAR - New Delhi)
7. Director of Income-Tax, International Tax, Bangalore vs. Manoj Kumar Reddy Nare [2011] 12 taxmann.com 326 (Karnataka)

17.3 If the person was a non-resident of India in 9 out of the preceding 10 previous years; or if his or her stay in India in the preceding 7 years was less than 729 days, such an individual would be Resident but Not Ordinarily Resident (“RNOR”). These provisions of Section 6(6)(a) of the ITA have been explained in detail in the December 2023 edition of the BCAJ. In general, before the amendments by the Finance Act 2020, a returning Indian could claim RNOR status for 2 or even 3 years if one of the above tests of Section 6(6)(a) is met. The amendments by the Finance Act 2020 have diluted the RNOR status for Returning NRIs. This is explained in detail below.

17.4 If an individual does not become a resident, u/s. 6(1), one should also consider the provisions of Section 6(1A) wherein an Indian Citizen is considered a resident under specific circumstances8, where he is not liable to tax in any other country by reason of residence, domicile, or any other criteria of similar nature. If an individual becomes a resident by virtue of Section 6(1A), he is always considered as RNOR as per Section 6(6)(d).


8. Where his or her income from sources within India exceeds ₹15 lakhs in that year(s).

Individuals who are covered u/s. 6(1A) become deemed RNORs. Even if they do not visit India for a single day, they are residents but not ordinarily residents under the ITA. This has an impact when they return to India for good. Let us say, an Indian citizen, Mr Kumar has been employed and staying in Oman since 2010. Mr Kumar came on visits to India totalling a period of 65 days every year with clarity that he would remain a non-resident of India due to relief available of a visit to India as per clause (b) to Explanation 1 to Section 6(1)(c). On 1st April, 2024, he retired and came back to India for good. In the absence of Section 6(1A), he would have been a non-resident since 2010. Hence, after returning to India, he would have been RNOR for at least the first two years.

However, Oman does not tax individuals. Post Finance Act 2020, as per Section 6(1A), such an Indian citizen would be RNOR and not NR for the PYs 2020-21, 2022-23, 2023-24. This means he does not meet the first test u/s. 6(6)(a) of being NR for at least 9 years out of the last 10 years. The relief u/s. 6(6)(a) has thus been diluted due to Section 6(1A). In simple words, he will be ROR from PY 2024-25 and will be liable to Indian tax on his global income. Similar would be the situation for an Indian citizen or person of Indian origin9 who visits India for 120 days or more during each year, and his stay in the preceding 4 years is 365 days or more. Such a person gets covered by the amended portion of clause (b) of Explanation 1 to Section 6(1)(c) and consequently would be RNOR as per Section 6(6)(c)10.


9. A person shall be deemed to be of Indian origin if he, or either of his parents or any of his grand-parents, was born in undivided India – Explanation to clause (e) of Section 115C of ITA.
10. Where his or her income from sources within India exceeds ₹15 lakhs in that year(s).

17.5 Normally, a Returning NRI would be considered as RNOR if he had not spent more than 728 days during the preceding 7 years. This should be the case generally for 2 or even 3 years after a person returns to India. But for persons like Mr Kumar, who visits India every year and then settles in India, they may not meet the test of stay in India of less than 729 days during the preceding 7 years after the first year of returning to India. Hence, those individuals who stay abroad and are planning to settle in India need to be aware of the dilution of their RNOR status due to the provisions of Section 6 as amended vide Finance Act 2020.

18 Disclosure and source of foreign assets

Since AY 2012-13, Indian residents (ROR) are required to disclose their assets located outside India in their Income-tax return form. This is required even if such a resident is otherwise not required to file a tax return. Returning NRIs would, in most cases, have savings, assets, and investments abroad when they come back. On becoming ROR, all such foreign assets need to be disclosed in the tax return. The person would have acquired these assets when he was staying abroad and was a non-resident. The source of funds for acquiring these assets is not required to be explained or disclosed in the tax return. However, practically, things are quite different.

There is 360-degree profiling by the regulators these days. The CBDT has formed Foreign Asset Investigation Units (FAIUs) in all the 14 investigation directorates across India. Their job is to analyse the plethora of information received by India from foreign jurisdictions under Automatic Exchange of Information (AEoI) agreements, CRS, DTAAs, etc. If they come across any red flags, they issue a notice asking for detailed information pertaining to each and every foreign asset held by the person since its acquisition. The red flags could be a variance between the data received by them vis-à-vis the foreign assets disclosed in the tax return by the assessee; or foreign assets disproportionate to the transactions or profile of the assessee, etc. They even ask for decades-old data and documents supporting such data. Hence, maintaining documents becomes particularly important.

In such cases, until and unless it is proven through documentary evidence that a foreign asset was acquired from bonafide sources, the matter is not closed. This becomes a big hassle. There are cases where the assessees did not retain their old bank statements and other documents. In fact, foreign banks and brokers do not provide old statements easily and they also charge heftily for obtaining old statements. Further, foreign banks and financial institutions do not retain records beyond a certain number of years, in which case, it becomes almost impossible to provide the documents to the officer. Hence, Indians who are staying abroad, whether they plan to return to India someday or not, should keep proper and complete data of all their assets. If and when they return to India, such a record would become important. Further, they need to maintain documents to justify their increase in net worth by their sources of incomes during the years when they were non-resident. If there is any violation in the disclosure of foreign assets; or if the officer is not satisfied with the explanation or documents, proceedings can be initiated under Section 10 of the Black Money Act11 (BMA) and the harsh penal provisions of the BMA are also invoked in certain cases. This has happened in even bona fide cases where innocent errors are made in disclosing foreign assets.


11. Black Money (Undisclosed Foreign Income and Assets) and Imposition of Tax Act, 2015

19 Other Disclosures in ITR Form

Apart from foreign assets and incomes, other disclosures are also required to be made in the Income-tax return form, which are tabulated below:

Particulars ROR NOR NR
Unlisted equity shares To be disclosed of all companies. To be disclosed only of Indian companies.
Directorships To be disclosed in all companies across the globe. To be disclosed in all Indian companies & only in such foreign companies which have income accruing or deemed to be accruing in India.
Schedule AL Global assets. Only Indian assets.
Schedule FSI Foreign-sourced incomes are included in the Total Income (largely relevant only for RORs.)
Schedule EI Incomes exempt under the Income-tax Act or DTAA.

20 Treaty relief

Similar to migrating Indians, even for Returning NRIs, there can be an overlapping period wherein the person is a resident of India as well as of the country he is returning from. This leads to dual residency, for which tie-breaker tests are prescribed under Article 4(2) of the Double Tax Avoidance Agreement (DTAA). There could also be a possibility of the concept of split residency being applicable. Accordingly, the provisions of the DTAA can be applied. These provisions have been explained in detail in the second article of this series (January 2024 edition of the BCAJ). In essence, there could be benefits vide the DTAA in the foreign jurisdiction as well as in India. The credit of tax paid in a foreign jurisdiction as per the DTAA can be availed against the tax payable in India. Necessary forms will be required to be filed along with supporting documents to claim credit.

21 Continuing foreign employment or business

Many people continue their employment or business abroad after returning to India. This has become easier in today’s globalised technology-driven era. In fact, the Covid lockdown saw many Indians stuck in India
or coming back to India and continuing their foreign business or employment from India. However, it is pertinent to note that the economic activity is being done from India. It should be checked whether any income directly accrues in India on account of such activity due to specific provisions which can get triggered in such a case, of which the most common ones are explained below:

21.1 Salary: Section 9(1)(ii) deems the salary proportionate to the period when the employment was exercised from India to be accruing in India. Hence, even if a person is NR or NOR, the amount of salary proportionate to the days he exercises employment from India is deemed to accrue in India. This provision applies not only to Returning NRIs, but to everyone. Prima facie, the proportionate salary is taxable under ITA, and one should go under the applicable DTAA to claim relief, if any.

21.2 Place of Effective Management: A foreign company is considered as resident of India if its Place of Effective Management is, in substance, in India, during that year12. The CBDT has prescribed detailed guidelines through Circulars 6, 8 and 25 of 2017. It should be noted that this provision applies only to companies having a turnover of more than INR 50 crores during the financial year.

21.3 Business Connection and Permanent Establishment: When an individual works in India for a foreign entity, he may constitute a “Business Connection” of the foreign entity in India. In that case, the income pertaining to the activities carried out through such Business Connection is deemed to accrue in India13 . Further, if there is a DTAA between India and the country where the entity is resident, generally, the business profits of the foreign entity would be taxable in India only if the foreign entity has a Permanent Establishment (PE) in India. Every DTAA has different criteria for determining whether there is a PE. Hence, it needs to be checked whether the individual constitutes a Business Connection of such entity in India, and if yes, whether he constitutes a PE of such entity in India as per the applicable DTAA. This can be possible in cases where the foreign company is run almost exclusively by the Returning NRI.


12. Section 6(2) of ITA
13. Section 9(1)(i) of ITA

B.2 FEMA issues regarding Returning NRIs

22 Residential status

The provisions pertaining to residential status under FEMA were dealt with in detail in the March 2024 edition of BCAJ. In essence, as per Section 2(1)(v) of FEMA, when a person comes to India for or on taking up employment in India; or for carrying on business or vocation in India; or under circumstances which indicate his intention to stay in India for an uncertain period — he becomes an Indian resident under FEMA. Hence, when a person comes to settle down in India for good, he or she becomes a resident under FEMA from the date of their return to India. This is because the person is coming to India in such circumstances, which indicates his intention to stay in India for an uncertain period. Hence, from the day a person returns to settle in India or for the purposes mentioned above, all provisions under FEMA meant for residents become applicable to such person.

23 Scope of FEMA as applicable to Returning NRIs

Apart from the assets and transactions covered u/s. 6(4) of FEMA and the balances in RFC accounts (explained in detail below), all other transactions outside India (whether in foreign currency or INR); all Indian transactions in foreign currency and all transactions with non-residents (whether in or outside India) come under the purview of FEMA. This can impact Indian transactions of the Returning NRI with other non-resident family members. As non-residents, they would have had the liberty to transfer funds between their NRO accounts. However, there will be several restrictions on transactions between a Returning NRI (who is now a resident individual) and a non-resident. Thus, gifts, loans and even payments made to or on behalf of non-residents can have implications under FEMA. Thus, a change of residence requires a change in mindset, as otherwise, Returning NRIs may end up committing violations under FEMA.

24 Holding foreign assets abroad

24.1 Background of FERA: Under FERA, as it was enacted, when a person became an Indian resident, he was required to liquidate all his foreign assets and bring the foreign exchange into India unless approval was obtained from RBI. This was liberalised in July 1992 when the Government of India issued six notifications granting exemptions from several different provisions of FERA to the returning Indians. These notifications were covered with a press note and a circular issued by RBI in Sept. 1992 — ADMA Circular No. 51 dated 22nd September, 1992. It explained the notifications. A summary of all the provisions is that on return to India, the Returning NRI retain all his assets abroad — provided that the assets were not acquired in violation of FERA and that the person was a non-resident for at least one year before becoming resident. There was no need to make any declaration under FERA. He could change his assets in the sense that he could sell one asset and buy another. He could retain dividends / interest / rent and other incomes earned on the assets. He could reinvest these incomes or spend the same. He was at liberty to bring the assets to India or to retain them abroad. He could gift these assets to anyone. On death, his foreign assets would pass to his heirs without any restrictions. If the Returning NRI held shares in any company, the shares would be considered as his investments. The company could continue business abroad. One could say that FERA did not apply to such wealth of the person and the incomes generated on such wealth. The person was free to do anything with the same.

24.2 Provisions under FEMA: Under FEMA, unfortunately, such liberalisation has been provided in a very brief manner through Section 6(4), which is reproduced below:

“(4) A person resident in India may hold, own, transfer or invest in foreign currency, foreign security or any immovable property situated outside India if such currency, security or property was acquired, held or owned by such person when he was resident outside India or inherited from a person who was resident outside India.”

It is provided that any foreign currency, foreign security, and immovable property situated outside India which were acquired when the person was a non-resident, can be continued to be held or owned after becoming a resident.

24.3 Section 6(4) of FEMA does not clearly specify the transactions which are allowed as was quite apparent as per the circulars issued under FERA. On making a representation, RBI issued A.P. Dir Circular No. 90 dated 9th January, 2014, which prescribes the transactions covered u/s. 6(4). Those are as follows:

a. Foreign currency accounts opened and maintained by the Returning NRI when he or she was resident outside India.

b. Income earned through employment or business or vocation outside India taken up or commenced while such person was resident outside India, or from investments made while such person was resident outside India, or from gift or inheritance received while such a person was resident outside India.

c. Foreign exchange, including any income arising therefrom, and conversion or replacement or accrual to the same, held outside India by a person resident in India acquired by way of inheritance from a person resident outside India.

d. Returning NRIs may freely utilise all their eligible assets abroad as well as income on such assets or sale proceeds thereof received after their return to India for making any payments or to make any fresh investments abroad without approval of the Reserve Bank, provided the cost of such investments and / or any subsequent payments received therefor are met exclusively out of funds forming part of eligible assets held by them and the transaction is
not in contravention to extant FEMA provisions.

Thus, such assets can be sold, and proceeds may even be reinvested abroad. There is no requirement to repatriate the income earned on these assets or sale proceeds thereof into India.

24.4 One can consider that broadly, the restrictions under FEMA do not apply to assets covered u/s. 6(4) of FEMA. One of the important clarifications in this regard pertains to overseas investments by resident individuals, which are allowed under the Overseas Investment Rules14 (OI Rules) of FEMA only if specific conditions are met. However, when it comes to foreign assets covered u/s. 6(4), Rule 4(b)(iii) of the OI Rules clearly provides that the OI Rules do not apply to any overseas investment covered u/s. 6(4). It would thus also cover any asset or investment which a resident may otherwise either not be permitted to invest in; or permitted only within a certain limit; or only after fulfilling attendant conditions — under the OI Rules. For instance, resident individuals are not allowed to make Overseas Direct Investment in a foreign entity which is engaged in financial services activity. However, if a non-resident had invested in such a company abroad and later on, he or she becomes an Indian resident, such person can continue holding shares of the foreign company. The income thereon and the sale proceeds thereof can be retained abroad. If the individual wants to make any further investment in the foreign entity engaged in financial services activities out of funds lying in his Resident bank account in India, he or she will not be generally permitted to do so15.


14. Foreign Exchange Management (Overseas Investment) Rules, 2022 – Notification No. G.S.R. 646(E) issued on 22nd August 2022.
15. Refer Rule 13 of the OI Rules read with paragraph 1 of Schedule III to OI Rules.

24.5 Other assets not specified u/s. 6(4) of FEMA: Section 6(4) specifies only three assets. Further, the circular also does not provide complete clarity. A person may own several other assets. For instance — the person can have an interest in a partnership firm or LLC or can own gold, jewellery, paintings, etc. As a practice, the RBI has taken a view since 1992 that a person is eligible to continue owning / holding all the foreign assets after turning resident, which he had acquired as a non-resident. This also includes such assets or investments which he could not have otherwise owned or made as a resident.

24.6 Insurance abroad: Returning NRIs may have different types of insurance policies issued by insurers in India as well as outside India. As explained above, funds covered under Section 6(4) of FEMA and lying abroad can be utilised for any purpose, including premium payment for insurance policies. FEMA provisions pertaining to s the utilisation of Indian funds for foreign insurance policies16 by Returning NRIs are as follows:

a. Health insurance policy can be continued to be held by a Returning NRI provided the aggregate remittance including the amount of premium does not exceed the LRS limit.

b. Life insurance policy can be continued to be held by a Returning NRI if it was issued when he was a non-resident. Further, if the premium due on such policy is paid by remittance from India, the maturity proceeds or amount of any claim due on the policy should be repatriated to India within 7 days of receipt.

24.7 Loans abroad: If a person has taken a loan abroad as a non-resident and becomes a resident later, he can service such loans subject to such terms, conditions and limits as specified by RBI. In general, RBI has not objected to a Returning NRI using his or her foreign funds covered under Section 6(4) of FEMA to service such loan repayments.

24.8 Foreign currency: Returning NRIs may need to bring in foreign currency notes and coins into India. Notification No. FEMA 6(R)17 provides that such person can bring into India without limit foreign exchange (other than unissued notes) from any place outside India. However, a declaration needs to be made to the Customs authorities.


16. Para 2 of Master Direction on Insurance - FED Master Direction No. 9/ 2015-16 - last updated on 7th December 2021.
17. Reg. 6(b) of Foreign Exchange Management (Export and import of currency) Regulations, 2015.

24.9 Inheritance of assets covered under Section 6(4) of FEMA: The first limb of Section 6(4) allows residents to hold assets abroad which they had acquired as a non-resident. The second limb further allows a resident heir of such Returning NRI to inherit these foreign assets from him or her. This is in line with the reliefs provided through the circulars issued earlier under FERA. However, it should be noted that this provision covers only one level of inheritance, i.e., from the Returning NRI to his or her heir. Later, if a resident heir of such heir wants to inherit these foreign assets, it is not covered by Section 6(4). The relevant notifications, rules, etc. under FEMA corresponding to the concerned assets need to be checked for the same. A summary of the holding and inheritance of foreign assets under Section 6(4) of FEMA can be summarised as follows:

Exceptions to this rule are for overseas immovable properties18 and foreign securities19, inheritance for which is allowed up to any generation if the investment and holding of such foreign property were as per extant FEMA regulations.


18. Rule 21(2)(i) of OI Rules.
19. Para 9(b) of Schedule III to FEMA Notification 5(R)/2016-RB – FEM (Deposit) Regulations,2016.

It should be noted that there are several controversies surrounding Section 6(4) of FEMA, including the interpretation of its second limb. We have not discussed all the controversies here, considering this is an article on a broader topic.

25 Impact on Indian assets

25.1 Bank and demat accounts: Returning NRIs need to designate their NRO bank and demat accounts as normal Resident accounts once they become residents20.
There are some special types of accounts in which non-residents can hold funds like NRE, FCNR, etc. On becoming a resident, NRE accounts need to be closed; however, FCNR deposits are permitted to be continued till maturity. Funds in both these accounts can be either transferred to the Resident account (becomes non-repatriable) or to the RFC account (repatriability continues, and such funds remain out of FEMA purview). Returning NRIs are permitted to hold foreign exchange in India in RFC accounts. The funds lying in an RFC account can be remitted abroad without any restrictions and can be used or invested for any purpose. The provisions of FEMA do not apply to the same. The provisions for such accounts will be discussed in detail in the upcoming articles in this series of articles.


20. Para 9(b) of Schedule III to FEMA Notification 5(R)/2016-RB – FEM (Deposit) Regulations, 2016.

25.2 Loan from NRI / OCI to a resident: If an NRI / OCI has given a loan to a resident (as per the FEMA guidelines) and he becomes a resident later, the repayment may be made to the designated account of the lender maintained with a bank in India as per the RBI guidelines, at the option of the lender.

25.3 Privately held investments in India: There could be investments in Indian companies, LLP, partnership firms, etc., made by Returning NRIs when they were non-residents. The implications of such investments due to a change of residence are explained below:

25.3.1 Indian assets held on a non-repatriable basis: NRIs and OCIs are permitted to invest in India on a non-repatriable basis, which has minimal restrictions and no reporting requirements. In such cases, if the person becomes a resident of India, there is no change in the character of the holding. The investment was anyway treated at par with domestic investment and no reporting, etc., is required. Normally, there is no formal record to be kept by the investee entity regarding the residential status of the person if the investment is on a non-repatriation basis. However, if there is any such record maintained, the residential status should be updated therein.

25.3.2 Indian assets held on a repatriable basis: Let us say the person has made investments in India on a repatriable basis. As a non-resident, he can remit full sale proceeds abroad without any limit. Now, if such a person returns to India and becomes a resident, the resultant structure is that an Indian resident is holding an Indian asset. The repatriable character of the investment is lost! This is a particularly important provision. All investments held by a non-resident on a repatriable basis become non-repatriable from the day he becomes a resident. In fact, there is nothing like repatriable or non-repatriable investment for a resident. Every Indian asset of a resident is considered as a domestic investment. It is only assets covered under Section 6(4) and the funds transferred to the RFC account, which are free from FEMA. This becomes a critical point, which every Returning Indian should consider in advance. When a non-resident holding an investment in an Indian entity on a repatriable basis becomes a resident, he should intimate it to the entity, and the entity should record the shareholding of the person as domestic investment and not foreign investment.

25.3.3 Indian assets held through a foreign entity: Let us say, a non-resident invests in Indian assets on a repatriable basis. However, instead of investing in his personal name (as explained in the above para), the investment is made by his foreign entity. Thereafter, the person becomes an Indian resident. The resultant structure is that an Indian resident owns a foreign entity which has invested in India on a repatriable basis. This enables the following:

a. Holding in Foreign entity: The ownership in the foreign entity by the Returning NRI is covered under Section 6(4). He can thus continue to hold such investments.

b. Repatriability of Indian assets: The Indian assets continue to be held on a repatriable basis by the foreign entity. All incomes and sale proceeds therefrom can be remitted abroad by the foreign entity without any limit. Had the individual directly held Indian assets and became resident, the repatriable character would have been lost — as highlighted above in Para 25.3.2. However, one should consider the tax implications of such a structure, especially with regard to POEM, Transfer Pricing and Permanent Establishment provisions under the ITA, as explained in para 21 above.

26 Remittance facilities for resident individuals

Liberalised Remittance Scheme: LRS is the remittance facility available for resident individuals. The LRS limit of USD 250,000 per financial year is the ceiling for all current and capital account transactions covered under the Current Account Transaction Rules. Barring exceptions like exports and imports and certain relaxations21 which are available in limited situations, the remittance facilities for a person resident in India under FEMA are constrained to the LRS limit. Returning NRIs should hence note that their remittances from India will be restricted to a considerable extent compared to what they were allowed as non-residents22. Even the liberty of remitting current incomes without any limit is not available for resident individuals.


21 Like use of International Credit Card while being on a visit outside India; higher amount of remittance allowed for educational or medical expenses; or for acquisition of ESOPs, sweat equity, etc.
22 Please refer to Para 7.6 in Part-I of this article for USD 1 Million Scheme which is available to NRIs.

27 Fresh incomes earned abroad

Let us say the individual earns fresh income abroad after becoming a resident – like salary, royalty or even receiving a gift of funds from a non-resident. A resident individual cannot retain such foreign exchange abroad. He is required to take all reasonable steps to realise the foreign exchange due or accrued to him and repatriate the same within 180 days of the date of receipt23.


23. Section 8 of FEMA r.w. Regulation 7 of FEMA Notification 9(R)/2015-RB.

C. OTHER RELEVANT ISSUES COMMON TO CHANGE OF RESIDENTIAL STATUS

28 Change of Citizenship

Change of citizenship has several ramifications beyond change of residence, especially under FEMA. The issues to be kept in mind when a person has obtained foreign citizenship are elaborated in Para 11 to 16 in Part-I of this Article covered in the June 2024 issue of the BCAJ. Returning foreign citizens should consider the implications of the country of their citizenship on their move to India — especially where such countries are taxing them based on their citizenship, exit taxes and estate duty or inheritance tax — all of which are explained briefly below.

29 Change of residence for a short period

One can see that the scope of FEMA and the Income-tax Act changes drastically with the change of residential status. This article attempts to cover aspects where there is a change of residence for good. If the residential status of a person changes for a short period of time, caution should be exercised before taking the benefits of a change of residence. Consider a situation where a resident goes abroad; claims to be a non-resident under FEMA or the Income-tax Act; takes benefit of such change (for example, by remitting USD 1 million from India or taking a treaty benefit as a non-resident of India); and again, becomes an Indian resident — all within a short period of time. In such cases, the regulator or tax officer may question the whole arrangement and consider that the change in residence is not genuine. Action can be taken based on anti-tax avoidance provisions under the Act and relevant treaty (please refer to para 35 below). Hence, there should be clarity on residential status; bonafides of transactions and genuineness of arrangements. In fact, sometimes it is ideal and safe if benefits are availed of only after the person is certain about his or her change in residential status and it is maintained over a period of time.

30 Succession Planning

There are several laws which need to be considered for succession planning like the applicable succession laws, Sharia law in the case of Muslims, Trust laws in case of Trusts, FEMA for cross-border transactions & assets, corporate laws in case of securities, stamp duty laws, Income-tax laws, Inheritance / Estate Tax etc. Hence, succession planning from a holistic approach is especially important wherever the family members or the assets are spread over more than one country. In fact, FEMA itself contains several complexities regarding inheritance. There are only a few provisions specifically dealing with inheritance and gifts under FEMA. These provisions are spread over many notifications. For several assets and situations, provisions are completely missing. To top it all off, everything changes when a person shifts residence from one country to another. The whole succession planning exercise needs to be re-considered in such cases — especially due to FEMA provisions.

31 Inheritance Tax or Estate Duty

31.1 Migrating persons, as well as Returning NRIs, should consider the inheritance tax or Estate Duty laws of the foreign jurisdiction. Different countries levy such taxes based on different criteria like citizenship, visa (green card in USA), domicile (UK), etc. In the USA, there is the Federal Estate Tax as well as the State Estate Tax. Residents of countries where such taxes or duties are applicable should have proper Estate Duty planning done. There have been cases where Estate Duty or Inheritance Tax is payable in the foreign country where a large amount of wealth was in the immovable properties which cannot be sold since the person is staying in the same. Further, if substantial wealth is situated in India, the limits on remittances abroad can also create a hindrance for paying such taxes. The following basic questions can be considered:

a. Applicability of such tax and the taxable events.

b. Connecting factors including domicile, citizenship, residence, etc.

c. Assets covered.

d. Thresholds applicable, if any, and tax rates.

e. Implications of gifts between family members.

f. Whether it applies to the inheritance of Indian assets received by the person on the death of his parents who are staying in India.

g. Treaties in relation to Double Taxation Relief for Estate Duties.

31.2 One common question asked is whether the Indian Government will bring in Estate Duties or Inheritance taxes. There is an unsupported fear in people’s minds of such duties impacting their wealth leading them to create Trust structures for protecting their wealth from such duties. The Government has earlier been on record to state that no such Estate Duties are planned. Further, even if such duties are introduced, they would have enough anti-avoidance provisions to counteract against any planning undertaken by taxpayers.

32 Exit Tax: Some countries have a concept of Exit Tax to prevent loss of revenue, if any, upon change of residential status / citizenship. It is levied when a person revokes citizenship or visa (like revocation of citizenship or green card in the USA) or if a person shifts his residence to another country (like Departure Tax in Canada). One may carefully plan the timing of their change of residence to minimise the impact of such taxes wherever possible.

33 Transfer Pricing

In simple words, Transfer Pricing triggers in case of a transaction which can give rise to income (or imputed income) between associated enterprises, of which at least one party is a non-resident. On change of residence, the migrating resident’s or Returning NRI’s continuing transactions with associated enterprises may come under the purview of Transfer Pricing provisions. All such transactions must be on an arm’s length basis. The implications under Transfer Pricing on the shift of a person from or to India should hence be considered.

34 Section 93 of ITA

Section 93 is a complex anti-avoidance provision which targets certain transfers of assets in a manner which leads to the income being earned by a non-resident, but the transferor still has the power to enjoy such incomes. The provision targets such transfers whereby incomes would have been chargeable to tax in the hands of the transferor if the transferor had earned such incomes directly. For example, a Returning NRI who transfers assets to another person before returning to India, but with a condition that income earned by such other person would be in control of the NRI, would be caught by this provision. There are several conditions and nuances in the provision, and one must note that any tax planning done before a change of residence can be impacted due to this provision.

35 Anti-tax avoidance provisions

While there are several Specific Anti Avoidance Rules (SAARs) prescribed under the Income-tax Act – POEM, Business Connection, Transfer Pricing, etc. – one should also consider General Anti Avoidance Rules (GAAR), which have been notified under Sections 95 to 102. GAAR would apply to an arrangement if it is regarded as an Impermissible Avoidance Arrangement (IAA). There are detailed provisions on the same. The ramifications of GAAR are massive. Once an arrangement is determined as IAA, the officer can treat the place of residence of such person at a place other than their claimed place of residence; ignore one or more transactions; deny benefits of a DTAA; recompute the income and tax of the assessee; and so on. While the Department has invoked GAAR in very few cases till now, it looks evident that GAAR will be invoked more frequently in the times to come. Recently courts have decided on the matter of applicability of GAAR in certain situations. Further, after the advent of the Multi-Lateral Instrument, several treaties that India has entered with other countries and jurisdictions have brought in anti-tax avoidance provisions where the change of residence is only for the purposes of claiming treaty benefit. These include the broader Principal Purpose Test and amendment in the preamble to the treaty, as well as the specific anti-tax avoidance measures that are today part of many double-tax avoidance treaties that India has signed.

36 Documentation and record-keeping

Change of residence typically leads to several queries from the tax department or regulator — especially for Returning NRIs in relation to their foreign assets. They would like to know that the foreign assets of such a person were acquired in a bona fide manner as a non-resident. One can refer to para 18 above explaining the same. Therefore, full documentation should be maintained. A few key areas where documentation should be maintained are:

a. Calculation of number of days of stay in India in each year and determination of residential status.

b. Passport copies to substantiate travel details and number of days stayed in India.

c. Relevant documents for every foreign asset and transaction, especially the opening statements, along with an explanation of the source of funds (irrespective of residential status).

d. Tax returns and other documents filed in the foreign jurisdiction.

e. Disclosure of foreign assets including in case of joint ownership, nomination, authorised signatory, etc.

f. Employment contract, salary slips, visa, etc.

g. Details and documents substantiating the purpose of immigration or emigration.

37 Impact of other laws

37.1 Transferring physical or movable assets from or into India: While FEMA permits holding assets in or outside India migrating or returning individuals may plan to move valuable assets with them from or into India – like gold, jewellery, art, etc. One should consider the permissibility and limits under Baggage Rules, 2016 of the Customs Act, along with the disclosures required thereunder. Further, certain movable items like art and antiques, as well as those dealing with wildlife, etc., need to be imported or exported only as permitted under the relevant laws24. Similarly, a migrating resident needs to check the parallel provisions of the country to which they are migrating.


24. The Antiquities and Art Treasures Act, 1972 and The Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, etc.

37.2 Indirect taxes: Indirect taxes have a significant impact, especially in a situation where the individual works in a personal capacity instead of employment. For instance, if Returning NRI continues working for a foreign entity as a consultant or in a similar manner, the applicability of GST and other indirect taxes needs to be checked.

37.3 Stamp duty laws: Certain individuals end up entering into gift deeds, powers of attorney, etc., on change of residence. Any document executed or brought within India can attract stamp duty. The stamp duty laws need to be checked before executing any such document. Similarly, the stamp duty law of the foreign country should also be considered.

37.4 Other laws: There are several other laws which could apply while executing a transaction or on account of a change of residence. It could be visa and citizenship rules; laws pertaining to family and marriage; labour, and social security regulations/norms. These laws should be considered for India as well as the host country.

38 Geopolitical, Economical, and Cultural Considerations / Challenges

Moving base has its own set of challenges. Certain personal factors can be dealt with by the individual concerned to a large extent. However, such individuals should also appreciate that there are several factors which are beyond their control. These relate to the economic situation of the country they are moving to the cultural change they or their family members must deal with. Further, the global geopolitical environment has seen dramatic upheavals in the last decade. Apart from the economic and legal considerations, one should also keep the geopolitical developments in mind, especially in relation to India and the host country where they are migrating to or from.

Conclusion

One can see that a change of residence leads to a substantial change in the tax liability, compliances, and regulatory provisions applicable to the person. Further, the Income-tax and FEMA laws themselves have grey areas, with differing views between various stakeholders causing prolonged litigation. When we bring in laws of another country and their interplay with Indian laws to the same transaction or income, it leads to increasing complexities, contradictions, and uncertainties. When a person shifts residence from abroad to India or from India to abroad, the whole legal position surrounding the person takes a 180-degree turn. It is like turning the table halfway through in a game of chess! In such cases, it is ideal to consider all the legal implications in advance, so that informed decisions can be taken. Otherwise, it could happen that the person is “physically” moving to a particular location with several plans in mind, but “legally” spearing into uncharted territory with far-reaching consequences.

End of the Non-Dom Era in the UK

For many years, the concept of domicile has been a cornerstone of the UK tax system. In order to attract wealthy individuals to the UK, the UK Government was happy to grant preferential tax treatment to non-UK domiciled individuals, effectively protecting their overseas assets from UK taxation for an extended period.

However, this privileged status has attracted much debate in recent years, so it was no surprise when the Chancellor announced the abolition of the non-dom regime in the 2024 Spring Budget. We were told that the existing rules would be replaced with a residence-based tax system for income and capital gains tax from April 2025, with new benefits for long-term non-residents lasting for only four years following a move to the UK.

The Government also announced the inheritance tax regime would move to a residence-based test following a period of consultation, leaving many UK resident non-doms having to rethink their plans, whilst new arrivers to the UK will be wondering how they can benefit from the new rules.

UK TAX PRINCIPLES

Domicile

Domicile is a concept in UK general law that is distinct from nationality and residency. It is the country where a person ‘belongs’ and is found by considering the individual’s habitual residence and where they intend to remain indefinitely.

Under UK law, each person has a domicile, and whilst it is possible to be a resident in more than one country, a person can only have one domicile at any given time. There are three different types of domicile:

  • A domicile of origin, typically being where the individual’s father was domiciled at the time of their birth;
  • A domicile of dependence, where their parent acquired a different domicile before the individual turned 16 years old; and
  • A domicile of choice, which occurs if the individual moves away from their home country and resides in a different country with the intention of making the latter their home permanently or indefinitely.

For tax purposes only, the UK also has the concept of ‘deemed domicile’, where an individual who is non-UK domiciled under general law is considered to be UK domiciled for tax purposes where certain conditions are met. Since 2017, this would apply if an individual has been a UK tax resident for 15 of the last 20 tax years or, where someone with a domicile of origin in the UK who had obtained a domicile of choice elsewhere subsequently becomes a tax resident in the UK again.

When an individual is deemed domiciled in the UK, this status is relevant for income, capital gains and inheritance tax purposes, although relief might be available under some double tax treaties in limited circumstances.

Background

The UK first introduced income tax in 1799 in order to fund the Napoleonic Wars. Even then, the rules incorporated an early form of the remittance basis of taxation by limiting a taxpayer’s liability on foreign income to that remitted to the UK. It was not until 1914 that the concept of domicile was linked to the UK’s tax system and the benefits that a UK-domiciled individual could obtain from this ‘remittance basis’ started to be restricted.

This divergence between the taxation of UK and non-UK domiciled individuals increased in the 1940s and 1950s through further restrictions on the reliefs available to those with a UK domicile, and when capital gains tax was introduced in 1965, it was only ‘non-doms’ who were able to use the remittance basis to shelter unremitted overseas gains. The final strands of the remittance basis available to UK domiciled individuals were effectively abolished in 1974, and this disparity continues to this day.

As it stands, the two primary benefits of the non-dom regime are the ability to avoid paying inheritance tax on non-UK situs assets and the option to elect to be taxed on the remittance basis, which avoids the taxation of overseas income and gains.

From a conceptual perspective, aligning tax benefits to an individual’s domicile status could help achieve the long-standing UK objective of encouraging foreign individuals to relocate to the UK to do business and invest in the economy. However, the existing regime has some apparent drawbacks, including the loss of tax revenue on foreign income and gains, a tax charge that can effectively encourage non-doms to keep their wealth outside of the UK, and the discontent of the UK public at the inequity of tax regimes.

The remittance basis remains a popular election for non-doms with the UK’s tax authority, HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC), reporting that in 2022 the combined total of non-domiciled and deemed domiciled taxpayers in the UK stood at a minimum of 78,700. Together this cohort contributed £12.4 billion to the UK in the form of income tax, capital gains tax, and National Insurance Contributions — the highest amount on record.

However, despite these revenue contributions, the regime and its users have remained under significant scrutiny and criticism from both the public and politicians. Anecdotally, the public considers the regime to be a benefit for the rich — at odds with the principle of those with the broadest shoulders contributing most to the economy. Politicians, on the other hand, question whether a regime which motivates taxpayers to keep their wealth out of the UK is counterproductive to what was originally intended. This contrasts with supporters of the existing rules who point to the regime as being one of the reasons individuals and businesses have for decades continued to come to the UK to do business, create wealth and spend money.

From a professional adviser’s perspective, the concept of domicile is very subjective, so it can be difficult to form a definitive opinion on the matter, which has led to many tax disputes. At the time the concept was introduced, it would not have been possible, or at least highly unlikely, to have a permanent home in two different countries but this is now relatively commonplace with modern-day transportation and ever-increasing global mobility. Similarly, moving away from traditional family relationships can cause issues when applying the rules and many people are uncertain where they will remain permanently until very late in life.
Accordingly, since at least 2015, most UK opposition parties, including Labour and Liberal Democrats, have pledged to either abolish the regime altogether or drastically restrict it. In 2017, we saw significant changes to the non-dom regime, including an increase to the annual charge applicable when claiming the remittance basis after 7 years of UK residence, the point at which one is deemed UK domiciled reducing from 17 to 15 of 20 years of UK residence, and income and gains being brought into the deemed domicile rules.

Despite these changes, the remittance basis remained a popular election, and non-doms looked set to continue to utilise the regime prior to the Budget announcements.

THE CURRENT REGIME

As noted, non-UK domiciled individuals are currently able to benefit from a UK inheritance tax exemption on their non-UK situs assets and an exemption from income and capital gains tax on overseas income and gains by electing to be taxed on the remittance basis of taxation. Both of these benefits offer significant benefits and planning opportunities that are not available to UK domiciled individuals.

UK Inheritance Tax (IHT)

IHT can apply when an individual makes certain transfers during their lifetime, but it is primarily a charge on the value of a person’s estate on death. However, the extent to which an individual’s estate is subject to IHT depends on their domicile status.

UK-domiciled and deemed domiciled individuals are subject to IHT on their worldwide assets. To the extent an individual’s estate does not consist of ‘Excluded Property’ or qualifies for any reliefs or exemptions, it will be taxed at the inheritance tax death rate, currently 40 per cent, on any amounts in excess of the nil rate band of £325,000.

This threshold of £325,000 has not been increased since 2009 and is set to remain at this level until 2028. As a result, there has been a significant increase in the number of people who find themselves subject to inheritance tax as the nil rate band has not kept up with inflation or, in particular, the rise in UK property values over the same period.

In contrast, for a non-UK domiciled individual, non-UK situs assets will be Excluded Property with the exception of any assets that derive their value from UK residential property or related loans – for example, foreign companies that own UK residential property. Accordingly, non-doms coming to the UK currently have limited exposure to IHT, provided they do not stay long enough to become deemed domiciled.

Furthermore, as Trusts inherit the IHT status of the settlor, under the current regime non-doms have the ability to settle non-UK situs assets into trust without these assets falling into the Relevant Property Trust regime, which would otherwise subject the trust fund to principal and periodic charges. These trust structures can, therefore, offer long-term IHT protection provided the assets are kept out of the UK.

The Remittance Basis

From an income and capital gains tax perspective, the default position for a UK resident is that they are subject to income tax and capital gains tax on their worldwide income and gains on an arising basis. This means that UK tax is payable on these receipts regardless of where they arise and whether or not they are brought to the UK.

However, non-doms have the ability to limit their UK tax exposure by electing to be taxed on the remittance basis in a given year. The effect of this election is that they will continue to be taxed on their UK source income and gains on an arising basis, but their non-UK income and gains will only be taxable in the UK to the extent that they are brought into, or otherwise enjoyed in the UK.

Non-UK income and gains that have not been taxed in the UK as a consequence of a claim to be taxed on the remittance basis will be subject to UK taxation if they are remitted to the UK at any point in the future. When this occurs, the income loses its character and is taxed as non-savings income at rates of 20 per cent, 40 per cent and 45 per cent (or up to 48 per cent if the individual is a Scottish taxpayer). Capital gains will be taxed at the prevailing capital gains tax rate at the time of the remittance. If the income or gains have suffered tax in another jurisdiction, any Double Tax Treaty between the UK and the source country will need to be considered to determine how much, if any, foreign tax credit relief is available against the UK liability.

The concept of ‘remittance’ is very broad. In summary, non-UK income and gains are treated as remitted to the UK if they are brought into, received in or used in the UK. This includes income and gains being used to pay for services in the UK, being used in relation to UK debts, or being used to acquire assets that are subsequently brought into the UK.

Additionally, anti-avoidance provisions exist to prevent non-domiciled individuals from making remittances in tax years when they are temporarily non-UK residents — i.e., where they are outside the UK for less than five years. In these circumstances, any remittances in the period of temporary non-residence will be taxed in the year they re-establish residence in the UK.

Where an individual’s unremitted foreign income and gains in a year are less than £2,000, the remittance basis applies automatically without the need to make a claim. Otherwise, the remittance basis must be claimed annually on an individual’s UK tax return. Accordingly, individuals can decide whether to be taxed on the remittance basis on a year-by-year basis by taking into account the potential UK tax due on the overseas income and gains and the amount that has been remitted to the UK in order to determine whether it is beneficial for a given tax year.

Drawbacks of the Remittance Basis

Whilst there can be significant benefits to claiming the remittance basis, there are costs associated with doing so and also potential pitfalls.

Firstly, under the current rules, any foreign income and gains received in a year when a remittance basis election is made will always become taxable in the UK when remitted. This could be the following year or in 10 years — it still becomes taxable when it is brought into the UK. Accordingly, it is necessary to maintain detailed records to demonstrate the source of funds remitted to the UK, which can be very onerous over an extended period of time.

It may also be necessary to maintain multiple offshore accounts in order to avoid different sources of income and gains becoming mixed. A non-dom could have overseas receipts from different sources — investments, property income, asset sales, etc. — which can be difficult or impossible to unpick later down the line. Where money is remitted to the UK from a mixed fund, statutory ordering provisions apply, which deem the remittance to be made up of income or gains from the current tax year in priority to earlier years and, in essence, from income in priority to capital gains. This allows HMRC to tax remittances from mixed funds at the highest rates possible, as income tax rates significantly exceed those for capital gains. Whilst these rules can result in a significant compliance burden, they also provide an opportunity for well-advised individuals to structure their affairs so they are able to remit funds in a tax efficient manner.

Another pitfall is the wide-ranging definition of what constitutes a remittance. Non-doms will typically identify that a direct bank transfer to a UK account is a remittance, but it is not so obvious for indirect transfers — for instance, if they use a UK credit card which is ultimately repaid using overseas income. The acquisition of UK stocks and shares using offshore funds also constitutes a remittance, which is often not identified until after a purchase has been made — the sale of these assets does not remove the remittance, so consideration is required on what to do with these assets or proceeds given the remittance has already been made. At the very least, clear instructions should be given to any investment manager in place, and the taxpayer should monitor their portfolio on an ongoing basis through this lens. Care is also required around gifts to and from close family members and family investment vehicles to avoid unintended tax consequences.

Where a remittance of overseas funds has been made but not immediately identified, non-doms will want to ensure they disclose this to HMRC as soon as possible. As a remittance relates to offshore income or gains, a harsher penalty regime applies — up to 200 per cent of the unpaid tax — but this can usually be significantly mitigated by making a voluntary disclosure, cooperating with HMRC in resolving the matter, and making a full and prompt settlement of the underpaid tax. If the taxpayer fails to secure ‘unprompted disclosure’ status — for instance, if HMRC gets wind of undeclared income or gains and issues a ‘nudge letter’ — the ability to mitigate these penalties is considerably reduced.

As noted, whilst there can be tax benefits to claiming the remittance basis, there is also a ‘cost’ associated with doing so. Whenever a non-dom elects to be taxed on the remittance basis, the individual loses their entitlement to the income tax-free Personal Allowance (currently £12,570) and the capital gains tax Annual Exemption (£3,000 for the 2024/25 tax year).

In addition, a Remittance Basis Charge (‘RBC’) applies to remittance basis users after they have been UK residents for more than seven of the previous nine years. This charge starts at £30,000 and increases to £60,000, where the individual has been resident for more than 12 of the last 14 tax years.
Eventually, after being resident in the UK for 15 of the last 20 years, individuals will become deemed domiciled in the UK and therefore considered to be UK domiciled for all tax purposes. This means that they can no longer benefit from the remittance basis of taxation and that their worldwide estate will be chargeable to IHT on their death, subject only to very limited exceptions found in a handful of old Double Tax Agreements.

THE PROPOSED NEW REGIME

Before considering the proposed changes, it’s worth noting the current state of play in British politics, which will undoubtedly have an impact on what is ultimately enacted by legislation. The current Government has a Conservative majority but opinion polls suggest this is unlikely to be the case come the end of the year. So, whilst we know what a regime introduced by the Conservatives might look like, they may not be in a position to have much of a say on matters after the General Election now set for 4th July.

Based on current polling, the Labour Party is in pole position to take power so it is necessary to consider their take on matters. We know that they are in favour of abolishing the existing non-dom regime, so we can be relatively certain that the old rules will go in April 2025. There also seems to be an acceptance that the concept of domicile has had its’ day, so it is likely the new rules will be based on residence. Beyond that, those affected will need to pay close attention to the party proposals in the run-up to, and decisions made following the General Election.

If we do consider the Conservative Party proposals for the time being, the most significant change is the removal of the remittance basis of taxation from April 2025 and the introduction of a new Foreign Income and Gains Regime (the “FIG regime”). Under the FIG regime, new arrivers — said to be those who have been non-UK residents for the previous ten years — will not suffer income or capital gains tax on their offshore income or gains for the first four years of UK residence, after which point they will be subject to UK taxation on their worldwide income and gains. Similar to claiming the remittance basis, electing into the FIG regime will result in the loss of their Personal Allowance and capital gains tax Annual Exemption. However, unlike the remittance basis, foreign income or gains will not be taxed irrespective of whether they are remitted to the UK.

Transitional Rules

As is often the case with significant changes in tax policy, the proposals included some transitional provisions for those affected:

  • For the 2025/26 and 2026/27 tax years, taxpayers who have previously claimed the remittance basis will have access to a Temporary Repatriation Facility, whereby they will be able to remit foreign income and capital gains and suffer tax at a reduced tax rate of 12 per cent (compared to up to 45 per cent under the current rules);
  • For the 2025/26 tax year only, those who were claiming the remittance basis but are unable to benefit from the FIG regime will be able to exempt 50 per cent of their foreign income (not gains) from UK taxation; and
  • Individuals who have previously been taxed on the remittance basis and are neither UK domiciled nor deemed domiciled on 5th April, 2025 will be able to claim a capital gains tax rebasing uplift to the April 2019 value for assets sold after April 2025.

In addition, the Conservatives have announced that any Excluded Property Trusts — i.e. those established by non-domiciled individuals and are therefore not subject to UK IHT unless they hold UK situs assets — would retain their IHT benefits so long as they were settled before
6th April, 2025.

Some implications of the proposals.

In the first instance, individuals planning to come to the UK might consider the timing of their move. The new regime will be very attractive to new arrivers so they may wish to consider aligning their arrival date to that of the introduction of the new rules so they are able to take full advantage of the FIG regime. Whilst several countries already have a tax regime aimed at attracting wealthy individuals, these often come with a requirement to make a substantial investment in the country or pay a hefty annual charge to benefit from the local regime. As currently proposed, the FIG regime will have no such requirement, so it is very generous for the first four years of UK residence.

Because of this, we may see a rise in individuals using the UK as a temporary place of residence. In particular, the FIG regime will be attractive for business owners looking to realise a gain on or extract dividends from their non-UK business, which they will be able to do without incurring any UK tax. They will, of course, need to carefully consider the interaction of the new rules with tax legislation in the source jurisdiction.

There will also be certain professions where the changes could have a disproportionately large impact — for instance, foreign football players will typically keep their wealth out of the UK as they are generally able to meet their UK spending needs on just their club salary. This will no longer be effective planning after four years of UK residence, so we might see players only willing to sign up to a four-year contract, after which the player moves on to another league.

Consideration will also need to be given to how the new rules work with existing Double Tax Agreements. In many cases, relief from taxation in one jurisdiction is only available where the income or gains are taxed in the other jurisdiction — as the new FIG rules will not bring the income or gains into UK taxation, the taxing rights may fall back to the country where the income or gains are derived from.

For non-doms who are already UK residents and have not previously claimed the remittance basis, they may wish to consider doing so in order to ensure they can benefit from some of the transitional provisions. As noted above, there is likely to be a ‘cost’ to making the claim, so once there is certainty over the incoming rules, they will need to weigh this up against the benefits of doing so.

All that said, at the time of writing, these are still just proposals with no legal authority, and the Labour Party have given some strong suggestions that they would not introduce everything announced in the Spring 2024 Budget. In particular, they have suggested there would be no 50 per cent income exemption for those unable to benefit from the FIG regime and also that Excluded Property Trusts would lose their preferential IHT status. This leaves those affected in a rather unhelpful position with no firm basis on which to make plans.

Inheritance Tax (IHT) (again)

Finally, the Conservatives also announced their intention to move the application of IHT to a residence-based system from April 2025 but have not yet expanded further on this area. It would be extremely harsh to bring an individual’s entire estate into the charge to UK taxation after only four years of residence, so a 10-year period has been suggested as a starting point for discussion. We are advised that the Government will issue a formal Consultation on this matter in the summer, after which we can expect more information on the direction of travel.

WHAT NEXT…

The Government has given advanced notice of a fundamental change to UK taxation. This is helpful insofar as those affected are now aware that a change is coming — the issue is over what the landscape will look like after April 2025 and what actions they should be taking based on their personal circumstances.

The upcoming General Election and the contrasting views of the two main political parties add an element of uncertainty, but there are a few areas that seem to be relatively safe assumptions. Both parties seem to agree that the concept of domicile should be replaced with a residence-based test, indicating the existing non-dom regime is going. There also seems to be agreement that a mechanism which enables remittance basis users to bring funds into the UK is necessary, so we can expect some incarnation of Temporary Repatriation Facility —although it will be interesting to see how this looks when eventually legislated. Beyond that, it would seem that everything is up for debate and we expect this to be a key battleground as the parties draw up their tax policies for the General Election.

So much like Christopher Columbus, we know the direction of travel but not how we will get there or what the landscape will look like on arrival. For those wishing to avoid the new rules, the obvious option is to get off the ship — i.e., leave the UK before April 2025, but this would result in some pretty significant lifestyle changes that may not be attractive to everyone. For those who intend to stay in the UK, they should keep a close eye on developments over the next 6–8 months and, when we eventually have certainty on the incoming rules, be prepared to act swiftly. Accordingly, those with complex affairs will want to review their assets and structures to assess the implications of the changes and give consideration to their long-term objectives. Once the new regime is finalised, there will then be a relatively short window to implement any changes or suffer the consequences of this brave new world.

Corporate Guarantee and Letter of Comfort: Untangling the Transfer Pricing Quandary

Transfer Pricing (TP) regulations examine related party transactions as to whether they are undertaken between parties on an arm’s length basis or otherwise from the viewpoint of avoidance of tax leakage, i.e., whether said transactions are priced in a manner as transactions between two independent parties would have been priced. This not only mitigates tax leakage from one country to another but also ensures appropriate corporate governance (especially in listed companies dealing with public money).

In the complex landscape of TP, the issuance of corporate guarantees and letters of comfort (including the potential compensation to be charged thereon) has been a matter of significant controversy in income tax proceedings as well as in audit committee discussions.

BACKGROUND

Essentially, a corporate guarantee / letter of comfort is issued by a holding company to the bankers on behalf of its subsidiary, basis which the bank lends funds to the subsidiary. The borrowings in several cases entail a significant quantum of funds and consequentially, the above controversy has now reached corporate boardrooms and top management.

While the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises and Tax Administrations 2022 (OECD Guidelines) covers financial guarantees and does not specifically mention corporate guarantees, conceptual reference can be drawn from various paragraphs therein.

Para no. 10.154 of the OECD Guidelines acknowledges the intricacies involved in guarantee-related transactions, stating that “To consider any transfer pricing consequences of a financial guarantee, it is first necessary to understand the nature and extent of the obligations guaranteed and the consequences for all parties, accurately delineating the actual transaction in accordance with Section D.1 of Chapter I.”

Para no. 10.155 of the OECD Guidelines states that “There are various terms in use for different types of credit support from one member of an MNE group to another. At one end of the spectrum is the formal written guarantee and at the other is the implied support attributable solely to membership in the MNE group.”

Para no. 10.158 of the OECD Guidelines states that “From the perspective of a lender, the consequence of one or more explicit guarantees is that the guarantor(s) are legally committed; the lender’s risk would be expected to be reduced by having access to the assets of the guarantor(s) in the event of the borrower’s default. Effectively, this may mean that the guarantee allows the borrower to borrow on the terms that would be applicable if it had the credit rating of the guarantor rather than the terms it could obtain based on its own, non-guaranteed, rating.”

Para No. 10.163 of the OECD Guidelines deals with explicit / implicit support and states that “By providing an explicit guarantee the guarantor is exposed to additional risk as it is legally committed to pay if the borrower defaults. Anything less than a legally binding commitment, such as “letter of comfort” or other lesser form of credit support, involves no explicit assumption of risk. Each case will be dependent on its own facts and circumstances but generally, in the absence of an explicit guarantee, any expectation by any of the parties that other members of the MNE group will provide support to an associated enterprise in respect of its borrowings will be derived from the borrower’s status as a member of the MNE group. For this purpose, whether a commitment from one MNE group member to another MNE group member to provide funding to meet its obligations, constitutes a letter of comfort or a guarantee depends on all the facts and circumstances … The benefit of any such support attributable to the borrower’s MNE group member status would arise from passive association and not from the provision of a service for which a fee would be payable.”

Thus, the factual parameters of each individual guarantee transaction need to be carefully considered and the internationally accepted principle indicates that an “explicit” guarantee with a financial obligation on the guarantor would be regarded as a “transaction” requiring arm’s length compensation. However, an “implicit” support like a “Letter of Comfort” ought not to require any compensation.

Corporate guarantees are typically explicit, i.e., there is a financial obligation on the guarantor in case of the borrower’s default. A “Letter of Comfort” on the other hand is merely a support letter by the Group’s flagship company to the lender confirming the status of the borrower entity as a Group constituent. No financial obligation is cast on the issuer of such a letter.

This is also evidenced by the terminology generally included in corporate guarantee agreements, which revolves around an obligation on the guarantor in the event of default by the borrower. Corporate guarantee agreements usually contain explicit / specific references to:

  • “Unconditional / irrevocable / absolute financial obligation which the guarantor agrees to bear”;
  • “Obligations binding on the guarantor to pay any defaulted amounts to the lender on behalf of the borrower”;
  • “Continuing security for all amounts advanced by the bank”;
  • “In the event of any default on the part of Borrower in payment/repayment of any of the money referred to above, or in the event of any default on the part of the Borrower to comply with or perform any of the terms, conditions and covenants contained in the loan agreements / documents, the Guarantor shall, upon demand, forthwith pay to the Bank without demur all of the amounts payable by the borrower under the loan agreements / documents”;
  • “The Guarantor shall also indemnify and keep the Bank indemnified against all losses, damages, costs, claims, and expenses whatsoever which the Bank may suffer, pay, or incur of or in connection with any such default on the part of the Borrower including legal proceedings taken against the Borrower.”

In contrast, the nomenclature used in a letter of comfort is far more generic / informative in nature, typically involving:

  • “Declarations from the issuer of the letter that they are aware of the credit facility being extended to its subsidiary”;
  • “Assurance to the lender that the issuer shall continue to hold majority ownership / control of the business operations of the borrower”;
  • “The issuer shall not take any steps whereby the borrower might enter into liquidation or any arrangement due to which rights of the lender could get compromised vis-a-vis other creditors.”

Therefore, corporate guarantees and letters of comfort serve their respective purpose and the rationale behind providing a corporate guarantee or issuing a comfort letter are not directly comparable.

REGULATORY AND JUDICIAL HISTORY OF THE ISSUE IN INDIA

One of the first rulings from the Indian judiciary on the issue of applicability of transfer pricing provisions on providing of corporate guarantee by a parent to its subsidiary company was in the case of Four Soft Ltd vs. DCIT, wherein the Hyderabad Income-tax Appellate Tribunal (ITAT) (62 DTR 308) adjudicated that the definition of international transaction did not specifically cover transaction for providing corporate guarantee and hence, in absence of any charging provision enabling application of TP regulations to the said transaction, the same would be outside the purview of TP.

However, in the case of Nimbus Communications Ltd vs. ACIT [2018] 95 Taxmann.com 507 (MUM-TRIB.), Mumbai ITAT held that the provision of corporate guarantee is an international transaction.

To provide more clarity from a regulatory standpoint, Finance Act 2012 retrospectively amended the Income-tax Act, 1961 (the Act) by appending clause “(c)” to Explanation (i) in Section 92B of the Act, specifically including corporate guarantee as an international transaction. Before the said amendment, the matter of contention was the inclusion of corporate guarantee as an international transaction. Post amendment, the issue of eligibility of corporate guarantee as an international transaction continued to evolve, with the addition of newfound arguments centered around the validity of retrospective amendment and interpretation of Explanation (i) to Section 92B of the Act in conjunction with the Section itself. It is pertinent to note that Letter of Comfort has not been specifically included in the purview of Section 92B of the Act vide aforesaid amendment, thereby continuing to remain a bone of contention from the perspective of classification or otherwise as an international transaction under transfer pricing regulations.

Divergent views have been taken in subsequent judicial pronouncements. In the case of Bharti Airtel Limited vs. ACIT [2014] 63 SOT 113 (Del), it was held by the ITAT, Delhi that “there can be a number of situations in which an item may fall within the description set out in clause (c) of Explanation to Section 92B, and yet it may not constitute an International transaction, as the condition precedent with regard to the ‘bearing on profit, income, losses or assets’ set out in Section 92B(1) may not be fulfilled.” Thus, a view can be taken that a corporate guarantee is in the nature of parental obligation or shareholder’s activity for the best interest of the overall group, and if it can be established that providing a corporate guarantee does not involve any cost to the guarantor, then such corporate guarantee is outside the ambit of the “international transaction”.

However, in the case of Redington (India) Ltd [TS-656-HC-2020(MAD)-TP], the Hon’ble Madras High Court held that corporate guarantee is an international transaction and upheld the guarantee commission rate of 0.85 per cent to be at arm’s length. The Hon’ble High Court observed that in case of default, the guarantor has to fulfil the liability and therefore there is always an inherent risk to the guarantor in providing such guarantees. Hence, the Hon’ble High Court adjudicated that there is a service provided to the AE in increasing its credit worthiness for obtaining debt from the market. It was further observed that there may not be an immediate impact on the profit and loss account, but an inherent risk to the guarantor cannot be ruled out in providing such guarantees.

Over time, a multitude of assertions by the tax authorities as well as rulings by judicial authorities providing a variety of views as to whether or not such arrangements qualify as “covered transactions” from a TP perspective have added fuel to the above controversy.

Post the barrage of judicial pronouncements, the general consensus among taxpayers was that in case of an explicit guarantee, taxpayers typically reported it as an international transaction and conducted the arm’s length analysis accordingly.

Another controversy was on the issue of “Letters of Comfort” where the support is more implicit. In case of default, there is no financial obligation on the issuer of such a letter. The tax authorities have always alleged that even if there is no direct financial obligation, the mere fact that such letters of comfort benefit the group entity borrowing funds, compensation would be warranted.

The taxpayers have, however, maintained the position that implicit support could never warrant a fee.

RECENT DEVELOPMENTS

Very recently, the Mumbai ITAT issued two specific rulings on whether or not the issuance of a comfort letter can be considered in the same light as a corporate guarantee, thereby constituting an international transaction. While the rulings were fact-specific, they have shed further light on the debate.

In the case of Asian Paints Limited vs. ACIT [2024] 160 Taxmann.com 214 (MUMBAI-TRIB.) & ACIT vs. Asian Paints Limited (I.T.A. No. 5934/Mum/2017), the ITAT adjudicated that a comfort letter meets the criteria of international transaction even though they cannot be squarely compared to a corporate guarantee. Here, the ITAT focused on the fact that the taxpayer had made a specific disclosure in its financial statements showing it as a “contingent liability” in the same manner as corporate guarantee was disclosed in the financial statements. The ITAT held that since the taxpayer itself has classified it as a contingent liability, the letter of comfort has a bearing on the assets. Accordingly, it meets the specific criteria prescribed under Section 92B of the Act whereby, inter alia, a transaction having a bearing on the profits, income, losses, or assets is an international transaction and hence, compensation is warranted.

However, in the case of Lupin Limited vs. DCIT [2024] 160 Taxmann.com 691 (MUMBAI-TRIB.), the ITAT observed that in order to ascertain whether or not the issuance of a comfort letter constitutes an international transaction, it is important to examine whether any additional financial obligation is cast on the taxpayer. The ITAT held that issuance of a comfort letter is not an international transaction as “Rule 10TA of Safe Harbour Rules for International Transactions defines “corporate guarantee” as explicit corporate guarantee extended by a company to its wholly owned subsidiary being a non-resident in respect of any short-term or long-term borrowing and does not include a letter of comfort, implicit corporate guarantee, performance guarantee or any other guarantee of similar nature.”

Further, in relation to the characterization or otherwise of a letter of comfort as an international transaction, in a recent judgement of Shapoorji Pallonji and Company Private Limited [TS-147-ITAT-2024(Mum)-TP], the Mumbai ITAT held that a letter of comfort does not come under the definition of ‘international transaction’ and there is no necessity for determining the ALP of the said transaction.

A controversy has also recently come to light in the case of Goods and Services Tax (GST) law in India as to whether such guarantee transactions need to be valued and are eligible for GST liability.

Vide Circular No. 204/16/2023-GST dated 27th October, 2023, the Central Board of Indirect Taxes and Customs (CBIC) clarified that where the corporate guarantee is provided by a company to a bank / financial institutions for providing credit facilities to its related party the activity is to be treated as a supply of service between related parties. Further, in case where no consideration is charged for the said activity, it still falls within the ambit of ‘supply’ in line with Schedule I to the CGST Act.

For valuation of the aforesaid ‘supply’, a new sub-rule was inserted to Rule 28 of the CGST Rules, 2017 vide Notification No. 52/2023-Central Tax dated 26th October, 2023, whereby the value of supply of such services was prescribed as 1 per cent of the amount of such guarantee offered, or the actual consideration, whichever is higher.

A petition against the above-mentioned amendment has been filed before the Hon’ble High Court of Delhi, wherein the levy of GST on corporate guarantees has been challenged basis of the alleged fact that guarantees are contingent contracts which are not enforceable until the guarantee is invoked and a financial obligation on the guarantor is triggered, thereby giving rise to the issue of a “taxable service”. The matter is presently sub judice, with the hearing scheduled for July 2024.

KEY TAKEAWAYS FROM THE ABOVE

In a nutshell, the critical differentiator when ascertaining whether or not a consideration needs to be charged would be whether the support in question is explicit or implicit based on the facts of the case. If the support casts a financial liability on the guarantor, compensation may be required. A mere implicit support ought not to warrant compensation from a TP perspective.

PRICING FROM A TP AND GST STANDPOINT

Once it is established that compensation is required, determining the quantum of such compensation becomes critical from a business / operational viewpoint.

From a TP perspective, it is a matter of benchmarking by adopting various methods for conducting such analysis. Globally, the Interest Savings Method (ISM) and Loss Given Default (LGD) approach are widely accepted.

The ISM applies the principle of interest rates being determined based on credit ratings. Since the credit rating of the guarantor gets super imposed on the borrower, the borrower can obtain the funds at a reduced interest rate. Such reduction is the “interest saving” which needs to be compensated. In such cases, it becomes vital to understand the benefit obtained by the borrower through the support / credit rating provided by the guarantor and to quantify the value of said benefit in terms of savings in interest payout.

Broadly, LGD is the estimated amount of money a guarantor is expected to pay without recovery when a borrower defaults on a loan. The LGD method firstly takes into account the probability of default by the borrower triggering payout for the guarantor and subsequently, the likelihood of non-recovery of the said payout by the guarantor from the borrower. The compensation is computed based on the percentage of such default probability on the guaranteed amount.

Apart from the above, in case the guarantor / borrower has entered into a similar transaction with an unrelated party on identical terms, the guarantee commission percentage in such transaction could also be adopted. This is referred to as the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP) method. The CUP method mandates strict comparability, and for application of the same, the terms & conditions of the arrangement in question must be almost perfectly identical to the terms & conditions of the comparable arrangement being considered.

In case an actual transaction is not entered into, even quotations for identical transactions can be utilized. Judicial precedents are also considered as references in this regard for providing a reference rate of guarantee commission to be charged, should the transaction be characterized as an international transaction requiring TP benchmarking.

Another reference point in the regulations is the Safe Harbour Rules, which prescribe a range of 1.75 per cent – 2.00 per cent for pricing of corporate guarantee transactions vide Rule 10TD of Income-tax Rules, 1962. The exact pricing is to be determined subject to specific conditions as mentioned in the aforesaid Rule.

Even from a GST perspective, the pricing of the transaction is imperative. The stand taken by the authorities has been that the provision of a guarantee is a service liable for taxation as it is undertaken by the parent company to maximize its returns on investment in the subsidiary.

As mentioned above, as per the aforementioned Circular issued by the GST authorities, a corporate guarantee should be valued at 1 per cent or the actual pricing, whichever is higher.

One key question which is presently under discussion is whether the transaction pricing for accounting, corporate governance, and income tax purposes should be based on actual benchmarking or whether the 1 per cent valuation prescribed by the GST authorities will prevail. In this regard, a better view seems to be that the 1 per cent valuation is merely for the purposes of payment of GST. However, the actual transaction should be undertaken based on the appropriate benchmarking methods. Having said this, the TP rules themselves recognize that Government orders in force need to be taken into account while determining the related party pricing. Hence, one may argue that 1 per cent itself is an appropriate transaction pricing. The issue has not reached finality and is still being debated.

CONCLUSION

Given the significant numbers involved in several cases, compensation or otherwise for corporate guarantees / letters of comfort has now become a boardroom topic. Given the recent rulings, Circulars and assertions by tax authorities, the controversy is far from settled. It is crucial to consider the facts and circumstances involved in each individual case, especially the actual conduct and intent of the parties to establish whether or not compensation is warranted. The nomenclature of the instrument or terminology used in the financial statements can be looked into, but should not be the sole factor for concluding on the nature of support. Having said that, wording the instrument accurately could reduce the questions raised.

Further, whether the 1 per cent guidance provided by the GST Circular should be the transaction pricing or whether a specific TP benchmarking should be the basis of the price determination is also a subject matter of debate. Given that the same is sub judice before the Hon’ble Delhi High Court, guidance in this regard is to provide clarity. Having said that, a better view seems to be that scientifically benchmarked pricing should be adopted, duly considering all the facts and particulars of each case in hand. However, tax professionals are still not ruling out the possibility of determining the guarantee transaction pricing at 1 per cent.

All facts and circumstances, including the Government and judicial views, need to be taken into account in adopting the appropriate positions on the issue. A holistic approach would be recommended.

Emigrating Residents and Returning NRIs

1. This article is a part of the series of articles on income-tax and FEMA issues faced by NRIs and deals with issues faced by individuals when they change their residential status. A resident who leaves India and turns non-resident is termed as a “Migrating Resident”; while a non-resident of India, who comes to India and becomes a resident of India is termed as a “Returning NRI” in this article.

2. Both Migrating Residents and Returning NRIs have to consider implications under income-tax and FEMA before taking any decision for change of residence. We have come across several instances where such a person has not taken due care before change of residence leading to unnecessary and avoidable legal issues. After the advent of the Black Money Act1, there are instances where corrective action is quite difficult under law. Further, resolution of violations under FEMA can be difficult or costly to undertake.


1. Black Money (Undisclosed Foreign Income and Assets) and Imposition of Tax Act, 2015

3. Key to the above concern is the fact that residential status definitions under the Income-tax Act (ITA) and FEMA are separate and different. While under ITA, the definition is largely based on number of days stay of the individual in India; under FEMA, it is based on the purpose for which the person has come to, or left India, as the case may be. An important objective in advising persons who are migrating from India or returning to India, thus, is to determine the date on which the change in residence has been effected and purpose thereof. Any discrepancy in this can lead to assumption of incorrect residential status which can have adverse implications, some of which are as under:

a. Concealment of foreign income which should have been submitted to tax as well as non-disclosure of foreign incomes and assets, which can have severe implications under the Black Money Act;

b. Incorrect claim of benefits under the Double Tax Avoidance Agreements (DTAAs);

c. Holding assets or executing transactions which are in violation of FEMA.

4. The provisions of residential status under the ITA, the DTAA and under FEMA are dealt in detail in th preceding articles of this series — in the December 2023 and January and March 2024 editions, respectively, of The Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal (the Journal) — and hence, not repeated here. Readers will benefit by referring to those articles for issues covered therein. This article deals with income-tax and FEMA issues specifically for Migrating Residents and Returning NRIs2 and is divided into three parts as follows:

Sr. No. Topic
Part-I
A. Migrating Residents
A.1 Income-tax issues of Migrating Residents
A.2 FEMA issues of Migrating Residents
A.3 Change in Citizenship
Part-II
B. Returning NRIs
B.1 Income-tax issues of Returning NRIs
B.2 FEMA issues of Returning NRIs
C. Other relevant issues common to change of residential status

2. There is an overlap of several sections under different topics. To prevent repetition and focus on the relevant issues, the sections are not repeated completely. Only the applicable provisions or part thereof, which are relevant to the topic, are referred here.

Issues related to Returning NRIs and other relevant issues common to change of residential status will be covered in Part II of this Article in the upcoming issue of the Journal.

A. Migrating Residents

India has the world’s largest overseas diaspora. In fact, every year, 25 lakh Indians migrate abroad.3 While Indians shift and settle down abroad, it seldom happens that they eliminate their financial ties with India completely. The common reason being that either they continue to own assets or continue their businesses in India, or their relatives stay in India with whom they enter into transactions. Hence, Migrating Residents generally have a continuing link with India even after they have left India. This can create issues under income-tax and FEMA, which are analysed in detail below.


3. https://www.moneycontrol.com/news/immigration/immigration-where-are-indians-moving-why-are-hnis-leaving-india-12011811.html

A.1 Income-tax issues relevant for Migrating Residents:

1. Continuing Residential status under ITA: An issue that Migrating Residents need to keep in mind in particular is their residential status in the year of migration. Clause (a) of Explanation 1 to Section 6(1)(c) of the ITA provides a relief from the basic “60 + 365 days test”4. The relief is available only under two specific circumstances, i.e., a citizen who is leaving India during the relevant previous year for the purposes of employment abroad or as a crew member on an Indian ship. If a person does not fall under either of these circumstances, the “60 + 365 days test” test applies.


4 “60 + 365 days test” means that the individual has stayed in India for 60 days or more during the relevant previous year and for 365 days or more during the four preceding years.

Hence, in such cases, if a person who was normally residing in India, stays in India for 60 days or more during the year of his or her departure, he or she will meet the “60 + 365 days test” and consequently, be a resident for the whole previous year under ITA and will be classified as ROR. In such cases, following implications should be noted:

1.1 As a resident, scope of total income under Section 5 of the ITA includes all incomes accruing or arising within or outside India. Hence, foreign incomes would be prima facie taxable, subject to relief under the relevant DTAA. However, in the year of migration, even treaty benefits may not be available as the Migrating Resident may not be considered as a resident of the other country. Further, the exposure is not just regarding tax, interest and penalty under the Income-tax Act on concealment of income, but also the penal provisions under the Black Money Act for non-disclosure of foreign incomes and assets.

1.2 The issue gets compounded for a Migrating Resident who would otherwise not need to file a tax return but is now required to file a tax return as they would generally have a foreign bank account abroad. A common example is of students who are leaving India. Fourth proviso to Section 139(1) provides that those persons who are resident and ordinarily resident of India and hold or are beneficiary of any foreign asset are required to file their tax return in India even if they are not required to file a tax return otherwise. The same issue can come up for senior citizens or spouses who generally are not filing tax returns, but now need to do so in the year they are moving abroad. It should be noted that this requirement has no relief even if such person is termed as a non-resident for the purposes of the treaty under the relevant DTAA. Such an error can lead to harsh penalties under the Black Money Act for non-disclosure of foreign incomes and assets.

Hence, persons migrating abroad should be careful about their residential status in the year of migration.

1.3 Deemed Resident: Another instance where a Migrating Resident may still be considered as a resident under the ITA is due to the application of Section 6 (1A) of the ITA. This sub-section provides for an individual to be deemed as a resident of India if such individual, being a citizen of India, has total income other than income from foreign sources exceeding ₹15 lakhs during the previous year and is not liable to tax in any other country or territory by reason of domicile or residence or any other criteria of similar nature. While such deemed residents are considered as Resident but Not Ordinarily Resident as per Section 6(6)(d) of the ITA, their foreign incomes derived from a profession setup in India, or a business controlled from India are covered within the scope of income liable to tax in India. Readers can refer to the December 2023 edition of the Journal for an exposition on this provision.

1.4 Recording the change in status: On a person turning non-resident, his or her status should be correctly selected in the tax returns filed starting from the relevant assessment year of change in residence. It should be noted that the change in status recorded in the tax return does not automatically update the person’s status on the income-tax portal. Hence, such status should be changed on the income-tax portal also. Further, as of now, there seems to be no linking between the status updated in the tax return filed or on the income-tax portal with that recorded as per the local ward in the income-tax department. Hence, one should always ensure that such change is recorded in the local ward and the PAN is shifted to a ward which deals with non-residents. This will ensure that the status has been recorded in all manners with the tax department. This can be quite useful when the department issues notices to such persons.

2. Impact on change of residential status under ITA:

On change of residence, following are the important changes to keep in mind as far as ITA is concerned:

Particulars ROR NOR NR
Scope of Total Income5 Global incomes taxable Indian-sourced incomes are taxable. Foreign-sourced income are taxable only if derived from a business controlled in India or profession set up in India.

Incomes being received for the first time in India are also taxable.

Only Indian-sourced incomes taxable.

Foreign-sourced incomes are not taxable at all.

Incomes being received for the first time in India are also taxable.

Set-off of capital gains, dividend, etc., against unexhausted basic exemption limit Allowed6 Not allowed
Dividend Taxed at the applicable slab rate. Taxed @ 20%7 plus applicable surcharge & cess. (No set-off against unexhausted basic exemption, as stated above. No benefit of lower slab rate since special rate is mentioned.)
LTCG on unlisted securities and shares of 20% with indexation8 10% without the benefit of indexation and forex fluctuation9
a company, not being a company in which public are substantially interested
Withholding tax under ITA where the person is recipient of income Generally, at lower rates Generally, at a higher rate unless treaty relief availed
Access to Indian DTAAs Available as Resident of India under the DTAA Available if he is a resident of such host country as per the DTAA
FCNR Interest10 Taxable Not taxable
NRE Interest11 Exempt if the person is non-resident under FEMA
Benefits provided to senior citizens — higher  basic exemption limit, non-applicability of advance tax in certain situations, higher deduction for medical premium u/s. 80D, deduction u/s. 80TTB, etc. Available Not available

5. Section 5 of ITA. 
6. Proviso to Section 112(1)(a) and 
Proviso to Section 112A (2) of ITA. 
7. Section 115A(1)(A)
8. Section 112(1)(a)(ii)
9. Section 112(1)(c)(iii)
10. Section 10(15)(iv)(fa)
11. Section 10(4)(ii)

3. Transfer Pricing: Transfer Pricing triggers in case of a transaction which can give rise to income (or imputed income) between associated enterprises (parties related to each other as per Section 92 of the Income-tax Act), of which at least one party is a non-resident. All such transactions must be on an arm’s length basis. The implications under Transfer Pricing on the shift of a person from India can lead to unnecessary complications. However, in some cases, such an implication may be unavoidable. Thus, the incomes earned by a Migrating Resident from his related enterprises in India and other International transactions with such enterprises would be subject to Transfer Pricing. There is no threshold on application of Transfer Pricing provisions.

Having considered the issues under the ITA, a Migrating Resident would need to study the impact of the DTAA, too, especially with regard to reliefs available. A detailed study of residential status as per the DTAA has been dealt with in the January 2024 issue of the Journal. Here, we focus on the issues a Migrating Resident needs to be concerned about:

4. Treaty relief:

4.1 A person can access DTAA if he is a resident of at least one of the Contracting States. To consider a person as resident of a Contracting State, DTAAs generally refer to the residential status of the person under domestic tax laws of the respective country. While there are different permutations possible, one important point to note is that while migrating abroad, there can be an overlapping period wherein the person is a resident of India as well as the foreign country during the same period. This leads to dual residency, for which tie-breaker tests are prescribed under Article 4(2) of the DTAA. There could also be a possibility of the concept of split residency under DTAA being applicable. Accordingly, the provisions of the DTAA can be applied. These provisions have been explained in detail in the second article of this series contained in the Journal’s January edition.

4.2 A dual resident status under the treaty can lead to the person being able to claim the status of a non-resident of India as per the relevant treaty even though they are a resident as far as the ITA is concerned. While this would provide them benefits under the treaty as applicable to a non-resident of India, it would not change their status under the ITA. Such persons would still need to file their tax return as a resident of India, and they would be treated as a non-resident only as far as application of the benefits of treaty provisions is concerned.

4.3 It should be noted that the benefit of treaty provisions as a non-resident is not automatic and is subject to conditions on whether such person qualifies as a tax resident of the country of his new residence as per the definition of the respective DTAA. Further, as per Section 90(4), a tax residency certificate should be obtained from the foreign jurisdiction. At the same time, as per Section 90(5), Form 10F needs be submitted online.

4.4 Individuals who claim treaty benefits without proper substance in the country of residence risk exposure to denial of such benefits under the anti-avoidance rules of the treaty like Principal Purpose Test or those of the Act in the form of General Anti-Avoidance Rules (GAAR) where the main purpose of such change of residence was tax avoidance.

A.2 FEMA issues of Migrating Residents:

5. Residential status: The concept of residential status under FEMA has been dealt with in the March 2024 edition of the Journal. FEMA uses the terms “person resident in India”12 and “person resident outside India”13. For simplicity, these terms are referred to as “resident” and “non-resident” in this article.


12 As defined in Section 2(v) of FEMA
13 As defined in Section 2(w) of FEMA

It is pertinent to note from the said article that only a claim that the person has left India — for or on employment, or for carrying on business or vocation, or under circumstances indicating his intention to stay outside India for an uncertain period — is not sufficient to be considered as a non-resident under FEMA. The facts and circumstances surrounding the claim are more important and should be backed up by documentation as well. For instance, leaving India for the purpose of business should be based on a type of visa which allows business activities and to support the purpose. Similarly, a person claiming to be leaving India for employment abroad should be backed up not only by an employment visa but also a valid employment contract; actual monthly salary payments (instead of just accounting entries); salary commensurate to the knowledge and experience of the person; compliance with labour and other applicable employment laws; etc. In essence, the intent and purpose should be backed by facts substantiated by documents which prove the bona fides of such intent.

6. Scope of FEMA: Once a person becomes non-resident under FEMA, such person’s foreign assets and foreign transactions are outside FEMA purview except in a few circumstances. However, such person’s assets and transactions in India would now come under the purview of FEMA. This can create issues in certain cases.

A common example of this is loans and advances between a Migrating Resident and his family members, companies, etc. On turning non-resident, the person generally does not realise that such fresh transactions can now be undertaken only as allowed under FEMA. A simple loan transaction can be a cause of unintended violations under FEMA — resolution for which is
generally not easy.

7. Existing Indian assets of migrating persons:

7.1 For a Migrating Resident, transacting with his or her own Indian assets after turning non-resident results in capital account transactions and, thus, can be undertaken only as permitted under FEMA. Section 6(5) of FEMA comes to the rescue in such a case. It allows a non-resident to continue holding Indian currency, Indian security or any immovable property situated in India if such currency, security or property was acquired, held or owned by such person when he or she was a
resident of India. In essence, Section 6(5) of FEMA allows non-residents to continue holding their Indian
assets which they acquired or owned when they were residents.

7.2 This also includes such assets or investments which cannot be otherwise owned or made by a non-resident. For instance, non-residents are not allowed to invest in an Indian company which is engaged in real estate trading. However, if a resident individual has invested in such a company and he later becomes a non-resident, he can continue holding such shares even after turning non-resident.

7.3 However, it should be noted that Section 6(5) permits only holding the existing assets. Any additional investment or transaction should conform with the FEMA provisions applicable to such non-residents.

Hence, if such an individual wants to make any further investment in the real estate trading company after turning a non-resident, he can do so only in compliance with FEMA. As investment by an NRI in an entity which undertakes real estate trading in India is not permitted under the NDI Rules14, such further investment would not be allowed even if the migrating person owned stake in such an entity before they turned non-resident.


14. Non-debt Instrument Rules, 2019

7.4 Further, incomes earned, or sale proceeds obtained, from such assets can be utilised only for purposes permissible to a non-resident. Thus, incomes earned by a non-resident from assets he held as a resident cannot be utilised, for instance, to invest in a real estate trading company in India. This is in contrast to Section 6(4) of FEMA which applies to Returning NRIs who are permitted to invest and utilise their incomes earned on their foreign assets covered under Section 6(4) or sale proceeds thereof without any approval from RBI even after they turn resident. This concept of Section 6(4) will be explained in detail in the second part of this article dealing with Returning NRIs.

7.5 Other assets: Section 6(5) of FEMA specifies only three assets: Indian currency, Indian security or any immovable property situated in India. A person would generally own several other assets. For instance, the person may have an interest in a partnership firm, LLP, AOPs or may own gold, jewellery, paintings, etc. There is no clarity provided in FEMA or its notifications and rules on continued holding of such other assets. However, as a practice, a person is eligible to continue holding all the Indian assets after turning non-resident which he owned or held as a resident. In fact, even the business of all entities can continue.

7.6 Repatriation of sale proceeds and incomes: On the migrating person turning non-resident, assets in India are considered to be held on a non-repatriable basis. That is, the sale proceeds obtained on transfer of such assets are not freely repatriable outside India. This is because transfer of an asset held in India by a non-resident is a capital account transaction and full remittance of sale proceeds of such assets covered under Section 6(5) is not specifically allowed.

However, separately, on turning non-resident, NRIs (including PIOs and OCI card holders) are allowed to remit up to USD 1 million per financial year from their funds lying in India15. It should be noted that such remittances can be only from one’s own funds. Remittances in excess of this limit would be only under approval route and there are low chances of the RBI providing any relief in such cases. Thus, in essence, a Migrating Resident would have limited repatriability as far as sale proceeds of their assets in India covered under Section 6(5) are concerned.


15. Regulation 4(2) of Foreign Exchange Management (Remittance of Assets) Regulations, 2016

Incomes generated from such investments, say dividend, interest, etc., can be freely repatriated from India without any limit as these are considered as they are current account transactions for which there are no limits on repatriation under FEMA for a non-resident.

7.7 Applicability of Section 6(5) of FEMA:

Section 6(5) of FEMA reads as under:

(5) A person resident outside India may hold, own, transfer or invest in Indian currency, security or any immovable property situated in India if such currency, security or property was acquired, held or owned by such person when he was resident in India or inherited from a person who was resident in India.

The first limb of Section 6(5) of FEMA allows non-residents to hold specified Indian assets which they owned or held as a resident. The second limb of Section 6(5) further allows the non-resident heir of such a migrating person also to inherit and hold such assets in India.

Thus, Section 6(5) allows both the Migrating Resident and his or her non-resident heirs to continue holding the Indian assets. It should be noted this provision covers only one level of inheritance, i.e., from the migrating person who has become non-resident to his non-resident heir. Later, if say the heir of such non-resident heir acquires such assets by way of inheritance, it is not covered under Section 6(5). The relevant notifications, rules, etc., under FEMA corresponding to the concerned assets need to be checked for the same. The permissibility for holding and inheritance under Section 6(5) can be summarised as follows:

An area of interpretation arises on a plain reading of the second limb of Section 6(5) which suggests that it covers inheritance by a non-resident heir only from a resident as the phrase reads as “a person who was resident in India”. However, the intention is to cover inheritance by a non-resident heir from another non-resident who had acquired the Indian assets when he was resident and later turned non-resident. Hence, if a non-resident acquires any asset in India by way of inheritance from a resident, the relevant notifications, rules, etc., under FEMA corresponding to the concerned assets need to be checked if they are permitted. For instance, if a non-resident is going to acquire an immovable property situated in India from a resident, it needs to be checked whether such inheritance is permitted under the NDI Rules16. Under Rule 24(c) of NDI Rules, an individual, who is non-resident, is permitted to acquire an immovable property situated in India by way of inheritance only if such person is an NRI or OCI cardholder. Hence, in this case, if the non-resident is an NRI or OCI cardholder, only then he is permitted to inherit an immovable property situated in India from a resident. This case will not be covered under Section 6(5).


16. Non-debt Instrument Rules, 2019

Apart from the general relief under Section 6(5) of FEMA, there are certain specific assets and transactions which are dealt with separately under the notifications as explained below.

7.8 Bank and Demat Accounts: Bank and demat accounts normally held by persons staying in India are Resident accounts. When a resident individual turns non-resident, he is required17 to designate all his bank and demat accounts to Non-Resident (Ordinary) account – NRO account. One must note that there is no specific procedure under FEMA for a person to claim or to even intimate to the authorities that they have turned non-resident on migrating abroad. Unlike OCI card, there is no NRI card. Further, there is no concept of a certificate under FEMA like a Tax Residency Certificate under ITA. The simplest manner this claim can be put forward is by designating their bank account as a Non-Resident (Ordinary) account (NRO) account. Thus, it is important that a Migrating Resident does not delay in designating their bank account as an NRO account. This becomes the primary account of the person for Indian transactions and investments. It should be noted that banks will ask for related documents which substantiate the change in residential status of the individual for designating the account as NRO. In fact, the redesignation of account as NRO is the most widely accepted recognition of a person as an NRI under FEMA, and therefore, it is important for the Migrating Resident to intimate his banker about the change of residential status.


17. Para 9(a) of Schedule III to FEMA Notification No. 5(R)/2016-RB. FEM (Deposit) Regulations, 2016.

Once the Migrating Resident becomes a non-resident as per FEMA, they are permitted to open different type of accounts like NRE account, FCNR account, etc., which provide permission to hold foreign currency in India, flexibility of making inward and outward remittances without limit or compliances, etc. Once a person becomes non-resident, he can take benefit of opening such accounts. (The provisions pertaining to the same will be dealt with in detail in the upcoming parts of this series of articles.)

7.9 Loans:

i. Loan taken by a Migrating Resident from bank: If a loan is taken by a resident from a bank and he later turns non-resident, the loan can be continued. This is subject to terms and conditions as specified by RBI, which have not been notified. However, in practice, banks are allowing non-residents to continue the loans taken by them when they were residents.

ii. Loan between resident individuals: Where a loan is given by one resident individual to another, FEMA would not apply. If the lender becomes a non-resident later, repayment of the same can be done by the resident borrower to the NRO account of the lender. There is no rule or provision in FEMA for a situation where the borrower becomes a non-resident. However, in such case, the borrower can repay the loan from his Indian or foreign funds. It should not be an issue.

7.10 Immovable properties: NRIs and OCIs are permitted to acquire immovable property in India, except agricultural land, farmhouse or plantation property18. However, what if a person owned such property as a resident and later turned non-resident. Section 6(5) covers any type of immovable property which was acquired or held as a resident. Hence, one can continue holding any immovable property after turning non-resident including agricultural land.


18. Rule 24(a) of FEM (Non-debt Instruments) Rules, 2019

7.11 Insurance: Almost every Migrating Resident would have existing insurance contracts covering both life and medical risks. While there is no specific clarification on continuance of such policies, a Migrating Resident can take recourse to the Master Direction on Insurance19 which provides that for life insurance policies denominated in rupees issued to non-residents, funds held in NRO accounts can also be accepted towards payment of premiums apart from their other accounts. Settlement of claims on such life insurance policies will happen in foreign currency in proportion to the amount of premiums paid in foreign currency in relation to the total amount of premiums paid. Balance would only be in rupees by credit to the NRO account of the beneficiary. This would also apply in cases of death claims being settled in favour of residents outside India who are assignees or nominees on such policies.


19. FED Master Direction No. 9/ 2015-16 - last updated on 7th December, 2021

7.12 PPF account: Non-residents are not permitted to open PPF accounts. However, residents who hold PPF account and turn NRIs (and not OCIs) are permitted to deposit funds in the same and continue the account till its maturity on a non-repatriation basis.20 While extension is not permitted, as a practice, the account is permitted to be held after maturity but additional contributions are not allowed.


20. Notification GSR 585(E) issued by Ministry of Finance dated 25th July 2003.

7.13 Privately held investments: Migrating person who holds investments in entities like unlisted companies, LLPs, partnership firms, etc. should intimate such entities about change in residential status.

8. Remittance facilities for non-residents: The remittance facilities for non-residents are generally higher and more flexible than for residents. These will be dealt with in detail in the upcoming editions of the Journal. However, an important point pertaining to the year of migration is highlighted below.

The bank, broker, etc., should be intimated about the change in residential status. Once the resident accounts are designated as NRO, the remittance facilities available for non-residents can be utilised.

One must note that, conservatively, the remittance facilities are to be considered for a full financial year and hence cannot be utilised as applicable for residents as well as non-residents in the same financial year. For instance, let’s say, a resident individual has utilised the maximum LRS limit of USD 250,000 available to him. In the same year, he migrates abroad and wishes to remit USD 1 million as a non-resident under FEMA. However, since the person had already remitted USD 250,000 during the year, albeit as a resident, he cannot remit another USD 1 million after turning non-resident. He can remit only up to USD 750,000 during that year. From the next financial year, the person can remit up to USD 1 million per year.

9. Foreign assets directly held by Migrating Residents:

9.1 More and more residents today own assets abroad. Generally, a resident individual could be holding overseas investment by way of Overseas Direct Investment (ODI), Overseas Portfolio Investment (OPI) or an Immovable Property (IP) abroad as per the Overseas Investment Rules, 2022. Let us consider that such an individual migrates abroad. Does FEMA apply to these foreign assets after such person becomes a non-resident? There is no express provision in the law or any clarification from RBI regarding applicability of FEMA in such cases.

9.2 The general rule is that FEMA does not apply to the foreign assets and foreign transactions of a non-resident. Hence, prima facie, where an individual turns non-resident, his foreign assets are out of FEMA purview. Thus, foreign investments and foreign immovable property obtained under the LRS route would go out of the purview of FEMA once a person turns non-resident.

9.3 However, there is a grey area for investments made under the ODI route by resident individuals. This is because investments under the LRS-ODI route stand on a footing different from other foreign assets of resident individuals. Many Resident Individuals set up companies abroad under the LRS-ODI route21, establish their overseas business and then migrate abroad. What gets missed out is to determine whether FEMA continues to apply even after they have turned non-resident.


21 Route adopted for overseas direct investment by Resident Individuals as per Rule 13 of Overseas Investment Rules, 2022 or as per erstwhile Reg. 20A of FEM (Transfer or Issue Of Any Foreign Security) Regulations, 2004.

Under LRS-ODI route, the investment and disinvestment need to be done as per pricing guidelines; all incomes earned on the investment and the sale proceeds thereof need to be repatriated to India within 90 days; reporting of every investment or disinvestment is required, etc. It is not clear whether these disinvestment norms and reporting requirements continue to apply after the person turns non-resident.

It is understood that when an intimation is provided that all the residents owning the foreign entity under the LRS-ODI route have turned non-resident, the RBI suspends the associated UIN22 but does not cancel it. This is done so that there is no trigger from the system for filing of Annual Performance Report (APR). In case the Migrating Residents decide to return to India in future and turn resident again, the suspension on the UIN would be removed and compliance requirements would restart.


22. Unique Identification Number provided for each ODI investment.

Apart from the compliance requirements, there are other rules that apply to investments under the LRS-ODI Route like pricing guidelines, repatriation of incomes and disinvestment proceeds, reporting of modifications in the investment, etc. There is no clarity on whether these rules continue to apply to such overseas investments once the Migrating Resident turns non-resident. One view is that in such a case the Resident should follow the applicable ODI rules. This is because the facility provided for making investments abroad under ODI route is with the underlying purpose that incomes and gains earned on such foreign investments would be repatriated back to India as and when due. Another reason seems to be that when the investment is made under LRS-ODI, the individual has used foreign exchange reserves of India and therefore, he or she is required to give the account of use of such funds till the investment is divested and compliances are completed. The alternate view is that FEMA does not apply to a foreign asset held by a non-resident individual. Hence, no compliance with rules under FEMA is required. Both views can be considered valid. However, without any clarification under the law, one should seek clarification from the RBI and then proceed in the alternate case.

10. Overseas Direct Investment (ODI) made by Indian entities of Migrating Residents: One more common structure is where the Indian entities owned by resident individuals make ODI in foreign entities. Later, the individuals migrate abroad. Since they have turned non-residents, FEMA does not apply to such individuals. However, sometimes these non-residents also consider that their overseas entities are also free from FEMA provisions.

Hence, they enter into several transactions like borrowing funds from such foreign entity, directing such entity to undertake portfolio investments, utilise the funds lying in such entity for personal purposes of the shareholders or directors, etc. All such transactions are not permitted under the ODI guidelines. It should be noted that once an investment is made in a foreign entity under ODI route by an Indian entity, the ODI guidelines need to be followed by the foreign entity irrespective of the residential status of its ultimate beneficial owners. Such a foreign entity can only do the specified business for which it has been set up abroad. Thus, if such an entity enters into any transaction outside its business requirements, it would be considered as a violation under FEMA.

A.3. Change of citizenship — FEMA & Income-tax issues: Apart from change of residence, a few Migrating Residents also end up changing their citizenship. Such people obtain citizenship of foreign countries for varied reasons: to avail better opportunities in such countries; to avoid regular visa issues, for ease of entry in other countries, etc. Since India does not allow dual citizenship, such people need to revoke their Indian citizenship. Between 2018 to June 2023, close to 8,40,000 people renounced their Indian citizenship.23 Further, India has allowed such individuals access to a special class of benefits as an Overseas Citizen of India. Several benefits have been conferred to OCI cardholders under FEMA and are treated almost at par with NRIs (who are Indian citizens but non-resident of India). The concepts of PIO and OCI have been explained in detail in the March edition of the Journal. Further, Indian residents and those coming on a visit to India, who have obtained foreign citizenship, also need to keep certain issues in mind. These issues are highlighted below.


23. Answer by Ministry of External Affairs in Rajya Sabha to Question No. 2466 dated 10th August, 2023

11. OCI vs PIO card: It should be noted that the PIO scheme has been replaced with OCI scheme. Under the Foreign Exchange Management (Non-Debt Instruments) Rules, 2019, Foreign Exchange Management (Debt Instruments) Regulations, 2019 and Foreign Exchange Management (Borrowing & Lending) Regulations, 2018, only OCIs are recognised and not PIOs. Hence, this creates issues for borrowing and lending, investments in India, etc., if the individual, though of Indian origin, has not obtained an OCI card. An important point that may not miss the attention of PIOs is that inheritance of immovable properties and Indian securities is also permitted under these notifications only to OCI Cardholders and not PIOs. Most PIOs should be eligible for OCI status and hence, they should obtain OCI cards if they have, or will have, financial links with India.

12. Applicability of Section 6(1A) of the ITA: Section 6(1A) of the Income-tax Act which deems persons as Not Ordinarily Residents under certain circumstances applies only to Indian citizens. Hence, it does not apply to those who are not Indian citizens.

13. Leaving for the purpose of employment abroad: The benefit of leaving for employment outside India provided under Expl. 1(a) of Section 6(1)(c) is available only to Indian citizens. Hence, a person who is not an Indian citizen, cannot take this benefit.

14. Donations: Indian charitable trusts are not allowed to accept donations from foreign citizens unless they have obtained approval under the Foreign Contribution Regulation Act (FCRA). This prohibition is irrespective of whether the person is a PIO or an OCI. While it is a violation for the trust to accept the donation, even the donor should keep this in mind to not be a party to any contravention. At the same time, the FCRA prohibition does not apply to a non-resident who is a citizen of India. Hence, NRIs can continue to donate to Indian charitable trusts.

15. Citizenship-based taxation: In certain countries like the USA, the domestic tax laws have citizenship-based taxation whereby its citizens are taxed on their global incomes, irrespective of where they stay during the year. Even green card holders are taxed in a similar manner in the USA. Such persons when they return to India become dual residents on account of their physical stay in India and their foreign citizenship. Hence, such persons will be liable to tax on their global incomes both in India and the foreign country. Several issues of Double Tax and foreign tax credit arise in such cases and hence, proper planning is required.

16. Relief of disclosure of foreign assets: There is a limited and conditional relief from reporting of foreign assets under Schedule FA of the income-tax return forms for foreign citizens who have become tax residents while they are in India on a business, employment or student visa.

The above analysis intends to highlight the various issues that a Migrating Resident should be aware of. They should not be considered as a comprehensive list of issues that apply to a Migrating Resident. Issues relevant to “Returning NRIs” and other relevant but common issues of concern related to change of residence including inheritance tax, anti-avoidance rules under ITA, succession planning, documentation and record-keeping, etc., will be dealt with in the forthcoming issue of the Journal as Part II of this article.

Capital Gains Tax Implications in Singapore on Capital Reduction or Liquidation

A. BACKGROUND

A.1. A Singapore company (“SGCo”) is owned by two UK-resident individual shareholders (“UKS”).

A.2. SGCo owns shares in 3 Indian entities (“the Shares”):

a) An associate purchased in March 2017 (“ACo”)

b) A subsidiary purchased in November 2014 (“S1Co”)

c) A subsidiary purchased in November 2014 (“S2Co”)

A.3. The Shares were originally contributed into SGCo by UKS via the issuance of ordinary share capital.

A.4. UKS wishes to transfer the Shares to themselves and close the Singapore entity.

B. QUERIES

What are the Singapore options and related consequences?

C. WHAT ARE THE OPTIONS?

C.1. On the basis that SGCo wishes to transfer the Shares to UKS, there are two main options:

a) Capital reduction

b) Liquidation of SGCo

I Capital Reduction

D. HOW DOES IT WORK?

D.1. A capital reduction is a basic process where SGCo would return assets to its shareholders (UKS) in exchange for the cancellation of an equivalent amount of capital in the balance sheet.

D.2. Hence, please note that if SGCo wished to instead return surplus assets (i.e. more assets that the capital being returned), a capital reduction would not be an appropriate solution. In such a situation, a share buy-back would be more suitable. Please note that a share buy-back has associated restrictions and tax consequences.

D.3. Further, it is usually carried through a non-court process which has the following key requirements:

a) Shareholder approval

b) Solvency declaration

c) Creditor approval (if any)

d) Publication of the said capital reduction

E. WHAT ARE THE TAX CONSEQUENCES OF CAPITAL REDUCTION IN SINGAPORE?

E.1. Excluding the possible application of Section 10L (which will be analysed below), Singapore does not impose any stamp duty / transfer tax on the cancellation of shares through a capital reduction.

E.2. Singapore also does not impose any tax on the shareholders through withholding tax.

E.3. Hence, it is fairly efficient to return capital to shareholders at an equivalent value.

F. WOULD SECTION 10L APPLY? — GENERAL RULE

F.1. We would request readers to review my previous article in the February 2024 edition of “The Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal” for the full details of Section 10L to provide context to the analysis below.

F.2. From 1st January, 2024, based on the new Section 10L of the SITA, gains from the sale or disposal by an entity of a relevant group (“Relevant Entity”) of any movable or immovable property situated outside Singapore at the time of such sale or disposal or any rights or interest thereof (“Foreign Assets”) that are received in Singapore from outside Singapore, are treated as income chargeable to tax under Section 10(1)(g) if:

a) The gains are not chargeable to tax under Section 10(1); or

b) The gains are exempt from tax

F.3. Foreign-sourced disposal gains are taxable if all of the following conditions apply:

a) Condition 1: The taxpayer is a “Relevant Entity”;

b) Condition 2: The Relevant Entity is not under a Specified Circumstance; and

c) Condition 3: The disposal gains are “Received in Singapore”

F.4. To summarise, for the disposal gains to be taxable under Section 10L, the answer to all of the following questions must be “Yes”:

 

G. SINGAPORE’S TAXATION OF CAPITAL GAINS – ANALYSIS

G.1 There is a risk under Section 10L as SGCo would be disposing of the Shares and instead of receiving consideration, it is cancelling its own shares with UKS.

G.2. In the above situation, it is likely that SGCo will be considered as a Relevant Entity as it is part of a Group. However, it is unlikely to be considered as a Specified Entity as it is just a holding company. Hence, if any disposal gains are received in Singapore, SGCo will need to ensure that it is an Excluded Entity in order to not be taxed under Section 10L.

G.3. Based on Section 10L(9), foreign-sourced disposal gains are regarded as received in Singapore and chargeable to tax if they are:

a) Remitted to, or transmitted or brought into, Singapore;

b) Applied in or towards satisfaction of any debt incurred in respect of a trade or business carried on in Singapore; or

c) applied to the purchase of any movable property which is brought into Singapore

G.4. The cancellation of shares should not cause any of the limbs of Section 10L(9) to apply, especially since SGCo would not have carried on a trade or business in Singapore as it is a pure equity holding company.

G.5. Assuming that the gains would be considered as “received in Singapore”, SGCo would need to be considered as an Excluded Entity. To be considered as such, it would need to meet the economic substance requirements as a pure equity-holding entity (“PEHE”).

G.6. The following conditions are to be satisfied in the basis period in which the sale or disposal occurs:

a) the entity submits to a public authority any return, statement or account required under the written law under which it is incorporated or registered, being a return, statement or account which it is required by that law to submit to that authority on a regular basis;

b) the operations of the entity are managed and performed in Singapore (whether by its employees or outsourced to third parties or group entities); and

c) the entity has adequate human resources and premises in Singapore to carry out the operations of the entity.

H. SUBSEQUENT CLOSURE OF SGCO

H.1. Post the completion of the capital reduction, SGCo will likely have no remaining assets. If so, UKS would wish to close down SGCo. The most efficient way to close down SGCo would be through a strike-off process. A liquidation is a more complicated and expensive process.

I. STRIKE OFF PROCESS

I.1. A director of SGCo may apply to the Singapore company registrar (“ACRA”) to strike off the company’s name from the register.

I.2. ACRA may approve the application if it has reasonable cause to believe that the company is not carrying on business and the company is able to satisfy the following criteria for striking off:

a) The company has not commenced business since incorporation or has ceased trading.

b) The company has no outstanding debts owed to Inland Revenue Authority of Singapore (IRAS), Central Provident Fund (CPF) Board and any other government agency.

c) There are no outstanding charges in the charge register.

d) The company is not involved in any legal proceedings (within or outside Singapore).

e) The company is not subject to any ongoing or pending regulatory action or disciplinary proceeding.

f) The company has no existing assets and liabilities as at the date of application and no contingent asset and liabilities that may arise in the future.

g) All / majority of the director(s) authorise you, as the applicant, to submit the online application for striking off on behalf of the company.

II Liquidation of Singapore Entity

J. HOW DOES IT WORK?

J.1 Members voluntary liquidation (“MVL”) occurs when the shareholders of a company decide to terminate a business. In a MVL, the directors make a statement of solvency and make a declaration that the company will be able to pay all its debts within 12 months following commencement of the winding-up. A shareholder meeting (an EGM) will need to be convened to pass a special resolution to wind up the company and approve the appointment of a liquidator.

J.2. MVLs can be undertaken by both qualified andnon-qualified individuals. During an MVL, the liquidator takes over the company’s assets and helps liquidate them. The cash proceeds are used to initially pay offthe company’s outstanding debt and then the remaining cash / assets are distributed to the shareholders on a pro-rata basis.

J.3. The formal process includes the following key steps:

a) Filing of Notification of Appointment of Liquidator and address of office of Liquidator with ACRA

b) Placing of advertisements in a local newspaper and Government Gazette of the Appointment of and address of the Liquidator and Notice to Creditors to file their claims with the Liquidator

c) Realising any remaining assets of the Company and paying off all remaining liabilities.

d) Preparing and submitting the receipts and payments for the period from the date the Company was placed into MVL up to the current date to IRAS

e) Finalising the Company’s income tax position with IRAS and obtaining tax clearance to finalise the liquidation

f) Paying the Liquidator’s fee and expenses, paying the remaining balance in the Company’s bank account to the members (shareholders) and closing the bank account

g) Arranging for the holding of the Final Meeting of the members and placing advertisements in a local newspaper and Government Gazette of the date of the Final Meeting

h) Preparing the Liquidator’s Report, setting out the Liquidation process and concluding that as all matters had been dealt with, the Final meeting can be held and the Liquidation can be concluded

i) Holding the Final Meeting, at which the Liquidator’s Report is tabled for approval by the member

j) Filing of Notice of Holding of Final Meeting and Liquidators’ Report with ACRA

k) Dissolution of the Company by ACRA within 3 months after the filing of Notice of Holding of Final Meeting

K. TAX ANALYSIS

K.1. There are no specific tax consequences in Singapore on the liquidation of a Singapore company.

L. CONCLUSION

L.1. On balance, from a Singapore perspective only, since both options could be planned as tax neutral, a capital reduction will usually be chosen as it is cheaper, does not involve the appointment of a third party and therefore could make the eventual closure of SGCo easier.

Note: Readers may note that the above article restricts discussion of taxation from the point of view of Singapore only and not from Indian perspective.

Immovable Property Transactions: Direct Tax and FEMA Issues for NRIs

INTRODUCTION

This article is the fourth part of a series on “Income Tax and Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA) issues related to NRIs”. The first article focused on the provisions of the Income Tax Act, whereas the second one was on the applicability of the treaty on the definition of Residential Status. The third one was focused on the Residential Status under FEMA Regulations and this one deals with the “Immovable property Transactions – Direct Tax and FEMA issues for NRIs.

BACKGROUND

Immovable property refers to any asset, which is attached to the earth and is immobile, and includes land. Typically, the term “immovable property” is used to mean land and/or buildings attached to the land. Owning an immovable property, especially a residential house, in India has often been considered an aspirational goal. The lure of owning a property in India also attracts Non-resident Indians (“NRIs”), who have moved out of India but have an investible surplus available with them. Additionally, many NRIs also inherit ancestral or family properties and continue to hold them and enjoy the passive income therefrom. As these NRIs identify better or alternative opportunities outside India, the properties are sold,and sale proceeds are sought to be repatriated outside India.

This article seeks to touch upon the tax and FEMA aspects of the various transactions surrounding investment in Immovable Property by NRIs ranging from investment and passive income to sale and repatriation of the proceeds.

TAXABILITY OF INCOME FROM IMMOVABLE PROPERTIES

As a thumb rule, rent income or passive income arising from an immovable property is taxable in India. Rent income received by the owner of a property from the letting out of any building or land appurtenant thereto is generally taxable under the head “Income from House Property”, irrespective of whether the property in question is a residential property or a commercial one. In fact, section 22 of the Income-tax Act seeks to tax the Annual Value of such property as “Income from House Property”, which is determined on the basis of the higher of the actual rent received or receivable for a property or the sum for which the property might reasonably be expected to be let. Thus, a property is taxed on the basis of its capacity to earn rent even though it is not actually let out or generating rent income.

Section 23, however, provides for considering the Annual Value as Nil in case of up to two properties, which are occupied by the owner for his own residence or which cannot be so occupied by the owner on account of his employment, business or profession is carried on at any other place and he has to reside at that other place in a building which is not owned by him. Where the NRI owns more than two properties which have not been let out, then, he can opt for the Annual Value of two of the properties to be considered as Nil and the Annual Value of the remaining properties will be computed as if they have been let out. Further, if the property is used or occupied by the owner for the purposes of any business or profession carried out by the owner and the profits of such business or profession are chargeable to income-tax, then, its Annual Value is not taxable.

If, however, that leasing or renting of the property is only one of the elements of a composite contract, under which various services are provided, then, the entire income from such composite services is taxable as business income1. For instance, leasing of shops by a mall or renting of rooms by a hotel. When the rent income is taxable as Income from House Property, only specific deductions are allowable from the Annual Value in respect of municipal taxes paid, standard deduction of 30 per cent and interest on borrowings. As against this, in case of income taxable as business income, the taxpayer can claim any expense incurred for the purposes of the business, including depreciation on capital expenditure. The tax rate on income from the property for NRI in either case would be the applicable slab rate.


1   Krome Planet Interiors (P.) Ltd. 265 Taxman 308 (Bom HC); Plaza Hotels (P) Ltd. 265 Taxman 90 (Bom HC); City Centre Mall Nashik Pvt. Ltd. 424 ITR 85 (Bom HC)

 

In the case of jointly owned properties, the income from the property would be taxable in the hands of all the owners in the ratio of their ownership. If the deed does not mention the ratio of ownership of the property between the joint owners, it would be assumed to be an equal share of each joint owner2. If, however, the name of any joint owner is added merely for convenience and such joint owner has neither paid for any of the purchase consideration nor has any source of income to do so, then, it would be appropriate to consider the entire income as taxable in the hands of the remaining owners3, following the principle laid down by the Apex Court that in the context of section 22, owner is a person who is entitled to receive income from the property in his own right4.


2   Saiyad Abdulla v. Ahmad AIR 1929 All 817
3   Ajit Kumar Roy 252 ITR 468 (Cal. HC)
4   Podar Cement (P.) Ltd. 226 ITR 625 (SC)

 

If the immovable property in question is simply plot of land, without any building thereon, then the charge under section 22 would not be triggered and the income from the land would instead be taxable as “Income from Other Sources” under section 56. Any expenses incurred to earn the said income can be claimed as a deduction under section 57 from the said income. The income from the land would, however, be exempt under section 10(1) if it is an agricultural income in terms of section 2(1A), which refers to rent or revenue derived from land in India used for agricultural purposes; income derived from the land by agriculture, or by the performance of any process by the cultivator or receiver of rent-in-kind to render the produce fit to be taken to the market, or sale of the produce by the cultivator or receiver of rent-in-kind; as also income derived from a building on or in the immediate vicinity of the land, subject to certain conditions.

TAXABILITY OF CAPITAL GAINS

The gains arising from the sale or transfer of immovable property, i.e., land or building or both, are taxable under section 45 as Capital Gains, classified as short-term or long-term depending on the period for which the property was held. Where the property is held by the owner for a period of more than twenty-four months immediately preceding the date of its sale or transfer, it is considered a long-term asset and the gains are taxable as Long-Term Capital Gains (“LTCG”). Where the period of holding does not exceed twenty-four months, the property is treated as a short-term asset, with the gains taxable as Short-Term Capital Gains (“STCG”). In the case of non-residents, STCG is included in the total income for the period and taxable as per the applicable slab rate, whereas LTCG is taxable under section 112 at a rate of 20 per cent, excluding applicable surcharge and cess.

The term “transfer” includes the transfer of immovable property on account of compulsory acquisition, redevelopment of old property, or even receipt of the insurance claim on account of damage to or destruction of the property, but does not include the transfer of property under a gift, will, irrevocable trust or distribution upon the partition of a Hindu Undivided Family (“HUF”). In the case of a property transferred by way of a gift, will, irrevocable trust or distribution upon the partition of an HUF and similar other situations as enumerated in section 47, the Capital Gains is taxable only in the event of a final sale or transfer and at the point of taxability, the amount of gain is computed with reference to the purchase price for the previous owner.

Further, the period of holding of the previous owner is also included while determining whether the gain on the property is Long Term or Short Term.

Section 48 lays down the computation of the amount of Capital Gain as under —

Sale Consideration
Less: Expenses incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with the transfer
Less: Cost of Acquisition
Less: Cost of Improvement
Taxable Capital Gain

 

As per the second proviso to section 48, in case the property is a long-term asset, the cost of acquisition and cost of improvement are indexed for the period of holding as per the cost inflation index notified by the Central Government in relation to each year. Thus, LTCG is computed with reference to a stepped-up cost, allowing for rising costs.

The various elements relevant to the computation of gains are discussed hereunder —

Sale Consideration: The transaction price at which the property is sold shall be considered to be the sale consideration, including the value of any consideration in kind. In a situation where a property is sold at a consideration, which is lower than the value adopted or assessed for the purposes of payment of stamp duty, section 50C would come into play, requiring that such value adopted or assessed for stamp duty payment should be assumed to be the full value of sale consideration and the capital gains should accordingly be calculated with reference to such higher value.

Expenses incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with the transfer: In claiming deduction of the expenses from sale consideration, attention should be paid to the requirement that such expenses are “incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with the transfer.” Expenses such as transfer fees paid to society, brokerage expenses, and legal expenses connected to the transfer such as fees for drafting of the agreement, would be allowable expenses. Further, in the case of non-residents, expenses incurred on travel to India as well as stay if incurred specifically for the purposes of executing and registering the sale agreements can also be considered as incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with the transfer.

Cost of Acquisition: As a general rule, the actual purchase price paid for acquiring a property would constitute the cost of acquisition of the property. It would include the expenses incurred at the time of purchase of the property towards stamp duty, registration fee, and brokerage. However, any payment made at the time of purchase towards recurring expenses, which form part of the purchase price, such as advance maintenance for a certain period or outstanding property taxes or electricity charges, etc. would not form part of the cost of acquisition.

The cost inflation index used for indexation of the cost follows FY 2001–02 as the base year with the index for the base year set at 100. Thus, if any property was purchased prior to 1st April, 2001, its cost cannot be indexed beyond FY 2001–02. To address this issue, in case of properties purchased by the taxpayer or the previous owner (in case of property acquired through gift, will, etc.) prior to 1st April, 2001, Section 55(2)(b) allows the taxpayer the option to adopt its original purchase price or its fair market value as on 1st April, 2001 as the Cost of Acquisition. This fair market value as of 1st April, 2001, however, cannot exceed the value of the property adopted or assessed for the purpose of payment of stamp duty as of 1st April, 2001. Where the property was purchased prior to 1st April, 2001, the original purchase cost would usually be lower than the fair market value as of 1st April, 2001. The option provided in Section 55(2)(b) would, therefore, let the taxpayer adopt the higher value as the cost of acquisition (subject to the cap of stamp duty value as on 1st April, 2001) and index it from FY 2001–02 till the year of sale. Thus, when computing capital gains in respect of an immovable property purchased by the taxpayer or the previous owner prior to 1st April, 2001, a valuation report determining the fair market value of the property as on 1st April, 2001 as well as its value for the purposes of stamp duty on the same date shall be required to be obtained.

Often, in case of ancestral properties acquired by way of inheritance, will or such other modes, the details of original purchase cost of the property are not available, making it difficult to compute the capital gains. Section 55(3) provides that in cases where purchase cost of the previous owner cannot be ascertained, the fair market value of the property as on the date on which the previous owner became the owner of the property shall be considered as the Cost of Acquisition of the previous owner.

Cost of Improvement: Any cost that has been incurred by the taxpayer or the previous owner towards making additions or alteration to the property, which is capital in nature is considered as cost of improvement and is allowable as a deduction while computing the amount of capital gains. Examples of cost of improvement include cost incurred towards adding a room or a floor to an existing property, fencing a plot of land to secure its perimeter, installation of lift, incurring expenses to make the property habitable, incurring expenses to clear the legal title of a property, which is under dispute, etc. However, expenses such as routine repairs and renovation expenses, modifications to furniture, aesthetic expenses, etc. would not be considered as Cost of Improvement. Any cost of improvement incurred prior to 1st April, 2001 is not to be considered in the computation. This restriction is in line with the fact that the taxpayer has an option to adopt the fair market value as on 1st April, 2001 as the Cost of Acquisition, which would take into account any improvements done to the property prior to 1st April, 2001 and thus, separate deductions need not be claimed for such cost of improvements. Further, any expenditure that can be claimed as a deduction in computation of income under any other head of income, cannot be claimed as a Cost of Improvement.

In case of the purchase of property, while it was under construction, the determination of the period of holding and the year from which indexation should be allowed can be debatable. The date of allotment of the future property to the taxpayer by the builder, phase-wise payment towards the purchase cost, the date of registration of the sale agreement and the date of possession would fall in different years in such cases, leading to significant differences in the computation of the amount of taxable capital gain depending on when the property is said to be acquired by the taxpayer. Several judicial pronouncements5 have held that where the taxpayer has been allotted a specific identified property and such allotment is final, subject only to the payment of the consideration, then, the date of allotment is to be considered as the date of acquisition of the property and the period of holding should be calculated from the date of allotment. Similarly, in the case of allotment of property along with shares in the co-operative society prior to the completion of construction or physical possession of the property, it has been held that the date of allotment should be considered as the date of acquisition of the property6. In fact, in the context of whether acquisition of a flat under the self-financing scheme of the Delhi Development Authority shall be considered as construction for the purposes of sections 54 and 54F, the CBDT Circular No. 471 dated 15th October, 1986 states that “The allottee gets title to the property on the issuance of the allotment letter and the payment of instalments is only a follow-up action and taking the delivery of possession is only a formality.”

Further, payments for an under-construction property are made by taxpayers over several years starting from the date of allotment in a phase-wise manner. It has been held by the Courts that the benefit of indexation in such cases should be allowed on the basis of payment7, i.e., payment made in each year should be indexed from that year till the date of sale of the property. In fact, in the case of Charanbir Singh Jolly v. 8th ITO 5 SOT 89 and thereafter, in Smt. Lata G. Rohra v. DCIT 21 SOT 541 the Mumbai Tribunal has held that indexation for the entire purchase cost of the property should be allowed from the year in which the first instalment was paid by the assessee. While the ratio of aforesaid judgements has not been further appealed against and is, thus, valid, indexation of the entire cost from the year of first payment irrespective of date of actual payments may be considered to be an aggressive tax position and open to litigation.


5   Praveen Gupta v. ACIT 137 TTJ 307 (Delhi – Trib.); CIT v. S.R.Jeyashankar 228 Taxman 289 (Mad.); Vinod Kumar Jain v. CIT 195 Taxman 174 (Punjab & Haryana)
6   CIT v. AnilabenUpendra Shah 262 ITR 657 (Guj.); CIT v. JindasPanchand Gandhi 279 ITR 552 (Guj.)
7   Praveen Gupta (supra); ACIT v. Michelle N. Sanghvi 98 taxmann.com 495 (Mumbai-Trib.); Ms. RenuKhurana v. ACIT 149 taxmann.com 160 (Delhi-Trib.)

However, this view is supported by the form of return of income. The form of return of income does not provide mechanism to index cost of acquisition with reference to payments made in various years. Therefore, if an assessee chooses to index cost of acquisition with reference to years in which instalments of purchase price are paid then such instalments will need to be reported in the form of return of income as cost of improvement which is technically not correct.

Where the property in question is an agricultural land, one would need to examine whether the same is a “rural” agricultural land or an “urban” agricultural land, as is referred to in common parlance. The former is excluded from the definition of a capital asset under section 2(14) and thus, gains arising from its sale would not give rise to taxable Capital Gains. An “urban” agricultural land, however, does not enjoy such an exclusion and would be subject to capital gains taxation like any other property. The distinction between “rural” or “urban” agricultural land is drawn on the basis of the location of the land with reference to local limits of municipalities and the population of such municipalities as per the latest census. Accordingly, agricultural land which is situated within any of the following areas shall be considered to be an “urban” agricultural land and thus, included within the definition of capital asset —

i) Within the jurisdiction of a municipality or any such governing body, having a population exceeding 10,000, or

ii) Within 2 km of the local limits of a municipality or any such governing body, having a population exceeding 10,000 but not exceeding 1,00,000, or

iii) Within 6 km of the local limits of a municipality or any such governing body, having a population exceeding 1,00,000 but not exceeding 10,00,000, or

iv) Within 8 km of the local limits of a municipality or any such governing body, having a population exceeding 10,00,000.

EXEMPTIONS FROM CAPITAL GAINS

The Income-tax Act contains certain beneficial provisions to provide relief from tax on the capital gains upon reinvestment into certain specified assets if the conditions laid down in those provisions are satisfied. A summary of the relevant exemption provisions applicable for capital gain arising on the sale of immovable property is given in the table below —

Section Nature of Gain Type of New Asset Amount to be reinvested for full exemption Time period for reinvestment Lock-in period for New Asset Capital Gain Deposit Account Scheme Other provisions
54 LTCG on transfer of residential property One residential property in India Amount of Capital Gains Purchase of new property within 1 year before, or 2 years after date of transfer; or Completion of construction of new property within 3 years after date of transfer 3 years from purchase or construction, failing which cost of the new asset shall be reduced by the amount of exemption already claimed To be deposited before the date of filing / due date of filing the return of income •   Taxability in case of unutilised balance in CG Deposit Account

•   One time option to small taxpayers having LTCG less than R2 crores

•   Exemption capped at
R10 crores

54D Gain on compulsory acquisition of land or building or rights therein, forming part of industrial undertaking Any other land or building or rights therein Amount of Capital Gains Purchase or construction within 3 years from date of transfer 3 years from purchase or construction, failing which cost of the new asset shall be reduced by the amount of exemption already claimed To be deposited before the date of filing / due date of filing the return of income •   Use of asset for 2 years immediately prior to the date of transfer for business of the industrial undertaking

•   Taxability in case of unutilised balance in CG Deposit Account

54EC LTCG on transfer of land or building or both Specified Bonds issued by NHAI, RECL or as maybe notified Amount of Capital Gains, subject to a maximum of
R50 lakhs
Within 6 months after the date of transfer 5 years. Transfer of New Asset or monetisation other than by way of transfer within the lock-in period will result in revocation of exemption in the year of such transfer or monetisation Not Applicable •   Interest received on Bonds is taxable.

•   No deduction can be claimed under section 80C in respect of the investment in bonds

54F LTCG on transfer of any asset other than a residential property One residential property in India Full amount of net sale consideration. Proportionate exemption is allowed in case of lower reinvestment Purchase of new property within 1 year before, or 2 years after date of transfer; or Completion of construction of new property within 3 years after date of transfer 3 years from purchase or construction, failing which the amount of exemption already claimed shall be deemed to be LTCG in the year of transfer of new asset To be deposited before the date of filing / due date of filing the return of income •   Taxability in case of unutilised balance in CG Deposit Account

•   Added condition relating to ownership of residential house on the date of transfer of original asset or purchase or construction of one more residential house within 1 year / 3 years after the date of transfer – withdrawal of exemption in case of violation of condition.

•   Exemption capped atR10 crores

 

 

INCOME UNDER SECTION 56(2)(X)

Section 56(2)(x) seeks to bring into the tax net, any transactions of receipt of money or movable or immovable property without consideration or for inadequate consideration. Where any person receives an immovable property having a stamp duty value exceeding ₹50 thousand without consideration, the stamp duty value of such property is deemed to be an income of the recipient. Similarly, where a person purchases an immovable property at a consideration lower than its stamp duty value, where the difference is more than the higher of ₹50 thousand or 10 per cent of actual consideration, then, such difference between the actual consideration and stamp duty value of the property is deemed to be the income of the recipient. In other words, if any person, including a non-resident, is purchasing an immovable property in India for a value lower than its stamp duty value, then, the difference is assumed to be a benefit to the purchaser and sought to be taxed in the hands of the purchaser.

This provision intends to target property transactions that are intentionally undervalued so as to reduce the burden of stamp duty and involve cash payments. However, practically, the price of any transaction varies depending on various factors which may not reflect in the stamp duty value of the property, and it is likely that the actual transaction may genuinely take place at a value lower than the stamp duty value. To address such situations, the provisions allow a safe harbour of higher ₹50 thousand or 10 per cent of the actual consideration. If the difference in the consideration and the stamp duty value is within this safe harbour, then, it will not have any implication for the purchaser. However, if the difference exceeds the safe harbour limit, then, the entire difference will be treated as income of the purchaser.

In practice, parties may agree upon the consideration for property sale when the initial token or advance is given and enter into an agreement or MOU to document the same, but the actual registration of the sale agreement may take place subsequently after a gap, by which time the stamp duty value of the property may have increased. In such a case, the first proviso to section 56(2)(x) allows for stamp duty value as on the date of the initial agreement or MOU to be adopted provided the advance or token is paid on or before that date by account payee cheque or bank draft or electronically. Thus, if for any reason the registration of the final sale deed is delayed, the purchaser will not have to suffer taxation merely due to an increase in the stamp duty value of the property during the period of delay.

TAXABILITY UNDER A TAX TREATY

Article 6 of the OECD Model Convention deals with Income from Immovable Property, while Paragraph 1 of Article 13 deals with Gains from alienation of Immovable Property. Both these articles give the right to tax the income and capital gains relating to immovable property to the Source State where such property is situated. This is considering the fact that there is always a close economic connection between the source of income relating to immovable property and the State of source8. Further, the definition of the concept of immovable property as also the manner of taxation and computation is left to the Source State to decide. This helps to remove any ambiguity regarding the classification of an asset as immovable property.


8   Paragraph 1 of Commentary on Article 6

Thus, in the case of NRIs having income or capital gains from immovable property in India, the manner of taxation and computation would be determined as per the domestic tax laws, which have been briefly discussed above. The NRIs can then offer to tax or report these incomes in their Residence State and claim credit for the taxes paid in India as per the provisions of the applicable tax treaty and domestic tax laws of the state of residence.

TAX DEDUCTION AT SOURCE

Section 195 requires any person making payment to a non-resident or a foreign company of any sum chargeable to tax under the Act, to deduct tax at source on such payment and deposit the same with the Government. Unlike the TDS provisions applicable in case of rent payments or property purchases amongst residents, Section 195 does not provide a fixed rate of TDS. Thus, the person making payment in respect of income from property or sale consideration to the non-resident would be required to deduct tax at source as per the applicable rate of tax on the respective transactions. In order to do so, the payer would have to obtain a Tax Deduction Account Number (“TAN”), which is often not required in case of property transactions between residents. Additionally, the payer would also have to file quarterly TDS statements in Form 27Q so as to enable the NRI to get credit of tax deducted.

As discussed earlier, the income from property, computed after claiming deductions, would be taxable for the NRI at the applicable slab rates. However, the tax would be required to be deducted at source by the payer on the entire rental income at the rate of 30 per cent as per the residuary entries for “other income” under Serial No. (1)(b) of Part II of the Finance Act. Further, STCG on transfer of property would also be taxable at the applicable slab rates, while LTCG would be taxable at a rate of 20 per cent plus applicable surcharge and cess. The person making the payment to the NRI in respect of the sale of the property would not be in a position to conclusively determine either the slab rate applicable to the NRI or the computation of taxable capital gains. Consequently, the payer would not be in a position to determine the appropriate rate at which the TDS obligation should be discharged.

In the above scenarios, the payer or the NRI payee can make an application to the Assessing Officer under section 195(2) or section 197 to determine the sum chargeable to tax or the rate at which tax should be deducted at source, respectively. Based on the application made, the Assessing Officer would issue a certificate determining the sum chargeable to tax or the rate at which tax deduction should be done and the payer can deduct tax under section 195 accordingly.

While no time limit has been prescribed in the provisions for the Assessing Officer to deal with such an application and issue the certificates, a 30-day timeline was provided for this process in the Citizen’s Charter 2014, which was further endorsed by the CBDT in its office memorandum of 26th July 2018. Thus, the overall process of making an application for lower or nil deduction of tax, responding to queries, if any, of the tax offices and obtaining the certificate can take from 5-8 weeks. In a time-sensitive transaction and considering the logistics of transacting with an NRI, the payer or the NRI payee may not be in a position to follow the process of obtaining a lower or nil deduction certificate. In such a scenario, the payer may deduct tax at source at the rate applicable to the transaction (20 per cent plus applicable surcharge and cess in case of LTCG on sale of property and 30 per cent plus applicable surcharge and cess in other cases) on the entire amount payable to the NRI, who would be required to claim a refund of the excess tax deducted by filing a return of income.

REPORTING OF HIGH-VALUE TRANSACTIONS

Section 285BA requires various reporting persons to file a statement of financial transactions (“SFT”) to report certain transactions above the specified thresholds, referred to as high-value transactions, to the Income-tax authorities, which enables the latter to evaluate if the incomes reported by the persons transacting are in line with such high-value transactions and whether there could have been any tax evasion. One of the transactions required to be reported by the Registrar or Sub-Registrar is the purchase or sale of immovable property for an amount of ₹30 lakh or more or valued at ₹30 lakh or more by the stamp valuation authority. It is a common scenario where non-residents may not have filed a return of income in India for several years as they have negligible income less than the maximum amount not chargeable to tax, and consequently, no tax liability. However, if they have entered into a transaction of purchase or sale of immovable property, the same would be reported in the SFT and would reflect against the PAN of both the buyer and the seller. This would lead to the issuance of notice by the assessing officer to investigate the reason for non-filing of return of income even though a high-value transaction was entered into during the year. It is, thus, advisable for a person entering into any of the specified high-value transactions, including the purchase or sale of immovable property, to file a return of income for the year in which such transaction is undertaken, so as to avoid unnecessary proceedings merely on the premise of such a transaction.

INVESTMENT IN IMMOVABLE PROPERTY UNDER FEMA

Acquisition or transfer of immovable property byNon-residents in India is regulated by sub-sections 2(a), (4) and (5) of section 6 of the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 (“FEMA”) read with Foreign Exchange Management (Non-debt Instruments) Rules, 2019 and is subject to applicable tax laws and other duties and levies in India.

NRIs and Overseas Citizens of India (“OCIs”) have general permission to invest in immovable property in India subject to certain conditions and restrictions. They can purchase residential or commercial property, other than agricultural land, plantation property, or farmhouse. NRIs and OCIs can also receive an immovable property other than agricultural land, plantation property, or farmhouse as a gift from a relative as defined in section 2(77) of the Companies Act, 2013. A NRI or OCI can also receive any immovable property as inheritance from a resident or from any person, who had acquired the property in accordance with the laws in force.

Payment for the purchase of immovable property can be made in India through normal banking channels by way of inward remittance. It can also be made out of funds held by the NRI or OCI in their NRE, FCNR(B) or NRO accounts. However, the payment cannot be made through travellers’cheques and foreign currency notes or any other mode.

A non-resident spouse of any NRI or OCI, who is not themselves an NRI or OCI, is permitted to acquire one immovable property in India, other than agricultural land, plantation property, or farmhouse jointly with their spouse, provided the marriage has been registered and has subsisted for a continuous period of at least 2 years immediately prior to acquiring the property. In such a case, the payment for the purchase can be made by the non-resident spouse, who is not a NRI or OCI either by way of inward remittance through normal banking channels or by debit to their non-resident account maintained as per the FEMA Act or rules thereunder.

SALE AND REPATRIATION OF FUNDS

The NRI or OCI can transfer the immovable property, other than agricultural land, plantation property, or farmhouse to a resident or another NRI or OCI. Transfer by way of gift can only be made to a relative as defined in section 2(77) of the Companies Act, 2013. Further, transfer of agricultural land, plantation property, or farmhouse can only be made to a person resident in India.

As a general rule, any person, who had acquired an immovable property when they were a resident in India or inherited from a person resident in India or their successor, requires RBI approval to remit the sales proceeds of the property. However, under the Foreign Exchange Management (Remittance of Assets) Regulations, 2016, NRIs and PIOs are permitted to remit up to USD 1 million per financial year, out of the sale proceeds of such assets in India. The limit of USD 1 million shall apply qua a financial year, irrespective of how many such assets may have been sold during the year.

In all other cases, the NRIs, OCIs and PIOs (in case of property acquired under the erstwhile Foreign Exchange Management (Acquisition and transfer of Immovable Property in India) Regulations, 2000, can repatriate the sale proceeds of immovable property outside India provided the following conditions are satisfied —

i) The property was acquired by the NRI / OCI / PIO as per the laws in force at the time of acquisition;

ii) The payment for the purchase of property was made by way of inward remittance through normal banking channels or out of balances in NRE / FCNR(B) account; and

iii) The repatriation of sale proceeds for residential property is restricted to not more than two properties.

In the case of point ii) above, if the NRI / OCI / PIO had acquired the property through housing loans availed in accordance with the applicable FEMA regulations, then the repayment ought to have been made by way of inward remittance through normal banking channels or out of balances in NRE / FCNR(B) account.

PROPERTIES IN INDIA BY CITIZENS OF NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES

Citizens (including natural persons and legal entities) of certain countries — Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Afghanistan, China, Iran, Nepal, Bhutan, Macau, Hong Kong, and the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea — cannot acquire or transfer immovable property in India, without the prior permission of RBI. They can,however, acquire the property on lease, which does not exceed 5 years. These restrictions do not apply in case of an OCI.

However, the regulations prescribe some relaxations in case of citizens of neighbouring countries Afghanistan, Bangladesh, or Pakistan, who belong to the minority communities in those countries, i.e., Hindus, Sikhs, Jains, Buddhists, Parsis and Christians. If such a person is residing in India and has been granted a Long-Term Visa (“LTV”) by the Central Government, he can purchase only one residential immovable property in India for his own residence and only one immovable property for self-employment, subject to the following conditions —

i) The property should not be located in, and around restricted / protected areas notified by the Central Government and cantonment areas.

ii) A declaration should be submitted to the district Revenue Authority specifying the source of funds and that the person is residing in India on an LTV.

iii) The registration documents of the property should mention the nationality and the fact that such a person is on an LTV.

iv) The property of such a person may be attached/ confiscated in the event of his/ her indulgence in anti-India activities.

v) A copy of the documents of the property shall be submitted to the Deputy Commissioner of Police / Foreigners Registration Office / Foreigners Regional Registration Office concerned and to the Ministry of Home Affairs (Foreigners Division).

vi) Sale of such property is permissible only after the person has acquired Indian citizenship. However, if the property is to be transferred before acquiring Indian citizenship, then, it would require the prior approval of the Deputy Commissioner of Police (DCP) / Foreigners Registration Office (FRO) / Foreigners Regional Registration Office (FRRO) concerned.

CONCLUSION

The acquisition and sale of immovable property in India by non-residents has several nuances under both the tax laws and FEMA. Several aspects discussed in the above article may have different implications depending on the facts of each case. For instance, in order to decide which payments can be included in the Cost of Acquisition or Cost of Improvement would require one to understand the nature of payments as well as their context. Similarly, as discussed in this article, the determination of the period of holding and indexation of cost can have its own complexities in cases of purchase of under-construction property with phase-wise payment and the conclusion can vary on the basis of the facts of the case. The aim of this article is to highlight the various aspects to be considered by individuals involved in property transactions, especially non-residents, and to bring about awareness regarding the applicable provisions and regulations so that the detailed facts of each case can be examined in light of these.

“Wait… What?” Is Singapore Taxing Capital Gains?

A. INTRODUCTION

A.1. To align the tax treatment of gains from the sale of foreign assets to the EU Code of Conduct Group guidance, which aims to address international tax avoidance risks, Singapore has enacted the new Section 10L of the Singapore Income Tax Act (“SITA”), in which gains from the sale of foreign assets that are received in Singapore by businesses without economic substance may be taxable in Singapore.

A.2. The change is in line with the global focus of anchoring substantive economic activities in the relevant jurisdiction.

B. SECTION 10L LAW — GENERAL RULE

B.1. From 1st January, 2024, based on the new Section 10L of the SITA, gains from the sale or disposal by an entity of a relevant group (“Relevant Entity”) of any movable or immovable property situated outside Singapore at the time of such sale or disposal or any rights or interest thereof (“Foreign Assets”) that are received in Singapore from outside Singapore are treated as income chargeable to tax under Section 10(1)(g) if:

a) the gains are not chargeable to tax under Section 10(1)1; or

b) the gains are exempt from tax.

Such gains are referred to in this article as “foreign-sourced disposal gains”.

C. WHAT DOES THIS MEAN?

C.1. Foreign-sourced disposal gains are taxable if all of the following conditions apply:

a) Condition 1: The taxpayer is a “Relevant Entity”;

b) Condition 2: The Relevant Entity is not under a Specified Circumstance; and

c) Condition 3: The disposal gains are “Received in Singapore”.

C.2. To summarise, for the disposal gains to be taxable under Section 10L, the answer to all of the following questions must be “Yes”:

Conditions Yes
Is the taxpayer an Entity? ?
Is the taxpayer a Relevant Entity? ?
Is the Relevant Entity not an Excluded Entity or a Specified Entity? ?
Have the disposal gains been “received” in Singapore? ?

D. WHAT IS A FOREIGN-SOURCED DISPOSAL GAIN?

D.1. Foreign-sourced disposal gains are gains from the sale or disposal of any movable or immovable property situated outside Singapore.

D.2. Common examples where assets are determined to be situated outside Singapore are as follows:

a) immovable property, or any right or interest in immovable property, is physically located outside Singapore;

b) equity securities and debt securities are registered in a foreign exchange;

c) unlisted shares are issued by a company incorporated outside Singapore;

d) loans where the creditor is a resident in a jurisdiction outside Singapore;

e) any shares, equity interests or securities issued by any municipal or governmental authority, or by anybody created by such authority, or any right or interest in such shares, equity interests or securities, are situated outside Singapore if the authority is established outside Singapore;

f) subject to paragraph (e), any shares in or securities issued by a company, or any right or interest in such shares or securities, are situated outside Singapore if the company is incorporated outside Singapore;

g) subject to paragraph (e), any equity interests in any entity which is not a company, or any right or interest in such equity interests, are situated outside Singapore if the operations of the entity are principally carried on outside Singapore;

h) subject to paragraph (e) (and despite paragraphs (f) and (g)), any registered shares, equity interests or securities, and any right or interest in any registered shares, equity interests or securities, are situated outside Singapore if they are registered outside Singapore or, if registered in more than one register, if the principal register is situated outside Singapore.

E. WHAT IS AN ENTITY?

E.1. An entity is defined under Section 10L(16) as:

a) any legal person (including a limited liability partnership) but not an individual;

b) a general partnership or limited partnership; or

c) a trust.

CONDITION 1: IS THE TAXPAYER A RELEVANT ENTITY?

F.1. A Relevant Entity is defined under Section 10L(5) as an entity that is a member of a group of entities if its assets, liabilities, income, expenses and cash flows are:

a) included in the consolidated financial statements of the parent entity of the group; or

b) excluded from the consolidated financial statements of the parent entity of the group solely on size or materiality grounds or on the grounds that the entity is held for sale; and

F.2. A group is a relevant group if:

a) the entities of the group are not all incorporated, registered or established in a single jurisdiction; or

b) any entity of the group has a place of business in more than one jurisdiction.

G. CONDITION 2: IS THE RELEVANT ENTITY UNDER A SPECIFIC CIRCUMSTANCE?

G.1. Foreign-sourced disposal gains are not chargeable to tax in Singapore under either of the specific circumstances mentioned in Points H and I below.

H. CONDITION 2A: THE RELEVANT ENTITY IS AN EXCLUDED ENTITY

H.1. An Excluded Entity is defined under Section 10L(16) of the SITA as either a:

pure equity-holding entity (“PEHE”); or

non-pure equity-holding entity (“non-PEHE”); and

such an entity has adequate Economic Substance in Singapore.

H.2. A PEHE’s function is to hold shares or equity interests in any other entity and has no income other than dividends, disposal gains and incidental income, i.e., bank interest income, foreign exchange gains arising from dividends or similar payments, sale or disposal of shares and bank interest income.

H.3. For a PEHE to meet the economic substance requirement, the following conditions are to be satisfied in the basis period in which the sale or disposal occurs:

a) the entity submits to a public authority any return, statement or account required under the written law under which it is incorporated or registered, being a return, statement or account which it is required by that law to submit to that authority on a regular basis;

b) the operations of the entity are managed and performed in Singapore (whether by its employees or outsourced to third parties or group entities); and

c) the entity has adequate human resources and premises in Singapore to carry out the operations of the entity.

H.4. A non-PEHE is defined as an entity that does not meet the definition of a PEHE.

H.5. For a non-PEHE to meet the economic substance requirement, the following conditions are to be satisfied
in the basis period in which the sale or disposal occurs:

a) the operations of the entity are managed and performed in Singapore (whether by its employees or outsourced to third parties or group entities); and

b) the entity has adequate economic substance in Singapore, taking into account the following considerations:

i. the number of full-time employees of the entity (or other persons managing or performing the entity’s operations) in Singapore;

ii. the qualifications and experience of such employees or other persons;

iii. the amount of business expenditure incurred by the entity in respect of its operations in Singapore; and

iv. whether the key business decisions of the entity are made by persons in Singapore.

I. CONDITION 2B: THE RELEVANT ENTITY IS A SPECIFIED ENTITY

I.1. Such gain that is carried out as part of, or incidental to, the business activities of:

a) a prescribed financial institution; or

b) specified entities taxed at a concessionary rate of tax / exempt from tax due to an incentive during the basis period in which the sale or disposal occurred.

Note: This currently excludes Section 13O and 13U of the SITA (i.e. the fund / family office exemptions).

J. CONDITION 3: HAVE THE DISPOSAL GAINS BEEN RECEIVED IN SINGAPORE?

J.1. Based on Section 10L(9), foreign-sourced disposal gains are regarded as received in Singapore and chargeable to tax if they are:

a) remitted to, or transmitted or brought into, Singapore;

b) applied in or towards satisfaction of any debt incurred in respect of a trade or business carried on in Singapore; or

c) applied to the purchase of any movable property which is brought into Singapore.

J.2. The foreign-sourced disposal gains are deemed to be received in Singapore only if such gains belong to an entity located in Singapore. Therefore, foreign entities, i.e., not incorporated, registered or established in Singapore, that are not operating in or from Singapore will not be within the scope of Section 10L of the SITA.

J.3. An example of the above would be a foreign entity that only makes use of banking facilities in Singapore and has no operations in Singapore.

K. SECTION 10L LAW — GAINS FROM THE DISPOSAL OF IPRs

K.1 Please note that gains from the disposal of foreign Intellectual Property Rights (“IPRs”) follow different rules than the ones specified above. This will be covered in a separate article in the future.

L. CONCLUSION

L.1 As mentioned above, Singapore has introduced capital gains tax in certain situations where the gains would not have already been taxable under the normal rules of Section 10(1) or where the gains would have been exempt under a specific section of Section 13.

Residential Status of Individuals – Interplay With Tax Treaty

INTRODUCTION

This article is the second part of a series of articles on Income-tax and FEMA issues related to NRIs. The first article in the series focused on various issues related to the residence of individuals under the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’). In this article, the author seeks to analyse some of the key issues related to the determination of the residential status of an individual under a tax treaty (‘DTAA’). Some of the issues covered in this article would be an interplay of tax residency under the tax treaty with the Act, the applicability of the treaty conditions to not ordinarily residents, tie breaker rule under tax treaty in case of dual residency, the role of tax residency certificate and split residency.

BACKGROUND

Article 1 of a DTAA typically provides the scope to whom it applies. For example, Article 1 of the India — Singapore DTAA provides as follows,

“This Agreement shall apply to persons who are residents of one or both of the Contracting States.”

Therefore, in order to apply the provisions of the DTAA, one needs to be a resident of at least one of the Contracting States which are party to the relevant DTAA. If one does not satisfy Article 1, i.e., if one is not a resident of either of the Contracting States to DTAA, the provisions of the DTAA do not apply1. Therefore, the Article on Residential status is considered to be a gateway to a DTAA. Usually, Article 4 of the DTAA deals with residential status. While the broad structure and language of Article 4 in most DTAAs is similar, there are a few nuances in some DTAAs and therefore, it is advisable to check the language of the respective DTAA for determining the residential status. For example, the definition of ‘resident’ for the purposes of the DTAA in the India — Greece DTAA and India — Libya DTAA is not provided as a separate article but is a part of Article 2 dealing with the definition of various terms.


1. There are certain exceptions to this rule — application of the article on Mutual Agreement Procedure, application of the nationality Non-Discrimination article and application of non-territorial taxation of dividends.

DTAAs are agreements between Contracting States or jurisdictions, distributing the taxing rights amongst themselves. The distributive articles in the DTAA provide the rules for distributing the income between the country where the income is earned or paid (considered as source country) and the country of residence. Therefore, it is important to analyse, which country is the country of source and which country is the country of residence before one analyses the other articles of the DTAA.

In the subsequent paragraphs, the various issues of the article dealing with treaty residence have been discussed.

Generally, Article 4 of the DTAA, dealing with residence, contains 3 paragraphs — the first para deals with the specific definition of the term ‘resident’ for the purposes of the DTAA, the second para deals with the tie-breaker rule in case an individual is considered as resident of both the Contracting States in a particular DTAA and the third para deals with the tie-breaker rule in case a person, other than an individual is considered as resident of both the Contracting States in a particular DTAA.

ARTICLE 4(1) — INTERPLAY WITH DOMESTIC TAX LAW

Article 4(1) of the DTAA generally provides the rule for determining the residential status of a person. Article 4(1) of the OECD Model Convention 2017 provides as follows,

“For the purposes of this Convention, the term “resident of a Contracting State” means any person who, under the laws of that State, is liable to tax therein by reason of his domicile, residence, place of management or any other criterion of a similar nature, and also includes that State and any political subdivision or local authority thereof as well as a recognised pension fund of that State. This term, however, does not include any person who is liable to tax in that State in respect only of income from sources in that State or capital situated therein.”

The UN Model Convention 2021 has similar language, except that it includes a person who is liable to tax in a Contracting State by virtue of its place of incorporation as well. Similarly, the US Model Convention 2016 also includes a person who is liable to tax in a Contracting State on account of citizenship.

Language of Article 4(1) of India’s DTAAs

In respect of the major DTAAs entered into by India, most of the DTAAs follow the OECD Model Convention2, whereas some of the DTAAs3 entered into by India only refer to the person being a resident under the respective domestic law without giving reference to the reason for such residence such as domicile, etc.


2 India’s DTAAs with Mauritius, the Netherlands, France, Germany, UK, UAE (in respect of Indian resident), Spain, South Africa, Japan, Portugal, Brazil and Canada.
3 India’s DTAAs with Singapore and Australia.

With the exception of the DTAAs with the UAE and Kuwait, Article 4(1) of all the major DTAAs entered into by India refers to the definition of residence under the domestic tax law to determine the residential status under the relevant DTAA. In other words, if one is considered a resident of a particular jurisdiction under the domestic tax law of that jurisdiction, such a person would also be considered as a resident of that jurisdiction for the purposes of the tax treaty.

As the UAE and Kuwait did not impose tax on individuals, the DTAAs entered into by India with these jurisdictions provided for a number of days stay in the respective jurisdiction for an individual to be considered as a resident of that jurisdiction for the purposes of the DTAA. For example, Article 4(1) of the India — UAE DTAA provides,

“For the purposes of this Agreement, the term ‘resident of a Contracting State’ means:

(a) In the case of India: any person who, under the laws of India, is liable to tax therein by reason of his domicile, residence, place of management or any other criterion of a similar nature. This term, however, does not include any person who is liable to tax in India in respect only of income from sources in India.

(b) In the case of the United Arab Emirates: an individual who is present in the UAE for a period or periods totalling in the aggregate at least 183 days in the calendar year concerned, and a company which is incorporated in the UAE and which is managed and controlled wholly in UAE.”

Recently, the UAE introduced criteria for individuals to be considered as tax residents of the UAE. As per Cabinet Decision No. 85 of 2022 with Ministerial Decision No. 27 of 2023, individuals would be considered as tax residents of the UAE if they meet any one of the following conditions:

(a) The principal place of residence as well as the centre of financial and personal interests is situated in the UAE; or

(b) The individual was physically present in the UAE for a period of 183 days or more during a consecutive 12-month period; or

(c) The individual was physically present in the UAE for a period of 90 days or more in a consecutive 12-month period and the individual is a UAE national, UAE resident, or citizen of a GCC country and has a permanent place of residence in the UAE or business in the UAE.

While the UAE does not have a personal income tax, the compliance of above conditions is necessary for obtaining a tax residency certificate. As the India — UAE DTAA does not give reference to the domestic tax law of the UAE for determining treaty residence in the case of individuals and provides an objective number of days stay in the UAE criteria, there could be a scenario wherein a person is resident of the UAE under the domestic law but does not satisfy the test under the DTAA.

For example, Mr. A, a UAE national with a permanent home in the UAE, is in the UAE for 100 days during a particular year. As he satisfies the 90-day period specified in the Cabinet Decision, he would be considered a tax resident of the UAE under UAE laws. However, such a person may not be considered as a resident of the UAE for the purposes of the tax treaty as he is in the UAE for less than 183 days, leading to a peculiar mismatch.

Therefore, it is extremely important for one to read the exact language of the article while determining the tax residence of that DTAA.

Liable to tax

Article 4(1) of the DTAA treats a person as a treaty resident if he is ‘liable to tax’ as a resident under the respective domestic tax law. In this regard, there has been a significant controversy in respect of the interpretation of the term ‘liable to tax’. There have been a plethora of decisions on this issue, especially in the context of the India — UAE DTAA. The question before the courts was whether a person who is a resident of the UAE, which did not have a tax law, was liable to tax in the UAE as a resident and, therefore, eligible for the benefits of the India — UAE DTAA.

The AAR in the case of Cyril Eugene Periera vs. CIT (1999) 154 CTR 281, held that as the taxpayer has no liability to pay tax in the UAE, he cannot be considered to be liable to tax in the UAE and, therefore, not eligible for the benefits of the India — UAE DTAA. However, the AAR in the cases of Mohsinally Alimohammed Rafik, In re (1995) 213 ITR 317 and Abdul Razak A. Meman, In re (2005) 276 ITR 306, has distinguished between ‘subject to tax’ and ‘liable to tax’ and has held that so long as there exists, sufficient nexus between the taxpayer and the jurisdiction, and so long as the jurisdiction has the right to tax such taxpayer (even though it may not choose to do so), such taxpayer would be considered as a resident of that jurisdiction. This view has also been upheld by the Supreme Court in the case of Union of India vs. Azadi Bachao Andolan (2003) 263 ITR 706 and interpreted specifically by the Mumbai ITAT in the case of ADIT vs. Green Emirate Shipping & Travels (2006) 286 ITR 60. It may be noted that the distinction between liable to tax and subject to tax is also provided by the OECD in its Model Commentary to the Convention.

While this issue was somewhat settled, the controversy has once again reignited by the introduction of the meaning of ‘liable to tax’ given by the Finance Act 2020. Section 2(29A) of the Act, as introduced by the Finance Act 2020, provides as follows,

““liable to tax”, in relation to a person and with reference to a country, means that there is an income-tax liability on such person under the law of that country for the time being in force and shall include a person who has subsequently been exempted from such liability under the law of that country;”

Therefore, the Act now provides that a person is liable to tax if there is tax liability on such a person even though such person may not necessarily be subject to tax, on account of an exemption in that jurisdiction. One may argue that the definition under the Act should have no consequence to a term under the DTAA. However, Article 3(2) of the OECD Model (as is present in most Indian DTAAs) provides that unless the context otherwise requires, a term not defined in the DTAA can be interpreted under the domestic tax law of the jurisdiction. Further, Explanation 4 to section 90 of the Act provides as follows:

“Explanation 4.—For the removal of doubts, it is hereby declared that where any term used in an agreement entered into under sub-section (1) is defined under the said agreement, the said term shall have the same meaning as assigned to it in the agreement; and where the term is not defined in the said agreement, but defined in the Act, it shall have the same meaning as assigned to it in the Act and explanation, if any, given to it by the Central Government.”

In other words, unless the context otherwise requires, the meaning of a term under the Act may be used to interpret the meaning of the same term under the DTAA as well if such term is not already defined in the DTAA. Now, the question of whether, in a particular case, what would be the context and whether the context in the DTAA requires another meaning than as provided in the Act is a topic in itself and would need to be examined by the courts.

The main issue to be addressed is whether an individual resident of the UAE would now be considered as a resident of UAE under the India — UAE DTAA. In this regard, it is important to note that the decisions mentioned above are in respect of the DTAA before it was amended in 2007. Prior to its modification, Article 4(1) of the DTAA defined the term ‘resident’ as one who was liable to tax under domestic law by reason of residence, domicile, etc. However, the present DTAA, as discussed above, refers to objective criteria of number of days stay in the UAE and therefore, this controversy may not be relevant to the India — UAE DTAA.

This controversy, however, may be relevant for the interpretation of the DTAAs wherein there is no tax on individuals, and the residence article in the DTAA gives reference to the domestic tax law.

TAX RESIDENCY CERTIFICATE (‘TRC’)

The question arises is whether a TRC would be sufficient for an individual to claim the benefit of the tax treaty. There are certain judicial precedents, especially in the context of the India — Mauritius DTAA, by virtue of the CBDT Circular No. 789 dated 13th April, 2000, that TRC is sufficient to claim the benefit of the DTAA. In the view of the author, while a TRC issued by the tax authorities of a particular jurisdiction would be sufficient to claim that the person is a resident, the taxpayer may still need to satisfy other tests, including anti-avoidance rules in the Act and DTAA to claim the benefit of the DTAA along with the TRC. Section 90(4) of the Act, which requires TRC to be obtained to provide the benefit of the DTAA, simply states that a person is not entitled to treaty benefit in the absence of a TRC, and it does not state that TRC is the only condition for obtaining treaty benefit.

Further, one may also need to evaluate the TRC as well as the specific language of Article 4(1) in the relevant DTAA before concluding that TRC is sufficient to claim treaty residence. For example, if the UAE authorities provide a TRC stating that the person is a taxpayer under the domestic provisions of the UAE, such TRC may not even satisfy the treaty residence conditions, depending on the facts and circumstances.

The Cabinet Decision, as discussed above, recognises this particular issue and states that if the relevant DTAA between UAE and a particular jurisdiction specifies criteria for the determination of treaty residency, the TRC would need to be issued to the individual considering such criteria and not the general criteria provided in the UAE domestic law.

Now, another question that arises is whether the benefit of the DTAA (assuming that other measures for obtaining the benefit are satisfied) can be granted even in the absence of a TRC. In this case, one may refer to the Ahmedabad Tribunal in the case of Skaps Industries India (P.) Ltd. vs. ITO [2018] 94 taxmann.com 448, wherein it was held as follows,

9. Whatever may have been the intention of the lawmakers and whatever the words employed in Section 90(4) may prima facie suggest, the ground reality is that as the things stand now, this provision cannot be construed as a limitation to the superiority of treaty over the domestic law. It can only be pressed into service as a provision beneficial to the assessee. The manner in which it can be construed as a beneficial provision to the assessee is that once this provision is complied with in the sense that the assessee furnishes the tax residency certificate in the prescribed format, the Assessing Officer is denuded of the powers to requisition further details in support of the claim of the assessee for the related treaty benefits. …..

10….. Our research did not indicate any judicial precedent which has approved the interpretation in the manner sought to be canvassed before us i.e. Section 90(4) being treated as a limitation to the treaty superiority contemplated under section 90(2), and that issue is an open issue as on now. In the light of this position, and in the light of our foregoing analysis which leads us to the conclusion that Section 90(4), in the absence of a non-obstante clause, cannot be read as a limitation to the treaty superiority under Section 90(2), we are of the considered view that an eligible assessee cannot be declined the treaty protection under section 90(2) on the ground that the said assessee has not been able to furnish a Tax Residency Certificate in the prescribed form.”

Therefore, the ITAT held that section 90(4) of the Act does not override the DTAA. In a recent decision, the Hyderabad Tribunal in the case of Sreenivasa Reddy Cheemalamarri vs. ITO [2020] TS-158-ITAT-2020 has also followed the ruling of the Ahmedabad Tribunal of Skaps (supra). A similar view has also been taken by the Hyderabad ITAT in the cases of Vamsee Krishna Kundurthi vs. ITO (2021) 190 ITD 68 and Ranjit Kumar Vuppu vs. ITO (2021) 190 ITD 455.

In the case of individuals, the treaty residence for most of the major DTAAs is linked to residential status under domestic tax law and the number of days stay is a condition for determining the residential status under most domestic tax laws. Therefore, one may be able to substantiate on the basis of documents such as a passport which provide the number of days stay in a particular jurisdiction. However, a Chartered Accountant issuing a certificate under Form 15CB may not be able to take such a position as the form specifically asks one to state whether TRC has been obtained.

SECOND SENTENCE OF ARTICLE 4(1)

The second sentence of Article 4(1) of the OECD/ UN Model Convention excludes a person, as being a resident of a particular jurisdiction under the DTAA, who is liable to tax only in respect of income from sources in that jurisdiction. This sentence is found in only a few major DTAAs entered into by India4.


4. India’s DTAAs with Germany, UK, USA, UAE, Australia, Spain, South Africa and Portugal.

The objective of this sentence is to exclude those taxpayers as being treaty residents of a particular jurisdiction, wherein they are not subject to comprehensive taxation. The first question which arises is whether the second sentence would apply in the case of a person who is a resident of a country, which follows a territorial basis of taxation, i.e. income is taxed in that country only when received in or remitted to that country. For example, Mr. A is a tax resident of State A, which follows a territorial basis of taxation, like Singapore [although India — Singapore DTAA does not contain the second sentence of Article 4(1)]. If India — State A DTAA contains the second sentence in Article 4(1), the question that arises is whether Mr. A would be considered as a resident of State A for the purposes of the DTAA. In this regard, in the view of the author, the objective of the second sentence is to exclude individuals who are not subject to comprehensive tax liability and not to exclude countries where the tax system is territorial. In other words, so long as Mr. A is subject to comprehensive taxation in State A, the second sentence should not apply and Mr. A should be considered as a treaty resident of State A for the DTAA. The OECD Commentary also states the same view5.


5. Refer Para 8.3 of the OECD Model Commentary on Article 4, 2017.

An interesting decision on this would be the recent Hyderabad ITAT decision in the case of Jenendra Kumar Jain vs. ITO (2023) 147 taxmmann.com 320. In the said case, the taxpayer, who was transferred from India to the USA during the year, opted to be taxed as a ‘resident alien’ under USA domestic tax law, i.e. only income from sources in the USA would be taxable in the USA. In this regard, the ITAT held that as the taxpayer was taxed in the USA, not on the basis of residence but on the basis of source, such taxpayer would not be considered as a resident of the USA for the purposes of the India — USA DTAA.

The next question which arises is whether the second sentence would apply in the case of an individual who is considered as a not ordinarily resident (‘RNOR’) under section 6(6) of the Act. For example, whether a person would be considered as a resident of India under the DTAA and thus can access the Indian DTAAs when such a person is considered as a deemed resident but RNOR of India under section 6(1A) of the Act. In the view of the author, the second sentence does not apply in the case of an RNOR as the RNOR is not liable to tax only in respect of sources in India. Such a person may be taxable on worldwide income, if such income is, say, earned through a profession which is set up in India.

Another interesting issue arises is whether the second sentence applies in the case of third-country DTAAs after the application of a tie-breaker rule (explained in detail in the subsequent paras). Let us take the example of Mr. A, who is a resident of India and the UK under the respective domestic tax laws and is considered as a resident of the UK under the tie-breaker rule in Article 4(2) of the India — UK DTAA. In case Mr. A earns income from a third country, say Australia, the question arises is whether the India — Australia DTAA can be applied. In this regard, para 8.2 of the OECD Model Commentary on Article 4, 2017, provides as follows,

“…It also excludes companies and other persons who are not subject to comprehensive liability to tax in a Contracting State because these persons, whilst being residents of that State under that State’s tax law, are considered to be residents of another State pursuant to a treaty between these two States….”

Therefore, the OECD suggests that in the above example, as India would not be able to tax the entire income (being the loser State in the tie-breaker test under the India —UK DTAA), Mr. A would not be subject to comprehensive taxation in India and therefore, one cannot apply the India — Australia DTAA or any other Indian DTAAs which contain the second sentence in Article 4(1).

However, this view of the OECD has been discarded by various experts. In the view of the author as well, the above view may not be the correct view as the residential status in the DTAA is only ‘for the purposes of the Convention’ and therefore, cannot be applied for any other purpose. As also explained in the first part of this series, the tie-breaker test has no relevance to residential status under the Act, and a person resident under the Act will continue being a resident under the Act even if such person is considered as a resident of another jurisdiction under a DTAA. In the above example, Mr. A continues to be a resident of India under the Act6 as well and, therefore, should be eligible to access Indian DTAAs.


6. In contrast with the domestic tax law of Canada and UK wherein domestic residency is amended if under the tie-breaker rule in a DTAA, the taxpayer is considered as resident of another jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 4(2) – TIE-BREAKER TEST

If an individual is a resident of both the Contracting States to a DTAA under the respective domestic tax laws (and therefore, under Article 4(1) of the DTAA), one would need to determine treaty residency by applying the tie-breaker rule. Article 4(2) provides in the case of a dual resident; the treaty residency would be determined as follows:

A. The jurisdiction in which the taxpayer has a permanent home available to him (‘permanent home test’),

B. If he has a permanent home in both jurisdictions, the jurisdiction with which his personal and economic relations are closer (centre of vital interests) (‘centre of vital interests test’),

C. If his centre of vital interest cannot be determined, or if he does not have a permanent home in either jurisdiction, the jurisdiction in which he has a habitual abode (‘habitual abode test’),

D. If he has a habitual abode in both or neither jurisdiction, the jurisdiction of which he is a national (‘nationality test’),

E. If he is a national of both or neither jurisdiction, the jurisdiction as mutually agreed by the competent authorities of both jurisdictions.

The language of Article 4(2) is clear regarding the order to be followed while determining the treaty residency in the case of dual residents. It is important to note that some of the conditions are subjective in nature and are used to determine which jurisdiction has a closer tie to the taxpayer. Therefore, one needs to consider all the facts holistically and carefully while applying the various tie-breaker tests to determine treaty residence in such situations.

PERMANENT HOME TEST

Generally, a permanent home test is satisfied if the taxpayer has a place of residence available to him in a particular jurisdiction. The availability of the home cannot be for a short period but needs to be for a long time to be considered as permanent. However, the OECD Commentary as well as a plethora of judgements have held that it is not necessary that the home should be owned by the taxpayer. Even a home taken on rent would be considered as a permanent home of the taxpayer if he has a right to use such a property at his convenience. Similarly, the parents’ property would also be considered as a permanent home as the taxpayer would have a right to stay at the said property. Another example could be that of a hotel. While generally, a hotel may not be considered a permanent home, if the facts suggest that accommodation would always be available to the taxpayer as a matter of right, it may be considered a permanent home. On the other hand, even if a person owns a particular residential property in a particular jurisdiction, it may not be considered a permanent home if the taxpayer has given the said property on rent and the taxpayer does not have the right to use the property at any given time7.


7. Refer para 13 of OECD Model Commentary on Article 4, 2017.

CENTRE OF VITAL INTERESTS TEST

The centre of Vital Interests generally refers to the social and economic connections of the taxpayer to a particular jurisdiction. Examples of social interests would be where the family of the taxpayer is located, where the children of the taxpayer attend school, and where his friends are. Similarly, examples of economic interests would be a place of employment, a place where major assets are kept, etc. This is a difficult test to substantiate as there is a significant amount of subjectivity involved. Moreover, there could be situations wherein the personal interests may be located in a particular jurisdiction, whereas the economic interests may be located in the other jurisdiction. In such a situation, one may not be able to conclude the tie-breaker test on the basis of the centre of vital interests test as no specific weightage is given to either of the nature of interests.

HABITUAL ABODE TEST

The habitual abode test is another subjective test that seeks to determine where the taxpayer seeks to reside for a longer period. This could be on the basis of the number of days stay (if the difference in the number of days stay is significantly at variation between the jurisdictions) or on the intention of the taxpayer to spend a longer period of time. An example given in the OECD Model Commentary is that of a vacation home in a particular jurisdiction and the main property of residence in another jurisdiction. In such a situation, the jurisdiction where the vacation home is situated may not be considered to be the habitual abode of the taxpayer as the stay in such a property would always be for a limited period of time.

NATIONALITY TEST

Given the subjectivity involved in the other tie-breaker tests, in most situations, practically, the tiebreaker is determined by the jurisdiction where the taxpayer is a national. As India does not accept dual citizenship, the question of a taxpayer being a national of both jurisdictions and therefore, having the residential status be determined mutually by the competent authorities does not arise.

Timing of application of the tie-breaker tests

Having understood some of the nuances of the various tie-breaker tests, it is important to analyse the timing of the application of the tie-breaker tests, i.e. at what point in time does the tie-breaker test have to be applied? Unlike the basic residence test based on the number of days, which applies in respect of a particular year, as the tie-breaker tests are driven by facts which are subjective and can change, this question of timing of application gains significant relevance.

Let us take the example of Mr. A who moved from India to Singapore in October 2023 as he got a job in Singapore. Let us assume that for the period October to March, Mr. A, who has not sold his house in India, is staying in various hotels in Singapore and he takes an apartment on rent in the month of March 2024 after selling his property in India. Now, if Mr. A is a tax resident of India and Singapore and one is applying the tie-breaker rule, one may arrive at a different conclusion on treaty residence depending on when the tie-breaker rule is applied. For example, if one applies in October 2023, he has a permanent home only in India, whereas if one applies in March 2024, he has a permanent home only in Singapore. In the author’s view, one would need to apply the tie-breaker rule when one is seeking to tax the income, i.e. when the income is earned or received, as the case may be. This would be in line with the application of the DTAA as a whole, which would need to be applied when one is taxing the said income, as DTAAs allocate the taxing rights between the jurisdictions.

Split Residency

The above example is a classic case of split residency wherein a person can be considered as a resident of different jurisdictions within the same fiscal year. This issue is also common where the tax year differs in the jurisdictions involved. For example, India follows April to March as the tax year, whereas Singapore follows January to December. Let us take the example of Mr. A, who moved to Singapore for the purpose of employment along with his family in January 2023. He has not come back to India after moving to Singapore. He qualifies as a tax resident of Singapore for the calendar year 2023 under the domestic tax law. He has a permanent home only in Singapore. In such a situation, Mr. A qualifies as a tax resident of India for the period April 2022 to March 2023 and as a tax resident of Singapore for the period January 2023 to December 2023. In such a situation, in respect of income earned till December 2022, Mr. A is a resident of India and not of Singapore, and therefore, in such a scenario, Mr. A is a treaty resident of India under the India — Singapore DTAA for the period April 2022 to December 2022. In respect of the income earned from January 2023 to March 2023, Mr. A will be considered as a resident of India as well as Singapore under the domestic tax law. However, as he has a permanent home available only in Singapore, he would be considered as a treaty resident of Singapore during such a period. Therefore, for income earned from April 2022 till December 2022, Mr. A is a treaty resident of India, whereas from January 2023 till March 2023, he is a treaty resident of Singapore.

This principle of split residency finds support in the OECD Model Commentary8 as well as various judicial precedents9.


8. Refer Para 10 of the OECD Model Commentary on Article 4, 2017.
9. Refer the decisions of the Delhi ITAT in the case of Sameer Malhotra (2023) 146 taxmann.com 158 and of the Bangalore ITAT in the case of Shri Kumar Sanjeev Ranjan (2019) 104 taxmann.com 183.

CONCLUSION

The above discussions only strengthen the case that one cannot determine the residential status under the Act as well as the DTAA together, as while the definitions may be linked to each other, there are certain nuances wherein there is divergence in applying the principles. For example, the concept of split residency does not apply to residential status under the Act. Similarly, under the Act, the residential status of a person does not change depending on the income, whereas in the case of a treaty, the treaty residence may be different for each stream of income (in many cases for the same stream of income as well) depending on the timing of application of the treaty residence. Further, each DTAA has its own unique nuances and language used and therefore, it is important that one analyses the specific language of the treaty while interpreting the same.

NRI – Interplay of Tax and FEMA Issues – Residence of Individuals under The Income-Tax Act

Editorial Note: This article starts a series of articles on Income-tax and FEMA issues related to NRIs with a focus on the interplay thereof. Apart from a residential status definition under both Income-tax and FEMA, the series of articles will cover issues under both laws related to change of residence; investments, gifts and loans by NRIs; as well as transfers by them from India.

1. PRELIMINARY

Countries exercise their sovereign right to tax based on whether the income arises in their country or whether a person has a close connection with that country. The taxation laws define that close connection – an extended period during which the person stays in a country, or has his domicile there, or any similar criteria. Given a sufficient territorial connection between the person sought to be charged and the country seeking to tax him, income tax may properly extend to that person in respect of his foreign income.1The Income-tax Act, 1961 (the “Ac”) imposes such comprehensive or full tax, on persons who are residents.


1.Wallace Bros. & Co Ltd vs. CIT (1948) 16 ITR 240 (PC).

Section 5 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (the “Act”) provides for the scope of total income for persons. The scope differs according to the residential status of the person. A non-resident’s total income consists of income received or deemed to be received in India in a previous year or income accruing, or arising, or deemed to accrue or arise in India in a previous year.

In contrast, the scope of the total income of a resident in India includes, apart from the income covered within the scope for non-residents, income accruing or arising outside India during such year. In effect, a resident is taxable on his global income. At the same time, the total income of a resident but not ordinarily resident, as defined in section 6(6) of the Act, excludes income accruing or arising outside India unless it is derived from a business controlled in or a profession set up in India.

2. RESIDENTIAL STATUS

A person is said to be resident in India per the rules in section 6 of the Act. The residential status for (a) individual, (b) company, (c) Hindu Undivided Family, firm or association of persons and (d) other persons is to be determined by different rules. The nationality aspect does not enter the determination of residential status under the Indian income-tax law.

A non-resident is a person who is not a resident [section 2(30)]. When a person may be said to be “not ordinarily resident” is provided in section 6(6). The residential status is to be determined for a previous year and applies to all income for that year that comes within the scope of total income applicable to the assessee. In other words, a person cannot be a resident for one part of the year and non-resident for the other part, as India does not recognise split residency. The effect of this provision is that a person’s total income earned in a Financial Year is taxed basis his residential status in India, even if he may be resident of two countries due to his part stay in India. However, such a person can avail relief under a tax treaty by applying tie-breaking tests. It is not possible to have different residential status under the Act for different sources of income. Whether an assessee is a resident or non-resident is a question of fact.2


2.Rai Bahadur Seth Teomal vs. CIT (1963) 48 ITR 170 (Cal).

2.1 Tests for residence

There are two tests to determine if an individual is resident in India in any previous year. These tests are alternative and not cumulative.

According to the first test, an individual is said to be resident in India in any previous year if he is in India for a period or periods of 182 days or more [sec. 6(1)(a)]. The alternative test is an individual having within the four years preceding the previous year, been in India for a period or periods amounting in all to three hundred and sixty-five days or more, and is in India for a period or periods amounting in all to sixty days or more in that year [sec. 6(1)(c)].

Explanation 1 to section 6(1)(c) provides relaxation from the second test in some circumstances [discussed in paragraph 2.3 below].

2.2 Stay in India

The phrase “being in India” implies the individual’s physical presence in the country3 and nothing more. The intention and the purpose of his stay are irrelevant; the stay need not be in connection to earning income, which is sought to be taxed. Nor is it essential that he should stay at the same place. Stay may not be continuous: the individual’s presence in India must be aggregated to ascertain whether the threshold is crossed.


3.CIT vs. Avtar Singh Wadhwan (2001) 247 ITR 260 (Bom).

How the number of days shall be counted has been contested. In an Advance Ruling, it was held that even a part of the day would be construed as a full day, and even though for some hours on the day of arrival and departure, the applicant can be said to have been out of India, both the days will be reckoned for ascertaining 182 days. 4Contrarily, the Mumbai Tribunal, in this case,5 noted that the period or periods in section 6(1) requires counting of days from the date of arrival of the assessee in India to the date he leaves India. The Tribunal relied upon section 9 of the General Clauses Act, 1897, which provides that the first day in a series of days is to be excluded if the word ‘from’ is used and held that the words ‘from’ and ‘to’ are to be inevitably used for ascertaining the period though these words are not mentioned in the statute, and accordingly, the date of arrival is not to be counted.


4.Advance Ruling in P. No. 7 of 1995, In re (1997) 223 ITR 462 (AAR).
5.Manoj Kumar Reddy vs. Income-tax Officer (2009) 34 SOT 180 (Bang).

2.2.1 Involuntary stay

Section 6 does not limit an individual’s freedom to arrange his physical presence in India such that he is not a resident in the previous year and his foreign income falls outside the Indian tax net. On the other hand, section 6 does not distinguish between a stay in India that is by choice and that is involuntary. However, the Delhi High Court held that, given that the Act provides a choice to be in India and be treated as a resident for taxation purposes, his presence in India against his will or without his consent should not ordinarily be counted. In that case, the assessee could not leave India as his passport was impounded by a government agency. The Court held that the fact that the impounding was found to be illegal and, therefore, was in the nature of illegal restraint, the days the assessee spent in India involuntarily should not be counted. At the same time, the Court cautioned that the ruling cannot be treated as a thumb rule to exclude every case of involuntary stay for section 6(1), and the exclusion has to be fact-dependent.

A similar relaxation has been provided to individuals who had come to India on a visit before 22nd March, 2020, and their stay is extended involuntarily due to the circumstances arising out of the Covid-19 pandemic to determine their residential status under section 6 of the Act during the previous year 2019-20.6


6.Circular No. 11 of 2020 dated 8th May, 2020.

Representations for a similar general relaxation for the previous year 2020-21, in relation to an extended stay in India by individuals due to travel restrictions during the Covid pandemic resulting in their residence under section 6(1) was denied by the CBDT, which stipulated examining on a case-by-case basis for any relief.7  According to that Circular, an individual with a forced stay in India would still have the benefit of applying treaty residence rules, which are more likely to determine residence in the other State. The Circular points out that even if an individual becomes a resident in the previous year 2020-21 due to his forced stay in the country, he will most likely become an ordinary resident in India and accordingly, his foreign source income shall not be taxable in India unless it is derived from a business controlled in India or a profession set up in India, so there would be no double taxation. The Circular states that if a person becomes a resident due to his forced stay during the previous year 2020-21, he would be entitled to credit for foreign taxes under rule 128 of the IT Rules, 1962.


7. Circular No. 2 of 2021 dated 3rd March, 2021.

2.2.2 Seafarers

Explanation 2 to section 6(1) and rule 126 were brought into the statute with effect from A.Y. 2015-16 to mitigate difficulty in determining the period of stay in India of an individual, being a citizen of India, who is a crew member on board a ship that spends some time in Indian territorial waters.

The provisions apply to an Indian citizen who is a member of the crew of a foreign-bound ship leaving India. The period of stay in India of such a person will exclude the period from the date of joining the ship to the date of signing off as per the Continuous Discharge Certificate. The “Continuous Discharge Certificate” shall have the meaning as per the Merchant Shipping (Continuous Discharge Certificate-cum-Seafarer’s Identity Document) Rules, 2001, made under the Merchant Shipping Act, 1958. The days in Indian territorial waters by such a ship on an eligible voyage would fall within the period of joining and end dates in the Continuous Discharge Certificate and, thus, will not be treated as the period of stay in India of the concerned individual crew member.

An “eligible voyage” is defined in the rule to mean a voyage undertaken by a ship engaged in the carriage of passengers or freight in international traffic where the voyage originated from any port in India, has as its destination any port outside India, and for the voyage originating from any port outside India, has as its destination any port in India. The rule has no application where both the port of origin and destination of a voyage are outside India or where the Indian citizen leaves India to join the ship at a port outside India and the ship is on a voyage with a destination outside India. In such cases, his presence in India will usually be determined based on entries in his passport.

Notably, Explanation 2 and Rule 126 are for the purposes of the entire clause (1) (and not limited to clause (a) in Explanation 1). The rule prescribes the manner of computing the period of days in India of a crew member of a foreign-bound ship leaving India and is not restricted to only Indian-registered ships. Accordingly, the rule applies even while computing the period of stay of 182 days and 60 days contained in clauses (1)(a) and (1)(c).

2.3 Relaxations

There are some relaxations to the alternative test for residence in section 6(1)(c), which provides for substituting the period of stay in India for 60 days in section 6(1)(c) for 182 days. Consequently, in cases where the relaxation is applicable, the threshold of stay in India for residence will be 182 days under both tests, making the alternative test redundant. These relaxations are discussed below.

2.3.1 Citizens leaving India [Explanation 1(a)]

Explanation 1(a) provides for substituting the period of stay in India for 60 days in section 6(1)(c) by 182 days if the assessee, being a citizen of India, leaves India in any previous year as a member of the crew of an Indian ship or for the purposes of employment outside India. The relaxation in Explanation 1(a) applies to the previous year in which the assessee, being a citizen of India, leaves India.8


8.Manoj Kumar Reddy vs. Income-tax Officer (2009) 34 SOT 180 (Bang), Addl DIT vs. Sudhir Choudrie [2017] 88 taxmann.com 570 (Delhi - Trib.).

Under the Citizenship Act 1955, citizenship is possible by birth (section 3), by descent (section 4), by registration (section 5), by naturalisation (section 6) and by incorporation of territory (section 8). However, an Overseas Citizen of India under section 7A of that Act is not a citizen and is not covered under this clause.

(a) Citizens leaving India as a member of the crew of Indian ship

The relaxation under clause (a) of Explanation 1 is available only where the assessee leaves India as a crew member of an Indian ship as defined in section 3(18) of the Merchant Shipping Act, 1958. Relaxation is not available if the ship is other than an Indian ship. An individual who is not a citizen, too, is not eligible.

In this case,the assessee claimed the benefit of relaxation under Explanation 1(a) as he had left India in that previous year as a crew member of an Indian ship and had spent 201 days outside India. However, the benefit was denied because the assessee had stayed in foreign waters while employed on the ship(s) for only 158 days, i.e., less than 182 days. However, the ruling requires reconsideration since there is no condition in that provision that the assessee should spend his entire days outside India on a ship to be eligible for relaxation. Explanation 1(a) provides only that the individual leaves India in that previous year as a member of a crew on an Indian ship for the sixty days in clause (1)(c) to be substituted by 182 days.


9.Madhukar Vinayak Dhavale vs. Income-tax Officer (2011) 15 taxmann.com 36 (Pune).

Explanation 2 to section 6(1) and rule 126 that provide for the manner of determining the period of stay in India of a crew member of a foreign bound ship leaving India would be relevant for Explanation 1(a) as well in ascertaining whether the thresholds of 60 days and 182 days in section 6(1) is crossed. Thus, an Indian ship leaving for a foreign destination would be an ‘eligible voyage’ under rule 126, and his period of stay in India will exclude the period from the date of joining the ship to the date of signing off as per the Continuous Discharge Certificate. Where the Indian ship does not qualify to be on an eligible voyage, the individual’s period or periods in India will impliedly include the ship’s presence in Indian territorial waters.

(b) For the purposes of employment

The Kerala High Court held in this case10 that no technical meaning is intended for the word “employment” used in the Explanation, and going abroad for the purposes of employment only meant that the visit and stay abroad should not be for other purposes such as a tourist, or medical treatment or studies or the like. Therefore, going abroad for employment means going abroad to take up employment or any avocation, including taking up one’s own  business or profession. The expression “for the purposes of employment” requires the intention of the individual to be seen, which can be demonstrated by the type of visa used to travel abroad.


10.CIT vs. O Abdul Razak (2011) 337 ITR 350 (Kerala).

In this case, where the assessee travelled abroad on a transit visa, business visa and tourist visa, it was held that the entire period of travel abroad could not be considered as ‘going abroad for the purposes of employment’.11  It was also held that multiple departures from India by the individual in a previous year could also qualify under this clause. The provision does not require him to leave India and be stationed outside the country as the section nowhere specifies that the assessee should leave India permanently to reside outside the country.


11.K Sambasiva Rao vs. ITO (2014) 42 taxmann.com 115 (Hyderabad Trib.).

The requirement under clause (a) of Explanation 1 is not leaving India for employment, but it is leaving India for the purposes of employment outside India. For the Explanation, an individual need not be an unemployed person who leaves India for employment outside India. The relaxation under this clause is also available to an individual already employed and is leaving India on deputation.12


12.British Gas India P Ltd, In re (2006) 285 ITR 218 (AAR).

2.3.2 Citizen or person of Indian origin on a visit to India [Explanation 1(b)]

Explanation 1(b) to section 6(1)(c) provides for a concession for Indian citizens or persons of Indian origin who, being outside India, come on a visit to India in any previous year. In such cases, the prescribed period of 60 days in India to be considered a resident under clause (1)(c) is relaxed to 182 days. The objective behind this relaxation is to enable non-resident Indians who have made investments in India and who find it necessary to visit India frequently and stay here for the proper supervision and control of their investments to retain their status as non-resident.13


13.CBDT Circular No. 684 dated 10th June, 1994.

The expression “being outside India’ has been examined judicially. Where the assessee has been a non-resident for many years, and during the years, he had far greater business engagements abroad than in India, it cannot be assumed that he did not come from outside of India.14 It is not justified to look at the assessee’s economic and legal connection with India (i.e. his centre of vital interest being in India) to assume that he did not come from outside of India.15 When the assessee had migrated to a foreign country and pursued his higher education abroad, engaged in various business activities, set up his business interests and continued to live there with his family, his travels to India would be in the nature of visits, unless contrary brought on record.16


14.Suresh Nanda vs. Asstt. CIT [2012] 23 taxmann.com 386/53 SOT 322 (Delhi).
15.Addl Director of Income-tax vs. Sudhir Choudhrie (2017) 88 taxmann.com 570 (Delhi-Trib).
16.Pr. Commissioner of Income-tax vs. Binod Kumar Singh (2019) 107 taxmann.com 27 (Bombay).

The expression ‘visit’ is not limited to a singular visit as contended by the Revenue but includes multiple visits.17 The return to India by an individual on termination of his overseas employment is not a visit, and the relaxation in Explanation 1(b) is not available.18


17.Asstt. Commissioner of Income-tax vs. Sudhir Sareen (2015) 57 taxmann.com 121 (Delhi-Trib).
18.V. K. Ratti vs. Commissioner of Income-tax (2008) 299 ITR 295 (P&H); Manoj Kumar Reddy vs. Income-tax Officer (2009) 34 SOT 180 (Bang); Smita Anand, In Re. (2014) 362 ITR 38 (AAR).

In that case,19 the assessee working abroad visited for 18 days during the year. Later that year, on termination of his employment, he returned to India and spent 59 days in the country. The Tribunal held that a visit to India does not mean that if he comes for one visit, then Explanation (b) to section 6(1) will be applicable irrespective of the fact that he came permanently to India during that previous year. Looking at the legislative intention, the status of the assessee cannot be taken as resident on the ground that he came on a visit to India and, therefore, the period of 60 days, as mentioned in 6(1)(c) should be extended to 182 days by ignoring his subsequent visit to India after completing the deputation outside India. The alternative contention of the assessee that, for the purpose of computing 60 days as mentioned in section 6(1)(c), the period of visit to India would be excluded was accepted.


19.Manoj Kumar Reddy vs. Income-tax Officer (2009) 34 SOT 180 (Bang); affirmed in [2011] 12 taxmann.com 326 (Karnataka)

2.3.3 Limiting the relaxation [Explanation 1(b)]

An amendment was brought in by the Finance Act 2020 (effective from A.Y. 2021-22) to counter instances where individuals who actually carry out substantial economic activities from India manage their period of stay in India to remain a non-resident in perpetuity and not be required to declare their global income in India. The amendment restricts the relaxation in clause (b) in Explanation 1.

When a citizen or a person of Indian origin outside India who comes on a visit to India has a total income other than the income from foreign sources exceeding Rs.15 lakhs during the previous year, the time period in India in section 6(1)(c) of 60 days is substituted with 120 days as against 182 days available before this amendment. The expression income from foreign sources is defined in Explanation to Section 6.

An individual who becomes a resident under this provision shall be not ordinarily resident under clause (6). The provision expands the scope of residence under the Act. It could result in cases of dual residence needing the application of the tie-breaker rule under the relevant tax treaty.

2.4 Deemed Resident [section 6(1A)]

A new category of deemed resident for individuals was introduced with effect from 1st April, 2021 to catch within the Indian tax net, Indian citizens who are “stateless persons”, that is, those who arrange their affairs in such a fashion that they are not liable to tax in any country during a previous year. This arrangement is typically employed by high net-worth individuals to avoid paying taxes to any country / jurisdiction on income they earn. A citizen is as defined by the Citizenship Act 1955.

Under this clause, an individual who is a citizen of India, having a total income other than income from foreign sources exceeding Rs.15 lakhs during the previous year shall be deemed to be resident in India in that previous year if he is not liable to tax in any other country or territory by reason of his domicile or residence or any other criteria of similar nature.20 This clause, an additional rule of residence for individuals, shall not apply if the individual is resident under clause (1). Clause (1A) applies only where an Indian citizen is liable to tax by reason of the various connecting factors listed in the clause.


20.The expression “income from foreign sources” is defined in Explanation to section 6 and discussed under para 3.3.3 above.

2.4.1 Liable to tax

The meaning of the term “liable to tax” in the context of treaties has been the subject of several court rulings.21 Some rulings have found that a person is liable to tax even if there is no income-tax law in force for the time being if a potential liability to tax exists, irrespective of whether or not such a right is exercised.22 To nullify such interpretation, a definition in section 2(29A) has been inserted by the Finance Act 2021 with effect from 1st April, 2021. The provision defines ‘liable to tax’ in relation to a person and with reference to a country to mean that there is an income-tax liability on such a person under an existing income-tax law in force of that country. The definition includes a person liable to tax even if he is subsequently exempted from such liability. Primarily, there should be an existing tax law in the other country imposing a tax liability on a person to be ‘liable to tax’.


21.Union of India vs. Azadi BachaoAndolan (2003) 263 ITR 706 (SC);
22.ADIT vs. Greem Emirate Shipping & Travels (2006) 100 ITD 203 (Mum).

2.4.2 Connecting factors

For clause (1A) to apply, the individual should not be liable to tax in any other country by reason of the connecting factors listed. The clause is worded similarly to the treaty definition of residence: both refer to the person being ‘liable to tax’, which must be by reason of the specified connecting factors. Article 4(1) of the OECD and UN Models refers to domicile, residence, place of management or any other criterion of similar nature while in section 6(1A), connecting factors are residence, domicile or any other similar criteria.

There is a causal relationship between the listed factors and the extent of taxability that is required for the factors to become connecting factors. The OECD Commentary describes this condition of being liable to tax by reason of certain connecting factors as a comprehensive liability to tax – full tax liability – based on the taxpayers’ personal attachment to the State concerned (the “State of residence”). What is necessary to qualify as a resident of a Contracting State is that the taxation of income in that State is because of one of these factors and not merely because income arises therein. This interpretation can be validly extended to residence under clause (1A).

The challenge to establish that the income tax that a person is liable in a foreign jurisdiction is by reason of domicile, residence or similar connecting factors is demonstrated by the Chiron Behring ruling.23 In that case, the Tribunal held that a German KG (fiscally transparent partnership)24 was a resident of Germany and entitled to the India-Germany treaty since it was liable to trade tax in Germany (a tax covered under the India-Germany Treaty). Considering that the German trade tax is a non-personal tax levied on standing trade or business to the extent that it is run in Germany,25 an examination of whether the KG was liable to that tax by reason of domicile, residence or other connecting factors was required to determine treaty residence which was not undertaken.


23.ADIT vs. Chiron Behring GmbH & Co[2008] 24 SOT 278 (Mum), affirmed in DIT vs. Chiron Behring GmbH & Co. (2013) 29 taxmann.com 199 (Bom).
24.A fiscally transparent partnership is a pass-through with its partners being liable to pay tax on its income.
25.Gewerbesteuergesetz (Trade Tax Law, GewStG), Sec. 2(1).

In conclusion, it is not enough that the assessee is liable to income taxation in the concerned country or territory for clause (1A) not to apply: an examination of that tax law is necessary to ascertain whether he is liable by reason of the connecting factors listed in section 6(1A).

2.5 Income from foreign sources

The expression ‘income from foreign sources’ is found in the amendments to section 6 of the Act by the Finance Act 2020. The expression is relevant to apply the lower number of days in India in Explanation 1(b) to section 6(1)(c) in respect of citizens and persons of Indian origin being outside India coming on a visit to India and to the deemed residence provisions under section 6(1A). Explanation to section 6 defines income from foreign sources to mean income which accrues or arises outside India (except income derived from a business controlled in or a profession set up in India) and which is not deemed to accrue or arise in India.26


26.This expression is relevant for the amendment to clause (b) of Explanation 1 to section 6(1) as well as the deemed resident provisions inserted vide section 6(1A) [see para for discussion on this clause].

Since the words used in Explanation 1(b) as well as clause (1A) are “having total income, other than the income from foreign sources exceeding Rs.15 lakhs”, total income as defined in section 2(45) and its scope in section 5 is relevant. Notably, income accruing or arising outside India and received in India is not included in the definition of income from foreign sources. Consequently, such income within the scope of the total income of a non-resident is not to be excluded from the threshold of Rs.15 lakhs.

Total income is computed net of exemptions, set off typically. A question arises whether income exempted if the assessee is a non-resident is to be excluded while computing the threshold of Rs.15 lakhs. The provisions are ambiguously worded. A harmonious interpretation could be that since the objective for determining the threshold is to ascertain whether an individual who is otherwise a non-resident is to be treated as a resident, such exemptions should not be considered, and the items of income should be included. This interpretation avoids a circular reference which arises otherwise. A similar question arises regarding items of income excluded due to treaty provisions. Since the residence under the Act is the foundational basis for ascertaining residence under a treaty, items of income excluded due to treaty provisions are not to be excluded for the same reason.

3. RESIDENT AND NOT ORDINARILY RESIDENT

“Not ordinarily resident” is a subcategory  of residence available to individuals and HUFs. The scope of his total income is the same as that of resident assesses but excludes income accruing or arising outside India unless it is derived from a business controlled in or profession set up in India.

Under this provision, an individual should be a non-resident for nine years out of ten preceding years or during his seven ‘previous years’ preceding the previous year in question, and he was present in India in the aggregate for seven hundred and twenty-nine days or less [sec. 6(6)(a)]. An individual will be “not ordinarily resident” if he fulfils either of the two conditions. The Mumbai Tribunal, in this case,27 rejected the Revenue’s stand that the conditions in section 6(6)(a) are cumulative while interpreting section 6(6)(a) before its substitution by the Finance Act, 2003 based on the well-settled literal rule of interpretation as per which the language of the section should be construed as it exists. The Tribunal’s conclusion that when one of these two conditions, as laid down in section 6(6)(a) is fulfilled, the resident status is that of not ordinarily resident, should extend to the substituted provisions based on their text.


27.Satish Dattatray Dhawade vs. ITO (2009) 123 TTJ 797 (Mumbai).

A citizen of India or a PIO who becomes a resident for being in India for more than 120 days due to the provision inserted in clause (b) of Explanation 1 (vide Finance Act 2020) has the status of not ordinarily resident [sec. 6(6)(c)]. Likewise, a person who is deemed resident under section 6(1A) is not ordinarily resident [sec. 6(6)(d)]

4. RESIDENCE UNDER THE ACT – RELEVANCE FOR TREATIES28

Double tax avoidance agreements entered by India are bilateral agreements modelled on the OECD Model Convention and the United Nations Model Convention. To access these benefits, the person should be a resident of one or either of the Contracting States (i.e., parties to the double tax avoidance agreement) (Article 1 of the OECD / UN Model). Article 4 of the OECD Model states as follows: “For the purposes of this Convention, the term “resident of a Contracting State” means any person who, under the laws of that State, is liable to tax therein by reason of his domicile, residence, place of management or any other criterion of a similar nature, ………” Thus, residential status under the domestic tax law is relevant to accessing a double tax avoidance agreement and being eligible for the reliefs available.


28.The topic is covered only briefly here to give the reader a perspective of how residence under the Act can impact treaty application. A separate article dealing with treaty rules on residence is scheduled for publication.

5. RESIDENCE UNDER THE ACT VERSUS TAX TREATIES

In treaty cases where the person is a resident of both Contracting States concerning a treaty between them, the dual treaty residence is resolved through tie-breaker rules, and that person is deemed a resident of one of the States. A question arises whether a person deemed to be a resident of the other Contracting State under a treaty is also to be treated as a non-resident for the Act, and consequently, his income and taxes are to be computed as applicable to non-residents. This question and the discussion below are relevant for individuals and other persons.

The question gains significance since there are variations in computing income and its taxation for non-residents compared to residents. Such variations are found under several sections of the Act apart from the scope of total income under section 5. Some instances are the computing capital gains on transfer of shares in foreign currency and without indexation (section 48), tax rate on unlisted equity shares (sec.112(1)), computing basic exemption of Rs.1 lakh from short-term and long-term capital gains on listed shares (sections 111A and 112A), flat concessional tax rate on gross dividends, interest, royalty and fees for technical services without deductions, different slabs of maximum amount not chargeable to tax for senior citizens in the First Schedule to Finance Acts. Some of these provisions are more beneficial to residents, some to non-residents, and some depend on the facts of the case.

The argument for adopting treaty residence for residential status under the Act is that under section 90, more beneficial treaty provisions have to be adopted in preference to the provisions under the Act. However, such treatment is debatable for several reasons, as discussed below:

Firstly, the text of the provisions under the Act and in Article 4 dealing with residence in tax treaties militate against such substitution. Article 4 on residence states that such determination is “for the purposes of the Convention” and not generally. Section 6 of the Act is also “for the purposes of the Act” when a person is resident, non-resident or not ordinarily resident.

The literature on treaty residence is also overwhelmingly against substituting residential status under domestic law with treaty residence. Klaus Vogel states that since the person is “deemed” to be non-resident only in regard to the application of the treaty’s distributive rules, he continues to be generally subject to those taxations and procedures of the “losing State” which apply to taxpayers who are residents thereof.29According to Phillip Baker,30Article 4 determines the residence of a person for the purposes of the Convention and does not directly affect the domestic law status of that person. He refers to a situation of a person who is a resident of both States A and B, under their respective domestic laws. Even though under the tie-breaker rules of the A-B Treaty, he is a resident of State A for the purposes of the Convention, he does not cease to be a resident of State B under its domestic law.


29.Klaus Vogel on Double Tax Conventions, Third Edn, Article 4, m.no. 13-13a.
30.Phillip Baker on Double Tax Conventions, October, 2010 Sweet & Maxwell, Editor's Commentary on Article 4, para 4B.02.

Courts have held that section 4 (charging provisions) and 5 (scope provisions) of the Act are made subject to the provisions of the Act, which means that they are subject to the provisions of section 90 of the Act and, by necessary implication, they are subject to the terms of tax treaties notified under section 90.31 However, section 6, containing the provisions for determining residence under the Act, is for the purposes of the Act and is not subject to section 90 and, by implication, treaty provisions.


31.CIT vs. Visakhapatnam Port Trust (1983) 16 Taxman 72 (Andhra Pradesh) approved in Union of India vs. Azadi Bachao Andolan (2003) 132 Taxman 373 (SC).

The mandate in section 90(2) to adopt the provisions of the Act to the extent they are more beneficial to the assessee than the treaty provisions may, at first glance, enable the substitution of treaty residence as the residential status under the Act but deserves to be rejected. The sub-section envisages a comparison of the charge of income, its computation and the tax rate under the Act to be compared with the same criteria under the relevant treaty qua a source of income.32 The charge, computation and tax rate qua an income source under the Act, and the distributive rules in the relevant treaty follow from the residential status of the person under the Act and the treaty, respectively. Though section 90(2) refers to its application in relation to an assessee to whom a treaty applies, the application is not at an aggregate level of tax outcome qua the assessee.

The determination of treaty residence requires the person to be liable to tax in a Contracting State by reason of connecting factors (which includes residence under its tax law). Residence under the Act is a prerequisite for determining treaty residence. The objective of determining treaty residence is to enable the operation of distributive articles, which allocate taxing rights to one or the other Contracting State based on such residence, as well as to ascertain the State that will grant relief for eliminating double taxation.

Further, tie-breaker rules to determine treaty residence are to be applied to the facts during the period when the taxpayer’s residence affects tax liability, which may be less than an entire taxable period.33 The substitution with treaty residence of a person for computing his income and tax cannot be for a part of the previous year where there is split residency for treaty purposes.

Lastly, income-tax return forms and the guidelines issued by the CBDT also do not support substituting the residence under the Act with treaty residence. The forms and the guidelines require only residential status under the Act to be declared by the assessee. None of the return forms require assessees to fill in his treaty residence.

To conclude, a person’s residential status under the Act does not change due to the determination of treaty residence unless a provision in the Act deems such treatment like in some countries.34


32.IBM World Trade Corpn vs. DDIT (2012) 20 taxmann.com 728 (Bang.)
33.OECD Model (2017 Update) Commentary on Article 4, para 10.
34.For example, Canada and the United Kingdom have provided in their domestic law that where a person is resident of another state for the purposes of a tax treaty, the person will be regarded as non-resident for the purposes of domestic law also.

6. CONCLUSION

Residence is one of the essential concepts in determining the scope of taxation of a person. The term affects the scope of taxation under the Act as well as the ability of a taxpayer to access a double tax avoidance agreement. Rules for residence for an individual depend on his physical presence in India. The tests prescribed in section 6(1) and the relaxations available for citizens and persons of Indian origin form the canvas for determining residence under the Act. A long list of judicial precedents must be kept in sight while determining the residential status under the Act.

Newer amendments to the residence rules by limiting the concession available to citizens and persons of Indian origin on visits to India must also be considered. A deemed residential status for Indian citizens who are not liable to comprehensive or full tax liability in any other country brings to the fore the importance of understanding foreign tax laws. It also throws up interpretative challenges for the practitioner.

The meaning of residence under tax treaties necessarily refers to the meaning under domestic law, but they serve different purposes and operate independently in their own fields. It is debatable whether a person who is a treaty non-resident can be treated as a non-resident for the purposes of the Act and the tax consequences following such treatment.

Implications on NRs turning RNORs*
Adverse to the assessee Beneficial to the assessee
1.   Limited increase in the scope of income – income from business controlled or profession set-up in India.

2.   Concessional tax rates under Chapter XIIA and certain other exemptions are available only to  NR and not to RNOR.

3.   Can lead to the presumption that control and management of a firm, HUF, company, etc., in India.

4.   Overall reduction in years of NOR relief to Returning NRIs.

5.   Clearly within the tax compliance framework, including TDS obligations, tax return filing, etc.

1.   Slab rates available for senior citizens, etc., would be available to NORs.

2.   TDS Deduction is not as per Section 195 lowering rates in most cases.

3.   Eligible to claim Foreign Tax Credit in India for doubly taxed incomes.

4.   Can avail concessional tax rates under the DTAA where India is a source country and individual tie-breaks in favour of foreign jurisdiction.

5.   Relaxation on reporting requirements (may not be required to file detailed ITR 2 as per extant provisions).

 

Neutral Points
1.   No Obligation to report Foreign Assets.

2.   Assessee continues to be treated as NR for determining the AE relationship for transfer pricing regulations and for the purposes of Section 93.

3.   It would not impact FEMA’s non-residential status automatically.

(*contributed by CA Kartik Badiani and CA Rutvik Sanghvi; NR – Non-resident, RNOR – Resident and Not Ordinarily Resident).

Revisiting Non-Discrimination Clause of The India – Us Tax Treaty in Light of India’s Corporate Tax Rate Reduction

Tax complexity itself is a kind of tax – Max Baucus, US Senator

This Article seeks to juxtapose the principle of non-discrimination with Article 14(2) of the India – US tax treaty and analyse its fallout. The combined reading of the two provides for the applicability of different tax rates imposed on a permanent establishment of a US corporation vis-à-vis a domestic corporation in India. However, the treaty posits that the tax rate differential shall not exceed fifteen percentage points. In this Article, the author argues that with the reduction of the corporate tax rate in India (albeit through an election), the concession of fifteen percentage points provided by the United States stands breached. Sequitur, the full force of principles of non – discrimination may be applicable notwithstanding the carve-out of Article 14(2).

I. INTRODUCTION

On September 20, 2019 the Government of India enacted a significant reduction of the corporate income tax rate for domestic corporations. On the statute, it was introduced as an election where the domestic corporations could elect to be taxed at 22 per cent1 which was earlier either 25 per cent or 30 per cent2 effective taxable year beginning April 1, 2019. On making this election, the corporation would forgo majority of the tax exemptions and incentives. If the domestic corporation is engaged in manufacturing activity, subject to certain conditions like company formation and commencement of operations, then it could elect a tax rate of 15 percent3. On the other hand, tax rate for a foreign corporation or a Permanent Establishment (“PE”) of a foreign corporation was left unaltered at 40 per cent4.

Article 26 of the India-US Tax Treaty (“Treaty”) enlists the principle of non-discrimination which enjoins nationals of a Contracting State to not be subjected to any taxation that is ‘other or more burdensome’ or ‘less favourable’ than that taxation of nationals in ‘same circumstances’ in the other Contracting State. Article 26(5) of the Treaty creates a carve-out from the general principle in terms of Article 14(2) – Permanent Establishment Tax. To give some context, Article 14 concerns itself with the imposition of a permanent establishment or branch tax5. Article 14(2) while deviating from the general principle of non-discrimination provides for the taxation of United States resident at a tax rate higher than applicable to domestic companies in India. However, the Article posits that the difference in tax rate shall not exceed the ‘existing’ difference of 15 percentage points. The Article therefore, in a certain way, creates a positive obligation on the Contracting State, India, to adhere the domestic tax rates in line with the treaty obligations. Curiously, this is an obligation on the Contracting State and not the taxpayers who are usually stuck in fulfilling conditions for treaty benefits!


1    Effective tax rate of 25.17% including peak surcharge and cess.
2    Effective tax rate of 34.94% including peak surcharge and cess.
3    Effective tax rate of 17.16% including peak surcharge and cess.
4    Effective tax rate of 43.68% including peak surcharge and cess.
5    See, Tech. Ex. to the Convention between United States and India (1991).

This article concerns itself with the above treaty obligation and the gamut of questions that arise therefrom. However, in absence of any previous steep tax rate reduction, this obligation has not been extensively examined by the Judiciary. Nonetheless, an attempt is made to put India’s corporate tax rate reduction in context with the non-discrimination principles and try to shed some perspective on whether the obligation is breached, and if so, the effect of such breach.

II. CONTEXTUALIZING DOMESTIC TAX REGIME WITH TREATY OBLIGATIONS

A. Headline Rate v. Concessional Tax Rate as a base to measure the 15 per cent differential

The subject of how much tax corporations pay in India is a complicated one. Over the last decade, the statutory rate or the headline has fallen down from 35 per cent to 30 per cent and in cases where a certain turnover threshold is met to 25%. Sections 115BAA and 115BAB of the (Indian) Income-tax Act, 1961 (“Act”) accord an election to the taxpayer to elect the tax rate at 22 per cent or 15 per cent respectively for domestic corporations and domestic corporations engaged in manufacturing activities (collectively, “concessional tax regime”). This concessional rate is further increased by a surcharge of 10 per cent and a cess of 4 per cent and the concessional tax regime is applicable from the financial year 2019 – 2020. Once this election is made it cannot be revoked. Further, the corporations opting for the election are exempt from tax liability under Minimum Alternate Tax (“MAT”). The downside, as it were, to this election is forgoing majority of the tax incentives and exemptions. Some of these exemptions may be claimed by foreign corporations too (through their PE’s). The domestic corporations, therefore, undertake a cost-benefit analysis and either elect to be taxed at a concessional rate or maintain status-quo in light of their existing exemptions and incentives (which reduce their effective tax rate below the concessional rate).

The first question which arises in the calculation of the differential tax rate of 15 per cent is whether such rate would be inclusive of surcharge and cess. While generally for this purpose, the definition of ‘taxes covered’ under Article 2 of the Treaty would be inquired into – implying a rate inclusive of surcharge and cess should be considered. However, it is a well-established principle of law in regard to the interpretation of agreements that such interpretation adopted should effectuate the intention of the parties and not defeat it. The term used in Article 14(2) consciously puts an upper cap on percentage points caveating it to the ‘existing’ differential, making historical analysis of the tax rate at the time of signing of the Treaty imperative.

For the assessment year 1990-91 pertaining to the taxable year 1989-90 the rate of tax on the domestic companies was 50 percentage points and the surcharge was payable at the rate of 8 percentage points. The rate of tax in the case of companies other than domestic companies was 65 percentage points. The Treaty takes note of the difference in the tax rates of domestic companies and foreign companies at 15 percentage points. Therefore, the Treaty in measuring the tax rates disregards the surcharge and cess6.


6    The rate of tax referred to in the agreement is the rate of tax chargeable under Article 270 of the Constitution of India. The surcharge is the additional tax, which was not intended to be taken into account for the purpose of placing a limit in the levy of tax in the case of foreign companies, Bank of America v. Deputy Commissioner of Income-tax, [2001] 78 ITD 1 (Mumbai). This view in the context of India – US DTAA/ Treaty has been reiterated by the High Court of Uttarakhand in CIT v. Arthusa Offshore Company, ITA 46 of 2007 decision dated 31.03.2008.

Having analysed the above, the logical question that follows is whether a concessional regime may be taken as a base for measuring the differential? Because only if the concessional regime can be taken as a base would the argument of breach of treaty obligation survive. Otherwise, the headline rate in the Act still remains 30%/ 25% and in either case, 15% rate differential would not get breached in such a scenario.

To put it in perspective, under the terms of the Act, the Assessing Officer is mandated to carry out an assessment of the taxpayer in accordance with the provisions of the Act. The Treaty has statutory recognition under section 90 of the Act. Section 4 of the Act, which is a charging provision, provides that where a Central Act enacts that income-tax it shall be charged at that rate or those rates in accordance with and subject to the provisions of the Act. A concessional tax regime forms part of the Act and as such if elected the charging provision provides for levying tax at a specified (concessional) rate.

However, because the concessional tax regime is not available to foreign companies, they are unable to elect such a rate. This asymmetry merits consideration in light of the principle of ‘quando aliquid prohibetur ex directo, prohibetur et per obliquum’, which means ‘you cannot do indirectly what you cannot do directly’. Accordingly, such an approach, on the first principles, would be unsound in as much as it is well settled in law that the treaty partners ought to observe their treaties, including their tax treaties, in good faith.

B. Invoking Article 26 of the Treaty to provide parity to the rate of tax applicable to US companies

A non-discrimination clause in a tax treaty essentially prevents any discrimination afforded between two taxpayers on the basis of country of origin. There may be various types of protection against discrimination typically provided in tax treaties, that is, inter alia, nationality-based non-discrimination, situs-based non-discrimination, or ownership-based discrimination.

The Pune Bench of the Tribunal in the case of Automated Securities Clearance Inc. v. ITO7, has observed that principles of non-discrimination clause would be available in case of a non-resident in case the different treatment meted out by the other state is considered as unreasonable, arbitrary or irrelevant. However, the rigors laid down in Automated Securities (supra) were overruled by a Special Bench verdict in the case of Rajeev Sureshbhai v. ACIT8. The Tribunal relied upon the following principles to settle the controversy:

  • For the application of Article 26(2) of the Treaty, it is sufficient to show that the non-resident taxpayer is engaged in the same business and is treated less favourably, the different circumstances in which the business is being performed are irrelevant;
  • There is no scope for “reasonable” discrimination and the concept is alien to treaty law;
  • If certain exemptions and deductions are available only for Indian taxpayers and not available for non-resident taxpayers, the same is to be construed as a less favourable treatment.

Flowing from above, the principle of pacta sunt servanda9, disallowing a favourable taxation regime to companies situated in ‘same circumstance’10 may ipso facto be a ground for invocation of the non-discrimination principles11 justifying the need of a carve-out under Article 14(2) in the first place. While there is a carve-out in Article 26(5) of the Treaty, for the rate of tax, the general principles of non-discrimination in Article 26 of the Treaty are still in force. The application of general principles is not estopped but is only subject to the carve-out. Thus, principles under Article 26(1) and (2) still apply. This implies that the Contracting State, i.e., India is still obliged to provide taxation which is not ‘other or burdensome’ or ‘less favourable’ to the residents of the United States. Discrimination is to be seen not only from the viewpoint of Indian law but what the two sovereigns agreed on at the time of signing of the Treaty. This includes ‘indirect’ discrimination12, which appears to be precisely the fallout of adopting a concessional tax regime13 only for domestic taxpayers; putting the residents of the other Contracting State at a significant disadvantage. This prima facie seems to violate the non-discrimination provisions of the Treaty notwithstanding the carve-out.


7    118 TTJ 619

8    129 ITD 145 (Ahd. Trib. – SB)

9    Supreme Court of India recognized the customary status of the Vienna Convention despite India not having ratified the convention yet. The courts in India have been leaning towards the principles of pacta sunt servanda and general rules of interpretation of a treaty, as contained in the Vienna convention to embrace good faith compliance. See, Ram Jethmalani v. Union of India, (2011) 9 SCC 751

10    Non-Indian banks carry out the same activity as Indian banks, ABN Amro Bank N.V v. JCIT, ITA 692/Cal./2000

11    OECD MTC 2017 C-24, para 44, 45 – “As such measures are in furtherance of objectives directly related to the economic activity proper of the State concerned, it is right that the benefit of them should be extended to permanent establishments of enterprises of another State which has a double taxation convention with the first embodying the provisions of Article 24, once they have been accorded the right to engage in business activity in that State, either under its legislation or under an international agreement (treaties of commerce, establishment conventions, etc.) concluded between the two States….It should, however, be noted that although non-resident enterprises are entitled to claim these tax advantages in the State concerned, they must fulfil the same conditions and requirements as resident enterprises.”

12    Id., para 1, 56 “When the taxation of profits made by companies which are residents of a given State is calculated according to a progressive scale of rates, such a scale should, in principle, be applied to permanent establishments situated in that State”

13    Id., para 15 Subject to the foregoing observation, the words “...shall not be subjected...to any taxation or any requirement connected therewith which is other or more burdensome ...” mean that when a tax is imposed on nationals and foreigners in the same circumstances, it must be in the same form as regards both the basis of charge and the method of assessment, its rate must be the same and, finally, the formalities connected with the taxation (returns, payment, prescribed times, etc.) must not be more onerous for foreigners than for nationals.

C. Explanation 1 to section 90 of the Act – whether valid a defence?

Explanation 1 to section 90 of the Act inserted in 2001 with retrospective effect from April 1, 1962, envisages that rate of tax cannot by itself imply less favourable (term used by the Act, akin non-discrimination in the Treaty) treatment to a non-resident. Should this explanation be accepted it would amount to a treaty override. As originally inserted the Explanation acknowledged its existence owing to the difference in the tax treatment of a domestic corporation (in that the domestic corporations in addition to corporate tax pay dividend distribution tax) vis-à-vis a foreign corporation (which only pays corporate tax). Since then the position has changed and the Explanation has been amended. Now it does not mention any ‘reason’ for such treatment.

OECD in its 1989 report on treaty override specifically states that domestic legislation (whether inserted before or after the commencement of the Treaty) in no way affects the continuing international obligation of a State unless it has been specifically denounced14. In this context, the Hon’ble Supreme Court of India in the famous Azadi Bachao15 case held that that a Treaty overrides the provisions of the Act in the matter of ascertainment of income and its chargeability to tax, to the extent of inconsistency with the terms of the Treaty. This view has been reiterated by the judiciary multiple times16. The reasoning behind this principle is to curtail amendments to an international obligation through unilateral measures – something that we have been grappling with in the digital space!


14    See, OECD Report of 1989 on Tax treaty override, para 12

15    Azadi Bachao Andolan v. Union of India, (2003) 184 CTR (SC) 450

16    By virtue of Clause 24(2) of the said agreement and the statutory recognition thereof in section 90(2) of the Act, the permanent establishment of a Japanese entity in India could not have been charged tax at a rate higher than comparable Indian assessees carrying on the same activities. Bank of Tokyo Mitsubishi Ltd. v. Commissioner of Income-tax [2019] 108 taxmann.com 242 (Calcutta), para 5

Pertinently, the Andhra Pradesh High Court in the case of Sanofi Pasteur Holding SA v. Department of Revenue, Ministry of Finance: 354 ITR 316 (AP) gave due consideration to the question whether a retrospective amendment in the domestic law could be considered in interpretation of the tax treaty. The Court while holding tax treaty supremacy referred to the general rule of interpretation postulated in the Vienna Convention and observed as under:

“…Treaty-making power is integral to the exercise of sovereign legislative or executive will according to the relevant constitutional scheme, in all jurisdictions. Once the power is exercised by the authorized agency (the legislature or the executive, as the case may be) and a treaty entered into, provisions of such treaty must receive a good faith interpretation by every authorized interpreter, whether an executive agency, a quasi-judicial authority or the judicial branch. The supremacy of tax treaty provisions duly operationalised within a contracting State [which may (theoretically) be disempowered only by explicit and appropriately authorized legislative exertions], cannot be eclipsed by employment of an interpretive stratagem, on misconceived and ambiguous assumption of revenue interests of one of the contracting States. Where the operative treaty’s provisions are unambiguous and their legal meaning clearly discernible and lend to an uncontestable comprehension on good faith interpretation, no further interpretive exertion is authorized; for that would tantamount to usurpation (by an unauthorized body – the interpreting Agency/Tribunal), intrusion and unlawful encroachment into the domain of treaty-making under Article 253 (in the Indian context), an arena off-limits to the judicial branch; and when the organic Charter accommodates no participatory role, for either the judicial branch or the executors of the Act.”

On the other hand, it may be argued at the instance of the Revenue that Explanation 1 to section 90 is a specific provision aimed at providing different tax regimes for domestic companies vis-à-vis foreign companies. In Chohung Bank17, the Tribunal accepted that there is no conflict between Explanation 1 to section 90 and the India-Korea Tax Treaty. The Court inter-alia observed that the Explanation confirms the proposition that rates of taxes, which are provided under the Finance Act, as opposed to the Act, are out of the purview of the general rule under the Act – provisions to the extent they are more beneficial shall apply to a taxpayer.


17    12 SOT 301 (Mum – Trib.) relying on previous Tribunal order in ITA No. 4948/Mum/05

However, it may not be out of place to mention that the annual tax rates, which are decided as per section 4 of the Act, provide that where a Central Act enacts that income-tax it shall be charged at that rate or those rates in accordance with and subject to the provisions of the Act. Thus, the rates of taxes are subject to the provisions of the Act.

In an AAR Ruling Transworld Garnet Co. Ltd., In Re18 it was observed that terms “taxation” and “tax” are not interchangeable. The AAR went on to observe that the object clause of every agreement uses the expression “taxation” and “tax” where the purpose is stated to be “avoidance of double taxation and prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income or wealth”. Further, drawing contradistinction between the two expressions, the AAR held that where the rate of tax is the focus, the language used is “tax so charged shall not exceed”. The discrimination against taxation, therefore, means the procedures by which tax is imposed. While I may not entirely agree with the said proposition, it would still aid the taxpayer since Article 14(2) of the Treaty specifically uses the term “tax rate”.

In Sampath Iyengar’s Law of Income Tax19, the learned author has enunciated that giving effect to Explanation 1 contained in section 90 of the Act, would tantamount to a breach of the non-discrimination clause where the tax treaties themselves mention the differential tax rates. The author has observed:

“…This is a live issue, since a mere provision in domestic law will hardly help without such clarification in the anti-discrimination clause in the Agreement, where India has such an agreement. The solution lies in incorporating this understanding to be explicitly made as part of the Agreement to avoid such controversy. In other words, the Agreement, should itself indicate, whether discrimination is only with reference to nationality or otherwise and whether the differential rate of tax on residents would construe discrimination.”


18. 333 ITR 1
19. 12 Edn. at page 8562

It may further be apposite to state that in the context of discrimination on account of rate of tax, tax treaties signed by India with certain countries such as the UK, Germany, Canada, Russia etc. specifically permit taxation of PE at a rate higher than the rate applicable to domestic companies. In certain tax treaties, however, the tax treaties themselves provide an upper limit/ place a cap on the tax rate. Refer Annexure for the relevant Articles of the respective tax treaties.

Thus, where the Treaty itself acknowledges that the tax rate differential shall not exceed 15 percentage points, following the precedents as laid down by the Supreme Court, the taxpayer has a good case to defend that Explanation 1 shall not override the provisions of the Treaty20. Good faith interpretation as enunciated by VCLT necessitates the treaty provisions to be good law.

D. Prescribed Arrangement under section 2(22A) of the Act – an open question

The Mumbai Bench of the Tribunal in the case of ITO v. Decca Survey Overseas Ltd21 had observed that in absence of a notified “prescribed arrangement” as provided under section 2(22A) of the Act, Explanation 1 to section 90 would not come in the way for the non-resident companies to claim tax rates equal to the resident companies. Thereafter, Rule 27 of the (Indian) Income-tax Rules, 1962 (“the Rules”) was inserted.


20    The priority of two provisions of the same rank can be achieved by the interpretation rules of lex specialis derogate legi generali and lex generalis posterior non-derogat legi speciali priori. The tax treaty provision is seen as the more special provision.

21    ITA No. 3604/Bom/94 dated 27.02.2004

Rule 27 has been reproduced below for easy reference:

“Prescribed arrangements for declaration and payment of dividends within India.

27. The arrangements referred to in sections 194 and 236 to be made by a company for the declaration and payment of dividends (including dividends on preference shares) within India shall be as follows:

(1) The share register of the company for all shareholders shall be regularly maintained at its principal place of business within India, in respect of any assessment year from a date not later than the 1st day of April of such year.

(2) The general meeting for passing the accounts of the previous year relevant to the assessment year and for declaring any dividends in respect thereof shall be held only at a place within India.

(3) The dividends declared, if any, shall be payable only within India to all shareholders.”

The same has been relied upon by the Mumbai Bench of the Tribunal in the case of Shinhan Bank v. DCIT22 to hold that a foreign company could carry out the “prescribed arrangement” to be eligible to be classified as a domestic corporation and hence held that there was no discrimination per se in differential rates of tax.

The observation of the Tribunal are as under:

“As a matter of fact, the terminology used, so far as the tax rate for companies is concerned, in the finance Acts is “domestic company” and “a company other than a domestic company?. Under section 2(22A), a domestic company is defined as “an Indian company or any other company, which in respect of its income liable to tax in India makes prescribed arrangements for declaration and payment of dividends within India”, and Section 2(23A), a foreign company is defined as a company “which is not a domestic company” i.e. which has not made prescribed arrangements for declaration and payment of dividends in India. The basis of different tax rates being applied is thus not the situs of fiscal domicile or incorporation but simply the arrangement for making arrangements for the declaration of payment of dividends within India.”

“If a non-resident company can make arrangements for the declaration and payment of dividends, out of income earned in India, in India, that non-resident company will be subjected to the same rate of tax which is levied on the Indian companies. The taxation of the foreign companies at a higher rate therefore at a higher rate vis-à-vis the domestic companies is thus not considered to be discriminatory vis-à-vis the foreign companies. The sharp contrast in the definition of a foreign company under section 2(23A) vis-à-vis the definition of a non-resident company under section 6(3) makes it clear that so far as the charge of tax is concerned, the critical factor is the situs of the control and management of a company, but so far as the rate of tax is concerned, the critical factor is the arrangements for the declaration of dividends out of income earned in India. Clearly, thus, the mere fact that a company which has not made “arrangements for the declaration of dividends out of income earned in India” is charged at a higher rate of tax in India vis-à-vis domestic company, cannot be treated as discrimination on account of the fact that the enterprise belonged to the other Contracting State, i.e. Korea.”

At first glance, the prescribed arrangement does not seem “other or more burdensome” since even domestic companies are required to withhold tax on dividend payments. However, the above reasoning leaves many open questions:

  • The US Company would arguably consolidate its earnings at the US level, it would merit consideration whether the US or any other country of residence of such shareholder grants Foreign Tax Credit (“FTC”) on account of taxes withheld in India.

To elaborate, say a US Company has shareholders which are either US-based or based outside the US, Canada for instance. The US company enters into a prescribed arrangement to withhold taxes on account of dividend payments to its shareholders (qua income derived from India), however would the residence country of the shareholders (Canada in this case) grant FTC to these shareholders on account of taxes withheld in India? Or would the same be in accordance with the Convention between US and Canada (in our illustration). Without the grant of FTC, this arrangement may palpably result in double taxation, which is the first objective, the Tax Treaty is aimed to mitigate!

  • Where the US Company enters into the prescribed arrangement and is classified as a domestic company, Revenue in India may allege that as a domestic company, the US Company is not entitled to the benefits of the Treaty.
  • Since dividend payments are taxable at the level of the shareholder (as opposed to perhaps a dividend distribution tax) is the prescribed arrangement proportionate to the object sought to be achieved? Especially since payment of tax on dividends is a vicarious liability for the US Company.
  • Since Rule 27 would apply regardless of the tax treaty in question, there may be a situation where the corporate law, in the other Contracting State, may restrict moving the share register/ holding a general meeting for passing the accounts, outside that jurisdiction, which is the essence under Rule 27. In that situation, fulfillment of conditions specified in Rule 27 may become an impossibility. Would Rule 27, in that case, be read down?

A similar controversy is pending before the Hon’ble Delhi High Court in the case of Gokwik Commerce Solutions v. DCIT23 wherein the taxpayer has contended that it was a recently incorporated entity and hence could not fulfill the strict conditions, for obtaining lower withholding certificate, specified under Rule 28AA which require the filing of financial statements for four previous years.

E. Effect of breach of the treaty obligation

Tax Treaties do not usually provide for remedies in cases of breach24 since treaties are essentially agreements entered into by sovereign states25. In Sanchez-Llamas v. Oregon,26 the Supreme Court of the United States opined that “where a treaty does not provide a particular remedy, either expressly or implicitly, it is not for the federal courts to impose one on the States through law making of their own.”27. Closer home, in T Rajkumar v. Union of India28, the issue under consideration before the Hon’ble Madras High Court was the constitutional validity of section 94A of the Act and notification and circular issued thereunder, specifying Cyprus as a notified jurisdiction area for the purposes of section 94A of the Act. As per the provisions under section 94A, the executive is empowered to notify any country as a notified jurisdictional area having regard to the other country’s lack of effective exchange of information.

The petitioners in the case, inter alia, argued that basis the doctrine of pacta sunt servanda, the executive could not invoke municipal/ internal law to annul the provisions of a tax treaty. The Court did not entertain the said plea where there was a breach of an obligation from a treaty partner. The Court, inter alia, observed:

“88. But, even if we invoke the rule of Pacta Sunt Servanda contained in Article 26 of the Vienna Convention, on the basis that the same was part of the customary international law, the petitioners would not be better off. This is for the reason that Article 26 of the Vienna Convention obliges both the contracting parties to perform their obligations in good faith. As pointed out earlier, one of the four purposes for which, an agreement could be entered into by the Central Government under Section 90(1), is for the exchange of information. If one of the parties to the Treaty fails to provide necessary information, then such a party is in breach of the obligation under Article 26 of the Vienna Convention. The beneficiary of such a breach of obligation by one of the contracting parties (like the assessee herein) cannot invoke the Vienna Convention to prevent the other contracting party (India in this case) from taking recourse to internal law, to address the issue.”


22    ITA No. 2227 & 2229/Mum/2017 and 139 taxmann.com 563
23    WP (C) No. 199/202, order dated 09.01.2023
24    Lord Arnold McNair, The Law of Treaties 574 (1961)
25    Id.
26    Sanchez-Llamas v. Oregon, 126 S. Ct. 2669 (2006)
27    Id. at 2680
28    239 Taxman 283 (Mad.)

Therefore, while the Treaty does not enlist any repercussion/ fall out of breach of a tax treaty by a Contracting State, an inference may be drawn from the above precedent in T Rajkumar (supra), that the other Contracting State (in this case, United States) is free to utilize its domestic law to remedy the situation and the same would not fall foul of international commitments.

View 1: In light of the preceding, once the ostensible breach takes place and is continuing it may logically follow that the corporate tax rate afforded to a US corporation operating in India should be equal to the domestic (concessional) tax rate as adjusted by the differential as provided in Article 14(2) of the Treaty.

View 2: Article 14(2) is akin to a proviso to Article 26 of the Treaty. Essentially, a concession given by the United States to India on a good-faith basis. The words used, as described in preceding paragraphs, is ‘[the] existing tax rate’, implying thereby that the differential was needed to be maintained with reference to the time of the entry of the Treaty29.


29    Bank of America v. Deputy Commissioner of Income-tax, [2001] 78 ITD 1 (Mumbai)

To take an analogy, in cases of commercial contracts, the offending parts would be severed and the rest would stand up. More generally called the blue pencil doctrine. It owes its existence in the time when Courts were called in question to adjudge equities, where the Court would not re-write the contract but severe the unenforceable clauses. Though the blue pencil doctrine is not an absolute proposition it is generally applied in commercial contracts and finds its statutory basis in the Indian Contract Act, 1872.

The offending part is the proviso to Article 26 and therefore till the existence or continuance of the breach, a view may be taken that the proviso, since it is severed, has no legal effect. In other words, and to borrow constitutional law principles, the clause stands eclipsed till the time the breach is remedied. Once remedied the clause may spring back, however, till such time, the clause has no legal validity.

Assuming therefore, once the ostensible breach takes place and is continuing it would follow that the corporate tax rate afforded to a US corporation operating in India should be equal to the domestic tax rate. This rate should not automatically be adjusted by 15 percentage points since the existence of this particular clause stands severed till the time the breach continues. Sequitur, parity should subsist and the full breadth and scope of the non-discrimination clause should apply to US corporations in ‘same circumstances’ as their domestic counterparts.

The US may adopt the above route/ interpretation and may issue a notification for the same, and in accordance with the precedent in T Rajkumar (supra) till the time the treaty breach survives the said notification would be valid.

III. CONCLUSION

This commentary remains a work in progress and only scratches the surface. The heart of the matter is on first principles – ensuring non-discrimination. The non-discrimination clause of a tax treaty is one of the most important protections that is afforded to non-resident investors. As Rowlatt J. wrote ‘in taxing statute one has to merely look at what is clearly said’30. I hope we start to see more through the lens of the great judge. In the same measure, a global convergence is required in principles of tax treaty interpretation and following observations of the Tribunal in the case of Meera Bhatia v. ITO31 serve as a ready reckoner to that ideal:

“7. In legal matters like interpretation of international tax treaties and with a view to ensure consistency in judicial interpretation thereof under different tax regimes, it is desirable that the interpretation given by the foreign courts should also be given due respect and consideration unless, of course, there are any contrary decisions from the binding judicial forums or unless there are any other good reasons to ignore such judicial precedents of other tax regimes. The tax treaties are more often than not based on the models developed by the multilateral forums and judicial bodies in the regimes where such models are being used to get occasions to express their views on expressions employed in such models. It is only when the views so expressed by judicial bodies globally converge towards a common ground that an international tax language as was visualized by Hon’ble Andhra Pradesh High Court in the case of CIT v. Vishakhapatnam Port Trust [1983] 144 ITR 1461, can truly come into existence, because unless everyone, using a word, or a set of words, in a language, does not understand it in the same manner, that language will make little sense.”


30    Cape Brandy Syndicate v I.R.C. (1 KB 64, 71)
31    38 SOT 95 (Mum. – Trib.)

Annexure

  • India – UK Tax Treaty provides:

“ARTICLE 26

NON-DISCRIMINATION

1. The nationals of a Contracting State shall not be subjected in the other Contracting State to any taxation or any requirement connected therewith which is other or more burdensome than the taxation or any requirement connected therewith which is other or more burdensome than the taxation and connected requirements to which nationals of that other State in the same circumstances are or may be subjected.

2. The taxation on a permanent establishment which an enterprise of a Contracting State has in the other Contracting State shall not be less favorably levied in that other State than the taxation levied on enterprises of that other State carrying on the same activities in the same circumstances or under the same conditions. This provision shall not be construed as preventing a Contracting State from charging the profits of a permanent establishment which an enterprise of the other Contracting State has in the first-mentioned State at a rate of tax which is higher than that imposed on the profits of a similar enterprise of the first-mentioned Contracting State, nor as being in conflict with the provisions of paragraph 4 of Article 7 of this Convention.”

  • India – Germany Tax Treaty carries similar verbiage:

“ARTICLE 24

NON-DISCRIMINATION

1. Nationals of a Contracting State shall not be subjected in the other Contracting State to any taxation or any requirement connected therewith which is other or more burdensome than the taxation and connected requirements to which nationals of that other State in the same circumstances and under the same conditions are or may be subjected. This provision shall, notwithstanding the provisions of Article 1, also apply to persons who are not residents of one or both of the Contracting States.

2. The taxation of a permanent establishment which an enterprise of a Contracting State has in the other Contracting State shall not be less favourably levied in that other State than the taxation levied on enterprises of that other State carrying on the same activities. This provision shall not be construed as preventing a Contracting State from charging the profits of a permanent establishment which a company of the other Contracting State has in the first-mentioned State at a rate of tax which is higher than that imposed on the profits of a similar company of the first-mentioned Contracting State, nor as being in conflict with the provisions of paragraph 3 of Article 7 of this Agreement. Further, this provision shall not be construed as obliging Contracting State to grant to residents of the other Contracting State any personal allowances, reliefs and reductions for taxation purposes which it grants only to its own residents.”

  • India – Canada Tax Treaty provides a cap on rate of tax:

“ARTICLE 24

NON-DISCRIMINATION

1. Nationals of a Contracting State shall not be subjected in the other Contracting State to any taxation or any requirement connected therewith, which is other or more burdensome than the taxation and connected requirements to which nationals of that other State in the same circumstances are or may be subjected.

2. The taxation on a permanent establishment which an enterprise of a Contracting State has in the other Contracting State shall not be less favourably levied in that other State than the taxation levied on enterprises of that other State carrying on the same activities.

3. Nothing in this Article shall be construed as obliging a Contracting State to grant to residents of the other Contracting State any personal allowances, reliefs and reductions for taxation purposes on account of civil status or family responsibilities which it grants to its own residents.

4. (a) Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as preventing Canada from imposing on the earnings of a company, which is a resident of India, attributable to a permanent establishment in Canada, a tax in addition to the tax which would be chargeable on the earnings of a company which is a national of Canada, provided that any additional tax so imposed shall not exceed the rate specified in sub-paragraph 2(a) of Article 10 of the amount of such earnings which have not been subjected to such additional tax in previous taxation years. For the purpose of this provision, the term ‘earnings’ means the profits attributable to a permanent establishment in Canada in a year and previous years after deducting therefrom all taxes, other than the additional tax referred to herein, imposed on such profits by Canada.

The provisions of this sub-paragraph shall also apply with respect to earnings from the disposition of immovable property situated in Canada by a company carrying on a trade in immovable property without a permanent establishment in Canada but only insofar as these earnings may be taxed in Canada under the provisions of Article 6 or paragraph 2 of Article 13.

(b) A company which is a resident of Canada may be subject to tax in India at a rate higher than that applicable to Indian domestic companies. The difference in tax rate shall not, however, exceed 15 percentage points.”

  • India – Russia Tax Treaty provides a similar cap though more beneficial to the taxpayer:

“PROTOCOL

TO THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF INDIA AND THE GOVERNMENT OF THE RUSSIA FEDERATION FOR THE AVOIDANCE OF DOUBLE TAXATION WITH RESPECT TO TAXES ON INCOME

The Government of the Republic of India and the Government of the Russian Federation, Having regard to the Agreement between the Government of the Republic of India and the Government of the Russian Federation for the avoidance of double taxation with respect to taxes on income signed today (in this Protocol called “the Agreement”),

Have agreed as follows :

1. …………….

3. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 2 of Article 24 of this Agreement, either Contracting State may tax the profits of a permanent establishment of an enterprise of the other Contracting State at a rate which is higher than that applied to the profits of a similar enterprise of the first-mentioned Contracting State. It is also provided that in no case the differences in the two rates, referred to above will exceed 12 percentage points.”

Secondment Conundrum: Does SC Ruling on Indirect Tax Trouble Direct Tax?

INTRODUCTION
In case of Multi-National Enterprise (MNE) Groups, it is a usual practice for a foreign parent or group entity to depute or second it’s employees to the Indian subsidiary or group company for various reasons. Such reasons, inter alia, include enabling the Indian subsidiary to provide quality services to the group entities or to enable the subsidiary to carry on its own business in a more efficient and effective manner by using the expertise of the deputationist or seconded employee. In such scenarios, the department is often found taking a stand that the salaries paid by the Indian subsidiary or group company to such deputationists or seconded employees or the reimbursement of such salary costs by it to the foreign parent or group company amounts to ‘Fees for technical Services’ payable by the Indian entity to the foreign entity. The department is also found taking a stand that the services rendered by such an employee constitutes a ‘Service PE’ in India. To counter this stand of the department, assessees adopt various defenses, which among other things, include the most common stand that the deputationist or seconded employee becomes the employee of the Indian entity during such period of deputation or secondment. In this article, the authors seek to discuss the tests laid down by Courts and Tribunals to determine the true employer in such cases.

GENERAL TESTS FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER-EMPLOYEE RELATIONSHIP

There is a distinction between legal employment and real/economic employment. This distinction becomes even more relevant in cases of deputation/secondment. While the seconded/deputed employee may continue to remain in legal employment of the foreign entity, in so far as he would revert to the foreign entity after completion of such period of deputation/secondment, the Indian entity may be said to be the economic employer of the said employee during such period, depending on the facts and circumstances. This has been envisaged in the Commentary in Article 15 of the OECD Model Tax Convention.

The IT Act does not define the term ‘employment’. It also does not overlook the concept of economic employment, as well. Hence, the distinction between legal employment and economic employment and the principles for determination of economic employment would be relevant for the purposes of the Income-tax Act (IT Act).

We may discuss the various decisions in the context of the IT Act and other statutes which have laid down the tests to determine whether there exists an employee-employer relationship. Some of these decisions are discussed below:

  • In Lakshminarayan Ram Gopal & Son Ltd. vs. Government of Hyderabad (1954) 25 ITR 449 (SC), it has been held that the word ‘employment’ connotes the existence of a jural relationship of master and servant between the employer and the employee, that is, between the person paying and the person paid.

  • In East India Carpet Co (P) Ltd. vs. Its Employees 1970 Jab LJ 29, 31; it has been held that the term ‘employment’ involves a concept of employment under a contract of service. In DC Works Ltd vs. State of Saurashtra (1957) SCR 152 (SC), it has been held that the greater the amount of direct control exercised over the person rendering the services by the person contracting them, the stronger the grounds for holding it to be a contract for service.

  • In Silver Jubilee Tailoring House vs. Chief Inspector Of Shops And Establishments 1974 AIR 37 (SC), for drawing a distinction between a contract for service (employment) and contract of service (independent contractor), the Court has highlighted the importance of the degree of control and supervision of the employer or the person employing such services. It has been held that if an ultimate authority over the worker in the performance of his work resided in the employer so that he was subject to the latter’s direction, that would be sufficient. A reference may also be made to the decision in Shivnandan Sharma vs. Punjab National Bank Ltd., (1955) 1 SCR 1427:AIR 1955 SC 404:(1955) 1 LLJ 688. The test of control and supervision has also been applied in the undernoted1  cases.

1. Ram Prashad vs. CIT [1972] 86 ITR 122 (SC); Dharangadhara Chemical Works Ltd. vs. State of Saurashtra 1957 SCR 152; CIT vs. Lakshmipati Singhania (1973) 92 ITR 598 (All).
One would notice a common thread flowing through the ratios laid down in the above decisions. The above decisions have unequivocally voiced the view that a contract of employment (service) can be said to exist where the following conditions are satisfied:

  • A person exercises supervisory control over another’s work; and

  • The former exercises the ultimate authority over the latter’s work in so far as the former gives directions to the latter specifying the manner in which the work is to be carried out and the latter is bound by such directions.

SUPREME COURT’S DECISION IN MORGAN STANLEY’S CASE

In the case of DIT vs. Morgan Stanley & Co. [2007] 292 ITR 416 (SC), the Court was hearing appeals filed by the assessee and the department against the ruling obtained by the assessee from the AAR. As per the facts of the case, an agreement was entered into by an Indian group entity Morgan Stanley Advantages Services Pvt. Ltd. (‘MSAS’) and the assessee (‘MSCO’), whereby the former would provide support services to the latter. Pursuant to the same, MSCO outsourced some of its’ activities to MSAS. MSCO filed an application for advance ruling. The basic question on which the ruling was obtained was as to whether MSCO could be said to have a PE in India under Article 5(1) of the Indo-US DTAA on account of services rendered by MSAS under the Service Agreement. The AAR ruled that MSCO cannot be regarded as having a fixed place of business in India within the meaning of Article 5(1). It also ruled that MSCO did not have an agency PE under Article 5(4) of the DTAA. However, it ruled that MSCO would be regarded as having a Service PE under Article 5(2)(l) of the DTAA if it were to send some of its’ employees to India as stewards or as deputationists in the employment of MSAS. Against the ruling, both the department and the assessee filed appeals before the Hon’ble Supreme Court.

In appeal, while examining whether a Service PE exists within the meaning of Article 5(2)(l) of the DTAA, the Court in paragraph 14 ruled that the said Article applies in cases where the MNE furnishes services within India and those services are furnished through its’ employees. Thus, where employees are deputed by MSCO in India for providing services to MSAS, the Court held that MSAS constitutes a Service PE. The Court has given due credence to the control and supervision exercised by MSCO on the employees deputed in India through whom it provides services in India to MSAS. Based on the same, the Court has concluded that MSAS constitutes a Service PE for MSCO in India.

Though the ratio is in the context of Service PE under the provisions of the DTAA, it is relevant for determination of the economic employer in the case of deputation. This is for the reason that a Service PE would be constituted in India where a foreign entity renders services in India through its’ employees in India. Thus, for a Service PE to be constituted, the deputationist must continue to remain the employee of the foreign entity even post such deputation.

The said test of control and supervision laid down by the Hon’ble Supreme Court for determining whether the deputationist continues to remain the employee of the foreign entity is in line with the test discussed in the earlier segment.

Having ruled so, in paragraph 15, the Hon’ble Court went on to lay down the following propositions of law:

(i)    On deputation, the employee of MSCO, when deputed to MSAS, does not become an employee of MSAS.

(ii)    The deputationist has a lien on his employment with MSCO. As long as the lien remains with the MSCO, the said company retains control over the deputationist’s terms and employment.

(iii)    Where the activities of the multinational enterprise entail it being responsible for the work of deputationists and the employees continue to be on the payroll of the multinational enterprise or they continue to have their lien on their jobs with the multinational enterprise, a service PE can emerge.

(iv)    On request/requisition from MSAS, MSCO deputes its staff. The request comes from MSAS depending upon its requirement. Generally, occasions do arise when MSAS needs the expertise of the staff of MSCO. In such circumstances, generally, MSAS makes a request to MSCO. A deputationist under such circumstances is expected to be experienced in banking and finance. On completion of his tenure, he is repatriated to his parent job. He retains his lien when he comes to India. He lends his experience to MSAS in India as an employee of MSCO as he retains his lien and in that sense there is a service PE (MSAS) under Article 5(2)(1).

Thus, it may be noted that the Hon’ble Supreme Court has provided the following parameters to treat a deputationist/expat as the employee of the foreign entity:

  • A deputationist shall have a lien on his employment with foreign entity;

  • The foreign entity retains control over the deputationist’s terms and employment at the time of deputation; and

  • A Service PE emerges where the activity of the foreign entity requires it to be responsible for the work of deputationists, and the deputationists continue to be on the payroll of foreign entity or have their lien on their jobs with the foreign entity.

Thus, it may be noted that while in paragraph 14, the Court emphasized only the control and supervision exercised by the foreign entity on the deputationist, in paragraph 15, it has brought out two aspects i.e., lien exercised by the deputationist on his employment with the foreign entity, and the foreign entity being responsible for the work of the deputationist. The second aspect i.e., being responsible for the work, may subsume into the test of control and supervision adumbrated in paragraph 14.

However, it is pertinent to note that while the Court has laid down the twin tests of control and supervision over the work [thus being responsible thereof] of deputationists and the exercise of lien by the deputationists as relevant tests, it has not discussed as to which of the two tests would have greater precedence over the other.

DELHI COURT DECISION IN THE CASE OF CENTRICA INDIA
The next decision which would be relevant for discussion would be the decision in the case of Centrica India Offshore (P.) Ltd. vs. CIT [2014] 364 ITR 336 (Delhi). As per the facts of the said case, the Petitioner (CIOP), a wholly owned subsidiary of Centrica Plc, UK, had entered into Service Agreements with the latter and other foreign subsidiaries of Centrica Plc to provide locally based interface to those overseas entities and the Indian entity. To seek support during its’ initial year of operation, CIOP sought for some employees on secondment from the overseas entities. For this purpose, it entered into an agreement with the overseas entities whereby the latter seconded some employees for a fixed tenure. The employees so seconded would work under the direct control and supervision of CIOP who would bear all risks and enjoy all rewards associated with the work performed by such employees.

The issue that arose before the Court was whether the secondment of employees by the overseas entities would amount to Fees for Technical Services or Fees for Included Services within the relevant DTAAs in question, which would embody the concept of a Service PE.

In order to drive home the point that the seconded employees were under the employment of CIOP, it was argued on behalf of CIOP that the seconded employees would work under the direct supervision and direction of the board and management of CIOP. It was also argued that it was convenient for them to receive salaries overseas. An option available to such employees was to receive their salaries through India and later transfer their salaries overseas. However, to avoid the same, the employees continued to remain on the payroll of the overseas entities who would disburse the salaries. Thereafter, the petitioner would reimburse such salary costs to the overseas entities. Thus, the primacy of concept of economic employment as opposed to legal employment was argued to contend that for, all practical purposes, CIOP is the economic employer. The reasons attributed to defend this contention were that the entire direction and supervision over the seconded employees was under its control and the pay and emoluments were borne by it.

While negating the argument on behalf of the Petitioner, the Court ruled that the overseas entities rendered services through the seconded employees to CIOP. Thus, the Court ruled that even post the secondment, the employees continued to remain the employees of the overseas entities on the following grounds:

(i)    The service provided by the secondees is to be viewed in the context in which their secondment or deputation was necessitated. The overseas entities required the Indian subsidiary, CIOP, to ensure quality control and management of their vendors of outsourced activity. For this activity to be carried out, CIOP required personnel with the necessary technical knowledge and expertise in the field, and thus, the secondment agreement was signed since CIOP – as a newly formed company – did not have the necessary human resource.

(ii)    The secondees are not only providing services to CIOP, but rather also tiding CIOP through the initial period, and ensuring that going forward, the skill set of CIOP’s other employees is built and they continue these services without assistance. In essence, the secondees are imparting their technical expertise and know-how onto the other regular employees of CIOP. The activity of the secondees is thus to transfer their technical ability to ensure quality control vis-à-vis the Indian vendors, or in other words, ‘make available’ their know-how of the field to CIOP for future consumption.

(iii)    While the Court agreed that the seconded employees were under the control and supervision of CIOP, there was no purported employment relationship between CIOP and the secondees. None of the documents, including the attachment to the secondment agreements placed on record (between the secondees and CIOP) revealed that the latter can terminate the secondment arrangement; there is no entitlement or obligation, clearly spelt out, whereby CIOP has to bear the salary cost of these employees. The secondees cannot in fact sue CIOP for default in payment of their salary – no obligation is spelt out vis-à-vis the Petitioner.

(iv)    All direct costs of such seconded employee’s basic salary and other compensation, cost of participation in overseas entities’ retirement and social security plans and other benefits in accordance with its applicable policies and other costs were ultimately paid by the overseas entity. Whilst CIOP was given the right to terminate the secondment, (in its agreement with the overseas entities) the services of the secondee vis-à-vis the overseas entities – the original and subsisting employment relationship – could not be terminated. Rather, that employment relationship remained independent, and beyond the control of COIP.

(v)    The employment relationship between the secondee and the overseas organisation is at no point terminated, nor is CIOP given any authority to even modify that relationship. The attachment of the secondees to the overseas organization is not temporary or even fleeting, but rather, permanent, especially in comparison to CIOP, which is admittedly only their temporary home.

(vi)    The social security, emoluments, additional benefits, etc. provided by the overseas entity to the secondee, and more generally, its employees, still govern the secondee in its relationship with CIOP.

(vii)    Whilst CIOP may have operational control over these persons in terms of the daily work and may be responsible (in terms of the agreement) for their failures, these limited and sparse factors cannot displace the larger and established context of employment abroad.

(viii)    The Court placed reliance on the Commentary of Klaus Vogel, wherein it was noted that the situation would have been different if the employee works exclusively for the enterprise in the State of employment and was released for the period in question by the enterprise in his state of residence. The Hon’ble High Court considered that this factor was critical to determine the economic employer.

From the above, it may be noted that the High Court, with due respect, has erred in giving higher weightage to the latter of the twin tests laid down by the Hon’ble Supreme Court in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra), i.e. exercise of lien by the seconded employee on its’ employment with the overseas entities. The High Court may not be correct in stating that limited and sparse factors of operational control over the secondees by CIOP in terms of their daily work and its’ responsibility for their work would not displace the larger and established context of employment abroad.

Further, while the counsels for Petitioner argued as to the concept of economic employment and relied on the degree of operational control exercised by CIOP, it appears that satisfaction of the twin conditions as laid down by the Hon’ble Supreme Court was not highlighted before the High Court. Had the Petitioner highlighted the importance of the said twin conditions, the ratio laid down by the High Court may have been different.

The petitioner’s SLP before the Hon’ble Supreme Court was dismissed in Centrica India Offshore Pvt. Ltd. vs. CIT [SLP (C). No 22295/2014, dated 10th October, 2014. Further, a review petition filed was also dismissed in Centrica India Offshore Pvt. Ltd. vs. CIT [RP(C) No. 2644 of 2014 in SLP (C). No 22295/2014, dated 10th December, 2014].    

OTHER TRIBUNAL AND HIGH COURT DECISIONS
In IDS Software Solutions (India) Ltd. vs. ITO2, the ITAT held that though the service rendered by expat is technical service, the assessee was not liable to deduct tax from the amount representing reimbursement of the salary paid by IDS-USA to expat while remitting the same to IDS-USA u/s 195. The ITAT came to such conclusion based on the following grounds:

(i)    IDS-USA was the legal employer. Since the assessee-company was to reimburse the emoluments paid by IDS-USA to him, it was the assessee-company which for all practical purposes was to be looked upon as the employer of ‘S’ during the relevant period;

(ii)    The person who actually controlled the services of ‘S’ was the assessee-company. Under the secondment agreement, ‘S’ was to act in accordance with the reasonable requests, instructions and directions of the assessee-company. He would have to devote the whole of his time, attention and skills to the assessee-company. He was to report to and be responsible to the assessee-company;

(iii)    The assessee-company could remove ‘S’ before the expiration of the period of his office. The board of directors of the assessee-company regulated the powers and duties of ‘S’ by passing appropriate resolutions;

(iv)    The seconded employee is required to also act as an officer or an authorised signatory or nominee or in any other lawful personal capacity for the assessee-company, which would also be out of place in an agreement for rendering technical services; and

(v)    Therefore, it was held that seconded employee was responsible and subservient to the assessee-company, which could not be the case if the agreement was for providing technical services by IDS to the assessee-company.


2. (2009) 122 TTJ 410 (Bang); relied on in ITO vs. M/s Cerner Health Care Solutions Pvt. Ltd [I.T.(T.P.) A.No.1509/Bang/2012];  ITO vs. Ariba Technologies (India) Pvt. Ltd [I.T.A. No.616(Bang.)/2011]; Caterpillar India Pvt. Ltd vs. Deputy Director of Income-tax [ITA 629/630/606/607/149/(Bang)/2010]; DCIT vs. Mahanagar Gas Ltd. [2016] 69 taxmann.com 321 (Mumbai – Trib.)

In Deputy Director of Income-tax vs. Yum! Restaurants (Asia) Pte. Ltd. [2020] 117 taxmann.com 759 (Delhi – Trib.), where, a Singapore based company, seconded its employee to an Indian concern for carrying out business operations of its’ restaurant outlets in India efficiently, the said employee worked under direct supervision and control of Indian concern, his salary cost was reimbursed to assessee on a cost-to-cost basis, the Tribunal ruled that the employee was the employee of the Indian concern during the period of secondment. The Tribunal distinguished the case on hand from the facts in the case of Centrica India (supra) on the facts of the case by observing that in the case of Centrica, the overseas entity was providing services to Indian company through seconded employees to ensure quality control and management of their vendors of outsourced activities, with the intention to provide staff with appropriate expertise and knowledge about process and practices implemented. However, a perusal of the facts before the Tribunal would reveal that during the period of secondment, the seconded employee was under the exclusive employment of the Indian entity and foreign entity did not exercise any control or lien over the employee.

In AT & T Communication Services (India) (P.) Ltd vs. DCIT [2019] 101 taxmann.com 105 (Delhi – Trib.), it was held by the Tribunal that the nature of income embedded in related payments is relevant for deciding whether or not section 195 will come into play and so long as a payment to non-resident entity is in the nature of payment consisting of income chargeable under the head ‘Salaries’, the Indian Company does not have any tax withholding applications u/s 195 of the Act. The Tribunal distinguished the case before it from Centrica India’s case (supra) and observed that seconded employees of foreign company were not taking forward the business of foreign company in India. In Centrica (Supra), the employees were seconded to Indian company to ensure that services to be rendered to the overseas entities by the Indian vendor are properly coordinated.

In DIT vs. Abbey Business Services Ltd. (2020) 122 taxmann.com 174 (Kar), the assessee was a subsidiary of ANITCO Ltd. a group company of Abbey National Plc, UK (ANP). ANP had entered into an agreement with the assessee, to outsource the provision of certain process and call centers to M/s. Msource India Pvt. Ltd. Under the agreement, Msource India Pvt. Ltd was required to provide high quality services which supports the position of ANP and its affiliates as well as to customers in UK. To facilitate outsourcing agreement between ANP and Msource India Pvt. Ltd., an agreement for secondment of staff was entered into between ANP and the assessee on 4th February, 2004. For deputation of its employees, Abbey, India had made certain payments to ANP, part of which was salary reimbursement on which tax was deducted. The question arose whether such payments amounted to fees for technical services. The Court ruled that the reimbursement of salary costs by the Appellant was not FTS as the employees in question were employees of the assessee. The Court took into consideration the aspect of control, direction and supervision exercised by the assessee. The Court also observed that the employees were required to function in accordance with the policies, rules and guidelines applicable to the employees of the assessee. The Court has distinguished the judgement in Centrica’s case (supra) on the grounds that the question of permanent establishment was not involved in the case on hand, unlike in Centrica’s case (supra). With due respect, such basis is incorrect given that even in Centrica’s case, the question for consideration was whether costs reimbursed by petitioner therein to the overseas entity was FTS/FIS within the meaning of the DTAAs in question, which was also the question before the Karnataka High Court in Abbey’s case (supra).


SUPREME COURT’S DECISION IN NORTHERN OPERATING SYSTEMS (P.) LTD.’S CASE
In C.C.,C.E. & S.T. Bangalore vs. Northern Operating Systems (P.) Ltd. [2022] 61 GSTL 129 (SC), the Court was examining whether where the overseas group companies seconded their employees to the assessee in India, the same would amount to manpower recruitment and supply services liable to service tax u/s 65(68) r.w.s. 65(105)(k) of the Finance Act, 1994.

From the above extracted paragraphs, it can be noted that the Honourable Supreme Court has concluded that the seconded employees were not the employees of the assessee company in India by taking into consideration the following aspects:

  • The nature of the overseas group companies’ business is providing certain specialized services (back office, IT, bank related services, inventories, etc. which can be performed by its highly trained and skilled personnel.
  • Taking advantage of the globalized economy and location savings, the Overseas group company had assigned, inter alia, certain tasks to the assessee, including back-office operations of a certain kind, in relation to its activities, or that of other group companies or entities.
  • As part of this agreement, a secondment contract is entered into, whereby the overseas company’s employee or employees, possessing the specific required skill, are deployed for the duration the task is estimated to be completed in. Thus, the employees were deployed to the assessee, on secondment in relation to the business of the overseas employer and the group.
  • Though the employee was in control of the assessee and the assessee had the power to terminate the services of the seconded employees, upon expiry of the secondment period, the employees would return to their overseas employer.
  • The Overseas employer pays them the salary. The terms of employment, even during their secondment, are in accord with the policy of the overseas company who is the employer.
  • The fact that the assessee had to ultimately bear the burden of salaries of the seconded employees was irrelevant as the seconded employees were performing the tasks in relation to the assessee’s activities and not in relation to the overseas employer.

After discussing various decisions laying down the traditional test of supervision and control, the Court has indicated that such traditional test to indicate who the employer is may not be the sole test to be applied.

The above decision, in contrast to the decisions of the twin tests laid down in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra) has brought out a new perspective i.e. whose business the seconded employee is carrying on? The decision lays down the principle that where the Indian entity provides support or back-office services to the foreign entity and the seconded employees enable the company to provide such services efficiently and effectively through their expertise, the employees continue to remain in employment of the foreign entity though their functions may be under the control and supervision of the Indian entity.

The said principle appears to be in line with the facts and the ultimate ratio in Centrica’s case (supra) and also the basis on which other decisions as cited in paragraph 5 have distinguished the ratio in Centrica’s case (supra).

SUBSEQUENT DECISION IN FLIPKART’S CASE
The above decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra) was considered by the Ld. Single Judge in Flipkart Internet (P.) Ltd. vs. DCIT [2022] 139 taxmann.com 595 (Karnataka). As per the facts of the said case, the Petitioner had made pure reimbursement payments to Walmart Inc. towards payment of salaries to deputed expatriate employees. The Petitioner applied for a certificate u/s 195 for Nil deduction of tax at source which was denied by the departmental officer. In writ proceedings, the Court has observed that the seconded employees were employees of the Petitioner by making the following observations:

  • Clause 1.5 of the Master Service Agreement (MSA) defines the scope of work relating to secondment.
  • Clause 3.1 of the MSA provides that the Petitioner may terminate the services of the secondees.
  • Clause 4.2 provides that the party placing the secondees can invoice the party receiving the service, the secondment costs, expenses and incidental costs borne in the Home Country.
  • Even though Walmart Inc. has the power to decide the continuance of the services in USA of the seconded employees after the termination of their secondment in India, it would relate to a service condition post the period of secondment. What would be of significance is the relationship between the petitioner and the seconded employee.
  • The equity eligibility of the seconded employee which was a pre-existing benefit (even prior to the secondment) ought not to alter the relationship of employer and employee between the petitioner and the employee.
  • Further, mere payment by Walmart Inc. to the seconded employees would not alter the relationship between the petitioner and the seconded employees, as the petitioner only seeks to make payment to Walmart Inc. of its payment to the seconded employees which is stated to be by way of reimbursement.
  • The Petitioner was not merely acting as a back office for providing support service to the overseas entity, whereby the overseas entity could be treated as an employer.
  • The Petitioner issues the appointment letter, the employee reports to the petitioner and the petitioner has the power to terminate the services of the employee.

The Court also rejected the revenue’s reliance on the decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra) by distinguishing the case on hand from the facts in the said case, on the following grounds:

  • The Apex Court has interpreted the concept of a secondment agreement taking note of the contemporary business practice and has indicated that the traditional control test to indicate who is the employer, may not be the sole test to be applied. The Apex Court while construing a contract whereby employees were seconded to the assessee by foreign group of Companies, had upheld the demand for service tax holding that in a secondment arrangement, a secondee would continue to be employed by the original employer.

  • The Apex Court in the particular facts of the case had held that the Overseas Co., had a pool of highly skilled employees and having regard to their expertise were seconded to the assessee and upon cessation of the term of secondment would return to their overseas employees. While returning such finding on facts, the assessee was held liable to pay service tax for the period as mentioned in the show cause notice.

  • The judgment rendered was in the context of service tax and the only question for determination was as to whether supply of manpower was covered under the taxable service and was to be treated as a service provided by a Foreign Company to an Indian Company. But in the case on hand, the legal requirement requires a finding to be recorded to treat a service as ‘FIS’ which is “made available” to the Indian Company.

BASIS ON WHICH THE DECISION IN NORTHERN OPERATING’S CASE (SUPRA) CAN BE DISTINGUISHED
It is needless to state that whether the seconded or deputed employee continues to remain the employee of the foreign entity or becomes the employee of the Indian entity would depend on the facts of the case.

Though the said decision is in the context of provisions of Service Tax, the decision lays down certain important principles to determine whether or not the seconded employee remains the employee of the foreign entity even after such secondment or deputation to the Indian entity. Hence, the principles laid down thereunder would equally apply even in the context of provisions of the Income- tax Act.

While the decision in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra) was rendered by a division bench of the Hon’ble Supreme Court, the decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra) is rendered by a larger bench of 3-judges. Thus, the interesting question for consideration is whether the twin tests laid down in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra) are sacrosanct or have they been diluted in terms of the ratio in Northern Operating’s case (supra).

  • While the Court has referred to its’ earlier decision in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra) in its’ subsequent decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra), it has not doubted the twin tests laid down thereunder or dissented from the ratio laid therein.
  • As discussed earlier, the subsequent decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra) has stated that the traditional test of control and supervision for determination of the economic employer cannot be the sole test. Even in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra), the test of control and supervision was not the sole and determinative factor but was part of twin tests. Thus, on this count, the decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra) appears to be line with the decision in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra).
  • A fortiori, the twin tests laid down in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra), continue to hold the field even post the decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra) and are still relevant given that they have been laid down in the specific context of the Income-tax Act read with the relevant DTAAs.

Northern Operating’s case (supra) was rendered in the context of sections 65(68) and (105)(k) of the Finance Act, 1994 dealing with ‘supply of manpower’ prior to amendment in 2012 (with effect from 1st July, 2012) and section 65B(44) of the Finance Act, 1994 defining the term ‘service’ post such amendment. Thus, on the interpretation of such provisions, the Court ruled that the service of supply of manpower was rendered by the overseas entities to the appellant therein. However, in the context of Income-tax Act read with the relevant DTAAs, it would be necessary for the department to establish that the services, if any, rendered by the overseas entity through its’ employees would amount to technical services or included services as per the provisions of the IT Act read with the relevant DTAA, before any liability can be imposed.

The Commentary on Article 15 of the OECD Model Tax Convention recognizes the principles of real or economic employment in contradistinction to legal employment. It lays down the following tests or factors for determination of economic employment:

  • The hirer does not bear the responsibility or risk for the results produced by the employee’s work;
  • The authority to instruct the worker lies with the user;
  • The work is performed at a place which is under the control and responsibility of the user;
  •  The remuneration to the hirer is calculated on the basis of the time utilized, or there is in other ways a connection between this remuneration and wages received by the employee;
  • Tools and materials are essentially put at the employee’s disposal by the user;
  • The number and qualifications of the employees are not solely determined by the hirer.

In the Commentary by Professor Klaus Vogel on ‘Double Taxation Conventions,’ it has been observed that where an employee is sent abroad to work for a foreign enterprise as well, the foreign enterprise does not qualify as an employer merely because the employee performs services for it or because the enterprise was issuing to the employee instructions regarding his work or places or tools at his disposal. However, it has been highlighted that the situation would be different if the employee works exclusively for the enterprise in the State of employment and was released for the period in question by the enterprise in his State of residence.

The above commentaries lay down the tests to be applied to determine the economic employer, which would be relevant for the purposes of the Income-tax Act read with the DTAAs and may not be relevant for the purposes of the Service Tax Act. Hence, these commentaries were not considered by the Hon’ble Supreme Court in Northern Operating’s case (supra). However, for the purposes of provisions of the Income-tax Act, the tests laid down in the said commentaries would be relevant. The Supreme Court in Engineering Analysis Centre Of Excellence P. Ltd. vs. CIT (2021) 432 ITR 471 chose to apply principles canvassed by OECD in the absence of contrary provisions in the domestic law.

The above commentaries would indicate while the test of control and supervision may be a relevant test, it may not be sole determinative factor, more so when the employee does not work exclusively for the Indian entity to whom he has been deputed and continues to carry on the business of the foreign entity. This is the key aspect which has also been emphasized by the Delhi High Court in Centrica’s case (supra) as highlighted earlier.

This also appears to be the sentiment of the decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra). Thus, the key takeaway from the decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra) and on reconciling the same with various earlier decisions of the Hon’ble Supreme Court including the one in Morgan Stanley’s case (supra) is that supervision and control exercised by the Indian entity would by itself not be determinative. Where the Indian entity is itself under the supervision and control of the foreign entity and carries on the business of the latter, mere supervision and control exercised by the Indian entity over the seconded/deputed employees would be irrelevant. In such circumstances, the seconded employees would be enabling the Indian entity in carrying on the business of the foreign parent in a more efficient and effective manner.

Thus, an analysis would have to be made in each case whether post such secondment/deputation, the seconded/deputed employee is carrying on the business of the foreign entity or is solely serving the Indian entity to whom he has been seconded/deputed. It is only in the latter situations, coupled with the supervision and control exercised by the Indian entity, one may be able to conclude that such person is the employee of the Indian entity during such period of secondment/deputation. This proposition is in line with the Commentary on Article 15 of the OECD Model Tax Convention and Commentary by Klaus Vogel, laying down the tests for determination of economic employer, which appear to be the distinguishing factor as taken into account by the High Court in the decision in Centrica India’ case (supra).

Thus, after such deputation/secondment, where the employee is exclusively devoted to the Indian entity and does not carry on the business of the foreign entity, he can be said to be under the economic employment of the Indian entity. In such circumstances, it would be possible for the Indian entity to distinguish its’ case from the facts in Northern Operating’s case (supra).

In CIT vs. Eli Lilly & Co. (India) P. Ltd. [2009] 312 ITR 225 (SC), the assessee company, incorporated in India, was a joint venture between M/s. Eli Lilly, Netherlands B.V. and Ranbaxy Laboratories Ltd. The foreign partner had seconded four expatriates to the joint venture in India. They were employees of the joint venture post such deputation or secondment. However, they continued to remain on the rolls of the foreign company. They received home salary outside India from the foreign partner. The Indian venture deducted tax on salary paid to such expats but failed to deduct tax on such home salary. In appeal, the Court held that the Indian joint venture was liable to deduct at source u/s 192 in respect of such home salary which accrued in India under the provisions of section 9(1)(ii) read with the Explanation thereto.

Thus, in the above decision, the Court has understood that the home salary is salary paid by the foreign entity on behalf of such Indian entity. It is for this reason, the Court directed the Indian entity to deduct tax at source from such payments u/s 192. The above judgement, in the specific context of provisions of the Income-tax Act would indicate that where the services are provided by the expatriate post the secondment to the Indian entity, the employee would be under the economic employment of the Indian entity despite the fact that such employees continue to be on the rolls of the foreign entity.

The decision in Eli Lilly’s case (supra) would support the proposition that even where salaries are paid by the foreign entity to the seconded/deputed employees, such employees can be said to be under the economic employment where the services are rendered to the Indian entity during the course of such secondment.

Further, the decision in Eli Lilly’s case (supra) appears to be in line with the principles laid down in the Commentary by Klaus Vogel, laying emphasis on sole employment during the period of secondment, which was considered the most important factor as per the decision in Centrica’s case (supra). This is for the reason that in the judgement in Eli Lilly’s case (supra), there is a finding of fact by the Hon’ble Court that post the deputation, no work was performed by the employees for the foreign company.

Dealing with this exclusivity theory, it may be noted that the concept of simultaneous dual employment is not alien to the Income-tax Act. It has in fact been recognized by section 192(2) of the IT Act, which recognizes that during the financial year, an assessee may be employed simultaneously under more than one employer. Further, in today’s times, with the emergence of concept of moonlighting, certain employers permit their employees to exercise a second employment in so far as such second employment does not affect the business activities of the employer.

In such scenarios, when the provisions of the IT Act recognize such dual employment, it may be possible for the seconded employee to exercise such dual employment, during such period of secondment. Thus, the decision in Northern Operating’s case (supra), rendered in the specific context of the facts therein and more so in the context of provisions of Service Tax, cannot be relied on to insist on exclusivity.

With respect to fee paid to visiting doctors by hospitals, the Revenue3 is often found taking a stand that such payment amounts to salary and that tax is to be deducted by the concerned hospital u/s 192 as against section 194J. This stand is adopted despite the fact that upon any negligence by the doctor, he and not the concerned hospital would be responsible as per the Code of Ethics and the Medical Council Guidelines applicable to such doctors. Thus, in such cases, the responsibility over the work of the doctors by the hospital is overlooked by the department. The department also overlooks the factor of sole employment, given that the doctors may be visiting and providing their services to more than one hospital.

However, in the context of secondment, the revenue is seen taking a completely contradictory argument of sole employment with the Indian entity, for the purposes of determination of economic employment.


3. CIT vs. Grant Medical Foundation [2015] 375 ITR 49 (Bombay); CIT vs. Manipal Health Systems (P.) Ltd. [2015] 375 ITR 509 (Karnataka); CIT vs. Teleradiology Solutions Pvt Ltd [2016-TIOL-703-HC-KAR-IT];  ITO vs. Dr. Balabhai Nanavati Hospital [2017] 167 ITD 178 (Mumbai); Hosmat Hospital (P.) Ltd. vs. ACIT [2016] 160 ITD 513 (Bangalore – Trib.). Note that the authors have only named a few cases herein.

GLoBE Rules: Some Special Rules, Administrative and Compliance Aspects – Part 3

[This is the concluding part of a 3-part series on GloBE Rules. The first part was published in the August, 2022 issue of BCAJ (“Pillar 2: An Introduction to Global Minimum Taxation and the second part (“GloBE Rules – Determination of Effective Tax Rate (ETR) and Top-Up Tax (TUT”)) was published in September, 2022 BCAJ.]

TO REFRESH ON EARLIER PARTS
In the previous two articles, we discussed how GloBE Rules apply, when the effective tax rate (ETR) computed at a jurisdictional level is less than 15 per cent, and, how a top-up tax (TUT) is levied to achieve at least 15 per cent tax in each jurisdiction where the MNE Group has a presence in the form of a subsidiary or a permanent establishment (PE). For this purpose, each subsidiary or PE is referred to as a constituent entity (CE) of the MNE Group. We also discussed certain nuances around the computation of ETR – which, as aforesaid, is calculated on a country-by-country basis as a fraction of adjusted covered tax (numerator) upon GloBE income (denominator). While ETR is primarily linked to book results based on ‘fit for consolidation’’ accounts, specified adjustments, coupled with options/choices, make the exercise fairly complex and unique. Moreover, we also discussed hierarchical rules (i.e. top-down approach of income inclusion rule) for recovery of such TUT.

Having discussed the above, in this third and final part of this series, we shall discuss some special provisions under GloBE Rules dealing with business reorganizations, joint ventures, and PEs. Towards the end, we shall also discuss administrative and compliance aspects, which shall soon become a new way of life for MNE Groups covered by GloBE Rules.

NEGATIVE ADJUSTED COVERED TAX DUE TO SUPER/WEIGHTED DEDUCTIONS

In Part II of this series, we discussed how deferred tax accounting impacts adjusted covered tax in the calculation of ETR for a jurisdiction. We will now level up a notch further and discuss a specific complexity of the GloBE Rules associated with deferred tax accounting.

Ordinarily, a jurisdiction that has zero GloBE income or GloBE loss may not trigger any GloBE TUT liability. This is because the ETR cannot be computed as the denominator is zero or a negative amount. Still, it is possible that the tax loss is higher than the book loss (or GloBE loss) – if local tax rules allow a weighted deduction of specific expenses (to incentivize specific activities, such as R&D) in computing taxable income.

Assume that, in year 1, there is a book loss of 1,000, and tax loss of 1,500, the difference of 500 being on account of weighted deduction. Assume that, in year 2, there is a book profit of 1,500, and a tax loss of  year 1 is fully offset, resulting in zero local tax liability in year 2. Assume that such jurisdiction’s local tax rate is 15 per cent.

In books, DTA of 225 is recognized for tax loss in year 1 (i.e. 1,500 x 15 per cent), which is reversed in year 2. ETR of year 2 is calculated as 225 / 1,500. Since ETR (after reckoning reversal of DTA) is 15 per cent, there is no GloBE TUT liability in year 2. Thus, there is no requirement under GloBE Rules to exclude reversal of DTA attributable to tax loss arising on account of weighted deduction, while determining ETR of year 2.

To ensure that the TUT is collected in year 1 itself, when a tax incentive of weighted deduction is claimed, despite year 1 having zero GloBE income or GloBE loss, a special provision1 requires payment of GloBE TUT liability. Such a liability is not based on ETR formula. According to such provision, where adjusted covered tax (after reckoning generation of DTA) is less than [GloBE loss x 15 per cent], the difference straightaway becomes TUT liability. In the example on hand, in year 1, adjusted covered tax (after reckoning generation of DTA) is negative 225, and GloBE loss x 15 per cent is negative 150 (negative 1,000 x 15 per cent). The difference between negative 225 and negative 150 is 75, which straightaway becomes TUT liability in year 1.


1    Article 4.1.5

This provision has been perceived to be harsh because TUT liability is payable despite the jurisdiction having earned zero GloBE income or GloBE loss. Representations have been made to modify this provision, and OECD is evaluating the same.

In Indian Income-tax Act (ITA), weighted deductions [along the lines of s.35(2AB) of ITA] have been phased out. ITA has a weighted deduction only in the form of s.80JJAA, which is allowed only against positive gross total income – such an incentive cannot be availed in a case of tax loss. But, if a CE in India generates DTA on account of business reorganization (as illustrated in the ensuing paras), such a DTA can result in TUT liability under the above provision, despite the jurisdiction having zero GloBE income or GloBE loss in the year of generation of such DTA.

BUSINESS REORGANIZATIONS TAKING PLACE AFTER GLOBE RULES ARE EFFECTIVE2

Where gain on account of tax neutral transfers is recognized in P&L account as prepared for the purpose of ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts, in absence of any specific adjustment in GloBE Rules, such a gain can trigger TUT liability. This may result in nullifying fiscal incentive provided under domestic tax laws of the jurisdiction for tax neutral transfers. GloBE Rules aim to avoid such an outcome, and preserve tax neutrality for transfer of assets and liabilities, if following cumulative conditions are met.

•    Consideration for transfer is, in whole or in significant part, discharged by way of equity interests.

•    The transferor’s gain is not subject to tax (under the domestic tax laws).

•    The transferee is required (under the domestic tax laws) to compute taxable income using transferee’s tax basis of the assets (i.e. no cost step-up).

If all the above three conditions are met – in GloBE calculations, for transferor, gain recognized in P&L account is excluded from the GloBE income – and therefore, is exempt from TUT liability. For transferee, carrying values of assets taken over, for the purpose of GloBE calculations, are pegged to those of transferor (i.e. no cost step-up in computation of GloBE income).


2 Readers may note that, this article only discusses GloBE Rules applicable to transfers of assets and liabilities, as per articles 6.3.1 to 6.3.32. There are separate rules for corporate transformations (such as conversion of company into another business vehicle such as LLP) or migration from one jurisdiction to another jurisdiction, which are not discussed in this article.

However, if any one of the above three conditions are not met – gain on account of a transfer recognized in P&L account, which is tax-exempt as per domestic tax laws, cannot be excluded in computation of GloBE income of the transferor, and therefore, can trigger TUT liability. For transferee, carrying values for GloBE calculations are based on cost as recognized in the books (after step-up, if any).

Example 1: Business transfer by a holding company to a wholly-owned subsidiary

Assume that, the FCo (ultimate parent entity of an MNE Group), has a holding company in India, which in turn has a wholly owned subsidiary (WOS) in India. After GloBE Rules are applied to FCo, the holding company transfers a capital asset (e.g., an intangible asset) having a book value of 1,000 to WOS, at a fair price of 11,000, for cash consideration. In ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts, the holding company recognizes a gain of 10,000, whereas WOS recognizes such a capital asset at 11,0003.

For local tax purposes, the holding company claims capital gains tax exemption u/s 47(iv) of ITA on 10,000; and the cost in the hands of WOS is pegged to 1,000 on account of Explanation 6 to s.43(1) of ITA.


3 As per our understanding, and subject to confirmation of accounting experts, it is only for common control business transfer that IFRS/Ind-AS mandates the transferee to recognise at book value of transferor. This mandate may not apply to an asset transfer, which, the transferor and transferee may record at the transaction value.

In computing the GloBE income of the holding company in the year of the aforesaid transfer, a question arises, whether the gain of 10,000, recognized in P&L account can be excluded? The first condition (namely that consideration for the transfer is, in whole or in significant part, discharged by way of equity interests) is not satisfied in the present case. To recollect, for excluding gain from GloBE income, all the three conditions stated aforesaid need to be cumulatively satisfied. In the present case, only the second and third conditions are satisfied (namely, the ‘transferor’s gain is not subject to tax; and the transferee is required to compute taxable income using the transferee’s tax basis of the assets) and not the first condition. This may result in a gain of 10,000 being included in GloBE income and therefore, being subject to TUT liability.

In the case of WOS, the cost of capital asset as per books is 11,000. However, for the computation of a taxable income as per ITA, such cost is pegged to 1,000 on account of Explanation 6 to s.43(1) of ITA. Consequently, WOS is expected to have higher capital gains tax liability upon the sale of a such capital asset. Therefore, a question is whether WOS can recognize the provision for DTL of 2,500 (namely book to tax difference of 10,000 x 25 per cent applicable tax rate) in the year of acquisition of such capital asset? Under Ind-AS, WOS may not be able to recognize such a provision for DTL due to the “initial recognition exception” in para 15 of Ind-AS 12.

As a result, TUT liability is likely to arise in the case on hand – because, in the year of transfer of a capital asset, a gain of 10,000 recognized in P&L account of the holding company remains included in GloBE income as aforesaid (to recollect, GloBE income is computed at a jurisdictional level, by clubbing book results of the holding company and WOS). Still, there are no corresponding taxes payable on such a gain (either in the form of provision for DTL or provision for current tax because of exemption u/s 47(iv) of ITA).

In the future, assuming there is a violation of conditions of s.47(iv) of ITA and the holding company pays capital gains tax u/s 47A in the year of transfer to WOS, there is no clarity on the GloBE’s impact on the holding company and WOS. As GloBE Rules presently stand, such capital gains tax discharged by the holding company can be reckoned in adjusted covered tax (namely, numerator of ETR) only in a future year when such tax is provided for in the books of the holding company. Hence, there may be no ability to claim a refund of TUT liability already discharged in the year of transfer to WOS.

Example 2: Common control demerger

Assume that FCo (the ultimate parent entity of an MNE Group), has two wholly owned subsidiaries in India; namely DCo and RCo. DCo has two business undertakings, namely U1 and U2. U2 is demerged in favour of RCo under a tax-neutral demerger as per s.2(19AA) of ITA, where RCo issues equity shares to FCo as a consideration for such demerger. As DCo and RCo are considered entities under common control, in the ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts prepared as per IFRS/Ind-AS, both DCo and RCo would record the business transfer at book value. There is no gain recorded in the P&L account of DCo. Accordingly, the question of levying TUT liability as a consequence of tax-neutral demerger may not arise in the present  case.

Without prejudice to the above, even assuming DCo were to prepare ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts based on some other accounting standards other than IFRS/Ind-AS and recognize gain in P&L account w.r.t. tax neutral demerger, due to satisfaction of all three conditions specified aforesaid, such a gain may qualify for exclusion in computing GloBE income of DCo. To recollect, three conditions are as under:

•    Consideration for transfer is, in whole or in significant part, discharged by way of equity interests [namely; RCo issues equity shares to overseas parent of DCo].

•    The transferor’s gain is not subject to tax [namely; DCo’s gain, if any, is exempt from capital gains tax u/s. 47(vib) of ITA].

•    The transferee is required compute taxable income using transferee’s tax basis in the assets [namely; cost base in hands of RCo is pegged to that of DCo, as per Explanation 7A to s.43(1) of ITA and Explanation 2A to s.43(6) of ITA].

Example 3: Non common control demerger


 Tax neutral demerger of U2, by DCo to RCo.

Assume that, FCo1 (ultimate parent entity of an MNE Group), has a subsidiary in India, namely, DCo. DCo has two business undertakings; namely U1 and U2. FCo2 (ultimate parent entity of another unrelated MNE Group), also has a subsidiary in India, namely, RCo. U2 (having book value of 1,000) is demerged by DCo in favour of RCo, pursuant to a tax neutral demerger as per s.2(19AA) of ITA. RCo issues equity shares (having fair value of 11,000) to FCo1 as consideration for such demerger.

DCo and RCo are considered to be entities not under common control. In ‘fit for consolidation ‘accounts’ of DCo, in terms of Appendix A of Ind-AS 10, DCo recognizes a dividend payable of 11,000 (by taking into account fair value of shares to be issued by RCo to FCo1) by debit to reserves or retained earnings. Such dividend payable of 11,000 is settled by transfer of business having book value of 1,000 and difference of 10,000 is credited to P&L account of DCo. D Co does not pay any capital gains tax [as per s.47(vib) of ITA] and DCo also does not pay any minimum alternate tax [as per s.115JB(2A)(d) of ITA] in respect of such gain credited to P&L account.

Where all the three conditions are met, gain of 10,000 credited to P&L account can be excluded from GloBE income of DCo. In the present case:

•    Consideration for transfer is, in whole or in significant part, discharged by way of equity interests [namely; RCo issues equity shares to FCo1, the overseas parent of DCo].

•    The transferor’s gain is not subject to tax [namely; DCo’s gain, if any, is exempt from capital gains tax
u/s 47(vib) of ITA as also from MAT tax u/s 115JB(2A)(d)].

•    The transferee is required to compute taxable income using the transferee’s tax basis in the assets, [namely; the cost base in the hands of RCo is pegged to that of DCo, as per Explanation 7A to s.43(1) of ITA and Explanation 2A to s.43(6) of ITA].

However, assuming RCo were to claim cost step-up in respect of assets received upon demerger while computing taxable income as per ITA [by relying on Supreme Court’s decision in case of Smiffs Securities (2012) (348 ITR 302)], the third condition is not satisfied. In such a case, a gain of 10,000, credited to the P&L account of D Co, cannot be excluded from the GloBE income of DCo and may be subject to TUT liability.

Example 4: Tax exempt transfer by LLP to company u/s 47(xiii) of ITA

Assume that the FCo (ultimate parent entity of an MNE Group) has a 99 per cent interest in an LLP, where intellectual property assets are predominant. The enterprise value of such LLP is 11,000, comprising tangible assets of 1,000 and self-generated brand of 10,000. For diverse commercial considerations, the following reorganization is implemented after GloBE Rules are introduced:

•    FCo to incorporate ICo.

•    LLP to transfer business as slump sale to ICo for agreed monetary consideration of 11,000 i.e. fair value, to be discharged in the form of allotment of equity shares by ICo to FCo.

•    ICo is to allot equity shares to FCo at a premium, such that the aggregate issue price is 11,000.

LLP and partners comply with all conditions of s.47(xiii) of ITA, and thus qualify for exemption u/s 47(xiii) of ITA. ICo allocates 1,000 to tangible assets and 10,000 to identifiable intangible assets (being brand). For the present case study, one may proceed on the assumption that purchase price allocation is on a fair and reasonable basis and that ICo is entitled to claim depreciation u/s 32 on intangible assets of 10,000 over 4 years basis SLM (assumed for simplicity). In terms of s.49(1)(iii)(e) of ITA, ICo cannot claim any cost step-up while computing capital gains on transfer of brand.

In the ‘‘fit for consolidation’ accounts, in terms of IFRS/Ind-AS, accounting principles applicable to a common control business combination are applied. Accordingly, both LLP and ICo recognize business transfer at book value of the transferor. The following is the accounting treatment adopted in P&L account forming part of ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts:

•    LLP recognizes profits of 10,000 in partner’s capital a/c (or other equity a/c), and not in P&L a/c.

•    ICo recognizes LLP’s assets in books based on carrying values of transferor, at 1,000 – as this is a common control business combination. As ICo does not recognize brand in books, ICo does not provide any amortization of such brand in books, year on year.

•    Considering that tax base of assets is higher by 10,000 and having regard to applicable tax rate of 25 per cent, ICo recognizes DTA of 2,500.

•    Over next 4 years, DTA as recognized will be reversed by debit to P&L a/c as and when amortization for local tax purposes is claimed by ICo. In the facts of the case, such unwinding will be at 625 per annum (namely, yearly depreciation of 2,500 x 25 per cent tax rate) over next four years.

In GloBE calculations of LLP, no adverse implications are likely to arise, because, as aforesaid, LLP does not record any gain on business transfer in P&L account.

In GloBE calculations of ICo, unless the three conditions aforesaid are cumulatively satisfied, DTA recognized by ICo in the year of business acquisition is likely to reduce adjusted covered tax (numerator of ETR). To recollect, generation of DTA reduces adjusted covered tax (and consequently, reduces ETR), and can result in potential TUT liability. A negative ETR also attracts TUT liability4.

In the present facts, the third condition of non-grant of cost step-up (namely; the transferee is required to compute taxable income using transferee’s tax basis in the assets) is not fulfilled. As a result, in GloBE calculations of ICo, DTA generated of 2,500 at 25 per cent tax rate will be recast to 1,500 at 15 per cent tax rate. There could be potential TUT liability on this account, unless the same is shielded by other high-taxed incomes in India.


4  For e.g., assuming ETR is -10 per cent, TUT percentage is 25 per cent [calculated as 15 per cent – (10 per cent) = 25 per cent].

IMPACT OF NON-TAX NEUTRAL BUSINESS TRANSFER

Assume that FCo (ultimate parent entity of an MNE Group) has two wholly owned subsidiaries in India, ICo1 and ICo2. ICo1 transfers business having a book value of 1,000 to ICo2, at fair price of 11,000. The business transfer is not tax neutral (i.e. it is taxable in India). However, in the present case, ICo1 does not pay any capital gains tax on the business transfer because ICo1 sets off capital loss incurred on account of the sale of shares of an associate. Thus, specific to this transaction, ICo1’s tax liability as per ITA is nil.

In ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts, as this is a common control business combination, ICo1 does not recognize any gain on business transfer, and ICo2 records business acquisition at a book value of 1,000. Absent recognition of a gain in the P&L account, there is no TUT liability concerning ICo1. Also, as discussed in the previous part of this article, the capital loss on account of sale of shares of an associate is ignored in computing GloBE income of ICo1. In other words, while such capital loss has gone to reduce capital gains tax liability as per ITA, such a capital loss does not enter the calculation of GloBE income (namely, the denominator of ETR).

As the business transfer is not tax-neutral, ICo2 is eligible for a cost step-up in computing taxable income as per ITA. In ‘fit for ‘consolidation’ accounts, ICo2 recognizes DTA to reflect tax benefit on account of higher depreciation u/s 32 of ITA on the stepped-up cost. In the present case, DTA recognized by ICo2 in the year of business acquisition is 2,500 (book to tax difference of 10,000 x 25 per cent tax rate). For GloBE calculations of ICo2, such generation of DTA will be recast to 1,500 at 15 per cent tax rate. As the generation of DTA reduces adjusted covered tax, there could be a potential TUT liability on this account, unless the same is shielded by other high-taxed incomes in India.

ANTI-AVOIDANCE PROVISIONS FOR INTRA-GROUP ASSET TRANSFERS AFTER 30th NOVEMBER, 2021 BUT BEFORE APPLICABILITY OF GLoBE RULES

Article 9.1.3 provides that, in the case of intra-group asset transfers (i.e. amongst constituent entities of the same MNE Group) effected after 30th November, 20215 but before applicability of GloBE Rules, GloBE income of transferee will be calculated by taking into account the carrying values of transferor6.

5    30th November, 2021 is when GloBE Rules were expected to be published – though they actually got published on 20th December, 2021. Article 9.1.3 is a specific anti avoidance provision to control restructuring which may happen after 30th November 2021 but before applicability of GloBE Rules, with a view to dilute future GloBE TUT liability – while such restructuring by itself may not attract any immediate GloBE TUT liability because such restructuring happens when GloBE Rules are not yet effective.


6    Additionally, adjusted covered tax of transferee is computed by ignoring adjustments to deferred tax in books of transferee as a result of such intra-group asset transfers. This is also clarified by OECD Secretariat in virtual public consultation meeting held on 25th April, 2022.
The impact of article 9.1.3 is explained using a case study. Assume that, the FCo (ultimate parent entity of an MNE Group), has two subsidiaries, IPCo1 in nil tax jurisdiction and IPCo2 in high-tax jurisdiction (having tax rate of 15 per cent). IPCo1 owns self-generated brand that has book value of zero and fair value of 10,000. On 1st April, 2022 (i.e. after 30th  November, 2021 but before GloBE Rules are effective), IPCo1 transfers the brand to IPCo2 for fair value of 10,000. IPCo2 annually receives royalty income of 5,000 on such brand.

IPCo2 amortizes the cost of such a brand in ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts as also in computation of taxable income at 2,000 per annum over 5 years. The taxable income of IPCo2 for local tax purposes (after deduction of brand amortization) is 3,000, and the local tax liability of IPCo2 at 15 per cent tax rate is 450.

In the absence of article 9.1.3, GloBE income of IPCo2 would have been computed at 3,000, after considering deduction on account of brand amortisation. ETR of IPCo2 would have been 15 per cent (i.e. 450 / 3,000) – and there would have been no GloBE TUT liability in respect of IPCo2.  

Article 9.1.3 provides that, in the present case, the GloBE income of IPCo2 should be based on the carrying value of IPCo1. As a result, the carrying value of the brand is zero in computing the GloBE income of IPCo2. Thus, GloBE income of IPCo2 is 5,000, after disallowing brand amortization of 2,000 per annum. The ETR of IPCo2 is 9 per cent (i.e. 450 / 5,000), which attracts GloBE TUT liability of 6 per cent on GloBE income of 5,000. Article 9.1.3, therefore, seeks to control the cost step-up by shifting the assets from low tax jurisdiction to high tax jurisdiction after 30th November, 2021 but before the applicability of GloBE Rules.7


7    Assuming such a brand transfer happens after GloBE Rules apply, in year of brand transfer, IPCo1 is likely to trigger immediate GloBE TUT liability at 15 per cent on gain of 10,000. In subsequent years, brand amortisation can be deducted in computing GloBE income of IPCo2.

Article 9.1.3 applies, irrespective of whether the intra-group transfer was for business and commercial considerations, such that the test of domestic General Anti Avoidance Rule and/or treaty PPT is passed. Article 9.1.3 applies regardless of whether the transferor and transferee are within the same or in different jurisdictions. However, it does not apply to transfers of inventory.

Article 9.1.3 is agnostic to what may have been the capital gains tax liability of the transferor in its jurisdiction in respect of the intra-group transfer. To illustrate, assuming that the aforesaid transaction of the brand transfer happened between two wholly owned subsidiaries of FCo in India, the transferor WOS may have discharged capital gains tax liability as per ITA on the transfer of self-generated brand at ~20 per cent. A literal application of article 9.1.3 may prevent transferee WOS from deducting brand amortization in computing GloBE income – which may result in GloBE TUT liability because brand amortization is deducted in computing taxable income as per ITA. Representations are made to the OECD to restrict the applicability of Article 9.1.3 to intra-group transfer that is tax exempt in the hands of the transferor, or where the transferor is in low tax jurisdiction. UK HMRC has also acknowledged significant uncertainty on this provision and has stated that this issue is to be raised as part of the GloBE implementation framework.

SPECIAL RULES FOR JOINT VENTURES UNDER GLoBE RULES8

To recollect, GloBE Rules are generally applicable to recover TUT in respect of subsidiaries consolidated on a line-by-line basis in consolidated financial statements of the ultimate parent entity. Under Ind-AS/IFRS, only those entities over which UPE has unitary control qualify for line-by-line consolidation. A joint venture (where both co-venturers have joint or shared control, either equally in a 50:50 stake or unequally in a 51:49 stake) is accounted for as per the equity method in CFS, and not as line-by-line consolidation.

As discussed in the previous article, in computing the GloBE income of the co-venturer, gain/loss as per equity method of the joint venture (as also gain/loss on disposal of shares of the joint venture) is excluded. However, where all the following conditions are satisfied, there are special provisions in GloBE Rules that require the co-venturer to bear TUT liability in respect of his proportionate interest in a joint venture:  

•    JV is an entity accounted for under the equity method in CFS of UPE; and

•    UPE of the co-venturer group directly or indirectly holds >= 50 per cent (i.e. at least 50 per cent) ownership interest
 in such JV; and

•    JV Group (namely, JV and subsidiaries of such JV) is not subject to GloBE Rules.

Where all the above conditions are satisfied, the co-venturer group is required to compute jurisdictional ETR and TUT of the JV Group by treating such JV Group as a separate MNE Group. In other words, assuming the co-venturer group has a WOS in the same jurisdiction as JV, the profit/loss and adjusted covered tax of such WOS cannot be blended with JV while determining jurisdictional ETR and TUT of JV Group.


8    Article 6.4
9    The term ‘ownership interest’ is separately defined under GloBE Rules.

The above concept can be better understood using the following illustration.
Assume that the MNE Group A and MNE Group B are two separate MNE Groups whose consolidated revenue as per CFS crosses €750 million and to whom GloBE Rules are applicable. These MNE Groups have come together and formed a JV Co where each MNE Group has an equal 50 per cent ownership interest. The JV Co is accounted for under equity method in the CFS of these MNE Groups.

The JV Co is merely a holding company which operates through three subsidiaries abroad having operations in zero tax jurisdiction, namely JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3. JV Sub 1 has profit of 10,000. JV Sub 2 has loss of 15,000. JV Sub 3 has profit of 20,000.

JV Co itself prepares CFS to consolidate the results of these subsidiaries, and consolidated revenue as per such CFS is < € 750 million.

In this case, all three conditions specified above are satisfied qua both MNE Groups A and B. Hence, special provisions in GloBE Rules for JV are applicable qua both MNE Groups A and B. As per these special provisions, the jurisdictional ETR/TUT for JV Co Group is calculated separately, as if the JV Co Group is a separate MNE Group – de-hors any subsidiaries that MNE Groups A and B may have in the jurisdiction of JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3. For example, assuming MNE Group A has a WOS in the same jurisdiction as JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3, and such WOS incurs a loss of 15,000 – while the aggregate profit of JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3 is 15,000 – loss of such WOS cannot be blended while determining ETR/TUT of JV Group as the JV Group is deemed as a separate MNE Group.

As per these special provisions, the ultimate parent entity of each co-venturer group that satisfies the three conditions specified above, is subject to TUT liability to the extent of his proportionate ownership interest in JV Co Group. In the present case, jurisdictional ETR of the JV Co Group is zero and its jurisdictional TUT is 15,000 x 15 per cent = 2,250. The MNE Group A is subject to TUT liability of 1,125 and likewise, the MNE Group B is also subject to TUT liability of 1,125. As per top-down approach, if the jurisdiction of the ultimate parent entity of the co-venturer group has not implemented GloBE Rules, such TUT liability can be recovered from the intermediate parent of such co-venturer group which directly or indirectly holds joint ownership interest in JV Co.

Contrastingly, assuming MNE Groups A and B each held 50 per cent ownership interest directly in JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3 (without any holding company such as JV Co in between), ETR and TUT liability would have been calculated separately in respect of each of JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3 – because each of JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3 would be considered as a separate MNE Group. In this case, for JV Sub 3, MNE Group A would have been subject to TUT liability of 1,500 (namely, jurisdictional profit of 20,000 x 15 per cent x 50 per cent) and for JV Sub 1, MNE Group A would have been subject to TUT liability of 750 (namely; 10,000 x 15 per cent x 50 per cent).

Contrastingly, where MNE Groups A and B each held only 49 per cent ownership interest in JV Co – the remaining 2 per cent held by a third party – the second condition (of holding at least 50 per cent ownership interest) is not satisfied qua both MNE Groups A and B. Hence, special provisions in GloBE Rules for JV are not applicable for both MNE Groups A and B. Hence, neither MNE Group A nor MNE Group B needs to pay TUT liability in respect of JV Co Group.

Contrastingly, where consolidated revenue as per JV cCo’s CFS itself is > € 750 million and the jurisdiction of JV Co has adopted GloBE Rules – the third condition is not satisfied. Hence, special provisions in GloBE Rules for JV are not applicable for both M NE Groups A and B. In this case, the JV Co Group itself becomes an in-scope MNE Group – and the JV Co pays TUT in respect of each of JV Sub 1 to JV Sub 3 as per income inclusion rule. As TUT is recovered from JV Co itself, co-venturer groups are exempt from such TUT.

SPECIAL RULES FOR PEs UNDER GLoBE RULES

In order to ensure parity between different forms of overseas operations (whether through a subsidiary or through a branch), as well as to check the possibility of blending of low-taxed income earned in HO jurisdiction with high taxed income in jurisdiction where PE is situated, under the GloBE Rules, a PE is treated as a separate constituent entity, distinct from its HO or any other PE of such HO10.

In fact, HO with only one or more PEs can also constitute an MNE Group within scope of GloBE Rules even if there are no other subsidiaries (subject however to satisfaction of revenue threshold being >= € 750 million)11. For example, a large pharmaceutical MNE having only domestic manufacturing and R&D operations deriving revenue mainly from exports can constitute an MNE Group even in absence of overseas subsidiaries, if there are branch offices in overseas location/s which satisfy any of the four limbs of PE stated below.

What is a PE?12

For GloBE purposes, the term PE is defined broadly to have 4 legs (paragraphs) as below:

•    Para (a) – Treaty PE: Covers cases where a place of business is situated in the source jurisdiction, which is treated as a PE, following the applicable tax treaty (which has come into effect) between the HO-source jurisdiction and source jurisdiction taxes the income “attributable” to such PE in accordance with a provision “similar” to the business profits article of OECD Model Convention (MC) 2017 – irrespective of whether such applicable treaty between HO-source jurisdiction replicates the language or outcomes of Article 7 of OECD MC 2017. Treaty PE will typically include a Fixed PE and other forms of deemed PEs (like Service PE, Agency PE, Construction PE) which form a part of the HO-Source Jurisdiction tax treaty. However, cases where a place of business is not treated as a PE as per treaty due to a specific exception, such as the preparatory or auxiliary exception, may not be covered by Para (a). Similarly, the HO jurisdiction engaged in the operation of an aircraft in international traffic sets up a place of business in the source jurisdiction for such purpose, profits that are not taxed in the source jurisdiction due to specific exemption. This may not be covered by Para (a).


10    Article 1.3.1 and 1.3.2
11    Article 1.2.1 and 1.2.3
12    Article 10.1


•    Para (b) – Domestic PE: Covers cases where there is no tax treaty between the HO-source jurisdiction – and where the source jurisdiction has adopted a definition and taxation rules of PE (or a similar concept) in its domestic law, such that it taxes the income attributable to such PE on a net-basis, identical to the manner in which it taxes its residents. For example, business connection u/s 9(1) of ITA. Interesting questions may arise about whether Para (b) of the PE definition may extend to cover virtual presence (for example, SEP), assuming the same is taxed on a net basis.

•    Para (c) – Hypothetical PE: Covers cases where there is no tax treaty between the HO-source jurisdiction, and where the source jurisdiction does not have a corporate tax system, where a place of business in the source jurisdiction  would be treated as a PE under the OECD MC – and such PE would have been taxed under Article 7 dealing with business profits of such OECD MC13. Illustratively, this may be relevant for an HO in India which has a branch/presence/project in the Cayman Islands which passes the threshold of PE presence as per Article 5 of OECD MC 2017, which would have been taxed as per Article 7 of OECD MC 2017, but the Cayman Islands does not have a corporate tax system, and India does not have a treaty with Cayman Islands.


13    Interestingly, for this purpose, while the Model Rules define the OECD MC as referring to the 2017 update, the Commentary goes on to state that the “last version… of the year in which the analysis is made” to determine presence of PE

•    Para (d) – Stateless PE: This is a residual category applicable where none of the above legs of the PE definition are triggered, and yet, the HO jurisdiction exempts the income earned from activities in the source jurisdiction on account of their overseas nature and follows ?exemption method’ in order to provide relief from double taxation on such income. This category acknowledges that HO jurisdiction may provide exemption under domestic law for overseas operations in a situation where there is neither a treaty nor a domestic law in jurisdiction leading to double non-taxation for PE profits. A case where there is no treaty and no domestic tax law in source jurisdiction but HO jurisdiction does not provide exemption for overseas operations is covered by para (c) above – while Para (d) effectively deals with situations of double non-taxation as illustrated above.

Importantly, as contradistinguished from other types of PEs covered by Paras (a) to (c) above, a PE covered by Para (d) is considered stateless of the GloBE Rules, meaning that the income of the PE would be subject to the GloBE Rules on a standalone basis without the benefit of jurisdictional blending with profits/ losses of other constituent entities located either in HO or in source jurisdiction.

Generally, a PE is located in the jurisdiction where it is treated as a PE, and is subject to tax14 [except in case of Stateless PE at Para (d) of the definition above].

Determination of ETR of PE

Considering that the concept of PE is found in the taxation laws rather than in accounting (as is also acknowledged by the Commentary), accounts may typically not treat the profits of a PE any differently than the profits of HO jurisdiction, leading to questions on the determination of ETR especially in cases where any separate financial accounts of PE do not exist. Accordingly, GloBE Rules have special provisions for the same as below:

•  Determination of GloBE income of PE15

For types of PEs covered by paras (a) to (c) above, the starting point for determining GloBE income of PE is income or loss of PE as per separate financial accounts on a standalone basis prepared by the PE (either prepared or required to be prepared specifically for computing GloBE income) based on accounting standards used in CFS of UPE.


14    Article 10.3.3
15    Article 3.4 of the Model Rules

Thereafter, specified adjustments are made to arrive at GloBE income, based on the types of PEs described above, which may be tabulated as below:

Clause

Type of
PE

Adjustments
to determine GloBE income of PE

(a)

Treaty PE

Adjusted, if
necessary, to reflect only incomes and expenses
“attributable”
to the PE in accordance with relevant tax treaty
[for Para (a) PE] or domestic tax law of source jurisdiction [for Para (b)
PE] respectively
irrespective of the actual profits offered or subjected
to tax (say, – effects on account of disallowances as per domestic tax law
such as s.43B or accelerated depreciation in source jurisdiction are ignored
for determining GloBE income).

(b)

Domestic PE
(where corporate income tax law exists but no treaty)

(c)

Hypothetical
PE (no treaty and no corporate income tax law exists)

Adjusted, if
necessary, to reflect only incomes and expenses that would have been
“attributable” to the PE as per Article 7 of the OECD MC dealing with business
profits, which requires attribution based on functions performed, assets used
and risks undertaken.

In all such cases, any amount attributed to the PE and considered for GloBE income determination of PE is to be generally excluded16 while determining the GloBE income of HO.

For a stateless PE, GloBE income is the income exempted as per domestic tax laws of the HO jurisdiction, attributable to operations conducted overseas (namely; outside the HO jurisdiction). The expenses, which can be deducted against such income are those which are not deducted as per domestic tax laws of the HO jurisdiction. However,  nevertheless, they are attributable to operations conducted overseas.

 • Determination of Adjusted Covered Taxes of PE17

Tax paid on the income attributable to the PE as enumerated above (even if paid by the HO in the HO jurisdiction), is also allocated to the PE and considered for the determination of ETR of the location of the PE namely; the source jurisdiction18 [except in Para (d) PE namely; Stateless PE which does not qualify for jurisdictional blending]. In this regard, the determination of taxes paid in the HO jurisdiction related to the PE may be a complex exercise and is acknowledged by the Commentary as needing further work.

• Miscellaneous

The parameters of employees and tangible assets located in PE jurisdiction are not taken into account while computing the allocation keys for UTPR liability19 and substance-based income exclusion20 of HO jurisdiction.


16    In the context of jurisdictions like India which may permit HO to set-off losses of a PE, special rules are provided in Article 3.4.5 for allocation of income of the PE in future years. On a similar note, tax adjustments for determination of ETR in such case are also given at Article 4.3.4.
17    Article 4.3
18    Understandably, cross-border allocation is not a feature of Stateless PE as defined in Para (d) of the definition, as such PE in fact is identified based on exemption provided by the HO jurisdiction.
19    Refer Definition of Number of Employees and Tangible Assets at Article 10.1.
20    Refer Article 5.3.6


Case study on PE and presumptive taxation

Facts: To illustrate, assume FCo of Germany, part of an in-scope MNE Group for GloBE Rules, has a project office (PO) in India providing services in connection with extractive activities in the crude oil sector.

*FCo is part of in-scope MNE Group providing services in India  in connection with extractive activities in the crude oil sector.

Gross receipts of FCo from operations in India is 1,000. In India, FCo offers income to tax on presumptive basis u/s 44BB which deems profit from such operations to be 10 per cent of the gross income i.e. 100. Accordingly, corporate tax paid by FCo in India at 40 per cent21 is 40.

FCo has not availed the opportunity u/s 44BB(3) to offer a lower amount of income to tax in India. Accordingly, the FCo does not maintain any books of accounts in India. While FCo is required to maintain financial statements in Germany in accordance with German Accounting Standards, such financial statements do not require separate identification of revenue and expenditure attributable to the PE.


21    Approximate tax rates have been taken for ease of computation.

Based on internal MIS, the following revenue and expenditure is found attributable to the PE:

Particulars

Expenses

Particulars

Income

Direct expenses

400

Gross Revenue

1,000

Indirect expenses allocated by HO

200

 

 

Net profit (Bal Fig.)

400

 

 

Under the German domestic tax law, PE profits are exempt from tax. As per German domestic tax law, such PE profits are computed at 500.

Analysis: Para (a) of PE definition requires the following conditions to be satisfied for existence of PE thereunder:

•   Existence of place of business/deemed place of business.

•   Treatment as PE in accordance with relevant treaty (namely India-Germany) in force.

•   Source jurisdiction (namely India) to tax income “attributable” to PE in accordance with provisions “similar” to Article 7 of OECD MC 2017.

In this regard, there presently exist ambiguities whether presumptive taxation provisions in India as per s.44BB satisfies the last condition of taxation similar to Article 7 of OECD MC 2017. To recollect, taxation should be as per provision “similar” to and not “same as” Article 7 of OECD MC 2017. As per commentary, “similar” does not require the source jurisdiction “to replicate the language or outcomes” of Article 7 of OECD MC 2017, and can cover treaties based on OECD MC 2010 and UN MC 201722. Whether s.44BB merely provides an alternative mechanism for taxation of income “attributable” to PE which is “similar” to Article 7 of OECD MC 2017 resulting in satisfaction of Para (a) of the PE definition, or, does s.44BB go beyond that (and does not satisfy condition of being “similar” to Article 7 of OECD MC 2017), can be a matter of debate.


22    Refer para 102, pg. 210 of commentary.

Where, the conditions of Para (a) of PE definition are met, as indicated in the table above, the start point of GloBE income for Para (a) of PE definition is income or loss as per separate financial accounts of PE, as adjusted, if necessary, to reflect only incomes and expenses “attributable” to the PE in accordance with India-Germany treaty. The parameters of taxation as per domestic tax laws of source jurisdiction (India) as well as of HO jurisdiction (Germany) are irrelevant. S.44BB only determines taxable income, whereas GloBE income of PE needs to be based on revenue and expenses “attributable” to PE as per accounting principles as further adjusted in accordance with business profits article of relevant treaty. Accordingly, GloBE income of PE will be 400 and ETR 10 per cent (40/ 400). This may attract TUT liability at 5 per cent.

Alternatively, where conditions of Para (a) of PE definition are not met since taxation as per s.44BB is not considered to be “similar” to Article 7 of OECD MC 2017, Para (d) of PE definition namely; Stateless PE will trigger. In such case of Stateless PE, GloBE income will be amount exempted as per domestic tax laws of Germany i.e. 500. In such case, ETR is 8 per cent (40/500). This may attract TUT liability at 7 per cent. Again, for the purposes of Stateless PE, parameters of taxation as per domestic tax laws of source jurisdiction (India) are irrelevant.

DE MINIMIS EXCLUSION FOR THE JURISDICTION23

To avoid compliance burden of applying GloBE to all jurisdictions, jurisdictions having, in aggregate, average GloBE revenue of < € 10 million [Rs. ~80 Cr.] and average GloBE income < € 1 million [Rs. ~8 Cr.] or loss are excluded. The parameters of all CEs in a jurisdiction needs to be aggregated for testing this threshold.

To evaluate if this exclusion is applicable, MNE would need to compute GloBE revenue and GloBE income for the jurisdiction. The reference point is therefore income/revenue as adjusted for GloBE purposes. To minimize volatility, the exclusion is linked to average, determined by adopting simple average for current and preceding two fiscal years. In the computation of average:

•    Fiscal years that are not GloBE years (i.e. when GloBE Rules did not apply to the MNE – either because they are before applicability of GloBE Rules to in-scope MNE or because € 750 million threshold is not crossed) are excluded.

•    Fiscal years in which MNE had no presence in the jurisdiction (due to absence of CEs or such CEs were dormant) are also excluded.

To illustrate, for a newly formed MNE (to whom GloBE Rules did not apply in the past), a 3-year average may not be needed and GloBE revenue/income for evaluating the above exclusion is based on the current year alone. For year 2, the above exclusion is based on 2-year average i.e. current year as also preceding year.


23    Article 5.5


IMPLEMENTATION AND ADMINISTRATION – ACHIEVES THE PROFESSED OBJECT OF SIMPLICITY AND CERTAINTY?
Recognizing the gargantuan nature of BEPS 2.0 project potentially impacting MNE Groups worldwide, right from the initial days, OECD has time and again emphasized on the need for simplicity, certainty and objectivity, to ensure that business and growth is not stifled. Despite this, one may nevertheless perceive (and perhaps, justifiably) that the final shape taken by the GloBE Rules inherently necessitates a huge compliance burden on MNE Groups.

Every MNE Group is required to file a GloBE Information Return (GIR). While GIR needs to be filed only once internationally24, such GIR requires myriad data points, some of which are not otherwise captured for local tax or financial reporting purposes. Some of the data which is required to be filed in GIR are:

•    Data available from financial accounts: Revenue, deferred tax, profits, dividend and capital gains on investments, etc.

•    Data available from income tax filings: Income tax accrued, PE status of branches, WHT and dividend tax, ALP in respect of intra-group transactions, business reorganizations, income tax accrued in respect of incomes excluded from GloBE income, etc.

•    Other data specifically collected for GloBE Rules: whether provision for DTL has reversed within 5 years, recast DTA/DTL to 15 per cent tax rate, maintain track of DTA for tax loss recognized and reversed under GloBE Rules, maintain track of various elections and choices under the GloBE Rules, standalone financial results of PE, determine ownership interest in the constituent entity for  computing TUT liability, etc.


24    The jurisdiction where such GIR is filed needs to automatically share this information with all other jurisdictions where MNE Group operates [Article 8.1].

The authors believe that there are at least 50 data points which need to be computed and tracked exclusively for GloBE compliance. Various industry representatives have also alluded to the army of personnel required to ensure GloBE compliance.

While, at a conceptual level, this compliance burden is sought to be alleviated through the application of objective safe harbours, the actual design of such safe havens may be presently unclear and awaits clarity. The need to balance the request for simplicity by MNE Groups with the desire of tax authorities to ensure at least 15 per cent tax in each jurisdiction without leakage is a tightrope that OECD/BEPS IF needs to balance.

The Commentary gives many indications to evince that OECD/BEPS IF shall continually handhold implementation by developing a GloBE Implementation Framework and an Agreed Administrative Guidance, to guide jurisdictions for coherent and consistent implementation of GloBE Rules.

In this backdrop, as per ‘OECD’s economic analysis, GloBE Rules are estimated to generate $150 billion of additional tax revenues per year. One may wonder if this revenue is commensurate with the enhanced compliance costs and significant efforts that implementation of GloBE Rules may entail.

THE ROAD AHEAD

Considering the above, despite the OECD/BEPS IF setting an ambitious timeline of 2023 for implementation of the IIR, and 2024 for the implementation of the UTPR, various concerns have arisen over the short and ambitious implementation timeline, which may not have adequately factored in impact of such over-arching measures.

These concerns are evident from stalling of legislative developments within the US and EU. To address these concerns, the EU was the first to shift the timeline for implementation by a year – which is now also being replicated across jurisdictions like UK and Hong Kong.

Nonetheless, various jurisdictions (illustratively, Mauritius, Switzerland and Korea) are well ahead of the curve to legislate the GloBE Rules, and a plethora of other jurisdictions (such as Germany, France, Netherlands, Singapore, Indonesia, Malaysia) have indicated their intention to adopt GloBE Rules.

However, despite the growing acceptability of the GloBE Rules, Indian tax authorities, despite India being a signatory to the agreement of BEPS, that  released in July and October 2021, has not released any official statement stating India’s position on GloBE Rules. Rather, the focus of the Indian Government seems to be on the implementation of Pillar 1 and subject-to-tax rules (STTR). To an impartial observer, it may seem that India is on a wait-and-watch mode. Perhaps implementation may happen only after further guidance and clarifications are made available from OECD/BEPS IF.

[The authors are thankful to CA Geeta D. Jani and CS Aastha Jain (LLB) for their guidance and support.]

Transfer Pricing – Benchmarking of Overdue Receivables and Payables – Complexities and Caution

Receivables and payables are inevitable parts of any business transaction. While group entities generally focus on the main transaction of import or export of goods or services, it is extremely important to keep track of the settlements of consequent receivables and payables. The delay in settlement of transactions could subject the MNE Group to onerous compliances, additional costs and penal consequences if there is a slippage in the appropriate disclosures.

Owing to rising disputes, while the CBDT brought the specific amendment to clarify this aspect with retrospective effect in Finance Act 2012, it is important first to understand the history and logic behind this controversial issue:

BACKGROUND OF THE ISSUE

Before the Finance Act 2012, a significant controversy erupted due to a lack of clarity as to whether the transaction of overdue receivables/ payables should be considered as a separate international transaction. The Indian revenue authorities astutely noticed instances of funding overseas group entities by delaying the settlement of the inter-company transaction. However, as there was no clear guidance to consider overdue receivables/payables as an international transaction, the legislature came up with the below-mentioned clarification vide the Finance Act 2012.

The definition of ‘international transaction’ u/s 92B of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (“the Act”) was amended to widen its scope. Clause (c) was added to the sub-section (2) of section 92B, with retrospective effect from 1st April, 2002 as mentioned below:

“(c) capital financing, including any type of long-term or short-term borrowing, lending or guarantee, purchase or sale of marketable securities or any type of advance, payments or deferred payment or receivable or any other debt arising during the course of business.”

It is important to note that while the Memorandum contained reference as regards to the purpose of inclusion of various items in the definition, there was no specific mention of ‘capital financing’ and the purpose or implication of its inclusion within the definition of ‘international transaction’.

As per the Guidance note on Report under Section 92E of the Act issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (‘ICAI’):

“Advance payments received or made and debts arising during the course of business shall need to be carefully considered and reported by the accountant however ensuring that there is no duplication or overlap with reporting of the principal transactions to which such advances or debts relate to, unless the accountant identifies factors which cause such advances or debts as separate transactions.”

In view of the above, the issue to be considered is whether the trade advances/trade receivables / similar deferred payments should be treated as:

  • Arising in the ordinary course of the business of the taxpayer and hence would not constitute a separate ‘international transaction’ (the impact of the interest loss on account of the credit period would get offset by the higher profits earned on account of the increase in sales or pricing as a result of extending such credit terms to the customers);

OR

  • Separate lending or borrowing transactions liable to interest.


BENCHMARKING OF THE TRANSACTION

As mentioned above, since the overdue receivables issue is litigative, it is important to analyze it in detail and take appropriate actions beforehand.

On the basis the guidance provided by ICAI, one of the most important exercises is to delineate outstanding receivables arising in the ordinary course of business from the receivables for which the realization is intentionally delayed to fund the overseas associated enterprises (‘AE’). The following steps may be followed for the same:

Step 1 –
Identify receivables in the ordinary course of business. Since the principal transaction would already be benchmarked, separate benchmarking of such outstanding receivables may lead to duplication. Hence, an exercise needs to be conducted to separate the overdue receivables as per the contractual agreement with the overseas AE.

Step 2 – Post conducting of such an exercise, an analysis may also be conducted qua industry practice, on the basis of the information available in the public domain to identify the general credit period prevalent in such industry (e.g., textile and real estate enjoy higher credit period as compared to commodity and bullion) to determine the overdue receivables in comparison to the comparable companies.

Step 3 – The receivables overdue qua contract and qua industry need to be reported and benchmarked appropriately. To benchmark these overdue receivables, it is crucial to determine the reason for such a delay in realization. In case of genuine reasons beyond the control of the taxpayers, appropriate documentation should be maintained to prove such a bona fide reason. Certain common practical challenges faced by businesses recently are listed below (illustrative):

a)    Supply chain disruptions in view of COVID may cause a shortage of containers for transit of goods impacting the sale of goods sold on Free on Board (‘FOB’) basis.

b)    In cases where semi-finished goods are sold to the AE which further sells the goods to ultimate customers, due to a shortage of containers for shipment, the AE is unable to ship the goods and hence delays the sale and realization on an overall basis.

c)    Due to the ongoing geo-political reasons and point a) mentioned above, the transit time of shipments has significantly increased.

d)    Liquidity crunch or bankruptcy of AE may have led to write-off in the books of the taxpayer.

e)    Delay in realization of the amount from the ultimate customer may lead to delayed payment by the AE to the taxpayer.

f)    In certain cases, the taxpayer, at the time of finalization of books determines the true-up required to be recovered from AE as per the contractual agreement. Since the determination of true-up is done at the time of finalization of books, the payment of the same is realized after a long time as compared to the original timeline by which the taxpayer was supposed to realize such an amount.

g)    In some countries, any payment to an overseas party may lead to withholding tax implications requiring the payer to approach the tax authorities for seeking exemption on withholding tax on payment for non-taxable transactions to the taxpayer. Such approval from the tax department may take time and hence, result in the delay of realization.

h)    In certain cases, the taxpayer undertakes the transaction of purchase and sale with the same AE. In WNS Global Services Pvt Ltd – ITA No.1451/Mum/2012, the Mumbai ITAT held that the credit period provided by the AE vis-à-vis credit period provided by the taxpayer for such transactions respectively may require to be analyzed in aggregation, since analyzing the sales transaction in singularity may portray a distorted picture of delayed realization of proceeds to the taxpayer.

Step 4 – Post determining the reason for delayed realization, the next step is to benchmark the overdue receivables. The points mentioned below are important in this context:

a)    For calculating the credit period, the weighted average collection period could be computed (by assigning weights to the value of invoices) rather than computing simple average of collection period. This approach can be useful to put more weights to the high-value transactions. Further, in cases wherein the payment has been received in advance, such negative credit period invoices may also be considered to reduce the overall credit period.

b)    If the reason for a delayed realization is due to genuine business rationale beyond the control of the taxpayer as well as the AE, detailed documentation at an appropriate time is the key to benchmarking the transaction and creating a defense against potential adjustment. For instance:

– In case of long transit time for shipment of goods, a formal dialogue for renegotiating the credit period offered to the AE and the resulting amendment in the contract, along with documentation of detailed justification of such modification, can portray the genuineness of variation in credit period.

–  In case of a liquidity crunch or bankruptcy of an AE, formal documentation of various attempts made for the recovery and statutory documents supporting such a condition may create a substantial backup for benchmarking.

– In cases where the determination of a true-up at the time of finalization of books resulted in the delayed realization of receivables, one of the possible solutions can be that the AE provides an ad-hoc advance payment during the end of the financial year on the basis of the history of such true-up payments in earlier years. While the accurate amount gets determined at the time of finalization of books, such advance payment by the AE can create an important backup for the taxpayer to prove that there was a bona fide intention of the taxpayer for realizing the amount in time and only the differential amount can be settled at a later point of time.

– If the AE has funds but is unable to pay the taxpayer on time due to regulatory reasons, such an amount may be earmarked and deposited in the bank, and the interest earned on it may also be passed on to the taxpayer as and when the principal amount is paid to the taxpayer. Such an arrangement can justify that the taxpayer has not suffered any loss due to the delayed receipt of the amount.

Further, it may be separately noted that as per the FEMA regulations, the period of realization for exports is nine months from the date of export.

However, the RBI had extended the period of realization of export proceeds from the existing nine months to fifteen months from the date of export due to the COVID pandemic for exports made between 1st April, 2020 to 31st July, 2020. Such an extension of timeline for realization of proceeds by RBI can also be taken as a base to substantiate the delay in realization of proceeds during such period on an overall basis due to industry-wide and worldwide issues.

However, it is to be noted that the above timeline is the maximum period within which the export proceeds are required to be realized.

The above reasons, supported with the detailed backup documentation can also help the taxpayers avoid substantiate penal consequences, if any, as the same may prove the bona fide intent of the taxpayer to the tax administrators.

c)    If the taxpayer is unable to prove the genuine business reason for delayed receipt, the taxpayer may be required to receive an arm’s length interest income for the overdue period.

The above steps can be followed to comprehensively analyze the outstanding receivables and decide the need for separate disclosure and benchmarking.

CALCULATION OF THE ARM’S LENGTH INTEREST INCOME

Once it is determined that overdue receivables are not due to specific business reasons, and an arm’s length interest income is required to be recovered from AE, the next step would be to calculate the interest income. For such calculation, the most important criterion would be the determination of the basis of interest rate.

As per various judicial precedents in sync with the commercial logic:

A)    If the receivable is denominated in the foreign currency and upon realization of the same, the currency gain or loss due to the fluctuation in the exchange rate will be borne by the Indian taxpayer, then the appropriate reference rate for determining the arm’s length interest charge would be LIBOR (London Interbank Offered Rate) / SOFR (Secured Overnight Financing Rate) / SONIA (Sterling Overnight Interbank Average Rate), etc.

B)    If the receivable is denominated in the Indian currency, then the appropriate base rate would be the Indian bank reference rate such as PLR, base rate, etc.

Reference rates prescribed by the Indian tax and other regulatory authorities with respect to minimum interest income to be charged on loans and advances provided to AE for specific cases:

a)    As per safe harbour rule 10T of Income-tax Rules, 1962 (‘IT Rules’):

i.    If the intra-group loan is advanced in Indian Currency – the interest rate is to be charged on the one-year marginal cost of funds lending rate of State Bank of India plus prescribed basis points as per the credit rating of AE.

ii.    If the intra-group loan is advanced in Foreign Currency – the interest rate is to be charged on the six-month LIBOR of the relevant foreign currency plus prescribed basis points as per the credit rating of AE.

b)    As per rule 10CB of IT Rules, in case a transfer pricing adjustment is made, and such adjustment money is not repatriated back to India by the taxpayer within the prescribed period, the same gets recharacterized as advance provided to AE (secondary adjustment) and interest on the same is required to be levied at the rate of:

i.    In case the respective international transaction is denominated in Indian Currency – at one-year marginal cost of fund lending rate of State Bank of India as on 1st April of the relevant previous year plus 325 basis points.

ii.    In case the respective international transaction is denominated in Foreign Currency – at six-month LIBOR as on 30th September of the relevant previous year plus 300 basis points.

c)    As per Foreign Exchange Management (Overseas Investment) Regulations, 2022, loans advanced by an Indian entity should be backed by a loan agreement with an arm’s length interest rate charged on the same.

d)    In terms of Regulation 15 of Notification No. FEMA 23 (R)/2015-RB dated 12th January, 2016, where an exporter receives advance payment (with or without interest), from a buyer outside India, the exporter shall be under an obligation to ensure that the shipment of goods is made within one year from the date of receipt of advance payment; the rate of interest, if any, payable on the advance payment should not exceed LIBOR plus 100 basis points.

The above-prescribed interest rate may be considered as a guide. However, the exact computation of arm’s length interest rate will depend upon the facts and circumstances of each case.

Further, in case an interest is charged to the AE, then such interest amount needs to be repatriated to India by the AE.

OTHER METHODS OF BENCHMARKING SUPPORTED BY JUDICIAL PRECEDENTS

Since the issue of overdue receivables has been in limelight for many years, there are several judicial precedents accepting certain methods of benchmarking. Such generally accepted benchmarking methodologies are provided below:

a) Working Capital Adjustment

A widely accepted method of benchmarking receivables and payables is undertaking working capital adjustment on the profit level indicator of comparable companies. Under this method, the level of working capital namely debtors, creditors and inventory of the comparable companies is compared against the working capital of the tested party (i.e., either Indian taxpayer or AE) and necessary adjustment is made in the profitability working of the comparable companies to account for the differences in payables, receivables and inventory using an imputed cost of finance for the differences identified. Also, items like advances to and from customers and unbilled revenue can be considered in the computation of a working capital adjustment if they impact the working capital position of the tested party and the comparables. This position has been upheld in certain judicial precedents including CGI Information System & Management Consultant1 and Infineon Technologies India Pvt Ltd2.

1 IT(TP) No. 346/Bang/2015
2 IT(TP)A No.474/Bang/2015

Once such an adjustment is carried out, the working capital adjusted margin of the comparable companies is compared with the profit margin of the tested party. In case the tested party has earned a margin at arm’s length against such working capital adjusted margin of comparable companies, it can be deduced that the outstanding receivables and payables are at arm’s length price.

One of the main features of such working capital adjustment is that it takes into account both debtors and creditors. In view of the same, in case any taxpayer is providing a high credit period in sales, but at the same time is also enjoying high credit period on purchase, such mutual credit period is taken into consideration and, hence it does not portray a distorted picture of only delayed realization of receivables to the taxpayer.

There are many judicial precedents that support the above method of benchmarking (e.g., Kusum Health Care Pvt. Ltd.3 and Visual Graphics Computing Services (India) Pvt Ltd4), and are also recommended by the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (‘OECD’) for benchmarking of debtors and creditors. In view of the same, it may be recommended to conduct this exercise on a regular basis to avoid any potential litigation.

b) Comparison of credit period to AE vis-à-vis unrelated entity

When the taxpayer has transactions with AE and an unrelated entity, in such cases the credit period offered to AE vis-à-vis an unrelated entity can be compared to benchmark the outstanding receivables of the AE. Further, one can evaluate whether the Indian taxpayer has levied interest on delayed receivables from the unrelated entity and whether the interest needs to be charged for delayed receivables from the AE. This approach has also been supported by certain judicial precedents (e.g., M/s Sharda Spuntex Pvt. Ltd5, M/s. DHR Holding India Private Ltd.6, and WNS Global Services Pvt Ltd7).

c) Taxpayer is a debt-free company

Another position favorably accepted in several judicial precedents is that the taxpayer is a debt-free company, and does not incur any interest on the amount stuck in the delayed receivables. Hence, the taxpayer is also not required to levy any interest on the delayed receipt of overdue receivables. This approach has also been supported by certain judicial precedents (e.g. Betchel India Pvt. Ltd8).

3 ITA 765 of 2016, Delhi High Court
4 T.C.A.No.414 of 2018, Madras High Court
5 D.B. Income Tax Appeal No. 56 / 2017, Rajasthan High Court
6 ITA No.1614/Del./2018, Delhi ITAT
7 ITA No.1451/Mum/2012, Mumbai ITAT
8 ITA 379/2016, Delhi High Court

RECEIVABLES ARISING OUT OF SECONDARY ADJUSTMENT
The secondary adjustment has been defined as an adjustment in the books of accounts of the taxpayer and its AE to reflect that the actual allocation of profits between the taxpayer and its AE that are consistent with the arm’s length price as may be determined because of primary adjustment, thereby removing the imbalance between a cash account and actual profit of the taxpayer.

It is further provided that the excess money available with the AE due to the primary adjustment if not repatriated to the taxpayer into India within the prescribed time limit, then the primary adjustment will be deemed as an advance extended to the overseas AE and interest on such advance shall be computed in the manner as prescribed.

In view of the above provisions, receivables arising out of secondary adjustment need to be accounted for in the books along with the interest income as prescribed by CBDT. As mentioned above, since the interest rate has been prescribed by the CBDT, the same provides an indication of the interest rate which may be adopted by the tax authorities for benchmarking of overdue trade receivables as well.

DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS

While the above sections cover the ways for benchmarking outstanding receivables, it is also very important to make appropriate disclosures in Form 3CEB and TP documentation to avoid any non-disclosure implications. The relevant clause where reporting of overdue outstanding receivables and payables is covered in Form 3CEB is provided below:

“Clause 14: Particulars in respect of
lending or borrowing of money:

Has the assessee entered into any international
transaction(s) in respect of lending or borrowing of money including any
type of advance, payments, deferred payments, receivable, non-convertible
preference shares/debentures or any other debt arising during business as
specified in Explanation (i)(c) below section 92B(2)?”

 

[If ‘yes’, provide the following details
in respect of each associated enterprise and each loan/advance:]

(a) Name and address of the associated
enterprise with whom the international transaction has been entered into.

 

(b) Nature of financing agreement.

 

(c) Currency in which transaction has taken
place.

 

(d) Interest rate charged/paid in respect
of each lending/borrowing.

 

(e) Amount paid/received or
payable/receivable in the transaction—

 

(i) as per books of account;

 

(ii) as computed by the assessee having
regard to the arm’s length price

 

(f) Method used for determining the arm’s
length price [See section 92C(1)]

 

i) Receivables – Disclosure
As mentioned above, outstanding receivables need to be bifurcated in the following categories:

a)    Receivables arising out of the ordinary course of business which do not necessitate that the transaction gets recharacterized as advance provided to AEs.

b)    Receivables in nature of debts which warrant the taxpayer to charge interest on such overdue receivables.

From the perspective of disclosure in Form 3CEB, in case of category a) mentioned above, if after carrying out the necessary exercise, as also suggested by ICAI Guidance Note, the receivables are in the ordinary course of business and not characterizable as advances, then reporting of such receivables separately may prove to be duplication of reporting the transactions by way of the principal transaction as well as trade receivables. However, on a conservative basis, such receivables
and payables may be reported in the notes section of Form 3CEB to avoid unnecessary litigation for non-disclosure.

However, in case of category b) mentioned above, it is important to disclose the transaction separately in Form 3CEB in Clause 14, and also to charge interest in line with Para 3 above in order to avoid litigation at a later stage.

Similar disclosures would also be required for receivables arising out of secondary adjustment along with disclosure of the interest income earned from it.

Further, since such overdue receivables are deemed as advance, the same should not trigger compliances under ODI (‘Overseas Direct Investment’) regulations applicable to loan transactions.

ii) Payables – Disclosure
Generally, outstanding payables are not a cause of concern for the Indian taxpayer, but it is important to analyze the same from the perspective of overseas AE.

From the Indian taxpayer’s perspective, if the credit period availed is in excess qua contract and qua industry, one possible interpretation can be that the Indian taxpayer is using such funds at the behest of the overseas AE. However, since it is beneficial from the Indian taxpayer’s perspective, any transfer pricing adjustment made by the Income-tax authorities on such a transaction would have an effect of reducing the income chargeable to tax or increasing the loss, as the case may be. Such adjustment is prohibited vide Section 92(3) of the Act since it leads to base erosion of tax from India.

Further, the outstanding payable of the Indian taxpayer would be outstanding receivable from an overseas AE perspective. It could result in adverse consequences for overseas AE, as the law mandates each taxpayer to demonstrate the arm’s length nature of its international transaction. Further, there are conflicting judgments on the applicability of the base erosion principle while dealing with disputes relating to overseas AE.

Hence, the exercise and steps mentioned for outstanding receivables above should also be followed for outstanding payables to the extent applicable. It would be advisable to make appropriate disclosures of identified overdue payables in Form 3CEB of the Foreign Company and undertake appropriate benchmarking of the same and maintenance of documentation.

CONCLUSION
One may need to review voluminous data to assess the rationale for delays, if any, and consequent interest costs. In case the impact of interest cost resulting from the delay is not significant, then there may be a temptation to ignore charging interest in the inter-company transaction to minimize administrative hassles. However, at this juncture, it is important to weigh the penal consequence of 2 per cent of the transaction value which gets triggered due to the non-disclosure of overdue transactions in the year-end compliances.

In the inter-company contracts, the clauses related to invoicing (i.e., budgeted cost or actual cost) invoice frequency, credit term, penal interest clause etc. should be carefully drafted. Further, aforesaid clauses should be regularly reviewed to ensure the conduct of the parties is in line with contractual arrangements. It is observed that MNCs sometimes mention a percentage of penal interest to be charged in case of delay in payments. However, in actual practice, such an interest is waived or not charged. It is critical that any such waiver is backed with appropriate justification and documentation. Further, in cases wherein parties don’t have the intention to charge penal interest for delays, then such clauses should be carefully drafted as the same can go against the taxpayer.

In the assessment proceedings, the tax officers have been specifically seeking details of the settlement of receivable and payable transactions throughout the year and scrutinizing ageing analysis of year-end debts closely. Thus, it is imperative that the taxpayer compiles the said information proactively and maintains adequate justification to defend stray situations of delays, if any, in settling inter-company debts.

As discussed above, the FEMA regulations permit nine months from the date of export to realize the proceeds from the overseas entity. However, the tax officers often consider a narrow credit period of 45 days to 90 days. It will be helpful if some guidance is provided by the government to field officers to consider the credit period in line with FEMA regulations.

Further, the taxpayer must be vigilant to ensure that the receivables and payables are settled in the normal credit period. In case of delays in settlement, the taxpayer should gather evidence to demonstrate his bona fide behaviour and situations beyond his control. Further, the documents should also clearly demonstrate there was no intention to fund the operation of overseas AE through an excess credit period.

Digitalisation of Form 10F – New Barrier To Claim Tax Treaty?

BACKGROUND
The Income-tax Act 1961 (‘Act’) grants an option to a Non-Resident (‘NR’) to be
governed by the provisions of the Act or the Double Tax Avoidance Agreement
(DTAA), whichever is beneficial. Section 90(4) mandates non-residents to obtain
a Tax Residency Certificate (TRC) from the country of residence to take benefit
of the DTAA by virtue of section 90 of the Act. In addition, section 90(5)
requires non-residents to furnish information in Form 10F. In practice, NRs
used to furnish TRC and Form 10F either in physical form or an electronic copy
to the payer of income to avail of DTAA benefits at the time of withholding.
Now, Notification No. 3/2022 dated 16th July, 2022 (‘Notification’), requires
Form 10F to be furnished electronically and verified in the manner prescribed.
This article deals with nuances and implications arising from this
Notification.

PROCESS OF OBTAINING FORM 10F IN DIGITALISED FORM
The Notification came into effect on 16th July, 2022. Form 10F in digitalized
form can be generated from the income tax e-filing portal by logging into the
assessee’s account for the Financial Year (F.Y.) 2021-22 and F.Y. 2022-23.
Thereafter, the NR is required to fill in information prescribed in Form 10F,
upload a copy of TRC and verify the same by affixing the digital signature
(DSC) of the person authorized to e-verify Form 10F.

Incidentally, when logging in, the portal states, “This Form is applicable
to an assessee who is a citizen of India living in another country and earning
foreign Income”
. It is submitted that this statement is incorrect. In any
case, instruction on the portal has no statutory force.

CONSEQUENCES OF DIGITALISED FORM 10F
Obtaining Form 10F in the digitalised form will require a NR to obtain PAN in
India, as without PAN, Form 10F in digitised form is not accepted. In addition,
the authorized signatory must register his DSC in the NR tax login. It is
possible that such an authorized signatory may be a non-resident. Consequently,
the authorized signatory will also be required to submit KYC documents to
procure DSC.

This requirement can be complied with by NR assessees, generally Associated
Enterprises (AEs) who receive taxable income in India and regularly file a tax
return in India or report international transactions in Form 3CEB. These AEs,
irrespective of technical reading of Rule 21AB(2), are likely to comply with
new norms1. However, there are numerous business payments made to NR
which are not recurring in nature and are not chargeable to tax in India
pursuant to a favorable tax treaty. NR vendors are not comfortable obtaining
PAN and therefore undertake submission of 10-F electronically. Section 195
creates parallel liability on the deductor to withhold tax. The Notification is
expected to give rise to uncertainty in the following illustrative situations:

  • Payment for technical services which does not fulfil
    the requirement of make available condition in India-US DTAA.

 

  • Software license payments which are not taxable
    pursuant to royalty article in DTAA read with Supreme Court decision in
    case of Engineering Analysis Centre of Excellence (P.) Ltd vs. CIT2.

 

  • Import of goods in India may result in Significant
    Economic Presence under Explanation 2A to section 9(1)(i). Since SEP
    provisions are subject to DTAA, importers obtain TRC and Form 10F from
    NRs.

 

  • Interest payment on rupee-denominated loans which are
    not entitled to concessional tax rate u/s 194LC or section 194LD / where
    payer wishes to obtain TRC and Form 10F on the conservative basis (should
    the benefit of section 194LC or section 194LC is denied by tax authority).

 

  • Equipment rental payment to Netherland NR and payment
    for aircraft leasing to Ireland NR.

 

  • Transfer of shares of an Indian Company by NR seller
    being tax resident of Mauritius, Singapore entitled to capital gain
    exemption3.

 

  • Indirect transfer of shares of an overseas company
    deriving substantial value from India taxable under Explanation 4 and
    Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i).


This Notification is effective from 16th July, 2022. No prior intimation or
time gap is given to the assessee to comply with the law. It is likely to
impact ongoing contracts where Indian payers based on a bonafide understanding
of the law would have agreed to bear tax liability under the net of tax
contract on the premise that NR will provide TRC, Form 10F (either in physical
or an electronic copy), and other usual declarations. The Notification may
result in a change in the law that was not envisaged at the time of entering
into the contract. Equally, NR may not agree to obtain PAN and furnish Form 10F
digitally. They may continue the present practice of giving Form 10F in
physical or an electronic copy. In such cases, if the Law is read literally, it
may mean that Form 10F is not furnished by NR in the prescribed manner and
accordingly condition of section 90(5) of the Act is not complied with.
Consequently, tax may be required to be deducted in accordance with Act. This
is likely to create friction between the deductor and the NR vendor. In cases
where the contract is on the net of tax basis, the deductor will be responsible
for paying tax which will escalate the cost of services.

Considering the aforesaid, it is necessary to evaluate whether the Notification
which requires digitalization of Form 10F is valid and is likely to stand the
test of law. This needs to be evaluated considering the propositions which are
discussed hereunder.


1. Non-corporate FPIs do not need DSC for signing tax
returns. Non-corporate entities can electronically transmit the ITR and
subsequently submit the physically-signed acknowledgment copy with CPC. Using a
DSC only for electronically furnishing Form 10F is likely to create a practical
challenge.
2. [2021] 125 taxmann.com 42 (SC)
3. Article 13(3A) of India-Mauritius DTAA; Article 13(4A) of India-Singapore
DTAA subject to satisfaction of specified conditions in DTAA.

 

FORM 10F – WHETHER REQUIRED IN ALL
CIRCUMSTANCES?

Section 90(4) provides that NR shall not be entitled to the benefit of DTAA
unless TRC is obtained. Section 90(5) provides that NR referred to in
subsection (4) shall provide other information as may be prescribed. This
linkage gives the inference that subsection (5) needs to be read as an integral
part of sub-section (4), and noncompliance of same can result in denial of DTAA
benefit.

Rule 21AB(1) of the Income-tax Rules, 1961 (“the Rules”) (prescribed u/s 90(5))
requires NR to furnish the following information in Form 10F:

(i) Status (individual, company, firm, etc.) of the assessee;

(ii) Nationality (in case of an individual) or country or specified territory
of incorporation or registration (in case of others);

(iii) Assessee’s tax identification number in the country or specified
territory of residence and in case there is no such number, then, a unique
number based on which the person is identified by the Government of the country
or the specified territory of which the assessee claims to be a resident;

(iv) Period for which the residential status, as mentioned in the certificate
referred to in subsection (4) of section 90 or sub-section (4) of section 90A,
is applicable; and

(v) Address of the assessee in the country or specified territory outside
India, during the period for which the certificate, as mentioned in (iv) above,
is applicable.

The information prescribed in item number (i) above should be read “as
applicable” even though such words are not found in Rule 21AB(1). This is
because the status of the assessee is a concept under Indian law. Section 2(31)
ascribes status to a person, which may not be a concept in overseas countries.
Further, the tax identification number may not be issued by the country to a
tax-exempt entity (e.g. Abu Dhabi Investment Authority or pension trust).

The Notification requires NR to fill in aforesaid information in its tax login
account and verify the same using the DSC of the person authorized to sign the
income-tax return. Rule 21AB(2) creates carve out to sub-rule (1). It reads as
under:

“The assessee may not be required to provide the information or any part
thereof referred to in sub-rule (1) if the information or the part thereof, as
the case may be, is contained in the certificate
referred to in sub-section
(4) of section 90 or sub-section (4) of section 90A.”

The exception carved out in Rule 21AB(2) is important. It states that Form 10F
is not required if all information in Rule 21AB(1) is already forming part of
TRC. In the view of the authors, typically, TRC issued by major treaty partners
(e.g. Germany, Netherlands, Singapore, Japan, Mauritius, Australia, France
etc.) reveals that it contains all the information as stipulated in Rule
21AB(1). Accordingly, Rule 21AB(1) and consequently section 90(5) is not
applicable in so far as TRC issued by such countries are concerned. Thus, NRs
resident of such countries are not impacted by the Notification requiring Form
10F to be issued digitally.

However, TRC issued by countries like Hong Kong, Ireland, etc., does not
contain information such as addresses. Thus, the safe harbour of Rule 21AB(2)
does not apply in such cases. Accordingly, NR from such treaty countries will
be required to submit Form 10F in digitalized form.

PROVISIONS IN ACT AND RULE GOVERNING THE APPLICATION OF PAN

Section 139A(1) and Rule 114 requires the assessee to obtain PAN if his income
is chargeable to tax in India. Rule 114B has prescribed such transactions where
PAN is required to be obtained. Transactions listed in Rule 114B are in nature
of investment in shares, debentures, etc., above a particular threshold. None
of the provisions requires NR to obtain PAN in India, where income is exempt
from tax pursuant to favourable DTAA. In fact, section 206AA and Rule 37BC
(dealt subsequently) give further force to this argument.

The Notification is issued in exercise of powers conferred in sub-rule (1) and
sub-rule (2) of Rule 131 of the Income-tax Rules, 1962. Rule 131 was, in turn,
inserted by the Income-tax (first twenty-first Amendment) Rules, 2021, w.e.f.
29th July, 2021 (21st Amendment). The 21st Amendment, in turn, was in the
exercise of powers conferred in section 295 of the Act. The process of
obtaining Form 10F in digitalised form requires the NR assessee to obtain PAN
in India. Thus, indirectly, the Notification is inconsistent with section
139A(1) / Rule 114. It is trite law that subordinate legislation must conform
to the parent statute and any subordinate legislation inconsistent with the
provisions of the parent statute is liable to be set aside. It is equally well
settled that circulars being executive / administrative in character cannot
supersede or override the Act and the statutory rules4. In Godrej
& Boyce Mfg. Co. Ltd. vs. State of Maharashtra
5, the
Apex Court held that circulars are administrative in nature and cannot alter the
provisions of a statute, nor can they impose additional conditions.


4. Federation of Indian Airlines vs.
Union of India (WP (C) No. 8004/2010); In Additional District Magistrate
(Rev.), Delhi Administration vs. Shri Ram AIR 2000 SC 2143; In B.K. Garad vs.
Nasik Merchants Co-op. Bank Ltd, AIR 1984 SC 192.
5. (2009) 5 SCC 24


NOTIFICATION – WHETHER OVERRIDES TAX TREATY?
This issue will arise in a situation where a non-resident who is otherwise
entitled to beneficial treatment under DTAA is denied treaty benefit as Form
10F is not furnished in a digitalised format. This is primarily because NR does
not have a PAN in India, or his authorized signatory does not have a DSC. The
following arguments support Notification indirectly overrides tax treaty which
is not permissible:


  • Article 31 of the Vienna Convention provides that a
    treaty is to be interpreted “in good faith in accordance with the ordinary
    meaning to be given to the terms of the treaty in their context and in the
    light of its object and purpose. Every treaty in force is binding on the
    parties to it and must be performed by them in good faith”. What it
    implies is that whatever the provisions of the treaties, these provisions
    are to be given effect in good faith. Therefore, no matter how desirable
    or expedient it may be from the perspective of the tax administration when
    a tax jurisdiction is allowed to amend the settled position with respect
    to a treaty provision by an amendment in the domestic law and admittedly
    to nullify the judicial rulings, it cannot be treated as the performance of
    treaties in good faith. That is, in effect, a unilateral treaty over-ride
    which is contrary to the scheme of Article 26 of Vienna Convention on Law
    of Treaties6.

 


6. DIT vs. New Skies Satellite BV
[2016] 382 ITR 114 (Mad); ACIT vs. Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd [2019] 111
taxmann.com 371 (Mumbai – Trib.).


  • The Andhra Pradesh High Court in Sanofi Pasteur
    Holding SA
    cautioned against the use of legislative power to
    unilaterally amend domestic law in the following words:


“Treaty-making power is integral to the exercise of sovereign legislative or
executive will according to the relevant constitutional scheme, in all
jurisdictions. Once the power is exercised by the authorized agency (the
legislature or the executive, as the case may be) and a treaty entered into,
provisions of the such treaty must receive a good faith interpretation by every
authorized interpreter, whether an executive agency, a quasi-judicial authority
or the judicial branch. The supremacy of tax treaty provisions duly
operationalised within a contracting State [which may (theoretically) be
disempowered only by explicit and appropriately authorized legislative
exertions], cannot be eclipsed by the employment of an interpretive stratagem,
on the misconceived and ambiguous assumption of revenue interests of one of the
contracting States.”


  • Failure on part of NR to obtain Form 10F in digitalised
    form impairs the right of NR to claim treaty benefit. The information
    prescribed under Rule 21AB(1) obtained in a physical or an electronic copy
    does not become invalid merely because it is not furnished in electronic
    form through the income tax e-filing portal. The Notification, to this
    extent, has the vice of treaty override, which may not be permissible. The
    requirement of obtaining Form 10F is under domestic law and is not forming
    part of the treaty. Accordingly, section 90(5), as also the impugned
    Notification may be considered a treaty override.

 

  • As per section 90(2), the provisions of DTAA to the
    extent more beneficial to the assessee shall prevail over the Domestic Law
    and if the legislature wants to make any provision of Domestic Law to
    override the Treaty, a specific provision is required to be made in the
    Statute to that effect as made in sub-section (2A) of section 90 to give
    overriding effect to GAAR provisions. A proposition that treaty benefit
    can be denied for non-digitalised Form 10F seems untenable as there is no
    corresponding amendment in section 90 to permit treaty override or in
    section 139A to obtain PAN by specified class of assessee. In fact,
    Notification is inserted pursuant to Rule 131, which was inserted vide
    21st amendment to the Rules in exercise of power u/s 295.

 

  • In the context of section 90(4), which requires an
    assessee to obtain TRC, Tribunal7 has held that an eligible
    assessee cannot be denied the treaty protection u/s 90(2) on the ground
    that the said assessee has not been able to furnish a TRC in the
    prescribed form. The Tribunal8 read section 90(4) as resulting
    in treaty override and did not accept Revenue’s contention of the
    superiority of section 90(4) over section 90(2). The ratio of these
    decisions should equally apply in the present context.


7. Skaps Industries India (P.) Ltd
vs. ITO [2018] 94 taxmann.com 448 (Ahmedabad – Trib.); Ranjit Kumar Vuppu vs.
ITO [2021] 127 taxmann.com 105 (Hyderabad – Trib.)
8. Supra


SECTION 206AA – LEGISLATIVE HISTORY

Section 206AA provides for withholding of tax at 20% if PAN is not furnished by
the recipient of income. In the context of DTAA, the question arose whether
section 206AA overrides the treaty rate where NR does not have PAN in India.

In under noted decisions9, the supremacy of tax treaty was upheld.
This view is based on the premise that the purpose of the DTAA provision will
get defeated if tax is withheld at a higher rate in the absence of PAN which
subsequently needs to be refunded by the filing of the tax return in India. The
Delhi High Court in Danisco India (P.) Ltd. vs. Union of India10
read down the provision of section 206AA in the following words:

“Having regard to the position of law explained in Azadi Bachao Andolan
(supra) and later followed in numerous decisions that a Double Taxation
Avoidance Agreement acquires primacy in such cases, where reciprocating states
mutually agree upon acceptable principles for tax treatment, the provision in
Section 206AA (as it existed) has to be read down to mean that where the
deductee i.e. the overseas resident business concern conducts its operation from
a territory, whose Government has entered into a Double Taxation Avoidance
Agreement with India, the rate of taxation would be as dictated by the
provisions of the treaty.”


9. Infosys Ltd. vs. DCIT [2022] 140
taxmann.com 600 (Bangalore – Trib.); Nagarjuna Fertilizers & Chemicals Ltd.
vs. Asstt. CIT [2017] 78 taxmann.com 264 (Hyd.);
10. [2018] 90 taxmann.com 295/253 Taxman 500/404 ITR 539


Parliament amended law by introducing sub-section (7) to section 206AA, making law
inapplicable to non-residents for interest, dividend, royalty, fees for
technical service income who furnishes information prescribed in Rule 37BC.

Rule 37BC(2) makes section 206AA inapplicable to non-residents who furnish the
following information:

i)    name, e-mail id, contact number;

ii)    address in the country or specified territory outside
India of which the deductee is a resident;

iii)    a certificate of his being resident in any country or
specified territory outside India from the Government of that country or
specified territory if the law of that country or specified territory provides
for the issuance of such certificate;

iv)    Tax Identification Number of the deductee in the country
or specified territory of his residence and in case no such number is
available, then a unique number based on which the deductee is identified by
the Government of that country or the specified territory of which he claims to
be a resident.

The aforesaid information is identical to information contained in Form 10F. It
can be contended that information under self-declaration can be considered
valid for the purpose of Rule 37BC; it cannot be considered invalid for the
purposes of Form 10F merely because it is not submitted in the electronic form
on the income tax e-filing portal.

Since the information in Rule 37BC is akin to Form 10F, the Notification can be
viewed as contrary to or overriding Rule 37BC. The Notification will result in
denial of treaty benefit even though the condition of Rule 37BC has complied.
If by Notification, the Act itself stands affected, the Notification may be
struck down11.


11. Kerala Samsthana Chethu
Thozhilali Union vs. State of Kerala, (2006) 4 SCC 327


CONCLUDING REMARKS
The Notification has an impact on cross-border payments for F.Y. 2021-22
compliance as well as on ongoing transactions. Payer will have to factor in
this Notification while entering into new / renewal of existing business
contract, especially when payment is on a net of tax basis. Law regarding Form
10F was settled and well understood by non-residents dealing with India. In
practice, it is unlikely that vendors will obtain PAN in India and furnish Form
10F in electronic form on the income tax e-filing portal. This will require the
industry to take decisions on merits.

GLoBE Rules: Determination of Effective Tax Rate (ETR) and Top-Up Tax (TUT) – Part 2

1. TO REFRESH ON THE FIRST PART

1.1 In the first part of this article (“Pillar 2: An Introduction To Global Minimum Taxation”, August, 2022 BCAJ), we discussed the evolution and policy objectives of GloBE Rules. The article also discussed different inter-locking mechanisms of GloBE Rules, which ensure that a large MNE Group (turnover as per CFS is = € 750 mn in 2 out of 4 preceding fiscal years) pays at least 15% tax on profits earned in each jurisdiction where it has a presence (in the form of a subsidiary or a permanent establishment (PE)). This is achieved by the imposition of a “top-up tax” (TUT), wherever the effective tax rate (ETR) computed at a jurisdictional level for all subsidiaries/PEs in a jurisdiction is below 15%. For this purpose, each subsidiary or PE is referred to as a “constituent entity” (CE) of the MNE Group.

As a first priority, such TUT can be imposed by the same jurisdiction whose ETR is < 15%. If such jurisdiction fails to impose TUT, it can be imposed by the jurisdiction of the ultimate parent entity (UPE) of the MNE Group or, failing that, by the jurisdiction of the lower tier intermediate parent entities of the MNE Group.

Assuming none of the aforesaid mechanisms can collect TUT, as a last resort, it can be imposed by other jurisdictions where the MNE Group has a presence (in the form of a subsidiary or a PE) which have implemented GloBE Rules.

While the above is to broadly recap different inter-locking mechanisms of GloBE Rules, which are discussed more elaborately in the first part, in this second part, we shall discuss the calculation of ETR. It is computed at a jurisdictional level as a factor of tax expense (numerator) upon GloBE income (denominator) of all CEs in a single jurisdiction. For this purpose, chapters 3 and 4 of GloBE Rules specify detailed rules to compute the numerator and denominator, which are explained in this article. An attempt has also been made to contextualise the provisions as if an overseas MNE Group is computing the TUT liability for a CE in India. However, the discussion may equally apply to computing TUT liability in respect of Indian in-scope MNE having a CE abroad. Of specific attention to readers are those situations where, surprisingly, even a high-tax jurisdiction such as India, can trigger TUT liability under GloBE Rules.

2. START POINT FOR ETR – ‘FIT FOR CONSOLIDATION’ ACCOUNTS

The UPE prepares consolidated financial statements (CFS) by calling for ‘data pack’ or ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts of each CE. Such ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts are based on accounting standards applicable to the CFS of the UPE, which may differ from accounting standards applicable to local statutory accounts of the CE. These ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts may also include profit/loss on account of intra-group transactions, which are subsequently eliminated in preparing CFS.

In the GloBE Rules, the start point for computing the numerator and denominator of jurisdictional ETR formula is tax expense and profit after tax as per ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts of each CE. As the numerator and denominator is initially computed for each CE, profit/loss on intra-group transactions (both domestic and cross-border) is factored in the start point. To address certain policy issues and to take care of specific considerations, GloBE Rules have introduced certain adjustments to the start point. Some adjustments are mandatory, while others are optional. Once the tax expense and book profit for each CE is adjusted for GloBE, both these parameters are aggregated for all CEs in a jurisdiction. The ETR is determined by dividing aggregate adjusted tax expense upon aggregate adjusted book profit. In this article, the numerator is termed “adjusted covered tax” and the denominator “GloBE income”.

3. COMPUTATION OF DENOMINATOR OF ETR – GLoBE INCOME

Assuming, instead of adjusted book profit, ETR would have been determined by adopting taxable income (for local tax purposes) as the denominator, which could have reflected the impact of all tax incentives (such as those available under the Indian Income-tax Act – IFSC, s.80-IA, s.10AA, agricultural income or weighted deductions such as s.80JJAA), it would not have achieved the GloBE Rules objective. As a result, the denominator is reckoned w.r.t. adjusted book profit.

Some adjustments in computing GloBE income, as enumerated below, are clearly on account of policy considerations such as disallowing payments on account of bribes or penalties. As against that, exclusion in respect of dividend and capital gains on equity shares in computing the GloBE income is primarily to ensure that the rules remain restricted to operating profits of a CE while dividend and capital gains are a derivative reflection of operating profits of the underlying CE. In addition, some adjustments are made to ensure that intra-group cross-border transactions are at ALP, and certain other adjustments are in the form of a SAAR to target abusive arrangements, such as disallowing intra-group finance expenditure, which may have the impact of reducing GloBE liability.

4. ILLUSTRATIVE MANDATORY ADJUSTMENTS

The mandatory adjustments to profit after tax include:

(a)    Add back provision for current tax and deferred tax expense1.

(b)    Add back fines and penalties (only if amount = € 50,000 per CE), and bribes and illegal expenses2.

(c)    Deduct provisions on account of contributions to pension fund only on actual payment3.

(d)    Adjustments to align transaction value in respect of intra-group cross-border transactions with ALP adopted for local tax purposes, if book treatment is at variance from such ALP (discussed further below)4.

(e)    Exclude dividend or capital gain/loss on equity interests (discussed further below).

(f)    Include effect of prior period errors or change in accounting policy, which is otherwise routed directly through the balance sheet (these are considered only if the amounts pertain to periods after applicability of GloBE Rules)5.

(g)    Expenses attributable to intragroup financing arrangement (discussed further below).

(h)    Exclusion for income from international shipping and qualifying ancillary activities (discussed further below).


1. Article 3.2.1(a)
2. Article 3.2.1(g)
3. Article 3.2.1(i)
4. Article 3.2.3
5. Article 3.2.1(h) – however, where prior period expense results in tax refund of > € 1 mn, GloBE requires reworking of prior year’s ETR by adopting reduced tax expense in numerator and such prior period expense in denominator.


5. ILLUSTRATIVE ELECTIVE ADJUSTMENTS

Some adjustments are at the option of the taxpayer. These are:

(a) Deduct Employee Stock Option Plan (ESOP) cost as per local tax rules instead of as per books6.

(b) Ignore fair valuation/impairment gain/loss and consider such gain/loss only on actual realisation7.


6. Article 3.2.2
7. Article 3.2.5 – if realisation method is elected, such option applies qua jurisdiction (cannot pick and choose for one of the CE) – also, such option can be exercised either qua all assets or only qua all tangible assets.


6. EXCLUSION OF DIVIDEND AND CAPITAL GAIN/LOSS ON EQUITY INTERESTS8

6.1. As indicated above, one of the adjustments to arrive at GloBE income is exclusion in respect of dividend and gain/loss on sale of equity shares. The rationale behind such exclusion is:

a. Dividend is generally paid out of retained earnings that have already been subject to corporate tax or GloBE TUT in the hands of the company9.

b. Similarly, gain on equity shares represents retained earnings which may have already been subject to corporate tax or GloBE TUT in the investee company’s jurisdiction and/or represents unrealised gains in assets held by the investor company which may be subject to corporate tax or GloBE TUT in future as these gains are realised10.


8. Article 3.2.1(b) and (c)
9. Para 179 to 189 of Blueprint
10. Para 190 to 196 of Blueprint

6.2. The exclusion ensures that no TUT is levied on such income which is exempt across most jurisdictions (while not in India). The following are excluded in computing GloBE income of corporate shareholder:

Classification
in CFS

What is
excluded

Conditions for
exclusion

Subsidiary, joint venture, associate

• Dividend

• Capital gain/loss (includes fair
valuation gain/loss)

• Gain/loss recognised as per equity method

N/A

Any other entity, where MNE holds = 10%
ownership interest as on date of distribution or disposition

• Dividend

• Capital gain/loss (includes fair
valuation gain/loss)

N/A

Any other entity, where MNE holds < 10%
ownership interest

• Dividend

Holding should be long-term i.e. held for
at least a year as on the date of distribution

From the discussion hereabove, in respect of the last category above, where MNE holds < 10% ownership interest, only dividend is excluded, and that too, only if such holding is long-term, whereas capital gain/loss is subject to TUT liability.

Separately, although local tax rules typically disallow deductions for expenses associated with income excluded from taxable income, for simplicity, while dividend is excluded from GloBE income, there is no specific requirement to disallow expenses related to such dividend11.


11. Para 45 of commentary

While dividend and capital gain/loss are excluded in computing GloBE income, there is no such exclusion in computing taxable income or book profit for the purposes of s.115JB. This can have an interesting interplay as illustrated here in the context of ICo, which is owned by an overseas MNE Group:

  • ICo enjoys 100% tax holiday on operating profits u/s. 10AA, and hence does not have any normal tax liability. However, ICo is subject to MAT at ~15%.

  •  During the year in question, particulars of ICo’s income are as below:
  1. Operating profit eligible for S.10AA deduction is 1,00,000.
  2. Loss on sale of shares of associate is 60,000.

  •  Accordingly, book profit for MAT is 40,000 and tax liability @ 15% as per MAT provisions is 6,000.

  •  In computing ETR of ICo under GloBE, gain/loss on sale of shares of an associate (and related tax effects) are excluded. Thus, denominator is 1,00,000 and numerator is 6,000. ETR is 6,000/1,00,000 = 6%, resulting in shortfall of 9% as compared to 15%.

  •  TUT liability in respect of ICo = 9,000 namely 9% on operating profits of 1,00,000 (subject to reduction on account of substance-based carve out).

7. ALP ADJUSTMENTS IN COMPUTING GLoBE INCOME

7.1. Article 3.2.3 provides that, in computing GloBE income, any intra-group cross-border transaction recognised at a value that is not consistent with ALP as adopted for local tax purposes must be adjusted to be consistent with such ALP.

7.2. As per commentary, it is “generally expected” that an intra-group cross-border transaction is recognised at ALP in books. In the absence of any bilateral/unilateral TP adjustment for local tax purposes, Article 3.2.3 is not triggered, and the value recognised in the books is accepted to be ALP.

7.3. Impact of bilateral TP adjustment – For bilateral TP adjustment, where the taxable income of both transacting CEs is at variance from book income, the impact of such TP adjustment should also be considered in computing GloBE income.

Article 3.2.3 makes no distinction based on the point of time that such ALP is determined, namely whether the bilateral TP adjustment is made before or after GloBE returns are filed. Article 3.2.3 can apply irrespective of whether ALP is determined as part of self-assessment or pursuant to assessment by tax authorities. It can apply pursuant to bilateral APA or MAP.

Assuming information regarding bilateral TP adjustment is available at the time of filing GloBE return (i.e. return for self-assessment of GloBE tax liability), it is possible to give effect to Article 3.2.3 at the time of filing such GloBE return itself. However, questions may arise when bilateral TP adjustment is finalised many years after filing GloBE return. To illustrate,

  • Assume ICo of India (subject to a local tax rate of 25%) has received services in Year 1 from FCo (which is in a zero-tax jurisdiction).
  • FCo has raised an invoice of 1,000 on ICo.
  • Bilateral APA is concluded after 5 years where ALP for the transaction is computed at 800.
  • Giving effect to such ALP increases ICo’s GloBE income by 200, whereas FCo’s GloBE income decreases by 200.

  • If such adjustment is given effect retrospectively by revising GloBE return of Year 1, TUT liability in respect of FCo reduces by 30 (200 x 15%), resulting in a refund of previously paid GloBE TUT12. As per commentary, article 3.2.3 adjustment cannot result in the refund of previously paid GloBE tax, and in this example, the impact of article 3.2.3 should be given in GloBE return of year 5 and not of year 1. As a result, FCo’s GloBE income for year 5 decreases by 200 in respect of the transaction concluded in year 1, resulting in an increase in ETR for year 5.

12. ICo, being in HTJ, may not trigger any GloBE TUT liability as a result of ALP adjustment.

  • While article 3.2.3 cannot result in a refund of GloBE tax paid for a past year, article 3.2.3 can result in additional demand of GloBE tax for a past year. In this example, assuming FCo procured services from ICo at 1,000 in year 1 whose ALP is determined at 800 in year 5 pursuant to bilateral APA, FCo’s GloBE income can be retrospectively increased by 200, such that, in year 5, the taxpayer can be exposed to an additional demand of GloBE tax in respect of transaction concluded in year 1. To clarify, in this scenario, ETR of year 1 is recomputed to give effect to ALP adjustment, although resultant TUT liability may be collected in year 5. This may be contrasted with the earlier scenario above, where the ETR of year 5 itself was impacted.

7.4. Impact of unilateral TP adjustment – As aforesaid, for bilateral TP adjustment, the GloBE income of both transacting CEs needs to be adjusted to align with the taxable income mandatorily. However, for unilateral TP adjustment (affecting the taxable income of only one of the transacting CEs), special rules are provided to compute GloBE income based on whether unilateral TP adjustment is triggered in a high-tax jurisdiction (HTJ) vs. under-taxed jurisdiction (UTJ). The concepts of HTJ and UTJ are explained in later paras.

At a conceptual level,  when unilateral TP adjustment is initiated in HTJ, an adjustment must be made in computing the GloBE income of both transacting CEs, regardless of whether the counterparty is in HTJ or UTJ.

When unilateral TP adjustment is initiated in UTJ, no adjustment is needed in computing GloBE income of both transacting CEs – and book value is respected for such computation of both transacting CEs.

This can be explained with help of the following example:

  • Assume ICo of India (subject to a local tax rate of 25%) has received services from FCo (which is in a zero-tax jurisdiction).

  • FCo has raised  an invoice of 1,000 on ICo.

  • While ICo is unlikely to trigger TUT under GloBE, FCo may trigger TUT of 150 based on invoice value (15% of 1,000).

  • If, based on TP documentation, ICo determines ALP at 800 and makes voluntary TP adjustment while filing local tax return, ICo’s local tax liability increases by 50 (i.e. 200 x 25%).

  • As per commentary, if FCo’s GloBE income is not adjusted to 800, there is not only an increase in ICo’s local tax liability (by 50 as aforesaid) but also  an increase in the GloBE tax liability in respect of FCo – because GloBE income of 200 would be doubly counted in India as also in FCo’s jurisdiction. As a result, the commentary requires a downward adjustment to FCo’s GloBE income to the extent of 200.

  • Accordingly, GloBE TUT liability in respect of FCo is 120 (15% of 800). The commentary justifies this to avoid “double taxation”.

While the above illustrates a simple scenario, difficult questions may arise where unilateral TP adjustment may happen many years after GloBE returns are filed. Unlike the guidance for bilateral TP adjustment, there is no guidance for unilateral TP adjustment. In this example, assuming the transaction between ICo and FCo pertains to year 1 while unilateral TP adjustment attains finality with the conclusion of the assessment of ICo in year 5, questions will arise as to how FCo may be able to get its GloBE income corrected in terms of Article 3.2.3 and the basis on which it may effectively enjoy refund/reduction of GloBE TUT paid in earlier years as may arise on account of downward adjustment to FCo’s GloBE income.

Coming to the concepts of HTJ and UTJ for Article 3.2.3, the following alternate conditions are prescribed to determine whether or not a jurisdiction is UTJ:

a. Nominal tax rate of the jurisdiction is < 15%, (or)

b. GloBE ETR of the jurisdiction in each of the 2 preceding fiscal years is < 15%.

As the above are alternative conditions, it is possible that even a country like India may become UTJ for a given MNE Group, though the applicable headline tax rate may be > 15%.

7.5. Also, it is unclear how Article 3.2.3 will be applied where unilateral TP adjustment is made in computing taxable income of both transacting CEs, resulting in each CE adopting a different ALP for the same transaction. The commentary acknowledges that the GloBE implementation framework will give further consideration to appropriate adjustments when tax authorities in different jurisdictions disagree on ALP determination.

7.6.
While the above rules apply to intra-group cross-border transactions, there is limited applicability of ALP mandate for intra-group domestic transactions. Article 3.2.3 states that loss on account of sale/other transfer of an asset to another CE of the same jurisdiction is to be recognised at ALP – only if such loss is otherwise cognisable in computing GloBE income (i.e. such loss has been debited to P&L). As per the commentary, this is a tax avoidant measure to prevent manufacturing loss through intra-group asset transfers. Additionally, for cross-border and domestic transactions, Article 3.2.3 requires both transacting CEs to record a transaction in the same amount in computing GloBE income13.


13. As per para 109 of commentary, this result is anyways expected if a common accounting standard is applied to both transacting CEs.


8. INTRA-GROUP FINANCING

8.1. Article 3.2.7 provides that, in computing GloBE income of a CE in a low-tax jurisdiction (namely low-tax entity), the expense attributable to intra-group financing availed directly or indirectly from another CE in a high-tax jurisdiction (namely high-tax entity) shall be disallowed, if:

a. in the absence of Article 3.2.7, such expense would have reduced GloBE income of the low tax entity,

b. without resulting in a commensurate increase in “taxable income” (as per domestic tax laws) of high tax entity.

For the purpose of Article 3.2.714, a jurisdiction is LTJ if the jurisdiction’s effective tax rate (as per GloBE Rules, ignoring the impact of Article 3.2.7) is < 15% (and vice versa for HTJ).


14. Guidance in Article 3.2.3 to determine whether a jurisdiction is UTJ is not relevant for article 3.2.7.

To illustrate, assume ICo of India (in HTJ) provides an interest-free loan of 10,000 to FCo in zero tax jurisdiction. In fit for consolidation accounts (as per IndAS/IFRS), the lender (ICo) records a loan receivable of 10,000 at the net present value (NPV) of 6,000 by discounting at the prevalent interest rate. Over the life of the loan, ICo recognises notional interest income by credit to P&L and a debit to loan receivable. Likewise, the borrower (FCo) recognises corresponding and matching notional interest expenditure.  

In terms of Article 3.2.7, intra-group finance expenditure debited to P&L of FCo is disallowed in computing GloBE income of the borrower (FCo) in LTJ if there is no corresponding increase in “taxable income” (as per domestic tax laws) in the hands of the lender (ICo) in HTJ.

In the present case, notional interest income is not includible in the taxable income of the lender (ICo) in HTJ. Hence, Article 3.2.7 requires disallowance of notional interest expense in computing the GloBE income of the borrower (FCo) in LTJ.

Article 3.2.7 may not have applied in the hands of FCo if, in this example:

a. the loan was provided at prevalent market rate, as ICo would have included actual interest income in taxable income and paid local tax thereon; or

b. ICo was subject to MAT provisions and notional interest income has been included in book profit (namely taxable income computed as per MAT provisions); or

c. ICo was subject to TP adjustment in respect of interest free loan, resulting in imputing notional interest income while determining taxable income of ICo.

The scope of intra-group financing arrangement is not confined to loans. It can apply where there is any credit or investment made, and the other conditions are satisfied. In the above example, it can apply where ICo provides capital infusion as Redeemable Preference Shares (RPS) in FCo which is accounted under IndAS/IFRS as a loan, in a manner as specified above.

8.2. Additionally, for Article 3.2.7 to apply, all conditions (namely borrower is in LTJ, the lender is in HTJ, borrower debiting financing expense in P&L, no commensurate increase in taxable income of lender) should be reasonably anticipated to be fulfilled, over the expected duration of such intra-group financing arrangement.

8.3. Article 3.2.7 has strict conditions to determine whether there is an increase in the taxable income of the lender in HTJ. For example, if such lender is able to immediately set off interest income against brought forward loss or unabsorbed interest expenditure – which is not expected to be used otherwise – it is deemed that there is no increase in the taxable income of such lender, and therefore, the limitation of Article 3.2.7 applies while computing GloBE income of the borrower.

9. INTERNATIONAL SHIPPING SECTOR EXCLUSION

9.1. In terms of sector exclusion, net income from international shipping activities and qualifying ancillary activities are excluded from GloBE income. This is because special features of the shipping sector (such as capital-intensive nature, level of profitability and long economic life cycle) have led to special tax rules across jurisdictions (such as tonnage tax), often operating outside the scope of corporate income tax.

9.2. While detailed rules for shipping sector exclusion are not covered in this article, there is one important aspect that deserves to be highlighted. As per Article 3.3.6, in order to qualify for the exclusion of international shipping income, the CE must demonstrate that the strategic or commercial management of all ships concerned is effectively carried on from within the jurisdiction where the CE is located. As per the commentary, the location of strategic or commercial management is determined basis facts and circumstances. The commentary further provides the following indicators for determining the place of strategic or commercial management:

a. Strategic management includes making decisions on significant capital expenditure and asset disposals (e.g. purchase/sale of ships), award of major contracts, agreements on strategic alliances and vessel pooling and direction of foreign establishments.

b. Commercial management includes route planning, taking bookings, insurance, financing, personnel management, provisioning and training.

It is possible that ships are owned by ACo of Country A but are managed by BCo of Country B. ACo and BCo are CEs of the same MNE Group. The ownership is retained in Country A for commercial reasons such as creditor protection. The management is from Country B for commercial reasons such as efficiency, quality/safety, service level, and related factors. Since the location of strategic or commercial management is different from the location of the CE that owns these ships, income earned from these ships may not qualify for exclusion from GloBE income. In this regard, representations are made to provide more clarity on Article 3.3.6.

10. ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE TO BOOK PROFIT, ONLY IF SPECIFIED BY GLOBE RULES

10.1. Since the calculation of GloBE income is linked to ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts, any item which is either debited or credited to the P&L account cannot be excluded unless there is a specific adjustment warranted by GloBE Rules. To illustrate, no adjustment may be needed in respect of charity donations or CSR expenses which may have been debited to the P&L account irrespective of its deductibility for local tax purposes.

10.2. Similar to expenditure, the amounts credited to the P&L account cannot be excluded from GloBE income unless specifically provided. Dividend and capital gains in respect of equity shares of subsidiary/joint venture/associate need to be excluded from GloBE income, irrespective of whether the jurisdiction of the CE (like India) has a participation exemption regime. Since dividend may trigger local tax in India at a rate higher than the minimum tax rate of 15%, a CE in India may desire that such dividend as also local tax thereon is considered to be a part of ETR calculation for India. However, no such option is available with MNE Group and such dividend and local tax thereon need exclusion while calculating ETR.

10.3. Separately, a significant impact may arise when the entity, pursuant to a settlement of liabilities under IBC or bankruptcy code, gets a significant haircut which in terms of applicable accounting standards may be required to be credited to the P&L account. In the Indian context, while MAT provisions have become academic for entities opting for s.115BAA, in respect of such credits to P&L account, which is accepted to be non-taxable, there could be TUT liability if the haircut is significant as compared to operating profits which MNE Group may earn from Indian entities.

11. DETERMINATION OF DENOMINATOR OF ETR – ADJUSTED COVERED TAX

11.1. As each jurisdiction may have its own corporate tax system, GloBE Rules define “covered tax”, which refers to types of tax that can be included in the numerator. For example, indirect tax or stamp duty cannot be considered as covered tax. At a broad level, covered tax is defined as any tax w.r.t. an entity’s income or profits. The commentary gives additional guidance in determining the scope of the covered tax. Generally, the concept of covered tax is likely to align with conditions to determine if a tax is income-tax as per Ind AS/IFRS.

11.2. To recollect, income tax expense as per ‘fit for consolidation’ accounts is the start point for the numerator of ETR. Once there are adjustments made to book profit in computing GloBE income to ensure that numerator (namely covered tax) represents tax paid in respect of profits forming part of the denominator, certain correlative adjustments are warranted even to calculate the numerator.  

11.3. At a policy level, in blueprint, the proposal was to adopt only current tax expense in the numerator and not to recognise deferred tax expense. This certainly was not acceptable to stakeholders and multiple representations were made to impress upon the OECD that ETR calculation will be skewed and will not represent the real picture if book-to-tax timing differences as dealt with by deferred tax adjustments are not taken into account. Consequently, in GloBE Rules, deferred tax elements are also considered, albeit with multiple safeguards/limitations. To illustrate, while DTL is reckoned in the numerator, to ensure the integrity of calculation is maintained such that DTL provided at a higher tax rate in books is not sheltering other tax incentives, GloBE Rules require calibration of DTL at 15% tax rate. Likewise, there are provisions to ensure that DTL, which is not actually paid within 5 years is recaptured (subject to certain exceptions). As discussed further, the DTA mechanism is also used by GloBE Rules for ensuring that loss incurred in earlier years is set off while computing TUT liability in future years.

To a tax professional, recollecting an understanding of DTA/DTL is crucial for understanding the adjustments of ETR calculation. While we claim no accounting expertise, we have broadly summarized DTA/DTL as relevant for IndAS/IFRS to the extent found pertinent.

11.4. CONCEPT OF DEFERRED TAX EXPENSE – AN ACCOUNTANT’S PERSPECTIVE

The timing of recognising incomes/expenses in books can be different compared to tax. To ensure a true and fair view and to adhere to the matching principle, accounting standard requires that “tax effects” of incomes and expenses should be recognised in the same period in which incomes and expenses are recognised. The tax expense is the aggregate of current tax and deferred tax. While current tax reflects actual tax payable as per tax return, deferred tax reflects the impact of temporary differences.15


15. Under IGAAP, DT is recognised for the timing difference between book profit and taxable income [this concept is also explained in the Supreme Court decision of J. K. Industries vs. UOI [2007] 165 Taxman 323 (SC)]. Under Ind AS, a balance sheet approach is followed, where DT is recognised for the temporary difference between book base and tax base of assets/liabilities. Ind AS does not make the distinction between timing difference and permanent difference – e.g., under Ind AS, DT is recognised even for the difference between book base and tax base on account of revaluation.

A provision for deferred tax liability is recognised when the future tax liability is higher because:

  • Income is recognised in books, and tax is payable only in future (e.g., percentage of completion method is followed to record revenue in books, but project completion method is followed for tax purposes), or

  • Deduction is claimed in the tax return, but the expense is recognised in books only in future (e.g., capital R&D expenditure is fully claimed u/s. 35(1)(iv) of ITA whilst the capital asset is depreciated in books over a period).

Contrarily, a deferred tax asset is recognised when a tax benefit is to arise in future (e.g., s.43B deduction allowable in tax return on actual payment).

Such deferred tax liability or asset is reversed when the temporary difference is reversed in future i.e.

  • Provision for DTL is reversed as tax liability is actually discharged in future, or

  • DTA is reversed as tax deduction is actually claimed in future.

11.5. For calculating ETR, generation of DTA lowers ETR, while reversal of DTA enhances ETR. Likewise, generation of DTL results in enhancing ETR, while reversal of DTL lowers ETR.

Assume, on account of s.35AD deduction, ICo’s local tax liability is nil – but ICo recognises DTL provision reflecting tax payable in future years. For calculating ETR under GloBE, as the DTL provision is included in the numerator, investment-linked incentives such as s.35AD is protected from TUT liability under GloBE.

11.6 ILLUSTRATIVE ADJUSTMENTS TO CURRENT TAX AND DEFERRED TAX, TO ARRIVE AT “ADJUSTED COVERED TAX”

11.6.1. Corelative adjustment: To ensure parity, GloBE requires exclusion from the numerator of current tax and deferred tax that relates to income excluded from the denominator16. For example, since dividend and capital gains on equity interests is typically excluded from the denominator (as discussed above at para 6), the tax effects of such income are also excluded from the numerator.

11.6.2. Recast DTA/DTL to 15% tax rate if recognised at tax rate > 15%: In books, DTA/DTL are measured at tax rates that are enacted or substantively enacted as of the balance sheet date. If such tax rate is > 15%, specifically for computing ETR under GloBE, the DTA/DTL is recast to 15% tax rate17. For example, if ICo (subject to corporate tax rate of 25%) claims accelerated depreciation of 1,00,000 in tax return over and above book depreciation, ICo recognises DTL provision of 25,000 @ 25%. For computing ETR, such DTL provision is recast to 15% tax rate i.e. 15,000.


16. Article 4.1.3(a) and 4.4.1(a)
17. Article 4.4.1

This recast ensures that DTL provision in excess of 15% tax rate in respect of a taxable business is not used to shield TUT liability in respect of income of another business that enjoys 100% tax holiday, or other tax incentives that are enjoyed in the jurisdiction.

In a high-tax jurisdiction such as India, assume ICo opting for s.115BAA has a book profit of 1,00,000 but taxable income of nil due to excess of accelerated depreciation over book depreciation of 80,000 and weighted deduction u/s 80JJAA of 20,000. The DTL provision in the books on account of accelerated depreciation is recognised at 20,000 (80,000 x 25%) while in GloBE calculations, this is capped to 12,000 (15% tax rate). ETR of ICo is 12,000/1,00,000 = 12%. As ETR is < 15%, ICo can trigger TUT liability @ 3% – which reflects impact of weighted deduction u/s 80JJAA. This shows that even in high-tax jurisdictions such as India or UK, where taxable income can be significantly impacted by a combination of timing differences and weighted deductions, weighted deductions can result in TUT liability because DTL on account of timing differences is capped to 15% tax rate.

11.6.3. DTL recapture: If DTL provision is included in the numerator in year 1, GloBE Rules require such DTL to reverse within the next 5 years namely actual tax payment should happen within the next 5 years. If this condition is not met, GloBE Rules require such DTL to be re-captured in year 6, which means that, in year 6, ETR of year 1 is recomputed on a retrospective basis after ignoring such DTL – resultant TUT liability of year 1 (based on recomputed ETR of year 1) is payable in year 6. This is in addition to the normal top-up tax (if any) of year 6. It may be noted that the GloBE return of year 1 is not revised in year 6, but there is a separate column in GloBE return of year 6 to recompute ETR of year 1 and pay the resultant TUT liability in year 618. Furthermore, if the actual tax payment of such DTL happens in, say, year 8, the same can be added to covered tax in the the ETR computation of year 8.

However, where the DTL provision is covered by specified exceptions19, there is no recapture. Specified exceptions comprise, for example: DTL due to accelerated depreciation on tangible assets (e.g., s.35AD), DTL due to 100% tax deduction of capital R&D expenditure (e.g., s.35(1)(iv), DTL due to fair valuation gains, etc.)20 The policy rationale behind these exceptions is that: DTL is typically tied to substantive activities in a jurisdiction; (or) DTL is not prone to assessee manipulation; (or) DTL is certain to reverse over time.


18. If, at the time of filing GloBE return of year 1, the entity expects that DTL provision recognised in year 1 is unlikely to reverse in next 5 years, such entity can, in terms of Article 4.4.1(b) r. w. 4.4.7, elect to ignore or disclaim such DTL provision while filing GloBE return of year 1 itself – so as to avoid recapture of such DTL provision in year 6. Such actual tax payment will then form part of the numerator on actual payment basis.
19. Article 4.4.5
20. Under I-GAAP AS-22, DTL was not recognised w.r.t. fair valuation gains, as that represented a permanent difference between book profit and taxable income. Under IndAS, a balance sheet approach is adopted requiring comparison of book base and tax base, which results in recognising DTL on account of fair valuation gains in books.

It may be noted that the exceptions include only accelerated depreciation in respect of tangible assets and not in respect of intangible assets. For an entity focussed on acquiring intangibles with a huge IP base (e.g., a pharma or software company), IP having indefinite life is not amortised in books, but can be amortised for local tax purposes. This can result in recognising DTL provision every year, as the tax base of IP goes on reducing while the book base of IP remains constant. If such IP is sold in future, capital gains tax liability is computed w.r.t. WDV as reduced by accumulated depreciation. This future tax liability is recognised in the form of DTL provision every year as IP is amortised for local tax purposes. DTL provision reverses only on the sale of IP in future. Where DTL provision recognised in books in year 1 does not reverse until year 6 (because IP is not sold until year 6), there can be recapture. As a result, in year 6, ETR of year 1 needs to be recomputed by excluding (or ignoring) DTL provision in respect of IP amortisation. This exclusion of DTL provision from numerator can cause ETR of year 1 (as recomputed) to be < 15%, and trigger GloBE liability in year 6.

11.6.4. DTA in relation to tax credits is ignored: Under IndAS/IFRS, the concept of deferred tax accounting is not restricted to temporary differences between accounting income and taxable income. It also extends to tax credits/losses. It requires creating DTA when tax credits are made available in current year, which is reversed as tax credits are absorbed or offset in future years.

In respect of MAT credit, IndAS/IFRS requires recognising DTA in the year of generation of MAT credit – such DTA is reversed as MAT credit is utilised in future years. In the year of generation of MAT credit, the current tax provision is equivalent to MAT payable for that year, while a corresponding deferred tax asset is recognised of the very same amount, representing MAT credit entitlement. In the outer column of P&L A/c for this year, the net tax expense is zero21. In the year of generation of MAT credit, whether ETR should be computed after reducing DTA on account of MAT credit?

GloBE Rules state that, in computing ETR, DTA with respect to the generation and use of tax credits should be ignored or excluded22. The commentary suggests that the scope of this entry is wide and is not restricted to tax credits which are provided as tax incentives (for example, R&D tax credit, where a percentage of the capital cost of eligible R&D expenditure is set off against tax liability). Hence, in this case, in computing ETR, creation and reversal of DTA on account of generation and utilisation of MAT credit should be ignored. In the year of generation of MAT credit, the numerator should be based on actual MAT payable, ignoring the DTA represented by potential advantage on account of MAT credit entitlement.

11.6.5. Use of DTA to ensure set off for loss-making entities: Ordinarily, taxable income is determined after set off of past loss, and no tax may be payable if profits are insufficient to absorb past loss. As stated at para 2 above, the start point for the denominator is profit after tax as per P&L of the current year, while loss of earlier years is not captured therein. GloBE Rules grant set off of loss of earlier years by making use of DTA. To recollect, under IndAS/IFRS, a DTA is recognised in year of generation of loss, in anticipation of future tax benefit in form of set off of loss while computing taxable income. This DTA is reversed in the year of actual set off. Generation of DTA results in lowering ETR, while reversal of DTA results in enhancing ETR.

For example, assume that an entity (liable to corporate tax rate of 25%, and not enjoying any tax incentives) incurs loss of 1,00,000 in year 1 and earns profit of 1,00,000 in year 2. In books, in year 1, the entity creates DTA of 25,000 (@ 25%). In year 1, there is no GloBE liability because denominator of ETR formula is negative. In books, in year 2 namely generation of profit, DTA of 25,000 is reversed in books. For GloBE, such DTA of 25,000 is recast to 15,000 (@ 15%)23 in terms of discussion at para 11.6.2 above. As a result, ETR for year 2 is 15%, and there is no GloBE liability for year 2.


21. In a future year, when MAT credit is utilised, such DTA pertaining to MAT credit entitlement is reversed.
22. Article 4.4.1(e)
23. Article 4.4.1

It is possible that, under IndAS/IFRS, the entity may not recognise any DTA in books in respect of loss generated in year 1, if there is no reasonable certainty of future taxable profits as of year 1. To ensure that past loss is effectively set off even in this scenario where there is no DTA recognised in books, GloBE Rules provide that the impact of accounting recognition adjustment should be ignored24. The commentary25 explains that, in reckoning DTA/DTL for GloBE purposes, the requirement of reasonable certainty of future taxable profits (which is a pre-condition for recognising DTA in books) is discarded. As a result, despite non-recognition of DTA in books, it is possible to recognise DTA for GloBE purposes in the year of generation of tax loss and use such DTA for enhancing ETR when such tax loss is set off under domestic tax laws.

For jurisdictions having corporate tax rate < 15%:
Assume the same numbers given earlier, except that, the entity is liable to corporate tax rate of 10% instead of 25%. The entity would recognise DTA of only 10,000 in books, and ETR for year 2 would be 10% (namely DTA reversal of 10,000 divided by profit of 1,00,000), which would trigger TUT liability @ 5% (considering shortfall as compared to minimum tax rate of 15%) in year 2, despite the entity effectively not having made any profits. To avoid such results, DTA recognised in books at 10% tax rate can be recast upwards to 15% tax rate, such that DTA for GloBE purposes is considered at 15,000 as against 10,000. This ensures that ETR for year 2 is 15%, and there is no TUT liability in year 2. To claim this benefit, the entity needs to prove that the loss of 1,00,000 pertains to items forming part of GloBE income in the denominator of ETR. For example, if such loss is on account of sale of shares of an associate which is excluded while computing GloBE income, DTA for such loss needs to be excluded from the numerator (on the ground of corelative adjustment).

The discussion in the preceding paras is equally relevant to the loss incurred before applicability of GloBE Rules26.

For zero tax jurisdictions: Where the entity is in a jurisdiction which does not levy any corporate tax (and as a result, there is no potential of recognising DTA in the books) (e.g., Bermuda), GloBE Rules provide an option to the entity to recognise DTA outside the books @ 15% of GloBE loss (i.e. after making all upward/downward adjustments to arrive at the denominator of ETR)27. Such DTA can be utilised in future years to enhance ETR when denominator turns positive. Such option can be exercised only at the jurisdictional level, and only in the first GloBE return filed for that jurisdiction (and not in a later year).


24. Article 4.4.1 (c)
25. Refer para 76 and 77 at page 102.
26. Article 9.1
27. Article 4.5

Importantly, such an option can facilitate recognition of DTA outside the books only for loss incurred after the applicability of GloBE Rules. It does not apply for loss incurred before the applicability of GloBE Rules28. To illustrate, assume the same numbers given earlier, except that, the entity is liable to corporate tax rate of 0% instead of 25%. If year 1 is a pre-GloBE year (i.e. GloBE Rules are inapplicable in year 1), DTA outside the books cannot be recognised for loss of year 1, and TUT liability for year 2 is triggered of 15,000. However, if year 1 is a post GloBE year, TUT liability for both years is nil.

While the aforesaid option can also be exercised for high-tax jurisdictions, as a fallout of exercising such option, DTA/DTL in books is fully ignored in ETR, and only DTA for GloBE loss can be considered in addition to current tax provision in ETR.

11.7. Post filing adjustments29: If, in the current year, there is a change in tax provision for earlier year/s (can be increase or decrease of tax liability for earlier year/s), the impact of such change is always factored in computing ETR of the current year. The earlier year/s ETR is not reworked. Such changes can happen on account of completion of assessment or filing of revised return for earlier years.

As an exception to the above, in the following cases, refund/decrease of tax liability for an earlier year which gets admitted (or recognised in the books) in the current year is given effect to by recomputing earlier year’s ETR (any TUT liability due to such re-computation is recovered separately in current year):

a. Where quantum of refund/decrease of earlier year’s tax liability is > €1 million at jurisdiction level.

b. Where quantum of refund/decrease of earlier year’s tax liability is < € 1 million at jurisdiction level, and the assessee chooses to give effect by recomputing earlier year’s ETR (such being an annual choice).

11.8. Cross-border allocation rules30: GloBE Rules are built on the general principle that tax expense relating to a given income should be allocated to the jurisdiction where the underlying income is considered in GloBE calculations. To illustrate, if withholding tax is paid in source jurisdiction (say, India) in respect of royalty income which belongs to a subsidiary in residence jurisdiction (say, Netherlands), withholding tax paid in India as also tax paid in Netherlands will be included in numerator of Netherlands, while computing the ETR of Netherlands31.


28. Para 8.4 of UK consultation document on Pillar 2, OECD Secretariat’s clarification in virtual public consultation meeting held on 25th April, 2022.
29. Article 4.6.1
30. Article 4.3

31. Like withholding tax, if STTR is also recovered, STTR will also be attributed to the CE whose income suffers STTR.

Similarly,

• Taxes paid in respect of a PE (which is considered as a separate CE for GloBE Rules; and adjusted covered tax and GloBE income of such PE are computed separately from the HO owning such PE) in the PE jurisdiction as well as the HO jurisdiction are considered in the ETR calculation of the PE32.

• CFC tax paid in the jurisdiction of the ultimate parent is allocated to jurisdiction where CFC is located. This is despite CFC being many layers below the ultimate parent33.

In respect of dividend, tax paid on intra-group dividend (namely dividend declared by one CE to another CE) is allocated to the jurisdiction of the CE that has distributed the dividend34. To recollect, for computing ETR of shareholder’s jurisdiction, dividend is excluded from GloBE income, and tax on such dividend is also excluded from adjusted covered tax. But, on the logic that tax follows income, where one CE receives dividend from another CE, tax on such dividend can be allocated to the jurisdiction of the CE which has distributed the dividend. To clarify, tax on dividend borne by entities outside the MNE Group (which are not CEs) is not allocated to the CE which distributes dividend.


32. GloBE Rules have a specific definition of PE and also provide special provisions to deal with such cases. Accordingly, the impact of PE under GloBE Rules requires independent evaluation.
33. Article 4.3.2(c) r.w. 4.3.3
34. Article 4.3.2(e)

Assume a case where, ICo is the ultimate parent of an MNE Group, which holds 100% shares in MauCo, a CE having operations in Mauritius. MauCo pays no corporate tax in Mauritius. If MauCo declares its entire profits as dividend in the same year such profits are earned, dividend tax paid by ICo in India @ 25% is allocated to Mauritius (namely jurisdiction of CE that distributed such dividend) in determining ETR of Mauritius. As a result, although no corporate tax is paid in Mauritius, because of allocation of dividend tax from India to Mauritius, ETR of Mauritius is > 15%. However, assuming no occasion arises for ICo to pay dividend tax (because MauCo does not declare dividend, or because ICo claims deduction u/s 80M), nothing is allocated to Mauritius, and ETR of Mauritius is 0%, resulting in TUT liability @ 15% of profits earned in Mauritius. Dividend tax paid by individuals who are promoters of ICo cannot be allocated to Mauritius, as individuals are not a part of MNE Group under the GloBE Rules.

Let us tweak the facts to assume that ICo holds 100% shares of MauCo indirectly through another holding company namely SingCo of Singapore. The entire profits of MauCo are upstreamed to SingCo, and thereafter to ICo. ICo pays dividend tax @ 25% under ITA. As per GloBE Rules, dividend tax paid by ICo in India is allocated to the jurisdiction of the company that distributed such dividends (namely Singapore) and not to the jurisdiction of the underlying company which earned the profits (namely Mauritius). As a result, the ETR of Mauritius is 0%, and TUT liability in respect of MauCo profits is triggered @ 15%, despite payment of dividend tax in India on such profits. As per the commentary, where there is an intermediate holding company, dividend tax paid by the upper-tier parent (namely ICo) is not allocated to MauCo, considering the inconvenience of tracking and tracing distributions through the ownership chain.

12. COMING UP

This article discussed the charging provisions, recovery mechanism, determination of ETR (including illustrating some India-specific fact-patterns). In this backdrop, the last article of this series will, inter alia, dwell upon special tax rules for business reorganisations and compliance/administrative aspects.

[The authors are thankful to CA Geeta D. Jani, CA Shaptama Biswas and CA Dolly Sharma for their support.]

PILLAR 2: AN INTRODUCTION TO GLOBAL MINIMUM TAXATION – PART I

 1. INTRODUCTION – BEPS 2.0 – HEADING TOWARDS A GLOBAL RESET

“I see it as completion of work we started 10 years ago…It puts an end to the craziness where you could reduce your tax burden legally, massively, and in complete contradiction with the spirit of the law1.”

“Tell your CFOs, your CEOs, that the game has changed and that the tax function should be boring. It’s no longer a profit centre. So just tell your tax colleagues that it’s going to be boring. They will have to comply to pay the tax. And that’s done. They will stop playing with very sophisticated engineering2.”

– Pascal Saint-Amans,
Director of the Center for tax policy, OECD

1.1 Introduction, policy objectives behind Pillar 2: Despite BEPS 1.0 project, it was felt that risks of profit-shifting to no/ very low tax jurisdictions persist due to increasing reliance of the world’s economy on mobile resources such as finance and intangibles. To illustrate, it was felt that there is still a tendency to allocate substantial intangible and financial risk-related returns to group entities (in low-tax jurisdictions) that have a modest level of substance. To address these “remaining” BEPS risks and having regard to following policy objectives, OECD embarked upon another ambitious journey, to introduce a concept of global minimum tax, called Pillar 2. The premise behind the Pillar 2 is simple, if a jurisdiction does not exercise its taxing rights adequately, a new network of rules will re-allocate those taxing rights to another jurisdiction that will.

  • End of “race to bottom”: To quote US treasury3 “The problem is that nations have engaged in tax competition, which has driven down corporate tax rates, and diminished their important role in making sure that owners of capital bear their fair share of the tax burden. Because of this race to the bottom, corporate tax rates have declined from an OECD average of over 40% forty years ago, to just 23% today.” Pillar 2 aims to end this “race to bottom”.

1    https://www.fa-mag.com/news/global-corporate-taxes-face--revolution--after-u-s--shift-61375.html?print
2    https://mnetax.com/global-minimum-tax-will-work-if-implemented-oecds-saint-amans-says-46122
3    Remarks by Assistant Secretary for Tax Policy, Lily Batchelder at the New York State Bar Association’s Annual Meeting on 25th January, 2022
  • Ensure investment decisions are based on non-tax factors such as infrastructure, education levels or labour costs4.
  • Rethink tax incentives5: Revenue foregone from tax incentives can reduce opportunities for much-needed public spending on infrastructure and public services. GloBE Rules could effectively shield developing countries from the pressure to offer inefficient/wasteful tax incentives.
  • Restore public finances post COVID-196: Pillar 2 could increase global corporate income tax revenues by about $ 150 billion per year.
  • GloBE Rules trigger minimum tax in respect of profits which are in excess of routine returns related to real substance indicated by tangible assets and payroll costs. Thus, jurisdictions can continue to offer tax incentives for such routine returns as these are not adversely impacted by GloBE Rules8.

1.2 Pillar 2 comprises of 2 measures i.e.:

  • GloBE Rules (Global anti-Base Erosion Rules) – GloBE Rules consist principally of Income Inclusion Rule (IIR), which operates akin to CFC provisions, and enables headquarters jurisdiction to amend domestic tax laws and impose an additional top-up tax on low-taxed foreign profits of overseas subsidiaries/permanent establishments of an MNE to achieve minimum taxation of at least 15% on such foreign profits. These are complemented by Under Taxed Payments Rule (UTPR), which functions as a backstop to collect top-up taxes that cannot be collected through IIR.
  • STTR (Subject to Tax Rules) – To protect the interests of developing countries, Pillar 2 also consists of STTR, a treaty-based rule for expansion of source taxation rights on certain base-eroding payments (like interest and royalties) made to connected persons when they are not taxed up to the minimum rate of 9%.

4    OECD (2020), Tax Challenges Arising from Digitalisation – Economic Impact Assessment: Inclusive Framework on BEPS - https://doi.org/10.1787/0e3cc2d4-en
5    OECD (2019), Programme of Work to Develop a Consensus Solution to the Tax Challenges Arising from the Digitalisation of the Economy - www.oecd.org/tax/beps/programme-of-work-to-develop-aconsensus-solution-to-the-tax-challenges-arising-from-the-digitalisation-of-the-economy.htm.
6    OECD (2020), Tax Challenges Arising from Digitalisation – Report on Pillar Two Blueprint - https://doi.org/10.1787/abb4c3d1-en.
7    https://www.oecd.org/tax/beps/oecd-releases-pillar-two-model-rules-for-domestic-implementation-of-15-percent-global-minimum-tax.htm
8    OECD FAQs on GloBE Rules (December, 2021)

1.3 Presently, OECD has released Model Rules and Commentary only w.r.t. GloBE Rules. STTR Model Treaty provisions, Commentary and design of MLI 2.0 on STTR are still awaited – though, as per the earlier timeline presented by OECD, this was expected to be published in mid-March, 20229. Considering this delay in the development of STTR, the United Nations Committee of Experts on International Cooperation in Tax Matters in April, 2022 constituted a sub-committee to look into providing an alternative approach for countries not interested in aligning with OECD/ BEPS IF for implementing STTR10. This series focuses only on the design and operational mechanics of GloBE Rules.

  1. TIMELINE OF EVENTS2.1 The key events leading to the development of GloBE Rules are:
  • October, 2020 – OECD Secretariat released a Blueprint11 on Pillar 2, which, while not representing a consensus of BEPS IF jurisdictions, elaborated extensively upon proposals being considered by OECD on the key design elements of both GloBE Rules and STTR.

9. Refer https://www.oecd.org/tax/beps/oecd-launches-public-consultation-on-the-tax-challenges-of-digitalisation-with-the-release-of-a-first-building-block-under-pillar-one.htm
10. Source: https://www.un.org/development/desa/financing/sites/www.un.org.development.desa.financing/files/2022-03/CRP.6%20Digitalized%20and%20Globalized%20Economy.pdf
11. https://www.oecd.org/tax/beps/tax-challenges-arising-from-digitalisation-report-on-pillar-two-blueprint-abb4c3d1-en.htm
  • July, October, 2021 – 137 members of BEPS IF out of 141 countries12 (which represent more than 90% of global GDP) agreed on the majority of the key components of the design of Pillar 2.
  • December, 2021 – Release of Model GloBE Rules13 by OECD/BEPS IF.
  • March, 2022 – Release of Commentary (which stretches to over 200 pages) and Examples on GloBE Rules explaining intended outcomes and application of GloBE Rules.

2.2 Model GloBE Rules are fairly detailed and complex set of provisions, comprised of 10 chapters spread over 70 pages, which deal with operative provisions (including definitions) for computing GloBE tax liability as also for determining entity from whom such GloBE tax liability should be collected. Also, while OECD dubs GloBE Rules as a “precise template” for coordinated and consistent implementation in domestic tax laws across jurisdictions, certain adaptations and tweaks to align with local tax policy are more likely to take place, such that GloBE Rules act more as model rules rather than a precise template.

Separately, to facilitate consistent interpretation, application and administration of GloBE Rules, as also to address any ambiguities and anomalies that may arise therefrom, OECD proposes to come out with Agreed Administrative Guidance along with a GloBE Implementation Framework14 to provide direction on coordinated and consistent interpretation or administration of GloBE Rules.

Amidst ever-evolving literature on the subject, in the ensuing paras, an attempt is made to deal with some of the key concepts of the GloBE Rules covering in-scope entities, charging provisions and operational mechanics, and collection of top-up-tax (TUT).

3. SCOPE OF GLoBE RULES15

GloBE Rules apply only if:- (a) a group is an MNE group, and (b) annual consolidated revenue of such group as per consolidated financial statements (CFS) is € 750 million or more in at least two of four preceding fiscal years. Revenue of tested fiscal year is not relevant for checking applicability of GloBE Rules.


12    The BEPS IF comprises 141 member jurisdictions. The only IF members that have not yet joined in the October, 2021 statement are Kenya, Nigeria, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka. Significantly, all OECD, G20, and EU members (except for Cyprus, which is not an IF member) joined the agreement, seemingly clearing the way for wide-spread adoption in all major economies.
13    https://www.oecd.org/tax/beps/tax-challenges-arising-from-the-digitalisation-of-the-economy-global-anti-base-erosion-model-rules-pillar-two.pdf
14    Article 8.1.3 r.w. definition of Agreed Administrative Guidance and GloBE Implementation Framework at Article 10.1.
15    Article 1.2

3.1 What is an MNE group?

An MNE group consists of entities located in more than one jurisdiction, which are related through ownership/control, such that their assets, liabilities, incomes, expenses and cash flows are required to be consolidated on a line-by-line basis in the CFS16 of the ultimate parent entity (UPE). UPE is one who holds the controlling interest in other entities, such that it consolidates these other entities on a line-by-line basis17. All the entities included in CFS are referred to as constituent entities (CE)18.

3.2 What is an Entity?

An entity is defined as any legal person (such as LLP) or an arrangement that prepares separate financial statements (SFS) (such as a partnership or trust). Natural persons/individuals are not considered as an entity and are outside the scope of the GloBE Rules.

3.3 Excluded Entities

Some entities, like governmental entities, international organisations, investment funds, non-profit organisations etc., are not considered as CEs and are excluded from the applicability of GloBE Rules. These are called Excluded Entities.

4. GloBE RULES AND ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

To determine whether the threshold of € 750 million or above is breached as well as for determining the amount of tax payable under the GloBE Rules as indicated hereunder (if any), the GloBE Rules heavily rely on CFS, which are prepared as per acceptable accounting standards. Towards this end, accounting standards accepted by the GloBE Rules include IFRS, US GAAP and GAAPs of some specified countries/blocs. Further, where GAAP of a jurisdiction is not acceptable under GloBE, such GAAP must be adjusted for material variations before it can be used for GloBE purposes.


16    As an exception, an entity which is excluded from CFS on size or materiality grounds or because it is held for sale is also considered as forming part of the group for GloBE purposes
17    Article 1.4.1
18    Article 1.3.1

  1. CHARGING PROVISIONS OF GloBE RULES

    “The GloBE Rules provide fora coordinated system of taxationintended to ensure large MNE Groups pay a minimum level of tax on the income arising in each of the jurisdictions where they operate. It does so by imposing a top-up tax whenever the Effective Tax Rate, determined on a jurisdictional basis, is below the minimum rate.”

– GloBE Model Rules (December, 2021)

5.1 GloBE Rules achieve a minimum tax rate of 15% qua each jurisdiction – GloBE Rules adopt “jurisdictional blending” (neither an entity level approach nor a global blending approach)
The effective tax rate (ETR) for a jurisdiction is determined by aggregating the income and tax expense of all CEs ‘located’ in a specific jurisdiction. Such aggregation of income and tax within the same jurisdiction is referred to as jurisdictional blending. GloBE Rules apply if the effective tax rate (ETR) of a jurisdiction (computed by clubbing results of all group entities located in that jurisdiction) is < MTR of 15%. Any shortfall will result in top-up tax (TUT) liability at the jurisdictional level.

For this purpose, a CE is said to be located in a jurisdiction of its tax residence determined in accordance with domestic tax laws19. In case an entity is located in more than one jurisdiction, the tie-breaker provisions as per the relevant tax treaty are resorted to20.

This is explained with help of an example below:


19     Location of a CE is determined as per Article 10.3.
20    In the absence of a treaty tie-breaker or where treaty requires a mutual agreement by competent authorities which does not exist, special hierarchical provisions are provided to determine location of CE.

5.1.1 Facts

  • MNE Group, having HQ/Ultimate Parent Entity in State P, has various wholly-owned subsidiaries in three overseas jurisdictions (State A, B and C).
  • State P, State A and State B have headline corporate tax rates of > 15% and do not offer any significant tax incentives, and hence are considered ‘high tax jurisdiction’ (HTJ). State C does not levy income tax, qualifying as a ‘low tax jurisdiction’ (LTJ).
  • UPE in State P has profits of 1,000 on which tax paid is > 15%.
  • SubCos in State A have aggregate profits of 2,000 on which tax paid is > 15%.
  • SubCos in State B have incurred aggregate losses. No taxes are paid in State B.
  • In State C, there are three wholly-owned subsidiaries, with profits and losses as follows:
  • C Co 1 – 5,000, C Co 2 – 3,000, C Co 3 – (4,000)
  • At the jurisdictional level, all 3 entities put together have profit of 4,000. Despite this, SubCos in State C trigger nil tax liability in State C.

5.1.2 GloBE impact on MNE group

As discussed above, GloBE operates neither at the entity level nor the global level, but at the jurisdictional level, to achieve minimum tax rate at the jurisdictional level of 15%.

Jurisdiction Profit/(Loss) as per CFS Tax rate Tax (Pre GloBE) GloBE tax impact Total tax (Post GloBE)
UPE 1,000 30% 300 NIL 300
SubCos A 2,000 20% 400 NIL 400
SubCos B (5,000) 30% NIL NIL NIL
SubCos C 4,000 NIL NIL 600 600
Total 2,000 700 600 1,300
ETR 35% 30% 65%
  • Despite ETR at the global level as per CFS is > 15% (i.e. 35%), GloBE Rules can still apply to such MNE if jurisdictional ETR is < 15%.
  • No GloBE impact in State A (being HTJ) and State B (due to losses).
  • As State C has jurisdictional ETR below 15%, GloBE Rules will apply in respect of entities of the MNE group that are in State C. As profit at the jurisdictional level in State C is 4,000, which is subject to zero local tax, such profit will be subject to a ‘top-up tax’ (TUT) to bring the total tax levy in respect of profits of State C up to the minimum tax rate of 15%. In other words, in the present case, GloBE TUT for State C will be 600 (4,000 x 15%). Such GloBE TUT is recovered through mechanisms discussed in the ensuing paras.
  •  As illustrated above, since GloBE Rules adopt jurisdictional blending as compared to worldwide blending, profits arising in one jurisdiction cannot be offset by losses in other jurisdictions. Also, corporate income tax beyond 15% borne in one jurisdiction cannot be blended with zero tax paid in another jurisdiction. However, losses of one entity can be set off against profits of other entities of the MNE Group in the same jurisdiction.
  • At the global CFS level, before the application of GloBE Rules, consolidated profit (after set off of loss) is 2,000, the total tax is 700; ETR is 35%. Post application of GloBE Rules, total tax rises to 1,300, and ETR shoots up to 65%!

5.2 Mechanisms for recovery of TUT under GloBE Rules

TUT, as determined on the jurisdictional basis above, is then recovered through a set of interlocking rules listed below, designed to be applied in a coordinated manner as per an agreed “Rule Order” illustrated below.

5.2.1 Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax (DMTT)21

The charging provisions for DMTT have not been specifically dealt with under the GloBE Rules, where reference to DMTT is only drawn at the time of determination of Jurisdictional TUT as reduction therefrom. DMTT is introduced in GloBE Rules only to provide primary taxing rights to LTJ itself and to avoid LTJ from ceding taxing rights on profits accrued within its jurisdiction to other jurisdictions.

Vide introduction of DMTT in domestic tax laws of LTJ, LTJ itself may opt to collect jurisdictional TUT as computed under the GloBE Rules rather than allowing such TUT to be collected by other countries under the other rules below. In the illustration above in para 5.1, State C has the first priority to implement DMTT and recover GloBE TUT of 600. Any tax paid under DMTT is credited for the determination of GloBE liability under the other rules below.

21    Article 10.1

While implementing DMTT is optional for LTJ, where implemented, it has to be consistent with outcomes of GloBE Rules22. In this regard, the exact design that such DMTT may take, along with further guidance thereon, may be provided by OECD in the upcoming GloBE Implementation Framework.

5.2.2 Income Inclusion Rule (IIR)23

IIR operates akin to CFC rules and requires certain parent entities of an MNE group to pay TUT in respect of each overseas constituent entity (namely subsidiary or permanent establishment) in LTJ. IIR has the second priority after DMTT.

IIR adopts the philosophy of a top-down approach by allocating taxing rights to the top-most jurisdiction of the ultimate parent entity, which has implemented the GloBE Rules, in priority to intermediate parent entities below the UPE.

As per the top-down approach, UPE will usually have the first priority to pay IIR liability in respect of direct/indirect interest held by such UPE in a foreign constituent entity of LTJ. If UPE’s jurisdiction has not implemented GloBE Rules, the liability to pay IIR shifts to the jurisdiction of the next parent entity in the ownership chain that has adopted GloBE Rules (i.e. jurisdiction of the intermediate parent entity (IPE) below the UPE). If the jurisdiction of UPE, as also IPE, has not adopted GloBE Rules, the liability to pay IIR shifts to the jurisdiction of the next lower tier IPE in the ownership chain that has adopted the GloBE Rules, and so on. Where UPE pays TUT under IIR, the lower tier parent entities are exempt from payment of IIR – exemption to lower tier parent entity is conditional upon the payment of IIR by the upper tier parent entity.

Usually, IIR is to be collected by the UPE of an MNE Group. In the example in para 5.1 above, if State C does not implement DMTT, UPE jurisdiction, i.e., State P will be able to recover GloBE TUT of 600 in respect of State C under IIR. TUT payable under IIR by the parent entity is based on such parent entity’s direct/indirect interest in each constituent entity of LTJ. In the present example, UPE holds 100% interest in each subsidiary of State C, and hence, IIR liability for UPE will be 600. On the other hand, assuming UPE of State P owned 75% in these SubCos, only 75% of 600, i.e. 450 would have been payable as IIR by UPE.

22    Implementing jurisdictions are prohibited from providing any collateral or other benefits that are related to such DMTT so as to achieve overall tax outcomes consistent with objectives of GloBE.
23    Article 2.1

Split ownership approach – an exception to the top-down approach – To recollect, IIR liability of the parent entity is based on such parent entity’s direct/indirect interest in each constituent entity of LTJ. When more than 20% ownership interest in an intermediate parent entity (below the UPE) is owned directly/indirectly by third parties outside the MNE group, as an exception to the top-down approach, the first priority to pay IIR liability shifts in favour of such partially-owned IPE (referred to as Partially Owned Parent Entities or POPE). In such a case, POPE gets first priority to pay IIR liability, in preference to UPE, notwithstanding the top-down approach. This is referred to as the split ownership approach.

Additionally, jurisdictions are allowed to apply IIR, at their option, to smaller MNE groups (below the consolidated revenue threshold of € 750 Mn). While GloBE Rules are silent on this option, it was accorded previous political agreements of BEPS IF and is also acknowledged in the Commentary. Currently, no jurisdiction (not even India) has indicated desire to implement IIR for smaller- sized MNEs.

Illustrating top-down approach and split ownership approach:

Scenario 1: Top-Down Approach

Consider A Co, UPE of a MNE group, located in State A. A Co holds 85% interest in B Co (IPE) located in State B. Balance 15% in B Co is held by third parties outside the MNE group. B Co holds 100% interest in C Co which is the only constituent entity of MNE group in State C. Assume that State C is an LTJ and TUT of C Co computed under GloBE Rules is 1,000. Assume that State C does not implement DMTT; State A and State B implement GloBE Rules.

In this scenario, A Co being UPE has first priority to pay IIR liability in respect of C Co of 850, based on A Co’s 85% interest in C Co (i.e. 85% of 1,000 = 850). The exception to top-down approach (i.e. split ownership approach) is not triggered in this case as direct/indirect third-party ownership interest in B Co is < 20%24.

Nonetheless, assuming State A does not implement GloBE Rules, but State B implements GloBE Rules, as per top-down approach, IIR liability will pass on to B Co (IPE). In such case, B Co needs to pay IIR of 1,000 in State B, based on B Co’s 100% interest in C Co.

Scenario 2: Split Ownership Approach

In this case, assume that A Co holds only 75% interest in B Co and remaining 25% in B Co is held by third parties.

In this scenario, B Co qualifies as POPE since direct/indirect third-party ownership interest in B Co is > 20%. As per split ownership approach, B Co (being POPE) will have first priority to pay IIR liability, in preference to A Co (being UPE). B Co needs to pay IIR of 1,000 to State B based on B Co’s 100% interest in C Co25.

Therefore, split ownership approach results in higher collection of IIR as compared to top-down approach. In the absence of split ownership approach, under top-down approach (where UPE has the first priority to pay IIR), UPE would have paid only 750 based on UPE’s 75% interest in C Co. Under the split ownership approach, POPE is responsible for paying IIR of 1,000, based on POPE’s 100% interest in C Co.

The applicability of the top-down/split ownership approach does not depend on whether POPE is situated in the same jurisdiction as UPE. In the above example, outcomes are the same even assuming A Co and B Co had been situated in the same jurisdiction – and the split ownership approach would have got triggered in scenario 2, requiring B Co to pay IIR in preference to A Co.

24    As discussed in Para 5.2.4 below, balance TUT of 150 remains uncollected under GloBE Rules.
25    However, in case State B does not adopt GloBE Rules, and in the absence of any intermediate subsidiary of B Co holding interest in C Co, IIR liability will pass on to A Co.

5.2.3 Under-Taxed Payments Rule (UTPR)26

UTPR acts as a “backstop” to IIR and has the same objective as IIR of collecting top-up tax under GloBE Rules. While IIR applies in priority over UTPR to recover TUT, assuming jurisdiction of none of the parent entities have implemented GloBE Rules and TUT cannot, therefore, be recovered under IIR, such TUT is recovered via UTPR. Under UTPR, TUT is collected by allocating such TUT to jurisdictions where constituent entities of the MNE group are located, which have implemented GloBE Rules. Such allocation is based on the relative level of substance in the form of tangible assets and employees in each UTPR implementing jurisdiction.


26    Article 2.5

In the example in para 5.1 above, if State C does not recover DMTT and State P also does not recover IIR, States A and B can implement GloBE Rules and recover UTPR of 600. UTPR TUT of 600 is allocated amongst all UTPR implementing jurisdictions (namely State A and B, in the present case) in the ratio of their UTPR %, which is determined as under:

The above parameters are likely to be picked up from CbCR reports. Assume the following data for State A and State B:

State Number of employees Net book value of tangible assets
State A 4,000 (66%) 1,200 (60%)
State B  2,000 (33%) 800 (40%)
Total 6,000        2,000

Calculation of UTPR % and UTPR TUT for State A and B:

State Number of employees Net book value of tangible
assets
UTPR % UTPR TUT
State A 50% x  4,000

6,000

+ 50% x  1,200

2,000

= ~ 63% ~380
State B 50% x  2,000

6,000

+ 50% x  800

2,000

= ~ 37% ~220
Total 600

Thus, UTPR TUT is allocated based on the relative substance (in the form of tangible assets and employees) in States A and B.

UTPR achieves collection of such TUT by denying deductions (or an equivalent adjustment) in computing taxable income of constituent entities located in the UTPR implementing jurisdiction.

To clarify, UTPR has the lowest priority and is triggered only if TUT is not recovered pursuant to DMTT or IIR. Additionally, IIR, by design, results in the recovery of TUT only in respect of foreign constituent entities (namely subsidiaries or permanent establishments) outside the jurisdiction of the parent applying IIR. If the jurisdiction of UPE (which applies IIR) itself is LTJ, TUT for such UPE’s jurisdiction may be recovered under UTPR.

The rule order of GloBE Rules is pictorially illustrated as under:

5.2.4 Interplay of IIR and UTPR

UTPR as a backstop generally recovers TUT at par with IIR but not always. As a general rule, where UPE/ POPE holds entire ownership interest in a low-taxed constituent entity and such UPE or POPE is able to recover 100% of TUT of LTCE, there will be no fallback on UTPR. However, assuming the entire 100% of TUT of low-taxed constituent entity is unrecovered under IIR due to non-implementation of GloBE Rules by any parent’s jurisdiction (as illustrated above in para 5.2.3), such entire TUT is recovered under UTPR.

Between these two extremes, questions will arise regarding UTPR applicability where IIR is able to recover only partial TUT since UPE/POPE applying IIR only holds a partial controlling interest in the constituent entity of LTJ. To illustrate, in the example above (para 5.1), assume that UPE of State P held only 75% interest in the low-taxed constituent entity (i.e. SubCos of State C). The balance 25% interest in such a low-taxed constituent entity is held by third parties outside the MNE group. In such case, GloBE Rules contemplate that UTPR will be reduced to zero if TUT attributable to direct/indirect ownership interest of UPE in the low-taxed constituent entity is recovered fully under IIR. There is no fallback on UTPR so long as UPE’s jurisdiction implements GloBE Rules and recovers TUT attributable to UPE’s 75% interest in low-taxed constituent entity, namely 450 (75% of 600) under IIR.

However, assuming State P does not implement GloBE Rules and does not recover TUT attributable to UPE’s 75% interest in the low-taxed constituent entity, the design of GloBE Rules may consequentially lead to the recovery of the entire TUT of 600 as UTPR. The following explanation from the commentary on page 38 is relevant:

“Applying the UTPR to the total amount of Top-up Tax of an LTCE (i.e. not limited to the UPE’s Ownership Interest in the LTCE) simplifies its application. It allows for a greater tax expense than the Top-up Tax that would have been collected under the IIR if it had applied at the UPE level, because it is not limited to the UPE’s Allocable Share of the Top-up Tax due in respect of LTCE.”

UTPR can also apply where UPE holds some ownership interest in LTCE directly and not through IPE, and UPE’s jurisdiction has not adopted GloBE Rules, but IPE’s jurisdiction has adopted GloBE Rules. In this case, despite payment of IIR liability by IPE, TUT attributable to all of direct/indirect ownership interest of UPE in LTCE is not fully recovered under IIR. In such a case, TUT already collected under IIR is reduced while determining UTPR liability.

6. INTRODUCTION TO CALCULATION OF JURISDICTIONAL ETR AND TUT


6.1 Determination of jurisdictional ETR:
 As GloBE rules adopt jurisdictional blending for calculating jurisdictional ETR, income and tax expense of all constituent entities located in a jurisdiction is aggregated, and tax expense is divided by income. Both income and tax expense are based on the ‘fit for consolidation’ SFS of each constituent entity (prepared as per accounting standards applicable to CFS of UPE, which may differ from accounting standards applicable to local accounts of constituent entity). The tax expense is the aggregate of current and deferred tax. Both income and tax expenses are subject to specific adjustments specified in Chapters 3 and 4 of the GloBE Rules.

To recollect, CFS captures the whole of revenue/profit of LTCE on a line-by-line basis irrespective of whether consolidating UPE holds 100% in such CE or 51%. Where < 100% interest is held by UPE, the minority interest is accounted separately while revenue, expense, and profit parameters get consolidated at 100%. For determination of the jurisdictional ETR and TUT, the whole of profit/loss and local tax outgo of all CEs in LTJ is aggregated.

6.2 Determination of jurisdictional TUT percentage: Once jurisdictional ETR is determined, top-up tax (TUT) percentage is calculated by finding the delta between 15% (minimum tax rate) and the jurisdictional ETR27. Assuming jurisdictional ETR is 10%, the TUT percentage is determined at 5% (15-10).

6.3 Determination of GloBE TUT: Having calculated TUT percentage, GloBE TUT liability is determined for a given jurisdiction by applying TUT percentage to “excess profit”. Such excess profit is calculated as GloBE income reduced by normative deduction for routine return [referred to as substance-based income exclusion (SBIE)]28.

SBIE for a jurisdiction = 10%* of eligible payroll costs of eligible employees located in that jurisdiction + 8%* of average (considering opening and closing) net book value of eligible tangible assets located in that jurisdiction

*These percentages are for fiscal year beginning in 2023 (Article 9.2.1). They decline gradually over 10 years to reach 5% for fiscal year beginning 2033 and later.

In other words, even if jurisdictional ETR is < MTR of 15%, where SBIE is greater than GloBE income, no GloBE tax liability is likely to arise for such a jurisdiction.


27    Article 5.2.1
28    Article 5.2.2

6.4 Allocation of jurisdictional TUT amongst different CEs in LTJ: To recollect, IIR liability of a parent is capped to the parent’s direct or indirect ownership in the CE. Assuming all CEs in LTJ are 100% owned by the parent applying IIR, there is no need to allocate jurisdictional TUT amongst CEs in LTJ, because IIR in respect of all such CEs needs to be paid fully only by such parent.

However, where a parent applying IIR does not hold 100% interest in these CEs, allocation of jurisdictional TUT to each CE becomes essential, so that IIR liability is restricted to such parent’s ownership interest in respective CE. Such jurisdictional TUT is allocated to CEs based on the positive GloBE income of each CE. To illustrate, in the facts at Para 5.1.1., presume that UPE holds 100% in C Co 1 but 90% in C Co 2 and C Co 3. In such case, since C Co 3 has a loss, no TUT is allocated to C Co 3. The entire top-up tax of 600 is allocated among C Co 1 and C Co 2 in the ratio of their positive GloBE incomes, namely 5000 : 3000.

Entity GloBE income TUT allocated to each CE Ownership interest of IIR applying parent TUT
recoverable
C Co 1 5,000 5,000 x 600 = 375

8,000

100% 375
C Co 2 3,000 3,000 x 600 = 225

8,000

90% ~203
C Co 3 100%
Total 8,000 600 578

6.5 The above discussion can be pictorially depicted as under:

6.6 The above calculations are done for the given fiscal year. The fiscal year for this purpose is the fiscal year starting from 2023. In the context of an India- headquartered in-scope MNE group, the calculations will be done for the financial year beginning on 1st April, 2023 and ending on 31st March, 2024. This will require calculations for all overseas CEs for the financial year ending on 31st March, irrespective of what may be the fiscal year adopted for local tax purposes in the jurisdiction of the CEs.

7. NATURE OF GLoBE RULES: A COMMON APPROACH, NOT A MINIMUM STANDARD

7.1 GloBE Rules are intended to be implemented as a “common approach” which means that they are non-mandatory. A jurisdiction is not mandated to adopt GloBE Rules, but if it chooses to do so, it agrees to implement and administer them in a way that is consistent with outcome under GloBE Rules and the Commentary thereon (including the agreement as to rule order).

7.2 GloBE Rules, being a common approach, does not take away the right of a jurisdiction to set its own tax policy/rate. Countries may opt out at their discretion but are required to accept the application of GloBE Rules by other members in accordance with the common template provided by these rules29. To illustrate, in the example at Para 5.1 aforesaid, State C may choose not to levy corporate tax at a low rate despite GloBE Rules. However, the common approach dictates that State C has to accept the implementation of GloBE Rules by other jurisdictions resulting in other jurisdictions imposing GloBE tax on profits generated in State C.

8. COMING UP…

8.1 While the discussion above provides a broad overview of GloBE Rules, subsequent articles will dwell upon specific aspects of GloBE Rules, including:

  • Illustrative impact of GloBE Rules for inbound and outbound structures.
  • Adjustments for determination of tax expense and GloBE income for ETR computation.
  • Special rules for joint ventures.
  • Special rules for permanent establishments.
  • Administrative aspects of the GloBE Rules.


[The authors are thankful to CA Geeta D. Jani for her guidance, as well as CS Aastha Jain (LLB) and CA Vinod Ramachandran for their support.]


29    EU directive on Pillar 2, which is largely on the lines of the GloBE Rules, as it stands today, has deviated from making GloBE Rules a “common approach” to a “minimum standard” to maintain coordinated implementation in EU member states.

BEPS 2.0 SERIES PILLAR ONE – A PARADIGM SHIFT IN CONVENTIONAL TAX LAWS – PART II

(This article is written under the mentorship of CA PINAKIN DESAI)

1. PILLAR ONE – NEW TAXING RIGHT FOR MARKET JURISDICTIONS:

1.1
The digital revolution enables businesses to sell goods or provide
services to customers in multiple countries, remotely, without
establishing any form of physical presence (such as sales or
distribution outlets) in market countries (i.e. country where customers
are located). However, fundamental features of the current international
income tax system, such as permanent establishment (PE) and the arm’s
length principle (ALP), primarily rely on physical presence to allocate
taxing right to market countries and hence, are obsolete and incapable
to effectively tax digitalised economy (DE). In other words, in absence
of physical presence, no allocation of income for taxation was possible
for market countries, thereby resulting in deprivation of tax revenue in
the fold of market jurisdictions.

1.2 To meet the complaints of
market jurisdiction, Pillar One of BEPS 2.0 project aims to modify
existing nexus and profit allocation rules such that a portion of super
profits earned by large and highly profitable Multinational enterprise
(MNE) group is re-allocated to market jurisdictions under a formulary
approach (even if MNE group does not have any physical presence in such
market jurisdictions), thereby expanding the taxing rights of market
jurisdictions over MNE’s profits. MNE profit recommended by Pillar One to be allocated to market jurisdictions is termed as “Amount A”.

1.3
Considering a drastic change in tax system is aimed by Pillar One,
Amount A regime is agreed to be made applicable only to large and highly
profitable MNE groups. The first part of this article (published in
BCAJ June 2022 edition) discussed the conditions (i.e. scope thresholds)
that MNE groups must fulfil to qualify within Amount A framework.

1.4
MNE Groups who do not fulfil the scope conditions will be outside
Amount A profit allocation rules. However, MNE groups that fulfil the
scope conditions will be “Covered Group” and such Group would
need to determine Amount A as per proposed new profit allocation rules
(which would be determined on formulary basis at MNE level) and allocate
Amount A to market jurisdictions.

2. MARKET JURISDICTIONS MUST FULFIL NEXUS TEST TO BE ELIGIBLE FOR AMOUNT A ALLOCATION:

2.1
To recollect, the philosophy behind Pillar One is the proposition that
the jurisdiction in which the consumers/users reside is the jurisdiction
which, directly or indirectly, contributes to the profitability of MNE,
and therefore, some portion of the super profit which is earned by MNE
should be allowed to be taxed in the market jurisdiction regardless of
whether MNE accesses the market jurisdiction remotely or physically.

2.2
As mentioned above, Amount A aims to allocate new taxing right to
market jurisdictions. Broadly, market jurisdiction is jurisdiction where
goods or services are used or consumed. Accordingly, if an MNE is
carrying out within some jurisdiction manufacturing function or research
and development (R&D) which are completely unrelated to sales
marketing and distribution functions in a jurisdiction and there is no
sales function carried out there, such jurisdictions would not qualify
as market jurisdiction and hence, not eligible for Amount A. This is not
to suggest that the jurisdiction in which manufacturing function or
R&D activity is carried on will not tax profit attributable to that
activity. What we mean is that such allocation will not be on the basis
of jurisdiction being a market jurisdiction. Pillar One concerns itself
with that part of allocation of profit which has nexus with market
jurisdiction, without impairing all other existing tax rules which may
continue to tax other activities such as manufacture or R&D within
that jurisdiction.

2.3 Further, not all market jurisdictions
will be eligible for Amount A allocation. Amount A of MNE group will be
allocable to a market jurisdiction only where such market jurisdiction
meets the “nexus test”.

2.4 Nexus test: As per nexus test,
a market jurisdiction is eligible for Amount A allocation of a Covered
Group if following revenue thresholds are met:

GDP of market jurisdiction

Revenue threshold

Where GDP of a country > € 40Billion (Bn)

Atleast € 1 million (mn) of MNE’s third
party revenues is sourced from market jurisdiction

Where GDP of a country < € 40 Bn

Atleast € 0.25 mn of MNE’s third party revenues
is sourced from market jurisdiction

2.5  The thresholds for the Amount A nexus test have been
designed to limit the compliance costs for taxpayers and tax
administrations. The thresholds ensure that profits are allocated to
market jurisdiction only when MNE group earns material third party
revenues from such jurisdiction.

2.6 It must be noted that the
new nexus rule apply solely to determine whether a jurisdiction
qualifies for profit re-allocation under Amount A and will not alter the
taxable nexus for any other tax or non-tax purpose.

3. REVENUE SOURCING RULES:

3.1
As mentioned above, to determine whether a market meets the nexus test,
MNEs need to determine how much third party revenues are sourced from a
particular market jurisdiction.

3.2  As a broad principle, for
Amount A regime, revenue is ‘sourced’ from country where goods or
services are used or consumed. To facilitate the application of this
principle, OECD released public consultation draft in February 2022
providing detailed source rules for various types of transactions. While
the detailed list of source rules proposed by OECD for various revenue
categories is provided in Annexure, we have discussed below source rule
proposed for two categories of revenue:

(i) Revenue from sale of finished goods (FG) to end customers – either directly (i.e. through group entities) or through independent distributors is deemed to be sourced from place of the delivery of FG to final customer.
For example, an MNE group in USA may manufacture a laptop which is sold
to independent distributors who may in turn resale it to persons in
India and China. The market jurisdiction for MNE of USA is India or
China. MNE group will need to find out the place of delivery of FG to
determine whether a share of Amount A may be taxed in India or China.

(ii) Revenues from sale of components (i.e. goods sold to a business customer that will be incorporated into another good for sale) shall be sourced to place of delivery of the FG to the final customer into which the component is incorporated.
For example, an MNE group in USA (say Group X) manufactures a component
which is forming part of a car. The component is sold to another MNE
group in UK (say Group Y) engaged in manufacture of cars. Group Y uses
the component purchased from Group X in manufacture of its finished
goods (i.e. Cars) which are eventually sold by independent German
enterprise in India or China. The market jurisdiction for Group X for
sale of component is India or China. Group X will need to find out the
place of delivery of FG to determine whether a share of Amount A may be
taxed in India or China.

3.3 In order to determine place of
delivery of the FG to end customer, following indicators are suggested
by OECD to be place of market jurisdiction:

(i) The delivery address of the end customer.

(ii) The place of the retail storefront selling to the end customer.

(iii)
In case of sale through independent distributor, location of the
independent distributor may also be used in addition to the above
indicators; provided that the distributor is contractually restricted to
selling in that location only or that it is otherwise reasonable to
assume that the distributor is located in the place of the delivery of
FG to the end customer.

3.4 However, various concerns have been
raised by stakeholders on practical application of these revenue
sourcing rules. For instance,

(i) Tracing location of final
consumers, in particular where the taxpayer does not directly interact
with the final consumer will be very difficult.

(ii) It will be
onerous burden on Covered Group to collect, analyse and disclose what is
likely to be highly confidential data, such as location of customers.
This would often require collecting data not in the possession of the
Covered Group, and instead they would require reliance on third-party
data.

(iii) Companies also could face barriers to obtaining this
kind of highly confidential information from third parties. Such
barriers include, for example, contractual obligations in the form of
privacy and confidentiality clauses in third-party agreements as well as
statutory data protection requirements or other confidentiality
regulations.

(iv) In the case of sale of components, it might be
difficult for Covered Groups to track in which FG is their component
incorporated. Consider example of Covered group manufacturing and
selling electronic chips to third party buyers. These buyers may be
manufacturing various electronic gadgets such as computers, laptops,
smart phones, smart watches, washing machines etc. It may not be
possible for Covered Group to understand in which products is their
electronic chip actually installed and what is the final product.

(v)
To be able to apply this source rule for components, Covered Groups
would have to track the whole value chain of their components –
including all independent partners involved. This may be an arduous task
given the complex value chains that businesses follow today, which
would include several intermediary stages and multiple independent
partners outside the group.

3.5 Guidelines for applying revenue sourcing rules:

(i) Revenues to be sourced on a transaction-by-transaction basis:

(a) As per draft rules, source of each transaction that generates revenue for the Covered Group must be determined.

(b)
It is clarified in draft rules that applying source rule on
invoice-by-invoice basis may not be appropriate since one invoice could
contain multiple items or services charged at different prices.

(ii)
Where MNE group sells goods or provides services in multiple countries
under single contract, revenues earned by MNE group need to be allocated
to market countries using appropriate allocation key:

(a) As
per draft rules, where MNE group sells goods or provides services in
multiple countries under single contract, revenues earned by MNE group
need to be allocated to market countries using appropriate allocation
key.

(b) Consider this example where MNE Group A renders online
advertisement services to a US company (US Co) wherein US Co’s
advertisements/ banners will be displayed on Group A’s website across
the globe. However, Group A uses a different pricing model under each
scenario:

Pricing model

Revenue allocation to market jurisdiction

Group A charges US Co on “per click” basis
but clicks are charged at different prices in different jurisdictions.

Prices charged for clicks in each
jurisdiction will be considered as revenue earned by Group A from such market
jurisdiction.

Group A charges on “per click” basis and
same price is charged for viewer clicks across the globe.

For purposes of Amount A, revenues earned
by Group A from rendering ad services to US Co will be allocated to various
market jurisdictions in proportion to the number of viewers in each
jurisdiction.

Group A charges on “per click” basis but
higher prices are charged for ads displayed to customers in certain
jurisdictions such as India, China, Brazil.

For purposes of Amount A, revenues earned
by Group A from rendering ad services to US Co will be allocated to various
market jurisdictions in proportion to both the number of users in a
jurisdiction and the price charged per user.

(iii) Transaction comprising of multiple elements to be sourced according to its pre-dominant character:
As mentioned above, the draft rules provide source rules for various
categories of transaction. However, where a transaction may have several
elements that fall under more than one category of source rule,
revenues are to be sourced according to predominant character of the
transaction.

(iv) Revenues from Supplementary transactions to be sourced in line with main transaction:

(a)
Revenues from Supplementary Transactions should be sourced according to
the revenues from the Main Transaction. “Main Transaction” is defined
as a transaction entered into by a Covered Group with a customer that is
the primary profit driver of a multi-transaction bundle. “Supplementary
Transaction” is defined as a transaction that meets all of the
following conditions:

• The transaction would not have been entered into but for the Main Transaction;

• The transaction is entered into by the Covered Group with the same customer as the Main Transaction; and


Gross receipts from the transaction will not exceed 5% of the total
gross receipts from the Main and Supplementary Transaction combined.

(b) An example of main and supplementary transactions can be case of sale of phone along with repair and maintenance service-


Group X (a Covered group) sells smartphone to Mr. ABC in India. Mr. ABC
frequently travels across different countries and hence, he has
purchased a service subscription from Group X wherein, in case of any
technical defect with the phone, Mr. ABC can repair the phone in any
service centre of Group X across the globe.

• In this case, there
are two separate transactions- sale of smartphone in India and
subsequent repair services in any service centre in world. The revenue
earned from service transaction (being supplementary transaction) will
also be considered as sourced from India since main transaction of sale
of smartphone is sourced in India.

4. TAX BASE DETERMINATION FOR AMOUNT A COMPUTATION:

4.1
To recollect, Pillar One aims to modify existing profit allocation
rules such that a portion of super profits earned by large and highly
profitable MNE group is re-allocated to market jurisdictions under a
formulary approach (even if MNE group does not have any physical
presence in such market jurisdictions), thereby expanding the taxing
rights of market jurisdictions over MNE’s profits. MNE profit recommended by Pillar One to be allocated to market jurisdictions is termed as “Amount A”.

4.2
OECD has released draft tax base determination rules in February 2022
to quantify the profit of Covered Groups that will be used for the
Amount A calculations to reallocate a portion of their profits to market
jurisdictions.

4.3 Profits determined basis MNE Group’s consolidated financial statements (CFS):

(i)
As per draft rules, profit will be calculated based on the MNE group’s
audited CFS, while making a limited number of book-to-tax adjustments
and deducting any Net Losses. Amount A tax base will be quantified using
an adjusted profit measure, derived from Covered Group’s CFS, rather
than on a separate entity basis.

(ii) Audited CFS must be
prepared by Ultimate parent entity of the group basis Qualifying
Financial Accounting Standard (QFAS) in which assets, liabilities,
income, expense and cashflows are presented as those of single economic
activity.

(iii) A QFAS means International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS) and Equivalent Financial Accounting Standards, which
includes GAAP of Australia, Brazil, Canada, Member States of EU, Member
States of the European Economic Area, Hong Kong (China), Japan, Mexico,
New Zealand, China, India, Korea, Russia, Singapore, Switzerland, UK,
and USA.

4.4 Computation of adjusted profits:

(i)
As per draft rules, the starting point for computation of the Amount A
tax base is the total profit or loss after taking into account all
income and expenses of the Covered Group except for those items reported
as other comprehensive income (OCI).

(ii) To this amount, following adjustments are to be done:

Adjustments

Comments

Financial Accounting P&L
in CFS of Covered Group (except OCI)

Add: Policy
Disallowed expenses

• These expenses are
amounts included in consolidated P&L of MNE group for illegal payments
including bribes, kickbacks, fines, penalties.

 

• Such expenses are related to behaviours
which are not encouraged by the government and hence is commonly disallowed
under corporate tax laws of many jurisdictions.

Add: Income
Tax

• Income tax includes current and deferred
tax expense (or income) a recognised in consolidated P&L of MNE group.

 

• It does not include interest charges for
late payment of tax.

Less:
Dividend Income

• Dividends to be excluded are dividends
included in consolidated P&L of the MNE group received or accrued in
respect of an ownership interest (i.e. equity interest).

 

• In consolidated P&L of MNE group,
intra-group dividends will get nullified and hence, only dividends received/
accrued from third parties will be disclosed which will be excluded from tax
base calculations.

Less: Equity
Gains/Loss

• Gains/loss arising on disposal of
ownership interest (i.e. equity interest)

• Scope of this adjustment is still under
discussion at OECD level. Concerns of differential treatment is raised
between asset interests and equity interests i.e. gains and losses associated
with disposal of asset interests are included in the Tax Base whereas gains
and losses associated with disposal of equity interests are not included.

 

• To remove such difference, OECD is
exploring whether gains and losses associated with disposal of controlling
interests should not be excluded from tax base.

• Changes in fair
value of ownership interest  (i.e.
equity interest)

• The requirement is to exclude gain or
loss arising on fair value measurement of all equity interests of the group
which is routed through the consolidated P&L.

• P&L on equity method of accounting
(except for Joint Venture(JV))

• Under IFRS/ Ind-AS, associates and JVs are
accounted under equity method. The draft rules suggest that P&L
pertaining to associates is to be excluded from tax base calculations but
P&L pertaining to JV is to be included.

 

• While the draft rules do not provide any
reason for differential treatment of associates and JV, one may contemplate
the reason to be that such associates are likely to get consolidated on line
by line basis into CFS of another MNE group which has control over such
associate.

 

• On the other hand, in case of JV, there
is joint control by two or more MNE groups. In such case, each MNE group is
required to consider their share in P&L for respective tax base
calculation of Amount A; otherwise profits of JV are likely to get excluded
from Amount A framework.

Add/ Less: Restatement
Adjustments for the Period

• Income/expense accounted due to prior
period errors or change in accounting policy need to be adjusted.

 

• Adjustments are to be capped to 0.5% of
consolidated MNE revenue. Any excess adjustments need to be carried forward
and adjusted in subsequent years.

Less: Net
Loss (carried forward from previous years)

Refer discussion in Para 4.5 below.

Adjusted Profit Before Tax
(Tax base) for Amount A purposes

4.5 Treatment for losses:

(i) Amount A rules apply only if in-scope MNE group has profitability of greater than 10%.

(ii)
If an MNE group is in losses, such loss can be carried forward and set
off against future profits. Accounting losses are to be adjusted with
above mentioned book to tax adjustments and restatement adjustments to
arrive at the amount of loss carried forward.

(iii) The draft
rules indicates that both pre implementation losses and post
implementation losses of MNE group can be carried forward. The time
limitation of pre and post implementation losses are being discussed at
OECD level. The draft rule suggest that OECD is contemplating these
period as under:

(a) Pre implementation losses to be losses incurred in 2 to 8 calendar years prior to the introduction of Amount A and

(b)
Post implementation losses to be losses incurred in5 to 15 calendar
years preceding current Period for which Amount A is being determined.

5. DETERMINATION OF AMOUNT A OF MNE GROUP:

5.1
The norms of profit allocation suggested in the Amount A regime are way
different from the taxability norms which are known to taxpayers as of
today. Hence, the formulary approach provided under Pillar One should be
studied on an independent basis without attempting to rationalise or
compare them with conclusion to which one would have arrived as per
traditional norms of taxation.

5.2 Pillar One to allocate only portion of non routine profits of MNE group to market countries: The 
philosophy behind Pillar One is that no MNE group can make sizeable or
abnormal or bumper profit without patronage and support that it gets
from the market jurisdiction. There is bound to be contribution made by
the market jurisdictions to the ability of MNE group to earn more than
routine1 (abnormal) profit. Hence, in relation to MNE groups which have
been successful enough to secure more than routine profits (i.e. they
earn abnormal/ bumper profits), some part of such bumper profits should
be offered to tax in every market jurisdiction which has contributed to
the ability to earn profit at group level. Consequently, if MNE group’s
profits are upto routine or reasonable or if the MNE is in losses, the
report does not seek to consider any allocation of profits to market
jurisdiction.

_____________________________________________________________________________________

1   
The blueprint and consensus statements on Pillar
One use the expression “residual profits” to convey what we call here abnormal
or non-routine or super profit

5.3 Amount A to be determined under 25% over 10% rule:

(i)
As per the global consensus statement released in July and October
2021, BEPS IF member countries have agreed that a profit margin of 10%
of book revenue shall be considered as normal profits i.e. 10% profit
margin will be considered as “routine profits” warranting no allocation
and any profit earned by MNE group above 10% alone will be considered as
“non routine profits” warranting allocation to market jurisdiction.
Where an MNE group’s profit margin is > 10%, it is agreed that25% of
profit earned by MNE group over and above 10% shall be termed as “Amount
A” which is allocated to market jurisdictions.

(ii) For
example, if the consolidated turnover of MNE group as per CFS is € 1000
mn on which it has earned adjusted book profits (as discussed in Para 4)
of € 50 mn as per CFS, its profit margin is only 5%. Since the profit
earned by the MNE group is only 5% (i.e. within routine profit margin of
10%), the MNE group is considered to have earned profits due to normal/
routine entrepreneurial risk and efforts of MNE group and nothing may
be considered as serious or abnormal enough to permit market
jurisdiction to complain that, notwithstanding traditional taxation
rules, some income should be offered to tax in market jurisdiction.

(iii)
Alternatively, if the consolidated turnover of MNE group as per CFS is
€50,000 mn on which it has earned adjusted book profit of €15,000 mn as
per CFS, its profit margin as per books is 30%. In such case, the
profits earned by MNE group beyond 10% (i.e. 30%-10%= 20%) will be
considered as non routine profits. Once it is determined that the MNE
group has received non routine profit in excess of 10% (in our example,
excess profit is 20% of turnover), 25% of such excess profit (i.e. 25%
of 20% of turnover = 5% of turnover)is considered as contributed by
market factor and hence, such profit is to be allocated to market
jurisdiction.

Particulars

Amount

Consolidated turnover of MNE group

50,000 mn

Consolidated book profit

15,000 mn

% of book profit to turnover

30%

Less: Allowance for routine profit

(10%)

Excess profit over routine profit, also
loosely for abnormal or super profit

20%

Of this, 75% of super profit of 20% is
considered as pertaining to the strength of non market
factors and having no nexus with contribution of market jurisdiction (and
hence out of Pillar One proposal)

15% of 50,000 mn =
7,500 mn

25% of super profit of 20% being considered
as fair allocation having nexus with contribution of market jurisdictions –
known also as Amount A recommended by the report to be allocated to different
market jurisdictions

5% of 50,000 mn =
2,500 mn

5.4 Rationale behind 25% over 10% rule:

(i)
It is the philosophy that the consumers of the country, by purchasing
the goods or enjoying the services, contribute to the overall MNE profit
and but for such market and consumers, it would not have been possible
to effect the sales. However, at the same time, it is not as if that the
entirety of the non-routine or super profit is being earned because of
the presence of market. There are many other factors such as trade
intangibles, capital, research, technology etc. which may have built up
the overall success of MNE group.

(ii) Under the formulary
approach adopted by Pillar One, countries have accepted that 75% of the
excess profit or super profit may be recognised as pertaining to many
different strengths of MNE group other than market factor. It is the
residual 25% of the super profit component which is recognised as being
solely contributed by the strength of market factor. Hence, Pillar One
discusses how best to allocate 25% of super profit to market
jurisdictions.

(iii) The report is not concerned with allocation
or treatment of 75% component of super profit which is, as per present
text of Pillar One, pertaining to factors other than market forces.

(iv)
Even if under existing tax norms, no profits are taxable in a market
jurisdiction (say due to no physical presence), Amount A will ensure
market countries get right to tax over 25% of non-routine profits of MNE
group and that the market jurisdictions should not be left dry without
right to tax income.

6. ALLOCATION OF AMOUNT A TO MARKET JURISDICTIONS:

6.1
To recollect, the Amount A of MNE group determined basis “25% over 10%
rule” discussed in Para 5 above is to be allocated to market
jurisdictions which the nexus test discussed in Para 3. This paragraph
of the article discusses the manner in which Amount A of MNE group to be
allocated to market jurisdictions basis guidance provided in the
Blueprint.

6.2 Broadly, MNE carry out sales and marketing operations in market jurisdictions in following manner:

(i) Sales through remote presence like websites

(ii) Presence in form of Limited risk distributor (LRD)

(iii) Presence in form of Full risk distributor (FRD)

(iv) Presence in dependent agent permanent establishment (DAPE)

6.3 Where MNE group has physical presence in market jurisdiction (say in form of LRD or FRD or DAPE),
there
may be trigger of taxability in such market jurisdiction even as per
existing taxation rules.Amount A will co-exist with existing tax rules
and such overlay of Amount A on existing tax rules may result double
taxation since Amount A does not add any additional profit to MNE group
but instead reallocates a portion of existing non-routine profits to
market jurisdictions.

6.4 The framework of Amount A agreed in
July/ October 2021indicates that such double taxation (due to interplay
of Amount A rules and existing tax rules) shall be eliminated.While the
exact mechanism of allocation of Amount A and elimination of double
taxation is awaited, the below discussion is basis the mechanism
explained in Pillar One Blueprint released in October 2020. Further,
since the mechanism is complex, we have explained the same through a
case study.

6.5 Facts of case study:

(i)  ABC group is a German headquartered group engaged in sale of mobile phones across the globe.

(ii)
The ultimate parent entity is German Co (GCo) and GCo owns and performs
development, enhancement, maintenance, protection and exploitation
(DEMPE) functions related to the MNE group’s IP.

(iii)  ABC group makes sales across the globe. As per ABC group’s CFS,

• Global consolidated group revenue is € 100,000 mn

• Group PBT is € 40,000 mn

• Group PBT margin is 40%

(iv) ABC group follows different sale model in different countries it operates:

Particulars

France

UK

India

Brazil

Sales model

Remote presence

LRD

FRD

DAPE performing all
key functions and risk related Brazil market

Sales

10,000 mn

20,000 mn

40,000 mn

30,000 mn

Transfer Pricing (TP)
remuneration

NA

2%

10%

5%

(v) All countries (France, UK, India, Brazil) qualify as eligible market jurisdictions meeting nexus test.

(vi) Calculation of Amount A at MNE level:

Particulars

 

Profit margin

Amount in €

Profit before tax
(PBT) of the Group

(A)

40% of turnover

40,000

Less: Routine profits

 

(10% of € 100,000Mn)

(B)

10% of turnover

10,000

Non-routine profits

C = A-B

30% of turnover

30,000

Profits attributable to non-market factors

D = 75% of C

22.5% of turnover

6,750

Profits attributable to market
jurisdictions (Amount A)

E = 25% of D

7.5% of turnover

2,250

6.6  Allocation of Amount A in France where sales are only through remote presence:

(i)
GCo does not have any physical presence in France. Under existing tax
rules, GCo’s income is outside tax net in France (since GCo does not
have a PE in France) and thus, all profits earned from France market
(routine as well as non routine) are taxed only in Germany in hands of
GCo.

(ii) Though France does not have taxing right under
existing tax rules (due to no physical presence), Amount A regime ensure
that some profits shall be allocated to France.

(iii) As
calculated above, applying the “25% over 10% rule”, Amount A to be
allocated to market jurisdictions comes to 7.5% of the turnover. Since
turnover from France is € 10,000 mn, 7.5% of France turnover i.e. €750
mn will be allocated to France on which taxes will need to be paid in
France.

(iv) However, issue arises as to which entity will pay
taxes on Amount A in France. In this regard, the discussion in the
Blueprint and also global consensus statement released in July and
October 2021 suggests that Amount A tax liability will be borne by
entity/ entities which are allocated residual/ non routine profits under
per existing tax/ TP laws.

(v) In the given example, all
profits (routine as well as non routine) from France business are taxed
in hands of GCo under existing tax rules. In other words, € 750 mn
allocated to France under Amount A is already being taxed in Germany in
hands of GCo due to existing transfer pricing norms. Hence, GCo may be
identified as “paying entity” in France and be obligated to pay tax on
Amount A in France. Subsequently, GCo can claim credit of taxes paid in
France in its residence jurisdiction (i.e. Germany).

6.7 Allocation of Amount A in UK where presence in form of LRD:

(i)
Usually, presence in the form of LRD is contributing to routine sales
functions on a physical basis in such market jurisdiction. It is not a
category of work which contributes to any super profit, but is taking
care of logistics and routine functions for which no more than routine
profits can be attributed.

(ii) In this case, the sales in UK are
not made by GCo directly but instead it made through LRD physically
established in UK. In other words, headquarter company (GCo) is the
intellectual property (IP) owner and principal distributor but the group
has an LRD in UK (UKCo) which perform routine sales functions under
purview of overall policy developed by GCo.

(iii) Under existing
TP principles, it is assumed that UKCo is remunerated @ 2% of UK
revenue for its routine functions and balance is retained by GCo which
is not taxed in UK. In other words, all profits attributable to non
routine functions is attributed to GCo and hence not taxable in UK in
absence of PE of GCo in UK.

(iv) As mentioned above, under
existing laws, LRD are remunerated for routine functions Amount A
contemplates allocation of a part of super profit/ non routine profits.
Considering this, there is no concession or reduction in the allocation
of Amount A in LRD scenario merely because there is taxability @2% of
turnover for routine efforts in the form of LRD. The overall taxing
right of UK will comprise of compensation towards LRD function as
increased by allocation of super profits in form of Amount A.

(v)
Also, even if UK tax authorities, during UKCo’s TP assessment, allege
that UKCo’s remuneration should be increased from 2% to 5% of UK
turnover, still there would not implication on Amount A allocable to UK
since UKCo’s increase in remuneration for performing more routine
functions and no element of super profit forms part of such
remuneration.

(vi) While tax on compensation towards LRD
function will be payable by UKCo, issue arises which entity should pay
tax on Amount A allocable to UK. Since GCo is the IP owner and principal
distributor, existing TP rules would allocate all super profits
pertaining to UK market be allocated to GCo. Thus, the super profits of €
1500 mn (7.5% of € 20,000 mn) allocated to UK under Amount A is already
being taxed in Germany in hands of GCo basis the existing TP norms.
Hence, the discussion in the Blueprint suggests that GCo should be made
obligated to pay tax on Amount A in UK and then GCo can claim credit of
taxes paid in UK in its residence jurisdiction (i.e. Germany) against
income taxable under existing tax laws. Accordingly, UKCo would pay tax
in UK on LRD functions (i.e. routine functions) whereas GCo would pay
tax on super profits allocated to UK in form of Amount A.

6.8 Allocation of profits in India where presence in form of FRD:

(i)
An MNE Group may appoint a FRD in a market jurisdiction. An FRD
performs important functions such as market strategy, pricing, product
placement and also undertakes high risk qua the market jurisdiction. In
essence, the FRD performs marketing and distribution function in
entirety. Hence, unlike an LRD, FRD are remunerated not only with
routine returns but also certain non routine returns.

(ii) In
given case study, MNE group carries out business in India through an FRD
model. All key marketing and distribution functions related to Indian
market is undertaken by FRD in India (ICo). Applying TP principles, ICo
is remunerated at 10% of India sales.

(iii) Amount A
contemplates allocation of a part of MNE’s super profits to market
jurisdiction. Had there been no physical presence in India, part of
super profits allocable to India as Amount A would be € 3000 mn (7.5% of
€ 40,000).

(iv) Now, ICo as FRD, is already getting taxed in
India.It is represents taxability in India as per traditional rules for
performing certain marketing functions within India which contribute to
routine as also super profits functions in India. This is, therefore, a
case where, in the hands of ICo, as per traditional rules, part of the
super profit element of MNE is separately getting taxed in the hands of
ICo.

(v) In such case, the Blueprint assumes that while, up to 2%
of market turnover, the taxability can be attributed towards routine
functions of ICo (instead of towards super profit functions), the
taxability in addition to 2% of India turnover in hands of ICo is
attributable to marketing functions which contribute to super profit.

(vi)
Since India is already taxing some portion of super profits in hands of
ICo under existing tax rules, allocation of Amount A to India (which is
a portion of super profits) create risk of double counting. In order to
ensure there is no double counting of super profits in India under
Amount A regime and existing TP rules, the Blueprint recognises that,
Amount A allocated to India (i.e. 7.5%) should be adjusted to the extent
super profits are already taxed in market jurisdiction. In order to
eliminate double counting, following steps are suggested2:

a)
Find out the amount as would have been allocable to market jurisdiction
as per Amount A (in our illustration, 7.5% of India turnover of € 40,000
mn).

b) Fixed routine profit which may be expected to be earned
within India for routine operations in India. While this profit margin
needs to be multilaterally agreed upon, for this example, we assume that
additional profit of 2% of India turnover will be expected to be earned
in India on account of physical operations in India. Additional 2% of
India turnover can be considered allocable to India in lieu of routine
sales and marketing functions in India – being the allocation which does
not interfere with super profit element.

_____________________________________________________________________________________

2   
Referred to as marketing and distribution safe
harbour regime in the blueprint

c) Desired minimum allocation to market
jurisdiction of India for routine and non routine activities can be
expected to be 9.5% of the India turnover, on an aggregate of (a) and
(b) above.

d) This desired minimum return at step (c) needs to
be compared with the allocation which has been made in favour of India
as per TP analysis:

• If the amount allocated to FRD in India is
already more than 9.5% of turnover, no further amount will be allocable
under the umbrella of Amount A.

• On the other hand, if the
remuneration taxed under TP analysis is <9.5%, Amount A taxable will
be reduced to the difference of TP return and amount calculated at (c).


However, if the return under TP analysis is <2%, then it is assumed
that FRD is, at the highest, taxed as if it is performing routine
functions and has not been allocated any super profit under TP laws. The
allocation may have been considered towards super profit only if it
exceeded 2% of India turnover. And hence, in such case, allocation of
Amount A will continue to be 7.5% of India turnover towards super profit
elements. There can be no reduction therefrom on the premise that TP
analysis has already been carried out in India. Also, it may be noted
since Amount A determined as per step (a) above is 7.5% of India
turnover, an allocation in excess to this amount cannot be made under
Amount A.

(viii) To understand the above mentioned steps more lucidly, consider TP remuneration to FRD in India under 3 scenarios-

a. Scenario 1- ICo is remunerated @ 10% of India turnover

b. Scenario 2- ICo is remunerated @ 5% of India turnover

c. Scenario 3- ICo is remunerated @ 1% of India turnover

Particulars

Scenario 1

Scenario 2

Scenario 3

Amount A allocable to
India (as determined above)

7.5%

7.5%

7.5%

Return towards
routine functions (which OECD considers tolerable additional allocation in
view of presence in India)

2%

2%

2%

Sum of a + b (This is
sum of routine and non routine profits that the OECD expects Indian FRD to
earn)

9.5%

9.5%

9.5%

TP remuneration to FRD in India

10%

5%

1%

Final Amount A to be allocated to India

No
Amount A allocable since FRD in India is already remunerated above OECD’s
expectation of 9.5%

4.5%,

 

OECD
expects Indian FRD to earn 9.5% but it is remunerated at 5%. Hence, only 4.5%
to be allocated as Amount A (instead of 7.5% as determined at (a))

 

7.5%,

 

No
reduction in Amount A since OECD intends only to eliminate double counting of
non routine profits and where existing TP returns is less than fixed return
towards routine functions, it is clear that no non routine profit is
allocated to India under existing tax laws

(viii) Once the adjusted Amount A is determined as per steps
above, one would need to determine which entity would pay tax on such
Amount A in India. In this case, since GCo and ICo both perform function
asset risk (FAR) activities that results in revenues from India market,
the Blueprint recognises that choosing the paying entity (i.e. entity
obligated to pay tax on Amount A in India) will require further
discussions/ deliberations.

6.9 Allocation of Amount A in Brazil where presence is in form of DAPE

(i)
MNE group carries out business in Brazil through a dependent agent
which trigger DAPE of GCo in Brazil. DAPE perform key marketing and
distribution functions related to Brazil market. Applying TP principles,
DAPE is remunerated at 5% of Brazil
sales.

(ii) In this case,
since DAPE perform high risk functions as FRD, where DAPE performs high
risk functions, the taxability of Amount A would be similar to FRD
scenario discussed at Para 6.8.

(iii) Had there been no physical
presence in Brazil, 7.5% ofBrazil turnover would be allocable as Amount
A. However, by virtue of DAPE presence, GCo is taxed in Brazil @ 5% of
Brazil turnover. Since functional analysis of DAPE is such that it
perform beyond routine functions, as per traditional profit attribution
rules, part of the super profit element of MNE is separately getting
taxed in the hands of DAPE. Hence, such double taxation needs to be
eliminated.

(iv) As per mechanism discussed above at Para 6.8,
OECD expects that Brazil should at least get taxing rights over 9.5% of
Brazil turnover (i.e. 7.5% towards non routine element as Amount A + 2%
towards routine functions). However, since DAPE is already taxed @ 5% of
Brazil turnover, only the differential 4.5% of Brazil turnover shall be
allocable as Amount A.

6.10 Snapshot of allocation of Amount A under different sales models:

Particulars

France

UK

India

Brazil

Sales model

Remote presence

LRD

FRD

DAPE

Amount A allocable
(as determined above)

7.5%

7.5%

7.5%

7.5%

Fixed return towards
routine functions (as calibrated by OECD)

Marketing and distribution safe harbour
regime-NA since MNE has no presence or limited risk presence

2%

2%

Sum of a + b

9.5%

9.5%

TP remuneration to FRD in India

10%

5%

Final Amount A to be
allocated

7.5%

7.5%

NIL, since FRD in India is already remunerated above
OECD’s expectation of 9.5%

4.5%

OECD expects
DAPE to earn 9.5% but it is remunerated at 5%. Hence, only 4.5% to be
allocated as Amount A

Entity obligated to
pay Amount A

GCo  (FAR
analysis would indicate that GCo performs all key functions and assumes risk
related to France and UK market which helps to earn non routine profits from
these markets) 

NA, since there is no Amount A allocated to India

Depending on FAR analysis, Amount A may be payable by
GCo or DAPE or both on pro rata basis

7. IMPLEMENTATION OF AMOUNT A REGIME:

7.1
Amount A shall be implemented though changes in domestic law as well as
introduction of a new Multilateral Convention (MLC).

7.2 To
facilitate consistency in the approach taken by jurisdictions and to
support domestic implementation consistent with the agreed timelines and
their domestic legislative procedures, OECD shall provide Model Rules
for Domestic Legislation (Model Rules) and related Commentary through
which Amount A that would be translated into domestic law3. Model Rules,
once finalised and agreed by all members of BEPS IF, will serve basis
for the substantive provisions that will be included in the MLC.

7.3
From India perspective, with respect to domestic law changes under
India tax laws to implement Amount A regime, India will need to follow
the process of approval from both the Houses of Parliament and
thereafter consent of the President. From treaty perspective, the
process of ratification of tax treaties has been delegated to the
executive in terms of Section 90 of the Income Tax Act, 1961. Reliance
may be placed on Circular 108 dated 20.3.1973 which states that Central
Government is empowered to make provisions for implementing the
agreement by the issue of a notification in the Official Gazette.

7.4 New MLC to implement Pillar One with below mechanics:

(i)
The new MLC will introduce a multilateral framework for all
jurisdictions in consensus of Amount A, regardless of whether a tax
treaty currently exists between those jurisdictions.

(ii) Where
there is no tax treaty in force between parties, the MLC will create the
relationship necessary to ensure the effective implementation of all
aspects of Amount A.

(iii) If a tax treaty already exists between
parties to the new MLC, that tax treaty will remain in force and
continue to govern cross-border taxation outside Amount A, but the new
MLC will address inconsistencies with existing tax treaties to the
extent necessary to give effect to the solution with respect to Amount
A.

(iv) The MLC will contain the rules necessary to determine and
allocate Amount A and eliminate double taxation, as well as the
simplified administration process, the exchange of information process
and the processes for dispute prevention and resolution in a mandatory
and binding manner.

_____________________________________________________________________________________

3   
Draft model scope, nexus and revenue sourcing, tax
base rules to be included in domestic legislation have already been released

7.5 Earlier, the target was to develop
and open the MLC for signature in 2022 and jurisdictions would
expeditiously ratify the same with the aim for it to be in force and
with effect from 2023. Perhaps this target was far too ambitious. As per
recent communication by OECD4, the target deadline for effective date
of Amount A has been moved to 2024.

8. WITHDRAWAL OF UNILATERAL MEASURES:

8.1
When no consensus was reached in 2015 under BEPS Action Plan 1 on
taxation of digital economy, many countries introduced unilateral
measure in their domestic tax laws such as digital services tax (DST),
equalisation levy, significant economic presence, etc.

8.2 Global consensus on withdrawal of unilateral measure: The
October 2021 statement provides that the new MLC will require the
removal of all digital services taxes and other relevant similar
measures for all companies and the commitment not to introduce such
measures in the future. A detailed definition of “other relevant similar
measures” will be finalized as part of the adoption of the MLC.
Further, no newly enacted DST or other relevant similar measures will be
imposed on
any company from 8th October 2021 and until the earlier of 31st December 2023 or the coming into force of the new MLC.

_____________________________________________________________________________________

4   
OECD Secretary-General Matthias Cormann stated in
World Economic Forum meeting in Davos, Switzerland held on 24th May,
2022

8.3 India impact:

(i) India has introduced
Equalisation Levy (EL) and Significant Economic Presence (SEP) to
effectively tax digital economy. It is currently not clear whether SEP
provisions introduced in Indian tax laws can qualify as “other similar
tax measures” and hence required to be withdrawn. With respect to EL,
clarity is awaited from Indian tax administration on whether, as part of
India’s commitment to global consensus, EL measures shall be withdrawn.
As per news reports, India’s Finance Minister indicated that India
would withdraw EL once global tax deal is implemented5.

(ii) A
constant debate is how much India expected to gain from Pillar One
particularly since India may need to withdraw its unilateral measures.
As per reports6, in 2019–20, India collected R1,136 crores tax revenue
through EL. In F.Y. 2022-21, the tax revenue from EL rose to R2,057
crores. And in F.Y. 2022, it collected R4,000 crores EL revenue —?a
staggering 100% increase from the previous year. As compared to that,
while OECD expects that under Pillar One around $ 125 bn shall be
reallocated to market jurisdictions on yearly basis, it is currently not
known how much of these profits will be allocated to India as a market
jurisdiction. One needs to be mindful that Amount A is applicable only
to very large MNE groups (around top 100 MNEs) and also, while India may
be a large market for many foreign MNE groups, large Indian
headquartered MNEs may also need to comply with Pillar One rules and
India will need to share its taxing right with other countries.
Accordingly, while it is clear that EL has benefitted the kitty of
Indian exchequers, there is not clarity on how much tax revenues will
yield in favour of India under Pillar One.

8.4 Compromise with US to levy EL till implementation of Amount A:

(i)
In 2020-2021, US Trade Representative (USTR) conducted investigations
against digital taxes levied by several countries7and found that such
levies discriminatory against US digital companies and as retaliatory
measures, US threatened with additional tariffs on import of certain
items into US.

(ii) However, considering the ongoing discussions
under Pillar One,US has reached a compromise with several European
countries8 and India. As per compromise agreed with India, India is not
required to withdraw e-commerce EL until Pillar One takes effect.
However, India shall allow credit of the portion of EL accrued by a MNE
during “interim period” against the MNE’s future Pillar One Amount A tax
liability which arises when Pillar One rules are in effect. Interim
period starting from 1st April, 2022 till the implementation of Pillar
One or 31st March, 2024, whichever is earlier. In return, US has agreed
to withdraw trade retaliatory measures.

_____________________________________________________________________________________

5   
https://www.bloombergquint.com/business/indias-digital-tax-will-be-withdrawn-once-global-reform-effective-finance-minister-sitharaman

6   Sourced from
article titled- “An explainer on India’s digital tax revenues” issued by
Finshots on 18th May, 2022

7   Austria, Brazil,
the Czech Republic, the European Union, India, Indonesia, Italy, Spain, Turkey,
and the United Kingdom


9. CONCLUDING THOUGHTS:

Pillar
One aims to revolutionise fundamentals of existing international tax
system but, building such new tax system (with new nexus and profit
allocation rules) will be an arduous and onerous task. While the 137
countries have agreed on the broad contours of the Pillar One framework,
the fine print of the Pillar One rules are still being deliberated and
negotiated at OECD level. If the discussion drafts released by OECD on
scope, nexus rules, tax base etc. are any guide, it may be stated that
the devil lies in detail; since the detailed rules being chiselled out
are highly complex and convoluted. MNEs will have a daunting task of
understanding the nuances of the proposals and its impact on their
business, though on a positive side, there may be relief from unilateral
measures taken by countries to tax digital economy once Pillar One
proposal is implemented.

While tax authorities will be eager to
have another sword in their armoury, it may be noted that the OECD
proposal is still far away from finishing line. The ambitious plan of
implementing Pillar One rules by end of 2022 has been deferred to end of
2024. Explaining the delay on Pillar One, OECD Director of the Centre
for Tax Policy and Administration, Pascal Saint-Amans said9 “it was not
delayed, but rather subject to an extremely intensive negotiation”.

A
clear concern being raised by countries on Pillar One proposal is the
quantum of additional tax revenues that will be gained from implementing
these new tax rules. For instance, United States Treasury Secretary,
Janet Yellen, recently10 stated “Pillar One will have a small impact. We
will gain revenue from our ability to tax foreign corporations in the
US and lose some from reallocation of taxing authority, and it could be
positive or negative depending on details not yet worked out.”

____________________________________________________

8   UK, Austria,
France, Italy, Spain, Turkey

9   Stated in
Economic and Financial Council meeting in Luxembourg held on 17th
June, 2022

10 Stated in a 7th
June, 2022 Senate Finance Committee hearing on the F.Y. 2023 Budget

Similarly,
the human right experts appointed and mandated by United Nations Human
Rights Council has raised11 several concerns on OECD Pillar One such as
the solution will bring about only minimal benefits to developing
countries, the solution is fairly complex and entails a
disproportionately high administrative burden for countries with low or
overly stressed capacities. However, responding to such allegations,
OECD defended12 that Pillar One rules “stabilise the international tax
environment and defuse the trade tensions that result from a
proliferation of unilateral measures creating a drag on the world
economy precisely at a time when all economies are trying to rebuild the
fiscal space needed to address the economic shock of the COVID
pandemic”.

Thus, while the global tax deal has been struck, the
agreed framework will need to traverse through various hurdles before
the formal rules are sketched and implemented. It seems that OECD will
be walking on a tight rope with political power play of the countries on
one side and development of workable solution on the other.

Annexure: Source rule for some of key revenue categories for Pillar One

Key revenue stream

Market jurisdiction to whom revenue is to be allocated

Goods

Sale of Finished
goods to final customers (directly by the Covered Group or through
Independent Distributor)

Place of the delivery
of the finished goods to final customer

Sale of Digital goods
(other than component)

• In case of B2C
sale- Location of Consumer

 

• In case of B2B
sale- Place of use of B2B goods by business customer

Sale of components

Place of delivery to
final customer of the finished good into which the component is incorporated

Services

Location-specific
services (such as Services
Connected to Tangible Property)

Place of performance
of the service

Advertisement (Ad)
services

• Online Ad service-
Location of the viewer of online Ad

 

• Other Ad service-
Place of display or reception of Ad

Online intermediation
services

• Facilitation of
tangible or digital goods and digital services- Sourced 50-50% between
location of purchaser and seller

 

• Facilitation of
offline service- Sourced 50-50% between
location of customer and place
where offline service is
performed

Any other B2C
services

Location of the
Consumer

Any other B2B
services

Place of use of the
service

Other transactions

Licensing, sale or
other alienation of IP

• Where IP supports
provision
of service- Place of use of that service

 

• Any other case-
Place of use of IP by final customer

Licensing, sale or
other alienation of user data

Location of the User
that is the subject of the data being
transferred

Sale, lease or other
alienation of Real Property

Location of Real
Property

(This is the second article on Pillar One. The BEPS 2.0 series will continue with Pillar Two article/s)

MLI SERIES MLI ASPECTS IMPACTING TAXATION OF CROSS-BORDER DIVIDENDS

INTRODUCTION
The issues related to the taxability of dividends have always remained significant due to the inherent two-level taxation compared to other income streams like interest. Further, the taxing provisions are drafted in varied manners in an attempt to rein in any tax avoidance on such incomes. Taxation of dividends in the international tax arena has had its own set of complexities. In India, for a considerable period of time there used to be double taxation on foreign shareholders due to limited availability of credit for Dividend Distribution Tax (DDT) paid by Indian companies under the Income-tax Act. However, after the abolition of the DDT concept vide Finance Act 2020, cross-border dividends are now taxable in the hands of non-resident shareholders – bringing up issues of beneficial ownership, classification, conduit arrangements, etc.

This article concludes the series of articles for the BCAJ on Multi-lateral Instrument (MLI). The series of articles have explained the multilateral efforts to reduce tax avoidance and double non-taxation through MLI – a result of the Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS) Project of the G20 and OECD. MLI has acted as a single instrument agreed upon by a host of countries1 through which several anti-abuse rules are brought in at one stroke in the DTAAs covered by the MLI.

Article 8 of the MLI provides anti-avoidance rules for Dividend Transfer- Transactions. This article attempts to highlight how the MLI has affected cross-border taxation of dividends, which has gained importance following the change in Income-tax Act from 1st April 2020. At the same time, it does not deal with the cross-border or domestic law issues that affect dividend payments in general, as it would be beyond the outlined scope of this article.

 

 

1   99 countries as on 10th May, 2022

TAXABILITY OF DIVIDENDS UNDER TREATIES
Under the double tax avoidance agreements (DTAAs), as far as tax revenue sharing is concerned between the two countries entering into the agreement, specific caps are prescribed for passive incomes like dividends, interest, royalty and fees for technical services. As per Article 10 of the OECD and UN model conventions, while the Country of Residence (COR) is allowed the right to tax dividends, the Country of Source (COS) is also allocated a right to tax such dividends. For dividend incomes, the COR is the country where the recipient of dividends is a resident; and the COS is the country where the company paying dividends is a resident of.

However, there is a cap on the tax which can be levied by the COS under its domestic laws, if the Beneficial Owner (BO) of such dividends is a resident of the other contracting state (i.e., COR). While typically, this cap is set at around 20-25% in DTAAs, a concessional rate of around 5-15% is prescribed if the BO is a company which meets the prescribed threshold of holding a certain minimum shareholding in the company paying dividends. This is considered to be a relief measure for cross-border corporate ownership structures, as against third-party portfolio investors who would generally hold a much lesser stake in the company paying dividends. The relief is explained below through an illustration:

Illustration 1: C Co., a Canadian Co., owns 12% voting power in I Co., an Indian Co. I Co. declares a dividend. The applicable dividend provisions of the India-Canada DTAA are as under:

Article 10
1. Dividends paid by a company which is a resident of a Contracting State to a resident of the other Contracting State may be taxed in that other State.

2. However, such dividends may also be taxed in the Contracting State of which the company paying the dividends is a resident, and according to the laws of that State, but if the recipient is the beneficial owner of the dividends the tax so charged shall not exceed:

(a) 15 per cent of the gross amount of the dividends if the beneficial owner is a company which controls directly or indirectly at least 10 per cent of the voting power in the company paying the dividends;

(b) 25 per cent of the gross amount of the dividends in all other cases.

As can be seen from the above, Article 10(2)(b) of the India-Canada DTAA provides for a cap of 25% on tax leviable in India (the COS in this case). However, as C Co., the beneficial owner of dividends from I Co., owns at least 10% voting power in I Co., the condition for minimum shareholding as specified for concessional rate in Article 10(2)(a) is met. Thus, the cap of 25% stands reduced to 15% as per Article 10(2)(a) of the India-Canada DTAA. This is the relief which is sought by group companies receiving dividend incomes on their investments in Indian companies.

PRONE TO ABUSE
The above reduced tax rate has led to abuse of this provision in cases where companies try to take benefit of the concessional rate by meeting the threshold requirement only for the period that the dividend is received. A simple illustration for understanding how this provision is abused is as follows:

Illustration 2: Continuing our example above, Con Co., a Canadian group Co. of C Co., also owns a 9% share capital of I Co. This holding would not allow for the concessional rate of tax to be applied when I Co. pays dividends to Con Co. However, just before the declaration of dividend by I Co., Con Co. buys an additional 1% stake in I Co. from its group Company C Co., which, as explained above, already holds a 12% stake in I Co. After this transaction C Co. continues to hold 11% stake in I Co.; while Con Co. will now hold 10% stake in I Co. As both Con Co. and C Co. now hold 10% or more in I Co., they fulfil the threshold requirement under Article 10(2)(b), and the concessional tax rate of 15% is applied. As this transaction is done only to avail the concessional rate, as soon as the dividend is distributed, the additional 1% holding is transferred back by Con Co. to C Co.

In this manner, by complying with the threshold requirement in a technical sense, Con Co. avails of the concessional tax rate. This is possible as the India-Canada DTAA does not provide for a minimum period for which the prescribed threshold for shareholding of 10% is required to be held for. This means that even if Con Co. meets the threshold for just the day when it receives the dividend from I Co., even then it can avail the concessional rate.

The Report on BEPS Action Plan 6 had identified this abuse and provided a possible solution to counter it by prescribing a threshold period for which shareholding is required to be held. This solution has been enacted in the form of Article 8 of the MLI – “Dividend Transfer Adjustments”, which is explained below.

STRUCTURE AND WORKING OF ARTICLE 8 OF THE MLI
Article 8 of the MLI provides that the concessional rate shall be available only if the threshold for minimum shareholding is met for a period of 365 days which includes the day of dividend payment. It should be noted that while Article 10 of the DTAA covers all recipients of dividends, the concessionary rate is available only to companies. Thus, the new test as per Article 8 of MLI also applies only to companies. At the same, time relief has been provided for ownership changes due to corporate re-organisation. [Para 1]
    
This condition shall apply in place of or in the absence of the minimum holding period condition existing in the DTAA. [Para 2] Thus, wherever Article 8 of the MLI applies, the new test of a 365-day holding period would be applied in the following manner:

• Where the treaty already contains a holding period test– such period would get replaced with the 365-day test; or

• In case of treaties where no such test exists, such a test would be introduced.

However, it should be noted that Article 8 of the MLI is an optional anti-abuse provision of the MLI. It is not a mandatory provision. Thus, the new minimum holding period test applies only to treaties where both the contracting states (countries party to the treaty) not only agree to the applicability of Article 8, but also to the manner in which it is applicable. The following options are available to the countries with regard to the applicability of Article 8:

• Para 3(a) provides that a country may opt out entirely from this new test; or

• Para 3(b) provides that a country may opt out to the extent the DTAA already provides for:

i. A Minimum Holding Period; or

ii. Minimum Holding Period shorter than 365 days; or

iii. Minimum Holding Period longer than 365 days.

Each country has to list which option it would be exercising from the above. Further, it also has to list down the DTAAs to which the above provision may not apply. Thus, India has opted out of Article 8 by way of reservation under Para 3(b)(iii) covering the India-Portugal DTAA as the treaty provides for a threshold period of 2 years already, which is higher than the one proposed under Article 8 of the MLI. Hence, the existing condition of 2 years will continue to apply in India-Portugal DTAA irrespective of India signing the MLI.

Para 4 states that countries shall notify the DTAA provision unless they have made any reservation. When two countries notify the same provision, only then will the 365-day threshold apply. India has notified such provision in its DTAAs with 24 countries. However, not all of these 24 countries have corresponded similarly. Hence, Article 8 of the MLI applies if the corresponding country has also notified its treaty with India under the same provision. A couple of illustrations will show how Article 8 of MLI works:

Illustration 3: Both India and Singapore have notified Illustration 3: Both India and Singapore have notified India-Singapore DTAA as a Covered Tax Agreement which will get impacted by MLI. India has notified the treaty under Article 8(4) of MLI. Basically, India agrees to apply the new 365-day test to the treaty. The India-Singapore treaty presently does not provide for such a test. However, Singapore has reserved the right for the entirety of Article 8 not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements [Para 3(a)]. Hence, while India has opted for applying MLI Article 8, Singapore has not. Thus, the Dividend Article of India-Singapore DTAA will not be affected by Article 8 of MLI even though India has expressed its willingness for the same.

Now let us consider another illustration:

Illustration 4: India and Canada both have made a notification under Article 8(4). No reservation has been made by any country for the relevant provision. Thus, there is no mismatch and Article 8 of MLI applies to the India-Canada DTAA. While before the MLI, there was no holding period requirement under the India-Canada DTAA, on the application of the MLI, the 365-day holding period gets inserted in the DTAA.

Considering the above, the following is the list of Indian treaties which have been amended by Article 8 of the MLI as both India, and the corresponding country have agreed to the applicability of Article 8 in the same manner, along with the respective dates for entry into effect of the MLI:  

    

Country

Threshold period for shareholding (pre-MLI)

Threshold period for shareholding (post-MLI)

Entry into Effect in India for TDS

Entry into Effect in India for other taxes

Canada

Nil

365
days

1st
April, 2020

1st
April, 2021

Denmark

Nil

365
days

1st
April, 2020

1st
April, 2021

Serbia

Nil

365
days

1st
April, 2020

1st April,
2020

Slovak
Republic

Nil

365
days

1st
April, 2020

1st April,
2020

Slovenia

Nil

365
days

1st
April, 2020

1st April,
2020

The above treaties already had specific thresholds for applicability of the concessional rates which are provided below for ease of reference:

Country

Condition for minimum shareholding / voting power

Concessional rate if condition is met

Tax rate if condition is not met

Canada

10%

15%

25%

Denmark

15%

15%

25%

Serbia

25%

5%

15%

Slovak
Republic

25%

15%

25%

Slovenia

10%

5%

15%

The illustration below will explain the changes pre and post MLI.

Illustration 5: SE Co., Serbia owns 21% shares of IN Co., India. On 1st April, 2021, SE Co. buys an additional 4% stake in IN Co. from a group company. IN Co. declares and pays a dividend on 15th December, 2021. SE Co. exits its stake of 4% on 1st January 2022. Pre-MLI, India-Serbia DTAA provided for a concessional tax rate of 5% where a minimum holding of 25% was met, even if such stake was held for only the day when dividend was earned. However, that has changed post-MLI. Post MLI, Article 10 of the India-Serbia treaty, as modified by Article 8 of MLI, provides that the concessional tax rate will be available only if the condition for a minimum holding period of 365 days is met. As that would not be met in this case, the concessional rate of tax on dividend income would not be available to SE Co.

365-DAY TEST
As per the MLI provisions, the recipient company shall hold the prescribed percentage of share capital for a period of 365 days to avail the concessional rate. The exact provision that gets added to the Dividend Article of the above-mentioned DTAAs is as follows:

[Subparagraph of the Agreement dealing with concessional rate] shall apply only if the ownership conditions described in those provisions are met throughout a 365 day period that includes the day of the payment of the dividends…

As can be seen above, the 365-day period would include the date of payment of the dividend. Thus, the language entails a “Straddle Holding Period” – a period covering the dividend payment date – but extending before or after such date. An illustration for the same is as follows:

Illustration 6: Continuing from Illustration 5 above, let us consider a case where SE Co. of Serbia continues to hold its stake of 25% in IN Co., India, for the foreseeable future after acquiring the 4% stake on 1st April, 2021. In such a case, even though the 365-day test is not met on the date of declaration of dividend, i.e., 15th December 2021, SE Co. would be able to claim the concessional rate of tax if it continues holding its stake of 25% in IN Co. at least up to 31st March, 2022, i.e., 365 days from 1st April 2021. In such a case, when it files its tax return, it can claim the lower rate of tax of 5% as it has met the 365-day test as prescribed under the modified India-Serbia treaty.

ISSUES RELATED TO STRADDLE-HOLDING PERIOD
There are a few issues with regard to the straddle-holding period. Let us take the above illustration in which IN Co. would be paying a dividend to SE Co on 15th December, 2021. IN Co. needs to deduct tax at source u/s 195 of the Income-tax Act before making payment of the dividend to SE Co. Since the 365-day test is not met as on the date of payment, can the concessional rate of tax be considered at the stage of deduction of tax at source? There is no clarity or guidance on this aspect, but as the law stands, IN Co. may need to deduct tax at 15%, ignoring the concessional rate of tax of 5%, as it would not be able to ascertain whether SE Co. will or will not be able to meet the 365-day test in the future. An expectation, howsoever strong, of SE Co. meeting the 365-day test would not allow IN Co. to apply the lower rate on the date it needs to deduct tax at source. It should be noted that in such a case, SE Co. can still claim the concessional rate by filing its tax return and claiming a refund for the excess tax deducted at source by IN Co.

The above view finds favour with the Australian Tax Office, which has issued a similar explanation by way of “Straddle Holding Period Rule”2 for its treaties modified by the MLI. A similar view has been expounded by the New Zealand Tax Office3. A similar clarification from the Indian tax department would provide certainty on this aspect.

Consider another illustration.

Illustration 7: SE Co. has invested 25% in shares of IN Co. on 1st February, 2022. Dividend has been declared by IN Co. on 28th February, 2022. As explained above, IN Co. would deduct tax at the higher rate of 15% as it would not be able to ascertain whether SE Co. would be in a position to meet the 365-day test or not. SE Co. would be able to meet the test only by 31st January, 2023. In this case, a further complication is that SE Co. would itself also face difficulty in claiming the concessional rate of tax in its tax return. This is because it would be required to file its tax return in India for A.Y. 2022-23 by either 30th September or 30th November, 2022. However, it would not have met the 365-day test by the return-filing deadline. Even the extended deadline of 31st December, 2022 for filing a revised tax return would fall short for SE Co. in meeting the 365-day test prescribed under the modified treaty. Such a situation would lead to practical issues where although the claim would be held valid at a future date, it would be difficult to make such a claim in the tax return filed.

 

 

2   QC 60960

3              Commissioner’s
Statement CS 20/03
The above illustrations show how the otherwise simple and objective 365-day test can become a difficult claim for the company earning the dividend income in certain situations.

It must also be noted that the 365-day test is an objective test – similar to the one for holding a prescribed minimum stake in shareholding or voting power. Such objective tests are prone to abuse. Consider a case where SE Co., in our illustration above, holds the stake in IN Co. for a period of 366 days, i.e.; it liquidates its stake as soon as the threshold period is met. It should be noted that the 365-day test is a simplistic representation of the income earner’s substance requirement as far as cross-border shareholding is concerned. But as is the case with every such specific test, while clarity in the law is available, abuse of the provisions may still be possible, even if such an exercise becomes more difficult.

In such a case, it should be noted that this test is only one among many anti-tax avoidance measures that the MLI provides. The Principal Purpose Test, the Limitation of Benefits clauses, etc., are other anti-tax avoidance measures under the MLI which may come into play where it is proven that even the 365-day test has been abused.

CORPORATE REORGANISATION
The MLI considers situations where ownership has changed due to corporate reorganisations like mergers or demergers. The language provided in the Article 8 is as follows:

…for the purpose of computing that period, no account shall be taken of changes of ownership that would directly result from a corporate reorganisation, such as a merger or divisive reorganisation, of the company that holds the shares or that pays the dividends.

Thus, the holding period of 365 days would apply across changes in ownership. The point to be noted is that such change would be ignored in ownership of the company that holds the share investment as also the company paying the dividends. Thus, both the parties to the dividend transaction need not consider the 365-day test from the date of reorganisation, but from the date of original holding. The intent seems to be that corporate reorganisation would not entail a change in ultimate ownership, but only a change in the holding structure within the group – for which the holding period test should not be reset.

CONCLUSION
To reiterate the above explanation in a few lines, Article 8 of MLI provides an additional objective test to avail the concessional rate available for dividend incomes under the treaties. The concessional rate is already subject to a minimum shareholding requirement. However, there was no compulsion of a minimum period for which such holding had to be maintained. This led to abuse of the relief provision. Through MLI Article 8, treaties will now provide for a 365-day shareholding period. Shareholders who meet this test can avail the lower concessional rate. However, as it is not a mandatory article of the MLI, at present only 5 Indian treaties have been impacted.
 

Taxation of dividend incomes has always remained an interesting topic for various reasons. The MLI provisions explained above make the subject even more interesting. Coupled with the recent controversies surrounding the applicability of Most Favoured Nation clauses (which is beyond the scope of the present article), we are ensured of interesting times ahead in the field of cross-border dividend taxation.

EPILOGUE
With this article, BCAJ completes a journey of over a year in providing a series of articles dealing with the most important aspects of the MLI – with a view to explain the provisions in as easy a manner as possible. The scope of the MLI provisions is vast, and it would not be possible for the BCAJ to cover all the myriad aspects. However, a reader wishing to avail a basic understanding of the MLI can access the articles starting from the April 2021 issue of the Journal. For readers interested in a deeper study of the subject, BCAS has published a 3 VOLUME COMPENDIUM ON THE MLI spread over 18 Chapters authored by experts in the field, which is a must-read for every international tax practitioner. Further, a research article “MLI Decoded” by CA Ganesh Rajgopalan provides a thread-bare analysis of each of the provisions of India’s treaties modified by the MLI and is available as free e-publication on the BCAS Website at https://www.bcasonline.org/Files/ContentType/attachedfiles/index.html.  

Articles
in MLI Series (Volume 53 and 54 of BCAJ)


Sr. No

Title of the Article

Month of Publication

1

INTRODUCTION AND BACKGROUND OF MLI,
INCLUDING APPLICABILITY, COMPATIBILITY AND EFFECT

April,
2021

2

DUAL RESIDENT ENTITIES – ARTICLE 4 OF MLI

May,
2021

3

ANTI-TAX AVOIDANCE MEASURES FOR CAPITAL
GAINS: ARTICLE 9 OF MLI

June,
2021

4

MAP 2.0 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION FRAMEWORK
UNDER THE MULTILATERAL CONVENTION

August,
2021

5

ANALYSIS OF ARTICLES 3, 5 & 11 OF THE
MLI

September,
2021

6

ARTICLE 13: ARTIFICIAL AVOIDANCE OF PE
THROUGH SPECIFIC ACTIVITY EXEMPTION

October,
2021

7

ARTICLE 10 – ANTI-ABUSE RULE FOR PEs
SITUATED IN THIRD JURISDICTIONS (Part 1)

December,
2021

8

ARTICLE 10 – ANTI-ABUSE RULE FOR PEs
SITUATED IN THIRD JURISDICTIONS (Part 2)

January,
2022

9

ARTICLE 6 – PURPOSE OF A COVERED TAX
AGREEMENT AND ARTICLE 7 – PREVENTION OF TREATY ABUSE

February,
2022

10

COMMISSIONAIRE ARRANGEMENTS AND CLOSELY
RELATED ENTERPRISES

May,
2022

11

MLI ASPECTS IMPACTING TAXATION OF CROSS BORDER
DIVIDENDS

June,
2022

BCAJ Subscribers can access the e-versions of the above articles by logging in to bcajonline.org

BEPS 2.0 SERIES PILLAR ONE – A PARADIGM SHIFT IN CONVENTIONAL TAX LAWS – PART I

(This article is written under the mentorship of CA PINAKIN DESAI)

TAXATION OF DIGITAL ECONOMY – A GLOBAL CONCERN

1.1. The digital revolution has improved business processes and bolstered innovation enabling businesses tosell goods or provide services to customers remotely, without establishing any form of physical presence (such as sales or distribution outlets) in market countries(i.e. countries where customers are located).1.2. However, fundamental features of the current international income tax system, such as permanent establishment (PE) and the arm’s length principle (ALP), primarily rely on physical presence to allocate taxing rights to market countries and hence, are obsolete and incapable of taxing digitalised economy (DE) effectively. In other words, in the absence of physical presence, no allocation of income for taxation was possible for market countries, resulting in deprivation of tax revenue in the fold of market jurisdictions.1.3. For example, instead of using a local sales office in India, foreign companies can sell goods to customers in India through a website. In the absence of a PE, India cannot tax profits of the foreign company from the sale made to Indian customers. Another example is that a foreign company establishes an Indian company for distributing goods in India; but the Indian distributor performs limited risk sale and distribution activity in India and hence, is allocated limited returns on ALP basis, whereas the foreign company enjoys the residual profits which are offered to tax in its home jurisdiction.

1.4. In the absence of efficient tax rules, taxation of DE has become a key base erosion and profit shifting (BEPS) concern across the globe. While the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development’s (OECD) BEPS 1.0 project resolved several issues, the project could not iron out the concerns of taxation of DE. Hence, OECD and G20 launched BEPS 2.0 project, wherein OECD, along with 141 countries, is working towards a global consensus-based solution to effectively tax DE.

1.5. Pillar One of BEPS 2.0 project aims to modify existing nexus and profit allocation rules such that a portion of super profits earned by a large and highly profitable Multinational Enterprise (MNE) group is re-allocated to market jurisdictions under a formulary approach (even if MNE group does not have any physical presence in such market jurisdictions), thereby expanding the taxing rights of market jurisdictions over MNE’s profits.

2. CHRONOLOGY OF PILLAR ONE DEVELOPMENTS

TIMELINE OECD DEVELOPMENT REMARKS
October, 2020 OECD secretariat released a report titled ‘Tax Challenges Arising from Digitalisation- Report on the Pillar One Blueprint’ (the ‘Blueprint’) The blueprint represented the OECDs extensive technical work along with members of BEPS Inclusive Framework (IF)1 on Pillar One. It was a discussion draft prepared with an intention to act as a solid basis for negotiations and discussion between BEPS IF members.
July, 2021 OECD released a statement titled ‘Statement on a Two-Pillar Solution to Address the Tax Challenges arising from the Digitalisation of the Economy’ (‘July Statement’) The ‘July statement’ reflected the agreement of 134 members of BEPS IF on key components of Pillar One, including nexus and profit allocation rules.
October, 2021 OECD released an update to the ‘July statement’ (‘October statement’) In the ‘October statement’, 137 members of BEPS IF, out of 141 countries2 (which represent more than 90% of global GDP) reinstated their agreement on the majority of the components agreed in the ‘July statement’ and also agreed upon some additional aspects of Pillar One.
February, 2022 till May, 2022 OECD released series of public consultation documents Since the beginning of 2022, OECD has been releasing public consultation documents which provide draft rules on building blocks of Pillar One. OECD is seeking feedback from stakeholders before the work is finalised and implemented.
2023 Implementation of Pillar One Pillar One targeted to come into effect for critical mass of jurisdictions.

1   BEPS IF was formed by OECD in January, 2016 where more than 141 countries participate on equal footing for developing standards on BEPS-related issues and reviewing and monitoring its consistent implementation.

IMPLEMENTATION OF PILLAR ONE

3.1. The implementation of Pillar One rules will require modification of domestic law provisions by member countries, as also the treaties signed by them.The proposal is to implement a “new multilateral convention” (MLC) which would coexist with the existing tax treaty network. Further, OECD shall provide Model Rules for Domestic Legislation (Model Rules) and related Commentary through which Amount A3 would be translated into domestic law. Model Rules, once finalised and agreed by all members of BEPS IF, will serve basis for the substantive provisions that will be included in the MLC.3.2. It has been agreed that, once Pillar One is effective, all the unilateral Digital Service Tax and other similar measures undertaken by various countries will also need to be withdrawn by member countries.

4. COMPONENTS OF PILLAR ONE

4.1. As mentioned above, Pillar One has two components – Amount A and Amount B.

4.2. Amount A – new taxing right: To recollect, Pillar One aims to allocate certain minimum taxing rights to market jurisdictions where MNEs earn revenues by selling their goods/ services either physically or remotely in these market jurisdictions. In this regard, new nexus and profit allocation rules are proposed wherein a portion of MNE’s book profits would be allocated to market jurisdictions on a formulary basis. Mainly, the intent is to necessarily allocate certain portion of MNE profits to a market jurisdiction even if sales are completed remotely. MNE profit recommended by Pillar One to be allocated to market jurisdictions is termed as “Amount A”. It is only if there is a positive value of Amount A that taxing right shall be allocated to market jurisdictions. If there is no Amount A, Pillar One does not contemplate the allocation of taxing rights to market jurisdiction.


2   The IF comprises 141 member jurisdictions. The only IF members that have not yet joined in the October, 2021 statement are Kenya, Nigeria, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka. Significantly, all OECD, G20, and EU members (except for Cyprus, which is not an IF member) joined the agreement, seemingly clearing the way for wide-spread adoption in all major economies.
3   Refer Para 4.2 for concept of Amount A

4.3. Amount B – Safe harbour for routine marketing and distribution activities – a concept separate and independent of Amount A:

a. Arm’s length pricing (ALP) of distribution arrangements has been a key area of concern in transfer pricing
(TP) amongst tax authorities as well as taxpayers. In order to enhance tax certainty, reduce controversy,
simplify administration under TP laws and reduce compliance costs, the framework of Amount B is proposed.

b. Amount B” is a fixed return for related party distributors who are present in market jurisdictions and perform routine marketing and distribution marketing and distribution activities. In other words, Amount B is likely to be a standard % in lieu of routine functions performed by marketing and distribution entities.

c. Unlike Amount A, which can allocate profits even if sales are carried out remotely, Amount B is applicable only when the MNE group has some form of physical presence carrying out marketing and distribution functions in the market jurisdiction. Currently, the agreed statements suggest that Amount B would work independent of Amount A, and there is no discussion of the interplay of the two amounts in the blueprint or agreed statements. Also, even if Amount A is inapplicable to the MNE group (for reasons discussed below), the MNE group may still need to comply with Amount B.

d. The scope and working of Amount B are still being worked upon by OECD, and hence, guidance is awaited on the framework of Amount B, such as – what will be scope of routine marketing and distribution functions? How will Amount B work if the distributor performs beyond routine functions? Will the fixed return reflect a traditional TP approach to setting the fixed return, or will it be a formulaic approach? Will fixed return vary by region, industry and functional intensity? Will implementation
of Amount B require changes to domestic law and tax treaty?

4.4. Since the framework of Amount B is still being developed at OECDs level and not much guidance is available on the scope and working of Amount B; and the focus of OECD is currently building the framework of Amount A, the scope of this article is limited to the concept and working of Amount A. This article does not deal with Amount B.

4.5. The nuances of Pillar One will be presented in a series of articles. This is the first article in the Pillar One series, which will focus on the scope of Amount A, i.e. what conditions are to be satisfied by an MNE group to be covered within the scope of the Amount A regime.

5. ‘AMOUNT A’ WORKS ON MNE LEVEL AND NOT ON ENTITY-BY-ENTITY APPROACH

5.1 As per existing tax laws, income earned by each entity of an MNE group is taxed separately, i.e. each entity is assessed to tax as a separate unit. However, Amount A significantly departs from this entity-by-entity approach. Amount A (including the evaluation of the applicability of Amount A rules) works on the MNE group level.

5.2 The draft rules issued by OECD define “Group” as a collection of Entities (other than an excluded entity) whose assets, liabilities, income, expenses and cash flows are, or would be, included in the Consolidated Financial Statements (CFS) of an ultimate parent entity (UPE).

5.3 Entity is defined as any legal person (other than a natural person) or an arrangement, including but not limited to a partnership or trust, that prepares or is required to prepare separate financial Statements (SFS). Thus, if a person (other than individuals) is required to prepare SFS, such person can qualify as an entity irrespective of whether or not it actually prepares SFS. However, certain entities are specifically excluded from the Amount A framework. This includes government entities, international organisations, non-profit organisations (NPO), pension funds, certain investment and real estate investment funds, and an entity where at least 95% of its value is owned by one of the aforementioned Excluded Entities.

5.4 As mentioned above, Group is defined by reference to CFS prepared by UPE. Hence, the concept of UPE is inherently important in the Amount A framework. To qualify as UPE, an entity needs to satisfy the following conditions:

(i) Such entity owns directly or indirectly a Controlling Interest4 in any other Entity.

(ii) Such entity is not owned directly or indirectly by another Entity (other than by Governmental Entity or a Pension Fund) with a Controlling Interest.

(iii) Such entity itself is not a Governmental Entity or a Pension Fund.

5.5 It may be noted that an entity that qualifies as UPE is mandatorily required to prepare CFS as per qualifying financial accounting standards (QFAS)5. It is specifically provided that even if a UPE does not prepare CFS in accordance with QFAS, it must produce CFS for purposes of Amount A.


4   Controlling Interest is defined as ownership interest in an Entity whose financial statements are consolidated or would be consolidated on line-by-line basis as per qualifying accounting standards.
5   Qualifying Financial Accounting Standards mean International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) and GAAP of countries like Australia, Brazil, Canada, EU, EEA Member states, Japan, China, Hong Kong, UK, USA, Mexico, New Zealand, Korea, Russia, Singapore, Switzerland and India.

5.6 The above concepts may be understood with the following examples:

(i)    Group 1: Promotor held group structure

Group 2: Government entity held group structure

6. CONDITIONS FOR APPLICABILITY OF ‘AMOUNT A’ TO MNE GROUP

6.1. Amount A shall revolutionise the existing taxation system. Amount A represents profits to be allocated to market jurisdictions for the purpose of taxability, even if, as per existing taxation rules, no amount may be allocable to market jurisdictions.

6.2. Considering the drastic change in the tax system, the Amount A regime is agreed to be made applicable only to large and highly profitable MNE groups. Hence, scope rules for applicability of Amount A to the MNE group have been kept at very high thresholds quantitatively and objectively, such that they are readily administrable and provide certainty as to whether a group is within its scope.

6.3. MNE Groups who do not fulfil any of the scope conditions discussed below will be outside Amount A profit allocation rules. However, where these conditions are fulfilled, an MNE group would need to determine Amount A as per the proposed new profit allocation rules (which would be determined on a formulary basis at the MNE level) and allocate Amount A to eligible market jurisdictions.

6.4. Criterion for determining whether Group is in-scope of Amount A framework as agreed by members of BEPS IF

(i) In a global consensus statement released in October, 2021, members of BEPS IF agreed on the following as scope threshold:

(a) An MNE group shall qualify as a “covered group” within the scope of Amount A if it has a global turnover of above € 20 billion and profitability (i.e. profit before tax/revenue) above 10%.These thresholds will be determined using averaging mechanisms.

(b) The turnover threshold of € 20 billion stated above will be reduced to € 10 billion after relevant review in this regard based on successful implementation, including tax certainty on Amount A. The relevant review in this regard will begin seven years after the Pillar One solution agreement comes into force. The review shall be completed within a timeframe of one year.

(ii) By virtue of such a high threshold, it is expected that it would cover only the top 100 MNE groups across the globe6, out of which about 50% of the MNEs in the scope of Amount A are likely to be US-based MNEs, about 22% are headquartered in other G7 countries, and about 8% are headquartered in China7. Most Indian headquartered MNE groups are unlikely to satisfy such high thresholds, except, large and profitable groups like the Reliance and Tata groups.

6.5 Criterion for determining whether a Group is in-scope of Amount A framework as provided in the draft scope rules

(i) Basis the broad scope agreed by BEPS IF members in October 2021, OECD released draft model rules for the Scope threshold. As per the draft rules, a Group qualifies as a Covered Group for a particular period (i.e. current period) if the following two tests are met:

(a) Global revenue test – Total Revenues of the Group for the current period should be greater than € 20 billion. While the threshold is provided in a single currency (i.e. euros), OECD is exploring coordination issues related to currency fluctuations.


6   As per OECD report “Tax Challenges Arising from Digitalisation – Economic Impact Assessment”.
7   Kartikeya Singh, “Amount A: The G-20 Is Calling the Tune and U.S. Multinationals Will Pay the Piper,” Tax Notes International, vol. 103, August 2, 2021.

(b) Profitability test – 3-step profitability test:

•    Period test – Group’s profitability exceeds 10% threshold in the current period.

•    Prior period test – Group’s profitability exceeds 10% threshold in 2 or more out of 4 periods preceding the current period8.

•    Average test – Group’s profitability exceeds 10% threshold on average across the current period and the four periods immediately preceding the current period.

(ii) All the above-mentioned tests should be cumulatively satisfied, i.e. if any condition is not satisfied, the Group is outside the scope of the Amount A regime.

(iii) Rationale for introducing prior period test and average test in draft rules – These tests seek to deliver neutrality and stability to the operation of Amount A and ensure Groups with volatile profitability are not inappropriately brought into its scope, which limits the compliance burden placed on taxpayers and the tax authorities.

(iv)    Adjustments to be made to revenue and profits for computing scope thresholds – It is noteworthy that for Global revenue test and Profitability test, adjusted revenues and adjusted profits are to be considered.

(a)    For revenues, the starting point is revenues reported in Group’s CFS to which certain adjustments are to be made such as:

•    Adding share of revenue derived from joint venture;

•    Subtracting dividends, equity gain/loss on ownership interest, and

•    Adjusting eligible restatement adjustments like prior period items.

(b) For profits, the starting point is profit or loss reported in the CFS to which certain book to tax adjustments are made, such as:

•    Adding tax expense (including deferred tax), dividends, equity gain on ownership interest, policy disallowed (bribe, penalty, fines etc.);

•    Subtracting of equity loss on ownership interest; and

•    Adjusting eligible restatement adjustments like prior period items.


8   If there is a Group Merger/ Demerger in the current Period or any of the three Periods immediately preceding the current Period, the calculation of profitability for prior period test and average test should be basis revenues and profits of Acquiring Group/ Existing Group (in case of merger) and Demerging Group (in case of Demerger).

(v) Weighted average to be considered for computing Average test:

(a) For the Average test (which requires evaluation of whether the Group’s profitability exceeds 10% threshold on average across the current period and the four periods immediately preceding the current period), the term “average” is defined as:

“Average” means the value expressed as a percentage by:

a. multiplying the Pre-Tax Profit Margin of each of the Period and the four Periods immediately preceding
the Period, by the Total Revenues of that same Period; and

b. summing the results of (a), and dividing it by the sum of the Total Revenues of the Period and the four Periods immediately preceding the Period.

(b) Further, it is specifically clarified that the calculation in subparagraph (a) of the definition of average requires that the pre-tax profit margin of each period are weighted according to the respective total revenues of the same period. The average calculation is, therefore, a weighted average calculation.

6.7. Ongoing discussions at OECD level on draft scope threshold rules

(i) The draft scope rules indicate that the profitability test requires evaluation of the profitability of 4 years prior to the current period, and also the average profitability of 5 years (i.e. the average of the current year and 4 prior years); whereas for the global revenue test, only the current year profits need to be considered. Thus, the global revenue test will be met even if revenues in prior years do not exceed € 20 billion.

(ii) However, it is noteworthy that the framework provided in the draft rules does not reflect the final or consensus views of the BEPS IF members, and the OECD is currently exploring a number of open questions in this area.

(iii) One of the issues being evaluated is whether the total revenues of a Group should be subject to the prior period test and the average test as well (which applies to profitability); and

(iv) Another issue is whether the prior period test and the average test should apply as a permanent feature of the Scope rules or, alternatively, apply as an “entry-level test” only. Under the latter option, once a Group falls in the scope of Amount A for the first time, the prior period test and the average test would no longer apply, and thereafter only the total revenues and profitability of the Group in the current period would determine whether the Group is in scope.

6.8. Anti-fragmentation rule to prevent circumvention of global revenue test

(i) The draft rules also provide for an anti-fragmentation rule (AF rule) as a “targeted deterrent and anti-abuse rule” to prevent a Group from restructuring in order to circumvent the global revenue test of € 20 billion.

(ii) The AF rule applies where a group (whose UPE is directly or indirectly controlled by an excluded entity, investment fund or real estate vehicle) in totality meets the global revenue test and the profitability test, but the group is artificially split to create one or more Fragmented Groups with the principal purpose of circumventing the global revenue test of €20 billion. Consider the following example:

(iii) By virtue of the AF rule, revenues of such fragmented groups shall be aggregated, and the global revenue test shall be met where such aggregated revenue exceeds € 20 billion. It may be noted that the AF rule shall provide for a grandfathering clause such that the rule shall be made effective only for restructurings that take place after a set date. Discussions are ongoing at the OECD level on what should be such date of grandfathering.

7. SECTOR EXCLUSIONS- EXCLUSION FOR EXTRACTIVE AND REGULATED FINANCIAL SERVICES

7.1. In the global consensus statement released in October, 2021, members of BEPS IF agreed that the extractive sector and regulated financial services sector must be excluded from the framework of Amount A. The revenues and profits earned by a group from extractive activities and regulated financial services are to be excluded while evaluating scope thresholds (i.e. global revenue of € 20 billion and the profitability test of 10%) as well as computation of Amount A for covered
groups.

7.2. In 2022, OECD released draft rules for the scope of this sector exclusion for extractive activities and regulated financial services.

7.3. Exclusion for profits and revenues of Regulated Financial Institutions (RFI)

(i) Profits and revenues of Entities that meet the definition of RFI are wholly excluded from Amount A. Alternatively, profits and revenues of an Entity that does not meet that definition (i.e. non RFI) is wholly included in Amount A. Hence, the exclusion works on an entity-by-entity basis. What is excluded is the entire profit of the RFI entity and not the segmental activity.

(ii) MNE groups need to evaluate the global revenue test and profitability test discussed in Para 6 above after excluding revenues and profits of RFI. If the MNE group still crosses the scope thresholds, such a residual group will qualify as a covered group under Amount A.

(iii) The rationale for providing this exclusion is that this sector is already subject to a unique form of regulation, in the form of capital adequacy requirements, that reflect the risks taken on and borne by the firms. This regulatory driver generally helps to align the location of profits with the market.

(iv) Definition of RFI

(a) RFI includes 7 types of financial institutions: Depositary Institution; Mortgage Institution; Investment Institution; Insurance Institution; Asset Manager; Mixed Financial Institution; and RFI service entity.

(b) Each type of RFI is specifically defined and generally contain 3 elements – all of which need to be satisfied: a license requirement, a regulatory risk-based capital requirement, and an activities requirement. For example, to qualify as a depositary institution, the following condition should be satisfied:

• It must have a banking license issued under the laws or regulations of the jurisdiction in which the Group Entity does that business.

• It is subject to capital adequacy requirements that reflect the Core Principles for Effective Banking Supervision provided by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision.

• It accepts deposits in the ordinary course of a banking or similar business.

• At least 20% of the liabilities of the entity consist of Deposits as of the balance sheet date for the period.

(c) Entities whose substantial business is to provide regulated financial services to Group Entities of the same Group are not RFI.

7.4. Exclusion for extractive activity

(i) The extractive exclusion will exclude the Group’s revenues and profits from extractive activities from the scope of Amount A.

(ii) Definition of extractive activity

(a) As per the draft rules released in April 2022, an MNE group shall be considered to be engaged in “Extractive Activity” if such MNE group carries out exploration, development or extraction of extractive product and the group sells such extractive product. Thus, the extractive activities definition contains a dual test:

• a product test (i.e. the sale of an extractive product), and

• an activities test (i.e. conducts exploration, development or extraction).

(iii) Both of the above-mentioned tests must be satisfied to qualify as “Extractive Activity”. Thus, where a MNE group earns revenue from commodity trading only (without having conducted the relevant Extractive Activity), or revenue from performing extraction services only as a service provider (without owning the extractive product), such MNE may not be considered as carrying on “Extractive Activity”.

(iv) As per the OECD, these two conditions for extractive exclusion reflect the policy goal of excluding the economic rents generated from location-specific extractive resources that should only be taxed in the source jurisdiction, while not undermining the comprehensive scope of Amount A by limiting the exclusion in respect of profits generated from activities taking place beyond the source jurisdiction, or later in the production and manufacturing chain.

(v) The two tests in definition of “Extractive Activities” may be understood basis the following example:

7.5.  Revenues and profits from extractive activities to be excluded

(i) Unlike regulated financial services, the extraction exclusion does not exclude all revenues and profits of entities engaged in the extraction business.

(ii) In fact, where an MNE group is carrying on Extractive Activity, the consultation draft provides a complex mechanism to compute revenue and profits from such extractive activity on a segmented basis.

(iii) MNE groups need to evaluate the global revenue test and profitability test discussed in Para 6 above after excluding revenues and profits from extractive activities. If the MNE group still crosses the scope thresholds, such residual group will qualify as covered group under Amount A.

8. CONCLUSION

The discussion in this article highlights that rules to determine whether an MNE group is within the scope of the Amount A regime itself is a complex process. Where the entry test for Amount A rules itself is so convoluted, one can imagine the intricacies which the new profit nexus and profit allocation rules under Amount A will entail.

MNE groups who do not fulfil any of the scope conditions discussed in this article will be outside the Amount A profit allocation rules. However, where the above conditions are fulfilled, an MNE would need to determine Amount A as per the proposed new profit allocation rules (which would be determined on a formulary basis at the MNE level) and allocate Amount A to eligible market jurisdictions. These aspects will be discussed in detail in the next articles in this series. Stay tuned!

MLI SERIES COMMISSIONAIRE ARRANGEMENTS AND CLOSELY RELATED ENTERPRISES

The concept of permanent establishment (PE) was originally introduced to tackle cross-border business and transactions that were left untaxed in the country where the transaction was carried out on account of the absence of a legal entity or a concrete presence in the source country. An entity is said to have a PE in a jurisdiction if it has a fixed place of business through which it carries out business activities, either wholly or partly. The entity’s profits, which are attributable to the PE from which business activities were conducted, were liable to tax in the country where the PE was created.

In order to circumvent being liable to tax in the source country, the parties engaged in cross-border transactions entered into intricate arrangements to artificially avoid creating a PE in the source country. Resultantly, these transactions remained outside the scope of taxation in the source country, resulting in significant revenue loss to the country. These strategies also resulted in either negligible taxation in a low-tax country or altogether, double non-taxation of the transaction. To tackle this issue, an elaborate definition of PE was introduced in the domestic tax laws as well as covered in the bilateral tax treaties entered into by two countries/ jurisdictions. Both the UN Model Convention and the OECD Model Convention exhaustively cover the concept of PE. Despite this, tax strategies such as entering into commissionaire arrangements, artificially splitting contracts and exploiting exemptions for preparatory and auxiliary activities were implemented to avoid the creation of PE in the source country artificially.

Action Plan 7 of the BEPS (in the report titled ‘Preventing the Artificial Avoidance of Permanent Establishment Status, Action 7- 2015 Final Report’) proposed changes in the definition of PE to prevent such artificial avoidance through the use of commissionaire arrangements, specific activities exemption and other similar strategies.

The concept of commissionaire is found in European civil law systems (jurisdictions in which a codified statute is predominant over judicial opinions), which means a person who acts in their own name for the account of a principal. This means that a commissionaire, although contractually bound to deliver goods to the customer as per the terms and conditions agreed, does not own title or ownership in said goods and is therefore, an intermediary acting in its own name. Therefore, a commissionaire arrangement involvesthree parties, namely- Principal, Commissionaire, and the Customer with two separate contractual relationships – one is commissionaire arrangement itself (that is, between the Principal and the Commissionaire) and the other is between the Commissionaire and the Customer.

COMMISSIONAIRE ARRANGEMENT VERSUS AGENCY
While commissionaire is mainly found in civil law countries, common law countries (such as India) recognize the concept of agency. To briefly explain the difference between these two systems, the main feature lies in the binding force of judicial precedents of courts. In the civil law system (followed in most European countries), the court applies and interprets legal norms for deciding a case; because the law is codified and very prescriptive in nature. While under the common law system, the court’s decision is binding; the courts not only make rulings, but also provide guidance on resolving future disputes of similar nature by setting a precedent.

Under the Indian Contract Act of 1872, an agent is a person employed to do any act for another or represent another in dealings with third persons. Like a commissionaire arrangement, an agency involves three parties- the agent, principal and third party. The contract law also states that contracts entered through an agent and the obligations arising from the acts of the agent are enforceable in the same manner, and will have the same legal consequences, as if the contracts had been entered into and the acts done by the principal in person. This means that, unlike in a commissionaire arrangement where the principal is not a party to the contract and is therefore excluded from the legal consequences arising there from, an agency relationship binds the principal in the contract as much as the agent through which it was entered. This conveys that in an agency agreement, in case of breach of contract, the third party is entitled to initiate actions against the principal.

Further, as mentioned above, a commissionaire arrangement includes two separate contractual relationships – one is between principal and commissionaire, and other is between commissionaire and customer. However, in an agency relationship, there is only one contractual relationship- between the principal and the third party (customer).

While India does not recognize the concept of a commissionaire arrangement, it cannot be said that an entity can avoid PE status in India by entering a commissionaire arrangement for the sale of its products or services. The widened definition of PE under treaties, along with ‘business connection’ provisions in the domestic tax law act as a roadblock for structures created to avoid creating PE status in source country artificially.

The concept of commissionaire arrangement and the difference in tax liability between a standard arrangement and a commissionaire arrangement can be understood with an illustration:

In the given illustration: B Co. is a multinational company based in Country B specialising in producing chemicals. The average corporate income tax rate in B is 16%. B Co. has a subsidiary company A Co. in Country A. To sell these chemicals to its customers in Country A, B Co. sells its products to A Co. at arm’s length price, which A Co. then sells to the customers. The profits earned by A Co on such sales, which is generally 15% of the price at which products are sold to customers, are taxed in Country A at 30%. B Co. enters into a commissionaire arrangement with A Co. whereby A Co. will continue to sell these products to the customers based in Country A but on behalf of B Co. A Co, instead of profits, will now earn commission on the sale, which has been agreed at 2% of the customer’s sale price. The profits earned by B Co from the sale of products to the customers, after deducting the commission to A Co., are taxed in Country B.

This results in a reduction in the taxable base in Country A – previously, the entire profits earned by A Co. were taxed in Country A however, under the commissionaire arrangement, only the amount of commission is taxed in Country A while the entire profits on sale are taxed in Country B, a comparatively low-tax jurisdiction since the corporate tax rates are significantly lower than that of Country A.

The substantial reduction in tax liability and the tax base in Country A is depicted in the table below:

Therefore, the taxable base in Country A, where the average corporate income-tax rate is 30%, reduced from the 15% profits earned by A Co to 2% commission which resulted in a revenue loss of 3.75.

Article 5(5) of the OECD Model Tax Convention on Income and on Capital (‘OECD Model Convention’) states that barring specified exceptions, an enterprise is deemed to have a permanent establishment in a country if a person/entity in that country acts on behalf of the foreign enterprise and such person/entity habitually exercised authority to conclude the contracts which are in the name of the foreign enterprise.

The scope of Article 5 was subsequently expanded with effect from 21st November, 2017 through the report titled ‘The 2017 Update to the Model Tax Convention’ to also cover a person/entity which habitually concludes such contracts (which are in the name of the foreign enterprise and are for transfer of title in goods or for rendering services), or where such person/ entity has a major part in concluding such contracts without making any material modifications.

Further, Article 5(6) excludes a person/ entity from the scope of deemed PE if such person/ entity acts as an independent agent and acts for the foreign enterprise in the ordinary course of business. However, such an agent will not be considered independent if it is established that such agent is acting exclusively or almost exclusively for the foreign enterprise or on behalf of one or more enterprises to which it is closely related (discussed in subsequent paragraphs). Erstwhile language of Article 5(5) emphasized the conclusion of contracts in the name of the principal by an agent to constitute its PE. Therefore, commissionaire arrangements under civil law countries escaped constituting a PE as the contracts were entered through Commissionaire. Resultantly, the expanded scope of Article 5 leads to creation of an agency PE in that country if the above criteria are not fulfilled. Therefore, with the widened scope, a person is said to be dependent agent PE if it either has the authority to conclude contracts or habitually plays the principal role in concluding contracts. However, it must be kept in mind that an agency PE is not created in a situation where an activity is specifically mentioned in Article 5(4), that is, activities which do not qualify for creating a PE status. Further, independent agents, as mentioned in Article 5(6) also do not constitute a PE unless one of the cumulative criteria mentioned therein is not fulfilled.

Based on the recommendations made in the BEPS Action Plan 7, Article 12 of the Multilateral Convention Instrument (MLI) widens the scope of PE by including within its ambit cases where a person/ entity habitually concludes contracts or plays a principal role in the conclusion of contracts of the foreign enterprise. Further, although an independent agent which does not exclusively or almost exclusively act for the foreign enterprise does not constitute PE, if the agent acts outside its ordinary business, it may constitute ‘business connection’ as per Explanations 2 and 2A to section 9(1)(i) of the Income-tax Act, 1961. The concept of ‘business connection’ was introduced vide the Finance Act of 2003, which was later substantially modified by the Finance Act of 2018 to align its scope with the permanent establishments’ rules as modified by the MLI (explanatory memorandum).


ARTICLE 12 OF MLI AND ‘BUSINESS CONNECTION’

The scope of business connection under domestic law is analogous to dependent agent PE under tax treaties. Prior to the amendment made by the Finance Act of 2018, ‘business connection’ included business activities carried out by a non-resident through its dependent agents.

With the insertion and subsequent substitution of Explanation 2A, the scope of business connection was widened to include activities of a non-resident carried out through a person acting on its behalf, where the said person,

• has the authority to conclude contracts on behalf of the non-resident and such person habitually exercises such authority in India, or

• habitually concludes contracts, or

habitually plays the principal role leading to conclusion of contracts by non-resident

and the contracts are in the name of the non-resident or are for transfer of ownership of property or granting right to use in the property, or for provision of services by the non-resident.

While both the provisions aim to expand the scope of permanent establishment, the concept of business connection also covers situations where the person has and habitually exercises in India, an authority to conclude contracts on behalf of the non-resident- this situation is not covered in Article 5(5) of the OECD Model Convention. Further, contrary to Article 5(5), which applies if a person routinely concludes a contract without any material modification made by the foreign enterprise, Explanation 2A does provide such qualification for determining business connection. Additionally, unlike Article 12, which excludes activities which are preparatory or auxiliary in nature, ‘business connection’ does not provide for such exclusion thereby making the scope of domestic law provisions wider than Article 12.

INDIA’S POSITION ON ARTICLE 12 OF MLI
Being a signatory to the MLI, India has chosen to adopt the provisions of Article 12 to implement measures for preventing the artificial avoidance of PE status through commissionaire arrangements and similar strategies. The provisions of Article 12 will apply to a tax treaty entered by India with another country/ jurisdiction if the treaty partner is also a signatory to the MLI and has not expressed any reservations under Article 12(4) regarding this provision. Article 12(1) of the MLI will replace or supplement the existing language of tax treaties to make it in line with Article 5(5) of the OECD Model Convention. Similarly, Article 12(2) will replace/ supplement the existing language of tax treaties to make it in line with Article 5(6).

Further, where two contracting jurisdictions choose to apply Article 12(2) of the MLI, Article 15(1) dealing with ‘closely related enterprise’ is also automatically applicable. Unlike other articles of MLI where a country/jurisdiction has those choices to implement a particular article by choosing one of the alternatives mentioned therein, Article 12 does not provide such options. This means that a country either has the option to implement both agency PE rule and independent agent provisions or opt out from adopting both. Treaty partners such as Austria, Australia, Finland, Georgia, Ireland, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Singapore and the United Kingdom have expressed reservations on the application of Article 12 to their respective Covered Tax Agreements. On the other hand, countries such as France and New Zealand have opted in to apply Article 12 to their Covered Tax Agreements.

IMPACT ON TRANSFER PRICING
Transfer pricing aims to allocate the income of an enterprise in jurisdictions where the enterprise conducts business, on an arm’s length basis. One of the most important aspects of transfer pricing provisions is to determine whether an enterprise has a permanent establishment in a jurisdiction and, accordingly, allocating the profits attributable to the PE based on a detailed analysis of the activities undertaken by it. In a way, transfer pricing provisions assist a country in eliminating the shift of profits resulting from avoiding PE status in the source country.

With India being a signatory to the MLI and adopting the provisions of Article 12, there have been fundamental changes in the definition of permanent establishment with regards to changes in rules determining agency PE, commissionaire arrangements and specific activity exemptions for foreign companies undertaking preparatory or auxiliary activities in India.

The modified definition of PE widens the test to determine dependent agency PE to include commissionaire arrangements by covering the situation where contracts are not formally concluded by the person acting on behalf of the foreign enterprise but where that person’s functions and actions results in the conclusion of the contract. Further, where the ownership or rights to use a property is to be transferred, and the said property is not in the name of the person entering into the contract (for example, a commissionaire) but is in the name of the foreign enterprise, such contracts for the transfer of ownership or grant of rights to use will also be included in the widened PE scope.

Enterprises, in order to avoid PE status in a country where they carry business activities, often restructure their business by converting, for example, a full-fledged distributor into a limited-risk distributor, agent or a commissionaire. As a general rule, a distributor is entitled to more profits earned from the source country if it performs more functions, assumes higher risks and employs more assets. In the previous example, A Co.’s status changed from being the distributor of B Co. to a commissionaire agent with B Co. acting as the principal. As a result of this, the functions and risks (such as product liability risk, bad debt risk, foreign exchange risk and inventory risk) undertaken by A Co. drastically reduced to a relatively lower level since the risks previously assumed by A Co. with respect to distribution functions have now shifted to B Co. Consequently, A Co. will be entitled to only the commission portion earned on sale instead of the entire profits earned from the source country A.

However, since the threshold for determining agency PE has been reduced under MLI, it is probable that foreign enterprises are likely to have increased PE exposure in the source country. While several judicial precedents have upheld the formation of an agency PE on the basis that agent were actively involved in negotiation, agency PE has been a litigious area; with the adoption of MLI provisions, these decisions now seem to have been accepted.

CLOSELY RELATED ENTERPRISES
For Articles 12, 13 and 14 of the MLI, Article 15(1) defines a person is said to be closely related to an enterprise if, based on the relevant facts, one person has control of the other or both are under the control of the same persons or enterprises. Further, if one person possesses, whether directly or indirectly, more than 50 per cent of the beneficial interest/voting power/equity interest or if another person possesses, directly or indirectly, more than 50 per cent of the beneficial interest/ voting power/ equity interest in the person and the enterprise, such person shall be considered as closely related to an enterprise.

Under this Article, the general rule is that a person is closely related to an enterprise if the one has control over the other, or both are under mutual control. All the relevant facts and circumstances are to be analysed before determining whether a person/ enterprise is closely related to another. The second leg of the provision provides various situations where a person or enterprise is considered as closely related to an enterprise, which can be split into the following:

a) the person who possesses directly or indirectly more than 50 per cent of the

• beneficial interest in the enterprise, or vice versa; or

• aggregate vote and value of the company’s shares or of the beneficial equity interest in the enterprise, or vice versa.

b) another person possesses directly or indirectly more than 50 per cent of the

• beneficial interest in the person and the enterprise; or

• beneficial equity interest in the person and the enterprise.

Like Article 12, a jurisdiction may either choose to adopt the entire Article 15 or may opt out completely. It is not possible to partially implement the provisions of Article 15. However, if either of the treaty partners has expressed reservations in adopting Article 12, 13 or 14, which results in non-application of said provision to a Covered Tax Agreement, Article 15 will automatically stand inapplicable since this article is solely for the purpose of Articles 12, 13 and 14.

CONCLUSION
In a nutshell, business arrangements involving Indian tax resident, acting for or on behalf of non-residents, requires careful consideration under the widened scope of business connection under section 9(1)(i) of ITA and in case tax of treaty applicability, the interplay of treaty provisions read with MLI needs due emphasis in the determination of tax position of such transactions. It is pertinent to note that contractual arrangement needs to be carefully considered while determining the tax applicability on a transaction, even when it is between unrelated entities.

MLI SERIES- ARTICLE 6 – PURPOSE OF A COVERED TAX AGREEMENT AND ARTICLE 7 – PREVENTION OF TREATY ABUSE

1. BACKGROUND
Multinational companies and large global conglomerates transitioned from country-specific operating models to global business models – thanks to the continuously-improving information and communication technology, internet reach and integrated supply chains. However, the tax laws failed to catch up with the speed and advancement of such business models, leading to gaps in the interplay between domestic and international tax laws resulting in double non-taxation of income. Companies artificially shifted profits to low tax jurisdictions or tax havens where they had little or no business, famously referred to as ‘Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (‘BEPS’). BEPS led to widespread tax evasion causing serious concerns to the already revenue deficit developing economies unable to collect their fair share of taxes.

The bilateral tax treaties signed by the countries also could not prevent improper use of treaties by companies to pay no or minimum taxes leading to treaty shopping or tax treaty abuse. The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (‘OECD’) has been trying to address such issues through its model tax convention or commentary by introducing concepts such as ‘beneficial owner’,conduit companies’, ‘object and main purpose of arrangement or transaction’ etc. over the years. However, multi-nat`ional companies continued treaty shopping and evaded billions in taxes.

Considering the above, a need was felt for international cooperation to tackle the BEPS risks by arriving at a consensus-based solution. The OECD developed a strategy to address BEPS issues in a harmonized and comprehensive manner to counter weaknesses in the taxation system and confront gaps and mismatches in tax treaties. Hence, the concept of Multilateral Instrument (‘MLI’) was introduced whereby existing tax treaties stood modified to incorporate treaty-related BEPS measures via a single instrument called MLI. Multiple action plans were devised as a part of the BEPS project, and one such plan was Action Plan 6 – Prevention of tax treaty abuse.

2. OVERVIEW OF ACTION PLAN 6

BEPS Action Plan 6 deals with a variety of measures to control treaty abuse. It recommended a three-way approach to deal with treaty abuse, i.e., a) introduction of a preamble to the treaty; b) introduction of purpose based anti-abuse provision called ‘principal purpose test’; and c) introduction of objective based anti-abuse provision called ‘limitation on benefits’. These recommendations have been considered in the MLI.

The MLI contains multiple articles, which are divided into 7 parts. Part III, containing Articles 6 to 11, deals with the prevention of treaty abuse. Article 6 covering ‘Purpose of Covered Tax Agreement’ and Article 7 on ‘Prevention of Treaty Abuse’ has been discussed in this article.

Primarily, BEPS Action Plan 6 includes, inter-alia, introduction of title and preamble to every treaty as a minimum requirement along with the insertion of the clause on principal purpose test as well as limitation on benefits.

3. ARTICLE 6 OF MLI – PREAMBLE AS MINIMUM STANDARD

The preamble text which is introduced / replaced by MLI reads as under:

‘Intending to eliminate double taxation with respect to the taxes covered by this agreement without creating opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion or avoidance (including through treaty-shopping arrangements aimed at obtaining reliefs provided in this agreement for the indirect benefit of residents of third jurisdictions)’.

The main crux of the preamble as the minimum standard is to indicate the intention of the treaty countries to:

a) Eliminate double taxation;

b) Restrict opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion/avoidance strategies; and

c) Discourage treaty shopping or treaty abuse.

There is a possibility that the existing treaties may already have a preamble on similar lines. However, considering that multiple nations have commonly agreed upon the comprehensive text, it is desired that the countries adopt modified language of preamble as a substitute or in absence of the current text. However, if two countries believe that the language of preamble in the tax treaty is sufficient, they may continue with the text of preamble in the tax treaty by making a reservation without adopting change as suggested above.

The preamble forms part of the tax treaty and sets the tone and context in the right manner. It constitutes a statement of the object and purpose of the tax treaty.

With regards to the methodology of incorporating new preamble into existing treaties, it being a minimum standard, the countries who subscribe to MLI are presumed to have agreed to the change unless otherwise notified. If a country remains silent on its position without expressing any explicit reservation, it will be presumed that the country has agreed to the adoption of the minimum standard.

4. OPTIONAL ADDITION TO PREAMBLE
MLI provides an option to add following text in the preamble discussed above:

?Desiring to further develop their economic relationship and to enhance their cooperation in tax matters’

The additional text is offered as an option to the signatories of MLI with respect to the treaties that do not already have such a language as a part of its preamble. Only when both the countries expressly agree to adopt additional language will their tax treaty stand modified to include said text as part of the preamble. For example, the UK and Australia have opted for the inclusion of additional language as a part of the preamble. Hence, the UK-Australia tax treaty will have this additional language in addition to the language required as a minimum standard.

5. INDIA’S POSITION TO PREAMBLE AND OPTIONAL ADDITION
India is silent on the adoption of Article 6. Therefore, preamble text as stated above, being a minimum standard shall be deemed to have been adopted by India for its tax treaties. However, India has not opted for optional addition, and hence the same will not be included in the tax treaties.

6. IMPACT OF PREAMBLE ON INDIA’S EXISTING TREATIES

The impact of India’s adoption under Article 6 on few important tax treaties entered into by India is discussed below:

Country

Whether
the country is a signatory to MLI?

Whether
treaty with India is notified for MLI purpose?

Impact

Singapore

Yes

Yes

The existing preamble in the tax treaties contain objective of
prevention of double taxation and fiscal evasion.

The preamble language is likely to get widened with new preamble
which provides for
?without creating
opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion or
avoidance and anti-treaty shopping objective.’

 

Netherlands

United Kingdom

France

UAE

Mauritius

Yes

No

New preamble shall not be added and
hence existing treaty shall continue to operate as it is.

The existing preamble provides for
its object as ‘the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of
fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income and capital gains and for the
encouragement of mutual trade and investment.’

Germany

Yes

No

New preamble not to be added and hence existing treaty shall
continue to operate without any change.

USA

No

Not
Applicable

India-USA treaty shall remain
unchanged. However, based on BEPS Action Plan, countries may amend treaty
based on bilateral negotiations.

China

Yes

No

Neither country had notified counterparty. However, both the
countries recently amended tax treaty based on the bilateral negotiations.
The treaty has been amended based on the measures recommended in BEPS Action
Plan.

 

The amended tax treaty includes new preamble including optional
additional text. The same is reproduced as under:

 

‘Desiring to further develop their economic
relationship and to enhance their cooperation in tax matters, Intending to
eliminate double taxation with respect to taxes on income without creating
opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion or
avoidance (including through treaty-shopping arrangements aimed at obtaining
reliefs provided in this Agreement for the indirect benefit of residents of
third States).’

7. INTENT OF PREAMBLE
The main intention behind binding countries which are signatory to the MLI to include new preamble as a minimum requirement is to ensure prevention of inappropriate use of tax treaties leading to double non-taxation or reduced taxation. However, recognizing what is ‘appropriate’ vis-à-vis ‘inappropriate’ use of tax treaty is often complex and strenuous.

In a situation where a company is set up with no / minimum business activity in a particular jurisdiction it may be viewed to be a typical case of inappropriate use of tax treaty. Further, in case of a company being engaged in genuine commercial activities which incidentally leads to double non-taxation may not viewed to be a case of inappropriate use of tax treaty. In such cases, the effect of double non-taxation is not on account of any tax evasion arrangement but in line with the overall object and intent of the tax treaty.

The tax treaty also intends to encourage economic development and co-operation amongst countries. One such case is of India-Mauritius tax treaty wherein the preamble manifests the philosophy of encouraging mutual trade and investment as object of the treaty. In the landmark judgment of Union of India vs. Azadi Bachao Andolan ([2003] 263 ITR 706), the Supreme Court referred to the text of the preamble of the Mauritius Treaty and legitimized treaty shopping as being consistent with India’s intention at the time when the Mauritius treaty was entered. It is pertinent to evaluate whether Supreme Court would have rendered the decision on similar lines if preamble would not bear reference to the text relating to economic development. Further, it would be interesting to see how Courts interpret tax treaties considering the text of new preamble in the tax  treaties.

Mandatory adoption of new preamble is a step in right direction as an anti-abuse measure which keeps a check on treaty shopping and would help countries in collecting taxes in a fair and equitable manner.

8. ARTICLE 7 OF MLI – PREVENTION OF TREATY ABUSE
The BEPS Action Plan 6 Report provides for three alternatives to mitigate treaty abuse viz. the principal purpose test (‘PPT’), simplified limitation of benefit (‘SLOB’) provision and detailed limitation of benefit (‘DLOB’) provision. Under Action Plan 6, as a minimum standard, countries are provided with a choice between adopting the following options for prevention of Treaty Abuse:

(i) Only PPT.

(ii) PPT along with SLOB.

(iii) PPT along with DLOB.

(iv) DLOB supplemented by a mechanism that would deal with conduit arrangements not already dealt with in tax treaties.

The MLI provides for the PPT and SLOB provisions. However, it does not include a draft of the DLOB provision since it may require substantial bilateral customization and may be difficult to incorporate in a multilateral instrument. Further, since the PPT, by itself, can constitute compliance with the minimum standard, the same has been provided for as the default option for prevention of treaty abuse under Article 7 of MLI. However, countries are free to adopt either of the other three approaches as provided above.

9. CONCEPT OF PPT
The concept of PPT provides that where having regard to all relevant facts and circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that one of the principal purposes of any transaction or arrangement was to obtain treaty benefit, such benefit would be denied unless it is established that the granting of such benefit would be in accordance with the object and purpose of the provisions of the treaty.

The concept of PPT may be dissected as under:

(i) Overriding Provision – The provisions of the PPT are notwithstanding other provisions of the treaty, namely they override the other provisions of the treaty.

(ii) Subjective Test – The test of PPT is subjective. While all relevant facts and circumstances needs to be considered in determining fulfilment of PPT, what constitutes the principal purpose of an arrangement and whether the principal purpose was to obtain a treaty benefit may be subject to varying interpretations.

(iii) Onus of Proof – The onus of proof (namely reasonable basis) required for the tax department to contest non-compliance of PPT is lower than the onus of proof (namely establish with certainty) required for the taxpayer to contend that granting of benefit is in accordance with the object and purpose of the treaty.

(iv) Application of PPT – PPT may fail even if one of the principal purposes of the transaction or arrangement was to obtain treaty benefit. One way to interpret this could be that where the transaction or arrangement would not have taken place or would have taken place in a different manner in the absence of the treaty benefit, then in such cases principal purpose may be said to have been to obtain treaty benefit.

(v) Transaction or Arrangement – The MLI does not define the terms ‘transaction’ or ‘arrangement’. However, the term ‘arrangement’ is defined in section 102(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘IT Act’), although for the limited purpose of Chapter XA relating to the General Anti-Avoidance Rule. However, these terms could be interpreted widely and may also include setting up an entity in a particular jurisdiction.

(vi) Benefit – The term ‘benefit’ has also not been defined in the MLI. However, the same has been defined in section 102(3) to include a payment of any kind, whether intangible or intangible form. Further, section 102(10) defines ‘tax benefit’ to include reduction, avoidance or deferral of tax, increase in refund, reduction in incomeor increase in loss. The term ‘benefit’ in the context ofMLI is also intended to be wide in nature to cover the above.

(vii) Taxability in case PPT is not satisfied – Where PPT is not satisfied, the benefit under the treaty may be denied. However, the taxability may not be altered under the treaty by recharacterizing the transaction, disregarding an arrangement, looking through the transaction etc.

(viii) Object and purpose of tax treaty – Even where the PPT is not satisfied, treaty benefit may still be granted where it is proved that the granting of such benefit is in accordance with the objects and purpose of the treaty. The object and purpose of treaty may be gauged from the treaty’s preamble, text of the relevant provision etc. Typically, treaties/treaty provisions include elimination of double taxation, promotion of exchange of goods and services, movement of capital and persons, fostering economic relations, trade and investment, provision of certainty to taxpayers, elimination of discrimination etc. as their objects.

Some of the situations where PPT may be applied to deny treaty benefits are setting up of an intermediate holding company for treaty shopping, assignment of the right to receive a dividend to a beneficial treaty country, holding of board meetings in a particular country to demonstrate residence of the entity in such country etc. Further, some of the situations where the treaty benefit may be provided under the exception to the PPT Rule (i.e. treaty benefit in accordance with object and purpose of tax treaty) include choice of a treaty country for setting up a new manufacturing plant as compared to setting up in a country with no treaty, allowing benefit to an investment fund or a collective investment vehicle set up in a country where majority investors are of that country while some minority investors may be of a different country etc.

In addition to the PPT, the MLI also provides an option to include an additional para empowering the competent authority of a contracting state to grant the treaty benefit upon request from the person even where the same has been denied as a result of the operation of PPT. This shall be the case where the competent authority determines that such benefits would have been granted even in the absence of the transaction or arrangement.

10. APPLICATION OF PPT TO COVERED TAX AGREEMENTS
The PPT applies ‘in place of’ or ‘in absence of’ any existing similar provisions in the treaty. Where a similar PPT provision (which either covers all benefits or is applicable to specific benefits under treaty) is already present in the treaty and the same is notified by both the parties to the CTA, the said provision would be replaced by the PPT under the MLI. Thus, the scope of existing PPT provisions under a CTA would get expanded by the operation of the MLI. Where no such provision is present, the PPT under MLI would be added to the treaty. Further, where only one of the parties to the CTA notifies a similar existing provision in the treaty or where none of the parties to the CTA notify a similar existing provision, the PPT under MLI would apply and prevail over the existing provision and the MLI PPT would supersede the existing provision to the extent that such existing provision is incompatible with the MLI PPT.

However, the optional para empowering the competent authority to grant treaty benefit would only apply where both the parties to CTA have chosen to adopt the same.

11. CONCEPT OF SLOB
As discussed earlier, the SLOB provision is an optional provision which may be adopted as a supplement to the PPT. It provides for objective conditions for entitlement to benefits under a CTA. Basically, the SLOB test provides that a resident of a contracting state would be entitled to treaty benefits which are otherwise available under the CTA only where such resident:

(i) Is a ‘qualified person’; or

(ii) Is engaged in active conduct of business; or
(iii) At least 75% beneficial interest in such person is directly or indirectly owned by equivalent beneficiaries; or

(iv) Is granted benefit by the competent authority irrespective subject to fulfilment of PPT.

However, the following benefits under the treaty are not subject to the SLOB test:

(i) Determination of residence of dual resident entities (Para 3 of Article 4).

(ii) Corresponding adjustment (Para 2 of Article 9).

(iii) Mutual agreement procedure (Article 25).

Some of the important concepts for test of SLOB are outlined below:

Qualified person

(i) Individual,

 

(ii) Contracting jurisdiction,
political subdivision or local authority thereof or instrumentality thereof,

 

(iii) Entity whose principal class of
shares is regularly traded on stock exchange(s),

 

(iv) Mutually agreed NGOs,

 

(v) Entities established and operated
to administer retirement benefits etc.,

 

(vi) Person other than individual, if
at least 50% of shares of the person are owned directly or indirectly by
persons who are residents and qualify for treaty benefit under (i) to (v)
above. The shares should be held on at least half the days of a twelve-month
period that includes the time when the benefit would otherwise be provided.

Active conduct of business

(i) Person must be engaged in active conduct of business in the
residence state and income derived from the other state emanates from or is
incidental to such business.

 

(ii) Following activities do not qualify as “active conduct of
business”:

 

? Holding company,

 

? Overall supervision or administration of a group of companies,

 

? Group financing (including cash pooling),

 

? Making or managing investments.

Equivalent beneficiaries

(i) Treaty
benefit would be available if equivalent beneficiaries directly or indirectly
own at least 75% of the beneficial interest of the resident income recipient.
The interest must be held on at least half of the days of any twelve-month
period that includes the time when the benefit would otherwise be accorded.

 

(ii) Equivalent
beneficiary means a person, who would have been entitled to an equivalent or
more favourable benefit either under its domestic law or treaty or any other
international instrument.

12. APPLICATION OF SLOB TO CTAs
The SLOB applies to a CTA only where both the parties to CTA have chosen to apply it. Where only one of the parties or none of the parties have adopted the SLOB, the PPT would apply.

Further, where one of the parties to a CTA has chosen to apply the SLOB while the other party has not, the first party has an option to opt-out of Article 7 in its entirety namely Article 7 (including PPT) would not apply in such a case. In order to discourage such a situation, MLI provides the party not applying the SLOB to opt for either of the following:

(i) Symmetrical application of SLOB: SLOB would apply symmetrically under CTAs with parties that have originally chosen to apply SLOB. For example, where State X has opted for SLOB while State Y has opted only for PPT, State Y may opt for application of SLOB symmetrically to X-Y treaty. In such a case from the perspective of State Y, SLOB clause would apply only for the limited purpose of X-Y treaty. SLOB would not be applicable to any of the Y’s treaties with other States where such other States have not chosen to apply SLOB.

(ii) Asymmetrical application of SLOB: In the earlier example, where State Y opts for asymmetrical application, State X would test both PPT and SLOB while granting treaty benefits while State Y would only test for PPT.

It may be noted that opting for either of symmetrical or asymmetrical option is not mandatory for State Y. If none of the options is opted, the SLOB shall not apply, and only PPT shall apply. However, State X would then have an option of opting out of the entire Article 7, and if such option is exercised, neither PPT nor SLOB shall apply. However, in such a scenario it is expected that countries should endeavour to each a mutually satisfactory solution that meets minimum standard for preventing treaty abuse. In the context of Indian treaties, considering that India has opted for Article 7, the application of PPT or PPT and SLOB would depend upon how the other country chooses to apply Article 7. The impact of Article 7 on select Indian tax treaties is discussed in the subsequent paragraphs.

SLOB also applies ‘in place of’ or ‘in absence of’ similar provisions in the CTA. Where a treaty already has existing similar SLOB provisions, the states may notify the same and the MLI SLOB shall apply in place of the existing SLOB provision upon notification by both the states. The application of SLOB would be similar to that or PPT as discussed in
para 10.1.

13. INDIA’S POSITIONS ON ARTICLE 7
India has chosen to apply PPT as an interim measure in its final notification. However, where possible, it intends to adopt a LOB provision, in addition to or in replacement of PPT, through bilateral negotiation. India has not opted to apply the optional provision empowering the competent authority to grant treaty benefit even where PPT is not met. Further, India has also opted to apply the SLOB to all  its treaties.

14. IMPACT OF ARTICLE 7 ON INDIA’S TREATIES
The impact of MLI on some of India’s prominent tax treaties is outlined in the Table below. The analysis in the below Table is considering that India has opted for PPT and SLOB provisions.

Treaty Partner

Notification
by Treaty Partner

Impact
of Article 7 of MLI

USA

Not adopted MLI

Since USA has not adopted MLI, none of the
provisions of MLI would apply to India – US Treaty. Accordingly, neither PPT
nor SLOB would apply to India – US Treaty.

Mauritius
/ China

Not
covered treaty with India as a CTA

Since treaty with
India is not notified as a CTA by Mauritius, none of the provisions of MLI
(including PPT and SLOB) would apply to India – Mauritius treaty.

 

Neither India nor
China have notified India-China tax treaty as CTA. However, both the
countries recently

(continued)

 

 

amended tax treaty based on the bilateral negotiations.
India-China tax treaty has been amended vide protocol notified by CBDT vide
Notification No. 54/ 2019 dated 17th July, 2019 where PPT has been
incorporated under Article 27A of the treaty.

Japan / France

Only
PPT

Only PPT would
apply to the treaty.

UAE / Australia / Singapore
/ Netherlands / Luxembourg / UK

PPT plus
optional provision empowering competent authority to grant treaty benefit
despite failure of PPT

Only PPT would apply.

 

Since India has not adopted the optional
provision empowering competent authority, the same would not apply to any of
India’s CTAs.

Russia

PPT and SLOB

Both PPT and SLOB
would apply.

Denmark

PPT and
Symmetrical Application of SLOB

Both PPT and SLOB would apply.

Greece

PPT and Asymmetrical Application of SLOB

Greece would
apply
only PPT in granting
treaty benefit while India would apply both PPT and SLOB in granting treaty
benefit

15. INTERPLAY OF PPT, SLOB AND GAAR

In the case of CTA where both PPT and SLOB apply, since SLOB deals with whether a particular “person” per-se is eligible for treaty benefit and provides for objective criteria as compared to PPT, the fulfilment of SLOB needs to be tested first. Where the SLOB itself is not fulfilled, treaty benefit would not be available irrespective of the fulfilment of PPT.

Once the SLOB is fulfilled, as a next step, the arrangement or transaction resulting in the income would also need to satisfy the PPT. Where SLOB is met, however, in case where a particular arrangement or transaction does not meet PPT, treaty benefit in respect of income from such arrangement or transaction may still be denied.

It is also pertinent to consider the interplay of PPT and General Anti-Avoidance Rules (‘GAAR’) under the IT Act. The table below provides a comparative analysis of these provisions.

Particulars

PPT

GAAR

Subject matter of test

Transaction or arrangement.

Arrangement which inter-alia includes a transaction.

Applicability

One of the principal
purposes is to obtain treaty benefit.

 

Tainted element test not
required to be fulfilled.

(i)
Main purpose is to obtain tax benefit; and

(ii) Any of the four tainted elements are
present (namely creates rights or obligations not at arm’s length, results in
misuse or abuse of provisions, lacks commercial substance or entered in
manner not ordinarily employed for bona fide purpose).

Consequences

Denial
of treaty benefit.

Disregarding or recharacterization of
arrangement, disregarding parties to arrangement, reallocation of income
between parties, reassessment of residency or situs, looking through
corporate structure etc.

Carveouts

Treaty benefit provided
where the same is in accordance with object and purpose of treaty.

None.

Safeguards
for judicious application

None.

Invocation to be approved by
Approving Panel.

Grandfathering

None.

Income from investments made prior to 1st April, 2017
grandfathered.

Threshold

None.

Applicable only where the tax benefit
exceeds Rs. 3 crores in a financial year.

It may be noted from the above that the test under PPT is more stringent than under GAAR. Accordingly, it is less likely that GAAR would apply where the PPT is satisfied. However, it would be interesting to see the manner in which GAAR provisions may apply where treaty benefit is provided under the exception to the PPT rule taking into account the object or purpose of the treaty.

16. CONCLUSION
With the introduction of the preamble in all CTAs, the same is likely to assume increasing significance in the interpretation of tax treaties and the provision of benefits thereunder, including by judicial forums. Any double non-taxation or treaty shopping case is likely to be subject to extensive scrutiny. Further, group holding structures, cross border transactions and arrangements planned by multinational corporations would need extensive examination with respect to the fulfilment of PPT in addition to already existing anti-avoidance measures. Further, since many countries have not opted for SLOB, the impact of SLOB provisions would be limited to select treaties entered into by India.

The importance of commercial substance and rationale is likely to assume prime significance and it is imperative that business decisions be driven by commercial factors rather than primarily by tax reasons. Going forward, the significance of adequate documentation for demonstrating the commercial rationale of entering into any transaction / arrangement cannot be undermined.

DUAL RESIDENT ENTITIES – ARTICLE 4 OF MLI

(This is the second article in the MLI series of articles started in April, 2021)

1. INTRODUCTION
Section 90(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (the Act) read with Article 253 of the Constitution enables the Central Government to enter into Tax Treaties. Accordingly, India has entered into Tax Treaties with over 90 countries. The overarching preamble to a Tax Treaty is to eliminate double taxation and, vide the Multilateral Instruments (MLI), the same is also extended to prevent double non-taxation, or treaty abuse, or treaty-shopping arrangements.

The Tax Treaty does not impose taxes but distributes taxing rights. It provides substantive rights but relies on the domestic tax law to provide for the rules and procedures to levy tax. As per section 90(2), the beneficial provisions of the Tax Treaty shall override the specific provisions of the Act, subject to the domestic General Anti-Avoidance Rules (GAAR) and issue of Tax Resident Certificate from the tax officer in the foreign country. Thus, it is imperative to understand the treaty entitlement issues.

The taxpayer would certainly apply the Tax Treaty when its income is taxable in its resident state as well as in the source state. In other words, when it is the recipient of income taxable in more than one jurisdiction. Once applicable, its application is dependent on the following:

Scope of Application

Rules of Application

‘Taxpayer’ in Article 1

Preamble to Tax Treaty

‘Taxes’ in Article 2

Principal Purpose Tests

‘Residence’ in Article 4

Limitation of benefit clause, etc.

While the above relates to treaty entitlement, this article is focused on Article 4 of the MLI on Dual Resident Entities (non-individuals) that are usually referred to in Article 4(3) of the relevant Tax Treaty. As a pre-cursor, a Dual Resident Entity (DRE) is defined as such when an entity is deemed to be a resident of more than one jurisdiction under the domestic provisions. For example, when a  UK-incorporated entity is a tax resident of UK as per its domestic tax law (say, because of its incorporation under the UK tax law) and is also deemed to be a resident of India as per the Indian domestic tax law (say, because of the POEM rule under the Income-tax Act, 1961). The present Tax Treaty, without the effect of MLI, dealt with the conflict of dual resident entities and contained a tie-breaker rule for determination of the effective treaty residence.

2. ARTICLE 4(3) OF THE TAX TREATY
In accordance with Article 1(1) of the OECD Model Tax Convention, the Tax Treaty shall apply to persons who are residents of one or both of the Contracting States. Article 2 defines ‘persons’ to include an individual, a company and any other body of persons and defines ‘company’ to mean a body corporate or an entity that is treated as a body corporate for tax purposes, whereas Article 4 defines ‘residence’ for treaty purposes. In relevance, the Tax Treaty allocates or distributes taxing rights on the basis of the treaty residence.

The term ‘residence’ in Article 4(1) of the relevant Tax Treaty refers to the domestic definition of the residence, which, for Indian purposes, is section 6 of the Act. However, for resolving the issue of dual residency for non-individuals, the Tax Treaty refers to its own rule specified in Article 4(3) of the relevant Tax Treaty, i.e., Place of Effective Management (POEM). The OECD does not impose any restrictions or criteria for determination of residence in Article 4(1). In the case of dual residency for non-individuals, Article 4(3) refers to the POEM criterion as a single tie-breaker rule to determine ‘treaty residence’.

The term POEM is not defined in the OECD Model Tax Convention or in the relevant Tax Treaty. An analogy is drawn from the OECD Commentary which in itself does not provide sufficient and reliable guidance on its key determinants. Dual resident non-individuals are known to have abused this guidance gap. The tax authorities, as a last resort, have determined POEM on the basis of their domestic tax law vide Article 3(2) of the OECD Model Tax Convention. Under the Act, section 6 deems a foreign company to be a resident of India if it has its POEM in India. The CBDT Circular 6/2017 further provides guidance on how to determine POEM on the basis of various parameters for active business outside India and in India.

3. MULTILATERAL INSTRUMENTS
In order to curb tax abuse or evasion, article 4(1) of the Multilateral Instruments (MLI) amends the existing article 4(3) of the relevant Tax Treaty for resolving dual residency. It provides that the resolution of dual residence shall be through mutual agreement between the Contracting Jurisdictions concerned. It departs from the current treaty practice1, insofar as the POEM may no longer be the main rule to resolve the dual residence; and that the competent authorities will have the freedom to consider a number of factors to be taken into account while determining treaty residence of Dual Resident Entities (DRE). Article 4(1) of MLI also provides that the benefit of the Tax Treaty shall not be available until and unless the mutual agreement is concluded.

While Article 4(2) of MLI elucidates the manner in which the existing text of the Tax Treaty will change or modify, Article 4(3) of MLI provides an option to the Contracting States to make reservations. Article 4(4) of MLI elucidates the manner in which a Contracting Jurisdiction shall notify its partner Contracting Jurisdiction and thereby the Tax Treaty agreements to be covered under MLI.

4. DUAL RESIDENT ENTITIES – ARTICLE 4 OF MULTILATERAL INSTRUMENTS
4.1 Paragraph 1 of Article 4 of MLI states the following:
Paragraph 1. Where by reason of the provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement a person other than an individual is a resident of more than one Contracting Jurisdiction, the competent authorities of the Contracting Jurisdictions shall endeavour to determine by mutual agreement the Contracting Jurisdiction of which such person shall be deemed to be a resident for the purposes of the Covered Tax Agreement, having regard to its place of effective management, the place where it is incorporated or otherwise constituted and any other relevant factors. In the absence of such agreement, such person shall not be entitled to any relief or exemption from tax provided by the Covered Tax Agreement except to the extent and in such manner as may be agreed upon by the competent authorities of the Contracting Jurisdictions.

 

1   United Nations’ Manual for the Negotiation of
Bilateral Tax Treaties between Developed and Developing Countries 2019, page 61

The key phrases for discussion are given below:

  • ‘A person other than an individual is a resident of more than one Contracting Jurisdiction.’
  • ‘shall endeavour to determine by mutual agreement.’
  • ‘having regard to its place of effective management, the place where it is incorporated or otherwise constituted and any other relevant factors.’
  • ‘shall not be entitled to any relief or exemption from tax.’
  • ‘except to the extent and in such manner as may be agreed upon by the competent authorities of the Contracting Jurisdictions.’

MLI provides for a shift in the initial determination of treaty residence, from the taxpayer / tax authority (determination using POEM) to now the Competent Authority of the Contracting Jurisdiction concerned (determination by mutual agreement).

Until its final determination by mutual agreement, the DRE is not entitled to any relief or exemption from tax under the Tax Treaty to which MLI applies. However, the last sentence also contemplates a discretionary power in the hands of the Competent Authority to grant some relief under the relevant Tax Treaty. From the perspective of the Act, with no access to the Tax Treaty, a foreign company shall be deemed to be a domestic resident if its POEM (as per domestic guidance) is in India. A foreign limited liability partnership (being a body corporate) shall be deemed to be a resident in India where the control and management of its affairs is situated wholly or partly in India. Paragraph 52 of the Explanatory Statement to MLI provides the following:

‘Existing “tie-breaker” provisions addressing the residence of persons other than individuals take a variety of forms. For example, some [such as Article 4(3) of the UN Model Tax Convention, and of the OECD Model Tax Convention prior to the BEPS Project] break the tie in favour of the place of effective management, some focus on the place of organisation, and others call for determination by mutual agreement but do not explicitly deny benefits in the absence of such a determination.’

It must be noted that the POEM, being one of the various determinants, is in itself an anti-avoidance measure. It applies the substance-over-form approach in order to determine the location where ‘key management and commercial decisions’ were made. It seems that POEM is the key criterion for Competent Authorities to determine treaty residence and thereby entitlement to the relevant Tax Treaty. MLI or its Explanatory Statement does not provide any guidance on how to determine treaty residence and how to determine POEM or which aspect to consider for ‘any other relevant factor’. It seems that the domestic guidance on determination of POEM may not be relevant for determination of treaty residence as the purpose of section 6(3) is to make a foreign company a resident in India and thereby enabling dual residency, whereas the purpose of Article 4(1) of the MLI is to resolve the conflict of dual residency.

With high discretion in the hands of the Competent Authority, there is no obligation on the Competent Authority to reach a mutually acceptable agreement. Further, the DRE may not have any say in the matter and may not have any right to appeal or arbitrate a negative decision on treaty residence.

Lastly, the CBDT has in Rule 44G of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 provided for the manner in which an Indian resident can apply to the Competent Authority in India for initiation of MAP. It also provides for a suggestive timeline (not mandatory) of 24 months for arriving at a mutually agreeable resolution of the tax dispute. However, a foreign entity is not allowed to apply to the Competent Authority in India.

4.2 Paragraph 2 of Article 4 of MLI states the following:
Paragraph 1 shall apply in place of or in the absence of provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement that provide rules for determining whether a person other than an individual shall be treated as a resident of one of the Contracting Jurisdictions in cases in which that person would otherwise be treated as a resident of more than one Contracting Jurisdiction. Paragraph 1 shall not apply, however, to provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement specifically addressing the residence of companies participating in dual-listed company arrangements.

The key phrases for discussion are given below:

  • ‘in place of or in the absence of.’
  • ‘companies participating in dual-listed company arrangements.’

This Paragraph is the compatibility clause that describes the interaction between Article 4(1) of the MLI and the existing Article 4(3) of the relevant Tax Treaty (also known as the Covered Tax Agreement). The effect of ‘in place of or in the absence of’ is as provided below:

 

4.3 Paragraph 3 to Article 4 of MLI states the following:
A party may reserve the right:
a) for the entirety of this Article not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements;
b) for the entirety of this Article not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements that already address cases where a person other than an individual is a resident of more than one Contracting Jurisdiction by requiring the competent authorities of the Contracting Jurisdictions to endeavour to reach mutual agreement on a single Contracting Jurisdiction of residence;
c) for the entirety of this Article not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements that already address cases where a person other than an individual is a resident of more than one Contracting Jurisdiction by denying treaty benefits without requiring the competent authorities of the Contracting Jurisdictions to endeavour to reach mutual agreement on a single Contracting Jurisdiction of residence;
d) for the entirety of this Article not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements that already address cases where a person other than an individual is a resident of more than one Contracting Jurisdiction by requiring the competent authorities of the Contracting Jurisdictions to endeavour to reach mutual agreement on a single Contracting Jurisdiction of residence, and that set out the treatment of that person under the Covered Tax Agreement where such an agreement cannot be reached;
e) to replace the last sentence of paragraph 1 with the following text for the purposes of its Covered Tax Agreements: ‘In the absence of such agreement, such person shall not be entitled to any relief or exemption from tax provided by the Covered Tax Agreement’;
f) for the entirety of this Article not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements with parties that have made the reservation described in sub-paragraph e).

This Paragraph relates to the reservation which can be entirely, partially or in a modified format. The signatories are free to express their reservation and restrict the extent of the application of Article 4 of MLI. It may opt out of Article 4 of MLI in the manner stated above and continue with the existing provisions of the Tax Treaty, without giving effect of MLI.

For example, in the India-Austria Tax Treaty, Austria has reserved the right for the entirety of Article 4 of MLI not to apply to its Covered Tax Treaty. India has notified India-Austria Tax Treaty and has not provided any reservation. Accordingly, Article 4 would not apply.

Likewise, in the India-Australia Tax Treaty, Australia has reserved the right to deny treaty benefits in absence of mutual agreement in accordance with Article 4(3)(e) of MLI above. Both India and Australia have notified the relevant article in the India-Australia Tax Treaty. India has not provided any reservation [including reservation as per Article 4(3)(f)]. Accordingly, Article 4(1) of MLI shall replace the existing Article 4(3) of the India-Australia Tax Treaty, with the last sentence of Article 4(1) of MLI to be modified by Article 4(3)(e) of the MLI.

The signatory party to the MLI that has not made a reservation of this article is required to notify the Depository of its Covered Tax Treaty purported to be covered or already covered in its existing treaty. The procedure is discussed in Article 4(4) of the MLI discussed below.

4.4 Paragraph 4 to Article 4 of MLI states the following:
Each party that has not made a reservation described in sub-paragraph a) of paragraph 3 shall notify the Depository of whether each of its Covered Tax Agreements contains a provision described in Paragraph 2 that is not subject to a reservation under sub-paragraphs b) through d) of Paragraph 3, and if so, the article and paragraph number of each such provision. Where all Contracting Jurisdictions have made such a notification with respect to a provision of a Covered Tax Agreement, that provision shall be replaced by the provisions of Paragraph 1. In other cases, Paragraph 1 shall supersede the provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement only to the extent that those provisions are incompatible with Paragraph 1.

This Paragraph complements the application of Article 4(2) of MLI. Refer to the diagram illustrated in Paragraph 2 above, wherein each party has to notify the Depository of whether each of its Covered Tax Agreements contains an existing provision that is not subject to a reservation under Paragraph 3(b) through (d). Such a provision would be replaced by the provisions of Article 4(1) of MLI where all parties to the Covered Tax Agreement have made such a notification. In all other cases, 4(1) of MLI would supersede the existing provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement only to the extent that those provisions are incompatible with Article 4(1) of MLI.

Paragraph 52 of the Explanatory Statement to MLI provides that ‘Where a single provision of a Covered Tax Agreement provides for a tie-breaker rule applicable to both individuals and persons other than individuals, Paragraph 1 would apply in place of that provision only to the extent that it relates to a person other than an individual.’

5. EXCEPTION
Paragraph 2 of Article 4 of MLI provides an exception to this Article, i.e., ‘Paragraph 1 shall not apply, however, to provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement specifically addressing the residence of companies participating in dual-listed company arrangements.’

The above clause has a restricted effect from the Indian perspective as it refers to the existing treaty clause addressing the residence of companies participating in dual-listed company arrangements, e.g., the UK-Netherlands Tax Treaty. In the dual-listed company arrangement, like merger, two listed companies operating in two different countries enter into an alliance in which these companies are allowed to retain their separate legal identities and continue to be listed and traded on the stock exchanges of the two countries. It is a process that allows a company to be listed on the stock exchanges of two different countries. In a typical merger or acquisition, the merging companies become a single legal entity, with one business buying the other. However, ‘a dual-listed company arrangement’ is a corporate structure in which two corporations function as a single operating business through a legal equalisation agreement but retain separate legal identities and stock exchange listings2. The arrangement reflects a commonality of management, operations, shareholders’ rights, purpose and mission through an agreement or a series of agreements between two parent companies, operating as one business.

 

2   http://www.legalservicesindia.com/article/1580/Dual-Listing-of-Companies.html
and Explanatory Statement in respect of Article 4(2) of MLI

 

6. WAY FORWARD
MLI is seeking to replace / supersede the existing framework of the Tax Treaty. While MAP was a well-known measure present in the Tax Treaty to resolve tax conflicts, Article 4 of MLI purports to use this measure for determining the Treaty Entitlement, more particularly the issue on treaty residence. Until the coming into force of Article 4(1) of MLI, the treaty entitlement was never doubted in the existing Article 4 of the relevant Tax Treaty [except in rare cases like in article 4(3) of the Indo-USA DTAA]. However, post-amendment through MLI, the DRE would be entitled to Tax Treaty only on conclusion of MAP, the outcome of which is uncertain. The MAP pursuant to Article 4(3) of MLI should not be confused with the MAP pursuant to Article 25 of the OECD Model Tax Convention.

For example, Article 27 of the India-UK Tax Treaty provides that ‘Where a resident of a Contracting State considers that the actions of one or both of the Contracting States result or will result for him in taxation not in accordance with this Convention, he may, notwithstanding the remedies provided by the national laws of those States, present his case to the competent authority of the Contracting State of which he is a resident.’

Whereas Paragraph 58 of the Explanatory Statement to MLI states that where Article 4(1) of MLI denies the benefits of the Covered Tax Agreement, in the absence of the concluded MAP for treaty residence, such denial cannot be viewed as ‘taxation that is not in accordance’ with the provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement.

Accordingly, Article 27 of the India-UK Tax Treaty would not apply for two reasons: (a) by referring to ‘resident of a contracting state’, it is referring to treaty residence and not domestic residence. Since treaty residence is not yet determined, the said clause is not applicable; (b) by referring to taxation that is ‘not in accordance with this Convention’, the said clause is not applicable when Paragraph 58 of the Explanatory Statement is read along with this clause.

Furthermore, MAP concluded under one Tax Treaty (e.g. UK-India Tax Treaty) would not have any precedence when contemplating another Tax Treaty (e.g. Netherlands-India Tax Treaty) and would be time-consuming and exhaustive for the DRE, especially when the MAP discussion fails under one Tax Treaty and it might be late for the DRE to initiate MAP for past years under another Tax Treaty.

Secondly, there is no obligation on the competent authorities to actually reach an agreement. The wording used in Article 4(1) of MLI is ‘shall endeavour’ to agree in MAP, pending which the taxpayer’s treaty entitlement is at stake. The discretion afforded to the Competent Authorities under Article 4 of MLI is wider in scope than the domestic General Anti-Avoidance Rule. Possibly, it was intentional to curtail treaty abuse and provide powers in the hands of the contracting state. Further, if POEM is the key determinant for the Competent Authority, it should be based on a regulated guidance, not at the free discretion of the respective Competent Authorities who may give different relevance to a particular factor. Howsoever it may be, the lifting of corporate veil under a cross-border scenario should be avoided in genuine cases and should be used only as a tool to prevent tax abuse or tax evasion. The form and governance of DRE should be respected to the extent it is appropriate and reasonable.

Thirdly, the DRE would not be entitled to the Tax Treaty, in the absence of mutual agreement, even if MAP discussion is ongoing, where the last sentence of Article 4(1) of MLI is replaced by the specific sentence in Article 4(3)(e) of MLI, or where the DRE would not be entitled to the Tax Treaty except to the extent the Competent Authorities grant some relief to it [assuming Article 4(3)(e) is not applicable]. In the absence of guidelines, the questions that may arise are: That once the MAP is concluded, whether the outcome shall apply to the DRE retrospectively or prospectively? Whether the person who is responsible for payment (payer) to DRE is obliged to withhold taxes without considering the benefit from Tax Treaty, considering that it may not be privy to the MAP or tax conflict? Whether the right to deny treaty entitlement is for the DRE and not for the payer who is obliged to withhold taxes at the applicable Tax Treaty rate or the Act rate, whichever is more beneficial? As a way forward, in order to reduce the hardship, the Competent Authorities should suspend or defer the collection of taxes while MAP discussions are ongoing and provide rules for the taxpayer to comply with withholding tax issues in these scenarios.

Lastly, the DRE should have a right to contest the conclusions drawn under the MAP in an international court or in its resident Contracting Jurisdiction, or under a multilateral arbitration. At present, MLI assumes that the MAP would be concluded in the right manner with right determinants, giving full discretionary power to the Competent Authorities to decide which determinants would be key to determine treaty residence, as against the guidance given in the OECD Commentary for, say, POEM, wherein it has discussed various determinants with examples. As a way forward, the Contracting Jurisdictions that participated in MAP should permit DRE a legal remedy to contest MAP in its domestic forum and, if successful, to allow the court decision to become an addendum to the concluded MAP. Further, if the MAP is not concluded, the DRE is not entitled to the Tax Treaty. DRE should not suffer from permanent fracture for the rigidness of the Competent Authorities. DRE should be provided with legal remedy to resolve the impending dispute.

INTRODUCTION AND BACKGROUND OF MLI, INCLUDING APPLICABILITY, COMPATIBILITY AND EFFECT

The development and roll-out of Multilateral Instruments or MLI is the latest global tax transformational process under the BEPS initiative. The BCAJ, in this Volume 53, will run a series of articles by practitioners to bring out basic concepts, de-jargonise terminology and bring out practical implications and deal with hurdles that they bring in our day-to-day practice. We would welcome your comments and suggestions and even generic questions which can be taken up by the authors.

A. INTRODUCTION TO MLI
1. The Action Plan on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (the BEPS Action Plan), published by the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) at the request of the G20, identified 15 actions to address BEPS in a comprehensive manner and set deadlines to implement those actions. Action 15 of the BEPS Action Plan provided for the development of a Multilateral Instrument (MLI).

2. As per the Explanatory Statement to the MLI, its object is to Implement Tax Treaty-Related Measures to Prevent Base Erosion and Profit Shifting i.e., tax planning strategies that exploit gaps and mismatches in tax rules to artificially shift profits to low or no-tax locations where there is little or no economic activity, resulting in little or no overall corporate tax being paid.

3. FAQ 1 of Frequently Asked Questions on MLIs explains that the MLI helps fight BEPS by implementing the tax-related treaty measures developed through the BEPS Project in existing bilateral tax treaties in a synchronised and efficient manner. These measures will prevent treaty abuse, improve dispute resolution, prevent the artificial avoidance of permanent establishment status and neutralise the effects of hybrid mismatch arrangements.

B. IMPORTANT EVENTS OF MLI AND MLI STATISTICS
1. Background of MLI – from conception to entry-into-effect1: On 12th February, 2013 the report ‘Addressing Base Erosion and Profit Shifting’ (BEPS) was published recommending the development of an ‘Action Plan’ to address BEPS issues in a comprehensive manner. In July, 2013 the OECD Committee on Fiscal Affairs (CFA) submitted the BEPS Action Plan to the G20 identifying 15 actions to address BEPS in a comprehensive manner and set out deadlines to implement those actions. Action Plan 15 interim report provided for an analysis of the possible development of a Multilateral Instrument (MLI) to implement tax treaty-related BEPS measures. Based on the Action 15 interim report, a mandate was developed by the CFA in February, 2015 to set up an Ad hoc Group for the development of an MLI which was also endorsed by the G20 Finance Ministers and the Governors of Central Banks. The development of MLI was open for participation of all interested countries on an equal footing. On 24th November, 2016 the Ad hoc Group concluded the negotiations and adopted the text of the MLI as well as its accompanying Explanatory Statement which was signed by representatives of over 70 governments on 7th June, 2017 at a high-level signing ceremony in Paris. Thus, on 1st July, 2018, the MLI began its legal existence. However, the MLI would enter into force with respect to each of its parties on the first day of the month following three calendar months after the deposit of their instrument of ratification, acceptance or approval.

2. Applicability of MLI: As stated earlier, the MLI and its explanatory statement were adopted by the Ad hoc Group on 24th November, 2016 and MLI began its legal existence on that date. The first high-level signing ceremony took place on 7th June, 2017 when India signed the MLI by depositing its provisional document of notifications and ratifications. Thereafter, it filed its final document of notifications and ratifications on 25th June, 2019. As on 18th February, 2021, 95 tax jurisdictions are signatories to the MLI as per the website2 of OECD. Out of these, the MLI has come into effect qua 57 tax jurisdictions, including India. With reference to India, as per the MLI Matching database available on the OECD website3, out of its 90 tax treaties with other countries, 60 tax treaties are Covered Tax Treaties (CTAs). In other words, 60 tax treaties would stand modified by the MLI. Out of the said 60 treaties, MLI has already come into effect or is to come into effect qua India with respect to 42 tax treaties as the treaty partners have already deposited their final instrument of notifications and ratifications. Thus, with regards to the other 18 treaties (60 minus 42), the MLI would come into effect only when the necessary procedures with regard to deposit of final instruments of notifications and ratifications are complied with by the treaty partners.

1   https://www.oecd.org/tax/treaties/multilateral-instrument-BEPS-tax-treaty-information-brochure.pdf

  1. Global list of countries in respect of which MLI has come into effect as on 18th February, 2021:As stated earlier, MLI has already come into effect qua 57 countries globally as on 18th February, 2021. To get a detailed list of countries and to be updated with the latest position, one may go to the OECD website4 and click on ‘Signatories and Parties (MLI Position)’.

4. Countries with which MLI is in effect qua India or is to come into effect for India5:


Sl. No.
Contracting jurisdiction Entry into effect with respect to withholding Entry into effect with respect to other taxes Sl. No. Contracting jurisdiction Entry into effect with respect to withholding Entry into effect with respect to other taxes
1 Albania 01.04.2021 01.07.2021 22 Latvia 01.04.2020 01.08.2020
2 Australia 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 23 Lithuania 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
3 Austria 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 24 Luxembourg 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
4 Belgium 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 25 Malta 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
5 Canada 01.04.2021 01.06.2020 26 Malaysia 01.04.2022 01.12.2021
6 Croatia 01.04.2022 01.12.2021 27 Netherlands 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
7 Cyprus 01.04.2021 01.11.2020 28 New Zealand 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
8 Czech Republic 01.04.2021 01.03.2021 29 Norway 01.04.2020 01.05.2020
9 Denmark 01.04.2021 01.07.2020 30 Poland 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
10 Egypt 01.04.2021 01.07.2021 31 Portugal 01.04.2021 01.12.2020
11 Finland 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 32 Qatar 01.04.2020 01.10.2020
12 France 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 33 Russia 01.04.2021 01.04.2020
13 Georgia 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 34 Saudi Arabia 01.04.2021 01.11.2020
14 Iceland 01.04.2021 01.07.2020 35 Serbia 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
15 Indonesia 01.04.2021 01.02.2021 36 Singapore 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
16 Ireland 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 37 Slovak Republic 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
17 Israel 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 38 Slovenia 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
18 Japan 01.04.2020 01.04.2020 39 Ukraine 01.04.2020 01.06.2020
19 Jordan 01.04.2021 01.07.2021 40 United Arab Emirates 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
20 Kazakhstan 01.04.2021 01.04.2021 41 United Kingdom 01.04.2020 01.04.2020
21 Korea 01.04.2021 01.03.2021 42 Uruguay 01.04.2021 01.12.2020

2   http://www.oecd.org/tax/treaties/multilateral-convention-to-implement-tax-treaty-related-measures-to-prevent-beps.htm

3   https://www.oecd.org/tax/treaties/mli-matching-database.htm#:~:text=MLI%20Matching%20Database%20(beta)%20The%20Multilateral%20Convention%20to,MLI%20by%20matching%20information%20from%20Signatories’%20MLI%20Positions

4   http://www.oecd.org/tax/treaties/multilateral-convention-to-implement-tax-treaty-related-measures-to-prevent-beps.htm

5              https://www.oecd.org/tax/treaties/mli-matching-database.htm#:~:text=MLI%20Matching%20Database%20(beta)%20The%20Multilateral%20Convention%20to,MLI%20by%20matching%20information%20from%20Signatories’%20MLI%20Positions

  1. India’s significant treaties which are not CTAs under the MLI:
Sl. No. Country Remarks
1 Mauritius Kept India out of its CTA list
2 China Though no CTA, but treaty with China amended recently on lines of MLI
3 United States of America MLI not signed
4 Germany Kept India out of its CTA list
  1. ENTRY INTO EFFECT OF MLI, i.e., EFFECTIVE DATE OF APPLICABILITY OF MLI BETWEEN INDIA AND ITS TREATY PARTNER
  2. MLI 34 deals with ‘entry into force’ and MLI 35 deals with ‘entry into effect’. There is a difference between the two. ‘Entry into force’ indicates the date of adoption of the MLI by a country which is determined with reference to the date of filing the instrument of ratification by it. By itself, ‘entry into force’ does not make MLI applicable. It only signifies the MLI position adopted by a particular country. On the other hand, ‘entry into effect’ indicates the date of applicability of MLI between two countries. The ‘entry into effect’ makes MLI applicable and effective qua the two contracting states. The ‘entry into effect’ is determined by taking into consideration the dates of ‘entry into force’ of two contracting states.

2. MLI 35(1)(a) and (b) provide for different timelines for entry into effect of MLI in respect of taxes withheld at source and entry into effect of MLI in respect of all other taxes, respectively. The application of different timelines for withholding and other taxes could vary based on the interpretation of principles of levy of tax and its recovery and the domestic tax laws of contracting states dealing with the levy and recovery of tax.

3. We may consider one possible interpretation while being mindful of contrary views. In the Indian context, withholding in respect of payments to non-residents u/s 195 would apply in respect of all sums which are chargeable to tax. Ordinarily, chargeability to tax and withholding are inseparable. The obligations of a non-resident do not get discharged merely because taxes are liable to withholding. Recourse can be had to non-resident where tax is not withheld or short withheld. Compliance obligations like filing return and other reporting requirements would apply to such non-resident as well as be subject to specific exceptions, viz., sections 115A(5), 115AC(4) and 115BBA(2).

4. This may not be the position in case of India’s DTAA partner country. In such DTAA partner country, the domestic law may have two ‘boxes’ of incomes. The ‘first box’ would consist of incomes which are subject to withholding by the payer with no recourse to the recipient in case of non- / short deduction. The ‘second box’ consists of incomes which are not subject to withholding but are liable to be taxed directly in the hands of the person earning the income. The first box would be similar to the case of equalisation levy version 1 introduced by the Finance Act, 2016 which levies tax on a non-resident but enforces the same through deduction by the resident payer. The second box would be similar to the case of equalisation levy version 2 introduced by the Finance Act, 2020 whereby the liability is on the non-resident to pay the levy directly.

5. In this regard, reference may be made to Paragraph 4 of the OECD Commentary on Article 31 (Entry into force) of the OECD Model Tax Convention, 2017. The said Paragraph recognises that the relevant Article dealing with ‘entry into force’ of certain treaties provides, as regards taxes levied by deduction at the source, a date for the application or termination which differs from the date of application of the treaty to taxes levied by assessment. This would indicate that there may be countries whose domestic laws may have two boxes of incomes as referred to in the previous paragraph.

6. Consider Article 30(2)(a) of the Indo-USA DTAA which provides for a different time point for entry into effect of the DTAA in respect of taxes withheld as compared to other taxes. This may be because as per the US domestic taxation law, income of a non-resident in the US that is effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business in the US is not subject to NRA withholding.[Source: https://www.irs.gov/individuals/international taxpayers/withholding-on-specific-income.]

At this juncture, a reference may be made to Paragraph 60 of the recent judgment of the Supreme Court in the case ofEngineering Analysis Centre of Excellence Private Limited vs. CIT [2021] 125 taxmann.com 42 (SC) where, after referring to the OECD Model Commentary and Article 30(2)(a) of the Indo-USA DTAA, the Court concluded that adoption of such different dates for application of the treaty was for reasons connected with USA’s municipal taxation laws.

7. Now, consider a case where the MLI has come into effect only in respect of taxes withheld. In such a case, the CTA as amended by the MLI may be applied by the DTAA partner country for determining the taxes to be withheld (incomes of first box). However, the CTA amended by the MLI cannot be applied by the DTAA partner country in respect of incomes not subject to withholding but that are taxed directly in the hands of the person earning the income (incomes of second box). In such cases, the provisions of the CTA unamended by MLI will be applied till such time as the MLI comes into effect for the purposes of all other taxes.

8. Thus, in the Indian context the different timelines would not be relevant as non-residents earning Indian income are subject to comprehensive obligations. However, in a given case, from the DTAA partner country’s context, different timelines would matter.

D. SYNTHESISED TEXTS

  • Every CTA will have to be read along applicable protocol and applicable portions of the MLI. The said exercise would be complex and cumbersome particularly when the applicability of the MLI depends on reservations and notifications by contracting states.

2. The OECD encourages the preparation of consolidated texts or synthesised texts which would reproduce the
text of each CTA as modified by the MLI. The same has been explained in Paragraph 1 at Page 9 of the ‘Guidance for the development of synthesised texts’ issued by OECD.

3. However, the parties to the MLI are under no obligation to prepare synthesised texts. This has been clarified in Paragraph 13 of the Explanatory Statement on the MLI. This paragraph is referred to in Paragraph 4 at Page 9 of ‘Guidance for the development of synthesised texts’ issued by OECD.

4. In Paragraph 3 at Page 9 of the ‘Guidance’, it has been noted that the purpose of synthesised texts is to facilitate the understanding of the MLI. However, for legal purposes the provisions of the MLI must be read alongside Covered Tax Agreements as they remain the only legal instruments to be applied, in light of the interaction of the MLI positions of the contracting jurisdictions.

5. Thus, the synthesised texts would only help the users in better understanding of the CTA as modified by the MLI. In case of conflict between the synthesised text and the CTA read independently with applicable portions of the MLI, the latter would prevail.

6. As of date, India has synthesised texts in respect of tax treaties with the following jurisdictions:

Sl. No. Country Sl. No. Country Sl. No. Country
1 Australia 11 Latvia 21 Slovak Republic
2 Austria 12 Lithuania 22 Slovenia
3 Belgium 13 Luxembourg 23 UAE
4 Canada 14 Malta 24 UK
5 Cyprus 15 Netherlands 25 Ukraine
6 Czech Republic 16 Poland 26 France
7 Finland 17 Portuguese Republic
8 Georgia 18 Russia
9 Ireland 19 Serbia
10 Japan 20 Singapore
  1. MINIMUM STANDARDS
  2. In the final BEPS Package, in order to combat the issues relating to Base Erosion and Profit Shifting, it was agreed that a number of BEPS measures are minimum standards, meaning that countries have agreed that the standard must be implemented. Thus, countries which are parties to the OECD / G20 inclusive framework on BEPS are required to comply with the following five minimum standards:
  •  Action Plan 4: Limiting Base Erosion Involving Interest Deductions and Other Financial Payments (Adoption of a fixed ratio rule which limits an entity’s net deductions for interest to a percentage of EBITDA to entities in a multinational group is a minimum standard as per the Executive Summary to this Action Plan, AP4);
  •  Action Plan 5: Countering Harmful Tax Practices More Effectively, Taking into Account Transparency and Substance;
  •  Action Plan 6: Preventing the Granting of Treaty Benefits in Inappropriate Circumstances;
  •  Action Plan 13: Transfer Pricing Documentation and Country-by-Country Reporting;
  •  Action Plan 14: Making Dispute Resolution Mechanisms More Effective.
  1. While some of these minimum standards in BEPS Actions 6 and 14 have been implemented through MLI, others have been implemented via domestic amendments.

3. The following are the minimum standards implemented by way of domestic amendments:

Section of IT Act Particulars BEPS Action Plan
94B Thin capitalisation – Limitation on interest deduction Action Plan 4
115BBF Patent box regime Action Plan 5
90/90A (India has entered Tax Information Exchange Agreements with several non-DTAA jurisdictions) Exchange of information on tax rulings Action Plan 5
286 Country-by-country reporting Action Plan 13
  1. The following are the minimum standards implemented through MLI:
Article Provision
6(1) Preamble text to tax treaties
7(1) Principal Purpose Test (PPT)
16(1) to 16(3) Improving dispute resolution through Mutual Agreement Procedure (MAP)
17(1) Corresponding adjustment
  1. Paragraph 14 of the Explanatory Statement to the MLI explains the flexibility with respect to the provisions relating to minimum standards. It has been stated that opting out of provisions that reflect minimum standards is possible only in limited circumstances where the provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement already meet the minimum standard. However, it clarifies that where a minimum standard can be met in several alternative ways, the convention gives no preference to any particular way of meeting such minimum standard.6. MLI 6(1) dealing with the ‘preamble text’ is a minimum standard. Opting out is possible only if the CTA already contains the text which is equal to or broader than the said ‘preamble text’. Therefore, MLI 6(4) provides for an exit option only where the CTA already contains preamble language which is similar to the preamble text of MLI 6(1) or is broader than the said preamble text of MLI 6(1).7. MLI 7(1) dealing with the ‘Principal Purpose Test (PPT)’ is also a minimum standard. Opting out is possible only if parties to the CTA intend to reach a mutually satisfactory solution which meets the minimum standard, or if the CTA already contains a PPT. MLI 7(15)(a) provides an exit option where parties to a CTA intend to reach a mutually satisfactory solution which meets the minimum standard for preventing treaty abuse under the OECD / G20 BEPS package. MLI 7(15)(b) provides for an exit option only where the CTA already contains a PPT.8. MLI 17(1) dealing with the ‘corresponding adjustments’ is another minimum standard. Opting out is possible only if the CTA already contains a provision providing for corresponding adjustment or on the basis that it shall make appropriate corresponding adjustment as referred to in MLI 17(1), or that its competent authority shall endeavour to resolve the case under the provisions of the CTA. This is accordingly provided in MLI 17(3).

    9. India has reserved its right under MLI 17(3)(a) for the entirety of MLI 17 not to apply to those of its CTAs that already contain a provision described in MLI 17(2).

    10. India has notified the list of DTAAs which contain a provision for corresponding adjustment. One such example is Canada where Article 9(2) of the DTAA already provides for corresponding adjustment. Hence, the same would remain unamended by MLI 17(1). One may notice this from the synthesised text of the Indo-Canada DTAA published by the CBDT.

    11. One may also take note of the DTAA between India and France. Article 10 of the DTAA which deals with ‘Associated Enterprises’ does not provide for corresponding adjustment. Hence, India has not notified the DTAA with France under MLI 17. Thus, in the absence of a provision providing for corresponding adjustment, MLI 17(1) would get added to Article 10 of the Indo-France DTAA. This may be observed from the synthesised text of the Indo-France DTAA published by the CBDT.

    F. COMPATIBILITY

  2. MLI provisions may either be newly added into CTA or may overlap with the existing provisions of CTA. While in the former the provisions of the MLI can be applied without any conflict with the provisions of the CTA, in the latter there is a conflict between the provisions of the MLI and the provisions of the CTA.

2. In order to address such conflicts, the provisions of the MLI contain compatibility clauses which may, for example, describe the existing provisions which the Convention is intended to supersede, as well as the effect on CTAs that do not contain a provision of the same type. This has been explained in Paragraph 15 of the Explanatory Statement to the MLI.

3. The Glossary to the Frequently Asked Questions on the Multilateral Instrument defines ‘compatibility clause’ as ‘clauses which define the relationship between the provisions of the MLI and existing tax treaties in objective terms and the effect the provisions of the MLI may have on Covered Tax Agreements.’

4. We may understand the application of compatibility clauses with reference to MLI 4:

4.1 MLI 4(1) deals with tie-breaker test in the case of dual-resident entities (person other than individual). MLI 4(2) provides that the text of MLI 4(1) would apply in place of or in absence of a clause in the existing text of the CTA which provides for a tie-breaker in the case of person other than individuals.

4.2 MLI 4(3) provides various reservations including reservation of right for the entirety of MLI 4 not to apply to the CTAs, under MLI 4(3)(a).

4.3 MLI 4(4) provides for notifications by the parties to the Depository where reservations under MLI 4(3)(a) have not been made. It provides that the text of MLI 4(1) would replace the existing provision of CTA where all parties have made such a notification. In all other cases, the provisions of the CTA would be superseded by the text of MLI 4(1) only to the extent that those provisions are incompatible with MLI 4(1).

4.4 If both the parties to the CTA notify the same Article number of the CTA, the text of MLI 4(1) would replace the existing text of such Article. Otherwise, the text of MLI 4(1) would supersede the text of the CTA only to the extent that those provisions are incompatible with MLI 4(1). The latter situation may arise, for example, when there is a mismatch in the notification of Articles by the parties.

4.5 In the Indian context, the applicability of MLI 4 is as per the following table:

Row Labels Count of Article 4
A.4(3) would be replaced by Article 4(1). 22
Article 4 would not apply. 34
The last sentence of Article 4(1) would be replaced with the text described in Article 4(3)(e). A.4(2) would be replaced by Article 4(1). 1
Japan

The last sentence of Article 4(1) would be replaced with the text described in Article 4(3)(e). A.4(3) would be replaced by Article 4(1).

1

3

Australia

Fiji
Indonesia

1

1

1

Grand Total 60

4.6 As may be seen from the above table, there is no notification mismatch. Therefore, there is no compatibility issue.

4.7 MLI 4(1) deals with cases of persons other than individuals. However, some CTAs may contain a common tie-breaker test in respect of both individuals and non-individuals. In such a case, Paragraph 52 of the Explanatory Statement to the MLI observes that where a single tie-breaker rule exists in the tax treaty for both individuals and persons other than individuals, the text of MLI 4(1) shall modify only that portion of the rule which deals with determination of residence for persons other than individuals. In other words, that portion of the tie-breaker rule dealing with individuals would remain unaltered or unaffected by MLI 4(1). One such example is Article 4(2) of the Indo-Japan DTAA. One can observe from the synthesised text of the Indo-Japan DTAA that the text of Article 4(2) would remain modified by the text of MLI 4(1) only to the extent that it deals with tie-breaker tests in the case of non-individuals.

5. We can understand the application of compatibility clauses with reference to MLI 6:

5.1 MLI 6(2) provides that the text of MLI 6(1) would apply in place of or in the absence of the preamble language of the Covered Tax Agreement referring to an intent to eliminate double taxation, whether or not that language also refers to the intent not to create opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation.

5.2 Paragraph 81 of the Explanatory Statement to the MLI explains that the preamble text in MLI 6(1) replaces the existing preamble language of CTAs that refers to an intent to eliminate double taxation (whether or not that language also refers to an intent not to create opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation), or is added to the preamble of CTAs where such language does not exist in the preamble of the Covered Tax Agreements.

5.3 MLI 6(5) provides that each party shall notify the Depository of whether each of its CTAs, other than those that are within the scope of a reservation under MLI 6(4), contains preamble language described in MLI 6(2), and if so, the text of the relevant preamble paragraph. Where all contracting jurisdictions have made such a notification with respect to the preamble language, such preamble language shall be replaced by the text described in MLI 6(1). In other cases the text described in MLI 6(1) shall be included in addition to the existing preamble language.

5.4 It may be noted that India has not made a reservation under MLI 6(4). India has also not made any notification under MLI 6(5). Other contracting states may have notified the existing preamble texts. For example, France has notified the existing preamble text with its treaty with India. Thus, there is a notification mismatch (i.e., India has not notified while France has notified). In such a case, the text of MLI 6(1) being a minimum standard would be added to the existing preamble text contained in the CTAs.

5.5 We may also refer to some of the following CTAs of India where the text of MLI 6(1) has been added to the text of the CTA:

5.5.1 Indo-Luxembourg DTAA:

DTAA LUXEMBOURG – Preamble – Relevant Extract
Existing The Government of the Republic of India and the Government of the Grand Duchy of Luxembourg, desiring to conclude an Agreement for the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income and on capital and with a view to promoting economic co-operation between the two countries, have agreed as follows:
Added ‘Intending to eliminate double taxation with respect to the taxes covered by this agreement without creating opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion or avoidance (including through treaty-shopping arrangements aimed at obtaining reliefs provided in this agreement for the indirect benefit of residents of third jurisdictions),’

5.5.2 Indo-Japanese DTAA:

DTAA JAPAN – Preamble – Relevant Extract
Existing The Government of Japan and the Government of the Republic of India,

Desiring to conclude a new Convention for the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income,

have agreed as follows:

Added ‘Intending to eliminate double taxation with respect to the taxes covered by this agreement without creating opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion or avoidance (including through treaty-shopping arrangements aimed at obtaining reliefs provided in this agreement for the indirect benefit of residents of third jurisdictions),’

  1. RESERVATION

    1. It would be pertinent to note that the MLI cannot impinge upon the sovereign taxing rights of a contracting jurisdiction.

2. Thus, where a substantial provision of the MLI does not reflect a minimum standard, a party (contracting jurisdiction) is given the flexibility to opt out of the provision entirely, or in some cases partly.

3. Reservation means a party opts out of a provision of the MLI. When reserved, the relevant provision of the MLI so reserved would not amend the CTA. A reservation of an MLI provision would thus mean the CTA provision applies as it is. More and more of reservation means less and less of MLI affecting the CTA.

4. However, a reservation is not permitted for a minimum standard unless the CTAs contain clauses which meet the minimum standard. This has been dealt with in Paragraphs E6-E11 above.

5. It may be noted that MLI 28 deals with reservations. MLI 28(5) provides that reservations shall generally be made at the time of signature or when depositing the instrument of ratification, acceptance or approval, subject to certain exceptions. After such deposit, no further reservation is permissible. This would prevent further dilution of the impact of MLI by subsequent reservations.

6. At the same time, MLI 28(9) permits a party to withdraw a reservation made earlier at any time or to replace it with a more limited reservation. This would mean that it is permissible to further enhance the impact of MLI by subsequent withdrawal of reservations.

7. On reservation, in the Indian context, an example is the reservation made by India under MLI 3(5)(a). By virtue of this, India has reserved its right for MLI 3 not to apply in entirety to its CTAs. Thus, irrespective of whether contracting jurisdictions choose to apply MLI 3 qua India, the provisions of MLI 3 would not amend the provisions of India’s CTAs.

8. Consider the impact of reservation under MLI 12(4) by Australia on Article 5(PE) of the Indo-Australia DTAA. Though India has notified the relevant article numbers of the Indo-Australia DTAA under provisions of MLI 12(5) and MLI 12(6), Article 5 of the Indo-Australia DTAA would remain unamended by MLI 12 as Australia has reserved the application of MLI 12 in its entirety with respect to all its CTAs.

9. A party cannot make a reservation with respect to a particular CTA. It has to either be across-the-board or with respect to a subset of CTAs based on an objective criterion. This has been taken note of at Page 5 of the Explanatory Statement to the MLI. In other words, reservations cannot be country-centric but must be parameter-centric.

10. A country may still achieve the desired result in certain cases in light of specific reservation clauses. One such example could be of MLI 4(3)(f) which enables a party to reserve the right for MLI 4 not to apply in its entirety to those of its CTAs where the other party to the CTA has opted for MLI 4(3)(e). Thus, where a reservation is made under MLI 4(3)(f) it would only seek to target those treaties where the treaty partners exercise option under MLI 4(3)(e).

11. It may be noted that qua India, three countries, namely, Australia, Fiji and Indonesia, have exercised reservation under MLI 4(3)(e). If India wished it could have exercised reservation under MLI 4(3)(f). However, India has not chosen to make such a reservation.

H. NOTIFICATION

  • Notification represents an expression of choice of option by a party to the MLI or it ensures clarity about existing provisions that are within the scope of compatibility clauses.

2. This is clear from Page 11 of the FAQs to the MLI which provides that it is the information submitted to the Depository to ensure clarity and transparency on the application of alternative or optional provisions of the MLI and on the application of provisions of the MLI, and on the provisions that supersede or modify specific types of existing provisions of a CTA.

3. Notification is thus a communication by a contracting state who is party to the MLI. Notifications are issued for expressing reservations or exercising options or indicating the provisions of CTA to be amended by MLI.

I. INDIA’S MLI POSITION AS ON 18TH FEBRUARY, 2021

  1. India’s MLI position as per the MLI Matching Database available on the OECD Website6 stands as follows:
Particulars Count of countries
Agreements that would be CTAs:
1. Notification mismatch. Need to check whether both jurisdictions have identified the same agreement 10
2. The agreement would be CTA with an amending instrument in force:

 

Austria

Belgium

Morocco

Spain

4
3. The agreement would be a CTA 46
Sub-total (A) = 1 + 2 + 3 60
Agreements that would not be CTAs:
4. The agreement would not be a CTA because Germany has not included it in its notification 1
5. The agreement would not be a CTA because Hong Kong (China) has not included it in its notification 1
6. The agreement would not be a CTA because Mauritius has not included it in its notification 1
7. The agreement would not be a CTA because neither jurisdiction has included it in its notification 28
8. The agreement would not be a CTA because neither jurisdiction has included it in its notification

 

Bahrain

1
9. The agreement would not be a CTA because Oman has not included it in its notification 1
10. The agreement would not be a CTA because Switzerland has not included it in its notification 1
Sub-total (B) = (4) + (5) + (6) + (7) + (8) + (9) + (10) 34
Total (A) + (B) 94
  1. As per MLI 2(1)(a)(ii), in order for a tax treaty to be a CTA, it will have to be notified by each party to such treaty. From the above table it is clear that in the case of ten tax treaties there seems to be a notification mismatch as to the relevant tax treaty sought to be modified by the MLI. Thus, one will have to check whether both India and the corresponding treaty partner have notified the same treaty sought to be modified by the MLI before applying the MLI.

6   https://www.oecd.org/tax/treaties/mli-matching-database.htm#:~:text=MLI%20Matching%20Database%20(beta)%20The%20Multilateral%20Convention%20to,MLI%20by%20matching%20information%20from%20Signatories’%20MLI%20Positions.

  1. CONCLUSION

MLI is a reality and is in effect or is to come into effect in respect of treaties with 42 jurisdictions qua India. While examining the tax consequences under the treaty one will have to be mindful of the provisions of the MLI and the interaction between the provisions of the MLI and the provisions of the treaty. In doing so, one will have to refer to the compatibility clauses. One may also have to refer to the Explanatory Statement to the MLI which would explain each provision of the MLI and the object behind such insertion, the BEPS Actions which have formed the basis for conclusion of the MLI, the Frequently Asked Questions on MLI, the OECD Model Tax Conventions and Commentaries thereon.

MLI SERIES ANTI-TAX AVOIDANCE MEASURES FOR CAPITAL GAINS: ARTICLE 9 OF MLI

(This is the third article in the MLI series that started in April, 2021)

This article in the on-going series on the Multilateral Instrument (MLI) focuses on Article 9 of the MLI, which brings in anti-tax avoidance measures related to capital gains earned by sale of immovable property through indirect means.

A break-up of the various DTAAs signed by India, whether or not modified by the MLI, appears later in this article along with what a Chartered Accountant needs to keep in mind in the post-MLI scenario. However, the first requirement is to understand the provisions and what changes have been brought about by them. Owing to a multitude of options and different ways in which they can apply, the language of Article 9 of the MLI is quite difficult to decipher, leave alone explain. Therefore, we have attempted to simplify the provisions with the help of a story, a narrative that can provide a basic understanding about the concepts. The reader should refer to the respective DTAAs and the application of the MLI on those DTAAs before forming any opinion.

1. ‘The Story’
Mr. A is a wealthy Australian businessman with interests in real estate around the world, including India. He wants to sell shares in an Australian Company and therefore approaches his tax consultant, Mr. Smart, to get an opinion on his tax liabilities. Here is the transcript of a conversation between Mr. A and Mr. Smart:

Mr. A – Hi, did you calculate my taxes on the sale of shares?

Mr. Smart – Yes, I did. And for your information, we also have to pay tax in India.

Mr. A – Why in India? This company is incorporated in Australia. What does India have to do with it?
Mr. Smart – Well, you’re right. Capital gains on transfer of shares of a company are generally taxed in the country of its incorporation which in this case is Australia. However, your company’s value is majorly derived from that immovable property you had once purchased in India1. Therefore, as per the Indian tax laws, read with Article 13(4) of the India-Australia Treaty, India has a right to tax such shares. Let me read out the excerpt of the India-Australia Treaty…

Article 13(4) reads: ‘Income or gains derived from the alienation of shares or comparable interests in a company, the assets of which consist wholly or principally of real property referred to in Article 6 and, as provided in that Article, situated in one of the Contracting States, may be taxed in that State’.

Mr. A – Ah! Though I know that I will get credit for those taxes paid against my Australian taxes, but I do not want the hassle of paying tax in another country. Is there any way out? You said that the company should derive value wholly or principally from the immovable property. Could we plan in a manner that we contribute other assets, shortly before the sale of the shares, to overcome this? That would dilute the proportion of the value of the shares that is derived from immovable property situated in India. For example, if my company has a total asset size of AUD 100, which currently includes AUD 90 of immovable property in India, the gain on the sale of such company’s shares would be taxable in India. However, just before such sale, can I infuse AUD 100 in the company and park it in a fixed deposit? Then, the share of immovable property in my company’s value will be reduced to 45% and the transaction of such sale of shares would be taxed only in the state of incorporation of the company (Australia) and not in the state where the immovable property is situated (India).

Mr. Smart – Where the businessman leads, the taxman follows! Well, this planning might have worked if you would have come to me before 1st April, 2020. Knowing that many taxpayers plan their affairs in such a manner, the India-Australia Treaty has to be read along with the Multilateral Instrument which now reads as follows:

The following paragraph 1 of Article 9 of the MLI
applies to paragraph 4 of Article 13 of this agreement:

ARTICLE 9 OF THE MLI – CAPITAL GAINS FROM ALIENATION OF SHARES
OR INTERESTS OF ENTITIES DERIVING THEIR VALUE PRINCIPALLY FROM IMMOVABLE
PROPERTY

Paragraph 4 of Article 13 of the agreement:

(a)

shall apply if the relevant value threshold is met at any time during
the 365 days preceding the alienation
; and

(b)

shall apply to shares or comparable interests, such as
interests in a partnership or trust (to the extent that such shares or
interests are not already covered), in addition to any shares or rights
already covered by the provisions of the agreement

______________________________________________________________
1 Readers are requested to place FEMA issues aside for this story

As per clause (a), keeping money in a fixed deposit or any other asset for a short period of time would not work. If at any point of time during the preceding 365 days (period threshold), your company majorly derives value (proportion threshold) from immovable property situated in India, then the sales of shares would be taxable in India (source country).

Mr. A – Oh! Oh! They have plugged this loophole. I also see that in clause (b) comparable interest has been added. Does that mean that even if I hold immovable property in LLP, partnership firms, trust or any other similar forms, selling of those shares would also be under the ambit of India’s (source country) taxation?

Mr. Smart – You catch up really fast! Yes, that’s the case.
Mr. A – But how did this treaty change so quickly? Normally, treaty negotiations continue for decades. And till the time the taxman decides on taxing rights, technology and the way of doing business have already moved ahead.
Mr. Smart – It seems you don’t really catch up fast enough. You missed a small word in our conversation. I said that the treaty has to be read with the MLI, i.e., Multilateral Instrument, which has been signed by many countries [contracting jurisdictions (‘CJ’)] to prevent double non-taxation, or treaty abuse, or treaty-shopping arrangements. This way, instead of long bilateral negotiations, treaties could quickly be adapted to changes.
Mr. A – That’s interesting, so now all the signatory countries would have similar treaties. Things would become so simple in cross-border trade. Isn’t it?
Mr. Smart – I wish I could say that. See, this MLI is like a holy book. Every time you read it, you get a new perspective, or a new interpretation in technical terms. It is not that all the countries subscribe to one treaty, there are multiple options to choose from.
Mr. A – Options?
 
Mr. Smart – Let me explain. Imagine a dinner party which serves a lavish buffet. Not every guest is expected to talk to or sit with everyone. Only if there is mutual consent between two or more guests may they sit together. Even when they are sitting together, not all of them are expected to eat the same food. Everyone can pick their choices and only by mutual consent can they eat the same food together.

The same is true with MLI. You have various options on the menu. Whenever a country notifies that MLI should be applied to its treaty with another country, it is only if the other country reciprocates equivocally would their treaty be read with MLI (sit together). Similarly, even when the countries have decided that the treaty position will change, they still have options to not change all clauses and selectively they can choose and pick their options (eat together the same food).

Mr. A – Ok, that sounds delicious. What kind of options the countries have in case of such transaction of shares having underlying immovable property in another country?

Mr. Smart – You really want to understand that! This will take some time.
Mr. A – I am all ears. Go on
.
Mr. Smart – So any of the two countries who are MLI signatories have two broad options to choose from. Either to be governed by Article 9(1) or by Article 9(4). While article 9(4) prescribes the period threshold at a standard 50%, Article 9(1) allows countries to decide the relevant threshold or even usage of more general terms such as ‘the principal part’, ‘the greater part’, ‘mainly’, ‘wholly’, ‘principally’, ‘primarily’, etc.

Further, Article 9(1) provides a choice for inclusion / exclusion of the comparable interest condition [vide para 6(c)], whereas Article 9(4) makes comparable interest an integral and inseparable part of it. A country can select Article 9(4) or Article 9(1), but both cannot exist at the same time as they are alternatives to each other.

The Articles read as follows:
Article 9(1)
Provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement providing that gains derived by a resident of a Contracting Jurisdiction from the alienation of shares or other rights of participation in an entity may be taxed in the other Contracting Jurisdiction provided that these shares or rights derived more than a certain part of their value from immovable property (real property) situated in that other Contracting Jurisdiction (or provided that more than a certain part of the property of the entity consists of such immovable property (real property):

a. shall apply if the relevant value threshold is met at any time during the 365 days preceding the alienation; and
b. shall apply to shares or comparable interests, such as interests in a partnership or trust (to the extent that such shares or interests are not already covered) in addition to any shares or rights already covered by the provisions.’

Article 9(4)
‘For purposes of a Covered Tax Agreement, gains derived by a resident of a Contracting Jurisdiction from the alienation of shares or comparable interests, such as interests in a partnership or trust, may be taxed in the other Contracting Jurisdiction if, at any time during the 365 days preceding the alienation these shares or comparable interests derived more than 50 per cent of their value directly or indirectly from immovable property (real property) situated in that other Contracting Jurisdiction.’

Mr. A – So only two options to choose from. That is not so complex.

 
Mr. Smart – You jumped the gun. I wish it was that simple. A country may reserve the right for provisions of the MLI to not apply to its tax treaties in their entirety or a subset of its tax treaties, i.e., it may choose not to have dinner with all or a select group of other guests. Further, once the countries have chosen to be governed by Article 9, both the countries may decide on the following options:

1. Where both countries choose to apply the 365-day period threshold coupled with value threshold at a standard 50% under Article 9(4), then in such a case the more flexible option for anti-tax avoidance tests under Article 9(1) would not apply. [Article 9(8)]

2. However, even after choosing to apply Article 9(4) as above, a country may choose not to apply Article 9(4) to treaties with certain select countries. [Article 9(6)(f)] In that case, nothing changes for treaties with these countries and the treaty reads as it was pre-MLI.

3. Where no such reservation is made as per the above option, Article 9(4) applies. However, the countries need to choose which exact provision does Article 9(4) apply to in their existing Covered Tax Agreements. [Article 9(8)] If the other country also cites the same provision, then the language of the existing provision between treaties of both countries changes as per Article 9(4).

4. In the case where the same provision is not notified by the other country, even then Article 9(4) applies – as the countries have already agreed to apply it as per point No. 1 above. But in such a case, the wording of Article 9(4) would supersede the existing provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement to the extent it is incompatible with the present text of the Agreement. Thus, for example, if the Covered Tax Agreement at present cites a period threshold of only 60 days, as both countries have accepted to apply article 9(4), but not notified the same provision, the 365-day threshold will supersede the 60-day threshold.

5. Now, consider a situation where the countries notify that they do not want to apply the more flexible options under Article 9(1) to their treaties; and have also chosen not to apply the provision as per Article 9(4) – then in such a case there will be no change at all in their treaty language due to the provisions of Article 9 of the MLI. [Article 9(6)(a)] In essence, the anti-tax avoidance tests would not be part of the treaty.

6. Even where a country has chosen to apply Article 9(1), it can make a choice of applying only one of the anti-tax avoidance mechanisms, i.e., either the time threshold test or the comparable interest condition; or both. [Para 9(6)(b) to (e)] The other country can also make a similar choice and only the matching choices will get implemented. Thus, where a country chooses to apply both mechanisms, but the other country chooses to apply only the time threshold test, then only the time threshold test gets matched.

7. To the extent the choices made in respect of either or both of the mechanisms matches between both countries, the countries next need to specify which provision under their Covered Tax Agreement stands modified. [Article 9(7)] If the provision specified by both countries does not match, then the treaty language stands unchanged. Thus, even after choices have been made as per Article 9(6), such choices would apply only if the same provisions are earmarked by both countries for applying the changes.

So, as I said earlier, it is like even if the countries decide to sit at one dinner table, they can still reserve their right to not eat certain food items from the menu.

Mr. A – Gosh! That’s one dinner party I don’t want to be invited to. That’s too much to take in one day. As many of my friends the world over have properties in India, can you send me a note on the application of Article 9 with respect to India?

Mr. Smart – Sure, will do that. Have a nice day.
Mr. A – You, too, and keep reading ‘Multi-Level Inception’ (MLI). It’s really as thrilling and confusing as any of Christopher Nolan’s movies and in the end all people may have their own different opinions!
Mr. Smart – Ha, ha! Yes, it is!

2. Article 9 in the Indian?context

As can be seen from the above write-up, Article 9 has various permutations and combinations spelt out to deal with the tax avoidance schemes it seeks to target. Their relevance with respect to Indian treaties is as under:
* India has opted to apply Article 9(4). So where other Contracting Jurisdictions have also made such a notification, Article 9(4) will apply.
* In treaties, where a provision similar to Article 9(1) is already present, India has opted for application?of Article?9(1).
* The Indian position as on 30th?March, 2021 has been tabulated for ease of reference. Please do check the updated position while applying the same in practice.?Currently, India has DTAAs with 95 countries / territories and their position post-MLI is as under:

Conditions

Countries covered

No. of countries

No change in the existing
provision of the treaty due to MLI

Countries not signatories to MLI

Bangladesh, Belarus, Bhutan, Botswana, Brazil, Ethiopia, Kyrgyz
Republic, Libya, Mongolia, Montenegro, Mozambique, Myanmar, Namibia, Nepal,
Philippines, Sri Lanka, Sudan, Syrian Arab Republic, Taipei, Tajikistan,
Tanzania, Thailand, Trinidad and Tobago, Turkmenistan, Uganda, USA,
Uzbekistan, Vietnam, Zambia

29

Countries which have no CTA with India

China, Germany, Hong Kong, Mauritius, Oman, Switzerland

6

Where both the CJs didn’t agree upon the application of the
provision either by reservation or by notification

Albania, Austria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Finland, Georgia,
Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Jordan, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia,
Norway, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Singapore, South Korea, Sweden, United Arab
Emirates, United Kingdom

22

Existing provision changed
due to MLI

Treaties where Article 9(4) is applied

Croatia, Denmark, Estonia, France, Indonesia, Ireland, Israel,
Kazakhstan, New Zealand, Poland, Portuguese Republic, Serbia, Slovak
Republic,

16

[Continued]

 

– which have similar provision to Article 13(4) – either
replaced or supersede the existing provision

Slovenia, Ukraine, Oriental Republic of Uruguay

 

Treaties where Article 9(4) is applied – which don’t have
similar provision to Article 13(4) – additional provision added

Canada, Japan, Malta, Russia, UAR (Egypt)

5

Treaties where Article 9(1) applied (both comparable interest
and testing period applied)

Australia,?Netherlands

2

Treaties where only comparable interest condition applied from
Article 9(1)

Belgium

1

Treaties whose conditions of
MLI are provisional

Not yet deposited ratified MLI instruments

Armenia, Bulgaria, Columbia, Fiji, Italy, Kenya, Kuwait,
Macedonia, Mexico, Morocco, Romania, South Africa, Spain, Turkey

14

Total

95

3. Applicability to transactions
Finally, what are the points to be taken care of by a Chartered Accountant while reviewing the application of Article 9 of the MLI to specific transactions? These are as under:

a. Review of transaction – Check whether foreign company’s shares derive value from Indian immovable property? If yes, then the transaction falls in the scope of this Article.
b. Review of respective DTAA – Check whether India’s DTAA with country of residence has various thresholds for attribution of taxation rights of such shares in India. If yes, whether the transaction meets the threshold?
c. Review of MLI – Check whether the country of residence has notified the application of Article 9. If yes, then apply the provisions as per the matching principle explained above. Synthesised text2, if available, could be used for ease of interpretation.

4. Authors’ remarks
1) A country-specific example (that of Australia) has been taken here to make the article practical and easy to understand. Specific country positions need to be understood for in-depth analysis.
2) Definition ambiguity: Immovable property is not defined by the DTAA and by MLI only additional description provided as real property; therefore, one needs to see the definition of immovable property / real property from domestic law.
3) Article 9(6) has given various combinations of reservations to the countries, thereby providing flexibility but also leading to complexity when applying the provision.
4) MLI’s position qua India indicates that most Contracting Jurisdictions have opted out of this Article, thereby choosing to stick to the existing position.
5) A Chartered Accountant while issuing a certificate u/s 195 on the payment made by a buyer, needs to consider the Act, DTAA and MLI in combination before considering the final tax liability.

CONCLUSION

As can be seen from the above, applying a simple anti-tax avoidance measure like Article 9 of the MLI becomes complex when it is sought to be made at one go through the MLI. A professional applying the provisions must bear in mind the intricacies and read the treaty correctly before going ahead with a transaction which involves Article 9 of the MLI.

______________________________________________________________
2 https://incometaxindia.gov.in/Pages/international-taxation/dtaa.aspx – select
DTAA Type as Synthesised text

MLI SERIES -ARTICLE 10 – ANTI-ABUSE RULE FOR PEs SITUATED IN THIRD JURISDICTIONS (Part 2)

In the first part of this article (BCAJ, December, 2021), the authors covered the background for the introduction of this anti-avoidance rule, its broad structure, some of the issues arising in interpretation of the said rule and the interplay of this rule with the other articles of the MLI and other anti-avoidance measures. In this second part, they analyse some practical challenges arising on account of the difference in the tax rates of the jurisdictions involved and the impact of the anti-avoidance rule on India. This part shall also cover the difference between Article 10 of the MLI and the BEPS Action Plan 6 Report on the basis of which the rule was incorporated in the MLI and Article 29 of the OECD Model

1. DIFFERENCE IN LANGUAGE IN BEPS ACTION 6 AND MLI
As mentioned in the first part of this article, there are certain differences between the suggested language in the final report of the BEPS Action Plan 6 and that in Article 10 of the MLI.

The first major difference is in respect of the implication of the application of the Article. In case Article 10 of the MLI applies, the Source State (State S) shall not be restricted by the DTAA and can tax the said income as per the domestic tax law. The draft language in the BEPS Action Report provided that in case the anti-abuse provisions apply, the Source State (State S) can tax income other than dividends, interest or royalties under the domestic tax law. In respect of the specified income, i.e., dividends, interest or royalties, the tax to be charged by the Source State would be restricted to a rate to be determined.

The other difference is in respect of the exemption from application of the anti-abuse rule. This difference is further explained in para 4 of this article.

Another difference between the BEPS Action Plan 6 report and Article 10 of the MLI is in respect of the conditions for triggering of the rule. Article 10 of the MLI applies if the income is exempt in State R and the tax rate in State PE is lower than 60% of the tax rate in State R. The BEPS Report had provided another optional language which can be used, wherein State S can deny the benefits in the treaty if the tax rate in State PE is lower than 60% of the tax rate in State R. In other words, under this optional language the condition that the income should be exempt in State R was not required to be triggered to apply the rule. Similar language has also been provided in the OECD Model Commentary as an optional language that countries can bilaterally negotiate.

While Article 29 of the OECD Model is largely similar to Article 10 of the MLI, there are two significant differences. The first one is discussed in the above paragraph. Another difference is in respect of the 60% threshold. The OECD Model provides that if the tax rate in State PE is less than 60% of the tax rate in State R, the rule would not apply if the tax rate in State PE is higher than a rate which is to be bilaterally agreed.

2. ISSUES ARISING ON ACCOUNT OF DIFFERENCE IN TAX RATES IN STATE PE AND STATE R
Article 10(1) of the MLI provides that in certain circumstances, benefit of the S-R DTAA shall not be available to any item of income on which the tax in State PE is less than 60% of the tax that would be imposed in the State R on that item of income if that PE were situated in State R.

Therefore, the article requires one to first hypothesise a PE of the taxpayer (A Co) in State R and if the rate of tax in State PE on that item of income is less than 60% of the tax on the same item of income in State R, then the benefit of the R-S DTAA shall not be available in State S.

Hypothesising a PE of the taxpayer in State R can result in various issues, some of which are discussed below.

2.1 Which tax rate is to be considered?
This issue is explained by way of an example. Let us assume gross income of 100, expenses of 80 and the tax rate in State R is 30%, the general corporate tax rate on PE in State PE is 20% but due to certain incentives provided by State PE, the tax on income from financing activities is 10%. In such a scenario, the question is should one compare the 30% rate in State R with 20% in State PE or with the actual tax rate of 10% in State PE? If one takes a view that the headline tax rate is to be considered, Article 10 of the MLI may not have an impact as the tax rate in State PE (20%) is more than 60% of the tax rate in State R (30%).

However, in the view of the authors, as Article 10(1) of the MLI refers to tax on an ‘item of income’, one would need to look at the effective tax rate of 10% in this case in State PE and compare the same with that in State R. This view is keeping in mind the objective of the provisions that the State S should not give up its right of taxation to the State R unless the income is taxed by the PE State at a minimum of 60% of the tax which would have been levied in the State R.

A similar view has also been provided in para 166 of the OECD Commentary on Article 29 wherein the mechanism provides that one should compare the ratio of the tax applicable to the net profit of the PE in both states – State PE as well as State R.

2.2 What would be the case if there is a loss in the State PE?
Another issue which arises is what would be the case if there is a loss in a particular year in the State PE. Let us assume the following facts:

Particulars

Year
1

Year
2

Gross income of the PE

100

100

Deductible expenses

120

90

Net taxable income of PE (before set-off of loss)

(20)

30

Tax rate in State PE

20%

Tax rate in State R

30%

In the above case, in Year 1, the tax paid in State PE is Nil on account of the loss. Assuming that the mode of claiming deduction, etc., and the amount of deduction in State R is similar to that in State PE (refer para 3.3.4 for issues arising on account of difference in the mode of computation in both the jurisdictions), no income is taxed in State R and therefore one may be able to argue that in Year 1 Article 10 of the MLI is not triggered as the rate of tax in State PE is more than 60% of the rate of tax in State R on the same item of income.

Now, in Year 2 in State PE the tax payable would be 2 (20% of 10) as one would reduce the loss brought forward from Year 1 while computing the income of Year 2. This would be possible even in the absence of a specific provision in the domestic tax law of State PE on account of Article 24 of the State R-State PE DTAA, dealing with Non-Discrimination, which provides that a PE in a jurisdiction should be taxed in the same manner as a resident of the said jurisdiction1. Now, in State R, assuming that the taxpayer has other income as well, no set-off of loss would be possible as the income of a resident is taxed on a net basis (i.e., by aggregating the income of any PE in that State as well as the head office in that State) and, therefore, there is no loss brought forward. In such a case, the tax paid in State R in Year 2 would be 9 (30% of 30) and as the tax paid in State PE is less than 60% of the tax paid in State R, Article 10 of MLI could trigger even though the tax rate on the item of income in State PE (20%) is more than 60% of the tax rate on the said item of income in State R (30%).

However, in the said fact pattern, in the view of the authors, Article 10 of the MLI should not trigger as the difference is only on account of the losses incurred in State PE and due to the fact that other income earned in State R is used to set-off the loss of the PE in Year 1, resulting in no carry forward of the loss.

Alternatively, a better view of the matter would be to hypothesise the PE as a separate entity in State R and then compare the tax payable in State R and State PE. This view is in line with the objective of the provisions, which is to deny treaty benefits if the tax rate in State PE is less than 60% of the tax rate in State R on that item of income.

___________________________________________________________________
1 Refer para 40(c) of the OECD Commentary on Article 24

2.3 Whether tax credit in State PE or State R of taxes paid in State S to be considered?
The question arises whether one should compare the taxes in State R and State PE or should one ignore the tax credit for such comparison. Let us consider the following illustration:

Particulars

Amount

Gross amount

100

Expenses deductible

80

Net profit attributable to PE

20

Tax rate in State PE

20%

Tax rate in State R

30%

Tax rate as per State S-State PE DTAA

10%

Tax rate as per State S-State R DTAA

10%

In the above illustration, if one does not consider the tax credit, the tax rate in State PE (20%) is more than 60% of the tax rate in State R (30%) and therefore Article 10 of the MLI should not be triggered. However, assuming that State PE applies the Non-Discrimination article as mentioned in the first part of this article, and grants credit for the taxes paid in State S, the actual tax paid in State PE would be 2.

Further, while State R would actually not provide any tax credit (as it follows the exemption method), when one hypothesises a PE in State R, tax credit for taxes paid under the R-S DTAA would also be considered. In such a scenario, the hypothetical tax payable in State R after tax credit would be 4 and if one now compares the taxes in State PE (2) with that of State R (4), Article 10 of the MLI could be triggered.

However, in the view of the authors, given the objective of the provisions, the comparison should be in respect of the taxes before the tax credit as one is trying to evaluate if the tax in State PE is substantially lower than the tax in State R. One may also draw a similar conclusion from para 166 of the OECD Commentary on Article 29 which refers to ‘tax that applies’ to the relevant item of income and not tax paid.

2.4 Issue relating to difference in the mode of computation of income in State R vs. in State PE
Given that each country has a different set of rules for computing income, there may be a difference in the tax applicable on an item of income on account of the difference in the mode of computation in these jurisdictions.

Let us first take an illustration wherein the income is taxed on a net basis in State PE, but on gross basis in State R. This could be possible, say in the case of dividend received from a foreign company and taxed on gross basis akin to section 115BBD of the Act. The facts of the illustration are as follows:

Particulars

Amount

Gross amount

100

Expenses deductible

80

Net profit attributable to PE

20

Tax rate in State PE

20%

Tax rate in State R

10% on gross income

In the above illustration, the tax payable in State PE would be 4 (20% of 20). On the other hand, if one hypothesises a PE in State R, given that State R taxes the income on gross basis (irrespective of whether the resident has a PE in the Residence State or not), the hypothetical tax payable in State R would be 10 (10% of 100).

In such a scenario, even though the headline tax rate in State PE is in fact higher than the tax rate in State R, given that State PE taxes the PE on a net basis whereas State R taxes the income on gross basis, Article 10 of the MLI could be triggered as the tax applicable on the item of income in State PE (4) is less than that applicable in State R (10).

Another issue arises where the amount of deduction allowable is different in both the jurisdictions. Let us take an illustration wherein the facts are as follows:

Particulars

Amount
in State PE

Amount
in State R

Gross amount

100

100

Expenses deductible

80

60

Net profit attributable to PE

20

40

Tax rate

20%

30%

In the above illustration, the tax payable in State PE is 4 (20% of 20) whereas the tax payable in State R if the PE was in State R is 12 (30% of 40). Therefore, even though the headline tax rate in State PE (20%) is more than 60% of that in State R (30%), Article 10 of the MLI would trigger as one needs to compare the tax applicable on an item of income in accordance with the provisions applicable in the respective jurisdictions.

This is also in line with the objective of the provisions.

3. PARA 2 OF ARTICLE 10 OF MLI – WHAT IS CONSIDERED AS ACTIVE CONDUCT OF BUSINESS
Para 2 of Article 10 of the MLI provides that the anti-abuse provisions of Article 10 of the MLI shall not apply if the income is derived in connection with or is incidental to the active conduct of a business carried out through the PE. The exception to the exemption is the business of making, managing or simply holding investments for the enterprise’s own account. However, if the business of making, managing or holding investments represents banking, insurance or securities activities carried on by a bank, insurance enterprise or registered securities dealer, respectively, it would be covered under the exemption from the application of the anti-abuse rules.

Paras 167, 74, 75 and 76 of OECD Commentary on Article 29 provide some guidance on what would be considered as income derived in connection with or incidental to the active conduct of business. The Commentary provides that whether an item of income is derived in connection with active business it must be determined on the basis of the facts and circumstances of the case.

Let us look at the following examples to understand whether income in the form of dividend, interest or royalty can be considered as derived in connection with the active conduct of business of the PE:
a. A Co, resident of State R, is in the business of trading securities through its office situated in State PE. As a part of the trading activity, it invests in shares of B Co, a company resident of State S, which pays dividends to A Co. Such dividends may be considered as income derived in connection with the active conduct of business by the PE of A Co in State PE and therefore the anti-abuse provisions in Article 10 would not apply.
b. Similar to the facts above except that instead of investing in shares, A Co invests in debt securities of B Co and trades in such debt securities… In such a scenario, interest earned by A Co may be considered as income derived in connection with the active conduct of the business by the PE of A Co.
c. A Co, a resident of State R, sets up a research and development centre in State PE. It licences the intangible arising out of such R&D to B Co, a company resident of State S, which pays royalty to A Co. Such royalty would be considered as income derived in connection with the active conduct of business by the PE of A Co in State PE.

The draft language in the final BEPS Action Plan 6 report also specifically exempted from the application of the anti-abuse provisions, royalties received as compensation for the use of, or the right to use, intangible property produced or developed by the enterprise through the PE. However, given that such an activity would in any case constitute an active conduct of business by the PE, such language is not provided in the final provisions in the MLI.

4. PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF MLI ARTICLE 10 FOR INDIA TREATIES
4.1 Treaties impacted
The Table below highlights the countries and their position with India in relation to applicability of Article 102:

Sr.
No.

Respective
countries

Particulars

Impact

1

1. Australia

2. Belgium

3. Bulgaria

4. Canada

5. Colombia

6. Croatia

7. Cyprus

8. Czech Republic

9. Egypt

10. Estonia

11. Finland

12. France

13. Georgia

14. Greece

15. Hungary

16. Iceland

17. Indonesia

18. Ireland

19. Italy

20. Jordan

21. Korea

22. Kuwait

23. Latvia

24. Lithuania

25. Luxembourg

26. Malaysia

27. Malta

28. Morocco

29. Norway

30. Poland

31. Portugal

32. Qatar

33. Saudi Arabia

34. Serbia

35. Singapore

36. South Africa

37. Sweden

38. Turkey

39. United Arab Emirates

40. United Kingdom

41. North Macedonia

India has not reserved rights for
Article 10 of MLI.

Other CJs have reserved the rights
for non-applicability of the provisions of Article 10 under paragraph 5(a)

Thus, Article 10 will not be
applicable in entirety

No change in the existing treaty

2

1. Andorra

2. Argentina

3. Bahrain

4. Barbados

11. Costa Rica

12. Côte d’Ivoire

13. Curaçao

14. Gabon

21. Nigeria

22. Pakistan

23. Panama

 

 

Not notified as CTA by both the CJs

MLI not applicable

2

(continued)

 

5. Belize

6. Bosnia and Herzegovina

7. Burkina Faso

8. Cameroon

9. China

10. Chile

(continued)

 

15. Guernsey

16. Isle of Man

17. Jamaica

18. Jersey

19. Liechtenstein

20. Monaco

 

(continued)

 

24. Papua New Guinea

25. Peru

26. San Marino

27. Senegal

28. Seychelles

29. Tunisia

 

 

 

3

1. Germany

2. Hong Kong

3. Mauritius

4. Oman

5. Switzerland

 

 

 

Not notified as CTA by other CJs

(Other CJ has not notified
its DTAA with India as CTA. Thus, MLI will not be applicable)

MLI not applicable

4

1. Bangladesh

2. Belarus

3. Bhutan

4. Botswana

5. Brazil

6. Ethiopia

7. Kyrgyz Republic

8. Libya

9. Macedonia

10. Mongolia

11. Montenegro

12. Mozambique

13. Myanmar

14. Namibia

15. Nepal

16. Philippines

17. Sri Lanka

18. Sudan

19. Syria

20. Tajikistan

21. Tanzania

22. Thailand

23. Trinidad & Tobago

24. Turkmenistan

25. Uganda

26. USA

27. Uzbekistan

28. Vietnam

29. Zambia

 

MLI not signed by other CJs

MLI not applicable

5

Iran

 

 

 

Not signed or notified as CTA by
India

MLI not applicable

6

1. Albania

2. Armenia

3. Austria

4. Denmark

5. Fiji

6. Japan

7. Kazakhstan

8. Kenya

9. Mexico

10. Netherlands

11. New Zealand

12. Romania

13. Russian Federation (Russia)

14. Slovak Republic

15. Slovenia

16. Spain

17. Ukraine

18. Uruguay

19. Israel

20. Namibia

 

 

Neither of the CJs have reserved right for non-applicability and
no date has been notified

MLI provisions applicable

Will supersede the existing provisions to the extent of
incompatibility

 

_________________________________________________________________
2 These details are updated as on September, 2021

4.2 India as a country of source
Article 10 of the MLI gives the Source State an unhindered right of taxing the income if certain conditions are triggered. As the Source State is denying the benefits of the DTAA, it is important to evaluate from a payer perspective whether the particular provision of the DTAA shall apply in the Source State or not.

Unlike the other TDS provisions in the Act, in most cases section 195 of the Act, in theory, results in the finality of the tax being paid to the Government in the case of payment to a non-resident.

Therefore, the Act places a significant onerous responsibility on the payer to ensure that the due tax is duly deducted u/s 195 of the Act in the case of payments to a non-resident. Keeping this in mind, it is therefore necessary for the payer to evaluate the application of Article 10 of the MLI before granting treaty benefits at the time of deduction of tax u/s 195 of the Act.

Generally, in the background of the application of MLI, a conservative view is to always approach the tax authorities u/s 195(2) or u/s 197 before making any payment. However, from a practical perspective, the same may not be feasible given the timelines for obtaining such a certificate.

On the other hand, while Article 10 of the MLI provides objective tests and does not contain subjective tests such as the Principal Purpose Test, there are certain practical challenges for a payer to apply these objective tests. The payer of the income is expected to analyse the following:
a. Whether the recipient has a PE in a third State;
b. Whether the amount paid by the payer is effectively connected to such PE in the third State;
c. Whether the Residence State exempts such profits of the PE;
d. Whether the tax rate in the third State of PE is less than 60% of the tax rate of the Residence State if such PE were situated in the Residence State.

The above questions would require the payer of income to interpret the tax laws of the third State in which the PE is constituted as well as the Residence State, which may not be possible. It may not be possible for the local consultant to interpret such foreign laws as well.

Therefore, it may be advisable for the payer to obtain a suitable declaration from the recipient while making such payment.

4.3 India as a country having PE
Prior to introduction of the MLI, Article 5 of the DTAA was referred to in order to establish the PE status. However, post introduction of the MLI, the PE status is governed by Articles 12 to 15 which are regarding PE status based on Action 7 of Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS).

Articles from 12 to 15 are not minimum standards. Thus, each country has an opportunity to reserve or notify applicability of these standards. The provisions of the above mentioned Articles widens the scope of PE as compared to that of the DTAA.

However, India has notified the provisions of Articles 12 to 15. Thus, in cases where the other country’s notification matches with India and India is a third state having PE, one will have to check the DTAA after giving effect to Articles 12 to 15 of the MLI.

However, Indian tax rates are very high, discouraging a potential abuse using India as a third state (State PE). Consequently, Article 10 is likely to have minimal applicability with India as a third state (State PE).

It is important to note that Article 10 does not, in any way, affect India’s right to tax the income attributable to the PE of the non-resident in India in accordance with the relevant DTAA.

4.4 India as a country of residence
As per the existing provisions of the DTAA, India has been following the credit method and not the exemption method. Further, India has reserved its rights regarding the applicability of Article 5 (Application of Methods for Elimination of Double Taxation) of the MLI.

Thus, in cases where India is a Resident State, paragraph 1 of Article 10 may not be of much relevance as India does not follow the exemption method.

5. CONCLUSION
Anti-abuse rules are necessary to prevent abuse of tax treaty provisions. However, when there are multiple anti-abuse rules under the Act as well as treaty, cohesive, coordinated and appropriate application of these anti-abuse rules becomes very necessary to avoid any uncertainty or hardships to the taxpayer. Rational interpretation of these anti-abuse provisions has become of utmost importance so that genuine business structures are not affected and stuck with litigations.

From a payer’s perspective, Article 10 of the MLI can have serious consequences. Further, as highlighted in the earlier paras, there are practical challenges a payer might face while evaluating the application of this Article, particularly as one would need to interpret the tax laws and treaties of other jurisdictions which may not always be possible. A practitioner who is certifying the remittances in Form 15CB may also need to evaluate the impact and, at the very least should seek a suitable declaration from the recipient of the income.

MLI SERIES -ARTICLE 10 – ANTI-ABUSE RULE FOR PEs SITUATED IN THIRD JURISDICTIONS (Part 1)

The authors of the earlier articles in the MLI Series have covered various facets of the Multilateral Instrument (‘MLI’) such as the background and application of the MLI and various other specific articles in the MLI relating to dual resident entities, treaty abuse, transparent entities and method of elimination of double taxation. In this two-part article, the authors attempt to analyse Article 10 of the MLI relating to the anti-abuse rule for Permanent Establishments (‘PEs’) situated in third jurisdictions and some of the intricacies related therein. The first part of this article lays down the background for the introduction of this anti-avoidance rule, the broad structure of the rule, some of the issues arising in its interpretation and the interplay of this rule with the other articles of the MLI and other anti-avoidance measures.

1. BACKGROUND
At the outset, one admits that very limited literature is available in respect of this anti-abuse rule as most discussions on the MLI, at least in the Indian context, focus on the Principal Purpose Test (‘PPT’) and the amendments to the rules relating to the constitution of a PE. However, the anti-abuse rule for PEs situated in third jurisdictions can have significant implications, especially for an Indian payer undertaking compliance u/s 195 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’), given the amount of information required to apply this rule.

Under this rule, the Source State can deny treaty benefits to taxpayers on certain conditions being triggered. Such treaty benefits can be in the form of a lower rate of tax (as in the case of dividends, royalty, fees for technical services) or in the form of narrower scope (such as the narrower definition of royalty under the treaty or the make-available clause). Therefore, when one is undertaking compliance u/s 195, one would need to evaluate the impact of this rule.

While a detailed evaluation of the impact on India has been provided subsequently in this article, before one undertakes an analysis of the anti-abuse rule it is important to understand how the taxation works in the case of a PE in a third state, i.e., in triangular situations and the abuse of treaty provisions that this rule seeks to address.

1.1 Basic structure and taxation before application of the said rule
For the purpose of this article, let us take a base example of interest income earned by A Co, a resident of State R, from money lent to an entity in State S and such income earned is attributable to the PE (say a branch) of A Co in the State PE as it is effectively connected with the activities of the PE. A diagrammatic example of the said structure is provided below:

 

In this particular fact pattern, State S being the country of source would have a right to tax the interest. However, such right may be restricted by the application of the R-S DTAA, particularly the article dealing with interest. If the article on interest in the R-S DTAA is similar to that in the OECD Model Convention1, interest arising in State S payable to a resident of State R, who is the beneficial owner of the income, can be taxed in State S but not at a rate exceeding 15% of the gross amount of the interest.

 

1   Unless specifically
provided, the OECD Model Tax Convention and Commentary referred to in this
article is the 2017 version

Now, State PE, being the country in which the PE of A Co is constituted, will have the right to tax the income of the PE in accordance with the domestic tax laws and in the manner provided in the article dealing with business profits of the R-PE DTAA.

Further, while State PE would tax the profits of the PE, one would apply the non-discrimination article in the R-PE DTAA which generally provides that the taxation of a PE in a particular jurisdiction (State PE in this case) shall not be less favourable than that of a resident of that jurisdiction (State PE). This particular clause in the article would enable one to treat the PE as akin to a resident of State PE and therefore would be eligible to claim the foreign tax credit in State PE for taxes paid in State S2. The OECD Model is silent on whether State PE shall provide credit under domestic tax law or whether it would restrict the credit under the DTAA between State PE and State S. This issue of tax credit, not being directly related to the subject matter of this article, has not been dealt with in detail.

State R being the country of residence, would tax the income of the residence and provide credit for the taxes paid in State S as well as State PE in accordance with the R-S and the R-PE DTAAs.

1.2 Use of structure for aggressive tax planning
Many multinationals use the triangular structure to transfer assets to a jurisdiction which has a low tax rate for PEs and where the residence state provides an exemption for profits of the PE. These structures were typically common in European jurisdictions such as Belgium, Luxembourg, Switzerland and the Netherlands.

A common example is of the finance branch set up by a Luxembourg entity in Switzerland3. In this fact pattern, a Luxembourg entity would set up a branch in Switzerland for providing finance to all the group entities all over the world. Given the fact that a finance branch only required movement of the funds, it was fairly easy to set up the structure wherein the funds obtained by the Luxembourg entity (A Co) would be lent to its branch in Switzerland. This finance branch would then lend funds to all the operating group entities around the world acting as the bank of the group and earning interest. Interest paid by the operating entities would be deductible in the hands of the paying entity and taxed in the country of source in accordance with the DTAA between that jurisdiction and Luxembourg. Further, the Swiss branch, constituting a PE in Switzerland, would be subject to very low taxation in accordance with the domestic tax law in Switzerland.

 

2   Refer para 67 of the OECD
Model Commentary on Article 24

3   J-P. Van West, Chapter 1:
Introduction to PE Triangular Cases and Article 29(8) of the OECD Model in The
Anti-Abuse Rule for Permanent Establishments Situated in Third States: A Legal
Analysis of Article 29(8) OECD Model (IBFD 2020), Books IBFD (accessed 16th
November, 2021)

Moreover, the Luxembourg-Swiss DTAA provides that in the case of a PE in a Contracting State, the Resident State (State R) will relieve double taxation by using the exemption method (and not the tax credit method as is generally prevalent in the Indian tax treaties), i.e., the Resident State (State R) would not tax the profits attributable to a PE in the other State. Therefore, the profits attributable to the Swiss branch of A Co would be exempt from tax in Luxembourg.

This would result in the interest being taxed in the country of source (with a deduction for the interest paid in the hands of the payer in the country of source) at a concessional treaty rate, very low tax in the country where the PE is constituted, i.e., Switzerland and no tax in the country of residence, i.e., Luxembourg by virtue of the exemption method followed in the Luxembourg-Swiss DTAA.

Like interest, one could also transfer other assets which resulted in passive income such as shares and intangible assets, resulting in a low tax incidence on the dividend and royalty income, respectively.

Let’s take the example of India, where a resident of Luxembourg invests in the shares of an Indian company through a PE situated in Switzerland. In such a scenario, India would tax the dividend at the rate of 10% due to the India-Luxembourg DTAA (as against 20% under the Act), Switzerland may tax the income attributable to the PE at a low rate and Luxembourg would not tax the income in accordance with the Luxembourg-Switzerland DTAA.

The OECD, recognising the use of PE to artificially apply lower tax rates, attempted to tackle this in the OECD Model Convention by providing further guidance on what would be considered as income effectively connected in the PE. For example, para 32 of the 2014 OECD Model Commentary on Article 10, dealing with taxation of dividends, provides,

It has been suggested that the paragraph could give rise to abuses through the transfer of shares to permanent establishments set up solely for that purpose in countries that offer preferential treatment to dividend income. Apart from the fact that such abusive transactions might trigger the application of domestic anti-abuse rules, it must be recognised that a particular location can only constitute a permanent establishment if a business is carried on therein and, as explained below, that the requirement that a shareholding be “effectively connected” to such a location requires more than merely recording the shareholding in the books of the permanent establishment for accounting purposes.’

Similar provisions were also provided in the Commentary on Article 11 and Article 12, dealing with interest and royalty, respectively.

However, the above provisions may not necessarily always tackle all forms of tax avoidance. Thanks to the nature of tax treaties applying only in bilateral situations, it may not apply in case of a PE constituted in a third state (State PE). Similarly, one may still achieve an overall low rate of tax by moving the functions related to the activities in the State PE. For example, in the case of a finance branch, one can consider moving the treasury team to State PE with an office, which would constitute a fixed place of business and therefore, the interest income earned from the group financing activities may still be effectively connected to the PE in the State PE.

The OECD Model recognised this limitation and para 71 of the 2014 OECD Model Commentary on Article 24 provides that a provision can be included in the bilateral treaty between the State R and the State S to provide that an enterprise can claim the benefits of the treaty only if the income obtained by the PE situated in the other State is taxed normally in the State of the PE.

1.3 BEPS Action 6
The US was one of the few countries which had provisions similar to the Article in the MLI in its tax treaties even before the OECD BEPS Project. In fact, even though the US is not a signatory to the MLI, the provisions as released by the US were used as a base for further discussion in the BEPS Project. The anti-abuse rule was covered in the OECD BEPS Action Plan 6 dealing with Preventing the Granting of Treaty Benefits in Inappropriate Circumstances.

The objective of the anti-abuse provision is provided in para 51 of the BEPS Action 6 report, which is reproduced below,

‘It was concluded that a specific anti-abuse provision should be included in the Model Tax Convention to deal with that and similar triangular cases where income attributable to the permanent establishment in a third State is subject to low taxation.’

While the language in the MLI is similar to the suggested draft in the final report of the BEPS Action Plan 6, there are certain differences – mainly certain deletions, in the MLI, which have been discussed in detail in the second part of this article.

It is important to note that while Article 10(1) is included in the MLI as a specific anti-avoidance rule, MLI also contains a general anti-avoidance rule under Article 7 through the PPT. Further, in the Indian context, the domestic law also contains anti-avoidance provisions in the form of general anti-avoidance rules. An interplay between all three is discussed in para 3.5 below.

2. STRUCTURE AND LANGUAGE OF ARTICLE 1
2.1 Introduction to Article 10
The language contained in this Article refers to various terminologies that have been defined under Article 2 of the MLI [e.g., Contracting Jurisdiction (‘CJ’), Covered Tax Agreement (‘CTA’)]. Those terminologies referred to in Article 10, which have not been defined under Article 2 of the MLI, have to be interpreted as per Action 6 of Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (‘BEPS’).

Article 10 of the MLI seeks to deny treaty benefits in certain circumstances.

2.2 Structure
Article 10 of the MLI is structured in six paragraphs wherein each paragraph addresses a different aspect related to the anti-abuse provision. The flow of the Article is structured in such a way that the conditions for attracting the provisions of the article are laid down first, followed by the exceptions and finally the reservation and notification which are in line with the overall scheme of the MLI.

To better understand Article 10, it would be beneficial to understand each paragraph individually. Let us proceed as per the order of the article.

Paragraph 1:
Paragraph 1 brings out the conditions for the applicability of Article 10 in certain circumstances:

‘Where:

a) an enterprise of a Contracting Jurisdiction to a Covered Tax Agreement derives income from the other Contracting Jurisdiction and the first-mentioned Contracting Jurisdiction treats such income as attributable to a permanent establishment of the enterprise situated in a third jurisdiction; and

b) the profits attributable to that permanent establishment are exempt from tax in the first-mentioned Contracting Jurisdiction,

the benefits of the Covered Tax Agreement shall not apply to any item of income on which the tax in the third jurisdiction is less than 60 per cent of the tax that would be imposed in the first-mentioned Contracting Jurisdiction on that item of income if that permanent establishment were situated in the first-mentioned Contracting Jurisdiction. In such a case, any income to which the provisions of this Paragraph apply shall remain taxable according to the domestic law of the other Contracting Jurisdiction, notwithstanding any other provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement.’

Each underlined word is a condition for the applicability of the article and has its own significance.

An enterprise – The question as to how to interpret the term ‘an enterprise’ and what comes under the purview of the same is covered in the later part of this article.

derives income from the other Contracting Jurisdiction – This emphasises on the aspect that the income earned by the Resident State should be derived from the State S for the Article to get triggered.

income as attributable to a permanent establishment of the enterprise situated in a third jurisdiction – In addition to the condition as mentioned above, the income derived by the State PE from State S should be treated as attributable to the PE in State PE by State R.

exempt from tax in the first-mentioned Contracting Jurisdiction – This covers the point regarding the taxability of the profits attributable to the PE in the State R. It focuses on the point that Article 10 would be applicable if the profits attributable to the PE are exempt from tax in State R.

tax in the third jurisdiction is less than 60 per cent – This sentence points out the 60% test which states that the tax in the State PE is less than 60% of the tax that would be payable in the State R on that item of income if that PE was situated in the State R.

In case all the above conditions are satisfied, the benefits of the CTA between the State R and the State S shall not apply to such item of income.

The second part of paragraph 1 gives power to the State S to tax the item of income as per its domestic laws notwithstanding any other provisions of the CTA in cases where the provisions of Article 10(1) are satisfied.

Thus, it can be understood that the provisions of Article 10(1) emphasise on the denial of treaty benefits in order to prevent complete non-taxation or lower taxation of an item of income.

Paragraph 2:
Paragraph 2 states the exceptions where the provisions as set out in paragraph 1 of the Article 10 will not be applicable.

The exception covers the income derived from the State S in connection with or is incidental to active conduct of the business carried on by the PE. However, the business of making, managing or simply holding investments for the enterprise’s own account such as activities of banking carried on by banks, insurance activities carried on by insurance enterprises and securities activities carried on by registered securities dealers will not come under the purview of paragraph 1 of the Article. The business of making, managing or simply holding investments for the enterprise’s own account carried on by other than the above-mentioned enterprises shall come under the purview of paragraph 1 of the Article. A detailed discussion on what is considered as active conduct of business is covered in the second part of this article.

Paragraph 3:
Paragraph 3 of Article 10 provides that even if treaty relief is denied due to the trigger of the provisions of
Article 10(1), the competent authority of State S has the authority to grant the treaty relief as a response to a request by the taxpayer in the State R on the basis of justified reasons for not satisfying the requirements of Article 10(1).

In such situations, the competent authority of the State S shall consult with the competent authority of the State R before arriving at a decision.

Paragraph 4:
Paragraph 4 is the compatibility clause between paragraph 1 through paragraph 3 which mentions ‘in place of or in the absence of’.

This means that if there is an existing provision in a CTA which denies / limits treaty relief in instances of triangular cases (‘Existing Provision’), then such a provision would be modified (i.e. in place of) to the extent paragraph 1 through 3 are inconsistent with the existing provisions (subject to notification requirements analysed below).

However, if there is no existing provision then paragraph 1 through 3 would be added to the CTAs (i.e., in absence of).

Paragraph 5:
Article 10(5) covers the reservation aspect to be in line with the overall scheme of the MLI.

This reservation clause is applicable because Article 10 is not covered under minimum standard and hence the scope for reservation is wide. There are three options available to each signatory:
a) Article to not be applicable to all CTA’s in entirety, or
b) Article to not be applicable in case where the CTA already contains the provision as mentioned in paragraph 4, or
c) Article to only be applicable in case of CTA’s that already contain the provisions as mentioned under paragraph 4 (i.e., the existing provisions to be modified to the extent that they are inconsistent with the provisions of Article 10).

Paragraph 6:
Article 10(6) provides the notification mechanism to assess the impact of the reservations and position adopted by the signatories on the provisions of the CTAs.

In cases where the parties decide to go as per sub-paragraph (a) or (b) of Article 10(5), then they need to notify the depository whether each of its CTA contains the provisions as per Article 10(4) along with the article and paragraph number. In case where all contracting jurisdictions have made such a notification, then the existing provisions shall be replaced by the provisions of Article 10. In other cases, such as in the case of a notification mismatch (i.e., one signatory to the CTA does not notify the provisions of Article 10 whereas the other signatory to the same CTA notifies them), the existing provisions shall ONLY be modified to the extent that they are inconsistent with the provisions of Article 10.

India has not made any reservation. Further, India has not notified any DTAAs which have a provision similar to that in para 4 of Article 10. Therefore, the provisions of Article 10 of the MLI shall supersede the existing provisions of the DTAAs to the extent they are incompatible with the existing provisions.

2.3 Reason as to why the Source Country should not grant DTAA benefits
The main policy consideration for implementation of Article 10 of the MLI is to plug the structure wherein one can artificially reduce the overall tax simply by interposing a PE in a low-tax jurisdiction, which is a major BEPS concern.

Tax treaties allocate the taxing rights between the jurisdictions. A Source State giving up its taxing rights is a result of bilateral negotiation with the Residence State. However, if such Residence State decides to treat such income as attributable to a third state and therefore not taxing such income by virtue of another treaty of which the Source State is a not a party, would be against the intention of the countries who have negotiated the treaty in good faith.

Therefore, if State R gives up its right of taxation of income earned from State S due to the artificial imposition of a PE in a third State, Article 10 of the MLI gives the entire taxing right back to State S.

3. SOME ISSUES RELATED TO INTERPRETATION OF PARA 1 OF ARTICLE 10 OF MLI
Having analysed the broad provisions of Article 10 of the MLI, the ensuing paragraphs seek to raise (and analyse) some of the issues in relation to para 1 of Article 10.

3.1 Definition of PE – Which DTAA to Apply
While considering the situation of denial of treaty benefits laid out in the treaty between State R and State S with regard to the income earned by the PE of an entity of the State R in a State PE, there are two DTAA’s that come under this purview, namely:
i. Treaty between the State R and the State S, and
ii. Treaty between the State R and the third state (PE State).

For the purpose of referring to the definition of PE, the first question that arises is which of the two DTAAs has to be referred to? This issue arises mainly because the term ‘Permanent Establishment’ is not a general term but is a specific term which is defined in the DTAA (generally in Article 5 of the relevant DTAA).

A view could be that since the acceptability or denial of benefits under the DTAA between the State R and State S is evaluated and State S is the jurisdiction denying the treaty benefit, one should look at the DTAA between the State R and State S to determine the PE status. However, the objective of the anti-abuse provision is to target transactions wherein income is not taxed in State R due to a PE in State PE. Further, MLI 10(1) applies only if the Residence State treats the income of an enterprise derived from the Source State as attributable to the PE of a third State. This decision of Residence State is obviously on the basis of its treaty with the PE State as it is a bilateral decision. As the Source State is not a party to this decision, the treaty between Residence State and Source State cannot be applied. Therefore, a better view would be to consider the provisions of the DTAA between the State R and the third state (State PE) for the definition of PE.

It is also important to note that prior to introduction of MLI, Article 5 of the DTAA was referred to in order to establish the PE status. However, post introduction of the MLI, one would also need to evaluate the impact of Article 12 to Article 15 of the MLI which covers the PE status based on Action 7 of Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS). This, of course, is subject to the CTA between Residence State and PE State not reserving the above articles.

3.2 Whether PE jurisdiction needs to be a signatory to MLI
Article 10 of the MLI merely provides that State S should deny benefit of the DTAA between State R and State S if certain conditions are triggered. One of the conditions is that the income is treated by Residence State as attributable to the PE of the taxpayer in State PE. Having concluded the above, that the PE definition under the DTAA between State R and State PE should be considered, it is not necessary that such DTAA is impacted by the MLI. If the DTAA between State R and State PE is impacted by the MLI, one would need to consider the modified definition of PE in such a situation.

Here, it would be important to look at Article 34 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, 1969. The same is reproduced below:

Article 34 – General Rule Regarding Third States
A treaty does not create either obligations or rights for a third state without its consent.

In this particular scenario, it is clear that there is no right or obligation granted to the State PE under the DTAA between State R and State S. State PE can continue to tax the profits of the PE.

Further, by signing MLI Article 10, State S and State R should be deemed to have consented their rights and obligations under the State R-State S treaty as amended by MLI Article 10. Consequently, State PE would not be required to be a signatory to the MLI.

3.3 No taxation in country of residence
Another issue which arises is what if the country of residence does not tax the income irrespective of whether the income is attributable to a PE or not. For example, if dividend income is earned by a resident of Singapore and such income is attributable to the PE of the shareholder in a third jurisdiction, such dividend would not be taxable irrespective of whether the dividend is attributable to a PE in a third state or not.

In such a scenario, Article 10 of the MLI should not apply as the tax rate in State PE is not less than 60% of the tax rate in State R. In any case, as the Source State had given up its right of taxation even when the Residence State did not tax such income and imposing a third jurisdiction in the transaction, would not result in a reduction of taxes in the Residence State.

3.4 Interplay of Article 10 with Article 5
Article 5 of the MLI provides for the elimination of double taxation using the credit method as against the exemption method. It refers to three options for preventing double non-taxation situations arising due to the State R providing relief under the exemption method for income not taxed in the State S.

The interplay between Article 5 and Article 10 comes into play because Article 10 is applicable only in cases where the income is exempt in the State R. So, in order to determine whether or not the income is exempt in the State R, Article 5 will have to be referred to. If the DTAA between State R and State PE provides for the exemption method for elimination of double taxation, but State R has opted to apply Article 5 of the MLI, the credit method would apply and in such a situation, in the absence of exemption granted in State R, the provisions of Article 10(1) shall not apply.

India has opted for Option C under Article 5 which allows a country to apply the credit method to all its treaties where the exemption method was applicable earlier. Therefore, with respect to India only credit method will be applicable as a method to eliminate double taxation.

Given that India’s tax treaties apply the credit method for providing relief from double taxation, the situation contemplated under Article 5 may not be relevant in the Indian context.

3.5 Interplay of Article 10 with PPT / GAAR
The Principle Purpose Test (‘PPT’) rule under Article 7 is the minimum standard and applies to all DTAAs covered under MLI. A question could therefore arise as to which provision would override the other. It is pertinent to note that provisions of Article 29 of the OECD Model clearly specify that Article 29 would apply where the PPT has been met. However, Article 10 of the MLI does not lay down any preference of application of PPT or otherwise. Consequently, it could be possible to take a view that if the specific conditions of Article 10 are met, PPT rule should not apply to deny the treaty benefits.

However, a better and sensible view could be that even if the special anti-abuse provision contained in Article 10 is satisfied, the general anti-abuse provision under Article 7(1) also needs to be satisfied to avail treaty benefits. In other words, where the main purpose to set up or constitute the PE in the third state (State PE) was to obtain tax benefit, such an arrangement should be covered under the mandatory provisions of Article 7(1) of the MLI so as to deny the treaty benefits. In a case where the provisions of MLI Article 10 are applicable, the treaty benefits can be denied based on the applicability of MLI Article 10 itself. In other words, MLI article 7(1) and MLI Article 10 both can co-exist and an assessee needs to satisfy both the tests to avail treaty benefits.

Further, in a case where India is the State S, one will also have to see the applicability of GAAR provisions and its interplay with the provisions of Article 10. Typically, GAAR applies where the main purpose of the arrangement is to obtain tax benefit and the GAAR provisions can kick in to deny the treaty benefits as well. Here it is important to note that both Indian domestic law and OECD recognise that the provisions of GAAR / PPT and SAAR / MLI 10 can co-exist. FAQ 1 under Circular 7 of 2017 states that the provisions of GAAR and SAAR can co-exist and are applicable, as may be necessary, in the facts and circumstances of the case. The same has also been recognised under para 2 of the OECD commentary on Article 29.

4. CONCLUSION
In the second part of this article, the authors will attempt to analyse some practical challenges arising on account of the difference in the tax rates of the jurisdictions involved and the impact of the anti-avoidance rule on India. The second part will also cover the difference between Article 10 of the MLI and the BEPS Action Plan 6 Report on the basis of which the rule was incorporated in the MLI and Article 29 of the OECD Model.  

 

VALUE CHAIN ANALYSIS – ADDING VALUE TO ARM’S LENGTH PRINCIPLE

BACKGROUND
The recently introduced new tax reporting obligations under the three-tier documentation [that is, country-by-country report (CbCR), master file and local file] pursuant to implementation of Action 13 of the action plans on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS1) for companies having cross-border operations, requires maintenance and sharing of the transfer pricing documentation with tax authorities across the globe. While the CbCR will give tax authorities much more information on the global tax footprint of the group, the master file requires it to produce a global ‘overview’ of a multinational entity’s business including its supply chain, allocation of income and transfer pricing policies, and this may include sharing of critical and sensitive information about its business operations. The documentation required has become more robust and in sync with the actual conduct of the operations as against the contractual obligations. Hence, the existing requirement of documentation, which historically has been the cornerstone for supporting the arm’s length standard, needs to be aligned with the new reporting framework. The discrepancy between the two documentation frameworks, if not reconciled, can lead to misinterpretations and ineffective discussions between the taxpayers and tax authorities. This has led to the taxpayers relooking at the way the businesses have been conducted and requiring a much closer alignment between a company’s value chain, operating model and the tax structure.

 

1   BEPS
relates chiefly to instances where the interaction of different tax rules leads
to double non-taxation or less than single taxation. It also relates to
arrangements that achieve no or low taxation by shifting profits away from the
jurisdictions where the activities creating those profits take place – OECD’s
publication on ‘Action Plan on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting’

In line with the above and with the advent of the new framework of documentation, the arm’s length principle (ALP) which was considered to be transaction-based and at most entity-based, has evolved from the entity approach to mapping of the position of the group entities and reconciling the profits allocated according to arm’s length with ‘value creation’. This shift is more so as ALP is seen as being vulnerable to manipulation as it lays emphasis on contractual allocations of functions, assets and risks and this results in outcomes which do not correspond to the value created through the economic activity carried out by the members of the group. Some of the instances of current ALP mismatches are given below:

(a) Benchmarking analysis currently undertaken which considers only one part of the transaction without taking into consideration the holistic analysis of the parties involved in the intercompany transaction.
(b) Commissionaire model wherein the significant people functions contribute highly to the group but draw only a cost plus or fixed return to the entity with the people function.
(c) IP structures without the people function charging royalty to the group entities by claiming to be the legal owner of intangibles while no value creation happens in the said entities.

Hence, for the sustainability of the group’s transfer pricing policy, it becomes necessary to conduct a value chain analysis in order to bridge the gap between the requirements of the existing documentation requirement and the BEPS-driven documentation.

Value chain analysis in simple terms means a systematic way of examining all the activities performed by the business and determining the sources of the competitive advantage which translate into profit for the group. In short, a value chain analysis projects the value creation story of the group by bringing out how and where the value is created and by which entities within the group. This analysis is crucial as it will assist the group to test and corroborate the alignment of the transfer pricing policies with the value creation.

The OECD in its BEPS projects has also recognised value chain analysis as being useful in determining the value drivers and the relevant factors necessary for splitting the profits to the entities creating the value. Further, Actions 8-102: 2015 Final Reports on ‘Aligning transfer pricing outcomes with value creation’ states that the value chain analysis should consider where and how value is created in the operations by considering the following:
(a) Economically significant functions, assets and risks and the key personnel contributing to the same;
(b) The economic circumstances that add to the creation of opportunities to increase profits;
(c) The substance in the value creation and whether the same is sustainable or short-term.

Effectively conducted value chain analysis can lead to transformation in the supply chain in order to align with the value drivers. A value chain analysis thus provides companies with a means to defend their transfer pricing policies, i.e., to prove that the arm’s length price is in sync with the actual functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed.

ORIGIN AND CONCEPT OF VALUE CHAIN
The concept of ‘value chain’ was introduced by Micheal Porter in his book The Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Performance, back in 1985. In simple terms, it refers to the chain of activities performed by a business to transform an input for a product or service into an output that is of value in the market for the customer. Such activities could range from design and development, procurement, production, marketing, logistics, distribution, to after-sales support to the final customer. These activities may be performed by a single entity or a group of entities which are based in different locations that contribute to the overall profitability of the business.

With increasing globalisation, international trade and advent of technology, the value chains of MNEs are dispersed across multiple geographies and entities which have resulted in the evolution of the concept of global value chain (‘GVC’). GVCs are organisational systems that operate across multiple nations and are highly integrated. GVCs help the MNEs to achieve enhanced productivity, efficiency and economies of scale at a global level in this dynamic business environment. Typically, a GVC would involve vertical integration of economic activities which at the same time are divided across countries, specialisation in tasks and business-related functions and reliance on the integrated networks of buyers and suppliers.

 

2   Actions
8 to 10 – Action 8 relates to TP framework for intangibles and cost
contribution agreements, Action 9 relates to TP framework for risks and
capital, and Action 10 relates to TP methods for other high-risk transactions

POST-BEPS – GUIDANCE PROVIDED ON VALUE CHAIN
BEPS is an initiative by the OECD which seeks to ensure that each country gets its fair share of taxes by setting up effective domestic and international tax systems which curb base erosion and profit shifting by multinational corporations by misusing the gaps and mismatches in the present tax systems. As a part of this project, 15 detailed Action Plans were laid down by the OECD across the themes of coherence, economic substance and transparency.

The concept of value chain analysis, though well-known, has gained more significance with the BEPS initiative. From a transfer pricing perspective, the important areas of change lie within the ‘economic substance’ and ‘transparency’ themes. The need for value chain analysis is rooted under both the said themes and is the heart of the BEPS from a transfer pricing perspective.

The OECD3 recognised that there is a need to address the issues arising due to mismatch of economic substance in corporate structures, where the income is parked in low tax jurisdictions under legal entities which lack substance, thus leading to erosion of the tax base of the other high tax jurisdictions.

Some of the guidance available emphasising on the relevance of value chain are reproduced below:

– OECD’s publication on ‘Action Plan on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting’ 2013 has highlighted the importance of value chain analysis:
Action 54 – Point (ii) on ‘Restoring the full effects and benefits of international standards’ states that ‘Current rules work in many cases, but they need to be adapted to prevent BEPS that results from the interactions among more than two countries and to fully account for global value chains’.

– BEPS Action Plan 8-10’s final reports, ‘Aligning Transfer Pricing Outcomes with Value Creation’ released in 2015 lays emphasis on value chain in determining the arm’s length price for transactions with related parties. This was also included in the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines, 2017 (‘TPG’), in para 1.51 – Functional analysis, which reads as under:
‘… it is important to understand how value is generated by the group as a whole, the interdependencies of the functions performed by the associated enterprises with the rest of the group, and the contribution that the associated enterprises make to that value creation. It will also be relevant to determine the legal rights and obligations of each of the parties in performing their functions…
Determining the economic significance of risk and how risk may affect the pricing of a transaction between associated enterprises is part of the broader functional analysis of how value is created by the MNE group and the activities that allow the MNE group to sustain profits, and the economically relevant characteristics of the transaction…” para 1.73

 

3   OECD
– Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development

4   Action
5 relates to countering harmful tax practices more effectively, taking into
account transparency and substance

– The TPG lays emphasis on the principle of substance over form in para 1.66 which reads as under –
‘The capability to perform decision-making functions and the actual performance of such decision-making functions relating to a specific risk involve an understanding of the risk based on a relevant analysis of the information required for assessing the foreseeable downside and upside risk outcomes of such decisions and the consequences for the business of the enterprise…’

– The public discussion draft of revised guidance on Profit Splits of 20165, contained a section on value chain analysis, which emphasised the following –
• A value chain analysis can be used as a ‘tool to assist in delineating the controlled transactions, in particular in respect of the functional analysis, and thereby determining the most appropriate transfer pricing methodology.’
• A value chain analysis ‘does not, of itself, indicate that the transactional profit split is the most appropriate method, even where the value chain analysis shows that there are factors which contribute to the creation of value in multiple places, since all parties to a transaction can be expected to make some contributions to value creation’.

However, this section was eliminated from the final Guidance as it was thought that overemphasis could unduly uplift the significance of profit splits even in cases where this would not be the best method.

 

5   https://www.oecd.org/tax/transfer-pricing/BEPS-discussion-draft-on-the-revised-guidance-on-profit-splits.pdf

– In relation to analysis of intangibles, the TPG lays focus on identifying the factors that contribute to value creation and entities that perform economically significant functions in relation to the intangibles which are used by the MNE to create value for the business. The relevant paras are given below:

‘…In cases involving the use or transfer of intangibles, it is especially important to ground the functional analysis on an understanding of the MNE’s global business and the manner in which intangibles are used by the MNE to add or create value across the entire supply chain…’ para 6.3

‘In a transfer pricing analysis of a matter involving intangibles, it is important to identify the relevant intangibles with specificity. The functional analysis should identify the relevant intangibles at issue, the manner in which they contribute to the creation of value in the transactions under review, the important functions performed and specific risks assumed in connection with the development, enhancement, maintenance, protection and exploitation of the intangibles and the manner in which they interact with other intangibles, with tangible assets and with business operations to create value…’ para 6.12.

– BEPS Action Plan 13 on three-tier documentation requires disclosure of certain information in the master file for the MNE group such as key value drivers of
the business, details on intangibles, transfer pricing policies, contribution of the key group entities, etc., which will enable tax administrations access to global documentation leading to enhanced transparency
and thereby provide a mechanism to tackle BEPS problems.

– Both the local documentation and the CbCR could reveal the key data points in relation to the MNCs’ IP activities highlighting the low substance entities generating lower taxable income.

– Also, there are certain countries (such as China, Germany, Spain, Austria, Ecuador, South Africa, etc.) where the tax administrations lay emphasis on documentation of the VCA in the local TP documentation.

WHAT IS VALUE CHAIN ANALYSIS (‘VCA’)
VCA can be said to be a blueprint of the MNE’s group operations. The analysis involves a detailed investigation into the functions, assets and risks of the MNE as a whole and thereby evaluating the contribution of each of the activities involved in the value chain to the overall value created by the group. A VCA is a deep-dive analysis of understanding where and how the economic value is created and by which parties within a multinational group.

A VCA reflects the key value drivers for an MNE’s business, sector, or line of activity and identifies the relative contributions to the value-creation process. Value driver is something that contributes to the generation of income for an MNE’s business. Value drivers could also be defined as the performance variables that will actually create the value of the business.

The value drivers may vary across different businesses, industries and sectors. It is important to note that the nature of the business or industry generally defines whether it has more of tangible or intangible value. Most of the service industry players will have greater intangible value while an asset intensive industry will have higher tangible value. For instance:
(a) For Apple, which is one of the leading companies which sells computers, mobile phones and such other electronic devices, their key value drivers would be continuous innovation, unique technology which differentiates their products from the other competitors in the market, brand, customer loyalty, geographic reach, etc.
(b) For an IT company like Infosys which is a multinational company engaged in providing services in the area of information technology, business consultancy, outsourcing and managed services, their key value drivers would be employee productivity, a skilled and trained workforce, a global delivery model, latest technology, acquisitions, etc.
(c) For a company like McDonalds which falls under the fast-food industry, the value drivers would be product quality and customer health, human capital, environment footprint, brand management, sustainable supply chain and packaging waste, etc.
(d) For a company like Paytm which is a leading digital financial services platform, the value drivers would be technology, customer experience, availability of frictionless payment options, etc.

The VCA highlights the economically significant functions performed and risks assumed by the MNE group and also by the individual entities within the group which leads to value creation for the group. Further, by understanding whether an entity is really controlling the function / risk, it becomes easier to understand whether such an entity is adequately remunerated for these activities in line with its value contribution and whether it would need to be remunerated if there is a transfer of such function or risk from that entity to any other group entity. The VCA helps in identifying the commercial or financial relations between the parties and thereby assists in accurately delineating the controlled transactions based on the actual conduct of the parties in the entire value chain. A VCA is therefore a critical and important step for the purpose of drawing conclusions from a tax and transfer pricing perspective to align the value drivers with the functions performed and risks borne by the respective entities in the global value chain.

STEPS FOR UNDERTAKING VCA
There is no ‘right’ way of conducting a value chain analysis because every business will have its own value drivers and value creation story. Further, there are various techniques that can be applied while conducting a VCA to map the activities against the value creation. We explain below some of the steps which need to be considered in performing a VCA:

Step 1: Identification of the value drivers for the business
Value drivers in principle are common for a business operating in a particular industry or sector; however, its importance will vary from business to business. These drivers can be linked to the tangible assets or intangible assets of the business that are created or used for conducting the business, the various processes / systems adopted, customer relationships developed, the skilled workforce, or even the culture of the organisation which leads to value creation. Also, not all the value drivers would draw equal weightage when their contributions in the value chain are analysed. Hence, it is important to evaluate their relative value in the entire value chain by assigning a numerical weightage to them.

Step 2: Mapping the contribution by the legal entities / territories
The next step is to determine and map the contribution to the value generated by the value drivers with the legal entities that are part of the value chain. This will involve conducting a detailed functions, asset and risk analysis for the legal entities, analysing the key tangible and intangible assets employed and the risks assumed by the entities while contributing to the value chain. The OECD guidelines provide a detailed framework on risk analysis – control and management of risks, which would play a vital role in determining their weightage in value creation. Para D.1.2.1.1 of the TPG.

Step 3: Allocate the profits to the legal entities
Based on the results of Steps 1 and 2, the overall profit of the group is calculated and then appropriately allocated to the respective legal entities in line with the weightage assigned to the relative contributions of the entities in the value chain.

Step 4: Alignment with the transfer pricing outcomes
The results of Step 3 can be compared with the existing or proposed transfer pricing for controlled transactions across the group and in alignment with the value created by each of the entities in the value chain. VCA is a corroborative analysis which would help identify the mismatches in the pricing for the individual entities by providing a holistic picture of the allocation of profit results at a group level.

We have illustrated below a case study evaluating the value chain for an MNE group:

 

In relation to the above case study:
• F Co. is the parent company of I Co., S Co. and D Co.
• F Co. is engaged in full-fledged manufacturing activities.
• I Co. and S. Co. are R&D centres of the group.
• I Co. supervises the R&D services performed by S Co.
• D Co. is a full-fledged distributor engaged in distribution of goods in the local jurisdiction.

Value chain – Analysis of the value contribution of each of the parties

Functions
of F Co.

Functions
of I Co.

Functions
of S Co.

Functions
of D Co.

• Manufacture and sale of products

• Legal owner of the IP developed by I Co. and S
Co.

• Provides funding to I Co. and S Co.

• Manages the R&D projects by hiring own
R&D workforce

• Frames its own research budgets, decides on the
termination /

• Designs and develops R&D programme under
the supervision and control of I Co.

• Performs the contract R&D services


Imports (procures) finished goods from F Co. and sells to local customers


Performs local marketing and sales functions

(continued)

 

for the R &D activities

(continued)

 

modification to the R&D projects

• Controls and supervises the R&D activities
performed by S Co.

• Takes all the relevant decisions related to
R&D of S Co.

(continued)

 

under supervision and control of I Co.

• After sales support activities

Risks
borne by F Co.

Risks
borne by I Co.

Risks
borne by S Co.

Risks
borne by D Co.

• Financial risk of failure of R&D projects

• Operates as a full-fledged manufacturer bearing
all the related risks

Responsible for key development activities and
risk management functions of I Co. and S Co. both in relation to the IP
developed through the R&D activities

Limited risks service provider – attrition risk,
foreign currency fluctuation risk, technology risk, etc.

Takes
title to the goods and bears the related risks such as market risks,
inventory risk, credit risk, foreign currency fluctuation risk, etc.

In order to perform an analysis of the value contribution of each of the entities it is essential to understand the functions performed and risks assumed by each of the entities in the value chain. From the above tabulation of the functional and risk analysis of all the entities participating in the value chain of the group, it is evident that the primary functions in the value chain are research and development, procurement, manufacturing, sales and marketing and after sales services. Various entities of the group based in different geographies are engaged in performing the said activities in relation to these functions which leads to creation of value for the group and thereby results in generating profits. The key value drivers for this business are people, technology, marketing intangible (brand), customer base, innovation through R&D, location savings, etc.

In the above case study, from a transfer pricing perspective the following are the key points for consideration:
a) F Co. being the IP owner contractually assumes the financial risk and has the financial capacity to assume the risk in relation to the IP developed as a result of the R&D activities performed by I Co. and S Co. However, it does not exercise any control over these risks. Accordingly, in addition to the return on the manufacturing function, F Co. may only be entitled to a risk-free return on the funding activities.
b) I Co. is entitled to returns derived from the exploitation of the intangibles developed as a result of the R&D efforts of I Co. and S. Co., as it performs both the development and risk management functions in relation to the intangibles developed.
c) S Co. needs to be remunerated for its contract R&D services rendered to F Co. based on the function, asset and risk analysis in relation to these activities performed by F Co. In determining the remuneration for S Co., it will be critical to consider the comparability factors such as the skill sets of the employees employed for performing the R&D services, the nature of research being undertaken, etc.
d) D Co. is a full-fledged distributor and needs to be remunerated adequately for the distribution functions performed by it.

In the above case study, based on the steps for conducting the VCA (explained before the case study), the controlled transactions were accurately delineated from the value chain and the key functions performed and risks assumed by the respective group entities in the value chain have been identified and evaluated. On the basis of the evaluation of the contribution of each of the parties, the remuneration in line with the conduct has been discussed in the above section.

In practical scenarios, the value chain analysis could be more complex for large MNEs where the supply chain is fragmented across various geographies with multiple group entities involved in the value chain performing various integrated functions. Accordingly, it is necessary to follow a methodical and step-by-step process while conducting the value chain analysis which forms the basis of tax and transfer pricing analysis for the group at a global level.

Purpose of conducting a value chain analysis in the current environment
a) Supply chain analysis vis-à-vis traditional FAR analysis vis-à-vis value chain analysis

A value chain as a concept is different from a supply chain. A supply chain typically focuses on the ‘flow of goods and services’, while value chain addresses the question of what value the business has created by analysing what it is able to sell in the market and what is the cost of creating that.

Supply chain can be described as a business transformation tool which helps in minimising the costs, maximising the customer satisfaction by ensuring that the products are provided to the customers at the right time and place; whereas value chain provides the competitive advantage which ensures that the competition is taken care of by fulfilling customer satisfaction by adding value. Supply chain is only a component of the value chain.

The value chain analysis supplements the traditional functional analysis and establishes the connection on how the FAR and value drivers contribute value to the MNC. The value chain analysis strengthens the documentation as it evaluates both sides of the contracting parties and provides a justification of the arm’s length principle by highlighting the alignment of the transfer pricing policy with the actual conduct of the parties. The robust documentation will serve as back-up to defend the pricing policy during transfer pricing audits. This will also be relevant during negotiations with the APA / competent authority on the allocation of profits among the parties in the value chain as the documentation clearly highlights the robust functional profile.

b) Globalisation and decentralisation of functions, digitalisation
With the emergence of MNEs across different jurisdictions, the competitiveness of the companies is influenced by the efficiency of the supply chain and the corresponding value created by each of the functions in the value chain. Given the current dynamics, not only the supply chain but also the value chain is shifting towards becoming more sustainable, globalised and digitalised.

Digitalisation is bringing about a change by introducing new operating models and revolutionising the existing models. With this there is bound to be a change in the value drivers of the companies and a shift in the functional profile. Corresponding alignment of the pricing policy with the value creation / contribution of each entity in the value chain is going to be critical in order to ensure appropriate allocation of the profits to the entities.

 

6   In
transfer pricing cases involving intangibles, the determination of the entity
or entities within an MNE group which are ultimately entitled to share in the
returns derived by the group from exploiting intangibles is crucial. A related
issue is which entity or entities within the group should ultimately bear the
costs, investments and other burdens associated with the Development of
intangible asset, Enhancement of the value of intangible asset, Maintenance
of intangible asset, Protection of intangible asset against infringement
and Exploitation of intangibles

c) Assessing the value in the value chain for intangibles
For the purpose of assessing the value, the strong focus is on DEMPE function6. It is important that the profit allocation is based on the functional substance-based contribution towards the DEMPE of the intangibles. The value drivers in the case of intangibles go beyond the legal definition of the intangible. In the case of intangibles, factors such as risks borne, specific market characteristics, location, business strategies and group synergies could contribute to value creation. All the entities performing functions, using assets or assuming risks for contributing to the value of the intangible, must be adequately remunerated for their contribution under the arm’s length principle.

d) Application of profit split method (PSM) for value chain analysis
The main objective of BEPS is that the transfer pricing outcomes are in sync with the economic value created. Hence, it becomes necessary to accurately delineate the actual transaction and its pricing in accordance with the most appropriate method selected to justify the arm’s length principle. The transfer pricing regulations requires selection of the most appropriate method to justify the arm’s length principle. PSM7 could be considered as the most appropriate method as it advocates alignment of profits with the relative values / contribution of the functions, assets and risks.

 

7   PSM
– is applied in cases involving transfer of unique intangibles or highly
integrated operations that cannot be evaluated on an individual basis, i.e.,
they are intrinsically linked

EFFECT OF COVID ON VALUE CHAIN AND NEED TO CONDUCT THE ANALYSIS TO ANALYSE ITS IMPACT FROM A TAX PERSPECTIVE – RISKS OF NOT CONDUCTING A VCA

The Covid-19 pandemic has hit the international trade hard thereby causing concerns of serious disruptions to the global value chains (GVCs). The pandemic has impacted the way companies conduct their operations – consequential changes to the value chains as a stop-gap arrangement or a permanent modification to how the business was undertaken.

Some of the instances of disruption in the value chain are given below:
(a) Lockdowns changed the dynamics of how products were sourced. There was a sudden shift from brick-and-mortar retail chains to digital marketplaces / e-commerce platforms. Unlike historically where the physical stores, sales personnel, advertising, etc., which were value drivers in the value chain, now the value contribution of digital / ecommerce platforms has increased significantly.
(b) MNCs having centralised sourcing for their manufacturing / trading activities, faced challenges due to supply chain disruptions. Many resorted to decentralised sourcing from alternate locations / suppliers.
(c) The pandemic influenced work from home for employees which disrupted the provision of services. Example – employees responsible for performing significant DEMPE functions had to work from remote locations thereby disrupting the significance of the location base.

Both the business operations and the financial markets got disrupted due to the pandemic. For the companies that reorganised their operations to adapt to the evolving economic and business environment, the existing transfer pricing policies may no longer apply in line with the transformation of the value chain. In order to sustain their business operations, some companies moved parts of their supply chains as a result of the pandemic, thereby making existing transfer pricing policies obsolete. Due to the impact on the profitability or disruptions to cash flows, the existing transfer pricing policies may not be complied with due to the inability to compensate the entities in line with the functions they performed. Hence, it would be critical for taxpayers to evaluate whether changes in a value chain result in transfer of value or alteration of the profit potential of group entities in their jurisdiction. Thus, taxpayers need to be alert about such eventualities.

Since the pandemic has impacted the economic conditions significantly, this would have an effect on the APAs entered into covering the pandemic year onwards. Most APAs include specific assumptions about the operational and economic conditions that will affect transactions covered in the APA. Hence, it is critical to determine to what extent the changes will affect the application of existing APAs. Since the pandemic has not affected all companies equally, the individual cases of each taxpayer should be evaluated.

JUDICIAL PRECEDENCE – INDIAN AND GLOBAL
With the above detailed discussion on the concept of value chain and the need for conducting the same, let us look at how value chain analysis has gained significance from the Indian perspective. The transfer pricing provisions in India were enacted in the Income-tax Act in 2001 and since then the transfer pricing law in India has evolved with substantial developments. Though the Indian provisions do not provide detailed guidance on various transfer pricing issues, the Indian tax authorities including the dispute resolution forums and Tax Courts place reliance on international guidelines such as the OECD TP guidelines, the United Nations’ TP Manual and guidelines published by various countries while conducting TP audits and deciding on the complex issues related to transfer pricing.

India has also adopted the BEPS Action Plan 13 – three-tier documentation (country-by-country report, master file and local file) in the local regulations in 2016 with additional requirements for master file compliance, wherein it requires the MNC’s to provide the drivers of profits for the business, the transfer pricing policies and strategies in relation to intangibles and R&D facilities and the detailed functional analysis for principal entities contributing to the profits, revenue or assets of the group as per the specified threshold. Pursuant to the BEPS Action Plans released in 2015, the concept of substance over form, i.e., actual conduct of the parties vis-à-vis the legal form plays a vital role in determination of the arm’s length price for a controlled transaction. The Indian tax authorities during the course of TP investigations attempt to re-characterise the transaction to determine the arm’s length price based on the actual conduct of the parties rather than the contractual arrangements, which is in line with OECD guidelines.

Some of these case laws where emphasis is laid on the value chain analysis are summarised below:
a) In the case of L’Oreal India Pvt. Ltd. [TS-829-ITAT-2019 (Mum)-TP], the Mumbai Income Tax Appellate Tribunal (ITAT) referred to the Development Enhancement Maintenance Protection and Exploitation (DEMPE) framework while analysing the issue of marketing intangibles arising due to the significant incurrence of Advertising, Marketing and Promotion (AMP) expenses. The ITAT held as follows:
• the sine qua non for commencing the TP exercise is to show the existence of an international transaction and the same had not been shown to have been fulfilled in the instant case, therefore, the issue of traversing to the aspect of determining the validity of the method for determining the ALP of such transaction does not arise at all.
• The assessee had never admitted that the incurring of AMP expenses was an international transaction and had, in fact, since inception canvassed that the said expenses were incurred in the normal course of its own business and not for rendering any DEMPE functions for brand building of its AE.
• Accordingly, the ITAT held that no part of the AMP expenses incurred by the assessee are attributable to rendering of any DEMPE functions for the brands owned by the AE and deleted the adjustment proposed by the Indian Revenue Authorities with respect to the AMP expenses incurred by the assessee.
• The ITAT distinguished the decision of the High Court in the case of Sony Ericsson India Pvt. Ltd. by recording the finding that the presence of AMP as a transaction was accepted by the assessee itself in case of the High Court decision, whereas in the current case the assessee had never made any such admissions.
• The ITAT further remarked that de hors any ‘understanding’ or an ‘arrangement’ or ‘action in concert’, as per which the assessee had agreed for incurring of AMP expenses for brand building of its AE, the provisions of Chapter X could not have been invoked for undertaking a TP adjustment exercise.

From the above case it is evident that the ITAT has laid emphasis on evaluation of the DEMPE functions performed by the entities in the group for determining whether incurring of AMP expenses alone leads to brand-building for the AE for which the assessee needs to be remunerated separately as an international transaction. Accordingly, a detailed value chain analysis for an MNE group which also includes analysis of the DEMPE functions in relation to the intangibles would help in strongly defending its position before the tax authorities.

b) In the case of Infogain India Pvt. Ltd. [TS-392-ITAT-2015 (Del)-TP], the Delhi ITAT upheld the application of the Profit Split Method (PSM) adopted by the assessee on the ground that the activities of the assessee and its associated enterprise were intrinsically linked and both the entities were significantly contributing to the value chain of provision of software services to the end customers. The ITAT, based on the examination of the functions performed by both the parties and weights assigned to each activity, observed that – ‘In the present case, both the parties, i.e., Infogain India (assessee) and Infogain US are making contribution. Therefore, the Profit Split Method is the most appropriate method for determination of ALP.’

c) In the Coca-Cola USA case8, the US Tax Court confirmed an adjustment made by the Internal Revenue Service (‘IRS’) to the income of the company. The issue under examination was that Coca Cola was not adequately compensated (i.e., with royalty) by its group entities for the use of intangibles. While deciding this issue, the IRS laid emphasis on the functions performed by the respective entities in the supply chain, risks control and allocation, DEMPE functions in relation to the intangibles, costs incurred by the different entities on the Advertising, Marketing and Promotion expenses, and contractual arrangements between the group entities. Upon in-depth analysis, the IRS proposed to benchmark the transaction in question using the Comparable Profits Method (CPM) treating unrelated bottlers as comparable parties wherein ‘Return on Assets’ (ROA) was taken as the appropriate Profit Level Indicator. The US Tax Court upheld the contentions of the IRS based on the above economic analysis conducted to derive an approximate royalty payment to Coca Cola Company by the group entities.

 

8   155
T.C. 10 Docket No. 31183-15, US Tax Court, Coca Cola Company & Subsidiaries
vs. Commissioner of Internal Revenue

d) In the case of Dutch taxpayer Zinc Smelters BV9, the taxpayer was engaged in the business of zinc smelting. The zinc smelting process involved conversion of zinc ore and the related raw materials into pure zinc and the same was distributed in the market. The value chain of this activity comprised of key functions, namely, procurement of raw materials, planning and scheduling of production, undertaking the production activity, planning the logistics and distribution in the market, undertaking support functions such as finance, IT, marketing, etc. Globally, the business of the group was sold, pursuant to which all the functions except the production activity were transferred to a new entity. The question was regarding the remuneration of the taxpayer post the business restructuring. The Dutch Court of Appeals agreed with the ruling of the Dutch tax authority that the key functions of sourcing raw material and thereby conversion of the ore (raw material) into finished product were critical functions in the value chain and were inter-linked. Accordingly, both the taxpayer and the new entity were performing non-routine functions. Hence, profit split was considered as the most appropriate method to determine the arm’s length remuneration for both the entities. For the purpose of profit split, the profit achieved from joint smelting activities of the taxpayer and the new entity were to be determined and then split between both the entities based on their contributions to the revenue generated.

 

9   Case
number ECLI:NL:GHSHE:2020:968  – 17/00714
Zinc Smelter B.V. vs. Dutch Tax Authority

REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
The taxpayer is required to appropriately report under Clause 18 of Form No. 3CEB10 any transactions arising out of or by being a part of business restructuring11 or reorganisation.

Some of the instances of business restructuring or reorganisation are as follows:
(a) Reallocation of functions, assets and risks within the group.
(b) Transfer of valuable intangibles within the group.
(c) Termination or renegotiation of the existing contractual arrangements.
(d) Shift of responsibility of specific functions from one entity to another entity within the group.

The taxpayers must maintain robust documentation such as agreements, valuation reports (if any), post-restructuring FAR analysis, etc., to substantiate the arm’s length principle. In the changing dynamics of business, it is imperative that taxpayers monitor business operations more closely for any changes.

DOCUMENTATION
As we all know, documentation forms the core of the entire transfer pricing analysis; accordingly, in a post-BEPS world it is even more critical to ensure that the MNE group has adequately documented its transfer pricing policies which are in line with the value contributions by the respective group entities in the value chain, economic functions performed and risks assumed while dealing with controlled transactions.

In order to manage the risks, the MNCs will have to ensure that the documentation is more elaborate and thorough both in the factual description of the functional profile in the value chain and in the related transfer pricing analysis. A well-documented VCA would serve as a foundation for the MNE’s tax and transfer pricing analysis and help achieve consistency across various facets of regulatory compliances.

Some of the key back-up documentation that can be maintained by an MNE group to support the VCA analysis are listed below:
a. Industry reports, management discussions, financial reports – sources to ascertain the key value drivers for business;
b. Functional interview notes / recordings with key business personnel at management level, operational division personnel, process flowcharts, asset evaluation records, organisation structure, responsibility matrix, etc. – to support the functional analysis documented as part of the VCA;
c. Contractual arrangements within the group entities which are in line with the actual conduct and substance of the parties to the arrangements;
d. Back-up documents to justify the rationale adopted by the management in assigning specific weightages to the value drivers in the value chain while determining the value contribution of the respective group entities;
e. Risk analysis assessment in light of the framework of the guidelines provided by OECD for the group entities – documents which demonstrate key decisions made by entities such as board approvals, internal email correspondences, important call minutes, etc.;
f. Documents which support the legal ownership of intangibles with the group entities such as IP registrations in certain jurisdictions, accounting of these assets in the financial reporting as per local requirements, etc.;
g. Documentary evidences to support the DEMPE functions and the value contribution of each of the entities in the value chain;
h. Analysis of the key financial ratios for the group entities such as costs incurred in production, gross level margins, net profit margins, FTE count, net worth, etc.

The above list is illustrative considering that each business would have a different value chain story and hence one would need to maintain robust back-up documentation to support its VCA for the entire MNE group.

 

10 Form
No. 3CEB is a report from an accountant to be furnished under section 92E
relating to international transactions and specified domestic transactions

11           Explanation
to Section 92B of the Income-Tax Act 1961, clarifies the expression
‘international transaction’ to include – ‘….. (e) a transaction of business
restructuring or reorganisation, entered into by an enterprise with an
associated enterprise, irrespective of the fact that it has bearing on the
profit, income, losses or assets of such enterprise at the time of the
transaction or at any future date’

CONCLUSION
In the post-BEPS era it is apparent that one will have to substantiate any tax planning with adequate substance. The profit allocated to different group entities will have to be aligned with value contributed by those entities across the value chain of the MNC. The companies are expected to be transparent with their global operational and tax payment structure in order to be compliant with the BEPS requirement. Therefore, the companies will have to improve the way they explain their operating model and tax approach to the stakeholders.

The BEPS project has changed the dynamics of the international tax landscape in an unprecedented manner. The advanced work on addressing the tax challenges arising from the digitalisation of the economy will further change the status quo. Both globalisation and trade frictions in certain countries coupled with the severe impact of the Covid-19 pandemic have forced the MNEs to evaluate their global operations and the value chain distribution. This will create even more challenges in the transfer pricing areas which will have to be dealt with by both the MNEs and the tax administrations of the developing countries. It would be critical for the MNEs to effectively focus on their value chain to achieve the desired business and tax objectives in order to sustain themselves in this evolving business environment.

MLI SERIES MAP 2.0 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION FRAMEWORK UNDER THE MULTILATERAL CONVENTION

1. INTRODUCTION
‘Like mothers, taxes are often misunderstood, but seldom forgotten’ – Lord Bramwell

Lord Bramwell’s words reiterate that one cannot escape the rigours of taxation as it is inevitable. There is considerable certainty regarding the levying of taxes by a State, but the certainty buck stops there. The functional features of taxation have led to various complexities, eventually paving the way for tax uncertainty. Tax uncertainty is on account of various factors; the OECD-IMF report on tax certainty1, inter alia identifies an ineffective dispute resolution mechanism as one of the factors for tax uncertainty. Due to the uncertainty element, genuine taxpayers have suffered the wrath inter alia through prolonged disputes, thus losing faith in the system. On the other hand, tax shenanigans have benefited through tax avoidance, leaving the administration with empty coffers. Tax revenue being the cornerstone of a stable economy, the economic impact that tax uncertainty causes is undesirable for all the stakeholders concerned. Therefore, fostering tax certainty remains at the top of the agenda and a need-of-the-hour measure for the States.

As we draw the curtains on this insightful Multilateral Instrument (MLI) Series, we will focus majorly on the dispute resolution framework under the MLI in this final edition. This measure marches to foster tax certainty. However, unlike the other substantive provisions in the MLI, the success of the dispute resolution mechanism relies on an effective procedural framework which will be the focus of our discussion.

 

1   2019 Progress Report on Tax Certainty (July,
2019)

2. TAX TREATY DISPUTE RESOLUTION – PRE-BEPS ERA

‘No matter how thin you slice it, there will always be two sides’ – Baruch Spinoza
The purpose of tax treaties is to reduce barriers to cross-border trade and investment. The advent and growth of multinational corporations in India created a significant increase in tax treaty and transfer pricing disputes. Characterisation of receipts, arm’s length pricing, treaty entitlement, permanent establishment (PE) and attribution of income, etc., are common cross-border taxation disputes. A tax treaty will only achieve its goals if the taxpayers can trust the Contracting States to apply the treaty in letter and spirit.

If one Contracting State tax authority does not do so, the affected taxpayer has the right to contest this action of the tax authority through that state’s legal system. However, the domestic dispute resolution mechanism may be laborious, time-consuming and expensive.

Therefore, to resolve the double taxation issues, the tax treaty provides for a mechanism by way of Mutual Agreement Procedure (MAP)2, whereby the competent authorities (CA) of the relevant jurisdictions consult each other and endeavour to resolve the differences or difficulties in the interpretation or application of the tax treaty.

However, despite the advantages that MAP offers to resolve disputes, various shortcomings and challenges puncture its effectiveness. Some of the shortcomings in the MAP framework are:

Shortcomings of the MAP 1.0 framework


No impetus and mandate on the CA to solve a dispute.


No deadline or timetables to resolve the disputes; hence the process is
protracted unreasonably and time-consuming.


Lack of domestic law support such as non-implementation of MAP due to
domestic law conflict.


Lack of training and capacity-building initiatives by Governments for its CA
on international tax issues owing to financial constraints.

Shortcomings of the MAP 1.0 framework (Continued)


Lack of guidance in MAP processes for taxpayers in emerging economies on the
procedural and administrative aspects for initiating the MAP.


Lack of dedicated and experienced resource personnel to focus on MAP, leading
to an increase in MAP inventory.


Lack of transparency from the taxpayers’ perspective as they are not involved
in the process; hence, taxpayers are apprehensive about resorting to MAP.


From a taxpayer’s perspective, there are risks of double taxation due to
denial of corresponding adjustments in other state or re-opening of tax
assessments in the other state, delay in issuing refunds, etc3.

 

2   Article 25 of the Model Conventions (Pre-2017
editions)

From India’s standpoint, despite being one of the developing countries to have a large inventory of MAP cases, the MAP framework has not been effective owing to the shortcomings identified in the Table above. Lack of procedural guidance from the CBDT, clarity, transparency in the process and, more importantly, an extremely time-consuming process with non-TP cases taking more than 100 months to arrive at a resolution4 are some of the pain points. Hence, the need for a more effective MAP framework was imperative considering the ever-increasing inventory leading to tax uncertainty.

3. MAP 2.0 – BEPS MEASURES

The introduction of the BEPS Action Plan (AP) provided various measures to eliminate the scope for tax avoidance. However, the implementation of these measures involved changes in the domestic laws and tax treaty (through MLI). Therefore, with the introduction of BEPS measures and also with the existing MAP framework being inefficient, the possibility of growing tax uncertainty was inevitable. To ensure certainty and predictability for business / taxpayers, AP 14 – Making Dispute Resolution Mechanisms More Effective was initiated. BEPS AP 14 dealt with various aspects to improve the dispute resolution mechanisms (in addition to remedies under domestic laws) and suggested some best practices that countries could emulate to achieve certainty in a time-bound and effective manner.

 

3   Carlos
Protto Mutual Agreement Procedures in Tax Treaties: Problems and Needs in
Developing Countries and Countries in Transition – Intertax, Volume 42, Issue
3; and Jacques Malherbe: BEPS – The Issues of Dispute Resolution and
Introduction of a Multilateral Treaty

4   OECD MAP 2016 Statistics

5   Information related to the Inclusive
Framework is available at
http://www.oecd.org/tax/beps/beps-about.html


Minimum Standards: Minimum Standards are certain provisions to which all countries and jurisdictions within the BEPS inclusive framework5 have committed and must comply with. AP 14 included a minimum standard for participating countries that should ensure the following aspects:

(i)    Proper Implementation & Process: Treaty-related obligations on MAP are fully implemented in good faith6 and MAP cases are resolved on time.
(ii)    Prevention & Resolution of Disputes: The administrative processes should promote the prevention and timely resolution of treaty-related disputes.
(iii)    Availability & Accessibility to MAP: Taxpayers meeting the requirements under Article 25(1) of the OECD Model Convention can access the MAP.

In addition to the above, the AP 14 also provided certain best practices for implementation. The AP also addressed those members of the Forum for Tax Administration (FTA) who will undertake a peer review mechanism for effective implementation of the minimum standards7. It is to be noted that India is a member of the FTA.

The AP 14 report, which contains the minimum standard and best practice recommendations, is transposed into the CTAs by introducing it in the MLI. Part V of the MLI – Improving Dispute Resolution, focuses on Article 16 dealing with a strengthened MAP Framework for an effective resolution of treaty disputes, and Article 17 –Corresponding Adjustments, deals with MAP accessibility for transfer pricing cases to eliminate economic double taxation.

3.1 Article 16 – MAP 2.0
The salient feature of Article 16 and India’s position is as follows:

Article

Scope

Inference

16(1)

 

First sentence

Taxpayer considers that action of one or both the contracting
states will result in taxation that is not
according to the CTA
. Therefore, irrespective of the remedy under
domestic law, the dispute can be presented to the CA of either contracting state

Availability and flexibility in access to MAP: Aggrieved taxpayer can
approach for MAP resolution either of the contracting states and not
necessarily its resident jurisdiction

[Continued]

 

Second sentence

The time limit for presenting the case must be within three
years
from the first notification of the action resulting in taxation

Time Limit: For initiating MAP, the aggrieved taxpayer must
present his grievance within a minimum time limit of three years. This is to
ensure that there is no late claim made to burden the tax administration8
and at the same time give adequate time to the taxpayers to initiate MAP
access

India’s Position:

 

Article 16(1) First
sentence:

India has reserved the right
to the application of this First sentence. As per India’s view, residents of
the contracting state must approach only their respective CA to access the
MAP.

Consequent to its reservation, India is bound to introduce a
bilateral consultation or notification process if the Indian CA considers the
objection raised by the taxpayer in a MAP request as being not justified. The
recent MAP guidance issued by India9 addresses this aspect,
wherein India will notify the treaty partner about the reasons for which the
MAP application cannot be accepted and solicit the treaty partner’s response
to arrive at a decision.

 

Article 16(1) Second
sentence:

India has not reserved this sentence as the existing CTA that
India has entered into contains the specified time limit of three years
except for four CTAs10 where the existing timeline for initiating
the MAP is less than three years. India has notified these four CTAs. These
four CTAs will be modified by Article 16(1) of the MLI to include a minimum
time limit of three years, where an aggrieved taxpayer can initiate MAP with
the respective CA where the taxpayer is a resident

 

6   Echoing Article 31 and 32 of Vienna
Convention

7   OECD (2015), Making Dispute Resolution
Mechanisms More Effective, Action 14 – 2015 Final Report, OECD/G20 Base Erosion
and Profit Shifting Project, OECD Publishing, Paris

Article

Scope

Inference

16(2)

 

First sentence

 

 

 

 

 

 

Second sentence

If objection appears to be justified and the CA is not able to
achieve a satisfactory solution by himself, then the case must be resolved by
mutual agreement with the CA of the other state – Bilateral MAP

Bilateral MAP – This clause ensures that where the CA cannot
resolve cases unilaterally, the CA concerned must enter into discussions with
his counterpart CA for a resolution

The contracting states’ settled MAP agreement must be
implemented irrespective of the timeline prescribed under the domestic laws

Implementation of MAP agreement: This clause is to provide
certainty to taxpayers that implementation of MAP agreements will not

[Continued]

 

 

be obstructed by any time limits in the domestic law of the
jurisdictions concerned

India’s Position:

 

Article 16(2) First
sentence:

There is no reservation clause for the said
provision. Further, all the CTAs India has entered into contain the said
clause except for the CTAs with Greece and Mexico. India has duly notified
these two CTAs, which do not contain the language equivalent to Article 16(2)
First sentence. Both Greece and Mexico must make a similar matching
notification by including the India treaty in their notification list
according to which the First sentence of Article 16(2) shall apply to these
treaties.

 

Article 16(2) Second
sentence:

India has not made any reservation to this clause as most of the
treaties it has entered into contain a similar language. However, India has
notified ten CTAs which do not contain the language specified in
Article 16 (2) Second sentence. Therefore, Article 16(2) Second sentence will
apply to these ten CTAs, if these treaty partners make a similar matching
notification by including the India treaty in their notification list.
Failure to notify by any of these ten treaty partners will result in a
mismatch notification, whereby the CTA retains status quo, i.e., it
remains unaltered by the MLI provision

Article

Scope

Inference

16(3)

 

First sentence

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Second
sentence

If any difficulty or doubt arises as to the interpretation or
application of CTA, then the CA shall endeavour to resolve this by mutual
agreement

Dispute Prevention: Cases may arise concerning the interpretation or
the application of tax treaties that are generic and do not necessarily
relate to individual cases. In such a scenario, this provision makes it
possible to resolve difficulties arising from the application of the
Convention

CAs may also consult together to eliminate double taxation in
cases not provided under CTA

This provision enables the competent authorities to deal with
such cases of double taxation that do not come within the scope of the
provisions of the Convention. For example, resident of a third state having
PE in both the contracting states

India’s Position:

 

Article 16(3) First
sentence:

There is no reservation clause for this provision. Further, all
the CTAs India has entered into contain the said clause except for two
treaties,

[Continued]

i.e., with Australia and Greece. India has duly notified these
two treaties which do not contain the language equivalent to Article 16(3)
First sentence. Therefore, both Australia and Greece shall notify the treaty
with India, according to which Article 16(3) First sentence shall apply to
the CTA concerned and be modified. Failure to notify by these two treaty
partners will result in a mismatch notification, whereby the CTA retains status
quo,
i.e., it remains unaltered by the MLI provision

 

Article 16(3) Second
sentence:

There is no reservation clause for this provision. Further, a
majority of the CTAs that India has entered into contain the said clause
except for six CTAs11. India has notified the six CTAs
which do not contain the language specified in Article 16(3) Second sentence.
Therefore, the Article 16(3) Second sentence will apply to these six CTAs if
these treaty partners make a similar matching notification by including India
in their notification list. Failure to notify by any of these six treaty
partners will result in a mismatch notification, whereby the CTA retains status
quo,
i.e., it remains unaltered by the MLI provision

 

8   Para 20 – Commentary on Article 25, OECD
Model Convention, 2017

9   MAP Guidance/2020, F.No 500/09/2016-APA-I,
Dated 7th August, 2020, CBDT, Government of India

10  Belgium, Canada, Italy and UAE

3.2 Article 17 – Corresponding Adjustments

Article

Scope

Inference

17(1)

 

 

Unilateral corresponding
adjustment

– Normally, in a transfer pricing adjustment, a taxpayer in a Contracting
Jurisdiction (State A), whose profits are revised upwards, will be liable to
tax on an amount of profit which has already been taxed in the hands of its
associated enterprise in another Contracting Jurisdiction (State B)

 

In such a scenario, State B shall make an appropriate adjustment
to relieve the economic double taxation

Mitigating economic double taxation: The provision is a
replicated version of Article 9(2) of the OECD Model Convention. Further, the
provision is to ensure that jurisdictions provide access to MAP in transfer
pricing cases

India’s Position:

 

India has made its reservation under Article 17(3)(a) for the
right not to include the corresponding adjustment clause in the CTAs, which
already contains a similar  clause
[Article 9(2) in the respective tax treaties]. Therefore, Article 17(1) will
have no impact on those CTAs. However, in respect of those CTAs that do not
contain the corresponding adjustment clause [for example, the India-France
CTA12], the corresponding adjustment clause will be included to
modify the same

3.3 The interplay of other articles of MLI with MAP

Part V of the MLI includes mechanism Article 16 of the MLI. As mentioned earlier, the introduction of the BEPS measure through MLI may create significant disputes in the form of disagreement on CTA interpretation, application of anti-abuse provisions and denial of treaty benefits, etc. To effectively address these disputes and eliminate double taxation, taxpayers access MAP to address their dispute through the framework and minimum standard under Article 16 of the MLI. Further, apart from the generic framework under Article 16, there are situations where other substantive provisions of MLI allow taxpayers to access MAP to resolve tax treaty disputes.

 

11  Australia, Belgium, Greece, Philippines,
Ukraine and UK

12  Synthesised Text between India and France CTA
available at
https://www.incometaxindia.gov.in/dtaa/synthesised-text-of-mli-and-india-france-dtac-indian-version.pdf

India’s position concerning these other substantive provisions is as follows:

Article

Particulars

Scope
– MAP accessibility

India’s
Position

4(1)

Dual Resident Entities

If a person other than an individual is resident in more than
one state, the CA shall endeavour to determine residency for CTA

 

In the absence of an agreement, the person shall not be entitled
to relief or exemption from tax except to the extent and manner agreed by the
CA. In effect, CAs can agree and provide relief at their discretion

India has notified 91 treaties (except Greece and Libya).
Further, India has agreed to the discretion of CAs to provide relief in a
case where dual residency is not resolved

 

Australia and Japan have reserved application of discretionary
relief. Hence, discretionary relief cannot be granted under these treaties by
the competent authorities

7(4)

Principal Purpose Test (PPT)

Deny treaty benefits if reasonable to conclude that one of the
principal purposes of the arrangement is to obtain tax benefits

 

Based on MAP request, the CA can provide treaty relief after
consideration of facts and circumstances

India has not opted for the discretionary relief provision as it
has notified the same under Article 7(17)(b). Therefore, once the treaty
benefits are denied, the CAs cannot provide any relief at their discretion

 

Notwithstanding the above, the taxpayer can avail the treaty
benefit if it can be established that the tax benefit is in accordance with
the object and purpose of the CTA

 

 

 

[Continued]

 

as stipulated  under
Article 7(1) without resorting to MAP. Under this circumstance, the tax
authorities can grant treaty benefits

7(12)

Specified Limitation of Benefits (SLOB)

If a person is not a qualified person as per para 7(9) nor
entitled to benefits as per para 7(10)/7(11), the CA may grant relief subject
to certain conditions and requirements

India has opted for the provision of SLOB in addition to PPT13

However, the provision of SLOB shall apply to Indian tax
treaties only if the other contracting states have also notified SLOB
provisions

10(3)

PE situated in a third jurisdiction

Suppose the benefit of CTA is denied under
para 10(1) regarding the income derived by a resident. In that case, the CA
of another contracting state (source state) may nevertheless grant these
benefits subject to consultation with the resident state CA

India is silent on this Article. Accordingly, the Article will
be applicable subject to notification and reservations made by the other
contracting jurisdiction as per Articles 10(5) and 10(6) of the MLI

From India’s standpoint, Article 7 has a significant impact. The application of PPT to evaluate treaty entitlement would create significant interpretation issues and the taxpayers may explore MAP compared to the domestic dispute mechanism.

 

13  A total of 14 countries including India have
opted for SLOB. Greece opted for asymmetric application as per Article 7(b) of
MLI; this thereby allows India to adopt SLOB along with PPT even though Greece
shall apply only PPT

14  OECD (2019), Making Dispute Resolution More
Effective – MAP Peer Review Report, India (Stage 1): Inclusive Framework on
BEPS: Action 14, OECD/G20 Base Erosion and Profit Shifting Project, OECD
Publishing, Paris,
https://doi.org/10.1787/c66636e8-en

4. MAP 2.0- DOMESTIC MEASURES TAKEN BY INDIA

  •  The BEPS AP 14 had suggested a peer review mechanism to ensure adequate implementation of the suggested minimum standard and recommendations. As a result, the peer review undertaken for India in 201914 highlighted India’s progress on the MAP programme and suggested recommendations for more effective functioning of the MAP. According to the peer review and BEPS AP 14, the Indian tax authorities have taken significant steps to reform the MAP framework and make it productive. Two significant reforms include:

  •  The CBDT amended Rule 44G of the Income-Tax Rules and substituted it with the erstwhile Rules 44G and 44H15. The amended Rule deals extensively with the implementation and the procedural framework for the MAP process.

  • In line with the BEPS AP 14 recommendation, India had released a detailed guidance note on MAP16. The MAP guidance addresses many of the open issues on procedural aspects of MAP and, more importantly, clarifies key practical nuances absent in the pre-BEPS era regime for the taxpayers to resort to.

  •  Broad features of the MAP guidance issued by the Indian tax administration, which acts as a handy tool for taxpayers in understanding the MAP framework, are as follows:

Part

Nature

Brief
aspects covered

A

Introduction and basic information

This part addresses the following aspects:

Manner of filing MAP request (Form 34)

Contents of an MAP application

Procedure to be followed in case MAP is filed in the home
country against the order of the Indian tax authority

Procedure to be followed by CA of India upon receipt of a MAP
request

Participation of Indian CA in multilateral MAP cases

Communication of views between CAs through a position paper

India has committed to resolving the MAP cases within an average
timeframe of 24 months

B

Access and denial of MAP

Access to MAP

Provide instances where MAP can be filed

Commitment to provide MAP access in a situation where domestic
anti-abuse provisions are applied Clarification of MAP access in case of an
order under section 201

[Continued]

 

B

 






 

 

 

 

Access and denial of MAP

The situation where MAP access will be granted but Indian CA
will not negotiate any outcome other than what was achieved earlier – such as
Unilateral APA, Safe Harbour, order of Income-tax Appellate Tribunal. In
these circumstances, Indian CA will request the other treaty partner to
provide correlative relief

Denial of MAP in situations where

Delay in filing MAP application

The objection raised by the taxpayer is not justified – Treaty
partner will be consulted before denial

Incomplete / defective application is not rectified within a
reasonable time, or non-filing of additional information within the time
limit

Cases settled through Settlement Commission

Cases before Authority for Advance Rulings (AAR)

Issues governed by domestic law

C

Technical issues

The CA can negotiate and eliminate all or part of the
adjustments provided it does not reduce the returned income

Recurring issues can be resolved as per prior MAP. However,
issues cannot be resolved in advance

Interest and penalty are consequential and hence not part of MAP

Indian CA will make secondary adjustment as per law

MAP cannot be proceeded with where BAPA or Multilateral APA is
filed

Suspension of collection of taxes will be as per Memorandum of
Understanding (MOU) entered into with treaty partner; in its absence, the
domestic law provision will apply

Adjustment of taxes paid by payer according to order under
section 201 of the Act

D

Implementation
of outcomes

India is committed to implementing MAP outcomes in all cases
except when an order of ITAT is received for the same year before
implementing MAP outcome. In such a case, India will intimate the treaty
partners and request them to provide correlative relief. In addition,
taxpayers are provided with 30 days to convey their acceptance of the outcome

 

15  Notification No. 23/2020, CBDT dated 6th
May, 2020

16  MAP Guidance/2020, F.No 500/09/2016-APA-I,
dated 7th August, 2020, CBDT, Government of India

5. REFLECTIONS

  •  Based on the discussions in the earlier paragraphs, on juxtaposing the Indian tax treaties with the MLI provisions of Articles 16 and 17, a substantial number of existing CTAs already contain the provisions recommended by the MLI. Therefore, the ineffectiveness of MAP in the pre-BEPS era (MAP1.0) may be attributed largely to procedural infirmities and hassles.
  •  Therefore, for MAP 2.0, the need of the hour is to address the existing shortcomings. In this regard, the Indian tax administration’s recent measures to introduce revised rules and the guidance note on MAP are noteworthy and laudable. They reflect India’s approach to resolve treaty-based tax disputes and stick to its commitment to the BEPS inclusive framework. Further, the implementation of reforms based on the FTA-MAP peer review recommendations on BEPS AP 14 also reflect the approach of the Indian tax administration to rectify its defects in the MAP process.

  •  India’s MAP statistics further support the view that MAP 2.0 is heading in the right direction. One can observe that the timeline for resolving MAP cases has considerably reduced considering that the time taken for MAP resolution was more than five years in the MAP 1.0 era17. Speedy resolution of tax disputes fosters certainty and promotes faith in the system. It is imperative to mention that India’s positive outlook to resolve disputes is also reflected with the OECD conferring India and Japan with the MAP award for effective co-operation to resolve transfer pricing cases18.

MAP caseload as at 2019-end inventory and time
frame of resolving

Particulars

TP
cases

Others

Cases started before 1st January, 2016

380

96

Cases started after 1st January, 2016

410

65

The average time before January, 2016 cases – to resolve MAP
[months]

64.86

61.97

Average time after January, 2016 cases – to
resolve MAP
[months]

18.48

19.02

  •  Amidst all the positive changes that the Indian tax authorities have brought in for an effective MAP 2.0, there are still some aspects that require consideration:

  •  Suspension of collection of taxes – India, in its MAP guidance, has stated that in respect of countries with no MoU, the CBDT Circular governs the suspension of tax collection. However, the Circulars / provisions of stay come with certain riders; for example, u/s 254 the Tribunal does not have the power to grant stay beyond 365 days in certain situations19. Therefore, such impediments could put taxpayers in a difficult situation and could impair the outcome of the MAP. Hence, a more flexible approach to suspending tax collection, pending a mutually agreeable procedure, is desirable.

  •  Resolution for recurring issues – Currently, the aggrieved taxpayer must apply for MAP resolution every year regarding recurring issues. Hence, the Indian MAP guidance precludes the CA from resolving in advance or prior to an order by the Income-tax authorities on recurring issues. For speedier disposal of recurring issues under MAP, the Government may consider introducing a simplified process. Such a mechanism will assist in reducing the timelines for MAP resolution for recurring issues and foster certainty. Further, in the case of change in the CA in future years, the incumbent CA should maintain consistency and follow the prior years’ MAP position without any deviation.

  •  ITAT order overrides MAP settlement – The India MAP guidance suggests that the ITAT order will supersede the MAP settlement in cases where the implementation of MAP settlement has not taken place. The rationale behind this is that the ITAT is an independent statutory appellate body and the CA cannot deviate from it. This proposition is against the commitment granted under the treaty. Besides, in practice, most transfer pricing cases are usually remanded back to the field officers setting aside the original assessment. Considering that a faceless regime for ITAT is on the anvil, it is our humble view that India should reconsider this proposition and make suitable legal amendments to give effect to MAP settlements.


CONCLUSION

The existing MAP regime in India can foster tax certainty only by rectifying its flaws and defects. Thanks to the BEPS initiative and the MLI, the MAP framework has indeed got overhauled. The measures adopted by India by aligning towards its global commitment by providing necessary amendments to domestic law, clarifications and resolving disputes in a shorter period signals that the process is heading in the right direction. Measures undertaken through MAP 2.0 for an efficient dispute resolution framework may not be perfect and completely defect-free. Yet, the measures taken are laudable, bringing an element of clarity and certainty for taxpayers. After all, what is coming is better than what is gone!

 

17  April, 2014 – December, 2020 about 790 cases
overall were resolved under MAP; Source – Ministry of Finance Annual Report,
2020-21

18  https://www.oecd.org/tax/dispute/mutual-agreement-procedure-2019-awards.htm

19  Pepsi Foods Limited [2021] 126 taxmann.com 69
(SC) – The Supreme Court has held that ITAT can grant stay beyond 365 days, if
the delay in disposal of appeal is not attributable to the assessee

MLI SERIES ARTICLE 13: ARTIFICIAL AVOIDANCE OF PE THROUGH SPECIFIC ACTIVITY EXEMPTION

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 5(4) OF THE TAX TREATY (PRE-MLI)
In respect of business income [other than fees for technical services (FTS) and royalties], a foreign company would be subject to tax in India (i.e., the Source State) when it constitutes a business connection or a permanent establishment (PE) in India. When a PE / business connection is constituted, a foreign company is subjected to tax on income deemed to have accrued in India on a net level / deemed profit basis.

Provisions of PE are typically included under Article 5 of a tax treaty. While Article 5(1) to Article 5(3) provides for what constitutes a PE, Article 5(4) provides for a list of activities that do not constitute a PE, even if such activities are undertaken from a fixed place of business in the Source Country (generally known as ‘preparatory and auxiliary exemption’). At the same time, the OECD Commentary (2017) enlists a number of business activities which are treated as exceptions to the general definition of the term PE and which when carried on through fixed places of business, are not sufficient to constitute a PE.

In the above context, a question arises: Does ‘business connection’ include preparatory / auxiliary exemption? The term business connection is not defined under the Income-tax Act, 1961 (the Act) and is interpreted by placing reliance on judicial precedents (key reference provided by the Apex Court in the case of R.D. Aggarwal). Thus, ‘business connection’ draws meaning from the definitions pronounced by judicial precedents, and it may include carrying on a part of the main business, or merely a relation between the business of the foreign company and the activity in India which assists in carrying on the business of the foreign company. Thus, although not explicit, the term business connection includes preparatory and auxiliary activities (POA) when read with ‘contributes directly or indirectly to the earnings of the non-resident from its business’1.

This article aims at providing the effect of MLI (Article 13) on Article 5(4) where activities that do not constitute PE as per Article 5(4) will constitute a PE under MLI Article 13 if certain conditions are satisfied. Thus, Article 13 is a game-changer. In simple words, where in substance cohesive business activities of a foreign enterprise are broken down or fragmented to fit the definition of the exempted activities of erstwhile Article 5(4), they may no longer be able to escape PE status and therefore taxation. This will impact many multinational companies and hence is pertinent to note.

RATIONALE BEHIND THE MLI AMENDMENT
Nature of preparatory and auxiliary activities
Article 5(4) enlists a number of business activities which do not constitute a PE, even if the activities are carried out through a fixed place or office. These activities are generally termed as preparatory and auxiliary in nature2. Para 58 of the OECD Commentary (2017) provides that such a place of business may well contribute to the productivity of the enterprise, but the services it performs are so remote from the actual realisation of profits that it is difficult to allocate any profit to the fixed place of business in question.

The Table below classifies the negative list of Article 5(4):

As per the earlier OECD
Model Convention, 2014

As per BEPS Action Plan
(AP) 7

(Para 78 of the OECD
Commentary, 2017)

Notwithstanding the
preceding provisions of this Article, the

the term ‘permanent
establishment’ shall be deemed not to include:

a) the use of facilities
solely for the purpose of storage, display or delivery of goods or
merchandise belonging to the enterprise;

b) the maintenance of a
stock of goods or merchandise belonging to the enterprise solely for the
purpose of storage, display or delivery;

c) the maintenance of a
stock of goods or merchandise belonging to the enterprise solely for the
purpose of processing by another enterprise;

d) the maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for the purpose of purchasing goods or
merchandise or of collecting information, for the enterprise;

e) the maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for the purpose of carrying on, for the
enterprise, any activity not listed in
sub-paragraphs a) to d), provided that this activity has a preparatory or
auxiliary character;

f) the maintenance of a fixed
place of business solely for any combination of activities mentioned in
sub-paragraphs a) to e), provided that the overall activity of the fixed
place of business resulting from this combination is of a preparatory or
auxiliary character

Notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this
Article, the term  ‘permanent establishment’ shall be deemed not to
include:

a) the use of facilities
solely for the purpose of storage, display or delivery of goods or
merchandise belonging to the enterprise;

b) the maintenance of a
stock of goods or merchandise belonging to the enterprise solely for the
purpose of storage, display or delivery;

c) the maintenance of a
stock of goods or merchandise belonging to the enterprise solely for the
purpose of processing by another enterprise;

d) the maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for the purpose of purchasing goods or
merchandise or of collecting information, for the enterprise;

e) the maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for the purpose of carrying on, for the
enterprise, any other activity of a
preparatory or auxiliary character;

f) the maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for any combination of activities mentioned in
sub-paragraphs a) to e), provided that the overall activity of the fixed place
of business resulting from this combination is of a preparatory or auxiliary
character,

provided
that such activity or, in the case of sub-paragraph f), the overall activity
of the fixed place of business is of a preparatory or auxiliary character

* Highlighted part is amended under BEPS AP 7

As can be observed from the above, initially, OECD was of the view that the enlisted negative activities from Article 5(4)(a) to Article 5(4)(d) of the OECD Model Convention, 2014 would apply automatically to exclude the constitution of a PE, more so considering the erstwhile business models. For example, a non-resident company maintains warehouse facilities solely for the purpose of storage of its goods in the Source State. The delivery of goods would be undertaken through an independent third party in the logistic business. Under the erstwhile PE provisions, the foreign company is not required to substantiate that this activity is auxiliary in nature as the application of Article 5(4)(a) of the OECD Model Convention is automatic. Only Article 5(4)(e) and Article 5(4)(f) subject the specified activities to be of a ‘preparatory and auxiliary character’. In the above example, if a non-resident company maintains a warehouse for storage of finished goods [Article 5(4)(a)] and maintains an office for procurement activities, Article 5(4)(d) and Article 5(4)(f) would apply and the ‘overall activity of the fixed place of business resulting from this combination’ should be of a preparatory or auxiliary character to be exempted from constitution of a PE. In reality, the multinational enterprises (MNEs) have benefited from the automatic application of the enlisted negative activities by ensuring that their fixed place of business solely carries on the enlisted negative activity [Article 5(4)(a) to Article 5(4)(d)].

The Executive Summary of the BEPS Action Report No. 7 (at point 10) states that ‘depending on the circumstances, activities previously considered to be merely preparatory or auxiliary in nature may nowadays correspond to core business activities. In order to ensure that profits derived from core activities performed in a country can be taxed in that country, Article 5(4) is modified to ensure that each of the exceptions included therein is restricted to activities that are otherwise of a “preparatory or auxiliary” character… BEPS concerns related to Article 5(4) also arise from what is typically referred to as the “fragmentation of activities”. Given the ease with which multinational enterprises (MNEs) may alter their structures to obtain tax advantages, it is important to clarify that it is not possible to avoid PE status by fragmenting a cohesive operating business into several small operations in order to argue that each part is merely engaged in preparatory or auxiliary activities that benefit from the exceptions of Article 5(4). The anti-fragmentation rule proposed in [this report] will address these BEPS concerns.’

In order to understand the above in detail, let us consider the following examples:

– The above example includes a company operating an online shop in Country A and selling goods to customers in Country B through a website.
– For delivery and storage of goods, the company maintains a warehouse in Country B.
– Erstwhile Article 5(4) included an exception wherein maintenance of a fixed place in India solely for the purpose of storage and delivery would not constitute a PE. This was based on the principle that such activities are considered as preparatory and auxiliary in the entire scheme of business operations.
– However, with the advancement of internet, the manner in which businesses are operated has evolved. Given this, since most of the business operations of the company are undertaken online, maintenance of a warehouse in Country B for storage and delivery may no longer be considered as preparatory and auxiliary in nature but the core activity. This therefore makes the exceptions provided under Article 5(4) redundant.
– BEPS AP 7 / MLI Article 13 seek to address the above challenges and amend the PE provisions to be in line with the advanced business model.

Anti-fragmentation: Splitting for creating preparatory and auxiliary activities
Earlier, the determination of PE and the enlisted negative activities was considered vis-à-vis the said enterprise which carried on such activities, and not that of the group companies assessed in totality
. The aggregation of ‘places of business’ carried on by other members of the group companies was specifically denied by the OECD Commentary (2014). So, the MNEs fragmented their business operations into various activities among different places and different related enterprises, with a view to fall within the negative list and avoid the existence of a PE in the Source State. For example, large multinationals can fragment their operations into smaller businesses (such as entity A storing goods, entity B delivering goods and entity C providing sales support activities), thereby arguing that each business part is just preparatory and auxiliary in nature.

MLI Article 13 provides for amendment in the PE provisions to avoid such situations by aggregating the activities provided by group companies in the Source State to determine whether or not a PE is constituted. The following examples can help in understanding fragmentation of activities by foreign companies:

Example 1:

Thus, in the above example F Co. has fragmented its business activities in Country B by incorporating two separate entities undertaking (i) warehouse and storage functions, and (ii) support services.

Example 2:

And in the above example, R Co. has fragmented its business activities in Country B by incorporating various entities undertaking (a) procurement functions, (b) bonded warehouse, (c) distribution centre, (d) processing department, etc. This sets a clear example of fragmentation of activities which, if considered individually, will qualify for the preparatory and auxiliary exemption.

MLI ARTICLE 13

Paragraph 1 of MLI Article 13
‘A Party may choose to apply paragraph 2 (Option A) or paragraph 3 (Option B) or to apply neither Option’.

The member State may choose to apply paragraph 2 of Article 13 (Option A) or paragraph 3 of Article 13 (Option B) or not to apply any option. Under Option A, the specific activities mentioned in the tax treaties will not constitute a PE, insofar as the activities of the PE are preparatory and auxiliary in nature. In other words, the activities of a PE, even if aligned with sub-paragraphs (a) to (f) of Article 5(4), will only be exempt from being a PE if the overall conduct of the activities is preparatory and auxiliary in nature. A majority of the member States have agreed to this view.

Further, under Option B, paragraph 78 of the OECD Commentary (2017) provides that ‘some Member States consider that some of the activities referred to in Article 5(4) are intrinsically preparatory and auxiliary and, in order to provide greater certainty for both tax administrations and taxpayers, take the view that these activities should not be subject to the condition that they be of a preparatory or auxiliary character, and that concern about inappropriate use of the specific activity exemptions can be addressed through anti-fragmentation rules’. This option allows the member States to continue to use the existing language; however, at the same time they have agreed that an enterprise cannot fragment a cohesive business operation into smaller business operations in order to call it preparatory and auxiliary.

Paragraphs 2 & 3 of MLI Article 13
Article 5(4) of the OECD Model Tax Convention (2017) is modified to provide for Option A or Option B. Both the options preserve the specific variant of listed activities under each Covered Tax Agreement (CTA). It does not replace the list of exempt activities in the current CTAs with the above BEPS AP 7-suggested Article 5(4). Hence, in order to accommodate the model version and the existing version, Article 13 of the MLI provides for the following:
• Option A – provides additional condition that the specific activity exemption would apply only if the listed activities are of preliminary or auxiliary nature (POA) (remains explicit);
• Option B – provides automatic exemption to listed activities, irrespective of the same being POA in nature (i.e., remains explicit);
• If member states decide to not choose any option: the provisions of Article 5(4) as existing under the CTAs will remain in force (i.e., remain implicit).

Option A

Option B

Notwithstanding the
provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement that define the term ‘permanent
establishment’, the term

Notwithstanding the provisions of a Covered Tax
Agreement that define the term ‘permanent establishment’, the term

(continued)

 

‘permanent establishment’
shall be deemed not to include:

 

(a) The activities
specifically listed in the Covered Tax Agreement (prior to modification by
this Convention) as activities deemed not to constitute a permanent
establishment, whether or not that exception from permanent establishment
status is contingent on the activity being of a preparatory or auxiliary
character;

 

(b) The maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for the purpose of carrying on, for the
enterprise, any activity not described in sub-paragraph a);

 

(c) The maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for any combination of activities mentioned in
sub-paragraphs a) and b),

provided that such activity
or, in the case of sub-paragraph c), the overall activity of the fixed place
of business, is of a preparatory or auxiliary character

(continued)

 

‘permanent establishment’
shall be deemed not to include:

 

(a) The activities
specifically listed in the Covered Tax Agreement (prior to modification by
this Convention) as activities deemed not to constitute a permanent
establishment, whether or not that exception from permanent establishment
status is contingent on the activity being of a preparatory or auxiliary
character, except to the extent that the relevant provision of the Covered
Tax Agreement provides explicitly that a specific activity shall be deemed
not to constitute a permanent establishment provided that the activity is of
a preparatory or auxiliary character;

 

(b) The maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for the purpose of carrying on, for the
enterprise, any activity not described in sub-paragraph a), provided that
this activity is of a preparatory or auxiliary character;

 

(c) The maintenance of a
fixed place of business solely for any combination of activities mentioned in
sub-paragraphs a) and b), provided that the overall activity of the fixed
place of business resulting from this combination is of a preparatory or
auxiliary character

An alternative rule is designed for those countries that are of the opinion that the examples stated under Article 5(4)(a) to Article 5(4)(d) of the OECD Model (2014) should always be deemed as not creating a PE, without the need to further go into the deliberation of whether or not they meet the general preparatory and auxiliary nature standard.

Paragraph 4 of MLI Article 13
Article 13(4) of the MLI relates to the anti-fragmentation rule wherein, irrespective of the above options (i.e., Option A or Option B or none), the member States will have another option to implement the anti-fragmentation rule. The objective is to avoid fragmentation of activities between closely-related parties so as to fall within the scope of preparatory and auxiliary character, and thereby avoid constituting a PE in the Source State. It provides as under:

‘Para 4. A provision of a Covered Tax Agreement (as it may be modified by paragraph 2 or 3) that lists specific activities deemed not to constitute a permanent establishment shall not apply to a fixed place of business that is used or maintained by an enterprise if the same enterprise or a closely related enterprise carries on business activities at the same place or at another place in the same Contracting Jurisdiction and:
a) that place or other place constitutes a permanent establishment for the enterprise or the closely related enterprise under the provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement defining a permanent establishment; or
b) the overall activity resulting from the combination of the activities carried on by the two enterprises at the same place, or by the same enterprise or closely related enterprises at the two places, is not of a preparatory or auxiliary character,
provided that the business activities carried on by the two enterprises at the same place, or by the same enterprise or closely related enterprises at the two places, constitute complementary functions that are part of a cohesive business operation.’

Accordingly, clause 4.1 is inserted to Article 5(4) of the OECD Model Convention and its commentary is provided in paragraphs 79 to 81 of the OECD Commentary (2017). Under Article 13(4) of the MLI (above), the scope for specific activity exemption is not available where there is at least one of the places where these activities are exercised (and) must constitute a PE or, if that is not the case, the overall activity resulting from the combination of the relevant activities must go beyond what is merely preparatory or auxiliary. Until now, the PE status remained embedded per se to its place of business through which the business activities were carried on. But now, the different places of business in the Source State would be combined and if at least one of the places constitutes a PE, then all places of business would constitute a PE for the enterprise as well as for its closely related enterprises carrying on activities in the said Source State. Accordingly, the profits attributable to the PE would be subject to tax in India.

BEPS AP 7 had made application of the anti-fragmentation rule mandatory for those opting for Option B, but the MLI has changed its applicability from mandatory to optional for all three options (including Option B).
India has opted for option A, i.e., wherein PE exemption to listed activities under Article 5(4) shall be subject to activities being preparatory-auxiliary in nature, whereas for the anti-fragmentation rule India is silent, indicating that this rule will be applicable if there is no reservation from the other contracting State in the CTA. It must be noted that in paragraph 51 of the Positions on Article 5, India states that it does not agree with the interpretation given in paragraph 74 because it considers that even when the anti-fragmentation provision is not applicable, an enterprise cannot fragment a cohesive operating business into several smaller operations in order to argue that each is merely engaged in a preparatory or auxiliary activity.

Understanding ‘complementary functions’ and ‘cohesive business operations’
In order to determine the preparatory and auxiliary character, the activity carried on would be compared with the main and core business of the enterprise. Further, based on Article 14 of the MLI, the activity so carried on would be combined with other activities that constitute ‘complementary functions’ that are part of a cohesive business carried on by the same enterprise or closely related enterprises in the same state. Neither MLI nor the OECD Commentary defines the terms ‘complementary functions’ and ‘cohesive business’. However, both these terms cannot be interpreted independently but together as a ‘part of’ the whole. Further, it refers to complementary functions, rather than complementary products or complementary business, etc., indicating interconnected (or closely connected) functions, or intertwined, or interdependent functions, with respect to technology, or value-added functions, or the nature of their ultimate purpose or use.

Paragraph 7 of the OECD Report on ‘Additional Guidance on the Attribution of Profits to Permanent Establishments’, BEPS AP 7, dated March, 2018, provides that ‘the anti-fragmentation rule recommended in the Report on Action 7 (at paragraph 39) is contained in the new paragraph 4.1 of Article 5. It prevents paragraph 4 from providing an exception from PE status for activities that might be viewed in isolation as preparatory or auxiliary in nature but that constitute part of a larger set of business activities conducted in the source country by the enterprise (whether alone or with a closely related enterprise) if the combined activities constitute complementary functions that are part of a cohesive business operation’.

Attribution of profits to PE
Paragraph 8 of the OECD Report on ‘Additional Guidance on the Attribution of Profits to Permanent Establishments’, BEPS AP 7, dated March, 2018, provides that Article 5(4.1) is applicable in two types of cases. First, it applies where the non-resident enterprise or a closely related enterprise already has a PE in the source country, and the activities in question constitute complementary functions that are part of a cohesive business operation. A determination will need to be made as to whether the activities of the enterprises give rise to one or more PEs in the source country under Article 5(4.1). The profits attributed to the PEs and subject to source taxation are the profits derived from the combined activities constituting complementary functions that are part of a cohesive business operation. This is considering the profits each one of them would have derived, if they were a separate and independent enterprise performing its corresponding activities, taking into account, in particular, the potential effect on those profits of the level of integration of these activities. Examples of this type of fact pattern are contained in new paragraph 30.43 of the revised Commentary (at point 40-41 of the Report on AP 7).

Paragraph 9 of the OECD Report on ‘Additional Guidance on the Attribution of Profits to Permanent Establishments’, BEPS AP 7, dated March 2018, provides that the second type of case to which Article 5(4.1) applies is a case where there is no pre-existing PE but the combination of activities in the source country by the non-resident enterprise and closely related non-resident enterprises results in a cohesive business operation that is not merely preparatory or auxiliary in nature. In such a case, a determination will need to be made as to whether the activities of the enterprises give rise to one or more PEs in the source country under Article 5(4.1). The profits attributable to each PE so arising are those that would have been derived from the profits made by each activity of the cohesive business operation as carried on by the PE, if it were a separate and independent enterprise, performing the corresponding activities taking into account, in particular, the potential effect on those profits of the level of integration of these activities.

Understanding ‘preparatory and auxiliary character’
Paragraph 60 of the OECD Commentary (2017) provides that an activity that has a preparatory character is one that is carried on in contemplation of what constitutes an essential and significant part of the activity of the enterprise as a whole. It is usually carried on for a relatively short period, which, depending on the circumstance, could be carried on for a longer duration. Auxiliary activity supports the essential and significant part of the activity. In absolute terms, auxiliary activities would not require significant proportion of the assets or employees, when compared with the total assets or employees of the enterprise.

Further, Paragraph 61 of the OECD Commentary (2017) provides that the activity purported to be covered under the specified activity exemptions ought to be carried on for the enterprise itself. If the activity is undertaken on behalf of the other enterprises at the same fixed place of business, the said activity would not be exempt from the PE status in the garb of Article 5(4) of the applicable tax treaty. The OECD Commentary (2017) provides an example that if an enterprise that maintained an office for the advertising of its own products or services, which was also engaged in advertising on behalf of other enterprises at that location, would be regarded as a PE of the enterprise.

Understanding ‘closely related enterprises’
Article 15 of the MLI defines the term ‘Closely Related Enterprises’ (CRE). The concept of CRE is distinguished from the concept of ‘Associated Enterprises’ of Article 9 of the OECD Model Convention. It is important to note that the term ‘control’ is not defined therein. Further, the member States that have made reservations to Article 12-14 of the MLI can opt out of Article 15.

‘Article 15 – Definition of a Person Closely Related to an Enterprise
1. For the purposes of the provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement that are modified by paragraph 2 of Article 12 (Artificial Avoidance of Permanent Establishment Status through Commissionnaire Arrangements and Similar Strategies), paragraph 4 of Article 13 (Artificial Avoidance of Permanent Establishment Status through the Specific Activity Exemptions), or paragraph 1 of Article 14 (Splitting-up of Contracts), a person is closely related to an enterprise if, based on all the relevant facts and circumstances, one has control of the other or both are under the control of the same persons or enterprises. In any case, a person shall be considered to be closely related to an enterprise if one possesses directly or indirectly more than 50 per cent of the beneficial interest in the other (or, in the case of a company, more than 50 per cent of the aggregate vote and value of the company’s shares or of the beneficial equity interest in the company) or if another person possesses directly or indirectly more than 50 per cent of the beneficial interest (or, in the case of a company, more than 50 per cent of the aggregate vote and value of the company’s shares or of the beneficial equity interest in the company) in the person and the enterprise.
2. A party that has made the reservations described in paragraph 4 of Article 12 (Artificial Avoidance of Permanent Establishment Status through Commissionnaire Arrangements and Similar Strategies), sub-paragraph a) or c) of paragraph 6 of Article 13 (Artificial Avoidance of Permanent Establishment Status through the Specific Activity Exemptions), and sub-paragraph a) of paragraph 3 of Article 14 (Splitting-up of Contracts) may reserve the right for the entirety of this Article not to apply to the Covered Tax Agreements to which those reservations apply.’

India has adopted Article 15 of the MLI. However, India has reserved its right to not include the words ‘to which it is closely related’ in Article 5(6) of the OECD Model Convention (2017). For instance, India has not reserved the right to paragraph 4 of Article 13 of the MLI, which means that it has accepted to bring the anti-fragmentation rule to the existing tax treaties. Again, this can only be confirmed if the other contracting state doesn’t create reservation to paragraph 4 of Article 13.

Paragraph 5 to 8 of MLI Article 13
Paragraph 5 contains compatibility clauses which describe the relationship between Article 13(2) through (4) and provisions of CTA. Paragraph 6 contains reservation rights of the member States, indicating that the provisions addressing the concerns of BEPS AP 7 are not required in order to meet a minimum standard test. The member State may reserve the right for the entirety of Article 13 of MLI not to apply to its CTAs.

Paragraph 7 requires that parties that opted for Option A or Option B to notify the depository of the Option so selected. Paragraph 180 of the Explanatory Statement further confirms that ‘An Option would apply to a provision only where all Contracting Jurisdictions have chosen to apply the same Option and have made such a notification with respect to that provision’. For example, if a contracting State chooses Option A while the other chooses Option B, the asymmetrical decisions conclude in the non-application of the provision in its entirety. This is illustrated in paragraph 7 of Article 13, which states that ‘an Option shall apply with respect to a provision of a CTA only where all Contracting Jurisdictions have chosen to apply the same Option and have made such a notification’. Accordingly, India has selected and notified Option A. Unless the other contracting State selects Option A, the tax treaty will remain unchanged.

Paragraph 8 requires each party that has not opted out of applying Paragraph 4 (anti-fragmentation rule) or for the entirety of Article 13, to notify the depository of each of its CTAs that includes specific activity exemptions. Paragraph 181 of the Explanatory Statement further confirms that ‘Paragraph 4 will apply to a provision of a CTA only where all Contracting Jurisdictions have made such a notification with respect to that provision pursuant to either paragraph 7 or paragraph 8.’

The extract of Article 13(5) to Article 13(8) is provided below:

‘Para 5. a) Paragraph 2 or 3 shall apply in place of the relevant parts of provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement that list specific activities that are deemed not to constitute a permanent establishment even if the activity is carried on through a fixed place of business (or provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement that operate in a comparable manner).
b) Paragraph 4 shall apply to provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement (as they may be modified by paragraph 2 or 3) that list specific activities that are deemed not to constitute a permanent establishment even if the activity is carried on through a fixed place of business (or provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement that operate in a comparable manner).
Para 6. A Party may reserve the right: a) for the entirety of this Article not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements; b) for paragraph 2 not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements that explicitly state that a list of specific activities shall be deemed not to constitute a permanent establishment only if each of the activities is of a preparatory or auxiliary character; c) for paragraph 4 not to apply to its Covered Tax Agreements.
Para 7. Each party that chooses to apply an Option under paragraph 1 shall notify the Depository of its choice of Option. Such notification shall also include the list of its Covered Tax Agreements which contain a provision described in sub-paragraph a) of paragraph 5, as well as the article and paragraph number of each such provision. An Option shall apply with respect to a provision of a Covered Tax Agreement only where all Contracting Jurisdictions have chosen to apply the same Option and have made such a notification with respect to that provision.
Para 8. Each party that has not made a reservation described in sub-paragraph a) or c) of paragraph 6 and does not choose to apply an Option under paragraph 1 shall notify the Depository of whether each of its Covered Tax Agreements contains a provision described in sub-paragraph b) of paragraph 5, as well as the article and paragraph number of each such provision. Paragraph 4 shall apply with respect to a provision of a Covered Tax Agreement only where all Contracting Jurisdictions have made a notification with respect to that provision under this paragraph or paragraph 7.’

India context: Impact analysis of key India tax treaties:

India’s notification

Particulars of Article 13

Australia

UK

Singapore

France

Netherlands

Notified Option A, i.e., India’s tax treaties will be modified
with the language of Article 13(2)

Specific activity exemption

Notified Option A paragraph 13(2) modified India-Australia
Treaty Article 5(4)

Not selected Option A or B, Treaty remains the same

Notified Option B, the Treaty remains unchanged

Notified Option B, the Treaty remains unchanged

Notified Option A, paragraph 13(2) modified India-Australia
Treaty Article 5(4)

Remained silent to reserve Article 13(4), i.e., the provisions
will apply to the existing tax treaties

Anti- fragmentation rule

Notified paragraph 13(4), Treaty changes

Notified paragraph 13(4), Treaty changes

Reservation to Article 13(4) – No change in
the Treaty

Remained silent – Treaty changes

Notified paragraph 13(4), Treaty changes

CONCLUSION
The specific activity exemption provisions are important from the point of view of the relief they provide to non-resident entities who have only incidental activities in India. Hence, one needs to be careful while applying these provisions to a particular case. The amendment provided in Article 13 of the MLI is largely impacting industries such as e-commerce / EPC / consumer, wherein foreign companies have typically been taking exemptions from PE pursuant to the negative list / anti-fragmenting activities in India. However, on account of amendments made by Article 13, it is imperative for all foreign companies to revisit their existing PE positions.

TLA 2021 – A DIGNIFIED EXIT FROM A SELF-SPLASHED MESS: AN ANALYSIS OF REVERSAL OF RETROSPECTIVE AMENDMENT

INTRODUCTION
The infamous amendment to section 9(1)(i) by the Finance Act, 2012 with retrospective effect, dealing with the taxation of indirect transfers, had invited serious opprobrium in international fora and caused a serious dent in the image of India as an attractive investment destination.

Now, the Taxation Laws (Amendment) Act, 2021 [TLA, 2021] has nullified the retrospective nature of the original amendment. The ‘Statement of Objects and Reasons’ to The Taxation Laws (Amendment) Bill, 2021 candidly highlighted the ill-effects of the retrospective amendment.

BACKGROUND

In order to understand the purpose behind the latest amendment, it is necessary to draw the readers’ attention to the series of events that took place prior to the amendment.

It all started in the year 2007 in the landmark case of Vodafone International which entered the Indian telecom market by acquiring the telecom business of Hutchinson India. Vodafone International, a Dutch-based Vodafone entity, acquired indirect control in Hutchison Essar Limited (HEL), an Indian company, from a Cayman Islands-based company, viz., Hutchison Telecommunications International Limited (HTIL). It did this by acquiring a single share in CGP Investment (CGP), another Cayman Islands company, from HTIL in February, 2007. CGP held various Mauritian companies, which in turn held a majority stake in HEL.

In September, 2007 the Revenue authorities issued a show cause notice to Vodafone International for failure to withhold tax on the amount paid for acquiring the said stake as they believed that HTIL was liable for capital gains it earned from the transfer of the share of CGP, as CGP indirectly held a stake in HEL. Vodafone International was also sought to be treated as a ‘representative assessee’ u/s 163 and a capital gains tax demand of Rs. 12,000 crores was sought to be recovered from Vodafone International.

But Vodafone International claimed that the Indian Revenue authorities had no jurisdiction over the transaction as the transfer of shares had taken place outside India between two companies incorporated outside India and the subject of the transfer was shares, the situs of which was also outside India. The matter was litigated up to the Supreme Court which, in 2012, in the landmark judgment in Vodafone International Holdings B.V. vs. Union of India1, absolved Vodafone of the liability of payment of Rs. 12,000 crores as capital gains tax in the transaction between it and HTIL.

The Court held that the Indian Revenue authorities did not have jurisdiction to impose tax on an offshore transaction between two non-resident companies wherein controlling interest in a resident company was acquired by the non-resident company.

But the Indian Government believed that the verdict of the Supreme Court was inconsistent with the legislative intent as they believed that India, in its sovereign taxing powers, was empowered to tax such indirect transfers of assets located in India. Thus, an amendment was brought about by the Finance Act, 2012 with retrospective effect, to clarify that gains arising from the sale of shares of a foreign company are taxable in India if such a share, directly or indirectly, derives its value substantially from the assets located in India. Section 119 of the Finance Act, 2012 also provided for validation of demand, etc., under the Income-tax Act, 1961 for cases relating to indirect transfer of Indian assets.

_______________________________________________________________________________
1          [2012]
341 ITR 1 (SC)

Pursuant to this amendment, an income tax demand has been raised in 17 cases which include the prominent cases of Vodafone and Cairn Energy. It is believed that the total estimated demand in these 17 cases totals up to an enormous sum of Rs. 1.10 lakh crores2.

In the ‘Statement of Objects and Reasons’ to The Taxation Laws (Amendment) Bill, 2021 it has been noted that in two out of these 17 cases, assessments are pending due to a stay granted by the High Court.

The ‘Statement of Objects and Reasons’ to The Taxation Laws (Amendment) Bill, 2021, observes that in four cases, arbitration under the Bilateral Investment Protection Treaty (BIT) with the United Kingdom and the Netherlands had been invoked against the demands. Of these four cases, in two, Vodafone and Cairn Energy, the result of arbitration has been against the Income-tax Department.

In the case of Vodafone, the Singapore seat of the Permanent Court of Arbitration of The Hague ruled that India’s imposition of a tax liability on Vodafone, as well as interest and penalties, breached an investment treaty agreement between India and the Netherlands3. The Arbitral Tribunal held that the imposition of the asserted liability notwithstanding, the Supreme Court judgment is in breach of the guarantee of fair and equitable treatment laid down in Article 4(1) of the BIT between India and the Netherlands. The Arbitral Tribunal directed India to reimburse the legal costs of approximately INR 850 million to Vodafone.

The said arbitral award was challenged by the Indian Government in Singapore because according to it taxation is not a part of the BIT and it falls under the sovereign power of India.

Similarly, in the case of Cairn Energy, a Scottish firm, the Permanent Court of Arbitration having its legal seat in the Netherlands, in December, 2020 awarded it $1.2 billion (over Rs. 8,800 crores) plus costs and interest which totalled $1.725 million (Rs. 12,600 crores) as of December, 20204. The Tribunal held that India had failed to comply with its obligations under the India-UK BIT. India appealed against the said award in a court in The Hague, Netherlands.

_______________________________________________________________________________

2   https://www.business-standard.com/article/pti-stories/us-court-sets-timelines-for-cairn-india-legal-case-121082700964_1.html

3   https://wap.business-standard.com/article-amp/economy-policy/govt-to-amend-income-tax-act-to-nullify-retrospective-tax-demands-121080501146_1.html

4              https://wap.business-standard.com/article-amp/economy-policy/govt-to-amend-income-tax-act-to-nullify-retrospective-tax-demands-121080501146_1.html

Meanwhile, Cairn moved courts in nine jurisdictions, namely, the US, the UK, the Netherlands, Canada, France, Singapore, Japan, the UAE and Cayman Islands, to get the international arbitration tribunal award registered and recognised. Cairn also threatened seizure of the Indian Government’s assets in these jurisdictions in case India did not return the value of the shares seized and sold, dividend confiscated and tax refund held back to adjust a Rs. 10,247-crore tax demand raised using the retrospective legislation.

In June, 2021, the Tribunal Judiciaire de Paris, a French court, allowed Cairn’s application to freeze 20 residential real estate assets owned by the Indian Government. The properties directed to be frozen are worth approximately $23 million, a fraction of the Arbitral Award5. Cairn also filed a lawsuit in the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of New York, seeking to make Air India liable for the Arbitral Award that was awarded to it. The lawsuit argued that the carrier as a state-owned company, being an alter-ego of the State, is legally indistinct from the State itself and was bound to discharge the duties of the State (India).

Thereafter, Cairn made a plea before the U.S. Court to make Air India deposit money under the apprehension that New Delhi may sell the airline by the time the decision seeking seizure of the national carrier’s aircraft is pronounced by the U.S. Court6. Despite the toughening stand taken both by Cairn and India before the U.S. Court, it has come to light that discussions are taking place between the officials of Cairn and the Income-tax Department whereby Cairn is hopeful of an amicable settlement in light of the recent amendment to the provisions of Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i) vide TLA, 2021. The CEO of Cairn has also given a statement accepting the Government’s offer to settle the disputes and accept the refund of Rs. 7,900 crores and has also stated that the shareholders are in agreement with accepting the offer and moving on7.

And recently, on 13th September, 2021, Cairn and Air India jointly asked the New York Federal Court to stay further proceedings in Cairn’s lawsuit targeting Air India for enforcement of the $1.2 billion arbitral award awarded to Cairn by the Permanent Court of Arbitration at the Hague in light of the amendment vide TLA, 2021. Both the parties requested for stay of any further proceedings in the matter till 31st October, 2021 and requested for new dates in November, 2021 by stating that the stay of proceedings would give them additional time to evaluate the effects and the implications of the TLA, 20218.

_______________________________________________________________________________

5   https://www.thehindubusinessline.com/business-laws/needed-framework-for-enforcement-of-investment-treaty-arbitration/article36302023.ece

6   https://www.livemint.com/companies/news/cairn-ups-ante-in-us-court-in-its-fight-against-india-on-tax-11630(news-item
dated 05.09.2021)

7   https://www.telegraphindia.com/business/cairn-energy-accepts-modi-governments-offer-to-refund-rs-7900-crore/cid/1829799
(news-item dated 07.09.2021)

Union Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman, while indicating that the Government would appeal the Arbitral Award rendered in favour of Cairn Energy, also stated that ‘We have made our position clear on retrospective taxation. We have repeated it in 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019, 2020, till now. I don’t see any lack of clarity’, indicating the current Government’s stand of not raising any new demands on the basis of the retrospective amendment made vide the Finance Act, 20129.

TLA, 2021

Considering the adverse impact that the retrospective legislation had on the image of India in the International fora and in order to promote faster economic growth and employment, the Taxation Laws (Amendment) Bill, 2021 was proposed by the Ministry of Finance.

The said Bill was introduced by the Ministry of Finance in the Lok Sabha on 5th August, 2021 and was passed by the Lok Sabha and the Rajya Sabha on 6th August, 2021 and 9th August, 2021, respectively. Thereafter, the TLA, 2021 received the assent of the President of India on 13th August, 2021.

As per the said Act, the following amendments have been made to Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i) of the Income-tax Act, 1961:

A. Vide the newly-inserted 4th proviso to Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i), it has been provided that nothing contained in Explanation 5 shall apply to:

i. an assessment or reassessment to be made under sections 143, 144, 147,153A or 153C; or
ii. an order to be passed enhancing the assessment or reducing a refund already made or otherwise increasing the liability of the assessee u/s 154; or
iii. an order to be passed deeming a person to be an assessee in default under sub-section (1) of section 201,

in respect of income accruing or arising through or from the transfer of an asset or a capital asset situate in India in consequence of the transfer of a share or interest in a company or entity registered or incorporated outside India made before the 28th day of May, 2012.

_______________________________________________________________________________

8   https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/news/economy/policy/cairn-energy-air-india-seek-stay-on-new-york-court-proceedings/articleshow/86227073.cms
(news-item dated 15.09.2021)

9   https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/business/india-business/1-4-billion-cairn-arbitration-award-finance-minister-says-its-her-duty-to-appeal/articleshow/81348282.cms

B. Vide the newly-inserted 5th proviso to Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i), it has been provided that where:

i. an assessment or reassessment has been made under sections 143, 144, 147,153A or 153C; or
ii. an order has been passed enhancing the assessment or reducing a refund already made or otherwise increasing the liability of the assessee u/s 154; or
iii. an order has been passed deeming a person to be an assessee in default under sub-section (1) of section 201; or
iv. an order has been passed imposing a penalty under Chapter XXI or u/s 221,

in respect of income accruing or arising through or from the transfer of an asset or a capital asset situate in India in consequence of the transfer of a share or interest in a company or entity registered or incorporated outside India made before the 28th day of May, 2012 and the person in whose case such assessment or reassessment or order has been passed or made, as the case may be, fulfils the specified conditions, then, such assessment or reassessment or order, to the extent it relates to the said income, shall be deemed never to have been passed or made, as the case may be.

C. Vide the newly-inserted 6th proviso to Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i), it has been provided that where any amount becomes refundable to the person referred to in the 5th proviso as a consequence of him fulfilling the specified conditions, then, such amount shall be refunded to him, but no interest u/s 244A shall be paid on that amount.

Vide the Explanation inserted below the newly-inserted 6th proviso, the conditions to be satisfied for the purposes of the 5th and 6th provisos have been provided. To paraphrase, the following conditions have been provided:

• where the said person has filed any appeal before an appellate forum or a writ petition before the High Court or the Supreme Court against any order in respect of the said income, he shall either withdraw or submit an undertaking to withdraw such appeal or writ petition, in such form and manner as may be prescribed;
• where the said person has initiated any proceeding for arbitration, conciliation or mediation, or has given any notice thereof under any law for the time being in force or under any agreement entered into by India with any other country or territory outside India, whether for protection of investment or otherwise, he shall either withdraw or shall submit an undertaking to withdraw the claim, if any, in such proceedings or notice, in such form and manner as may be prescribed;
• the said person shall furnish an undertaking, in such form and manner as may be prescribed, waiving his right, whether direct or indirect, to seek or pursue any remedy or any claim in relation to the said income which may otherwise be available to him under any law for the time being in force, in equity, under any statute or under any agreement entered into by India with any country or territory outside India, whether for protection of investment or otherwise; and
• such other conditions as may be prescribed.

Necessary amendments have also been effected to section 119 of the Finance Act, 2012 which provided for validation of demand, etc., under the Income-tax Act, 1961 for cases relating to indirect transfer of Indian assets.

From the above amendments, one may clearly observe that a two-tier amendment has been made.

The first tier of amendment, consistent with the position of the Government not to levy or raise any new demands in light of the retrospective amendment vide the Finance Act, 2012, makes a necessary provision to that effect so as to provide that no tax demand shall be raised in future on the basis of retrospective amendment vide the Finance Act, 2012 for any offshore indirect transfer of Indian assets if the transaction is undertaken before 28th May, 2012 (i.e., the date on which the Finance Bill, 2012 received the assent of the President). It would be pertinent to note that in various instances, in the case of retrospective amendments, the law has expressly provided for provisions to ensure that past concluded assessments are not disturbed. In this regard, a useful reference may be made to the proviso to section 14A(1), section 92C(2B) and section 92CA(2C). Thus, the first tier of amendment made vide the newly-inserted 4th proviso is in line with the said provisions and provides protection in respect of transfers made prior to 28th May, 2012 from any fresh proceedings. It is rather wider than the said provisions, as it also provides protection from proceedings under sections 153A, 153C and 201(1).

As regards the second tier of amendment, it provides for nullification of assessments already made in respect of indirect transfer of Indian assets made before 28th May, 2012 (as validated by section 119 of the Finance Act, 2012) on fulfilment of certain conditions as specified.

Pursuant to such amendments, the CBDT has published the draft rules for implementing the amendments made by the TLA, 2021 on 28th August, 2021 inviting comments from all stakeholders latest by 4th September, 2021. Vide the said draft, CBDT has proposed to insert Rule 11UE along with Forms 1 to 4 which specify the conditions to be fulfilled and the process to be followed to give to the amendment made by the TLA, 2021.

The said rules provide for furnishing various undertakings including irrevocable withdrawal, discontinuance or an undertaking not to pursue any appeal / application / petition / proceedings. It is also required to forgo any awards received by it by virtue of any such related orders.

IMPACT OF TLA, 2021

The newly-inserted 5th proviso deals with nullification of assessment or reassessment. However, it does not deal with nullification of any demand raised or any interest levied u/s 234B or interest levied u/s 220(6) [which may have been levied due to non-payment of demand]. Thus, the question that would arise is whether nullification of assessment or reassessment would also lead to nullification of demands of tax and consequential interests. It may be noted that as per the legal jurisprudence that has evolved, ‘assessment’ has been held to be the entire process commencing from filing of return to passing of an assessment order and raising of consequential demand. Thus, when the ‘assessment’ is nullified, it would indicate that the demands along with interest would also get nullified. It may also be noted that the Supreme Court in ITO vs. Seghu Buchiah Setty [1964] 52 ITR 538 has held that there must be a valid order of assessment on which a notice of demand may be founded. Consequentially, when the assessment or reassessment to the extent it relates to income accruing or arising from indirect transfers is deemed to have never been made, the consequential demand and interest would also not survive.

It would be pertinent to note that by virtue of the amendment, the purchaser or payer who was liable to deduct tax at source by virtue of section 195 in respect of capital gains accruing to a non-resident assessee by virtue of indirect transfer under Explanations 5 to 7 to section 9(1)(i), can no longer be treated as an assessee-in-default u/s 201(1) if such purchaser or payer fulfils the conditions specified. However, it would be pertinent to note that the issue of treating a person as an assessee-in-default for non-deduction of tax at source in respect of past transactions in light of retrospective amendments, is no longer res integra in light of the decision in Engineering Analysis Centre of Excellence Private Limited vs. CIT [2021] 432 ITR 471 (SC)/[2021] 125 taxmann.com 42 (SC), wherein it has been held that a person mentioned in section 195 of the Income-tax Act cannot be expected to do the impossible, namely, to apply retrospective provision at a time when such provisions were not actually and factually in the statute. Thus, from the payers’ point of view, the amendment nullifying its liability as an assessee-in-default u/s 201(1) is not of much relevance in light of the judgment in Engineering Analysis (Supra). As a result of the same, even if the deductors / payers who have been held to be in default choose not to comply with the conditions mentioned in the Explanation to the newly-inserted 5th and 6th provisos, the litigation continuing in the normal course as provided in the Income-tax Act would result in favourable verdicts for them in light of the judgment in Engineering Analysis (Supra). A deductor / payer may therefore not choose the option of the 5th proviso which requires him to forgo interest on refund. He would rather stay in the normal stream where he has more than a reasonable chance of success and in such event he need not forgo interest.

In certain cases, assessment may have been made by the Department on the purchasers or payers u/s 161 read with sections 160 and 163 in their capacity as agents (representative assessees) of the non-residents in respect of the income accruing or arising in respect of indirect transfers under Explanations 5 to 7 to section 9(1)(i) [for instance, the case of Vodafone]. In such case, the assessments made on such agents would be nullified if the conditions specified therein are satisfied.

It may be noted that clause (iii) of the newly-inserted 5th proviso to Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i) only deals with an order deeming a person to be an assessee in default u/s 201(1) and does not deal with the case of deductors / payers in whose case disallowance u/s 40(a)(i) is made. It may also be noted that nullification of an order u/s 201(1) does not automatically absolve a person of the disallowance u/s 40(a)(i). However, the same may not be of much significance, given that the payment made towards acquisition of shares of a foreign company is not ordinarily claimed as revenue expenditure in respect of which a disallowance u/s 40(a)(i) may be made.

It may be possible that in certain cases, in order to put an end to litigation, the said person as specified in the newly-inserted 5th proviso may have made an application under the Direct Tax Vivad se Vishwas Act, 2020 and duly paid the amount as specified in the Form No. 3 issued by the designated authority u/s 5(1) of the said Act. Section 7 of the said Act provides that any amount paid in pursuance of a declaration made u/s 4 shall not be refundable under any circumstances. It may be noted that as per the later part of the newly-inserted 5th proviso to Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i), the assessment or reassessment or order, to the extent it relates to the income in respect of income accruing or arising through or from the transfer of an asset or a capital asset situate in India in consequence of the transfer of a share or interest in a company or entity registered or incorporated outside India made before the 28th day of May, 2012, shall be deemed never to have been passed or made. When the assessment or reassessment or order to the extent it relates to the said income is deemed never to have been passed or made, the question of the same being ‘disputed tax’ u/s 2(j) of the Direct Tax Vivad se Vishwas Act, 2020 does not arise as the very demand ceases to exist in the eyes of law. In such circumstances, it cannot lie in the mouth of the Revenue to refuse the grant of refund of the amount paid as specified in the Form No. 3 issued by the designated authority u/s 5(1) of the said Act. If a sum is paid outside the aforesaid Act, the bar of refund should not apply to such payment as held in Hemalatha Gargya vs. CIT [2003] 259 ITR 1 (SC).

The newly-inserted 6th proviso to Explanation 5 to section 9(1)(i) provides that where any amount becomes refundable to the person referred to in the 5th proviso as a consequence of him fulfilling the specified conditions, then such amount shall be refunded to him, but no interest u/s 244A shall be paid on that amount. The said proviso appears to be violative of Article 14 of the Constitution as it is discriminatory and arbitrary. It may be noted that though taxing statutes being fiscal legislations enjoy a greater presumption towards the constitutionality of the same, the same must nevertheless satisfy the tests of Article 14 of the Constitution in order to save them from the vice of unconstitutionality. The newly-inserted 6th proviso may be discriminatory on the following three fronts:

a) There appears to be a clear discrimination between persons referred to in the 4th and 5th provisos. It may be noted that as regards the persons referred to in the 4th proviso, no new assessment would be made in respect of indirect transfers which have taken place prior to 28th May, 2012. Thus, no prejudice would be caused to them. However, in respect of persons referred to in the 5th proviso, who have already been assessed and recoveries may have been made from them, such recoveries are refundable without interest u/s 244A. While persons covered in the 4th proviso would not have parted with any funds and hence are justifiably not entitled to any compensatory interest, the persons covered in the 5th proviso having parted with funds are justifiably entitled to compensatory interest. These two categories of persons are in unequal situations but are treated equally insofar as non-payment of compensatory interest is concerned. This causes discrimination.

b) There also appears to be discrimination between persons to whom a sum is refundable on account of any other provision of the IT Act and persons to whom a sum is refundable under the newly-inserted 5th and 6th provisos. In case of the former, interest u/s 244A being a normal incident of refund would automatically accrue as held by the Supreme Court in Union of India vs. Tata Chemicals Ltd. [2014] 363 ITR 658 (SC). However, as regards the persons referred to in the 5th proviso, they would not be entitled to any refund despite there being a wrongful retention of sums by the Revenue in light of a non-existent demand.

c) The third type of discrimination occurs between persons who have effected indirect transfers but action is time-barred at the time when the TLA, 2021 was enacted and the persons referred to in the newly-inserted 5th and 6th provisos. As per section 149(1)(b) (as amended vide the Finance Act, 2021), the maximum time limit available to issue notice u/s 148 is ten years from the end of the relevant assessment year. Without going into the applicability of the said clause, it may be noted that even if the Department were to reopen past concluded assessments or assess any person in connection with income accruing or arising as a result of indirect transfer, it could at the maximum have done so in respect of A.Y. 2011-12 and for A.Y. 2012-13 (in respect of transfers concluded prior to 28th May, 2012 due to bar under the newly-inserted 4th proviso). Thus, in respect of transfers which have taken place prior to A.Y. 2011-12, no action under sections 147 and 148 would lie. However, in respect of persons who fall under the 5th and 6th provisos (which would include the above cases under sections 147 and 148), no interest on refund would accrue u/s 244A, leaving them in a position worse off than those who have escaped any action due to non-availability of any recourse under the provisions of the IT Act to the Department.

Thus, the validity and constitutionality of the 6th proviso being discriminatory on the above three counts may be subjected to challenge as violative of Article 14 of the Constitution.

It may be noted that the Draft Rule 11UE(3)(b)(I), in addition to furnishing of undertaking by the declarant, also requires furnishing of declaration by any of the interested parties which, as per Part K and Part L of the Form 1, refers to all the holding companies in the entire chain of holding as defined under the Companies Act, 2013 of the declarant, and all persons whose interest may be directly or indirectly affected by the undertaking in Form 1. Though Explanation (iv) to the newly-inserted 5th and 6th provisos is wide enough to empower the Board to prescribe any other conditions, such power does not extend to imposing conditions on persons other than the declarant assessee. Thus, the draft Rule 11UE(3)(b)(I)(ii) requiring such undertaking from interested third parties, if enacted without any change, may be subjected to challenge on the basis of being contrary to the provisions of the Act.

CONCLUSION


TLA, 2021 is a landmark step by the Indian Legislature in bringing about certainty in tax matters and restoring the faith of foreign investors in India as an attractive investment destination. It provides a great opportunity for various Multinational Groups or Companies who have been subjected to endless litigation to settle their disputes once and for all. It would enable them to receive refunds of huge amounts deposited with the Income-tax Department at various stages of litigation, thereby having a positive impact on their working capital situation.

MLI SERIES ANALYSIS OF ARTICLES 3, 5 & 11 OF THE MLI

A. ARTICLE 3 – Hybrid mismatch arrangement

Instances of entities treated differently by countries for taxation are commonplace. A partnership is a taxable person under the Indian Income-tax Act, 1961, while in the United Kingdom a partnership has a pass-through status for tax purposes, with its partners being taxed instead. The problems caused by such asymmetric treatment of entities as opaque or transparent for taxation by the Contracting States is well-documented. There have been attempts to regulate the treatment of such entities, notably the 1999 OECD Report on Partnerships and changes made to the Commentary on Article 1 of the OECD Model in 2003. One common problem where Contracting States to a tax treaty treat an entity differently for tax purposes is double non-taxation. Let us take the following example, which illustrates double non-taxation of an entity’s income:

Example 1: T is an entity established in State P. A and B are members of T residing in State R. State P and State S treat the entity as transparent, but State R treats it as a taxable entity. T derives business profits from State S that are not attributable to a permanent establishment in State S.

Figure 1

State S treats entity T as fiscally transparent and recognises the business profits as belonging to members A and B, who are residents of State R. Applying the State R-S Treaty, State S is barred from taxing the business profits without a PE. On the other hand, State R does not flow through the partnership’s income to its partners. Accordingly, State R treats entity T as a non-resident and does not tax the income or tax its partners A and B. The double non-taxation arises because both State R and State S treat the entity differently for taxation. Another problem is that an entity established in State P could have partners / members belonging to third countries (as in Figure 1 above), encouraging treaty shopping.

1.1 Income derived by or through fiscally transparent entities [MLI Article 3(1)]
The Action 2 Report of the Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS) Project on Hybrid mismatch arrangements (‘Action 2 Report’) deals with applying tax treaties to hybrid entities, i.e., entities that are not treated as taxpayers by either or both States that have entered into a tax treaty. Common examples of such hybrid entities are partnerships and trusts. The OECD Commentary on Article 1 of the Model (before its 2017 Update) contained several paragraphs describing the treatment given to income derived from fiscally transparent partnerships based on the 1999 Partnership Report.

As per the recommendation in the Action 2 Report, Article 3(1) of the Multilateral Instrument (‘MLI’) inserts a new provision in the Covered Tax Agreements (‘CTA’) which is to ensure that treaties grant benefits only in appropriate cases to the income derived through these entities and further to ensure that these benefits are not granted where neither State treats, under its domestic law, the income of such entities as the income of one of its residents. A similar text has also been inserted as Article 1(2) in the OECD Model (2017 Update).

Article 3(1) reads as under:
For the purposes of a Covered Tax Agreement, income derived by or through an entity or arrangement that is treated as wholly or partly fiscally transparent under the tax law of either Contracting Jurisdiction shall be considered to be income of a resident of a Contracting Jurisdiction but only to the extent that the income is treated, for purposes of taxation by that Contracting Jurisdiction, as the income of a resident of that Contracting Jurisdiction.

The impact of Article 3(1) on a double tax avoidance agreement can be illustrated in the facts of Example 1 above. Unless State R ‘flows through’ the income of the entity T to its partners for taxation and tax the income sourced in State S as income of its residents, State S is not required to exempt or limit its taxation as a Source State while applying the R-S Treaty. State S will also not apply the P-S Treaty since the income belongs to the partners of entity T who are not residents of State P. The Source State is expected to give treaty benefits only to the extent the entity’s income is treated for taxation by the Residence State as the income of its residents. The following example illustrates this:

Example 2: A and B are entity T’s members residing in State P and R, respectively. States R and P treat the entity as transparent, but State S treats it as a taxable entity. A derives interest arising in State S. There is no treaty between State R and State S.

Figure 2

In this example, State S will limit its taxation of interest arising in that State under the P-S Treaty to the extent of the share of A in the profits of P. The income derived from the entity by the other member B will not be considered by State S to belong to a resident of State P and it will not extend the P-S treaty to that portion of income. Since there is no R-S treaty, State S will tax the income derived by member B from the entity as per its domestic law.

The OECD Commentary
As per paragraph 7 of the Commentary on Article 1 in the OECD Model (2017 Update), any income earned by or through an entity or arrangement which is treated as fiscally transparent by either Contracting States will be covered within the scope of Article 1(2) [which is identical to Article 3(1) of the MLI] regardless of the view taken by each Contracting State as to who derives that income for domestic tax purposes, and regardless of whether or not that entity or arrangement has a legal personality or constitutes a person as defined in Article 3(1) of the Convention. It also does not matter where the entity or arrangement is established: the paragraph applies to an entity established in a third State to the extent that, under the domestic tax law of one of the Contracting States, the entity is treated as wholly or partly fiscally transparent, and income of that entity is attributed to a resident of that State. State S is required to limit application of its DTAA only to the extent the other State (State R or State P, as the case may be) would regard the income as belonging to its resident. Thus, when we look at the facts in Example 2 above, the outcome will not change even if the entity T is established in State R (or a third state which has a treaty with State S) so long as that State flows through the income of the entity to a member resident in that State.

In other words, State S applies the P-S Treaty because A is a resident of State P and is taxed on his share of income from entity T and not because the entity is established in that State. Similarly, if a treaty exists between State R and State S, State S shall apply that treaty only to the extent of income which State R regards as income of its resident (B in this case).

However, India has expressed its disagreement with the interpretation contained in paragraph 7 of the Commentary. It considers that Article 1(2) covers within its scope only such income derived by or through entities that are resident of one or both Contracting States. Article 4(1)(b) of the India-USA DTAA (which is not a CTA) is on the lines of Article 3(1) of the MLI. On the other hand, Article 1 of the India-China Treaty (which was amended vide a Protocol in 2018 and not through the MLI) requires the entity or arrangement to be established in either State and to be treated as wholly fiscally transparent under the tax laws of either State for the rule on fiscally transparent entities to apply.

Impact on India’s treaties
India has reserved the application of the entirety of Article 3 of the MLI relating to transparent entities from applying to its CTAs, which means that this Article will not apply to India’s treaties. A probable reason could be that India finds it preferable to bilaterally agree on any enhancement of scope of the provisions relating to transparent partnerships to other fiscally transparent entities only after an examination of its impact bilaterally rather than accept Article 3(1) in the MLI, which would have applied across the board to all its CTAs.

1.2 Income derived from fiscally transparent entities – Elimination of double taxation [MLI Article 3(2)]
Action 6 Report of the BEPS Project on Preventing the Granting of Treaty Benefits in Inappropriate Circumstances (‘Action 6 Report’) recommends changes to the provisions relating to the elimination of double taxation. Article 3(2) of the MLI is intended to modify the application of the provisions related to methods for eliminating double taxation, such as those found in Articles 23A and 23B of the OECD and UN Model Tax Conventions. Often, such situations arise in respect of income derived from fiscally transparent entities. For this reason, this provision has been inserted in Article 3 of the MLI which deals with transparent entities. Article 3(2) of the MLI reads as follows:

Provisions of a Covered Tax Agreement that require a Contracting Jurisdiction to exempt from income tax or provide a deduction or credit equal to the income tax paid with respect to income derived by a resident of that Contracting Jurisdiction which may be taxed in the other Contracting Jurisdiction according to the provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement shall not apply to the extent that such provisions allow taxation by that other Contracting Jurisdiction solely because the income is also income derived by a resident of that other Contracting Jurisdiction. [emphasis supplied]

The article on eliminating double taxation in a tax treaty obliges the Contracting States to provide relief of double taxation either under exemption or credit method where the other State taxes the income of a resident of the first State in accordance with that treaty. However, there may be cases where each Contracting State taxes the same income as income of one of its residents and where relief of double taxation will necessarily be with respect to tax paid by a different person. For example, an entity is taxed as a resident by one State while it is treated as fiscally transparent, and its members are taxed instead, in the other State, with some members taxed as residents of that other State. Thus, any relief of double taxation will need to take into account the tax that is paid by different taxpayers in the two States.

Action 6 Report notes that, as a matter of principle, Articles 23A and 23B of the OECD Model require a Contracting State to relieve double taxation of its residents only when the other State taxed the relevant income as the Source State or as a State where there is a permanent establishment to which that income is attributable. The Residence State need not relieve any double taxation arising out of taxation imposed by the other State in accordance with the provisions of the relevant Convention solely because the income is also income derived by a resident of that State. In other words, the obligation to extend relief lies only with that State which taxes an income of a person solely because of his residence in that State. Other State which may tax such income because of both source and residence need not extend relief. This will obviate cases of double taxation relief resulting in double non taxation.

The OECD Commentary gives some examples to illustrate the scope of this provision. Some of these examples are discussed here in the context of the India-France DTAA for the reader to relate to them more easily.

Example 3: The partnership P is an Indian resident under Article 4 of the India-France DTAA. In France, the partnership is fiscally transparent and France taxes both partners A and B as they are its residents.

Figure 3

The only reason France may tax P’s profits in accordance with the provisions of the Treaty is that the partners of P are its residents and not because the income arises in France. In this example, France is taxing income of A and B solely on residence whereas India is taxing income of P on both residence and source. Thus, India is not obliged to give credit to P for the French taxes paid by the partners on their share of profit of P. On the other hand, France will be required to provide relief under Articles 23 with respect to the entire income of P as India may tax that income in accordance with the provisions of Article 7. This is even though India taxes the income of P, which is its resident. The Indian taxes paid by P will have to be considered for exemption under Article 23 against French taxes payable by the partners in France.

Example 4: Income from immovable property situated in other State

Figure 4

The facts are the same as in Example 3 except that P earns rent from immovable property in France. In this example, France is taxing income of A and B on residence and source whereas India is taxing income of P solely on residence. Thus, India is obliged to give credit for French taxes paid, which is in accordance with Article 6 of the India-France Treaty even though France taxes the income derived by the partners who are French residents. On the other hand, France is not obliged to give credit for Indian taxes, which are paid only because P is resident in India and not because income is sourced in India. However, both India and France have to give credit to tax paid in third State as per their respective DTAAs with the third State. If there is no DTAA with the third State, credit may be given as per the respective domestic law [viz., section 91 of IT Act]. Both India and France giving FTC is not an aberration as both would have included income from third State in taxing their residents.

Example 5: Interest from a third state

Figure 5

Here, the facts are the same as in Example 3 except that P earns interest arising in a third State. France taxes the interest income in the hands of the partners only because they are French residents. Consequently, India is not obliged to grant credit for French taxes paid by the partners in France. In this case, India is not obliged to give credit for French taxes paid in accordance with the India-France Treaty only because the interest is derived by the partners who are French residents. Also, France is not obliged to give credit for Indian taxes paid in accordance with the Treaty only because P is resident in India and not because income is sourced in India.

The above discussion is also relevant for countries that have opted for the credit method in Option C through Article 5(6) of the MLI since that Option contains text similar to that contained in Article 3(2).

1.3 Right to tax residents preserved for fiscally transparent entities [MLI Article 3(3)]
It is commonly understood that tax treaties are designed to avoid juridical double taxation. However, treaties have been interpreted in a manner to restrict the Resident State from taxing its residents. Article 11 of the MLI contains the so-called ‘savings clause’ whereby a Contracting State shall not be prevented by any treaty provision from taxing its residents. Article 3(3) of the MLI provides for a similar provision for fiscally transparent entities. The saving clause, as introduced by Article 11, is discussed in greater detail elsewhere in this article.

Impact on India’s treaties
Since India has reserved the entirety of Article 3 of the MLI, paragraphs 2 and 3 also do not apply to modify any of India’s CTAs.

B. ARTICLE 5 – Methods of elimination of double taxation
Double non-taxation arises when the Residence State eliminates double taxation through an exemption method with respect to items of income that are not taxed in the Source State. Article 5 of the MLI provides three options that a Contracting Jurisdiction could choose from to prevent double non-taxation, which is one of the main objectives of the BEPS project. These are described below:

2.1 Option A
Article 23A of the OECD Model Convention provides for the exemption method for relieving double taxation. There have been instances of income going untaxed in both States due to the Source State exempting that income by applying the provisions of a tax treaty, while the Resident State also exempts the same. Paragraph 4 of Article 23A of the OECD Model addresses this problem by permitting the Residence State to switch from the exemption method to the credit method where the other State has not taxed that income in accordance with the provisions of the treaty between them.

As explained in the OECD Model (2017) Commentary on Article 23A (paragraph 56.1), the purpose of Article 23A(4) is to avoid double non-taxation as a result of disagreements between the Residence State and the Source State on the facts of a case or the interpretation of the provisions of the Convention. An instance of such double non-taxation could be where the Source State interprets the facts of a case or the provisions of a treaty in such a way that a treaty provision eliminates its right to tax an item of income. At the same time, the Residence State considers that the item may be taxed in the Source State ‘in accordance with the Convention’ which obliges it to exempt such income from tax.

The BEPS Action 2 Report on Hybrid Arrangements recommends that States which apply the exemption method should, at the minimum, include the ‘defensive rule’ contained in Article 23A(4) in the tax treaties where such provisions are absent. As per Option A, the Residence State will not exempt such income but switch to the credit method to relieve double taxation of its residents [MLI-A 5(3)]. For example, Austria and the Netherlands, both of whom adopt the exemption method to relieve double taxation of their residents, have chosen Option A and have notified the relevant article eliminating double taxation present in the respective CTAs with India. The deduction from tax in the Residence State shall be an ordinary credit not exceeding the tax attributable to the income or capital which may be taxed in the other State.

2.2 Option B
One of the instances of base erosion is commonly found under a hybrid mismatch arrangement where payments are deductible under the rules of the payer jurisdiction but not included in the ordinary income of the payee or a related investor in the other jurisdiction. The Action 2 Report recommends introducing domestic rules targeting deduction / no inclusion outcomes (‘D/NI outcomes’). Under this recommended rule, a dividend exemption provided for relief against economic double taxation should not be granted under domestic law to the extent the dividend payment is deductible by the payer.

In a cross-border scenario, several treaties provide an exemption for dividends received from foreign companies with substantial shareholding. To counter D/NI outcome from such treatment, insertion of a provision akin to Article 23A(4) (described above under Option A) provides only a partial solution. Option B found in Article 5(4) of the MLI permits the Residence State of the person receiving the dividend to apply the credit method instead of the exemption method generally followed by it for dividends deductible in the payer State. None of India’s treaty partners has chosen this Option.

2.3 Option C
Action 2 Report also recommends States to not include the exemption method but opt for the credit method in their treaties as a more general solution to the problems of non-taxation resulting from potential abuses of the exemption method. Option C implements this approach wherein the credit method would apply in place of the exemption method provided for in tax treaties. The deduction from tax in the Residence State shall be an ordinary credit not exceeding the tax attributable to the income or capital which may be taxed in the other State.

The text of Option C contains the words in parenthesis, ‘except to the extent that these provisions allow taxation by that other Contracting Jurisdiction solely because the income is also income derived by a resident of that other Contracting Jurisdiction’. These words are similar to the MLI provision in Article 3(2) relating to fiscally transparent entities. The reader can refer to the discussion under Article 3(2) above, which describes the import of these words, which have also been added in Article 23A-Exemption Method and Article 23B-Credit Method in the OECD Model (2017). As per paragraph 11.1 of the Commentary on Articles 23A and 23B, this rule is merely clarificatory. Even in the absence of the phrase, the rule applies based on the current wording of Articles 23A and 23B.

2.4 Asymmetric application
Article 5 of the MLI permits an asymmetric application with the options chosen by each State applying with respect to its residents. For example, India has chosen Option C which applies to the provisions for eliminating double taxation to be followed by India in its treaties for its residents. The provisions in a treaty to eliminate double taxation by the other State are not affected by India’s choice of Option. Similarly, the other State’s choice also does not affect the provision relating to India. For example, the Netherlands has opted for Option A, while the Elimination article in the treaty for India will not get modified as India has not notified the CTA provision.

2.5 Impact of India’s treaties
India’s treaties generally follow the ordinary credit method to eliminate double taxation of its residents barring a few countries where it adopts the exemption method. India has opted for Option C, which will apply in place of the exemption method in the CTAs, where it follows the exemption method. Accordingly, India has notified its CTAs with Bulgaria, Egypt, Greece and the Slovak Republic. Greece and Bulgaria have reserved the application of Article 5 of the MLI, due to which their CTAs with India are not modified. Both India and the Slovak Republic have chosen Option C and both countries have moved from the exemption method in their CTA to the credit method. As for its CTA with Egypt, India’s Option C applies for its residents while Egypt has not selected any option and the exemption method in the CTA continues to apply to its residents. By opting for Option C with the Slovak Republic and Egypt, India has impliedly applied MLI 3(2) which it has otherwise reserved in entirety.

Of the other countries which apply the exemption method to relieve double taxation of their residents in India’s treaties, Austria and the Netherlands have opted for Option A and notified the CTA provisions. Estonia and Luxembourg, too, follow the exemption method for their residents in their CTA with India. Yet, though they have opted for Option A, they have not notified the relevant provisions and the CTAs shall remain unmodified. Presumably, since the India-Luxembourg DTAA already contains provisions of the nature contained in Option A, and under the India-Estonia treaty, Estonia exempts only that income from taxation taxed in India, these jurisdictions have chosen not to avail of the defensive rule provided in the MLI.

C. ARTICLE 11 – Saving of a State’s right to tax its own residents
3.1 Rationale
A double tax treaty is entered into with the object of relieving juridical double taxation. The double taxation is relieved, either by allocating the taxing rights to one of the contracting States to that treaty, or eliminated by the relief provisions through an exemption or credit method. However, treaties have sometimes been interpreted to restrict the Resident State from taxing its residents in some instances.

One example would be to interpret the phrase ‘may be taxed in the source State’ as ‘shall only be taxed in the source State’, thereby denuding the right of the Residence State to tax its resident. Another example is a partnership that is resident of State P with one partner resident of State R. State P taxes the partnership while State R treats the partnership as transparent and taxes the partners.

Figure 6

The partnership P is resident of State P and is entitled to the P-R Treaty, similar to the OECD Model. If the partnership earns royalty income arising in State R, State R is not entitled to tax the same as per Article 12(1) of the OECD Model which allocates the taxing right only to the residence state, State P. Thus, the partner resident in State R could argue, based on the language of Article 12(1), that State R does not have the right to tax him on his share of the royalty income earned by the partnership since the P-R treaty restricts the taxing right of State R.

However, many countries disagree with this interpretation. Article 12 applies to royalties arising in one State and paid to a resident of the other State. When taxing partner B, State R is taxing its resident on income arising in its territory. To clarify that State R is not prevented from taxing its residents, paragraph 6.1 was inserted to the Commentary on Article 1 of the OECD Model, which reads as under:

‘Where a partnership is treated as a resident of a Contracting State, the provisions of the Convention that restrict the other Contracting State’s right to tax the partnership on its income do not apply to restrict that other State’s right to tax the partners who are its own residents on their share of the income of the partnership. Some states may wish to include in their conventions a provision that expressly confirms a Contracting State’s right to tax resident partners on their share of the income of a partnership that is treated as a resident of the other State.’

The BEPS Report on Action 6 – Preventing Treaty Abuse concluded that the above principle reflected in paragraph 6.1 of the Commentary on Article 1 should be more generally applied to prevent interpretations intended to circumvent the application of a Contracting State’s domestic anti-abuse rules. The report recommends that the principle that treaties do not restrict a State’s right to tax its residents (subject to certain exceptions) should be expressly recognised by introducing a new treaty provision. The new provision is based on the so-called ‘saving clause’ usually found in US tax treaties. The object of such a clause is to ‘save’ the right of a Contracting State to tax its residents. In contrast to the savings clause in the US treaties that apply to residents and citizens, the savings clause inserted into the covered tax agreements by Article 11 of the MLI applies only to residents. The savings clause inserted by Article 11 of the MLI plays merely a clarifying role, unlike the substantial role of the US savings clause due to its more extensive scope.

Article 11 of the MLI is aimed at the Residence State and its tax treatment of its residents. This provision does not impact the source taxation of non-residents. There are several exceptions to this principle listed in Article 11 of the MLI where the rights of the Resident State to tax its residents are intended to be restricted:

a) A correlative or a corresponding adjustment [a provision similar to Article 7(3) or 9(2) of the OECD Model] to be granted to a resident of a Contracting State following an initial adjustment made by the other Contracting State in accordance with the relevant treaty on the profits of a permanent establishment of that enterprise or an associated enterprise;
b) Article 19, which may affect how a Contracting State taxes an individual who is resident of that State if that individual derives income in respect of services rendered to the other Contracting State or a political subdivision or local authority thereof;
c) Article 18 which may provide that pensions or other payments made under the social security legislation of the other Contracting State shall be taxable only in that other State;
d) Article 18 which may provide that pensions and similar payments, annuities, alimony payments, or other maintenance payments arising in the other Contracting State shall be taxable only in that other State;
e) Article 20, which may affect how a Contracting State taxes an individual who is a resident of that State if that individual is also a student who meets the conditions of that Article;
f) Article 23, which requires a Contracting State to provide relief of double taxation to its residents with respect to the income that the other State may tax in accordance with the Convention (including profits that are attributable to a permanent establishment situated in the other Contracting State in accordance with paragraph 2 of Article 7);
g) Article 24, which protects residents of a Contracting State against certain discriminatory taxation practices by that State (such as rules that discriminate between two persons based on their nationality);
h) Article 25, which allows residents of a Contracting State to request that the competent authority of that State consider cases of taxation not in accordance with the Convention;
i) Article 28, which may affect how a Contracting State taxes an individual who is resident of that State when that individual is a member of the diplomatic mission or consular post of the other Contracting State;
j) Any provision in a treaty which otherwise expressly limits a Contracting State’s right to tax its residents or provides expressly that the Contracting State in which an item of income arises has the exclusive right to tax that item of income.

The last item [at serial (j) above] is a residuary provision that refers to the distributive rules granting the Source State the sole right to tax an item of income. For example, Article 7(1) of the India-Bangladesh DTAA provides that the State where a PE is situated has the sole right to tax the profits attributable to that PE and is not impacted by the savings clause. Treaty provisions expressly limiting the tax rate imposable by a Contracting State on its residents are also covered by the exception to the savings clause. An example of such a provision is contained in Article 12(1) of the Israel-Singapore Treaty which states: ‘Royalties arising in a Contracting State and paid to a resident of the other Contracting State may be taxed in that other State. However, the tax so charged in the other Contracting State shall not exceed 20 per cent of the amount of such royalties.’

3.2 Dual-resident situations
The saving clause in Article 11 of the MLI applies to taxation by a Contracting State of its residents. The meaning of residents flows from Article 4 (dealing with Residence) of the tax treaties and not from the domestic tax law. Thus, where a person is resident in both Contracting States within the meaning of Article 4 of the treaty, the tie-breaker rule in Article 4(2) or (3) will determine the State where that person is resident, and the saving clause shall apply accordingly. The State that loses in the tie-breaker does not benefit from the savings clause to retain taxing right over that person even though he is its resident as per its domestic tax law.

3.3 Application of domestic anti-abuse rules
A savings clause also achieves another objective of preserving anti-abuse provisions by the Resident State like the ‘controlled foreign companies’ (‘CFC’) rules. In a CFC regime, the Resident State taxes its residents on income attributable to their participation in certain foreign entities. It has sometimes been argued, based on a possible interpretation of provisions of the Convention such as paragraph 1 of Article 7 and paragraph 5 of Article 10, that this common feature of CFC legislation conflicted with these provisions. The OECD Model Commentary (2017 Update) on Article 1 in paragraph 81 states that Article 1(3) of the Model (containing the saving clause) confirms that any legislation like the CFC rule that results in a State taxing its residents does not conflict with tax conventions.

3.4 India’s position and impact on India’s treaties
India has not made any reservation for the application of Article 11. Forty-one countries have reserved their application leaving 16 CTAs to be modified by inserting the savings clause. Article 11 of the MLI will have only a limited effect on India’s treaties as India does not have domestic CFC rules and treats partnerships as fiscally opaque. However, it is possible that the interpretation of the courts of the distributive rule ‘may be taxed’ in the Source State as ‘shall be taxed only’ in the Source State, thus preventing the taxation by India of such income of its residents could be impacted.

In CIT vs. R.M. Muthaiah [1993] 202 ITR 508 (Kar), the High Court, interpreting the words ‘may be taxed’ in the context of the India-Malaysia Treaty, held that ‘when a power is specifically recognised as vesting in one, exercise of such a power by other, is to be read, as not available; such a recognition of power with the Malaysian Government would take away the said power from the Indian Government; the Agreement thus operates as a bar on the power of the Indian Government in the instant case.’ The High Court concluded that India could not tax its residents on such income. Article 11 of the MLI could undo the decision to enable India to tax its residents, notwithstanding the said ruling. On the other hand, an alternative interpretation could be that ‘may be taxed’ or ‘shall only be taxed’ are distributive rules in treaties that expressly allocate taxing rights to one or both the Contracting States and are covered by the exception listed in Article 11(1)(j) reproduced above. The saving clause is not targeted at them.

OECD’S PILLAR ONE PROPOSAL – A SOLUTION TRAPPED IN A WEB OF COMPLEXITIES

1. TAXATION OF DIGITAL ECONOMY (DE) – A GLOBAL CONCERN
The
digital revolution has improved business processes and bolstered
innovation across all sectors of the economy. With technological
advancements, businesses can operate in multiple countries remotely,
without any physical presence. However, the current international tax
system, which dates back to the 1920s, is primarily driven by physical
presence and hence is obsolete and incapable of effectively taxing the
DE1.

In the absence of efficient tax rules, taxation of DE has
become a key Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS) concern all over
the world. While the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
Development’s (OECD) BEPS 1.0 project resolved several issues, the
project could not iron out the concerns of taxation of the DE. Hence,
OECD and G20 launched the BEPS 2.0 project wherein OECD along with 135
countries is working towards a global consensus-based solution under the
ambitious ‘Pillar One’ project.

2. BLUEPRINT OF PILLAR ONE PROPOSAL – A DISCUSSION DRAFT TO BE WORKED FURTHER
OECD’s
Pillar One project proposes to modify existing profit allocation rules
in such a way that a portion of the profits earned by a Multinational
Enterprise (MNE) group is re-allocated to market jurisdictions (even if
the MNE group does not have any physical presence in such market
jurisdictions), thereby expanding the taxing rights of market
jurisdictions over MNEs’ profits.

As part of the Pillar One
project, a report titled ‘Tax Challenges Arising from Digitalisation –
Report on the Pillar One Blueprint’ (referred to as ‘Blueprint’ or
report hereafter) was released in October, 2020 which represents the
extensive technical work done by OECD along with members of the BEPS
inclusive framework (BEPS IF)2 on Pillar One.

Being a Blueprint,
it is more in the nature of a discussion draft. It does not reflect
agreement of BEPS IF members who participated in the discussion on
Pillar One proposals and there are many political and technical issues
which still need to be resolved. However, this Blueprint will act as a
solid basis for future discussions. Further, BEPS IF members have agreed
to keep working on Pillar One proposals reflected in the Blueprint with
a view to bring the process to a successful conclusion by mid-2021.

 

1   https://www.europarl.europa.eu/RegData/etudes/STUD/2016/579002/IPOL_STU(2016)579002_EN.pdf

3.  EVENTUAL IMPLEMENTATION OF PILLAR ONE REPORT – A CHALLENGING TASK

The
implementation of Pillar One proposals, if and when concluded, will
require modification of domestic law provisions by member countries, as
also the treaties signed by them. The proposal is to implement ‘a new
multilateral convention’ which would co-exist with the existing tax
treaty network. However, the architecture of the proposed multilateral
convention is still being developed by OECD and is not discussed in this
Blueprint.

4. OVERVIEW OF PILLAR ONE REPORT

The Pillar One report primarily focuses on three proposals:

(a) Amount A – New taxing right:
To recollect, Pillar One aims to allocate certain minimum taxing rights
to market jurisdictions where MNEs earn revenues by selling their goods
/ services either physically or remotely. In this regard, new profit
allocation rules are proposed wherein a portion of the MNEs’ book
profits would be allocated to market jurisdictions on formulary basis.
The intent is to necessarily allocate a certain portion of MNE profits
to a market jurisdiction even if sales are completed remotely. Such
portion of MNE profit recommended by Pillar One to be allocated to
market jurisdictions is termed as ‘Amount A’.

(b) Amount B – Safe harbour for routine marketing and distribution activities:
Arm’s length pricing (ALP) of distribution arrangements has been a key
area of concern in transfer pricing (TP) amongst tax authorities as well
as taxpayers. In order to enhance tax certainty, reduce controversy,
simplify administration under TP laws and reduce compliance costs, the
framework of Amount B is proposed. ‘Amount B’ is a fixed return for
related party distributors that perform routine marketing and
distribution activities. Unlike Amount A which can allocate profits even
if sales are carried out remotely, Amount B is applicable only when an
MNE group has some form of physical presence carrying out marketing and
distribution functions in the market jurisdiction. Currently, the report
suggests that Amount B would work independent of Amount A and there is
no discussion on the inter-play of the two amounts in the report.
Besides, even if Amount A is inapplicable to an MNE group (for reasons
discussed below), the MNE group may still need to comply with Amount B.

(c) Dispute prevention and resolution mechanism:

The report recognises that it would be impractical if tax
administrations of all affected market jurisdictions assess and audit an
MNE’s calculation and allocation of Amount A. It is also unlikely that
all disputes concerning Amount A rules could be resolved by existing
bilateral dispute resolution tools such as Mutual Agreement Procedure
(MAP) and Advanced Pricing Agreement (APA). To remove uncertainty, a
clear and administrable mandatory binding dispute prevention process is
proposed in the report to prevent and resolve disputes specifically
related to Amount A. Under this process, a detailed consultation would
take place amongst taxpayers and tax authorities of market jurisdictions
before tax adjustments are made to the MNE’s assessment.

Considering
that Amount A is the heart of the Pillar One report, this article
focuses on the concept, computation and taxation of Amount A.

 

2              BEPS
IF was formed by OECD in January, 2016 wherein more than 135 countries
participate on equal footing in developing standards on BEPS-related issues and
reviewing and monitoring its consistent implementation


5. CONDITIONS FOR APPLICABILITY OF AMOUNT A TO MNE GROUP – IMPACT OF MATERIALITY
To
recollect, Amount A represents the amount recommended by the Pillar One
report to be allocated, for the purpose of taxability, to market
jurisdictions even if, as per existing taxation rules, no amount may be
allocable to the market jurisdiction. Some fundamental conditions are
proposed on the applicability of Amount A and subject to these
conditions alone Pillar One recommends allocation of MNE profits of a
group to market jurisdictions.

Each of the following conditions
needs to be satisfied by the MNE group for triggering of Amount A
allocation. Non-compliance with any of the conditions may result in
complete non-trigger of allocation:
a) MNEs having consolidated
global revenues (from all businesses) exceeding €750mn as per
consolidated financial statement (CFS) prepared at the parent entity
level under the applicable accounting standards;
b) MNEs engaged in ‘Automated digital service’ (ADS) and ‘Consumer-facing business’ (CFB);
c)
MNEs earning revenues of more than €250mn from ADS and CFB activities
carried out outside their home jurisdiction. The definition of an MNE’s
home jurisdiction is still being developed. For instance, one option
being explored is where the group is headquartered or where the ultimate
parent entity is a tax resident; and
d) MNEs earning more than routine profits.

Some further comments / elaborations of the conditions enumerated above are as under:

Pre-condition
for allocation of Amount A to market jurisdictions

Comments
/ observations

a.
MNEs having consolidated global revenues (from all businesses) exceeding
€750mn as per consolidated financial statement (CFS) prepared at the parent
entity level under the applicable accounting standards; and

This addresses the factor of materiality
– small and medium-sized MNEs are proposed to be excluded from the Amount A
regime in order to ensure the compliance and administrative burden is
proportionate to the expected tax benefits

b.  MNEs engaged in ‘Automated digital service’
(ADS) and ‘Consumer-facing business’ (CFB); and

   Given
globalisation and the digitalisation of the economy, these businesses can,
with or without the benefit of local physical operations, participate in an
active and sustained manner in the economic life of a market jurisdiction

   ADS is defined
to mean services which require minimal human intervention on part of service
provider through a system (i.e., automated) and such services are provided
over internet or an electronic network (i.e., digital). To illustrate, ADS
cover online advertising services, digital

    content
services, online gaming

 

    services, cloud
computing services, etc.

   CFB is defined
as businesses that supply goods or services, directly or indirectly, that are
of a type commonly sold to consumers, and / or license or otherwise exploits
intellectual property that is connected to the supply of such goods or
services. It primarily covers business of sale of goods and services which
are not regarded as ADS. It also extends to cover licensing and franchising
businesses

   Specific
exclusion from Amount A is provided to certain sectors such as natural
resources; banking and financial services; construction, sale and leasing of
residential property; and international airline and shipping businesses

c.  MNEs earning revenues of more than €250mn
from ADS and CFB activities carried out outside the MNE group’s home
jurisdiction. Definition of MNE’s home jurisdiction is still being developed.
For instance, one option being explored is where the group is headquartered
or where the ultimate parent entity is tax resident; and

Where MNEs primarily earn revenue from
ADS and / or CFB businesses carried out in the home jurisdiction itself and
the business in market countries is only meagre, applying Amount A is likely
to have a limited tax impact because the Amount A formula may allocate
profits to the same jurisdiction that already has taxing rights under
existing tax rules

d.
MNEs earning more than routine profits. While the discussions are still
ongoing, a profitability ratio (i.e., ratio of profit to sales) of 10% is
being considered as routine profit and hence, MNEs which carry on in-scope
business but have losses3 or have profitability margin of less
than 10% as per books need not compute Amount A

MNEs that earn only routine profits are
outside the scope of Pillar One. Routine profit is a reward for undertaking
usual business taking risks. Usually, if there is physical presence of an MNE
group in any market jurisdiction for the purpose of effecting sales in the
market, under transfer pricing rules, routine profits are usually allocated
to such market jurisdictions

However, Pillar One is built on the
basis that where an MNE group earns bumper profits, market jurisdiction
contributes to accrual of more than routine profit to the MNE group
(irrespective of whether or not the MNE group has any physical presence in
such market jurisdiction) and hence,

 

market jurisdictions deserve a share in
such bumper profit. But if the MNE group does not earn super profits, the
issue of allocation of additional profits to market countries does not arise

 

 

3   If an MNE has losses,
such MNE need not compute Amount A but instead the losses may be allowed to be
carried forward. In this regard, a special loss carry-forward regime for Amount
A will be developed by OECD which is currently under discussion

MNEs who do not fulfil any of the above conditionswill be
outside the Amount A profit allocation rules. However, where the above
conditions are fulfilled, the MNE would need to determine Amount A as
per the proposed new profit allocation rules (which would be determined
on formulary basis at the MNE level, refer Para 7) and allocate Amount A
to eligible market jurisdictions as discussed in Para 6.

The above conditions on applicability of Amount A to MNE groups can be understood by the following examples:

Particulars

Scenario
1

Scenario
2

Scenario
3

Facts

Name of MNE group

ABC group

PQR group

MNO group

Nature of business

ADS

CFB

ADS

Home jurisdiction of group

France

Germany

Spain

Consolidated global revenue of the group

500 mn

1000 mn

1000 mn

Revenue earned by the group from outside
home jurisdiction

100 mn

200 mn

500 mn

Profitability ratio of the group

8%

15%

-5%

Analysis of satisfaction of conditions

Global revenue test (€750mn) as per
books

Q

R

R

Foreign revenues from ADS and CFB test (€250mn)

Q

Q

R

Routine profitability test (whether
profit as per books exceeds 10%)

Q

R

Q

Impact

Amount A not applicable to ABC group

Amount A not applicable to PQR group
since revenue from outside home jurisdiction is not more than €250mn

Amount A not applicable to MNO group
since group is incurring losses

6. AMOUNT A ALLOCABLE ONLY TO ELIGIBLE MARKET JURISDICTIONS

MNE
groups that pass all the tests mentioned in Para 5 will need to
determine Amount A and allocate the same to market jurisdictions.

(i) Sales, marketing and distribution activities pre-requisite to qualify as market jurisdiction:
At the outset it should be noted that Amount A is a specific regime for
allocation of super profits to market jurisdictions. Market
jurisdiction is defined as jurisdictions where an MNE group sells its
products or services, or in the case of highly digitalised businesses,
jurisdictions where the MNE provides services to users or solicits and
collects data or content contributions from users. Thus, if an MNE is
carrying out manufacturing function or research and development which
are completely unrelated to sales, marketing and distribution functions
in a jurisdiction and there is no sales function carried out there, such
jurisdictions would not qualify as a ‘market jurisdiction’ and, hence,
not eligible for Amount A.
(ii) Not all market jurisdictions will be eligible for Amount A allocation:
As aforesaid, Amount A is applicable only to the MNEs engaged in ADS
and CFB activities. Amount A will be allocable to a market jurisdiction
only where an MNE group has a reasonable level of ADS and CFB activity
in that market jurisdiction and such markets are termed as ‘eligible
market jurisdictions’. In order to determine a reasonable level of
activity, certain tests are proposed as discussed below.

6.1 Likelihood of threshold for ADS business per market jurisdiction

a.
To recollect, ADS business means services provided with minimal or no
human involvement over Internet or an electronic network. These
businesses may include online advertising services, online search
engines, social media platform, digital content service, etc.
b. The
very nature of ADS is such that these businesses will always have a
significant and sustained engagement with market jurisdictions remotely,
i.e., without physical presence. Hence, for ADS businesses a simple
revenue threshold test is being proposed to determine whether the MNE
has a nexus with that market jurisdiction. The revenue threshold that
can be prescribed is still being negotiated.
c. For example, assume
that per market nexus revenue threshold for ADS business is proposed to
be €50mn. In such a case, even where the MNE group turnover from the ADS
business may be €1000mn but revenue in India from ADS only €10mn, India
being a relatively insignificant market contributing revenue cannot be
considered as an eligible market jurisdiction to which Amount A is
allocable as chargeable profit.
d. Alternatively, if revenue in India
from ADS is €100mn (and the MNE fulfilled other conditions as stated in
Para 5), India qualifies as eligible market jurisdiction entitled to
tax a proportion of Amount A – regardless of the fact that there is no
physical presence in India, or regardless of the fact that the
traditional taxation rules would have failed to capture such taxability.

6.2 Likelihood of threshold for CFB business per market jurisdiction

a.
Unlike ADS, the ability of an MNE to participate remotely in a market
jurisdiction is less pronounced in the CFB model. MNEs usually have some
form of presence in market jurisdictions (for example, in the form of
distribution entities) to carry out consumer-facing businesses.
b.
Hence, countries participating in the discussions believe that a mere
revenue threshold test may not denote the active and sustained
engagement with the market jurisdiction and the presence of certain
additional indicators (‘plus factors’) may be necessary. These plus
factors which can be used to establish a nexus are still being debated
and developed at the OECD level.

Market jurisdictions that meet
the nexus test will qualify as ‘eligible market jurisdictions’ for the
MNE group and will be eligible for a share of Amount A of such MNE group
to be taxed in the market jurisdiction. Such allocation of Amount A
will yield tax revenue for that market jurisdiction irrespective of
whether the MNE group has an entity or PE in that market country, or
whether any profits are offered to tax in that market country under
existing tax laws.

7. DETERMINATION OF AMOUNT A OF MNE GROUP THAT WILL BE ALLOCABLE TO MARKET JURISDICTIONS

a.
The norms of profit allocation suggested in the Blueprint are very
different from the taxability norms which are known to taxpayers as of
now. Hence, the exercise suggested in the report should be studied on an
independent basis without attempting to rationalise or compare it with
the conclusion to which one would have arrived as per traditional norms
of taxation.

b. The philosophy behind the report is that no MNE
group can make sizeable or abnormal or bumper profit without the
patronage and support that it gets from the market jurisdiction. There
is bound to be some contribution made by the market jurisdictions to the
ability of the MNE group to earn more than routine4 (abnormal) profit.
Hence, in relation to MNE groups which have been successful enough to
secure more than 10% routine (i.e., abnormal / bumper profits), some
part of such bumper profits should be offered to tax in every market
jurisdiction which has contributed to the ability to earn profit at the
group level. Consequently, if the MNE group’s profits are up to routine
or reasonable, or if the MNE is in losses, the report does not seek to
consider any allocation of profits to the market jurisdiction.

c.
As to how much profit of an MNE group qualifies as normal or reasonable
or routine profit and how much qualifies as abnormal or bumper or
non-routine profit is yet to be decided multilaterally amongst all
countries participating in the Pillar One discussions. Currently, (but,
provisionally) the report suggests that countries are in favour of
considering a profit margin of 10% of book revenue as normal profits,
i.e., 10% profit margin will be considered as ‘routine profits’
warranting no allocation, and any profit earned by the MNE group above
10% alone will be considered as ‘non-routine profits’ warranting
allocation to the market jurisdiction.

d. For example, if the
consolidated turnover of an MNE group as per CFS is €1000mn on which it
has earned book profits5 of €50mn as per CFS, its profit margin is only
5%. Since the profit earned by the MNE group is only 5% (i.e., within
the routine profit margin of 10%), the MNE group is considered to have
earned profits due to normal / routine entrepreneurial risk and efforts
of the MNE group and nothing may be considered as serious or abnormal
enough to permit market jurisdictions to complain that, notwithstanding
traditional taxation rules, some income should be offered to tax in the
market jurisdiction.

 

4   The report uses the
expression ‘residual profits’ to convey what we call here abnormal or
non-routine or super profit

5   The report also proposed
adjustments to the book profits by adding back of income tax expenses, expenses
incurred against public policy like bribes, penalty, reducing dividend and
gains on transfer of asset, etc., to arrive at a standardised base of profits

e.
Alternatively, if the consolidated turnover of the MNE group as per CFS
is €1000mn on which it has earned book profit of €400mn as per CFS, its
profit margin as per the books is 40%. In such a case, the profits
earned by the group beyond 10% (i.e., 40%-10%=30%) will be considered as
non-routine profits. Some part of such non-routine profits will be
considered as having been contributed by market jurisdictions and need
to be allocated to the eligible market jurisdiction as discussed in the
Para below6.

f. Once it is determined that the MNE group has
received non-routine profit in excess of 10% (in our example, excess
profit is 30% of turnover), the report is intended to carry out an
exercise where a portion of the excess profit is to be allocated to the
market factor of a market jurisdiction.

g. It is the philosophy
that the consumers of the country, by purchasing the goods or enjoying
the services, contribute to the overall MNE profit and but for such
market and consumers, it would not have been possible to effect the
sales. However, at the same time it is not as if the entirety of the
non-routine or super profit is being earned because of the presence of
the market. There are many other factors such as trade intangibles,
capital, research, technology, etc., which may have built up the overall
success of the MNE group.

h. As per present estimates and
thinking discussed in the report, about 80% of the excess profit or
super profit (in our example, 80% of super profit of 30%) may be
recognised as pertaining to many different strengths of the MNE group
other than the market factor. It is the residual 20% of the super profit
component which is recognised as being solely contributed by the
strength of the market factor. Hence, the present report on Pillar One
discusses how best to allocate 20% of the super profit (in our example,
20% of 30%) to market jurisdictions. The report is not concerned with
allocation or treatment of the 80% component of the super profit which
is, as per the present text of Pillar One, pertaining to factors other
than market forces.

 

6   Throughout the article,
this is assumed to be the applicable fact pattern of excess or more than
routine profit

i. A tabulated version of the illustrative fact pattern and proposed allocation rules of Amount A is as under:

Particulars

Amount

Consolidated turnover of MNE group

1000 mn

Consolidated book profit

400 mn

% of book profit to turnover

40%

Less: Allowance for routine profit

(10%)

Excess profit over routine profit, also
loosely for abnormal or super profit

30%

Of this, 80% of super profit of 30% is
considered as pertaining to the strength of non-market factors and having no
nexus with contribution of the market jurisdiction (and hence out of Pillar
One proposal)

24% of 1000 mn

20% of super profit of 30% being
considered as fair allocation having nexus with contribution of market
jurisdictions – known also as Amount A recommended by the report – to be
allocated to different market jurisdictions

6% of 1000 mn

j. Some countries participating in the discussion are of the
view that allocation of 20% of non-routine profits to market countries
is minuscule and a higher margin should be allocated since the overall
success of the MNE group can be accomplished only as a result of
consumption in the markets. This article goes by the ball-park
recommendations of 20% discussed in the report for the purpose of
understanding the concept – though it may be noted that the
multilaterally agreed allocation percentage may be different.

k.
Even if under existing tax norms no profits are taxable in a market
jurisdiction (say due to no physical presence), Amount A will ensure
market countries get right to tax over 20% of non-routine profits of the
MNE group and that the market jurisdictions should not be left high and
dry without right to tax income.

8. CORRELATION OF INTERIM MEASURE ALREADY IMPLEMENTED BY INDIA, PENDING FINAL OUTCOME OF PILLAR ONE REPORT AND / OR BEPS ACTIONS

As
we are aware, even without waiting for the final outcome of the Pillar
One recommendations, India has already introduced in its domestic law
the equalisation levy which seeks to tax 2% of the digital or remote
sales as taxable profit of a non-resident and 6% of advertisement
services rendered by a non-resident.

It may be noted that all
countries participating in Pillar One discussions have agreed to
withdraw relevant unilateral actions introduced by them in their
domestic laws once Pillar One recommendations are successfully
implemented. Hence, India will hopefully withdraw the equalisation levy
once a Pillar One consensus-based solution is reached.

It is,
therefore, submitted that the Pillar One discussions may be studied as
an independent exercise rather than trying to compare them with the
interim measures. No attempt has, therefore, been made in this article
to explain or review the provisions of the equalisation levy. The
article concentrates on Pillar One proposals which are likely to
substitute the present levy.

9. FACTORS WHICH INFLUENCE QUANTUM OF ALLOCATION TO MARKET JURISDICTIONS
Broadly,
and with respect to marketing and sales activity, an MNE can carry out
operations in a market jurisdiction in the following manner:
(a)    Sales through remote presence
(b)    Presence in form of Limited risk distributor (LRD)
(c)    Presence in form of Full risk distributor (FRD)
(d)    Presence in dependent agent permanent establishment (DAPE).

Assuming
that there is no physical presence of the MNE group in a market
jurisdiction, say, India, Amount A of the MNE group determined as per
Para 7 above would be allocated to market jurisdictions on the basis of
revenue generated from each market jurisdiction. If, for example,
turnover from India is €100mn, 6% of India turnover, which equals to
€6mn, will be allocated for taxability to India.

However, if the
MNE group has a physical presence in India as well (say in the form of
LRD or FRD or DAPE), there may be a trigger for taxability in India even
as per existing taxation rules. In any such case, there could be some
variation in the rules relating to the allocation of Amount A to India.
Taxation of Amount A under each form of business presence is explained
below.

Sales is only through remote presence:
a.
Consider an example where an MNE group engaged in providing standard
online teaching services earns subscription revenue from users across
the world. In India, the group does not have any form of physical
presence and all the functions and IPs related to the Indian market are
performed and owned by a Swiss company (Swiss Co).

b. The financials of the MNE group suggest as under:

Facts:

MNE group turnover as per CFS

€1000 mn

Profit before tax (PBT) as per CFS

€400 mn

Group profit margin as per CFS

40% of group turnover

India turnover

€100 mn

c. Under existing tax rules, Swiss Co’s income is outside
the tax net [since the service is not in the nature of fees for
technical services (FTS) and Swiss Co does not have a permanent
establishment (PE) in India], thus all profits earned from the India
market (routine as well as non-routine) are taxed only in Switzerland in
the hands of Swiss Co.
d. Though India does not have taxing rights
under the existing tax rules (due to no physical presence), the
Blueprint would ensure that Amount A be allocated to India. As explained
in Para 7, Amount A recommended by the report to be allocated to
different market jurisdictions would come to 6% of the turnover. Since
turnover from India is €100mn, 6% of India turnover, equal to €6mn, will
be allocated for taxability to India.
e. However, an issue arises as
to which entity will pay taxes on Amount A in India. In this regard,
the report recognises that Amount A will co-exist with the existing tax
rules and such overlay of Amount A on existing tax rules may result in
double taxation since Amount A does not add any additional profit to the
MNE group but instead reallocates a portion of the existing non-routine
profits to market jurisdictions.
f. In the given example, all
profits (routine as well as non-routine) from the India business are
taxed in the hands of the Swiss Co under the existing tax rules. In
other words, the €6m allocated to India under Amount A is already being
taxed in Switzerland in the hands of Swiss Co due to the existing
transfer pricing norms. Hence, Swiss Co may be identified as the ‘paying
entity’ in India and be obligated to pay tax on Amount A in India.
Subsequently, Swiss Co can claim credit of taxes paid in India in its
residence jurisdiction (i.e., Switzerland).

9.2 Presence in form of limited risk distributor (LRD)
a.
There are a number of cases where an MNE group may not have full-scale
presence in the market jurisdiction but may have an LRD who is assisting
in the conclusion of sales. In a way, the LRD’s presence is
contributing to routine sales functions on a physical basis in such a
market jurisdiction. It is not a category of work which contributes to
any super profit but is taking care of logistics and routine for which
no more than routine profits can be attributed.
b. Consider an
example; a Finland-based MNE group is engaged in the sale of mobile
phones across the world. The headquarter company (FinCo) is the
intellectual property (IP) owner and principal distributor. The group
has an LRD in India (ICo) which performs routine sales functions under
the purview of the overall policy developed by FinCo. The financials of
the MNE group suggest as under:

Facts:

Group turnover as per CFS

€1000 mn

PBT as per CFS

€400 mn

Group profit margin as per CFS

40% of group turnover

India turnover

€100 mn

c. Under existing TP principles, assume that ICo is
remunerated @ 2% of India revenue for its routine functions and the
balance is retained by FinCo which is not taxed in India. In other
words, all profits attributable to non-routine functions are attributed
to FinCo and hence not taxable in India.
d. As explained in Para 7,
Amount A recommended by the report to be allocated to different market
jurisdictions would come to 6% of the turnover. Since the turnover from
India is €100mn, 6% of Indian turnover equal to €6mn will be allocated
for taxability in India.
e. India also has taxability right with
regard to the LRD function @ 2% of India turnover. This right is shared
by India so as to compensate for the routine functions carried out in
India. No part of the super profit element is contained therein, whereas
Amount A contemplates allocation of a part of the super profit.
Considering this, there is no concession or reduction in the allocation
of Amount A merely because there is taxability @ 2% of turnover for
routine efforts in the form of an LRD. The overall taxability right of
India will comprise of compensation towards LRD function as increased by
allocation of super profits in the form of Amount A.
f. Besides,
even if Indian tax authorities, during ICo’s TP assessment, allege that
ICo’s remuneration should be increased from 2% to 5% of India turnover,
there would still not be any implication on Amount A allocable to India
since ICo’s increase in remuneration for performing more routine
functions and no element of super profit forms part of such
remuneration.
g. While tax on compensation towards LRD function will
be payable by ICo, an issue arises as to which entity should pay tax on
Amount A allocable to India. Since FinCo is the IP owner and principal
distributor, existing TP rules would allocate all super profits
pertaining to the India market to FinCo. Thus, the super profits of €6mn
allocated to India under Amount A are already being taxed in Finland in
the hands of FinCo on the basis of the existing TP norms. Hence, the
Blueprint suggests that FinCo should be obligated to pay tax on Amount A
in India and then FinCo can claim credit of taxes paid in India in its
residence jurisdiction (i.e., Finland) against income taxable under
existing tax laws. Accordingly, ICo would pay tax in India on LRD
functions (i.e., routine functions) whereas FinCo would pay tax on super
profits allocated to India in the form of Amount A.

9.3 Presence in form of Full risk distributor (FRD)
a.
As a variation to the above, an MNE group may appoint an FRD in a
market jurisdiction. An FRD performs important functions such as market
strategy, pricing, product placement and also undertakes high risk qua
the market jurisdiction. In essence, the FRD performs the marketing and
distribution function in entirety. Hence, unlike an LRD, an FRD is
remunerated not only with routine returns but also certain non-routine
returns.
b. Consider an example where a French headquartered MNE
group engaged in the business of fashion apparels carries out business
in India through an FRD model. All key marketing and distribution
functions related to the Indian market are undertaken by the FRD in
India (ICo). Applying TP principles, ICo is remunerated at 10% of India
sales.
c. The financials of the MNE group are as under:

Facts:

Group turnover as per CFS

€1000 mn

PBT as per CFS

€400 mn

Group profit margin as per CFS

40% of group turnover

India turnover

€100 mn

d. To recollect, Amount A contemplates allocation of a part of
an MNE’s super profits to market jurisdictions, India being one of them.
Had there been no physical presence in India, as per calculations
indicated at Para 9.1, part of the super profits allocable to India as
Amount A would come to 6% of the India turnover (i.e., €6mn).
e. Now,
ICo as an FRD is already being taxed in India. This represents
taxability in India as per traditional rules for performing certain
marketing functions within India which contribute to routine as also
super profits functions in India. This is, therefore, a case where, in
the hands of ICo, as per traditional rules, part of the super profit
element of the MNE is separately getting taxed in the hands of ICo.
f.
In such a case, the report assumes that while up to 2% of India
turnover the taxability can be attributed towards routine functions of
ICo (instead of towards super profit functions), the taxability in
addition to 2% of India turnover in the hands of ICo is attributable to
marketing functions which contribute to super profit.
g. Since India
is already taxing some portion of the super profits in the hands of ICo
under existing tax rules, allocation of Amount A to India (which is a
portion of super profits) creates the risk of double counting. In order
to ensure there is no double counting of super profits in India under
Amount A regime and the existing TP rules, the Blueprint recognises that
Amount A allocated to India (i.e., 6%) should be adjusted to the extent
super profits are already taxed in the market jurisdiction. In order to
eliminate double counting, the following steps are suggested7:
(i)
Find out the amount as would have been allocable to market jurisdiction
as per Amount A (in our illustration, 6% of India turnover of €100mn).
(ii)
Fixed routine profit which may be expected to be earned within India
for routine operations in India. While this profit margin needs to be
multilaterally agreed upon, for this example we assume that additional
profit of 2% of India turnover will be expected to be earned in India on
account of physical operations in India. Additional 2% of India
turnover can be considered allocable to India in lieu of routine sales
and marketing functions in India – being the allocation which does not
interfere with the super profit element.
(iii) The desired minimum
allocation to market jurisdiction of India for routine and non-routine
activities can be expected to be 8% of the India turnover, on an
aggregate of (i) and (ii) above.
(iv) This desired minimum return at
step (iii) needs to be compared with the allocation which has been made
in favour of India as per TP analysis.

?    If the amount
allocated to FRD in India is already more than 8% of turnover, no
further amount will be allocable under the umbrella of Amount A.
?  
 On the other hand, if the remuneration taxed under TP analysis is <
8%, Amount A taxable will be reduced to the difference of TP return and
amount calculated at (iii).

?    However, if the return under TP
analysis is < 2%, then it is assumed that FRD is, at the highest,
taxed as if it is performing routine functions and has not been
allocated any super profit under TP laws. The allocation may have been
considered towards super profit only if it exceeded 2% of India
turnover. And hence, in such case, allocation of Amount A will continue
to be 6% of India turnover towards super profit elements. There can be
no reduction therefrom on the premise that TP analysis has already been
carried out in India. It may also be noted that since Amount A
determined as per step (i) above is 6% of India turnover, an allocation
in excess of this amount cannot be made under Amount A.

 

7   Referred to as marketing
and distribution safe harbour regime in the report

h. Once the adjusted Amount A is determined as per the steps above, one would need to determine
which entity would pay tax on such Amount A in India. In this case, since France Co and ICo both perform function
asset
risk (FAR) activities that result in revenue from the India market, the
Blueprint recognises that choosing the paying entity (i.e., entity
obligated to pay tax on Amount A in India) will require further
discussions / deliberations. Further, the report also recognises that
taxes may have been paid in the market country on royalty income.
However, whether and how such taxes paid can be adjusted against tax on
Amount A is currently being deliberated at the OECD level.

i. In the fact pattern below, ABC group, engaged in CFB business, carries out sale in India under the FRD model.

Facts:

Group turnover as per CFS

€1000 mn

PBT as per CFS

€400 mn

Group profit margin

40%

India turnover

€100 mn

TP remuneration to FRD in India

     Scenario 1

     Scenario 2

     Scenario 3

 

10% of India turnover

5% of India turnover

1% of India turnover

Amount A allocable to India
(6% of 100 mn)

6 mn

Elimination of double counting of non-routine profits in India under different scenarios:

 

 

Particulars

Scenario
1

Scenario
2

Scenario
3

a.

Amount A allocable to India (as
determined above)

6%

6%

6%

b.

Return towards routine functions (which
OECD considers tolerable additional allocation in view of presence in India)

2%

2%

2%

c.

Sum of a + b (This is the sum of the
routine and non-routine profits that the OECD expects Indian FRD to earn)

8%

8%

8%

d.

TP
remuneration to FRD in India

10%

5%

1%

e.

Final Amount A to be allocated to India

No Amount A allocable since FRD in India
is already remunerated above OECD’s expectation of 8%

3%,

OECD expects Indian FRD to earn 8% but
it is remunerated at 5%. Hence, only 3% to be allocated as Amount A [instead
of 6% as determined at (a)]

 

6%,

No reduction in Amount A since OECD
intends only to eliminate double counting of non-routine profits and
where existing TP returns is less than fixed return towards routine
functions, it is clear that no non-routine profit is allocated to India under
existing tax laws

9.4 Presence in form of DAPE

a.
The report recognises that the MNE groups may have a presence in a
market jurisdiction in the form of PE as well. A DAPE usually is an
agent in the market jurisdiction who undertakes sales or secures orders
for its non-resident principal.
b. The manner in which Amount A would
be taxed in a market jurisdiction where an MNE group operates through a
DAPE model would depend on the functional profile of the DAPE. If the
DAPE only performs minimum risk-oriented routine functions, the
taxability of Amount A may be similar to the LRD scenario discussed at
Para 9.2. On the other hand, where the DAPE performs high-risk
functions, the taxability of Amount A would be similar to the FRD
scenario discussed at Para 9.3.

10. COMPREHENSIVE CASE STUDY ON WORKING AND ALLOCATION OF AMOUNT A
FACTS
?    ABC group is a German headquartered group engaged in the sale of mobile phones which qualifies as CFB activity.
?  
 The ultimate parent entity is German Co (GCo) which owns and performs
development, enhancement, maintenance, protection and exploitation
(DEMPE) functions related to the MNE group’s IP.
?    ABC group makes sales across the world. As per ABC group’s CFS,
o    Global consolidated group revenue is €1000mn
o    Group PBT is €400mn
o    Group PBT margin is 40%
?    ABC group follows a different sale model in the different countries in which it operates:

Particulars

France

UK

India

Brazil

Sales model

Remote presence

LRD

FRD

DAPE performing all key functions and
risk-related Brazil market

Sales

100

200

400

300

TP remuneration

NA

2%

10%

5%

? All countries (France, UK, India, Brazil) qualify as eligible market jurisdictions

Computation of Amount A at MNE level:

Particulars

 

Profit margin

Amounts

PBT of the group

(A)

40%

400

Less: Routine profits
(10% of €1000Mn)

(B)

10%

100

Non-routine profits

C = A-B

30%

300

Profits attributable to non-market
jurisdiction

D = 80% of C

24%

240

Profits attributable to market
jurisdictions (Amount A)

E = C-D

6%

60

Allocation of Amount A to respective market jurisdictions:
   

 

Particulars

France

UK

India

Brazil

 

Sales
model

Remote presence

LRD

FRD

DAPE

a.

Amount A allocable (as determined above)

6%

6%

6%

6%

b.

Fixed return towards routine functions
(as calibrated by OECD)

Marketing and distribution safe harbour
regime – NA since MNE has no presence or limited risk presence

2%

2%

c.

Sum of a + b

8%

8%

d.

TP
remuneration to FRD in India

10%

5%

e.

Final Amount A to be allocated

6%

6%

NIL since FRD in India is already
remunerated above OECD’s expectation of 8%

3%

OECD expects DAPE to earn 8% but it is
remunerated at 5%. Hence, only 3% to be allocated as Amount A

f.

Entity obligated to pay Amount A

GCo (FAR analysis would indicate that
GCo performs all key functions and assumes risk related to France and UK
market which helps to earn non-routine profits from these markets)

NA, since there is no Amount A allocated
to India

Depending on FAR analysis, Amount A may
be payable by GCo or DAPE or both on pro rata basis

11. UNITED NATION’S EFFORTS TOWARDS TAXATION OF DIGITAL ECONOMY
While
OECD is working with BEPS IF members to develop a solution to
effectively tax the digital economy, some members of the United Nations
(UN) digital taxation sub-committee have raised concerns on OECD’s
proposed solution. For example, concerns are raised that Pillar One will
introduce a great deal of complexity. Besides, the expected modest
revenue impact of Pillar One does not justify the large-scale changes in
the system of taxing MNEs8.

As an alternate solution, UN has
proposed to introduce a new Article in the United Nations Model
Convention which would apply to income from ADS (automated digital
services, i.e., services provided with minimal or no human involvement
over Internet or an electronic network). A specific inclusion of the ADS
article would ensure that such highly-digitalised services do not fall
under the general business profits article (i.e., Article 7) and hence
the source countries may be able to tax such income even in the absence
of a PE.

The ADS Article proposed by the UN is designed along the
lines of royalty, dividend, FTS articles, i.e., taxing rights to source
state, gross basis taxation, concept of beneficial owner, payer and PE
source rule, ALP adjustment, etc. Additionally, an optional net basis
taxation is proposed where the beneficial owner of the ADS income will
be taxed on a net basis instead of on gross income. Under the net basis,
the taxable amount will be determined on the basis of a normative
formula which is currently being discussed at the UN level.

A comparison of UN’s proposal for digital taxation and OECD’s Amount A proposal indicates as under:

Particulars

ADS
Article proposed by UN

OECD’s
proposed Amount A

Level of taxability

Entity level

MNE group level

Taxes remote presence beyond
conventional PE

Yes

Yes

Activities covered9

ADS

ADS and CFB

Monetary threshold for applicability

No threshold (countries may adopt local
thresholds if required)

Global revenue threshold and in-scope
foreign de minimis threshold

Gross vs. Net

Provides option to taxpayer to choose
between tax on gross consideration and taxation on net basis

Net basis (Amount A is a share of MNE
profits)

Taxable amount

Gross basis: Gross consideration

Net basis: Taxable amount to be
determined on formulary basis

Taxable amount to be determined on
formulary basis

Rate of tax

Gross basis: 3-4% of transaction value

Net basis: Domestic tax rate

Domestic tax rate of market jurisdiction

Taxing right allocated to

Source country

Eligible market jurisdictions

Source rule

Payer or PE-based source rule

Market jurisdictions that meet tests as
discussed in Para 6

Tax-bearing entity

Recipient or beneficial owner of ADS
income

MNE group entity identified as paying
entity

Treatment of losses

Gross basis: Not considered

Net basis: No tax in case of losses (No
clarity on treatment of past losses)

No Amount A allocation when MNE is in
losses, losses would be carried forward and past losses can be considered

Implementation

New MLI approach or bilateral

New MLI to be drawn to implement Amount
A

Dispute resolution

Existing MAP or domestic route

Customised tax certainty or dispute
resolution process being formalised

Inter-play with existing business
profits rule

Where Article 12B would apply, income
would fall outside PE taxation

Amount A to work alongside existing tax
rules

12. CONCLUDING THOUGHTS
The reports published by OECD
and UN as proposals to effectively tax the digital economy indicate that
international taxation norms are at the cusp of a revolution. MNEs will
have a daunting task of understanding the nuances of the proposals and
their impact on their businesses, though on a positive note there may be
relief from unilateral measures taken by countries to tax the digital
economy once the OECD / UN proposals are implemented.

While tax
authorities will be eager to have another sword in their armoury, it may
be noted that the OECD / UN proposals are still far from the finishing
line. Though the Blueprint released by OECD is more than 200 pages, the
report mainly provides the broad contours of the structure and working
of Amount A. Most of the aspects of Amount A are still under discussion
and debate. With 135countries participating in the OECD discussions, the
biggest challenge will be to achieve multilateral
consensus. While
countries have committed to arrive at a consensus-based solution by
mid-2021, it will be interesting to see how it is accomplished within
such a short span of time.

 

7   Referred to as marketing
and distribution safe harbour regime in the report

8   Note submitted by
Committee member Rajat Bansal as published in UN Doc E/C.18/2020/CRP.25 dated
30th May, 2020

9   Definition of ADS is the
same in the UN as well as in the OECD proposal

THE CONUNDRUM OF ‘MAY BE TAXED’ IN A DTAA

INTRODUCTION

The liability to pay tax on global income of a resident assessee u/s 4 r/w/s 5 of the Income -tax Act, 1961 (the
Act) is subject to Double Taxation Avoidance Agreements (DTAA) entered into by
the Government with foreign countries u/s 90 of the Act.

 

As per section 90(1), the Government may enter into agreements with
foreign countries for (a) granting of relief in respect of income on which have
been paid both income-tax under the Act and income-tax in that country, (b) for
avoidance of double taxation of income, (c) for exchange of information for the
prevention of evasion or avoidance of income tax, and (d) for recovery of
income-tax under the Act and under the corresponding law in force in that
country.

 

In order to achieve the object of avoidance of double taxation, two
rules are generally adopted under a DTAA:

  •  Allocating taxing rights between contracting States with respect to
    various kinds of income, called distributive rule, and
  •  Obligating the State of residence to give either credit of taxes
    paid in the source State or to exempt the income taxed in the source
    State.

 

In this regard, DTAAs are found to use one or more of the following
phrases:

shall be taxable only’

may be taxed’

may also be taxed’.

 

The expression ‘shall be taxable only’ indicates that exclusive right
to tax is given to one contracting State. The expression ‘may also be taxed’
indicates that the right to tax is given to both contracting States.

 

As regards the expression ‘may be taxed’, it has been the subject
matter of interpretation as to whether it would mean the right to tax is given
only to the source State or to both contracting States.

 

In CIT vs. R.M. Muthaiah [1993] 292 ITR 508
(Kar.)
, the Honourable Karnataka High Court interpreting Article 6(1) of
the Indo-Malaysia DTAA which provides that
‘Income from immovable property may
be taxed
in the contracting State in which such property
is situated’ held that ‘when a power is specifically recognised as vesting in one,
exercise of such a power by others, is to be read as not available; such a
recognition of power with the Malaysian Government would take away the said
power from the Indian Government’
. Thus, the Court held that as the immovable property is situated in
Malaysia, the power to tax income vested with the Malaysian Government and not
with the Indian Government.

 

The aforesaid decision is approved by the Supreme Court in UOI vs. Azadi Bachao Andolan [2003] 263 ITR 706
(SC)
(see page 724).

 

In CIT vs. P.V.A.L. Kulandagan Chettiar [2004] 267 ITR 654 (SC), on the basis of the decision in Muthaiah (Supra), it was argued that the expression ‘may be taxed’ should be read as
‘shall only be taxed in the source State’. The Supreme Court held that when a
person resident in India is deemed to be a resident of Malaysia by virtue of his
personal and economic relations, his residence in India will become irrelevant
under the DTAA. The Court held that the assessee is
liable to tax only in Malaysia and not in India as his income from estate is not
attributable to a permanent establishment in India. Thus, the decision was
rendered on an altogether different ground. In fact, the residence of the assessee therein was never put to question before any
appellate authority / court including the Supreme Court. Although the Supreme
Court did not deliberate upon the phrase ‘may be taxed’, it did not upset the
decision in
Muthaiah (Supra).

 

The decision of Kulandagan Chettiar (Supra) was understood [albeit incorrectly, if we may say so with utmost respect] by various Courts
as holding that the term ‘may be taxed’ has to be read as ‘shall be taxed only
in source State’. The following is the illustrative list of such
cases:

 

Dy. CIT vs. Turquoise Investment & Finance Ltd. [2006] 154 Taxman
80 (Madhya Pradesh)
affirmed in Dy. CIT vs. Turquoise Investment & Finance Ltd. [2008] 168
Taxman 107 (SC);

Bank of India vs. Dy. CIT [2012] 27 taxmann.com 335 (Mum.)
upheld in CIT vs. Bank of India [2015] 64 taxmann.com 215 (Bom.);

Emirates Fertilizer Trading Co. WLL, In re [2005] 142 Taxman 127 (AAR);

Apollo Hospital Enterprises Ltd. vs. Dy. CIT [2012] 23 taxmann.com
168 (Chennai);

Daler Singh Mehndi vs. DCIT [2018] 91
taxmann.com 178 (Delhi-Trib.);

Ms Pooja Bhatt vs. CIT
2008-TIOL-558-ITAT-Mum.;

N.V. Srinivas vs. ITO [2014] 45 taxmann.com
421 (Hyderabad-Trib.).

 

The Legislature introduced sub-section (3) to section 90 by the
Finance Act, 2003 w.e.f. 1st April, 2004.
As per section 90(3), any term used but not defined in the Act or in the DTAA
shall, unless the context otherwise requires, and is not inconsistent with the
provisions of the Act or the DTAA, have the same meaning as assigned to it in
the Notification issued by the Central Government in the Official Gazette in
this behalf.

 

In exercise of powers under the aforesaid section, CBDT issued
Notification No. 91 of 2008 dated 28th August, 2008 wherein it
clarified that where the DTAA provides that any income of a resident of India
‘may be taxed’ in the other country, such income shall be included in his total
income chargeable to tax in India in accordance with the provisions of the Act
and relief shall be granted in accordance with the method for elimination or
avoidance of double taxation provided in such agreement.

 

In this article, an attempt is made to address the question whether
the decision in
Muthaiah (Supra) is upset by the aforesaid Notification.

 

ANALYSIS

Analysis of Notification 91 of 2008

It may be noted that the scope of section 90(3) is to enable the
Central Government to only ‘define’ any term used but not defined in the Act or
in the DTAA. The memorandum to the Finance Bill, 2003 also clarifies that the
aforesaid provision is inserted to empower the Central Government to define such
terms by way of a Notification.

 

However, Notification No. 91 of 2008 does not define ‘may be taxed’.
It rather seeks to clarify the stand of the Government when such a phrase is
used. The said Notification in seeking to clarify the stand of the Government
has traversed beyond the scope of section 90(3). The words ‘may be taxed’ are at
best a phrase and not a term so that the definition of a phrase is not even in
the contemplation of section 90. Therefore, the validity of the aforesaid
Notification is open to challenge. Even if its validity is not put to challenge,
its enforceability may be doubted by the Courts.

Certain benches of the Tribunal have held that the legal position
understood as adumbrated in
Kulandagan Chettiar (Supra) has undergone a sea change after the issue of the aforesaid
Notification and the words ‘may be taxed’ will not preclude the right of the
State of residence to tax such income. The following is the illustrative list of
such cases:

 

Essar Oil Limited vs. ACIT [2011] 13 taxmann.com 151
(Mumbai);

Essar Oil Ltd. vs. Addl. CIT [2014] 42 taxmann.com 21
(Mumbai);

Technimont (P) Ltd. vs. Asst. CIT [2020] 116 taxmann.com 996
(Mumbai-Trib.);

N.V. Srinivas vs. ITO [2014] 45 taxmann.com
421 (Hyderabad-Trib.)

 

As stated earlier, Kulandagan Chettiar did not lay down such principle. In fact, such principle was laid
down in
Muthaiah which was approved in Azadi Bachao Andolan
(Supra)
. Further, as stated earlier, the principle of Muthaiah could not have been upset by the Notification No. 91 of 2008.
Therefore, it is trite to say that the principle of
Muthaiah as approved in Azadi Bachao
Andolan
holds the field as of date.

 

IMPACT OF MLI

India has signed Multi-Lateral Convention to Implement Tax
Treaty-Related Measures to Prevent Base Erosion and Profit Shifting
(‘Multi-Lateral Instrument’ or ‘MLI’).

 

MLI enables the contracting jurisdictions to modify their bilateral
tax treaties, i.e., DTAAs, to implement measures designed to address tax
avoidance. Therefore, the DTAAs have to be read along with the MLI.

 

MLI 11 deals with ‘Application of Tax Agreements to Restrict a
Party’s Right to Tax its Own Residents’. India has not reserved MLI
11.

 

The countries which have chosen MLI 11(1) with India (as on
29th September, 2020) are as under [source:
https://www.oecd.org/tax/beps/mli-matching-database.htm]:

Sl. No.

Name of countries

1

Armenia

2

Australia

3

Belgium

4

Colombia

5

Denmark

6

Fiji

7

Indonesia

8

Kenya

9

Mexico

10

New Zealand

11

Norway

12

Poland

13

Portugal

14

Romania

15

Russia

16

Slovak Republic

17

United Kingdom

 

As per MLI 11(1) a Covered Tax Agreement shall not affect the
taxation by a Contracting Jurisdiction of its residents, except with respect to
the benefits granted under provisions of the Covered Tax Agreement which are
listed in clauses (a) to (j).

 

Clause (j) deals with the provisions of DTAA which otherwise
expressly limit a Contracting Jurisdiction’s right to tax its own residents or
provide expressly that the Contracting Jurisdiction in which an item of income
arises has the exclusive right to tax that item of income.

 

For example, Article 7(1) of the Indo-Bangladesh DTAA provides that
‘The profits of an enterprise of a Contracting State shall be taxable
only in that State unless the enterprise carries on business in the other
Contracting State through a permanent establishment situated therein. If the
enterprise carries on business as aforesaid, then so much of the profits of the
enterprise as is attributable to that permanent establishment shall be taxable
only in that other Contracting State.’

 

The aforesaid article expressly takes away the right of the resident
country to levy tax on profits attributable to its PE.

 

Thus, in the absence of an express provision, the right of the
resident country to tax its residents cannot be taken away under the DTAA.
Therefore, the expression ‘may be taxed’ cannot be construed to mean ‘shall be
taxable only in the source state’, unless it is expressly stated. It may be
noted that the aforesaid proposition would apply only with respect to countries
which have opted for MLI 11 with India. It cannot be applied to countries which
have not chosen MLI 11 and which have not signed the MLI.

 

Now, the question that arises is whether the decision in Muthaiah would apply with respect to countries which have not chosen MLI 11
or countries which have not signed the MLI.

 

It may be noted that in certain DTAAs a clarification has been given
to the expression ‘may be taxed’ through protocols by stating that the said
expression should not be construed as preventing the resident country from
taxing the income. For example:

 

Indo-Malaysia DTAA: In paragraph 3 of the protocol signed on 9th May, 2012 it
has been stated that the term
‘may be taxed in the other State’ should not be construed as preventing the country of residence from
taxing the income.

 

Indo-South Africa DTAA: In paragraph 1 of the protocol signed on 26th July, 2013
it has been stated that wherever there is reference to
‘may be taxed in the other Contracting State’, it should be understood that income may, subject to the provisions
of Article 22 (Elimination of Double Taxation), also be taxed in the
first-mentioned Contracting State.

 

Indo-Slovenia DTAA: Under paragraph 2 of the protocol signed on 13th January,
2013 it has been stated that with reference to Article 6(1) and Article 13(1) it
is understood that in case of India income from immovable property and capital
gains on alienation of immovable property, respectively, may be taxed in both
Contracting States subject to the provisions of Article 23.

 

Thus, with respect to DTAAs like those above, the decision in
Muthaiah would not apply. With respect to the rest of the DTAAs, the decision
in
Muthaiah would continue to apply.

 

CONCLUSION

With respect to countries which have adopted MLI 11, the right of
India to tax its residents cannot be taken away unless such right is expressly
taken away under a DTAA. This would mean that with respect to such cases the
decision in
Muthaiah would not apply.

With respect to countries which have not adopted MLI 11 and which
have not signed MLI:

(a) India cannot tax its residents with respect to income derived
from source State, unless such right is expressly provided under the DTAA as in
the Indo-Malaysia DTAA, the Indo-South Africa DTAA, the Indo-Slovenia DTAA, etc.
This would mean that with respect to such cases the decision in
Muthaiah would apply.

(b) Notification No. 91 of 2008 does not
apply as the said Notification has been issued beyond the scope of section
90(3).

 

TAXING THE DIGITAL ECONOMY – THE WAY FORWARD

The economy today is truly digital; from
business and entertainment, to food and travel, everything is accessible online.
To veterans in business, everything digital is a revolution and is often termed
Industry 4.0; to a school kid, it’s the way of life that they were born into.
Commerce and business is no longer limited by territorial
boundaries.

 

The digital economy is growing at an exponential rate while countries
are still debating mechanisms for taxation of the digital economy. On the
entertainment front, films moved from reels to disks and have now become content
that is streamed. Music moved from records to tapes to disks to downloads and is now streamed live. It is important to note
that while the modus of conducting business has changed, it is still the
same products and services that are supplied, albeit in a different
form.

 

Digital means of communication and social interaction are giving rise
to new businesses that did not exist very long ago. Many of these businesses
that have developed only in the last two decades have taken over a considerable
share of market segments and form a significant part of the economy and tax
base. Their growth in India has also reached proportions that make them
significant actors in the Indian economy1
.

 

Laws that are currently in place are at the behest of metrics that
were designed to tackle the then available modes of conducting business.
Developments in businesses with the aid of technology only means that they
function in a niche area where there is little or no governance and
countries have started expressing the view that they are not getting their fair
share of revenue and there is a demand for taxing rights across the
world.

 

Debates and deliberations on taxing the digital economy have been
taking place throughout the world; international organisations like the OECD and
the UN and even others that are meant for regional co-operation have involved
stakeholders and other key parties in the debates; they even adopted a
Multi-Lateral Instrument (MLI) – and yet, any consensus on arriving at a
suitable legal framework remains elusive.

Important and interesting questions are inevitable on who gets such
rights; or whether a number of nations who participate in the transactions
should pool such taxing rights; what would be the profits that would be
available for taxation, etc.– all these are questions in search of
answers.

 

When these questions are attempted to be answered, one realises that
the existing laws are woefully inadequate and the elusive consensus in the OECD,
the non-participation of the USA in the entire discussion and the new initiative
from the UN only amplify the cacophony of confusion. Unilateral initiatives such
as digital taxes, equalisation levies and cross-border wars have only made
things more difficult.

 

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1   CBDT, Proposal for
Equalization Levy on Specified Transactions
, Report of the Committee on
Taxation of E-Commerce (2016)

POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS

In this article, an attempt has been made to think out of the box and
explore new solutions based on some past tested practices, apart from ensuring
that taxing rights are adequately conferred without compromising the tax credit
through the DTAA.

 

Solution
No.
I: Theory of
Presumptive Taxation – Payment for Digital Business

Presumptive taxation exists for certain businesses through provisions
in the domestic statutes. In India, section 44BB of the Income-tax Act, 1961
provides that where a non-resident provides services or facilities in connection
with or supplying plant and machinery used or to be used in prospecting,
extraction, or production of mineral oils, the profit and gains from such
business chargeable to tax shall be calculated at a sum equal to 10% of the
aggregate amounts paid or payable to such non-residents.
This presumptive
taxation has been extended to the business of operating aircraft (section 44BBA)
and to civil construction and erection of plants under certain turnkey projects
(section 44BBB). An interesting feature of these presumptive taxation provisions
is that an assessee can claim lower profits than the
profits specified in the presumptive mechanism provided he maintains books of
accounts and other records and furnishes a tax audit report u/s
44AB.

 

This presumptive taxation can have the following
features:

(i)         It can be a
provision in the domestic statute and apply to non-residents who are engaged in
identified digital businesses which involve B2C transactions;

(ii)        The MLI route
should be adopted to ensure that the source State gets a right to tax digital
business in addition to the resident State without diluting the eligibility to
claim set-off of taxes in the said State;

(iii)       ‘Digital business’
can be defined to mean the activity of supply of goods or services over the
internet or electronic network either directly or through an online platform,
and includes supply of digital goods or digital services, digital data storage,
providing data or information retrievable or otherwise in electronic form. This
category should be a separate category apart from Fees for Technical Services
and Royalty;

(iv)       ‘Digital goods’ can
be defined to mean any software or other goods that are delivered or transferred
or accessed electronically, including via sound, images, data, information, or
combinations thereof, maintained in digital format where such software or other
goods are the principal object of the transaction as against the activity or
service performed or rendered to create such software or other
goods;

(v)        ‘Digital service’
can be defined to mean any service that is provided electronically, including
the provision of remote access to or use of digital goods, and includes
electronic provision of the digital service to the customer;

(vi)       The tax would be on
the deemed income which in turn would be a specified percentage of the payments.
A percentage of the amounts paid or payable by the customer to the overseas
supplier of digital goods or services can be identified as income deemed to
accrue or arise in a market jurisdiction;

(vii)      A clear definition
of the businesses covered in this segment would be required to ensure
transparency, compliance, ease of business, simplicity in tax administration,
etc.;

(viii)     While the tax would
remain a tax on income, there can be two models for collection:

  •             The first model
    would require the non-resident to obtain a special and simple registration in
    the source jurisdiction and pay tax at the presumptive rates;
  •             The second model
    would require that the tax be paid by the bank or financial institution or
    payment gateway or financial intermediary. This identified party shall pay the
    tax at the time of remittance of the payment itself. Assuming that USD 100 is
    payable for digital goods or services, that the presumed income is 10% and the
    tax rate 20%, the identified intermediary would be
    bound to release only USD 98 and remit USD 2 as taxes on behalf of the
    non-resident. This amount should be available as credit to the non-resident
    under the DTAA;

(ix)       It has to be ensured
that the payment by the identified intermediary is not in the nature of
withholding taxes but payment of taxes on behalf of the non-resident. This will
ensure that issues with reference to grossing up of payments are
avoided.

 

Solution No. II: Theory of Apportionment based on FARE

One of the methods that can be debated and examined in order to
arrive at a solution for taxing digital transactions would be based on the
theory of apportionment. Apportionment as a concept exists in many indirect tax
laws across the world. Typically, in GST input tax credit is apportioned in the
context of taxable and exempt supplies. While FAR is an established
principle which covers Functions, Assets and Risk, FARE would cover
Functions, Assets, Risk and Economic Presence.

 

In the context of property taxes, the Oregon Supreme Court in the
case of Alaska Airlines Inc. vs. Department of
Revenue
2 upheld the position adopted by the Revenue
where the assessment was based on the presence, as reflected in air and ground
time, of aircraft property in that State. The taxes were proportionate to the
extent of the activities of the airlines’ units of aircraft properties within
the State. While engaging in these activities, the airlines enjoyed benefits,
opportunities and protection conferred or afforded by the State’s search and
rescue services, opportunities for further commerce and the protection of Oregon
criminal laws, and so could be made to bear a ‘just share of State tax burden’.
The taxes were fairly related to services provided by the State.

 

In the USA, questions arose as to the right of States in the context
of taxes and a four-pronged test was laid down by the US Supreme Court in the
case of Complete Auto Transit Co. vs. Brady3
wherein it was observed that this Court in a number of decisions has sustained a
tax against Commerce Clause challenge when

(i)         The tax is applied
to an activity with a substantial nexus with the taxing State,

(ii)        The tax is fairly
apportioned,

(iii)       The tax does not
discriminate against interstate commerce, and

(iv)       The tax is fairly
related to the services provided by the State.

 

This four-pronged test is an interesting test which can be the
starting point for working out provisions for taxing the digital economy.
The traditional concept of exclusive taxation by one State or double
taxation with credits which is established through DTAA may have to give way to
a new system wherein there will be a fair apportionment of tax between the
source State as well as the residence
State.

 

The challenges would be to identify a fair apportionment between the
countries. There could be complications where multiple countries are involved.
Insofar as the US is concerned, there are statutory apportionment formulae which
are based on property, payroll and sales.

 

The Functions, Asset, Risk (FAR) Test can be expanded to a Functions,
Asset, Risk, Economic Presence (FARE) Test. The Economic Presence could, of
course, mean Significant Economic Presence and would be a combination of revenue
thresholds and number of transactions. Accordingly, FARE would represent the
following.

 

  •  Functions can cover the access and penetration
    in the market;
  •  Assets deployed could cover the website, the
    artificial intelligence solutions, the technology platforms which are used in
    the transaction delivery mechanism to the market instead of focusing on their
    physical location;
  •  Risks inherent to digital businesses such as
    privacy, security, vulnerability of data, etc., can be given adequate
    weightage;
  •  Economic Presence could be based on threshold
    in terms of sales or volume of transactions.

 

In this model, countries will have to debate and arrive at a
consensus on what would constitute Significant Economic Presence. The solutions
so arrived at should be implemented through a Multi-Lateral Instrument
(MLI).

 

It may be possible to apply Solution No. II for B2B
transactions and Solution No.
I for B2C
transactions.
Further, B2C should not be confined merely to customers but
should be comprehensive enough to cover businesses that are
end-users.

 

Solution
No.
III: Theory of
Access – ePE (Digital PE)

A building site or construction, installation or assembly project or
supervisory activities in connection therewith constitutes a PE under Article 5
based on breaching a period threshold. Similarly, an installation or structure
used for exploration or exploitation of natural resources constitutes a PE when
it breaches a particular period threshold. The period differs between the UN
Model and the OECD Model.

 

Where the number of days or months can be the basis for determination
of PE, it should be possible to arrive at a new concept of ePE (Digital PE) based on the number of users who have
accessed the goods or services provided by a non-resident through digital
means.
In effect, this would seek to identify nexus to a market jurisdiction
based on access exercised by the customers in that jurisdiction through
electronic means for procurement of goods and services. A new definition or an
additional category to the existing Permanent Establishment definition will have
to be agreed upon and developed.

 

Care must be taken to ensure that a digital PE is clearly linked with
the breach of the number of users threshold. There must
not be any reporting requirements or compliance requirements from a user’s
perspective but a non-resident business which transacts in a market jurisdiction
digitally will have to report the number of users of its website linked with
transactions consummated. A customer-driven reporting may not work given the
fact that the customer can access the website through multiple devices and from
anywhere in the world. Once a PE is established the normal principles for
attribution of profits will come into play.

 

This is based on the premise that any supply of goods or services by
way of electronic commerce would necessarily involve intermediaries such as
banks, payment gateways, internet service providers, etc. The number of
transactions consummated in a particular jurisdiction can be easily identified
based on data provided by the various institutions. One of the key elements in a
transaction of procurement of goods or services through the internet is the
payment. This payment is also made online.

 

For example, if this logic is extended, one possible solution for
taxing digital entertainment in the country where it is downloaded or
viewed is to identify that the income arises or accrues or deems to arise or
accrue in the country in which the said digital content is downloaded or
streamed. Insofar as download or streaming of entertainment content is
concerned, there would be data points such as a customer having a registration;
having a user ID and password; network login details; payment for the content
and downloading / streaming data.

There are two challenges in this solution, namely,

(i)         Identification of
profits attributable to the country in which the content is downloaded or
streamed; this could be addressed by a deemed agreed percentage, and

(ii)        Illegal download or
streaming of content, payment through non-banking channels, payment through
unregulated virtual currencies, free services.

 

Solution
No.
IV: OIDAR – The
Direct Tax Twin

Drawing an analogy from India’s GST provisions which identify OIDAR
(online information database access and retrieval) services that are supplied to
a non-taxable online recipient, or even the same model, can be emulated from a
direct tax perspective. Insofar as OIDAR services which are automated and
provided by a supplier who is a resident of another nation are concerned, the
said supplier can be required to pay income tax in the nation where the
recipient resides. Care should be taken to ensure that the levy retains the
character of direct tax and does not convert itself into a consumption tax. The
identification of taxability can be linked with the GST provisions but the tax
should be only on the profits. Nations can agree upon a certain percentage of
the receipts / payments on account of such supplies to be deemed as the income
accruing or arising in the recipient country. This would also meet the
requirement of nexus to the market jurisdiction. Tax credit has to be
ensured.

 

Solution
No.
V: Tax
Collection at Source (TCS)

Section 206C provides that a seller at the time of debiting the
amount payable by the buyer to the account of the buyer, or at the time of
receipt of amounts from the buyer, whichever is earlier, has to collect as
income tax a specified percentage of the amount in respect of specified goods.
For example, a seller of scrap will have to collect 1% as TCS from the buyer.
The amount collected represents the income tax payable by the buyer. The buyer
will get the credit of tax so collected against his income-tax liability. This
model can be examined and modified in the following manner:

 

(i)         Any person who
facilitates payment for supply of digital goods or services shall be liable to
collect tax at source at a specified percentage. This tax shall be collected as
income-tax and should be available as credit to the non-resident supplier of
goods and services;

(ii)        Person facilitating
payment would mean the bank or financial institution or financial intermediary
or e-wallet service provider;

(iii)       To illustrate, if a
non-resident supplies digital content and the resident uses his credit card for
making payment of USD 100, the bank becomes responsible for making the payment
by way of TCS. Assuming that TCS is notified at the rate of 1%, the bank, at the
time of transfer of funds to the non-resident supplier, will deduct 1% being the
tax, apart from any other applicable transaction charges;

(iv)       The supplier will have
to obtain a simplified registration in the market jurisdiction and will have a
tax account which will reflect the payments by way of TCS;

(v)        The system should
automatically generate a certificate for payment by way of tax in the market
jurisdiction which would be available for claiming credit of taxes in the
country of residence under the treaty.

 

The
solutions referred to above are ideas which can be debated and developed into
effective and sustainable solutions. A solution to be effective has to be
certain and simple with uniform application.
The aspirations of the market
jurisdiction in seeking taxing rights and the concerns of nations which are
worried about losing revenue will have to be balanced to ensure that the new
system that is created benefits one and all. At the end of the day, the levy of
taxes should not end up in scuttling new ideas and growth in the digital
environment.

TRANSFER PRICING DATABASES – REQUIREMENT, USAGE AND REVIEW

This article is an attempt to understand
the purpose of transfer pricing software and to review the existing databases
based on certain parameters. But first a basic introduction to transfer pricing
will help us to appreciate the importance of these databases.

 

WHAT IS TRANSFER PRICING?

Transfer pricing (TP) refers to the pricing
of cross-border transactions between two related entities, referred to as
associated enterprises (AEs). When two AEs enter into any cross-border
transaction, the price at which they undertake the transaction is called
transfer price. Due to the special relationship between related companies, the
transfer price may be different from the price that would have been agreed to
between two unrelated companies. Thanks to their control over prices,
Multinational Enterprises (MNEs) have the flexibility to influence –

 

i)   Tax liabilities of individuals or a group of
persons / entities

ii)  Government tax targets

iii)  Cash flow requirements of the MNE group.

 

Every Government wants to prevent erosion
of its tax base and plug potential tax leakages, and hence there are TP regulations all over the world. In India, section 92 of the IT Act
was substituted by the Finance Act, 2001 with a set of new sections, 92 to 92F,
providing a detailed statutory framework for the determination of arm’s length
price (ALP) and maintenance of documentation.

 

TRANSFER PRICING DOCUMENTATION

As per Rule 10D(2) of the Income Tax Rules,
1962, when transactions with related parties cross the threshold of Rs. 1
crore, it is mandatory to keep and maintain information and documents as per
Rule 10D(1). TP Documentation also includes maintenance of proper records and
the process of how the ALP has been determined. The relevant extracts of Rule
10D which require proper documentation of process are reproduced below:

 

Rule

Description of the Rule 10D

10D(1)(h)

A record of the analysis performed to evaluate comparability
of uncontrolled transactions with the relevant international transaction

10D(1)(i)

A description of the methods considered for determining the
arm’s length price in relation to each international transaction or class of
transactions, the method selected as the most appropriate one along with
explanations as to why such method was selected and how such method was
applied in each case

10D(1)(j)

A record of the actual working carried out for determining
the ALP, including details of the comparable data and financial information
used in applying the most appropriate method and adjustments, if any, which
were made to account for the difference between international transactions,
or between the enterprises entering into such transactions

 

As per the rules, the entire analysis /
search process needs to be documented including the procedure being followed
and financial information of comparables. In such a case, the transfer pricing
database helps in the entire analysis and the working of documentation to a
great extent. This depends on which database is used and the features of each
database.

 

WHY A DATABASE IS REQUIRED

A TP database for determination of ALP can
be employed when the following methods are used:

(a)   Cost plus method (CPM)

(b)   Transactional net margin method (TNMM)

(c)   Resale price method (RPM) sometimes to
ascertain the gross margin earned by traders.

 

The above methods require a comparison of
the assessee’s gross / net margin with that of the industry.

 

A question that arises here is, how to
calculate the industry-wide margin. Can the assessee choose to pick companies
having similar transactions or competitors in their industry; ferret out their
financial information from the Ministry of Company Affairs (MCA) site; the BSE
/ NSE website; other private websites and then work out the industry margin?
Tribunals have generally held that the search process should be systematic and
consistent year on year. They have also held that cherry-picking of comparables
is not allowed. This approach will not only enable officers to only cherry-pick
companies having higher profitability but they can also reject the search
process and hence prove that the assessee’s transactions are not at ALP.
However, the ALP determined based on a detailed search process cannot be
rejected without any cogent reasons. Therefore, Transfer Pricing Databases are
used to remove the ambiguity involved and to bring standardisation in the
search process.

 

Apart from comparison margins, there are
some transaction-specific databases also available, such as Royalty Stat, Loan
Connector, OneSource, etc., which are used to benchmark specific transactions
like royalty and loan transactions and where the gross / net margins of
companies are not required.

 

GENERAL
SEARCH PROCEDURES IN A DATABASE

In general, a comparable search begins with
the identification of all companies appearing in the database in a particular
period in the relevant industry. Whenever the potential comparable is believed
to be spread over more than one industry, searches are supplemented by text
searches for business descriptions / products containing appropriate keywords.
Various filters (quantitative) are then applied in the database to arrive at a
set of reasonably comparable companies. Textual descriptions including the
background report and directors’ report identified by the database in the
initial screens are reviewed, along with the website details of certain
relevant companies (qualitative filters), first to eliminate companies that are
misclassified and then to narrow down the search to a reasonable number of the
most potentially comparable companies which can be selected.

 

A list of common filters (quantitative)
applied in the database is as follows:

1. Select companies in the same / similar industry
according to business activity and finished products produced / services
rendered. The first step is like creating a basket of similar companies.

2. Data Availability Filter to select companies
having data availability for the past three years. Companies for which the
latest financials are not available for the last three years are excluded
because their margin will not reflect the current trends.

3. Turnover Filter depending on the turnover of
your company as these companies would not be comparable to assess due to
differences in their scale of operations.

4. Net Worth Filter to select companies having net
worth > 0 because companies having negative net worth have a bankruptcy risk
and therefore margins may not be comparable to a normal company.

5. Select companies having manufacturing / sales
or services / sales ratio > X% depending on the industry in which the
company operates to restrict the list of selected companies with comparable
size and operations.

6. Select companies with related party transactions
< X% as a company having significant related party transactions would itself
be prone to incorrect transfer prices among related parties.

7. Other specific filters can be applied depending
on the facts of each case and the industry in which the company operates.

 

After applying all these filters, finally,
companies are accepted by applying Qualitative Filters. Qualitative Filters
include reviewing short business descriptions / directors’ report / annual
reports / generated from the database to ensure that their primary line of
business activities is matched with the assessee by excluding companies that

(a) were misclassified

(b) performed activities which involved
significantly different functions, assets and risks (FAR Analysis) as compared
to the assessee.

 

Having identified the comparable companies,
it is necessary to analyse the nature of these companies by performing a FAR
Analysis. A FAR Analysis identifies the functions undertaken by each party, the
risks each party assumes and the assets used by each party to the transaction.
It also assists in determining the economic value added by each relevant party.

 

Further, this analysis can help in
identifying specialised and critical business assets and activities that are
fundamental to the business. The CBDT emphasises the importance of the
functional analysis in determining the arm’s length price and identifying
suitable entities for comparison purposes.

 

Once the final companies are selected after
applying Qualitative Filters, the next step is to remove margins of companies
selected from the database / annual reports and compare the same with our
margin.

 

Adjustments, if any, can be made to the
margin of companies depending upon the difference, if any, in the FAR Analysis
of comparable companies. For example, Working Capital Adjustment, Risk
Adjustment, Idle Capacity Adjustment, etc.

 

DIFFERENT
TRANSFER PRICING DATABASES CHOSEN FOR DISCUSSION

We have analysed the three databases
mentioned below from the software available in India for transfer pricing
purposes. We have also identified certain objective parameters based on which
these databases can be evaluated.

 

(I)  Prowess1

  •   Developed by the Centre for Monitoring
    Indian Economy (CMIE) Private Limited.
  •   The service is only available for desktop version
    but the application can be downloaded on any number of desktops.

*    Number of Companies – Over 50,000

*    Unique Data fields – Over 3,500

*    Data Availability – from 1989

  •  Prowess as a software is extensively used
    in research projects and its usage is not restricted to only transfer pricing.
    Since it is not created specifically for transfer pricing, data collation and
    maintenance in the way that is required by Transfer Pricing Reports is a more
    cumbersome process. However, it also has an advantage over other databases
    based on the numbers of companies analysed and the years of experience in the
    statistical field.

 

(II) Ace-TP2

  •   Developed by Accord Fitch Private Limited.
  •    It is a web database-based browser
    application for comparing company financial information of Indian business
    entities. The service is available for both web-based and desktop versions.

*    Number of Companies – Over 38,000

*    Unique Data fields – Over 1,750

*    Data Availability – Past 15 years of
historical data

  •    Ace-TP was the first software which was
    specifically designed for TP and therefore has a very easy User Interface. It
    directly saves stepwise information and speeds up the documentation process.
    However, it is a relatively newer setup compared to the other software.

 

(III) Capitoline TP3

  •     Developed by Capital Markets Publishers
    India Pvt. Ltd.
  •  It is an
    internet web portal related to transfer pricing issues. The service is
    available for both web-based and desktop versions.

*    Number of Companies – Over 35,000

*    Unique Data fields – 1,250

Capitoline TP
Database has entered into an arrangement4 with ICAI wherein CA firms
would be charged a discounted rate.

 

  •    Capitoline TP is an extension of Capitoline
    Software which is extensively used for the stock market. Thanks to its arrangement
    with ICAI, its web version is one of the most used TP software by SME firms.

 

COMMON
FEATURES OF ABOVE DATABASES

#   Categorisation of companies based on industry,
sub-industry, NIC 2008 classification, business activities, products sold, raw
material consumed and various other factors. (Helpful in Search Procedure
Common Filter – Step 1 as mentioned above.)

#   Historical Data of Financials of company for
many years in easy-to-download Excel format. (Helpful in Search Procedure
Common Filter – Step 2 as mentioned above.)

#   Query Triggers and Formula Filters depending
on requirement of turnover, net worth, net profit and other parameters. Various
formulae can be clubbed together to derive more complex parameters. (Helpful
in Search Procedure Common Filter – Steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 as mentioned above.)

#   Data of both listed and unlisted companies.
Plus brief description / profile of companies and their business. (Helpful
in Search Procedure qualitative filters.)

#   Annual Report and financials of various companies
available in database. (Helpful in finding margins of comparable companies.)

#   Automation of filters applied for future use
by saving the process which is defined once.

  •    Database does not cover Proprietorship,
    Partnership and LLP.

 

Data is also compiled from notes of
accounts and aspects such as related party transactions, capacity utilisation,
export and import figures, etc.

 

__________________________________________________________________________________________________

1
As per website https://prowessiq.cmie.com/ and brochure shared by the company’s
representatives with the authors

*
Kindly review prices from vendors before taking a decision

2
http://www.acetp.com/

3
https://www.capitaline.com/Demo/tp.aspx and brochure shared by the company’s
representatives with the authors

4
https://www.icai.org/post/16361

* Kindly review
prices from vendors before taking decision


SELECTION
PARAMETER FOR ANY DATABASE

Many professionals use two databases for
getting a higher number of companies in the search process. However, the same
could also create duplication. With the above three options available, the
following major parameters can be kept in mind to select any one TP Database.

    Number of companies available,

    Pricing of the software,

    User interface,

    Training and customer support provided.

 

TP
DATABASE – CAN IT ONLY BE USED FOR TP?

TP Database contains various data points
for various companies for several years. These can also be used for various
other functions such as the following:

  •    Industry Peer and Trend Comparison
    Some clients are interested in comparing their own companies’ financial health
    and growth with their competitors / industry leaders. These databases are a
    very effective tool to do the same.
  •   Due Diligence – If any of the
    companies on which due diligence needs to be conducted is presented in the
    database, it is easy to collate all the information and work upon it in a
    readily available manner. Even if the company is not available, these databases
    are an excellent tool to understand the industry dynamics.
  •    Stock Market – While investing in
    shares of a particular company / sector, a deep-dive analysis of a company /
    industry and its comparative peer set can be done in the database.
  •    Analysis of Business Ratios – Various
    ratios based on specific industry and specific companies can be collated
    instantly from these databases, thereby making them a very effective research
    tool.

 

Authors’ suggestions to database
companies based on our survey:

+ Instead of a yearly subscription, the
database should also be made available for short tenures. This will enable more
users to subscribe to them.

+ High pricing is the general concern of
respondents. They should target an increase in the number of users rather than
frequent increases in prices.

+ Users should be educated about the usage
of the database over and above transfer pricing. This will enable more
subscribers to join.

+ Companies can consider having a tie-up
with professional bodies for increasing awareness amongst users.

 

CONCLUSION

India is one of the fastest-growing
economies. A lot of businesses are being set up abroad by Indian MNC’s and many medium-sized companies are also expanding their footprints
globally. Besides, many foreign companies are setting up businesses in India. This
will lead to further increase in cross-border transactions between AEs.
Transfer Pricing Practice in India is about to step out of its teens. It’s
young, bubbling with energy and still shaping up. A more complex, granular and
widely covered yet affordable database will take this practice from the Metros
to Tier-II cities and can be a good practice area for budding chartered
accountants.

 

This article was an attempt to touch
base on the usage of the various databases available and to evaluate them in the
backdrop of various parameters. The user should assess or evaluate all the
databases before making any subscription decision.

 

 

Disclaimer: None of the authors is associated with / interested in any of the
databases and any relationship with them is purely restricted to the usage /
subscription of database licenses. All the information that is part of this
article has been gathered from the respective websites and brochures shared by
the databases with the authors.

 

 

MFN CLAUSE: RELEVANCE OF INTERPRETATION BY FOREIGN COURTS

BACKGROUND

A tax treaty is usually bilateral in nature and is limited to two
countries: Resident country and Source country. When two bilateral treaties are
compared, there ought to be substantial or minor differences on account of the
different strategies and the negotiation power of the competent authorities of
the respective countries. The question is whether the taxpayer can rely on
another bilateral tax treaty, one that is not applicable to him. The answer is
clearly ‘No’.

 

The taxpayer relies on the tax treaty entered into by his resident
country for the income that has arisen in the source country. For his
taxability, the taxpayer is restricted to the applicable tax treaty only.
However, the tax treaty mechanism is such that, if expressly provided for in
his treaty, the taxpayer is permitted to enforce the beneficial provisions of
another bilateral tax treaty, though subject to conditions. This is widely termed
as the Most Favoured Nation clause (MFN clause). It prevents discrimination
amongst the OECD member states. Its application cannot be implicit but has to
be expressly provided for. If not expressed, a tax treaty cannot oblige another
tax treaty to apply its beneficial provisions (whether in terms of scope or tax
rate).

 

In the Indian context, the MFN clause is usually found in the Protocol to
its tax treaties, for example, the Protocol to the India-Netherlands TT, the
India-France TT, the India-Sweden TT, etc. For instance, article  12(3)(b) of the India-Sweden Tax Treaty
defines the Fees for Technical Services (FTS) as ‘(b) The term “fees for
technical services” means payment of any kind in consideration for the
rendering of any managerial, technical or consultancy services, including the
provision of services by technical or other personnel but does not include
payment for services mentioned in articles 14 and 15 of this Convention’.

 

If the Indian taxpayer is making payment for commercial service, the
payment would primarily be covered under this FTS article. It would be interesting to then look into the Protocol
to the India-Sweden DTA that reads as under:

 

‘In respect of
Articles 10 (Dividends), 11 (Interest) and 12 (Royalties and fees for technical
services) if under any Convention, Agreement or Protocol between India and a
third State which is a member of the OECD, India limits its taxation at source
on dividends, interest, royalties, or fees for technical services to a rate
lower or a scope more restricted than the rate or scope provided for in this
Convention on the said items of income, the same rate or scope as provided for
in that Convention, Agreement or Protocol on the said items of income shall
also apply under this Convention.’

 

Taking benefit of
the FTS clause (or Fees for Included Services) in the India-USA tax treaty or
the India-UK tax treaty, where USA is the OECD member state, the scope for FTS
in the India-Sweden tax treaty would be reduced to make-available
technical services. Where the FTS is not make-available, the FTS would
be subject to tax only when the taxpayer has a permanent establishment in India
in accordance with Article 7 of that treaty. In other words, if the taxpayer
has no permanent establishment, the FTS income that is not make-available
service would not be taxed in India. This is how the MFN clause would apply and
be beneficial to the taxpayer.

 

FOREIGN
COURT DECISION

In this context,
the author has discussed a recent foreign court decision on the MFN clause. It
is significant in terms of the manner in which this clause should be applied.
The decision articulates the importance of the phrase ‘limits its taxation at
source’, in respect of interpreting the phrase ‘a rate lower or a scope more
restricted’. It looks into the resultant tax effect, rather than the rate or
scope prescribed in another Tax Treaty (referred to as TT). The decision is
explained in detail below:

 

South Africa

Tax Court in
Cape Town

ABC Proprietary Limited vs. Commissioner (No.
14287)

Date of Order:
12th June, 2019

(i)   FACTS

The taxpayer is a
South African tax resident company and a shareholder of a Dutch company. The
Dutch company declared dividend to the South African taxpayer in respect of
which it withheld dividend tax at the rate of 5% and paid it to the Dutch Tax
Authorities. The taxpayer subsequently requested a refund of the dividend tax
paid to the Dutch Tax Authorities on account of the MFN clause in the
Netherlands-South Africa Tax Treaty (NL-SA TT). It contended as follows:

 

(a) NL-SA TT
provides for 5% withholding tax;

(b) MFN of NL-SA TT
referred to the South Africa-Sweden Tax Treaty (SA-SW TT) that also provides
for 10% withholding tax; but the second MFN of the SA-SW TT provides for an
effective withholding tax rate of 0% after referring to the South Africa-Kuwait
Tax Treaty (SA-Kuwait TT).

 

The peculiarity of
this decision is the extent to which the second MFN influences the effective
withholding tax rate in the NL-SA DTA. Coincidentally, the recent judgment of
the Dutch Supreme Court on 18th January, 2019 in case number
17/04584 is on similar facts with a similar outcome. Both the decisions are
discussed together.

 

(ii) TT ANALYSIS

To understand the
importance of this decision, it is equally important to have the extract of the
relevant clauses for our benefit.

 

NL-SA TT

Article 10 of the
NL-SA TT provides for a 5% dividend withholding tax on distribution of
dividends if the beneficial owner is a company holding at least 10% of the
capital in the company paying the dividends. The MFN clause in article 10(10)
is given as under:

 

(10) If under
any convention for the avoidance of double taxation concluded after the date of
conclusion of this Convention between the Republic of South Africa and a third
country, South Africa limits its taxation on dividends as contemplated in
sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph 2 of this Article to a rate lower, including
exemption from taxation or taxation on a reduced taxable base, than the rate
provided for in sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph 2 of this Article, the same
rate, the same exemption or the same reduced taxable base as provided for in
the convention with that third State shall automatically apply in both
Contracting States under this Convention as from the date of the entry into
force of the convention with that third State.

 

It can be observed from the above that the MFN clause of the NL-SA TT
has a time limitation to its applicability. Only the OECD member state DTAs,
that are concluded by South Africa after the signing of the NL-SA TT, would be
looked into. Once applied, the beneficial tax rate or scope for taxation of FTS
in third state TTs would also apply in the NL-SA TT. Accordingly, the SA-SW DTA
satisfied the condition. The analysis of the SA-SW DTA is discussed below.

 

SA-SW TT

Originally, the
SA-SW TT was concluded prior to the conclusion of the NL-SA TT, however, the
Protocol, wherein the 10% dividend withholding tax rate and the second MFN
clause was provided for, was concluded after the conclusion of the NL-SA TT.
The Court and the tax authority did not think that this would be an issue and
both concluded that since the Protocol was concluded after the date of
conclusion of the NL-SA TT, the SA-SW TT would continue to apply.

 

Article 10 of the
SA-SW TT read with the Protocol did not provide for any concession in the tax
rate (i.e. 5% withholding tax rate in the NL-SA TT; whereas it was 15% in the
SA-SW TT). However, the Protocol introduced Article 10(6) to the SA-SW TT and
read as follows:

 

(6) If any
agreement or convention between South Africa and a third state provides that
South Africa shall exempt from tax dividends (either generally or in respect of
specific categories of dividends) arising in South Africa, or limit the tax
charged in South Africa on such dividends (either generally or in respect of
specific categories of dividends) to a rate lower than that provided for in
sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph 2, such exemption or lower rate shall
automatically apply to dividends (either generally or in respect of those
specific categories of dividends) arising in South Africa and beneficially
owned by a resident of Sweden and dividends (either generally or in respect of
those specific categories of dividends) arising in Sweden and beneficially
owned by a resident of South Africa, under the same conditions as if such
exemption or lower rate had been specified in that sub-paragraph.

 

It can be observed from the above that the time limitation present in
the NL-SA TT is not present in the SA-SW TT. Hence, in the absence of any
limitation, the MFN clause of the SA-SW TT is open to all member states (no
time limitation and no OECD member state limitation). This is where the
SA-Kuwait TT was applied wherein the dividend withholding tax rate is 0% when
dividends arise in South Africa.

 

SA-Kuwait TT

Article 10(1) of
the SA-Kuwait TT provides that the ‘Dividends paid by a company which is a
resident of a Contracting State to a resident of the other Contracting State
who is the beneficial owner of such dividends shall be taxable only in that
other Contracting State.’ In other words, the dividend paid by the South
African company would be exempt from withholding tax. Kuwait is a non-OECD
member and the SA-Kuwait TT was concluded prior to the date of conclusion of
the NL-SA TT and hence direct reference to this TT was not possible.

 

(iii)       TAX AUTHORITIES’ CONTENTION

The tax authorities
denied the benefit of exemption for various reasons: (a) the benefit of the
SA-Kuwait TT is not available directly to the NL-SA DTA; (b) the purpose of the
MFN clause is to provide additional benefit and bring parity with other OECD
member states. The clause should be read literally and not be open to
interpretation on the basis of another MFN in another DTA, i.e., the SA-SW TT;
and (c) the intention of the MFN clause is to look into the tax rates as
specified in other DTAs, without considering any other MFN clause or other
influence. The MFN clause should be interpreted to bring parity with the
‘specified’ tax rate, rather than the ‘applied’ / ‘effective’ tax rate. The tax
authorities refused to exempt the withholding tax rate.

 

(iv) ISSUE

Whether the
dividend withholding tax rate is exempt under the NL-SA TT, by virtue of the
MFN clause in that TT and in the SA-SW TT?

 

(v)   DECISION

The Tax Court of
South Africa gave its judgment in favour of the taxpayer that dividends arising
from South Africa would be exempt from withholding tax. It is identical to the
one given by the Hon’ble Supreme Court of the Netherlands. It gave the
following reasons:

(a)   The MFN clause to be interpreted based on its
plain meaning. It cannot be contended that the MFN clause is not intended to be
triggered by MFN clauses in treaties concluded thereafter.

(b) The South African tax authorities had in
practice exempted the withholding tax on dividends arising from South Africa;
when the SA-SW TT, read with the SA-Kuwait TT, was applied.

(c)   From the perspective of the NL-SA TT, the real
tax effect has to be seen while contemplating the beneficial effects of the MFN
clause.

(d) Accordingly, once it was clear that the SA-SW
TT is a qualified TT, the effective / resultant withholding tax rate would
apply to the NL-SA TT. The indirect effect of the SA-Kuwait TT, that was
concluded prior to the NL-SA TT, is purely coincidental.

 

IN AN INDIAN CONTEXT

From an Indian perspective, we do not have judgments on any similar
issue. Hence, it becomes imperative to analyse the above decision from the
perspective of Indian tax treaties. Let’s take an example of payments being
made by an Indian resident to a Dutch company in the nature of Fees for
Technical Services. We have considered the India-Netherlands Tax Treaty (Ind-NL
TT), the India-Sweden Tax Treaty (Ind-SW TT) and the India-Greece Tax Treaty
(Ind-Gr TT).

 

Ind-NL TT

Article 12 of the Ind-NL TT provides for a 20% withholding tax rate and
defines FTS as: The term ‘fees for technical services’ as used in this
Article means payments of any kind to any person, other than payments to an
employee of the person making the payments and to any individual for
independent personal services mentioned in Article 14, in consideration for
services of a managerial, technical or consultancy nature.

 

The extract of the Protocol to the Ind-NL TT is given below:

 

If after the signature of this Convention under any
Convention or Agreement between India and a third State, which is a member of
the OECD, India should limit its taxation at source on dividends, interest,
royalties, fees for technical services or payments for the use of equipment to
a rate lower or a scope more restricted than the rate or scope provided for in
this Convention on the said items of income, then, as from the date on which
the relevant India Convention or Agreement enters into force, the same rate or
scope as provided for in that Convention or Agreement on the said items of
income shall also apply under this Convention.

 

It can be observed that, like the NL-SA TT, the Ind-NL TT provides for a
time limitation and the OECD member-state condition for applicability of the
MFN clause.

 

Ind-SW TT

The Ind-SW TT
(conclusion date: 24th June, 1997) was concluded after the date of
conclusion of the Ind-NL TT (conclusion date: 30th July, 1988);
accordingly, Ind-SW is a qualified TT for application of the MFN clause.

 

Article 12 of the
Ind-SW TT provides for a 10% withholding tax rate and defines FTS as: The
term ‘fees for technical services’ means payment of any kind in consideration
for the rendering of any managerial, technical or consultancy services,
including the provision of services by technical or other personnel, but does
not include payments for services mentioned in Articles 14 and 15 of this
Convention.

 

The extract of the Protocol to the Ind-SW TT is given below:

 

In respect of
Articles 10 (Dividends), 11 (Interest) and 12 (Royalties and fees for technical
services), if under any Convention, Agreement or Protocol between India and a
third State which is a member of the OECD, India limits its taxation at source
on dividends, interest, royalties or fees for technical services to a rate
lower than or a scope more restricted than the rate or scope provided for in
this Convention on the said items of income, the same rate or scope as provided
for in that Convention, Agreement or Protocol on the said items of income shall
also apply under this Convention.

 

It can be observed that,
like the SA-SW TT, the Ind-SW TT also does not provide for any time limitation,
although it does specify an OECD member-state condition.

 

Ind-Gr TT

The Ind-Gr TT was concluded on 11th February, 1965, that is,
prior to the date of conclusion of the Ind-NL TT dated 30th July,
1988 and hence, like the above decision, direct reference to this TT was not
possible. But Greece is an OECD member state and, thus, satisfied the MFN
clause of the Ind-SW TT. The Ind-Gr TT does not have the FTS article and hence
the income from performance of services would be taxable under Article 3 for
industrial or commercial services, or under Article 14 for professional
services. The threshold requirements in Article 3 and Article 14 would
accordingly apply in the present case. These provide for a reduced scope that
is ‘more restricted’, resulting in limiting India’s right to tax FTS and,
hence, could be read into the Ind-SW TT and thereafter into the Ind-NL TT.

 

Another argument that can also come up for analysis is whether the ‘scope
more restricted’ in the Ind-SW TT takes into account a complete absence of the
FTS article or takes into account a mere tax effect on FTS? Reliance can be
placed on another foreign court decision by the Supreme Court of Kazakhstan in
the case of The
Kazmunai Services (Case No. 3??-77-16), dated 3rd
February, 2016
, wherein the taxpayer applied the MFN clause of
the Kazakhstan-India DTA and wanted to benefit from the missing FTS article in
the Kazakhstan-Germany DTA, the Kazakhstan-UK DTA and the Kazakhstan-Russia
DTA. The Supreme Court denied the benefit of the MFN clause without discussing
its applicability and the issue about the absent FTS article.

 

In response, it could be stated that the MFN clause refers to the nature
of income (FTS), rather than the FTS article in itself. The phrase used in the
MFN clause of the Ind-SW TT is ‘India limits its taxation at source on
dividends, interest, royalties or fees for technical services
to a
rate lower or a scope more restricted than the rate or scope provided for
in
this Convention
[emphasis] on the said items of income’.
Therefore, in the case of complete absence of FTS, the MFN clause could still
apply when the comparative TT provides for a reduced taxing right on FTS, and
thereby affecting the Source State’s right to ‘taxation at source’.

 

CONCLUSION

The MFN clause, when applied through the Protocol, is assumed to have an
automatic application, i.e., without the need for a formal approval from tax
authorities1, similar to the MFN clause in the SA-SW TT above. The
past decisions on the MFN clause2 
are usually from the perspective of the scope of FTS, wherein, the scope
for FTS is reduced to either ‘make-available’ technical services or removing
managerial service from FTS, or from the perspective of reducing the tax rate
on FTS; all to the extent of the scope or tax rate as ‘specified’ in the
qualifying TT. None of the Indian decisions goes past the ‘specified’ scope or
tax rate in the qualified TT. The objective of this article is to be aware of
its possibility and its planning opportunities.

 

Observing the similarities between the above foreign decision and the
above example, the MFN clause in the Ind-NL TT refers to two important terms,
‘limits its taxation at source’
and ‘a rate lower or scope more restricted’.
It highlights the resultant scope or resultant rate that limits India’s taxation at source. We
know that the TT merely provides for an allocation of taxing rights between the
resident and the source country. If another TT with another OECD member state
provides for a reduced scope or a lower rate, and thereby limiting India’s
right to ‘taxation at source’, the MFN clause of the Ind-SW TT will get
triggered. India’s right to taxation at
source
is determined after taking into account the final tax rate
and provides for an observation to the resulting tax outcome. The scope of the
MFN clause needs to be seen from the perspective of the net result. Whether we
can derive the same result before the Indian judiciary as in the above foreign
decision, only time will tell.

 

COVID-19 AND TRANSFER PRICING – TOP 5 IMPACT AREAS

Starting December, 2019, the
world has witnessed the once-in-a-generation pandemic. Multinational
Enterprises will have to consider the effect of COVID 19 on their transfer
pricing policies due to large scale economic disruption. It will be imperative,
especially in this economic environment, to adhere to and demonstrate arms
length behaviour. Many MNEs have started revisiting transfer pricing policies,
inter company agreements, and documentation standards.

 

This article highlights the top
five transfer pricing impact areas arising out of Covid-19:

 

  • Supply chain restructuring
  • Renegotiation of pricing and other terms
  • Cash optimisation
  • Balancing business uncertainty with tax
    certainty
  • Benchmarking

 

Towards the end of the article,
some recommendations have also been outlined for consideration of the
government authorities to make it easier for taxpayers to demonstrate
compliance with arm’s length principles.

 

1.  Supply chain restructuring

MNE groups with geographically
diverse supply chains are affected severely due to the pandemic. Any disruption
to any part of the supply chain tends to impact the entire group, though the
extent of the impact depends on the importance of the part of the supply chain
which has been disrupted and the availability of alternatives.

 

Many MNE groups have discovered
the fragility in their value chains as a result of the disruption caused by the
pandemic. They are faced with one or more of the following situations:

  • Longer than needed supply chain involving
    various countries
  • Overdependence on a particular supplier /
    set of suppliers / region / country for materials / services / manufacturing /
    market
  • Affiliate(s) finding it difficult to sustain
    their businesses owing to disruption caused by the pandemic
  • Unviable non-core businesses.

 

MNE groups could consider this as
an opportunity to revisit their existing supply chains and also potentially
restructure the supply chain to achieve one or more of the following:

  • Shorter supply chains involving lesser
    number of geographical locations
  • Creation of alternate sourcing destinations
    for materials and services
  • Setting up of manufacturing / service
    facilities in alternate destinations
  • Closure and / or monetisation of non-core
    businesses / entities.

 

These restructuring transactions
could raise multiple transfer pricing issues, including:

  • Exit charges for that affiliate which will
    be eliminated from the supply chain / will get reduced business because of
    creation of an alternate destination
  • New transfer pricing agreements, policies
    and benchmarks to be developed in case of setting up of affiliates in new /
    alternate jurisdictions
  • Valuation issues in case non-core assets are
    transferred to affiliates
  • Issues relating to bearing of closure costs
    in case some group entities or part of their businesses face insolvency /
    closure
  • Issues around identification and valuation
    of intangibles involved in the restructuring exercise
  • Appropriate articulation of restructuring
    transactions in the local files of the entities concerned and the Master File
    of the group.

 

2.  Renegotiation of pricing and other terms

In arm’s length dealings,
businesses are in fact renegotiating prices as well as other terms, mainly with
their vendors.

 

In the case
of many MNEs it would be perfectly arm’s length behaviour for different
entities within the group to start discussions and re-negotiations regarding
prices and other terms of their inter-company transactions. In fact, in many
cases it might be non-arm’s length for companies to not renegotiate with their
affiliates. In almost all cases, it would be arm’s length behaviour to have
inter-company agreements which mirror agreements that would have been entered
into between third parties.

 

Renegotiations of existing
arrangements / agreements could be of at least the following types:

 

2.1. Compensation for limited
risk entities in the group

Many MNEs
have entities which operate as limited risk entities, such as captive service
providers, contract manufacturers, limited risk distributors, etc. As a general
rule, these limited risk entities are eligible for a stable income, all
residual profits or losses being attributed to the Principal affiliate.
However, in today’s dynamic business environment, no-risk entities do not exist
and limited risk entities also bear some risks. For example, limited risks
captive service providers or contract manufacturers have a significant single
customer risk; therefore any adverse disruption to that single customer will
adversely impact the captive as well.

 

In times of disruption like this,
exceptions to the general rule may be warranted and compensation for limited
risk activities may need to be revisited, depending, inter alia, on the
type of activity performed, type of disruption faced and the control and decision-making
capabilities of each of the parties involved.

 

In third party situations the
service provider would be better off to agree to reduced income (or even losses
in the short term) from the Principal, especially if the Principal itself is
facing challenges relating to its own survival. Accordingly, on a case-to-case
basis, certain MNEs may have the ability / necessity to revisit their
arrangements with their captive entities for the short to medium term. The
revision in the inter-company agreements could take several forms. For
instance, such revised agreements may provide for compensation for only costs
(without a mark-up), reduced mark-up, compensation for only ‘normal’ costs
(with or without mark-up), etc.

 

2.2.  Renegotiations of other terms

It is common for entities in an
MNE group to negotiate prices of their inter-company transactions from time to
time in line with the prevailing business dynamics. However, in emergencies
like these certain other terms of the agreements between affiliates may also
need to be renegotiated. For example, the commitment relating to quantities
which a manufacturer will purchase from the related raw material supplier may
undergo a significant renegotiation. Given the non-recovery of fixed costs due
to the resulting idle capacity, the raw material cost per unit may increase
which the supplier may want to pass on to the manufacturer. A higher per unit
cost, on the other hand, may make the related supplier uneconomical for the
manufacturer. In the interest of the long-term commercial relationship, the
parties may agree to an in-between pricing mechanism, as is likely to be the
case in third-party dealings. Which party would bear which types of costs would
depend on the characterisation of the parties, the decision-making evidenced
through capabilities of the persons involved, and the options realistically
available to the parties involved.

 

3. Cash optimisation

Cash optimisation is currently
one of the most important considerations of businesses across the world.

 

Many MNE groups facing a cash
crunch have started looking at the cash position with different group entities
and trying to optimise the cash available with them. This could lead to some
new funding-related transactions and benchmarking issues such as those relating
to interest and guarantee fees transactions between affiliates.

 

In some situations, taxpayers
that have borrowed funds from their affiliates and are not in a position to
honour their interest / principal repayment commitments could approach their
affiliate lenders to negotiate for a reduction in interest rate / interest
waiver / moratorium at least for some period of time. On the other hand, the
lender affiliate may want to balance the moratorium with a revision in the
interest rate. Significant movements in exchange rates of currencies primarily
attributable to the pandemic could make this negotiation even more dynamic. Any
kind of negotiation should take into account the perspectives of both parties
and options realistically available to them.

 

Similarly, payment terms for
goods or services purchased from or sold to AEs or other inter-company
transactions, such as royalties, could also be renegotiated at least for the
short term, to enable different entities within the MNE group to manage their
working capital cycle more efficiently.

 

4. Balancing business uncertainty with tax certainty

4.1. Advance Pricing Agreements (APAs)

Globally, APAs have been an
effective tool for taxpayers and tax authorities to achieve tax certainty.
However, in times like these businesses go through unprecedented levels of
uncertainty. Therefore, many taxpayers may find it against their interest to be
bound by the terms of the APAs, especially where these provide for a minimum
level of tax profits to be reported by the taxpayer.

 

If their circumstances warrant
it, taxpayers who have already entered into an APA may consider applying for
revision of the same. The law provides that an APA may be revised if, inter
alia
, there is a change in the underlying critical assumptions1.  Most Indian APAs have a critical assumption
of the business environment being normal through the term of the APA. In times
like these, a request for revision may be warranted if the business environment
for the taxpayer is considered to be abnormal based on the specific facts and
circumstances of its case and the impact of the uncertainty on the transaction
under consideration.

 

If the taxpayer and the
authorities do not agree to the revision, the taxpayer may potentially also
request for cancellation of the agreement2. On the other hand, in
case the tax authorities believe that cancellation of the agreement is
warranted due to failure on the part of the taxpayer to comply with its terms,
the taxpayer should utilise the opportunity provided to it to explain the
pandemic-related impact on the APA and the related reason for its failure to
comply with the terms of the agreement.

 

For taxpayers who are in the
process of negotiating for their APAs, and for whom the business impact is very
uncertain right now, it may be prudent to wait to get some more clarity
regarding the full impact of the pandemic on their business before actually
concluding the APA.

 

Alternatively,
taxpayers should request for an APA for a shorter term, say a period of up to
Financial Year (F.Y.) 2019-20, even if it means entering into the APA for, say
three or four years. Another APA could then be applied for, starting F.Y.
2021-22, based on the scenario prevailing then.

 

4.2. Safe harbours

The government has not yet
pronounced the safe harbours for the F.Y. 2019-20. Once these are pronounced,
depending on their industry, extent of business disruption, expected loss of
business / margins and the safe harbours provided for F.Y. 2019-20 and onwards,
taxpayers should evaluate whether or not to opt for safe harbours at least for
the F.Y.s 2019-20 and 2020-21.

5. Benchmarking

The current economic situation is
likely to create some unique benchmarking issues which should be borne in mind.
While some of these issues are common to taxpayers globally, a few issues are
specific to India given the specific language of the Indian transfer pricing
regulations.

 

5.1. Justification of losses / low margins

Taxpayers are facing several
business challenges including cost escalations / revenue reductions which are
not related to their transactions with affiliates. Taxpayers in several sectors
have recorded sharp declines in revenues due to lockdowns in various parts of
the world, including India. Some taxpayers are faced with the double whammy of
escalated costs even in times of reduced revenues. Escalated costs could
include, for example, additional costs relating to factory personnel who are
provided daily meals and other essentials, additional transportation costs
incurred to arrange special transport for essentials owing to most fleet
operators not plying, etc.

 

It is pertinent for taxpayers to
identify and record these expenses separately from the expenses incurred in the
regular course of business (preferably using separate accounting codes in the
accounting system). Depending on the transfer pricing method and comparables
selected, taxpayers should explore the possibility of presenting their
profitability statements excluding the impact of these additional costs /
reduced revenues.

 

Another alternative available to
taxpayers is to justify their transfer prices considering alternative profit
level indicators (PLIs).

 

In any case, given the fact that
a lot of information about comparable benchmarks is not available in the public
domain currently, business plans, industry reports, business estimates, etc.,
prepared / approved by the management of the organisation should be maintained in
the documentation file and presented to the transfer pricing authorities if
called for.

 

5.2.  Loss-Making Comparables

During times of emergency like
these, for many businesses the focus shifts from growth / profitability to
survival. Therefore, many businesses could try operating at marginal costing
levels to recover committed costs / utilise idle capacity. Therefore, businesses
operating at net operating losses could be a normal event at least in times
like these. Secondly, even the taxpayer could have been pushed into losses
because of completely commercial reasons and even such losses could be arm’s
length and commercially justifiable.

 

From the
perspective of transfer pricing benchmarking, persistently loss-making
companies are typically rejected as comparables mainly because they do not
represent the normal economic assumption that businesses operate to make
profits. However, in times when business losses are normal events, benchmarking
a loss-making taxpayer with only profit-making comparables would lead to
artificial benchmarks and, potentially, unwarranted transfer pricing additions
in the hands of taxpayers.

 

In case loss-making comparables
are indeed rejected, it could be more prudent to reject companies making losses
at a gross level.

 

5.3.  Unintended comparables

The current
focus of many businesses is survival. Businesses which have created capacities
to cater to their affiliates may find it difficult to sustain if the impact of
the pandemic lasts longer than a few months. For example, consider the case of
an Indian manufacturer whose manufacturing capacities are created based on
demand projections and confirmed orders from its affiliates. Since the
capacities are completely used up in catering to demand from its affiliates,
the manufacturer does not cater to unrelated parties. In case there is a
disruption in the demand from such affiliates expected in the medium term, in
order to sustain in the short to medium term, the Indian manufacturer could
start using its manufacturing set-up for other potential (unrelated) customers
also. While this appears to be a purely rational business decision by the
Indian manufacturer, a question arises whether such third-party dealings will
be considered as comparable transactions for dealings with affiliates. The
Indian manufacturer in this case would need to be able to document the business
justification for entering into these transactions with unrelated parties and
whether these are economically and commercially different from the routine
related party transactions. Similar issues could arise in respect of other
transactions such as temporary local procurement, local funding, etc.


5.4.  Mismatch in years and adjustments

The Indian transfer pricing
regulations provide for the use of three years’ data of comparables to iron out
the impact of cyclical events from the benchmarking analysis. However, data of
the last two years may not be representative of the conditions prevailing in
the current year (in this context, current year could be F.Y. 2019-20 as well
as 2020-21, both years being impacted to different extents due to the
pandemic).

 

Since the financial data of a lot
of comparables is not available up to the due date of transfer pricing
compliance, this mismatch may lead to a situation where normal business years
of comparables are compared with the pandemic-affected years of taxpayers – a
situation which is very likely to give skewed results.

 

Adjustments are regularly made to
minimise the impact of certain differences between a tested party (say,
taxpayer) and the comparable benchmarks. Depending on the industry in which the
taxpayer operates and the manner in which its affiliates are impacted,
taxpayers may need to make adjustments, including some unique adjustments, to
more aptly reflect the arm’s length nature of inter-company prices.

 

However, in the Indian context
the law does not provide for the making 
of adjustments to the tested party and the adjustments are to be
necessarily made to comparable data3. Given the lack of reliable
data for making adjustments, the reliability of the adjustments themselves may
be questioned.

 

It must be borne in mind that the
principle which necessitates downward adjustments to comparables’ margins
currently being made to normal years will also require upward adjustments to
comparables’ margins in respect of pandemic-affected years going forward. This
situation is simplistically illustrated in Table 1 below. For the purpose of
the illustration, it is assumed that:

 

  • F.Y. 2017-18 and 2018-19 are considered as
    normal business years
  • F.Y. 2019-20 is impacted by the pandemic,
    but to a lesser degree
  • F.Y. 2020-21 is impacted severely by the
    pandemic
  • F.Y. 2021-22 is a normal business year
  • At the time of conducting the benchmarking
    analysis, comparables’ data is available for only the last two years.

 

 

Table 1 – Year-wise comparability4
and adjustments5

 

Tested
Financial Year

Comparable
Financial Years

Adjustments
Required (say, adjustments to margins)

Remarks

2019-20

2018-19, 2017-18

Downward

Downward adjustment due to loss of business
compared to normal years (2018-19, 2017-18)

2020-21

2019-20, 2018-19

Downward

Downward adjustment due to loss of business
compared to normal / less impacted years (2019-20, 2018-19)

2021-22

2020-21, 2019-20

Upward

Upward adjustment due to normal business compared
to impacted years (2020-21, 2019-20)

 

 

6.  Recommendations to government authorities

Government authorities could
consider the following recommendations by way of amendments to the law to relax
adherence to transfer pricing regulations for taxpayers, especially for F.Y.s
2019-20 and 2020-21, i.e., the impacted years:

 

  • Expansion of arm’s length range
    Since different industries and different companies in the same industry will
    respond to the pandemic in different ways, the margins of comparables over the
    next two years could be extremely varied. Therefore, for the impacted years the
    arm’s length range may be expanded from the current 35th to 65th
    percentile to a full range, or inter-quartile range (25th to 75th
    percentile), as is used globally. Similarly, the applicable tolerance band
    could be appropriately increased from the current 1% / 3%.
  • Extending compliance deadline – In
    case the deadline for companies to file their financial statements for F.Y.
    2019-20 with the Registrar of Companies (RoC) is extended, the deadline for
    transfer pricing compliance should also be extended, to give the taxpayers
    their best chance to use comparable data for F.Y. 2019-20.
  • Extending deadlines for Master File
    compliance
    – It is expected that companies will take time to be able to
    fully assess the impact of the pandemic on their business models, value chains,
    profit drivers, etc., and then appropriately document the same in their Master
    File. Therefore, the due date for Master File compliances may be extended at
    least for F.Y. 2019-20.
  • Adjustment to taxpayer data – At
    least for the impacted years, the law could be amended to provide an option to
    the taxpayer to adjust its own financial data since the taxpayer will have a
    better level of information regarding its own financial indicators.
  • Multiple year tested party data – As
    discussed earlier, the Indian transfer pricing regulations currently provide
    for using multiple year data of the comparables as benchmarks for current year
    data of the tested party. For F.Y.s 2019-20 and 2020-21, use of multiple year
    data could be allowed even for the tested party to average out the impact of
    the pandemic to a certain extent.
  • Safe harbours relaxation – Safe
    harbours for F.Y. starting 2019-20 are currently pending announcement. The
    authorities could use this opportunity to rationalise these safe harbours to
    levels representative of the current business realities and reduce the safe
    harbour margins expected of Indian taxpayers. Safe harbours which are
    representative of the current business scenario will be very helpful to
    taxpayers potentially facing benchmarking issues discussed earlier in the
    article.
  • Relaxation in time period for
    repatriation of excess money (secondary adjustment)
    – Given the cash crunch
    being faced by MNEs worldwide, the time period for repatriation of excess money6  could be extended from the current period of
    only 90 days7.

 

CLOSING REMARKS

While the pandemic has impacted
almost every business in some way or the other in the short term and in many
inconceivable ways in the long term, just this claim alone will not be enough
from a transfer pricing perspective. Taxpayers will need to analyse the exact
impact of the pandemic on their entire supply chain and to the extent possible
also quantify the impact for their specific business. The impact of the
pandemic, steps taken by the management to mitigate the adverse impact,
negotiations / renegotiation (with third parties as well as affiliates),
business plans and business strategies, government policies and interventions
are some of the key factors which will together determine the transfer pricing
impact of the pandemic on the taxpayer.

 

The pandemic has brought to the
fore the importance of having robust agreements. While the current discussion
revolves mostly around force majeure clauses in third-party agreements,
inter-company agreements are equally important in the context of transfer
prices between the entities of an MNE group. Going forward, for new
transactions with affiliates or at the time of renewal of agreements relating
to existing transactions, care should be taken to draft / revise inter-company
agreements specifically outlining emergency-like situations and the
relationship between the parties in such times. Which party will be responsible
for which functions and would bear what type of risks and costs should be
clarified in detail. Agreements could potentially also include appropriate
price adjustment clauses. MNEs could consider entering into shorter term
agreements till the time the impact of the pandemic is reasonably clear. Having
said that, even if the agreement permits price adjustments, any pricing / price
adjustment decisions taken should also consider the economic situation and the
implication of such decisions under other applicable laws, including transfer
pricing laws of the other country/ies impacted by such decisions.

 

 

These times require businesses to
act fast and address several aspects of their business, and often, to keep the
business floating in the near term. Needless to say, taxpayers should
adequately document the commercial considerations dictating these decisions on
a real time basis and be able to present the same to transfer pricing
authorities in case of a transfer pricing scrutiny. Further, in the Master File
taxpayers should include a detailed industry analysis and a description of
business strategies as well as the corporate philosophy in combating the
financial impact of Covid-19, including the relationships with employees,
suppliers, customers / clients and lenders.

 

Governments and
inter-governmental organisations around the world are closely monitoring the
economic situation caused by the pandemic. Organisations such as OECD are also
monitoring various tax and non-tax measures taken by government authorities to
combat the impact of Covid-198. Taxpayers would do well to
continuously monitor the developments (including issuance of specific transfer
pricing guidelines relevant to this pandemic) at the level of organisations
such as OECD and UN, and also look out for guidance from the government
authorities.  

____________________________________________________________

 

1   Refer Rule 10Q of Income Tax Rules, 1962

2   Refer Rule 10Q of
Income Tax Rules, 1962

3   Refer Rule 10B of Income Tax Rules, 1962

4   Refer Rule 10CA of Income Tax Rules, 1962

5   Refer Rule 10B of
Income Tax Rules, 1962

6   Refer section 92CE of Income-tax Act, 1961

7   Refer Rule 10CB of Income-tax Rules, 1962

8   For instance, the OECD has recently published a report on tax and
fiscal policy in response to the coronavirus crisis. The OECD has also compiled
and published data relating to country-wise tax policy measures. Both, the
report as well as the country-wise data, can be accessed at www.oecd.org/tax

THE IMPACT OF COVID-19 ON INTERNATIONAL TAXATION

The rapid
outbreak of Covid-19 has had a significant commercial impact globally. As
globalisation has led to the world becoming one market (reducing borders and
increasing economic interdependence), the virus knows no borders and the impact
is being experienced by all of us.

 

Nearly 162 countries and their
governments are enforcing lockdowns and travel restrictions and taking other
measures to control further spread of the virus. The business community across
the world is operating in fear of an impending collapse of the global financial
markets and recession. This situation, clubbed with sluggish economic growth in
the previous year, especially in a developing country like India, is leading to
extremely volatile market conditions. In fact, 94% of the Fortune 1000
companies are already seeing Covid-19 disruptions1.

 

Amongst many tax issues (covered
separately in this Journal), this article focuses on cross-border elements in
the new equations. Such cross-border elements include unintended Permanent
Establishment exposure, incidental (and / or accidental) tax residency,
taxation issues relating to cross-border workers and so on. Transfer Pricing
issues have been covered separately in this Journal. In such a background, this
article attempts to throw some light on the impact of the Covid-19 outbreak on
these aspects.

 

IMPACT
ON CREATION OF PERMANENT ESTABLISHMENT

As the work scenario has changed
across the world due to Covid-19, with most employees working from their homes
while others may have got stuck in foreign countries because of the lockdown,
it has created several questions for companies as to the existence of their
Permanent Establishments in such countries.

 

The various treaties provide for
several types of PEs such as Fixed Place PE, Agency PE, Construction PE and
Service PE.

Fixed Permanent Establishment
(‘Fixed Place PE’)

 

 

A Permanent Establishment is ‘a
fixed place of business through which the business of an enterprise is wholly
or partly carried on’. This is commonly referred to as ‘basic rule of PE’, or
fixed place PE. A fixed place PE exists if the business of the enterprise is
carried out at a fixed place within a jurisdiction, typically for a substantial
period depicting permanence.

 

For a home office to be
considered the PE of an enterprise, the home office must be used on a
continuous basis for carrying on its business and the enterprise must require
the individual to use that location to carry on the said business.

 

It is worthwhile to note that the
Hon’ble Apex Court recently in the case of E-funds IT Solutions Inc2
which also relied on the ruling in the case of Formula One3,
held that ‘a Fixed Place PE can be created only if all the tests for the
constitution of a Fixed Place PE are satisfied, i.e., there is a “fixed place
at the disposal of the foreign enterprise”, with some “degree of permanence”,
from which the “business is carried on”’
.

 

The OECD in its Secretariat
Analysis of Tax Treaties and the Impact of the Covid-19 Crisis4  in paragraphs 5, 8 and 9 provides that under existing
treaty principles it is unlikely that a business will be considered to have a
fixed place PE in a jurisdiction as a result of the temporary presence of its
employees during the Covid-19 crisis. It has stated that ‘individuals who
stay at home to work remotely are typically doing so as a result of government
directives; it is
force majeure, not an enterprise’s requirement.
Therefore, considering the extraordinary nature of the Covid-19 crisis, and to
the extent that it does not become the new norm over time, teleworking from
home (i.e., the home office) would not create a PE for the business / employer,
either because such activity lacks a sufficient degree of permanency or
continuity, or because, except through that one employee, the enterprise has no
access or control over the home office’.

 

A typical
remote work from home scenario in the present crisis is a result of force
majeure
, i.e., government travel restrictions or work from home directives
which have been imposed during the pandemic and as such should not result in
the creation of a Fixed Place PE in a foreign jurisdiction. However, time is of
the essence to show how courts and tax authorities interpret Fixed Place PEs
under Covid-19.

 

Agency Permanent Establishment

The concept of PE has taken birth
in the context of two tax principles, i.e. the residence and source principles
of taxation. As per the source principle, if a tax resident of a particular
country earns income through another person (a separate legal entity) in
another country and where such other person can conclude contracts, then such
person creates an Agency PE in the latter country. The issue which needs to be
addressed is whether the activities of an individual temporarily working from
home for a non-resident employer during the present pandemic could give rise to
a dependent Agent PE.

 

In the case
of Reuters Limited vs. Deputy Commissioner of Income Tax (ITA No. 7895/Mum/2011)
the concept of Agency PE was discussed in detail wherein it was held that ‘A
qualified character of an agency is providing authorisation to act on behalf of
somebody else as to conclude the contracts’.
This means that the presence
which an enterprise maintains in a country should be more than merely
transitory if the enterprise is to be regarded as maintaining a PE, and thus a
taxable presence, in that country.

 

OECD in its Secretariat Analysis
of Tax Treaties and the Impact of the Covid-19 Crisis has stated that ‘an
employee’s or agent’s activity in a State is unlikely to be regarded as
habitual if he or she is only working at home in that State for a short period
because of
force majeure and / or government directives extraordinarily
impacting his or her normal routine’.

 

Construction Permanent
Establishment

The concept of Construction PE
provides that profits generated from construction works will be taxed in the
country in which the permanent establishment (construction site) is placed or located.

 

In general, a construction site
will constitute a PE if it lasts more than 12 months under the OECD Model, or
more than six months under the UN Model. However, the threshold may vary in
different tax treaties. It appears that many activities on construction sites
are being temporarily interrupted by the Covid-19 crisis.

 

In this regard, it has been seen
that the Indian tax authorities do not assume that interruptions of works at
site are to be excluded from the project period. OECD in its Secretariat
Analysis of Tax Treaties and the Impact of the Covid-19 Crisis has stated that ‘it
appears that many activities on construction sites are being temporarily
interrupted by the Covid-19 crisis. The duration of such an interruption of
activities should however be included in determining the life of a site and
therefore will affect the determination, whether a construction site
constitutes a PE. Paragraph 55 of the Commentary on Article 5(3) of the OECD
Model explains that a site should not be regarded as ceasing to exist when work
is temporarily discontinued (temporary interruptions should be included in
determining the duration of a site).

 

However, it is questionable
whether this case can be applied to the current pandemic situation which was
simply unpredictable. It is a natural event, but not seasonal. It is not even
predictable with a sufficient probability, as in bad weather. It is simply not
calculable; it is a classic force majeure scenario.

 

Service Permanent Establishment

Globalisation has led Multinational
Enterprises (MNEs) to increase cross-border secondment of technical, managerial
and other employees to their subsidiaries located in low-cost jurisdictions
such as India. The rationale behind seconding such employees is sometimes to
help the subsidiaries avail the benefit of the skill and expertise of the
seconded employees in their respective fields, and sometimes to exercise
control.

 

Secondment of employees has
become a really significant area, given that some bank staff or companies’
staff on assignments or secondments may be trapped in their non-native country
due to the travel restrictions, while others may have come back earlier than
expected; such situations might create a Service Permanent Establishment
(Service PE) for the companies.

 

Forced quarantine may delay the
intended secondment of an employee abroad or make a person employed on a
foreign contract decide to return to India due to reasons beyond control. In
this case, work for a foreign employer will be performed from India. This may
result in the creation of taxability of the employee’s income in India and in
some cases may even create risk of a permanent establishment. It is pertinent
to note, of course, that each case should be analysed on its own merits.

 

The concept of PE has been
defined extensively in various places but the interpretation of the same
continues to be complex and subjective. The distinct nature of each transaction
makes the interpretation of the law and the judicial precedents worth noting.
There can be no thumb rule which can be inferred from the jurisprudence or OECD
guidelines at present to the current crisis. Whether the virus-induced duration
of interruption would be included in the deadline in individual cases will
depend upon the specific circumstances.

 

We have
experienced in the recent past that India has been the frontrunner in
implementing the recommendations of OECD G-20 nations which are being discussed
under the initiative of BEPS Action Plans. Examples of this are introduction of
the concept of Significant Economic Presence (SEP) and Equalisation Levy (EL)
in the statute. However, it is important to see whether the same enthusiasm is
shown while implementing the recommendations on Covid-19-related aspects.

 

IMPACT
ON RESIDENTIAL STATUS OF A COMPANY (PLACE OF EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT)

A company is generally tax
resident in the country where it is incorporated or where it has its ‘Place of
Effective Management’ (‘POEM’). The residential status of a company dictates
where a company will be taxed on its worldwide profits.

 

The OECD MC has defined POEM as ‘the
place where key management and commercial decisions that are necessary for the
conduct of the business as a whole are in substance made and that all relevant
facts must be examined to determine POEM’
.

 

In India,
POEM has been recognised by amendment in section 6(3) of the Income-tax Act,
1961 under the Finance Act, 2015 which states that a company is said to be
resident in India in any previous year, if it is an Indian company, or its
place of effective management in that year is in India. The Explanation to
section 6(3) provides that POEM means a place where key management and
commercial decisions that are necessary for the conduct of the business of an
entity as a whole are, in substance, made. POEM is also an internationally
recognised residency concept and adopted in the tie-breaker rule in many Indian
treaties for corporate dual residents and is also adopted in many jurisdictions
in their domestic tax laws.

 

Due to Covid-19, management
personnel / CEO may not be able to travel to the habitual workplace on account
of restrictions and may have to attend Board meetings via telephone or video
conferencing which will create a concern as to the place / jurisdiction from
which decisions are being taken.

 

It is pertinent
to note that the Central Board of Direct Taxes (‘CBDT’) had issued POEM
guidelines vide Circular No. 06 dated 24th January, 2017. In
the context of cases where the company is not engaged in active business
outside India, the Guidelines state that the location of the company’s head
office is one of the key determinant factors.

 

In this connection, CBDT has
considered a situation where senior management participates in meetings via
telephone or video-conferencing. In such a situation, CBDT states that the head
office would normally be the location where the highest level of management
(e.g., the Managing Director / Financial Director) and their direct support
staff are located.

 

OECD in its Secretariat Analysis
of Tax Treaties and the Impact of Covid-19 states that ‘it is unlikely that
the Covid-19 situation will create any changes to an entity’s residence status
under a tax treaty. A temporary change in location of the Chief Executive
Officers and other senior executives is an extraordinary and temporary
situation due to the Covid-19 crisis and such change of location should not
trigger a change in residency, especially once the tie breaker rule contained
in tax treaties is applied’.

 

Although the OECD Guidance
provides relief in this respect, however, taxpayers should be mindful of the
specific clarifications issued by respective tax jurisdictions on this aspect.
Recently, the US IRS has announced5 cross-border tax guidance
related to travel disruptions arising from the Covid-19 emergency. In the
guidance, IRS stated that ‘U.S. business activities conducted by a
non-resident alien or foreign corporation will not be counted for up to 60
consecutive calendar days in determining whether the individual or entity is
engaged in a U.S. trade or business or has a U.S. permanent establishment, but
only if those activities would not have been conducted in the United States but
for travel disruptions arising from the Covid-19 emergency’.

 

 

Similarly, jurisdictions such as
Ireland, UK and Jersey, Australia have issued guidance providing various
relaxations to foreign companies in view of Covid-19.

 

While the OECD Secretariat has
done an analysis on treaty impact, it may be worthwhile exploring a
multilateral instrument (on the lines of MLI) for avoiding conflict of
positions while granting treaty benefit to the taxpayers.

 

IMPACT ON RESIDENTIAL STATUS OF AN
INDIVIDUAL

Generally, number of days
presence is considered as a threshold (the total number of days that an
individual is present in a particular jurisdiction) for determining individual
tax residency. An exception to this principle is where citizens are taxed
irrespective of their presence.

 

Due to the Covid-19 outbreak,
travel is restricted, which gives rise to two main situations:

i. A
person is temporarily away from his home (perhaps on holiday, perhaps to work
for a few weeks) and gets stranded in the host country because of the Covid-19
crisis and attains domestic law residence there.

ii. A person/s is working in a country (the ‘current home country’)
and has acquired residence status there, but they temporarily return to their
‘previous home country’ or are unable to return to their current home country
because of the Covid-19 situation.

 

According to
the OECD, in the first scenario it is unlikely that the person would acquire
residence status in the country where he is temporarily staying because of
extraordinary circumstances. There are, however, rules in domestic legislation
considering a person to be a resident if he or she is present in the country
for a certain number of days. But even if the person becomes a resident under
such rules, if a tax treaty is applicable, the person would not be a resident
of that country for purposes of the tax treaty. Such a temporary dislocation
should therefore have no tax implications.

 

In the second scenario, it is
again unlikely that the person would regain residence status for being
temporarily and exceptionally in the previous home country. But even if the
person is or becomes a resident under such rules, if a tax treaty is
applicable, the person would not become a resident of that country under the
tax treaty due to such temporary dislocation.

However, in litigious countries
like India, and in the context of recent legislative amendments where NRIs have
been targeted for ?managing’ their period of stay in India, the very thought of
having to substantiate to the authorities that as per any tie-breaker test, a
person is non-resident in India is daunting.

 

With a view to remove genuine
hardships to individuals, CBDT has issued a clarification through Circular No.
11 of 2020 dated 8th May, 2020 in respect of determination of
residency u/s 6 due to Covid-19. The circular is applicable to individuals who
came on visit to India on or before 22nd March, 2020 and have
continued to be in India in different scenarios. This circular applies only for
determination of residency for FY 2019-2020.

 

Accordingly, in case of
individuals who have come on a visit to India on or before 22nd
March, 2020 and are falling under the following categories, relaxation will be
provided while determining their number of days’ presence in India for the
purpose of section 6 for FY 2019-20, as explained hereunder:

 

a. Scenario 1: where an
individual (who is on a visit to India) is unable to leave India before 31st
March, 2020 – the period of stay between 22nd and 31st
March, 2020 (both inclusive) shall not be counted for determining presence in
India.

 

b. Scenario 2: where an individual
has been quarantined in India on account of Covid-19 on or after 1st
March, 2020 and such individual has departed on an evacuation flight before 31st
March, 2020 or is unable to depart – the period starting from the start
of the quarantine period up to 31st March, 2020 or date of actual
departure shall not be counted for determining presence in India.

 

c. Scenario 3: where an
individual (who is on a visit to India) has departed on an evacuation flight
before 31st March, 2020 – the period of stay between 22nd
March, 2020 and date of his departure shall not be counted for determining
presence in India.

 

It has also
been stated that another circular will be issued in due course for determining
residency for FY 2020-2021. These pro-active clarifications bring relief to
many individuals facing difficulties in determining their residential status
amidst the measures taken by various governments to contain the impact of
Covid-19. It should be noted that this circular provides relief only from the
residence test u/s 6 of the Act. The issue of an individual’s forced stay in
India playing a role in constituting residence for a foreign company, HUF,
etc.; or determination of a business connection or Permanent Establishment of a
non-resident in India; and other such implications are not covered in the
circular. The US has recently issued a clarification which states that up to 60
consecutive calendar days of presence in the USA that are presumed to arise from
travel disruption caused by Covid-19 will not be counted for purposes of
determining US tax residency.

 

IMPACT ON CROSS-BORDER WORKERS

Cross-border
workers are persons who commute to work in one state but live in another state
where they are resident.

 

As per the
Income from Employment Article of the DTAAs, income from employment is taxable
only in a person’s state of residence unless the ‘employment is exercised’ in
the other state. However, there are certain conditions for not taxing
employment income in a state where employment is exercised (presence of employee
in that state not exceeding 183 days; and remuneration is paid by an employer
who is not a tax resident of that state; and such remuneration is not borne by
the employer’s PE in that state).

 

The issue which will come up here
is the taxation of wages and salaries received by such cross-border workers in
cases where they cross the threshold of 183 days due to travel restrictions.

OECD in the Secretariat Analysis
of Tax Treaties and the Impact of Covid-19 has stated that income should be
attributable to the state where they used to work before the crisis.

 

THE WAY FORWARD

The issues discussed above are
some of the common issues on which clarification / guidance should be issued by
the respective tax jurisdictions in order to protect taxpayers from unnecessary
hardship. We expect that CBDT will also consider these issues and come out with
relevant relief measures. Though the OECD guidelines have a persuasive value,
they are not binding in any manner, especially to non-OECD member countries. In
fact, taxpayers may have certain other issues on which they may need
clarifications; therefore, a mechanism should be put in place where they can
describe the facts and get redressal from the tax authorities. It is
recommended that companies / individuals must maintain robust documentation
capturing the sequence of facts and circumstances of the relevant presence
inside or outside of India during the Covid-19 crisis to substantiate the bona
fides
of their case before the tax authorities if and when they arise in
future.

 

‘Presume not that I am the thing
I was’
– Shakespeare‘Come what come may, time and the hour run
through the roughest day’
– Shakespeare  



____________________________________________

1   https://fortune.com/2020/02/21/fortune-1000-coronavirus-china-supply-chain-impact/
dated 21st February, 2020

2   ADIT vs. E-funds IT Solution Inc. (Civil Appeal No. 6802 of 2015
SC)

3   Formula One World Championship Ltd. vs. CIT (IT) [2016] 76
taxmann.com 6/390 ITR 199 (Delhi)(SC)

4   https://read.oecd-ilibrary.org/view/?ref=127_127237-vsdagpp2t3&title=OECD-Secretariat-analysis-of-tax-treaties-and-the-impact-of-the-COVID-19-Crisis

5   https://www.irs.gov/newsroom/treasury-irs-announce-cross-border-tax-guidance-related-to-travel-disruptions-arising-from-the-covid-19-emergency

INTERNATIONAL DECISIONS IN VAT / GST

In this, the second in the series, the compiler shares cases developing
throughout the world on VAT / GST as an aid in grasping the finer propositions
of the GST law in India. After each decision, the compiler has put in a note –
‘Principles applicable to Indian law’. This note is meant to draw the readers’
attention to particular propositions which are relevant. Readers are, however,
advised that provisions in India and abroad may not be similar and the
decisions should not be treated as automatically applicable to Indian law

 

EU
VAT / UK VAT

 

(1)   Composite / mixed supply –
(a) Post-supply activities – Whether changes nature of supply; (b) Inter-linked
contracts – Supply of land subject to condition that the land be further
supplied to an identified third party – Whether both contracts are composite

 

Skatterministeriet vs. KPC Herning [Judgement dated 4th
September, 2019 in Case C-71/18]

 

European Court of Justice

 

KPC Herning
purchased from the port of Odense the land known as ‘Finlandkaj 12’ with a
warehouse built on it. The sale contract was subject to a number of conditions,
including that KPC Herning was to conclude a contract with Boligforeningen
Kristiansda for the purpose of carrying out, on the land in question, a
building project composed of social housing for young persons.

 

Neither KPC
Herning under the first contract, nor Boligforeningen Kristiansda under the
second contract, was formally tasked with the duty to demolish the existing
warehouse on the land under the second contract, though the overall intention
and purpose of both contracts necessarily required demolition of the warehouse
at some stage. In fact, Boligforeningen Kristiansda engaged a third party to
undertake the demolition after the second sale was completed. A question arose
during the VAT classification proceedings as to whether the covenant to
demolish in the second contract formed part of the first and / or the second
contract?

 

HELD

It was held
that both the contracts did not require the demolition of the warehouse which
was existing at the time the two contracts were performed. Demolition was
carried out after the second sale was completed and was an independent contract
between Boligforeningen Kristiansda and a third party. This fact of demolition
could not colour the nature of supply under either the first or the second
supply.

 

Furthermore,
the first and the second contracts were held to be independent of each other.
The mere fact that one contract required the conclusion of another contract
with a third party was held not to make the two contracts a single, indivisible
transaction.

 

Principles applicable to Indian law:

This
decision is relevant for similar controversies which may arise u/s 8 of the
CGST Act wherein a determination is required as to whether two transactions are
composite transactions and must be classified as a single transaction or
independent of each other.

 

(2)   Whether making and reselling
hay is a ‘business’

 

Babylon Farm Limited vs. HMRC [2019] UKFTT 562 (TC)

 

UK First Tier Tribunal

 

The taxpayer
in this case was doing no activity except making hay for resale, sale of
outbuildings on the farm and undertaking preparatory steps for new ventures
which he wanted to launch. As such, the only income during the year under
question was from resale of hay. The question was whether making and reselling
hay can be said to be a ‘business’ under the UK VAT Act, since the Revenue had
denied input tax credit to the taxpayer on the basis that he was not engaged in
‘business’.

 

HELD

The
definition of ‘business’ is contained in section 94 of the UK VAT Act:

‘(1) In this
Act “business” includes any trade, profession or vocation.

(2) Without
prejudice to the generality of anything else in this Act, the following are
deemed to be the carrying on of a business:

(a) the provision by a club, association or organisation
(for a subscription or other consideration) of the facilities or advantages
available to its members; and

(b) the admission, for a consideration, of persons to any
premises.…

……

(4) Where a
person in the course or furtherance of a trade, profession or vocation, accepts
any office, (the) services supplied by him as the holder of that office are
treated as supplied in the course or furtherance of the trade, profession or
vocation;

(5) Anything
done in connection with the termination or intended termination of a business
is treated as being done in the course or furtherance of that business;

(6) The
disposition of a business, or part of a business, as a going concern, or of the
assets or liabilities of the business or part of the business (whether or not
in connection with its reorganisation or winding up), is a supply made in the
course or furtherance of the business.’

 

The Tribunal
recognised that there is no comprehensive definition of ‘business’ exhaustively
explaining its meaning under the UK VAT law. It therefore relied on the seminal
judgement in the case of Commissioners of Customs and Excise vs. Lord
Fisher [1981] STC 238
to derive the principles of what constitutes
‘business’ in ordinary parlance:

 

(a) a
serious undertaking earnestly pursued;

(b) has a
certain measure of substance;

(c) is an
occupation or function actively pursued with reasonable or recognisable
continuity;

(d) is
conducted in a regular manner and on sound and recognised business principles;

(e) is
predominantly concerned with the making of taxable supplies for consideration;
and

(f) the
supplies are of a kind that, subject to differences in detail, are commonly made
by those who seek to profit from them.

 

The Tribunal
reviewed all the evidence and the submissions in the appeal against these six
criteria and concluded that:

 

(i) The
hay-making activity was being seriously and earnestly pursued by the taxpayer.
The taxpayer organised this activity using the equipment and machinery that had
been in use for many years when he had a larger active farming business. The
taxpayer explained that he and his wife had wanted a farm and had carried on
farming for many years and remained committed to it. Hay-making was the last
part of that activity. There was a single customer of the business who was the
end-user for the hay and there was a clear purpose in producing
the hay.

(ii)   For the same reasons the hay-making activity
had some substance. The supply of hay was zero-rated but was not VAT-exempt.
However, it was a very modest activity carried out on a casual basis.

(iii)  The hay-making activity had been continuous
even though it was seasonal. The taxpayer undertook this activity regularly and
had done so for many years.

(iv) The
supply of hay for consideration was a common activity that was frequently
carried on for profit in agricultural businesses.

(v)    The activity of hay-making was not being
conducted in a regular manner and on sound and recognised principles. The hay
was grown on land belonging to the taxpayer. There was no evidence of the
commercial basis on which the taxpayer was able to carry out the cutting of hay
or any other activity on the land. The hay was cut and baled by the taxpayer on
the machinery he owned and operated. The bales were then sold to a single
customer for his livery business. He fixed the price that he paid for the hay
and decided what costs were borne by the taxpayer and which he or another of
his businesses bore. The activities of the taxpayer did not appear to give rise
to any staff or other costs. It was only the taxpayer’s ownership of the baling
equipment and machinery that was used in the hay-making activity. The single
customer also had a significant say in the manner in which costs were accrued
and the profitability of the taxpayer’s hay-making activities was entirely
dependent on the single customer’s subjective judgement as to where costs and
revenue should be allocated between his various activities.

(vi) The
hay-making activity was not predominantly concerned with making taxable
supplies for consideration. The activity led to little revenue, under £500 per
year. No invoices had been raised by the taxpayer for payment by its only customer
and no payment had been made for the bales of hay for a number of years. The
taxpayer’s activity was not predominantly concerned with making a profit.

 

On this
basis, the activity of making and reselling hay was held not to be a
‘business’.

 

Principles applicable to Indian law:

The UK VAT
Tribunal has come to the conclusion that the stand-alone hay-making activity on
its own cannot be said to be ‘business’. This decision repays study inasmuch as
it carefully dissects the various elements of the ordinary meaning of
‘business’. Lord Fisher’s (Supra) judgement is a decision
rendered under the UK VAT Act and hence is relevant in the Indian context –
except that the UK Tribunal seems to give some weightage to the profit motive
element. In India, the definition of ‘business’ in the Indian GST law makes the
profit motive irrelevant.

 

However, the
Hon’ble Supreme Court has explained in the case of a similar definition in
sales tax statutes in CST vs. Sai Publication Fund (2002) 126 STC 288 (SC) that even if
the profit motive is irrelevant under the statute, the activity must still have an underlying commercial nature. The UK
VAT Tribunal’s observations as to lack of commercial nature are therefore
relevant in the Indian context.

 

NEW ZEALAND GST

 

(3)   Collection of GST and
non-payment – Penalties – New GST regime – Principles

 

Hannigan vs. Inland Revenue Department [(1988) 10 NZTC 5162]

 

High Court, New Zealand

 

The taxpayer
had collected tax but not paid the same. Regarding the penalty levied on him,
the High Court of New Zealand held that the principle of proportionality will
apply and certain mitigating factors must be taken into account. In particular,
the observations on the GST law being a new law (at that time in New Zealand)
are relevant to our Indian circumstances today:

‘…I am
reluctant at this stage and on this particular appeal to lay down general
guidelines as to the quantum of fines.

 

In the first place,
I imagine that the circumstances will vary enormously. There will be single
traders who, simply from inability to cope with the requirements of present-day
society, have not complied with the law. There may not be substantial sums of
money involved. There may be larger organisations who appear wilfully to have
ignored their legal obligations. There may even, indeed, be offenders who
prefer to face the fine rather than make the payment which is a necessary
consequence of making the return on the due date. Obviously, the fine must be
tempered to the circumstance and in particular must be tempered to the fact
that there are advantages to traders in delaying paying over the GST which they
have recovered. On the other hand, this is new legislation. The stage may not
yet have been reached where it is appropriate to lay down an indication that
offences of this kind will always be treated seriously and by way of the
imposition of a substantial fine. I do not doubt that that day will be
appropriate (sic), but it may be that the Act should be given two or
three years of operation before such a step is taken.’
 

RENEWED FOCUS ON ‘SUBSTANCE OVER FORM’ IN THE WORLD OF INTERNATIONAL TAX

At first instance,
the term ‘Double Irish Dutch Sandwich’ would appear to be an appetising snack.
However, in the world of international tax this has become an unappetising
proposition for multinational corporations (MNCs). This is because ‘Double
Irish Dutch Sandwich’ refers to the use of a combination of Irish and Dutch
companies by MNCs to shift profits to low or no tax jurisdictions.

 

This and other
similar aggressive tax strategies not only help MNCs reduce their effective tax
outgo, but also highlight the shift in mind-set of tax being a cost against
profit, rather than a duty towards society. Many countries have started
frowning upon such investment and operating ‘structures’ and are implementing
various measures both nationally and internationally to address the issue. The
general consensus amongst them is that MNCs should pay their fair share of
taxes in the countries where they actually operate and earn income. In this
context, the two important aspects identified by the world at large are that

(a) certain countries provide aggressive and preferential tax regimes to
MNCs to enable them to adopt aggressive tax strategies (including access to
favourable tax treaties); and
(b) the operations of
MNCs in such countries do not have adequate economic or commercial substance to
justify the income allocated to them.

 

At the heart of
this fairly recent initiative is an age-old concept in tax laws, ‘substance
over form’ – whether the substance of the transaction is in fact different from
what its form is legally made out to be. This article aims to touch upon some
of the recent updates in the world of international tax which have a renewed
focus on ‘substance over form’ and the impact of some of the common structures
involving India.

 

(I)     Meaning of the terms ‘substance’ and ‘form’

‘Substance is
enduring, form is ephemeral’.
These are the words
of Mr. Dee Hock (founder of VISA) which imply that while ‘substance’ is
long-lasting, ‘form’ is transitory. The term ‘substance over form’ is a
well-known,
age-old concept under accounting and tax laws not only in India but even
globally. In essence, the concept requires looking at the real purpose /
intention of the transaction rather than simply relying on the way the
transaction is presented legally and on paper (e.g. accounting entries, legal
agreements, etc.). Black’s Law Dictionary defines the terms ‘substance’ and
‘form’ as under:

(i)    Substance: ‘The essence of
something; the essential quality of something as opposed to its mere form’;

(ii)    Form: ‘The outer shape or structure
of something, as distinguished from its substance or matter’.

 

(II)   Landmark
judgements on substance over form

One of the earliest
landmark judgements in the world in the context of ‘substance over form’ is the
English Court judgement in the case of IRC vs. Duke of Westminster (1936)
AC 1 (HL).
This judgement laid down certain important observations
which have subsequently been applied even by Indian courts. In this case, based
on professional advice, the Duke of Westminster paid his gardener an annuity
instead of wages and the same was claimed as tax-deductible expenditure. The argument
of the tax authorities was that the substance of the annuity payment was to in
fact pay wages, which were household expenses and not tax-deductible. The said
argument was, however, rejected by the House of Lords and Lord Tomlin observed
as under:

 

‘Every man is
entitled if he can to order his affairs so that the tax attaching under the
appropriate Acts is less than it otherwise would be. If he succeeds in ordering
them so as to secure this result, then, however unappreciative the
Commissioners of Inland Revenue or his fellow taxpayers may be of his
ingenuity, he cannot be compelled to pay an increased tax. This so-called
doctrine of “the substance” seems to me to be nothing more than an attempt to
make a man pay notwithstanding that he has so ordered his affairs that the
amount of tax sought from him is not legally claimable.’

 

The concept of ‘substance over form’ has also been discussed in Indian
judicial precedents since many years – for instance, the Supreme Court
judgement in the case of Mugneeram Bangur & Co.1  on facts of the case held that the sale of
the business of land development as a whole concern was a slump sale not liable
to tax, even though the Tribunal had factually held that the goodwill component
in the sale was the excess value / profit from stock in trade transferred with
the other assets. In a way, the Supreme Court had upheld the principle of form
over substance.

_____________________________________________________

1   [1965] 57 ITR 299 (SC)

2        [2012] 341 ITR 1 (SC)

 

However, in the
context of cross-border / international tax issues arising from ‘structures’,
the concept of ‘substance over form’ has recently gained more significance from
the judgement of the Supreme Court in the case of Vodafone International
Holdings B.V.
2  The
judgement underlined the difference between adopting a ‘look-through’ approach
(substance) at the transaction, versus adopting a ‘look-at’ approach (form).
The Supreme Court observed that the following principles emerged from the
Westminster judgement:

1. A legislation is
to receive a strict or literal interpretation;

2. An arrangement
is to be looked at not by its economic or commercial substance but by its legal
form; and

3. An arrangement
is effective for tax purposes even if it has no business purpose and has been
entered into to avoid tax.

 

However, the
Supreme Court also noted that during the 1980s, the House of Lords began to
attach a ‘purposive interpretation approach’ and gradually began to place
emphasis on ‘economic substance doctrine’ as a question of statutory
interpretation. For example, in Inland Revenue Commissioner vs.
McCruckian (1997) BTC 346
the House of Lords held that the substance of
a transaction may be considered if it is a tax avoidance scheme. Lord Steyn
observed as follows:

 

‘While Lord
Tomlin’s observations in the
Duke of Westminster
case [1936] A.C. 1
still point to a material
consideration, namely, the general liberty of the citizen to arrange his
financial affairs as he thinks fit, they have ceased to be canonical as to the
consequence of a tax avoidance scheme.’

 

In the light of
various judgements, the Supreme Court laid down the following rationale in the
context of substance over form:

(i)    The principle of the Westminster judgement is
that if a document or transaction is genuine, the court cannot go behind it to
some supposed underlying substance. Subsequent judgements of the English Court
have termed this as ‘the cardinal principle’.

(ii)    Courts have evolved doctrines like ‘substance
over form’ to enable taxation of underlying assets in cases of fraud, sham,
etc. However, genuine strategic tax planning is not ruled out.

(iii)   Tax authorities can invoke the ‘substance over
form’ principle (or ‘piercing the corporate veil’ test) only after establishing
on the basis of facts and circumstances that the transaction is a sham or tax
avoidant.

(iv)   For instance, in a case where the tax
authorities find that in an investment holding structure, an entity which has
no commercial / business substance has been interposed only to avoid tax, then
applying the test of fiscal nullity it would be open to the tax authorities to
discard such inter-positioning of that entity.

 

It is well-known
that the Supreme Court judgement in the Vodafone case was
significantly overridden through retrospective amendments made in the Indian
tax law in 2012. However, the retrospective amendments did not alter the
rationale that, unless there is conclusive evidence to suggest otherwise, once
a non-resident furnishes a tax residency certificate (TRC) from its home
country, benefits under the applicable tax treaty with India should not be
denied3 .

__________________________________________

3   This was also in line with an earlier Supreme
Court judgement in the case of Azadi Bachao Andolan and Another [2003] 263 ITR
706 (SC)

 

 

To address the
issue of ‘substance over form’, the General Anti-Avoidance Rule (GAAR) was
introduced in 2012 itself, although it became effective in India only from 1st
April, 2017. Subject to conditions, GAAR now permits tax authorities to deny
tax treaty benefit in India if the main purpose of undertaking the transaction
was to obtain a tax benefit under an impermissible avoidance arrangement in
India. GAAR also permits disregarding or re-characterising any step in the
impressible avoidance arrangement, including deeming connected persons to be
one person, relocating the situs of any asset or place of residence,
disregarding corporate structure or treating equity as debt or revenue item as
capital or vice versa, as deemed fit. Accordingly, the concept of
‘substance over form’ has now been codified under the Indian law with effect
from 1st April, 2017 through GAAR.

 

Further, with India
adopting the Place of Effective Management (PoEM) criteria from 1st
April, 2016 for determination of tax residency of foreign companies in India,
it can be said that Indian tax laws now have greater focus on the concept of
‘substance over form’. This is also the case under the Income Computation and
Disclosure Standard I relating to accounting policies which categorically
states that the treatment and presentation of transactions and events shall be
governed by their substance and not merely by the legal form.

 

(III)  Renewed international focus on substance over
form, i.e., tax planning vs. tax avoidance

In the past few
years, certain large MNCs were found to implement aggressive business /
investment structures (such as the ‘Double Irish Dutch Sandwich’) which shifted
profits to jurisdictions with low / NIL taxes. At times, while the structures
were legally valid, it was found that the economic activities in the
jurisdictions with lower / NIL taxes were not commensurate with the profits
allocated to such jurisdictions. With courts upholding the legal validity of
the structures in light of tax treaties and international tax law principles,
countries realised that tax treaties along with aggressive tax regimes in
certain countries were in fact the thin line that separated fair tax planning
from aggressive tax mitigation / planning.

 

To tackle this
issue, the OECD and G20 countries adopted a 15-point action plan in September,
2013 to address Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS). The BEPS Action Plan
identified 15 actions on the basis of three key pillars:

 

(a)   introducing coherence in the domestic rules
that affect cross-border activities;

(b)   reinforcing substance requirements in the
existing international standards; and

(c)   improving transparency as well as certainty.

 

While the concept
of ‘substance’ is one of the three key pillars of the overall BEPS project, it
is discussed in detail in BEPS Action 5: Countering Harmful
Tax Practices More Effectively, Taking into Account Transparency and Substance.

Further, the concept of ‘substance over form’ has been specifically discussed
in BEPS Action 6: Preventing the Granting of Treaty Benefits
in Inappropriate Circumstances.

 

The above-mentioned
15 actions have culminated in the formalisation and signing of the Multilateral
Instrument (MLI) which is a landmark development in the context of tax treaties
across the globe. The MLI seeks to modify thousands of existing bilateral tax
treaties through one instrument. It does not replace these bilateral tax
treaties but acts as an extended text to be read along with the covered
bilateral tax treaties for implementing specific BEPS measures.

 

India has deposited
the ratified MLI with the OECD on 25th June, 2019 and notified the
date of entry into force of the same as 1st October, 2019.
Accordingly, covered Indian tax treaties will be impacted from 1st
April, 2020 onwards. Hence, going forward it is imperative that any Indian
inbound or outbound cross-border structuring of investment / business
operations will have to factor BEPS and MLI aspects, if the structuring
involves availing tax treaty benefits.

 

(IV) Concept of ‘substance over from’ embedded in MLI

Part III of the
MLI, which deals with Treaty Abuse, includes two minimum standards / articles
which are sought to be introduced in the covered bilateral tax treaties. These
articles in essence require testing the substance of a transaction /
arrangement before granting tax treaty benefit. A summary of these articles is
as under:

 

1.    Article 6: Purpose of a Covered Tax
Agreement:
This article seeks to act as a preamble to the covered bilateral
tax treaty and clarify that while the purpose of such treaty is to eliminate
double taxation of income, the same should not be used for creating
opportunities for non-taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion or
avoidance. Specifically, it clarifies that cases of treaty-shopping for the
indirect benefit of residents of third jurisdictions would not be eligible for
tax treaty benefits.

 

2.    Article 7: Prevention of Treaty Abuse: This
article seeks to introduce the Principal Purpose Test (PPT) as a minimum
standard in the covered bilateral tax treaty. There is an option to supplement
the PPT with a Simplified Limitation of Benefits (SLOB) clause4.
Further, the PPT can be replaced altogether with a Detailed Limitation of
Benefits (DLOB) clause, if the same incorporates requisite BEPS standards. The
PPT mainly states that tax treaty benefit shall not be granted if it is
reasonable to conclude, having regard to all relevant facts and circumstances,
that obtaining that benefit was one of the principal purposes of any
arrangement or transaction that resulted directly or indirectly in that
benefit. The benefit would, however, be granted if the same is in accordance
with the object and purpose of the relevant provisions of the tax treaty.

From the above
articles it can be observed that wherever applicable, a transaction or
structure will need to have adequate economic substance in order to pass the
test laid down by the preamble or PPT article of the MLI.

_________________________________________________

4   India has adopted PPT along with SLOB with an
option to adopt an LOB in addition or replacement of PPT through bilateral
negotiation. However, various important tax treaty partners have only adopted
PPT which means that SLOB will not apply to those tax treaties

 

 

(V)    OECD’s focus on substance to tackle cases of
tax treaty abuse

BEPS Action 6 recognises that courts of some countries have developed various
interpretative tools such as economic substance, substance over form, etc.,
that effectively address various forms of domestic law and treaty abuses. There
is, however, an agreement that member countries should carefully observe the
specific obligations enshrined in the tax treaties to relieve double taxation
in the absence of clear evidence that the tax treaties are being abused.

 

BEPS Action 5 explains that the Forum on Harmful Tax Practices (FHTP) was
committed to improving transparency and requiring substantial activity for any
preferential tax regime in any country. FHTP was to take a holistic approach to
evaluate preferential tax regimes in the BEPS context and engage with non-OECD
members for modification to the existing framework, if required.

 

It has been
categorically explained that the work on harmful tax practices is not intended
to promote harmonisation of income taxes or tax structures generally within or
outside the OECD, nor to dictate to any country what should be the appropriate
level of tax rates. The intention mainly is to encourage an environment in
which free and fair tax competition can take place, i.e., a ‘level playing
field’ through agreement of common criteria that promote a co-operative
framework. The broad steps recognised by BEPS Action 5 are:

 

(i)    Enhanced requirement of having substantial
activity in jurisdictions with preferential tax regimes;

(ii)    Suitably checking the ‘nexus’ of actual
activity in such jurisdictions with the nature of income earned there;

(iii)   Improved transparency and addressing of BEPS
concerns through an agreed framework to exchange information pertaining to tax
provisions and rulings amongst countries;

(iv)   Need for amendments to preferential tax
regimes of countries in line with BEPS;

(v)   Ongoing engagement between FHTP and OECD and
non-OECD members to address BEPS.

The nature of core
income-generating activities, other than for IP activities, specifically
discussed in the BEPS Action 5 in the context of substantial
activity is as follows:

 

Nature of
activity

Illustrative core income-generating
activities

a. Headquarters regimes

Taking relevant management decisions;
incurring expenditures on behalf of group entities; and coordinating group
activities

b. Distribution and service centre
regimes

Transporting and storing goods; managing
the stocks and taking orders; and providing consulting or other administrative
services

c. Financing or leasing regimes

Agreeing on funding terms; identifying
and acquiring assets to be leased (in the case of leasing); setting the terms
and duration of any financing or leasing; monitoring and revising any
agreements; and managing any risks

d. Fund management regimes

Taking decisions on the holding and
selling of investments; calculating risks and reserves; taking decisions on
currency or interest fluctuations and hedging positions; and preparing
relevant regulatory or other reports for government authorities and investors

e. Banking and insurance regimes

Banking: Raising funds; managing risk, including credit, currency and
interest risk; taking hedging positions; providing loans, credit or other
financial services to customers; managing regulatory capital; and preparing
regulatory reports and returns

Insurance: Predicting and calculating risk; insuring or re-insuring
against risk; and providing client services

f. Shipping regimes

Managing the crew (including hiring,
paying and overseeing crew members); hauling and maintaining ships;
overseeing and tracking deliveries; determining what goods to order and when
to deliver them; and organising and overseeing voyages

g. Holding company regimes

Regimes providing benefits to companies
only holding equity in other companies should at a minimum require such
companies to adhere to all applicable corporate law filings and have the
substance necessary to engage in holding and managing equity participation.
For example, having both the people and premises necessary for these
activities to mitigate possibility of letterbox and brass plate companies
benefiting from such regimes

 

Subsequent to the Action
Report 5
, the FHTP published its 2018 report on preferential regimes in
the context of harmful tax practices. An update to the same has been published
on 19th July, 2019. The report explains in detail the activity-wise
review of tax regimes in various jurisdictions and the FHTP’s view on the same.
Some of the key observations arising from the said report for the purpose of
this article are:

(a)   In the context of the first time review of the
substantial activities factor in ‘no or only nominal tax jurisdictions’, the
status of United Arab Emirates (UAE) was ‘in the process of being amended’,
while the status of others, including Bahrain, Bahamas, Bermuda, BVI, Cayman
Islands, Isle of Man, Jersey, etc., was held to be ‘not harmful’. The report
states that while economic substance requirements were introduced in all these
jurisdictions (in case of UAE from 30th April, 2019 onwards) and
domestic legal framework meets all aspects of the standard, there was ‘one
technical point’ in UAE that is outstanding. However, the UAE has committed to
addressing this issue as soon as possible. The technical point has, however,
not been discussed in the report.

(b)   Tax regimes in Mauritius such as ‘innovation
box’, ‘Global headquarters administration regime’, ‘Global treasury
activities’, ‘Captive insurance’, ‘investment banking’, ‘shipping regime’ and
the recently introduced ‘partial exemption system’ are all compliant and not
harmful. The report also recognised the abolition of the tax regime for Global
Business License 1 and 2 holders
in Mauritius.

 

(VI) Steps regarding
economic substance taken by UAE and Mauritius in light of the BEPS Project

It is well known
that UAE and Mauritius have favourable tax regimes (such as non-levy of
income-tax in UAE, non-levy of income-tax on foreign capital gains in
Mauritius, etc.) and tax treaties which allocate right of taxation of certain
income to these countries. This effectively results in double non-taxation.
Accordingly, to address BEPS concerns both UAE and Mauritius have recently
introduced substance norms. A summary of the substance regulations is provided
below:

 

UAE

With effect from 30th April,
2019 all persons licensed by authorities of UAE (including free zones) are
required to meet the economic substance criteria notified. Only commercial
companies with direct or indirect ownership by the government of UAE / its
emirate or a body under its ownership have been excluded from the
applicability of these provisions. The nature of businesses identified is
similar to the businesses explained above in the context of BEPS Action
5

 

It is important to note that all the
covered persons need to file a report on the economic substance requirements
with the regulatory authority (that has issued trade license to it) for each
financial year. Failure to meet the criteria entails administrative penalties
ranging from AED 10,000 to AED 300,000 depending on nature of default

 

It is crucial to understand that the
regulation grants

power to authorised personnel of the
regulatory

authority to enter the covered person’s
business premises and examine and take copies of business documents. The
regulation also permits exchange of

information from Regulatory Authority to
Ministry of Finance in UAE and further with designated foreign

 

authority in cases where either economic
substance test is not met, or in all cases of persons involved in high-risk
IP activities

 

UAE has also published a guidance
document on 12th September, 2019 to further explain the criteria
for meeting substance regulations

Mauritius

Earlier, Mauritius provided deemed
foreign tax credit of up to 80% for taxable foreign income, where creditable
foreign taxes were lower. This reduced the effective corporate tax on such
income from 15% to 3%. Further, a company incorporated in Mauritius was
considered as resident if its central management and control was exercised in
Mauritius, i.e., the test of residency was earlier not based on PoEM criteria

 

However, the Mauritius tax law has moved
from the deemed foreign tax credit regime to granting 80% exemption to
taxable foreign income from 1st January, 2019. No foreign tax credit would be
granted in Mauritius against the balance 20% taxable foreign income

 

Further, a company incorporated in
Mauritius shall be considered to be a non-resident if its PoEM is outside
Mauritius. The guidance provided by the Mauritius authorities states that in
order for a Mauritius company to be held to have its PoEM in Mauritius, its
strategic decisions relating to its core income-generating activities should
be taken in or from Mauritius. Further, majority of meetings of the Board of
Directors should be held in Mauritius or the executive management of the
company should be regularly exercised in Mauritius. The determination of PoEM
would be based on all relevant facts and circumstances considering the
business activities of the company

 

Detailed circulars have been issued by
the Mauritius tax authorities explaining the various criteria to be met by
different types of companies operating in Mauritius under the Global Business
License (GBL) regime (which permits obtaining TRC in Mauritius). Broadly
speaking, a Mauritius company operating under the GBL regime will now be
required to ensure that at all times it carries out core income-generating
activities in or from Mauritius by employing suitably qualified persons and
has minimum expenditure in line with its level of activities / operations

 

From the above table it can be observed that entities / businesses based
out of UAE and Mauritius are now required to meet the enhanced criteria of
economic substance in those jurisdictions to be considered as tax resident in
that jurisdiction and benefit from their tax regimes.

 

(VII)      Impact on
Indian inbound and outbound business / investment structures

In terms of Indian inbound and outbound structures, Mauritius and UAE
have been popular choices for businesses. Some of the common structures are
discussed below along with their impact on account of BEPS.

 

Structure 1: Indian outbound – use of UAE trading company

Facts: XYZ India has incorporated a
trading company, DUB, in one of the Free Trade Zones (FTZs) of UAE. XYZ India
undertakes import from, and export to, third parties through DUB. DUB maintains
a fairly good margin while dealing with XYZ India.

 

Tax advantage: Subject to Indian transfer pricing
regulations, profits earned by DUB are not liable to any tax in India provided
DUB is non-resident in India under the PoEM regulations and does not have a PE
in India. Since UAE does not levy tax on income of companies incorporated in
FTZs, the effective tax rate on profits of such UAE companies is NIL, unless
repatriated to India as dividend.

 

Impact of BEPS: As a distribution /
service centre company, under the UAE substance regulations DUB will be
expected to undertake the following activities in UAE:

1. Transporting and
storing goods;

2. Managing the
stocks;

3. Taking orders;

4. Providing
consulting or other administrative services.

 

Accordingly,
businesses adopting the above structure will now need to factor the substance requirements
in UAE.

 

Structure 2: Indian inbound – use of Mauritius as holding company

Facts: XYZ USA has incorporated a
company in Mauritius, MAU, as a holding company for investment in XYZ India
(made prior to 1st April, 2017). Income of MAU is either dividend
from XYZ India or capital gains from sale of shares of XYZ India.

 

Tax advantage: MAU will not be liable to pay any tax on capital gains earned from
sale of XYZ India since the same are not taxable in Mauritius and are also
grandfathered from taxation in India under the amended India-Mauritius tax
treaty. The dividend income of MAU, which is exempt from tax in India, will be
subject to an effective tax rate of 3%, which is low. Also, Mauritius has
various favourable tax treaties (especially with African countries) making it
an ideal jurisdiction for holding investments.

 

Impact of BEPS: Mauritius has not notified the tax treaty with India under MLI and
hence, the treaty is not currently impacted by MLI. However, the same is
expected to be bilaterally amended on the lines of BEPS and hence the
requirement of substance in the form of the preamble and PPT (or DLOB) is
expected in the future.

 

In the context of
inbound investment structures through Mauritius, past litigation with Indian
tax authorities has been mainly on the ground that the structures lack
commercial / economic substance and are artificially interposed to avail tax
treaty benefits in India. Now, under Mauritius law, MAU will be required to
have PoEM in Mauritius to be eligible for TRC. Further, as an investment
holding company, in compliance with circular letter CL1-121018 dated 12th
October, 2018 issued by the Financial Services Commission (FSC) of Mauritius,
the minimum expenditure to be incurred by MAU is USD 12,000 p.a. (although no
minimum employees are specified). The same will, however, be tested on a
case-to-case basis, as per facts. For instance, BEPS Action 5
states that in addition to undertaking all applicable corporate law filings,
holding companies are expected to have both the people and premises necessary
to ensure that letterbox and brass plate companies do not benefit from
preferable tax regimes. Whether this will impact the substance evaluation in
Mauritius needs to be seen in the future.

 

It may be noted
that the minimum expenditure in Mauritius will be required even though the
India-Mauritius tax treaty does not provide for any such expenditure under its
LOB clause for availing grandfathering benefit for capital gains.

 

Structures 3-6: Indian inbound structures involving UAE or Mauritius
(others)

 

Structure

Nature of income

from India

UAE

(India-UAE tax treaty is

amended by MLI)

Mauritius

(India-Mauritius tax treaty
is not amended by MLI as yet)

Foreign Direct Investment

Capital gains from sale of
partnership interest in an Indian LLP

Not taxable in India under
Article 13(5) of the India-UAE tax treaty. No tax in UAE as well

Not taxable in India under
Article 13(4) of the India-Mauritius tax treaty. No tax in Mauritius as well

Foreign Portfolio Investment

Capital gains from sale of Indian derivatives /
bonds / debentures

Not taxable in India under Article 13(5) of the
India-UAE tax treaty. No tax in UAE as well

Not taxable in India under Article 13(4) of the
India-Mauritius tax treaty. No tax in Mauritius as well

Structure

Nature of income

from India

UAE

(India-UAE tax treaty is

amended by MLI)

Mauritius

(India-Mauritius tax treaty is not amended by MLI
as yet)

Foreign Service companies providing onshore
services in India

Service income not in nature of fees for technical
services

No PE or tax in India unless presence in India of
9 months within any 12-month period. No tax in UAE
as well

No PE or tax in India unless presence in India of
90 days within any 12-month period. Low tax in Mauritius

Foreign Service companies mainly providing
offshore services

Service income in nature of fees for technical
services

FTS is not taxable in India under the India-UAE
tax treaty. No tax in UAE as well

Although FTS is now taxable in India under the
India-Mauritius tax treaty, the same is subject to a low tax rate
in Mauritius

 

Impact of
BEPS:
The above structures seek to obtain tax
treaty benefits in India which may otherwise not be available under India’s tax
treaty with the country of headquarters of the business (say, USA or UK). Any
adverse impact on meeting substance requirements in the UAE or Mauritius could
adversely impact grant of tax treaty benefits in India – especially if TRC is
not granted to entities non-compliant with substance regulations.

 

Accordingly, businesses adopting the above
structures or any other structures involving use of an entity in a preferential
tax regime, in addition to PPT, should factor in the impact of substance
regulations in that country to ensure that the structure is compliant under
BEPS.

 

(VIII)     Parting
note

Considering the intention of the BEPS
project to tackle cases of tax avoidance and aggressive tax planning, it is not
surprising that India has been at the forefront of this landmark global
initiative. In addition to GAAR and PoEM, India has actively also incorporated
BEPS Actions into its domestic tax laws such as:

 

(i)    Country by country reporting (CbCR)

(ii)   Equalisation levy

(iii)
Commissionaire arrangements resulting in taxable presence

(iv) Significant
economic presence (SEP) constituting taxable presence for certain digital
businesses

(v) Limitation on
interest deduction for payments to associated enterprises

 

In fact, as a sign of things to come, the
recently-concluded protocol to the India-China tax treaty incorporated various
MLI provisions within the text of the tax treaty, including PPT (as a
result, India-China tax treaty is outside the purview of the MLI)
.

 

Accordingly, it is expected that BEPS
Actions and MLI will influence the approach of Indian tax authorities in the
future while granting tax treaty benefits in India. One of the key expected
areas of focus is to probe the economic substance of non-resident entities
under BEPS Action 5.

 

In light of the above, reference may be
made to another set of wise words from Mr. Dee Hock, which may be relevant in
the context of the future of international tax – ‘Preserve substance; modify
form; know the difference
’.  

TRANSFER PRICING: WHAT HAS CHANGED IN OECD’S 2017 GUIDELINES? [PART 2]

This article summarises the key
additions/ modifications made in the 2017 Guidelines
as compared to the earlier Guidelines. The first part of the
article, published in the December issue of the Journal, discussed about the
general guidance contained in Chapters I to V of the new Transfer Pricing
Guidelines issued in 2017 (2017 Guidelines). This part of the article deals
with guidance relating to specific transactions:

 

?    Chapter VI – Special
Consideration for Intangibles

?    Chapter VII – Special
Considerations for Intra-Group
Services,

?    Chapter VIII – Cost
Contribution Agreements, and

?    Chapter IX – Business
Restructurings

 

 

 

1.      Chapter
VI – Special Considerations for Intangibles

 

The 2017 Guidelines
have broadened the concept of ‘intangibles’ for transfer pricing purposes, and
also provide detailed guidance on intangibles including several aspects of
intangibles not addressed in the earlier guidelines. The key differences are
discussed in this section. 

 

1.1.    Definition of
intangibles


The 2017 Guidelines
provide that the word ‘intangible’ is intended to address something which is not
a physical asset
or a financial asset, which is capable of being
owned or controlled for use in commercial activities and whose
use or transfer would be compensated had it occurred in a transaction between
independent parties in comparable circumstances.1
The 2017
Guidelines provide that intangibles that are important to consider for transfer
pricing are not always recognised as intangible assets for accounting purposes
and the accounting or legal definitions solely may not be relevant for transfer
pricing.

___________________________

1   Refer para 6.6 of 2017 Guidelines

 

The 2017 Guidelines discuss that distinctions are sometimes sought to be
made between (a) trade and marketing intangibles2 (b) soft and hard
intangibles (c) routine and non-routine intangibles and between other classes
and categories of intangibles, but the approach to determine arm’s length price
does not depend on such categorisations.3 An illustrative list of
intangibles is also provided in the 2017 Guidelines. The Guidelines also
provide that factors such as group synergies and market specific
characteristics are not intangibles, since they cannot be owned or controlled
by any one entity in the group. 

 

1.2.    Framework for transfer
pricing analysis of transactions involving intangibles

 

Like any other transfer pricing matter, analysis of cases involving
intangibles should be in accordance with principles outlined under Chapter I to
III of the 2017 Guidelines. The Guidelines provide for a similar six-step
framework for analysing transactions involving intangibles.4 

 

________________________________________________

2   Marketing Intangible and Trade Intangible
have also been defined in the 2017 Guidelines.

3   Refer para 6.15 of 2017 Guidelines

4          Refer  para 6.34 of 2017 Guidelines

 

1.3.    Intangible ownership and
contractual terms relating to intangibles

 

The 2017 Guidelines
specifically provide that legal ownership does not necessarily confer the right
to returns generated from the intangible. The Guidelines give an example of an
IP Holding Company which does not perform any relevant functions, does not
employ any relevant assets and does not assume any relevant risks. The
Guidelines provide that such party will be entitled to compensation, if any,
only for holding the title to the IP, and not in the returns otherwise
generated from the IP. The returns from the intangible, even though they accrue
initially to the legal owner of the intangible, will need to correspond to the
functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed by the different
entities in the group.

 

1.4.    Functions, Assets and
Risks relating to Intangibles

 

1.4.1. Functions


The 2017 Guidelines
provide that determining the party controlling and performing functions
relating to DEMPE of intangibles is one of the key considerations in
determining arm’s length conditions for the controlled transactions.

 

In case some
functions are outsourced, if the legal owner neither performs nor controls the
outsourced functions relating to the DEMPE of intangible, it would not be
entitled to any ongoing benefit attributable to the outsourced functions.
Depending on the facts, the return for entities performing and controlling such
functions may comprise a share of the total return derived from exploitation of
the intangible.

 

1.4.2. Assets


The 2017 Guidelines
provide for considering important assets and specifically identify intangibles
used in research, development or marketing, physical assets and funding.

 

Unlike the earlier
guidelines, there is a detailed discussion in the 2017 Guidelines on funding,
and returns corresponding to funding. The Guidelines provide that funding
returns from intangibles would depend on the precise functions performed and
risks undertaken by the funder. An entity providing funding but not controlling
risks or performing functions relating to the funded activity would be entitled
to lesser returns than an entity which also performs and controls important
functions and controls important risks associated with the funded activity.

 

In the context of
funding, the Guidelines distinguish between financial risks (risks relating to
funding/ investments) and operational risks (risks relating to operational
activities for which the funding is used). If the investor controls the
financial risk associated with the provision of funding, without the assumption
of operational risks, it could generally expect only a risk-adjusted return on
its investments.

 

1.4.3. Risks

 

The 2017 Guidelines
specifically identify risks relating to transactions involving intangibles,
such as risks related to development of intangibles, risk of product
obsolescence, infringement risk, product liability risk, and exploitation risk.5
A detailed analysis of the assumption of these risks with respect to functions
relating to the DEMPE of intangibles is crucial. 

 

The Guidelines also
provide that generally, the responsibility for the consequences of risks
materialising will have a direct correlation to the assumption of risks by the
parties to the transaction.

 

1.5.    Actual (ex post)
Returns


The 2017 Guidelines
also discusses regarding sharing of profit/losses among group entities in case
of variation between actual (ex post) and anticipated (ex ante)
returns.

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide that the entitlement of the group entity to the variation depends on
which party assumes the risks identified while delineating the actual
transaction. The entitlement also depends on performance of important functions
or contributing to control of economically significant risks, and for which an
arm’s length remuneration would include a profit-sharing element.

 

1.6.    Illustration on
application of arm’s length principle in certain specific fact patterns

 

The 2017 Guidelines
identify specific commonly found fact patterns and provide useful guidance on
those and provide detailed guidance on these situations. These are briefly
discussed in this section.

 

1.6.1. Marketing intangibles


The 2017 Guidelines
discuss a common situation where a related entity performs marketing or sales
functions that benefit the legal owner of the trademark – through marketing
arrangements or distribution/marketing arrangements.6 

 

___________________________

5   Refer para 6.65 of 2017 Guidelines

 

 

The Guidelines
provide that such cases require assessment of:

 

?    Obligations
and rights implied by the legal registrations and agreements between the
parties;

?    Functions
performed, assets employed and risks assumed by the parties;

?    Intangible
value anticipated through the marketer/ distributor’s activities; and

?    Compensation
provided to the marketer/distributor.

 

The Guidelines then
provide that any additional compensation for the marketer/distributor will
arise if it is not already adequately compensated for its functions through the
contractual arrangement.

 

1.6.2. Research, development and
process improvement arrangements

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide that in cases involving contract research and development activities,
compensation on a cost plus modest mark-up basis may not reflect arm’s length
price in all cases. While determining the compensation, the Guidelines give
much weightage to the research team, i.e., including their skills and
experience, risks assumed by them, intangibles used by them, etc. Similarly,
analysis would be required in case of product or process improvements resulting
from the work of a manufacturing service provider.

 

1.6.3. Payment for use of company name

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide that generally, no compensation should be paid to the owner of the
group name for simple recognition of group name, or to reflect the fact of
group membership. A payment would be due only if the use of the group name
provides a financial benefit to the entity using the group name. Similarly,
where an existing successful business is acquired by another business, and the
acquired business begins to use the group name, brand name, trademark, etc., of
the acquirer, there should be no automatic assumption that the acquired
business should start paying for such use of the group name and other
intangibles. In fact, in a case where the acquirer leverages the existing
positioning of the acquired business to expand to new markets, one should
evaluate whether the acquirer should pay a compensation to the acquired
business.

 

_________________________________

6  
Refer para 6.76 of 2017 Guidelines

 

 

1.6.4. Other specific cases

The 2017 Guidelines
also provides guidance on various other specific fact patterns involving
intangibles such as transfer of all or limited rights, combination of
intangibles, transfer of intangibles with other business transactions, use of
intangibles in connection with sales of goods/ services.

 

1.7.    Comparability factors

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide detailed guidance on comparability factors relating to intangibles.
These factors should be considered in a comparability analysis especially under
the CUP Method (say, benchmarking analysis to find comparable royalty rates for
use of intangibles). The comparability factors specifically mentioned, although
not exhaustive, include exclusivity; extent and duration of legal protection;
geographic scope; useful life; stage of development; rights to enhancements,
revisions and updates; and expectation of future benefit.

 

Similarly, some key
risks that need to be analysed for a comparability analysis include risks
related to future development of the intangible, product obsolescence and
depreciation, infringement risks, product liability risks, etc. 

 

1.8.    Valuation of intangibles

 

The 2017 Guidelines
tend to favour the CUP Method and the transactional profit split method for
valuing intangibles. The Guidelines also recognise valuation techniques as
useful tools. One-sided methods including RPM and TNMM are generally not
considered reliable for directly valuing intangibles.

 

Use of cost-based
methods for valuing intangibles have also been largely discouraged, other than
in limited circumstances involving, say, development of intangibles for
internal business operations, especially when such intangibles are not unique
or valuable.

 

The Guidelines have
provided detailed guidance on the use of Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) Method or
other similar valuation methods for valuing intangibles. Having said that, the
Guidelines also caution that because of the heavy reliance on assumptions and
valuation parameters, all such assumptions and parameters must be appropriately
documented, along with the rationale for using the said assumptions or
parameters. The Guidelines also recommend taxpayers to present a sensitivity
analysis, with alternative assumptions and parameters, as part of their
transfer pricing documentation.

 

1.8.1. Intangibles having
uncertain valuations


In cases involving
intangibles the valuation of which is highly uncertain at the time of the
transaction, the 2017 Guidelines provide guidance on a much broader concept of
arm’s length behaviour. The Guidelines inter alia provide that in case
the valuation of the intangible is highly uncertain at the time of the
transaction, the parties to the transaction would potentially adopt short-term
agreements, include price-adjustment clauses, adopt a contingent pricing
arrangement, or even renegotiate the terms of the transaction in some cases.

 

1.8.2. Hard-to-Value Intangibles
(HTVI)

 

HTVIs include
intangibles for which, at the time of their transfer, (i) no reliable
comparables exist, and (ii) it is difficult to predict their level of success.

 

The 2017 Guidelines
make an exception regarding the use of ex post results, and provide that
in certain cases involving HTVIs, and subject to certain safeguards and
exemptions, ex post results can be considered as presumptive evidence
about the appropriateness of the ex ante pricing arrangements. The
Guidelines also provide a safe harbour of 20%, within which valuation based on ex
ante
circumstances should not be questioned and replaced by valuation based
on ex post results.

 

2.      Chapter
VII – Special Considerations for Intra-Group Services

 

In the analysis of
transfer pricing for intra-group services, one key issue is whether intra-group
services have in fact been provided, and the other issue is, what is the
intra-group charge for such services under the arm’s length principle. Detailed
guidance has been provided in the 2017 Guidelines on various aspects in the
context of intra-group services such as shareholders’ activities, on call
services, form of remuneration, determination of cost pools, documentation and
reporting, levy on withholding tax on provision of low value-added intra-group
services.

 

2.1.    Low Value Adding
Intra-Group Services

 

The 2017 Guidelines
recommend an elective, simplified transfer pricing approach relating to
particular category of intra-group services referred to as low value adding
intra-group services.
Under this approach, subject to fulfilment of certain
criteria, the arm’s length price of the services would be considered to be
justified without specific benchmarking and detailed documentation of the
benefit test by the recipient.

 

The guidance
provided in the 2017 Guidelines are summarised below.

 

 

3.      Chapter
VIII – Cost Contribution Arrangements

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide that a Cost Contribution Arrangement (CCA) is a contractual arrangement
among business enterprises to share the contributions and risks involved in the
joint development, production or the obtaining of intangibles, tangible assets
or services, with the understanding that such intangibles, tangible assets or
services are expected to create benefits for the individual businesses of each
of the participants.

 

Two types of CCAs
are commonly encountered: (1) Joint development, production or the procurement
of intangibles or tangible assets (“Development CCAs”); and (2) Procurement of
services (“services CCAs”).

 

With regard to
application of arm’s length principle, the general guidance provided in the
2017 Guidelines, including the risk analysis framework, also apply to CCAs. To
apply the arm’s length principle to a CCA, it is therefore a necessary
precondition that all the parties to the arrangement have a reasonable
expectation of benefit. The next step is to calculate the value of each
participant’s contribution to the joint activity, and finally to determine
whether the allocation of CCA contributions (as adjusted for any balancing
payments made among participants) accords with their respective share of
expected benefits.

 

The Guidelines also
provide that the guidance provided in Chapter VI relating to intangibles and
Chapter VII relating to intra-group services also apply to CCAs, to the extent
relevant.

 

Further, the
Guidelines provide specific additional guidance in the following areas:

 

3.1.    Participants

 

A participant must
be assigned an interest or rights in the intangibles, tangible assets or
services that are the subject of the CCA and should have a reasonable
expectation of being able to benefit from that interest or those rights. The
Guidelines discuss in detail regarding determination of participants in CCAs.

 

3.2.    Expected benefits

 

In determining the
participants’ share of expected benefits, the 2017 Guidelines encourage the use
of relevant allocation keys. The Guidelines also provide that the CCA should
provide for a periodic reassessment of allocation keys. Consequently, the
relevant allocation keys may change over a period of time, and this may lead to
prospective adjustments in the share of expected benefits of the participants.

 

3.3.    Value of Contributions



The 2017 Guidelines
recommend distinguishing between pre-existing contributions and current
contributions for the purpose of valuing them. Any pre-existing contributions
(say, any existing patented technology) should generally be valued at arm’s
length based on the general guidance provided in the 2017 Guidelines, including
the use of valuation techniques. However, any current contributions (say,
ongoing R&D activities) should be valued based on the value of the
functions themselves, rather than the potential value of the future application
of such functions.

 

3.4.    Documentation


The 2017 Guidelines
emphasise that taxpayers should provide detailed documentation relating to CCAs
as a part of the master file. Additionally, the local file should also contain
transactional information including a description of the transactions, amounts
of payments and receipts, identification of the associated enterprises
involved, copies of inter-company agreements, pricing information and
satisfaction of the arm’s length principle. The Guidelines also provide for an
additional disclosure of management and control of CCA activities and the
manner in which any future benefits from the CCA activities are expected to be
exploited. 

 

4.      Chapter
IX – Business Restructurings

 

The 2017 Guidelines
contain an elaborate discussion on transfer pricing aspects of business
restructurings. Business restructuring refers to the cross-border
reorganisation of the commercial or financial relations between associated
enterprises, including the termination or substantial renegotiation of existing
arrangements.

 

Business
restructurings may often involve the centralisation of intangibles, risks or
functions with profit potential attached to them.

 

As compared to the
earlier guidelines which included conversion of full-fledged distributors or
manufacturers to low risk ones and also included transfers of intangibles, the
2017 Guidelines also include concentration of functions in a regional or
central entity with corresponding reduction in scope or scale of functions carried
out locally, as a business restructuring transaction.

 

The Guidelines
address two aspects of a business restructuring – i) arm’s length compensation
for the restructuring itself, and ii) arm’s length pricing of
post-restructuring transactions.

 

Some key additional
guidance provided in these Guidelines is discussed in this section.

 

4.1.    Arm’s length
compensation for the restructuring itself

 

4.1.1. Accurate delineation of the
restructuring transaction

 

The general
guidance relating to arm’s length principle is applicable also for business
restructuring. The 2017 Guidelines recommend performing accurate delineation of
transactions including detailed functional analysis in pre and
post-restructuring scenarios. In doing so, the Guidelines place special emphasis
on the risks transferred as a part of the restructuring, and importantly,
whether such risks are economically significant (i.e., whether they carry
significant profit potential and hence, may explain a significant reallocation
of profit potential).

Like earlier
guidelines, one needs to also analyse the business reasons for and expected
benefits from restructuring, and other options realistically available to the
parties.

 

4.1.2. Transfer of something of value

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide that in case physical assets such as inventories are transferred
between foreign associated enterprises as a part of the restructuring, the
valuation of such assets is likely to be resolved as a part of the overall
terms of the restructuring. In practice, there may also be an inventory rundown
period before the restructuring becomes effective, to mitigate complications
relating to cross-border inventory transfers.

 

Similarly, in case intangibles
are transferred as a part of the restructuring, the Guidelines provide that the
valuation of such intangibles should be done in line with the guidelines
provided for valuation of intangibles, including guidance provided for valuing
HTVIs (Chapter VI).

 

In case of transfer
of an activity, the 2017 Guidelines are aligned with the earlier
guidelines and provide that the valuation of such an activity should be done as
a going concern of the entire activity, rather than individual assets.

 

4.1.3. Indemnification for termination or substantial
renegotiation of existing arrangements

 

Indemnification
means any type of compensation that may be paid for detriments suffered by the
restructured entity, whether in the form of an up-front payment, of a sharing
in restructuring costs, of lower (or higher) purchase (or sale) prices in the
context of the post-restructuring operations, or in any other form.

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide for consideration of the following aspects in this regard:7

 

?    Whether,
based on facts, the commercial law supports the right to indemnification for
the restructured entity

?    Whether
the indemnification clause, or its absence, is at arm’s length

?    Which
party should bear the indemnification costs

 

Each of the above
aspects has been discussed in detail in the OECD guidelines.

 

4.1.4. Documentation

 

The 2017 Guidelines
provide for documenting important business restructuring transactions in the
master file. Further, in the local file, taxpayers are required to indicate
whether the local entity has been involved in, or affected by, business
restructurings occurring in the past year, along with related details.

 

4.2.    Arm’s Length
compensation for post- restructuring transactions

 

The 2017
Guidelines, like the earlier guidelines, provide that the arm’s length
principle should apply in the same manner to restructured transactions, as they
apply to transactions which were originally structured as such.

______________________________

7   Refer para 9.79 of 2017 Guidelines

 

Further, there
could be inter-linkages between the restructuring and the business arrangement
post-restructuring. In these situations, the compensation for the restructuring
and for the subsequent controlled transactions could be potentially dependent
on each other, and may need to be evaluated together from an arm’s length
perspective.

 

5.      Concluding
Remarks

 

The 2017 Guidelines have addressed some key
challenges faced by taxpayers with respect to the specific
transactions/situations covered in this part of the article. In several
situations, the Guidelines provide for arm’s length behaviour in principle,
considering the overall scheme of things, and not merely evaluating the price
of isolated transactions

 

In the Indian
context, transfer pricing for transactions involving intangibles appears to be
a significant focus area for Indian tax authorities. Analysis of control of
functions and assumption of risks vis-à-vis provision of funding in
transactions relating to intangibles is extremely pertinent in the Indian
context given India’s leading position as a preferred destination for several
MNCs for intangible creation/upgradation in verticals such as technology,
engineering, pharma, etc.; and also given the huge marketing and promotional
spend incurred by many Indian distributors. The guidance also aligns, in
principle, with the approach of valuing intangible transfers using a DCF
approach, albeit with several safeguards relating to the assumptions and
other parameters used for valuations. Overall, the guidance provided in the
2017 Guidelines is largely being implemented by tax authorities, as evidenced
by the nature of queries and depth of discussions during APAs as well as
transfer pricing audits.

 

Guidance on low
value adding intra-group services has already been largely implemented in the
Indian safe harbour rules.

 

The 2017 Guidelines also provide several
examples relating to intangibles and CCAs in Annexes to Chapters VI and VIII,
respectively. Readers are encouraged to study the examples for a better understanding
of these concepts.

 

MARKETING INTANGIBLES – EVOLVING LANDSCAPE

“Marketing
intangibles”, in the form of advertisement, marketing and sales promotion (AMP)
expenses is one of the key areas of dispute between the Indian tax authorities
and taxpayers. Increasingly, complicated business structures and policies being
adopted by Multinational Entities (‘MNEs’) in order to efficiently manage their
global businesses has contributed in fair measure to this trend.

 

In emerging markets
such as India, the issue assumes particular relevance as many MNEs have set up
their sales and distribution entities to reap benefits of huge consumer base. A
number of difficulties arise while dealing with marketing intangibles i.e.
conflicting rulings from courts, evolving and disruptive business models and
retrospective amendment made in the Indian transfer pricing regulations to
incorporate exhaustive definition of intangibles.

 

The main dispute
has been in the area of excessive expenditure incurred on advertising,
marketing and sales promotion activities and whether such expenses are of
routine or non-routine nature.
If the expenses are non-routine nature, the
Indian entity should be adequately compensated with arm’s length remuneration
so that there is no creation of marketing intangibles.

 

Over the past few
years, there have been two landmark Delhi High Court rulings on the AMP issue
namely Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications India Private Limited[1] and
Maruti Suzuki India Limited[2]. In the
case of Sony Ericsson, the Delhi High Court held that since taxpayer
distributors had argued that the rewards around their excessive AMP expenses
were subsumed within the profit margins of distribution, the taxpayers could
not at the same time contend that AMP expenses were not “international
transactions”. Having held the same the High Court further added if a taxpayer
distributor performs additional functions on account of AMP, as compared to
comparable companies then such additional rewards may be granted through
pricing of products or distribution margin; and if so received, the Revenue
Officer cannot demand a separate remuneration.

 

In the case of Maruti
Suzuki, the Delhi High Court, while dealing with a taxpayer, being optically of
the character of an entrepreneurial licensed manufacturer, dismissed the
attempt on the part of the Revenue Officer to impute TP adjustment for the
excess AMP spend of Maruti Suzuki India, as a percentage of its turnover, over
the average of those of its comparable companies selected under an overall
transactional net margin method (TNMM) approach.

 

The main reasoning of
the High Court, while it concurred with the arguments of the taxpayer in
deciding the case in its favour, was that the AMP spend on a stand-alone basis,
could not be treated to as an “international transaction” under the provisions
of the Indian TP regulations, in the context of licensed manufacturers of the
type of Maruti Suzuki India, and thus the TP adjustment with respect to any
part thereof, in the manner proposed by the Revenue Officer, namely
reimbursement of the “so called” excess amount of the AMP spend, by the foreign
licensor of brand, was clearly not sustainable.

 

The AMP issue is far
from being resolved and Special Leave Petitions (SLPs) have been lodged with
the Supreme Court of India on the issue of AMP – both, by the tax payers as
well as by the Revenue. The Supreme Court, apart from dealing with primary
question of AMP being an international transaction or not, would also be
required to delve into issues such as whether higher profits at entity level
can be said to subsume the return for marketing intangible creating functions,
whether setoff of a higher price/profit in one transaction with lower
price/profit in another is permissible, whether application of the bright line
test is justified etc.

 

More recently, the
Mumbai ITAT in the recent decision in case of Nivea India Pvt Ltd[3]
has dealt with some of the key issues dealing with marketing intangibles
controversy.

 

Whether AMP expenditure qualifies as International Transaction

This has been a
primary bone of contention between tax payers and tax authorities.Tax payers
strongly contend that unless there is express provision in the law, the tax
authorities are not justified in inferring creation of marketing intangible for
the brand owner merely by virtue of excessive AMP expenditure incurred by the
tax payer.

 

Tax authorities’ stand
has been that mere fact the service or benefit has been provided by one party
to the other would by itself constitute a transaction irrespective of whether
the consideration for the same has been paid or remains payable or there is a
mutual agreement to not charge any compensation for the service or benefit
(i.e. gaining popularity or visibility of brand in the local market).

 

The Tribunal in line
with several past rulings negated tax authorities’ stand stating that
“Even if the word ‘transaction’ is given its widest connotation, and need
not involve any transfer of money or a written agreement or even if one resorts
to section 92F (v) of the Act, which defines ‘transaction’ to include
‘arrangement’, ‘understanding’ or ‘action in concert’, ‘whether formal or in
writing’, it is still incumbent on the tax authorities to show the existence of
an ‘understanding’ or an ‘arrangement’ or ‘action in concert’ between tax payer
and its Parent entity as regards AMP spend for brand promotion.” In other
words, unless it is demonstrated that the tax payer was obliged or mandated to
incur certain level of AMP expenditure for the purposes of promoting the brand,
the AMP expenditure incurred by the tax payer would not qualify as
international transaction.

 

Application of bright line test

Generally, the tax
authorities segregate the AMP expenditure incurred by the tax payer into
routine nature and non-routine nature by applying bright line test,
wherein they compare the AMP expenditure incurred by the tax payer vis-a-vis
comparables and deduce excessive / non routine of portion of AMP expenditure.

The Tribunal held that
bright line test cannot and should not be applied for making transfer pricing
adjustments, as same is not one of the recognised methods.

 

Incidental benefit

As the foreign brand
owner stands to benefit from AMP expenditure incurred in India, the tax
authorities insist on compensation for the Indian entity.

 

The Tribunal held that
with no specific guidelines on the AMP issue, merely because there is an
incidental benefit to the brand owner, it cannot be said that the AMP expenses
incurred by the tax payer was for promoting the brand.  Any incidental benefit accrued to the brand
owner would not alter the character of the expenditure incurred wholly and
exclusively for the purpose of tax payer’s business. For e.g., the Indian
taxpayer incurs AMP expenses in the local market to create awareness about the
brand due to which his business is benefitted by virtue of increased sales and
at the same time overseas brand owner gets incidental benefit i.e. brand
becomes popular in the new geography, due to which intrinsic value of brand
gets enhanced.

 

Product promotion vs Brand Promotion

The Tribunal stated
there is a subtle but definite difference between the product promotion and
brand promotion. In the first case product is the focus of the advertisement
campaign and the brand takes secondary or backseat, whereas in second case,
brand is highlighted and not the product.

 

The distinction is
required to be drawn between expenditure incurred to perform distribution
function and a ‘transaction’ and that every expenditure forming part of the
function, cannot be construed as a ‘transaction’.The tax authorities’ attempt
to re-characterise the AMP expenditure as a transaction by itself when it has
neither been identified as such by the tax payer or legislatively recognised,
runs counter to legal position which requires tax authorities “to examine
the ‘international transaction’ as they actually exist.”

 

Letter of Understanding (LOU)

In certain instances,
it was observed that the Indian taxpayers entered into license agreement with
brand owner wherein certain conditions were stipulated by the brand owner to
maintain and enhance the brand in the local market.

Tax authorities
alleged that such conditions clearly showed the existence of agreement or
arrangement between AE and the taxpayer. The Tribunal held that financial responsibilities
on the tax payer did not prove understanding of sharing of AMP expenses.
Further, to compete with established brands in the local market the tax payer
may have to incur huge AMP expenses in local market. Thus, such arrangements
could not be viewed as being accretive to the brands owned by a foreign parent.

 

Conclusion

The ruling in case of
Nivea reiterates and lays down important guiding principles in connection with
marketing intangibles. It is only obvious that the facts of each case will differ
and the outcome therefor will differ. Even though all above rulings, provided
some guidance on the vexed issue of marketing intangible but they were not able
to fully address all concerns of both – the taxpayers and tax authorities and
they are now knocking at the doors of the Supreme Court to resolve the issue.

 

It is also pertinent
to note that in the recently released version of the United Nations Practical
Manual on Transfer Pricing for Developing Countries, the references to ‘bright
line test’ is removed from the India country practice chapter. This deletion
supports the principles emerging from various High Court & ITAT decisions
on marketing intangibles.

 

It seems that the AMP
matter itself being dependent on various business models adopted by the
taxpayers, the Supreme Court rulings on marketing intangible may be highly
fact-specific, which both taxpayers and tax authorities will not be able to
uniformly follow in other cases. Hence, prolonged litigation seems inevitable.

 

Each taxpayer would,
therefore, need to find its own resolution to the marketing intangible
controversy. Besides pursuing normal litigation route, alternate modes for
seeking resolutions could be explored such as Advanced Pricing Agreements (for
future years) and Mutual Agreement Process (for years with existing dispute).  



[1] Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications
India Private Limited vs. CIT [TS-96-HC-2015(DEL)-TP]

[2] Maruti Suzuki Limited vs. CIT
[TS-595-HC-2015(DEL)-TP]

[3] Nivea India Private Ltd. vs. ACIT
[TS-187-ITAT-2018(Mum)-TP]

TRANSFER PRICING: WHAT HAS CHANGED IN OECD’S 2017 GUIDELINES? [PART 1]

Transfer prices are
significant for both taxpayers and tax administrations because they determine
in large part the income and expense and therefore taxable profits of
associated enterprises in different tax jurisdictions. With a view to minimise
the risk of double taxation and achieve international consensus on
determination of transfer prices on cross-border transactions, OECD1  from time to time provides guidance in
relation to various transfer pricing issues.


In 2015, the OECD
came out with its Reports on the 15 Action items agreed as a part of the BEPS2  agenda. These include Actions 8-10 (Aligning
Transfer Pricing Outcomes with Value Creation), Action 13 (Transfer Pricing
Documentation and Country by Country Reporting), and Action 14 (Making Dispute
Resolution Mechanisms More Effective). With a view to reflect the
clarifications and revisions agreed in 2015 BEPS Action Reports, the Transfer
Pricing guidelines were substantially revised and new Guidelines were issued in
2017 (2017 Guidelines).


This Article summarises the key additions
/ modifications made in the 2017 Guidelines
(600
plus Pages) as compared to the earlier Guidelines.



These additions / modifications provide important new guidance to practically
look at different aspects of transfer pricing. From the perspective of the
taxpayers as well as tax practitioners, it is important to understand and
implement the new guidance to undertake, conceptually, a globally acceptable
transfer pricing analysis.


The first part
of the article deals with general guidance contained in Chapters 1 to 5 of the
2017 Guidelines. The second part of the article will deal with guidance
relating to specific transactions – Intangibles, Intra-Group Services, Cost
Contribution Agreements, and Business Restructuring.


This part of the
article summarises the following key changes in the 2017 Guidelines vis-à-vis
earlier guidelines:


1.   Comparability Analysis

     Guidance on accurate delineation of
transactions between associated enterprises


     Functional analysis (including,
specifically, risk analysis) based on decision-making capabilities and
performance of decision-making functions


     Recognition / de-recognition of accurately
delineated transactions


     Additional comparability factors which may
warrant comparability adjustments


2.   Application of CUP Method for analysing
transactions in commodities


3.   New guidance on transfer pricing
documentation (three-layered documentation)


4.   Administrative approaches to avoiding and
resolving transfer pricing disputes
 

Each of the above
aspects have been discussed in detail in subsequent paragraphs.


1.   Comparability Analysis


The OECD Transfer
Pricing Guidelines advocate the arm’s length principle to determine transfer
prices between associated enterprises for tax purposes and consider
“Comparability Analysis” at the heart of the application of arm’s
length principle. The 2017 Guidelines provide detailed guidance on certain
aspects discussed below.


1.1 Accurate delineation of transactions as the starting point for
comparability analysis


The 2017 Guidelines
provide two key steps in comparability analysis: 

  • Identification of
    commercial or financial relations between associated enterprises and conditions
    and economically relevant circumstances attaching to those relations in order
    that the controlled transaction is accurately delineated;
  • Comparison of the
    conditions and economically relevant circumstances of the controlled
    transaction as accurately delineated with the conditions and the economically
    relevant circumstances of comparable transactions between independent
    enterprises.

______________________________________________________________

1   Organisation
for Economic Cooperation and Development

2   Base
Erosion and Profit Shifting


The 2017 Guidelines provide that the controlled transaction should be
accurately delineated. Further, for the purpose of accurate delineation of the
actual transaction(s) between associated enterprises, one needs to analyse the
commercial or financial relations between the parties and economically relevant
circumstances surrounding such relations. The process starts with a broad
understanding of the industry in which the MNE group operates, derived by an
understanding of the environment in which the MNE group operates and how it
responds to the environment, along with a detailed factual and functional
analysis of the MNE group. This information is likely to be documented in the
Master File of the MNE group. The process then narrows to identify how each entity
within the MNE group operates and provides analysis of what each entity does
and its commercial or financial relations with its associated enterprises.


This accurate
delineation is crucial since the application of the arm’s length principle
depends on determining the conditions that independent parties would have
agreed in comparable transactions in comparable circumstances. For applying the
arm’s length principle, it is not only the nature of goods or services
transacted or the consideration involved that is relevant; it is imperative for
taxpayers and practitioners to accurately delineate the underlying
characteristics of the relationship between the parties as expressed in the
controlled transaction. 


The economically
relevant characteristics or comparability factors that need to be identified in
order to accurately delineate the actual transaction can be broadly categorised
as:

  • Contractual
    terms
  • Functional analysis
  • Characteristics of property
    or services
  • Economic circumstances,
  • Business strategies.


Information about these economically relevant characteristics is expected to be
documented in the local file of the taxpayer involved3.

__________________________

3   Refer
para 1.36 of 2017 Guidelines


1.2  Functional Analysis (Primarily, Risk Analysis)


The 2017 Guidelines
provide a detailed discussion on functional analysis, specifically on risk
analysis, as compared to earlier guidelines.


The focus of the
Guidelines with respect to functional analysis is on the actual conduct of the
parties, and their capabilities – including decision making about business
strategy and risks. The Guidelines also clarify that in a functional analysis,
the economic significance of the functions are important rather than the mere
number of functions performed by the parties to the transaction.


The 2017 Guidelines
provide detailed guidance on risks analysis as a part of functional analysis.
This is especially because the 2017 Guidelines have recognised the practical
difficulties presented by risks – risks in a transaction tend to be harder to
identify, and determination of the associated enterprise which bears the risk
can require careful analysis. 


The Guidelines
stress on the need to identify risks relevant to a transfer pricing analysis
with specificity. The Guidelines provide for a 6-step process for analysing
risk in a controlled transaction, in order to accurately delineate the actual
transaction in respect to that risk. The process is outlined below:4


_______________________________________

4   Refer
Para 1.60 of 2017 Guidelines


It is expected that
going forward, functional analysis in any transfer pricing evaluation will
specifically focus on the above framework to analyse risks.


A detailed
understanding of the risk management functions is necessary for a risk
analysis. Risk management comprises three elements:5

  • he capability to make
    decisions to take on, lay off, or decline a risk bearing opportunity, together
    with the actual performance of that decision-making function
  • The capability to make decisions
    on whether and how to respond to the risk associated with the opportunity,
    together with the actual performance of that decision-making function
  • The capability to mitigate
    risk, that is the capability to take measures that affect risk outcomes, together
    with the actual performance of such risk mitigation


The 2017 Guidelines
provide that the party assuming risk should exercise control over the risk and
also have the financial capacity to assume the risk. Control over risk involves
the first two elements of risk management relating to accepting or declining a
risk bearing opportunity, and responding to the risk bearing opportunity. In a
case where the third element, risk mitigation, is outsourced, control over the
risk would require capability to determine the objectives of the outsourced
activities, decision to hire risk mitigation service provider, assessment of
whether mitigation objectives are adequately met, decision on adapting or
terminating the services of the outsourced service provider etc. Financial
capability to assume the risk refers to access to funding required with respect
to the risk and to bear the consequences of the risk if the risk materialises.
Access to funding also takes into account the available assets and the options
realistically available to access additional liquidity, if needed.


As can be seen, the guidance gives weightage to decision-making
capability and actual performance of decision-making functions. The Guidelines
provide that decision makers should be competent and experienced in the area
which needs a decision regarding risks. They should also understand the impact
of their decisions on the business. Decision making needs to be in substance
and not just form. For instance, mere formalising of the outcome of
decision-making in the form of, say, minutes of board meetings and formal
signatures on documents would not normally qualify as exercise of decision
making function and would not be sufficient to demonstrate control over risks.
It is pertinent that these aspects are considered in particular when
undertaking a functional analysis – to identify the ‘control’ over decision
making of a particular function, rather than going by mere contractual terms or
other similar documents that evidence the ‘performance’ of the function.

________________________

5   Refer
Para 1.61 of 2017 Guidelines 


The implication of
this detailed new guidance on functional analysis is that a party which under
these steps does not assume the risk, nor contributes to the control of the
risk will not be entitled to unanticipated profits / losses arising from that
risk.


The following
example illustrates application of 6 step process outlined in the 2017
guidelines in the context of risk analysis:6

____________________________-

6   Refer
Example 1 (Para 1.83) of the 2017 Guidelines


Company A seeks to
pursue a development opportunity and hires a specialist company, Company B to
perform part of the research on its behalf. Company A makes a number of
relevant decisions about whether and how to take on the development risk.
Company B has no capability to evaluate the development risk and does not make decisions
about Company A’s activities.

  • Step 1– Development risk is
    identified as economically significant risk
  • Step 2–Company A assumes
    contractual development risk
  • Step 3–Functional analysis
    shows that Company A has capability and exercises authority in making decisions
    about the development risk. Company B reports back to Company A at
    pre-determined milestones and Company A assesses the progress of development
    and whether its ongoing objectives are being met. Company A has the financial
    capacity to assume the risk. Company B’s risk is mainly to ensure it performs
    the research activities competently and it exercises its capability and
    authority to control that risk through decision-making about the specifics of
    the research undertaken – process, expertise, assets etc. However, this risk is
    distinct from the development risk in the hands of Company A as identified in
    Step 1.
  • Step 4–Company A and B
    fulfil the obligations reflected in the contracts and exercise control over the
    respective risks that they assume in the transaction, supported by financial
    capacity.
  • Step 5–Since the conditions
    specified in Step 4 are satisfied, Step 5 will not be applicable i.e. there is
    no requirement of re-allocation of risk.
  • Step 6–Company A assumes and
    controls development risk and therefore should bear the financial consequences
    of failure and enjoy financial consequences of success of the development
    opportunity. Company B should be appropriately rewarded for the carrying out of
    its development services, incorporating the risk that it fails to do so
    competently.


1.3  Recognition / De-recognition of accurately
delineated transaction


As discussed
earlier, one needs to identify the substance of the commercial or financial
relations between the parties and the actual transaction will have to be
accurately delineated by analysing the economically relevant characteristics.
For the purpose of this analysis, the 2017 Guidelines provide that in cases
where the economically significant characteristics of the transaction are inconsistent
with the written contract, the actual transaction will have to be delineated in
accordance with the characteristics of the transaction reflected in the actual
conduct of the parties.


The 2017 Guidelines
also provide for circumstances in which the transaction between the parties as
accurately delineated can be disregarded for transfer pricing purposes. Where
the actual transaction possesses the commercial rationality of arrangements
that would be agreed between unrelated parties under comparable economic
circumstances, such transactions must be respected even where such transactions
cannot be observed between independent parties. However, where the transaction
is commercially irrational, the transaction may be de-recognised.


1.4 Additional comparability factors which may
warrant comparability adjustments


While the
Guidelines discuss about the impact of losses, use of custom valuation, effect
of government policies in transfer pricing analysis, the 2017 Guidelines also
provide for some additional comparability factors that may warrant
comparability adjustments. In the past, in the absence of clear guidance by the
OECD, some of these factors (such as location savings) have led to litigation,
where the tax authorities have insisted on a separate compensation for the
existence of these factors, whereas, taxpayers have claimed these to be merely
comparability factors not necessitating any transfer pricing adjustments per
se
. These factors are:

  • Location Savings:
    The Guidelines provide the following considerations for transfer pricing
    analysis of location savings: i) whether location savings exist; ii) the amount
    of location savings; iii) the extent to which location savings are retained by
    an MNE group member, or passed on to customers or suppliers; iv) manner in
    which independent parties would allocate retained location savings.
  • Other Local Market
    Features:
    These factors refer to other market features such as
    characteristics of the market, purchasing power and product preferences of
    households in the market, whether the market is expanding or contracting,
    degree of competition in the market and other similar factors. These market
    factors may create advantages or disadvantages, and appropriate comparability
    adjustments should be made to account for these advantages or
    disadvantages. 
  • Assembled workforce:
    The existence of a uniquely qualified or experienced employee group may affect
    the arm’s length price of services provided by the group of the efficiency with
    which services are provided or goods produced. In some other cases, assembled
    workforce may create liabilities. Existence of an assembled workforce may
    warrant comparability adjustments. Depending upon precise facts of the case,
    similar adjustments may be warranted in case of transfer of an assembled
    workforce from one associated enterprise to another.
  • MNE group synergies: Group
    synergies may be positive or negative. Positive synergies may arise as a result
    of combined purchasing power or economies of scale, integrated computer or
    communication systems, integrated management, elimination of duplication,
    increased borrowing capacity, etc. Negative synergies may be a result of
    increased bureaucratic barriers, inefficient computer or networking systems
    etc. Where such synergies are not a result of deliberate concerted group
    actions, appropriate comparability adjustments may be warranted. However, when
    such synergies are a result of concerted actions, only comparability
    adjustments may not be adequate. In such situations, from a transfer pricing
    perspective, it is necessary to determine: i) the nature of advantage or
    disadvantage arising from the concerted action; ii) the amount of the benefit /
    detriment; iii) how should the benefit or detriment be divided amongst the
    group members (generally, in proportion to their contribution to the creation
    of the synergy under consideration).


2. Application of CUP Method for analysing
transactions in commodities


The OECD Guidelines
provide that the selection of a transfer pricing method should always aim at
finding the most appropriate method for a particular case. The guidance
provides description of traditional transaction methods and transactional
profit methods. The 2017 Guidelines provide additional guidance in the context
of CUP method.


The 2017 Guidelines
provide that that CUP method would generally be an appropriate transfer pricing
method (subject to other factors) for establishing the arm’s length price for
the transfer of commodities between associated enterprises. The reference to
“commodities” shall be understood to encompass physical products for
which a quoted price is used as a reference by independent parties in the
industry to set prices in uncontrolled transactions. The term “quoted
price” refers to the price of the commodity in the relevant period
obtained in an international or domestic commodity exchange market. Quoted
price also includes prices obtained from recognised and transparent price
reporting or statistical agencies or from government price setting agencies,
where such indexes are used as a reference by unrelated parties to determine
prices in transactions between them.


Such quoted price
should be widely and routinely used in the ordinary course of business in the
industry to negotiate prices for comparable uncontrolled transactions.


Further, the
economically relevant characteristics of the transactions or arrangements
represented by the quoted price should be comparable. These characteristics
include physical features and quality of the commodity; as well as contractual
terms of the transaction such as volumes traded, period of arrangements, timing
and terms of delivery, transportation, insurance and currency terms. If such
characteristics are different between the quoted price and the controlled
transaction, reasonably accurate adjustments ought to be carried out to make
these characteristics comparable.  


The Guidelines also
provide that the pricing date is an important element for making a reference to
the quoted price. Depending on the commodity involved, the pricing date could
refer to specific time, date or time period selected by parties to determine
the price of the commodity transactions. The price agreed at the pricing date
may be evidenced by relevant documents such as proposals and acceptances,
contracts, or other relevant documents. The Guidelines place the onus on the
taxpayer to maintain and provide reliable evidence of the pricing date agreed
by the associated enterprises. If reliable evidence is provided and it is
aligned with the conduct of the parties, the tax authorities should ordinarily
base their examination with reference to the pricing date. Otherwise, the tax
authorities may deem the pricing date based on documents available with them
(say, date of shipment as evident from the bill of lading).


Illustration:


An illustration of
how this guidance relating to the relevance of the pricing date is relevant, is
provided below. 


Assume the case of a commodity the price of which fluctuates on a daily
basis. The commodity is available in the spot market. In some cases, the prices
are also agreed for a future date / period for future deliveries. A taxpayer in
India (ICo.) imports the commodity from its AEs, at prices agreed two months in
advance. For the sake of this example, assume that the future prices of the
commodity tend to be same / similar as the spot prices (with the possibility of
a small future premium of up to 0.10% in some cases). ICo also imports certain
quantities of the commodity on a spot basis from third parties – in order to
take advantage of a potential favourable price movement.


Some of the dates of transactions entered into by ICo, and the
corresponding prices are provided in the table below, along with comparable
uncontrolled prices for the exact same dates.

Transaction
Date

Transaction Price in INR per unit

CUP
Available in INR on Transaction Date

30th June 2017

10,000

                 10,450

30th September 2017

 10,600

                    
10,300

31st December 2017

 10,200

                    
10,650

31st March 2018

 10,800

                    
10,900


From a plain
reading of this table, which represents the approach of comparing the prices as
at the transaction date, it would appear that the import prices are at arm’s
length for the three purchases made in June 2017, December 2017 and March 2018.
However, for the purchases made in September, 2017, there is a comparable
transaction available with a lower price. Accordingly, it appears that a
transfer pricing adjustment for the difference (INR 10,600 – INR 10,300 = INR
300 per unit) is warranted in the instant case. In fact, based on similar data,
there could be a potential transfer pricing adjustment in the hands of the AE
of ICo for the months of June 2017, December 2017 and March 20187.
Clearly, the above analysis does not represent the commercial reality of the
transactions – that the pricing of the transactions with the AE has been
decided much before the transaction has been entered into, and under the CUP
Method, the same cannot be compared with the spot prices paid for third party
imports.

_________________________________________

7   For
the purpose of this analysis, it is assumed that all relevant comparability
criteria for application of CUP Method are satisfied.


However, if ICo is
able to provide evidence of the dates on which the prices have been agreed with
its overseas AE, data pertaining to such dates may be considered even if there
is no comparable uncontrolled transaction entered into by ICo during such
dates. Now consider the additional evidence provided by ICo in the following
table (see highlighted columns).


As can be seen from
the table above, the transaction prices appear more closely aligned with the
quoted prices as at the PO date. These prices are, in fact, better indicators
of the real market scenario – since in the real world, in case prices are
determined in advance of the transaction taking place, the parties do not have
the benefit of hindsight, and would consider the prevailing quoted prices to
arrive at their transfer prices. ICo and the AE would yet need to demonstrate,
in their respective jurisdictions, that the difference between the quoted price
and the transaction price is representative of the arm’s length future premium,
however, this explanation should be a lot easier and involve far lesser tax
risk than starting from a relatively inaccurate starting point –prices agreed
at a different date.

Transaction Date

Purchase Order (PO) Date

Transaction Price in INR per unit

Quoted Price in INR on PO date

CUP Available in INR on Transaction Date

30th June 2017

30th April 2017

                     10,000

                     10,010

                     10,450

30th September 2017

30th July 2017

                     10,600

                     10,600

                     10,300

31st December 2017

31st October 2017

                     10,200

                     10,205

                     10,650

31st March 2018

31st January 2018

                     10,800

                     10,810

                     10,900


It is important for
the tax teams of MNEs to ensure that the procurement or sales teams (depending
on the nature of the transaction) document the correct period at which the
price was agreed (date or time, as the case may be – and depending on the
volatility of the price of the quoted product), and maintain evidence of the
quoted price of the commodity at the same period.


There appears to be
a direct correlation between the frequency and quantum of fluctuations in the
commodity prices, with the accuracy of the period of price setting that needs
to be evidenced.


3.   New guidance on transfer pricing
documentation (three-tiered documentation)


The 2017 Guidelines
outline transfer pricing documentation rules with an overarching consideration
to balance the usefulness of the data to tax administration for transfer
pricing risk assessment and other purposes with any increased compliance
burdens placed on taxpayers. The purpose is also to ensure that transfer
pricing compliance is more straightforward and more consistent amongst
countries8.


Briefly, the three
fold objectives of transfer pricing documentation as outlined in 2017
Guidelines are (a) ensuring taxpayer’s assessment of its compliance with the
arm’s length principle (b) effective risk identification (c) provision of
useful information to tax administrations for thorough transfer pricing audit.


The 2017 Guidelines
suggest a three-tiered approach to transfer pricing documentation and insist on
countries adopting a standardised approach to transfer pricing documentation.
The elements of the suggested three-tiered documentation structure are
discussed below.

  • Master File – Master
    File is intended to provide a high level overview to place MNE group’s transfer
    pricing practices in their global economic, legal, financial and tax context.
    The information required in the Master File provides a blueprint of MNE group
    and contains relevant information that can be grouped in 5 categories (a) MNE
    group’s organisational structure (b) a description of MNE’s business or
    businesses (c) MNE’s intangibles (d) MNE’s intercompany financial activities
    and (e) MNE’s financial and tax positions9. The Guidelines are not
    rigid in prescribing the level of details which need to be provided as a part
    of the Master File, and require that taxpayers should use prudent business
    judgment in determining the appropriate level of detail for the information
    supplied, keeping in mind the objective of the Master File to provide a high
    level overview of the MNE’s global operations and policies. 

_____________________________________

8   The earlier guidelines emphasised on the
greater level of co-operation between tax administrations and taxpayers in
addressing documentation issues. Those guidelines did not provide for a list of
documents to be included in transfer pricing documentation package nor did they
provide clear guidance with respect to link between process for documenting
transfer pricing, the administration of penalties and the burden of proof.

9   Refer
Para 5.19 of 2017 Guidelines

  • Local File – Local
    file provides more detailed information relating to specific inter-company
    transaction. The information required in local file supplements the master file
    and helps to meet the objective of assuring that the taxpayer has complied with
    the arm’s length principle in its material transfer pricing positions affecting
    a specific jurisdiction. Information in the local file would include financial
    information regarding transactions with associated enterprises, a comparability
    analysis, and selection and application of the most appropriate method.
  • Country by Country
    Reporting (CbCR)
    – The CbCR requires aggregate tax jurisdiction wide
    information relating to the global allocation of the income, the taxes paid and
    certain indicators of the location of economic activity among tax jurisdictions
    in which the MNE group operates10. The Guidelines provide that CbCR
    will be helpful for high level transfer pricing risk assessment purposes, for
    evaluating other BEPS related risk (non-transfer pricing risks), and where
    appropriate, for economic and statistical analysis11. The Guidelines
    provide that the CbCR should not be used as a substitute for a detailed
    transfer pricing analysis based on a full functional analysis and comparability
    analysis; and should also not be used by tax authorities to propose transfer
    pricing adjustments based on a global formulary apportionment of income.


The Guidelines
provide (as agreed by countries participating in the BEPS Project) for the
following conditions underpinning the obtaining and the use of the CbCR:12

     Legal protection of the confidentiality of
the reported information

     Consistency with the template agreed under
the BEPS Project and provided as part of the Guidelines

     Appropriate use of the reported information
– for purposes highlighted above

 


Further, the 2017
Guidelines provide for ultimate parent entity of an MNE group to file CbCR in
its jurisdiction of residence and implementing arrangements by countries for
the automatic exchange of CbCR. The participating jurisdictions of the BEPS
project are encouraged to expand the coverage of their international agreements
for exchange of information.


Practically, this
three – tiered documentation is one of the most important transfer pricing
exercise which taxpayers and tax practitioners have been engaged in, over the
past more than a year– in aligning the three sets of documents, and ensuring
they provide consistent information. 

______________________________________________-

10  The 2017 Guidelines recommend an exemption
for CbCR filing for MNE groups with annual consolidated group revenue in the
immediately preceding fiscal year of less than EUR 750 million or a near
equivalent amount in domestic currency as of January 2015. Refer Para 5.52.

11  Refer Para 5.25 of 2017 Guidelines

12     Refer Paras 5.56 to 5.59 of 2017 Guidelines


Detailed
discussion and analysis of the contents of Master File, Local File and CbCR
have been kept outside the purview of this Article. One may refer to Annex 1,
Annex II and Annex III to Chapter V of the 2017 Guidelines for the details of
contents of the Master File, Local file and CbCR respectively.


4. Administrative approaches
to avoiding and resolving transfer pricing disputes
 


The 2017 Guidelines
have provided administrative approaches to resolving transfer pricing disputes
caused by transfer pricing adjustments and for avoiding double taxation.
Differences in guidance as compared to the earlier guidance have been discussed
in this section.

  • MAP and Corresponding
    Adjustments


The 2017 Guidelines
provide that procedure of Article 25 dealing with Mutual Agreement Procedure
(MAP) may be used to consider corresponding adjustments arising out of transfer
pricing adjustments.


The 2017 Guidelines
specifically discusses regarding the concern of taxpayers in relation to denial
of access to MAP in transfer pricing cases. The Guidelines make a reference to
the minimum standard agreed as a result of the BEPS Action 14 on ‘Making
Dispute Resolution Mechanisms More Effective’ and re-emphasise the commitment
on the part of countries to provide access to the MAP in transfer pricing
cases. The Guidelines also provide detailed guidance relating to time limits,
duration, taxpayer participation, publication of MAP programme guidance,
suspension of collection procedures during pendency of MAP etc. Overall, the
idea appears to be to make the MAP program more effective and meaningful for
taxpayers, and to enhance accountability of the tax administration in MAP
cases.

  • Safe Harbours


The 2017 Guidelines
highlight the following benefits of safe harbours:13

     Simplifying compliance

     Providing certainty to taxpayers

     Better utilisation of resources available
to tax administration

____________________________-

13 
Refer Para 4.105 of 2017 Guidelines


The Guidelines also
highlight the following concerns relating to safe harbours:14

     Potential divergence from the arm’s length
principle

     Risk of double taxation or double non
taxation

     Potential opening of avenues for
inappropriate tax planning

     Issues of equity and uniformity

__________________________

14 
Refer Para 4.110 of 2017 Guidelines


The 2017 Guidelines
provide that in cases involving small taxpayers or less complex transactions,
the benefits of safe harbours may outweigh the problems / concerns raised in
relation to safe harbours. The appropriateness of safe harbours can be expected
to be most apparent when they are directed at taxpayers and / or transactions
which involve low transfer pricing risks and when they are adopted on a
bilateral or multilateral basis. The Guidelines however provide that for more
complex and higher risk transfer pricing matters, it is unlikely that safe
harbours will provide a workable alternative to rigorous case by case
application of the arm’s length principle.


Concluding Remarks


The 2017 Guidelines
reflect the clarifications and revisions agreed in reports on BEPS Actions 8-10
(Aligning Transfer Pricing Outcomes with Value Creation), Action 13 (Transfer
Pricing Documentation and Country by Country Reporting), and Action 14 (Making
Dispute Resolution Mechanisms More Effective).


Evidently, the
focus areas of the 2017 Guidelines are substance, transparency and certainty.
Several practices and recommendations of the Indian tax administration do find
place in the BEPS Actions, and consequently, in the 2017 Guidelines also. India
is largely aligned with the 2017 Guidelines.


Even at the grass
root level, taxpayers and professionals are already experiencing the evolution
of transfer pricing analysis from a contractual terms based analysis to a more
deep rooted factual analysis considering several facts and circumstances
surrounding the transaction. Further, the way this analysis is documented is
also being transformed – from a jurisdiction specific documentation, to a
globally consistent, three-tiered documentation.


From the
perspective of the tax authorities, they now have the ‘big picture’ available
to them. This should enable them to undertake a comprehensive and more
business-like analysis of the MNE’s transfer pricing approaches.

Action 13 – The Game Changer In Transfer Pricing Documentation

Backdrop – What is BEPS?
Base erosion and profit shifting (BEPS) refers to tax avoidance strategies that exploit gaps and mismatches in tax rules to artificially shift profits to low or no-tax locations. Under the inclusive framework, over 100 countries and jurisdictions are collaborating to implement the BEPS measures and tackle BEPS.
 
The OECD/G20 BEPS Project, set out 15 Action Plans along three key pillars: introducing coherence in the domestic rules that affect cross-border activities, reinforcing substance requirements in the existing international standards, and improving transparency as well as certainty.
 
These action plans will equip governments with domestic and international instruments to address tax avoidance, reduce double taxation and ensure that profits are taxed where economic activities generating the profits are performed and where value is created.
 
Action plan 13 – Transfer Pricing documentation and Country by Country Reporting

With the advent of globalisation, the integration of national economies and markets has increased substantially in recent years, putting a strain on the international tax rules which were designed more than a century ago. In this world of globalisation, companies can do significant tax planning through transfer pricing which may create opportunities for base erosion and profit shifting (BEPS).
 
The OECD introduced Action Plan 13 to enhance transparency for tax administration among various countries. These rules will provide all relevant governments with needed information on their global allocation of the income, economic activity and taxes paid among countries according to a common template and ensure that profits are taxed where economic activities take place and value is created.
The Action Plan 13 has laid down a three-tiered standardised approach to transfer pricing documentation.
 
I.Country-by-Country Report (CbC)1
 
    Large Multinational enterprises (MNEs) are required to file a Country-by-Country Report that will provide annually and for each tax jurisdiction in which they do business the amount of revenue, profit before income tax and income tax paid and accrued. It also requires MNEs to report their number of employees, stated capital, retained earnings and tangible assets in each tax jurisdiction. Finally, it requires MNEs to identify each entity within the group doing business in a particular tax jurisdiction and to provide an indication of the business activities each entity engages in.
 
II.Master File (MF)
 
    The guidance on transfer pricing documentation requires multinational enterprises (MNEs) to provide tax administrations with high-level information regarding their global business operations and transfer pricing policies in a “master file” that is to be available to all relevant tax administrations.
 
III.  Local File (LF)
 
A detailed transactional transfer pricing documentation has to be provided in a “local file” specific to each country, identifying material related party transactions, the amounts involved in those transactions, and the company’s analysis of the transfer pricing determinations they have made with regard to those transactions.
______________________________________________________________________
1 Refer section 286 of Indian Income tax Act, 1961 read with Rule 10DB
 
 
Country-by-Country Reports are to be filed in the jurisdiction of tax residence of the ultimate parent entity. These reports can be shared between jurisdictions through automatic exchange of information, pursuant to government-to-government mechanisms such as the multilateral Convention on Mutual Administrative Assistance in Tax Matters, bilateral tax treaties or tax information exchange agreements (TIEAs). The Master file and the Local file have to be filed by MNEs directly to local tax administrations and should be compliant with local MF and LF regulations.
 
Taken together, these three documents will require taxpayers to articulate consistent transfer pricing positions and will provide tax administrations with useful information. This information will enable the tax authorities to gauge whether companies have used transfer pricing as means for profit shifting into low tax jurisdictions.
 
Action Plan 13 – India Perspective

On May 5, 2016, India introduced the concepts of Country-by-Country (“CbC”) reporting requirement and the concept of Master File in the Indian Income Tax Act, 1961 (“the Act”) through Finance Act 2016, effective from 1st April 2016.  The Central Board of Direct Taxes (“CBDT”) on 31st October 2017 released the final rules on CbC reporting and Master File requirements in India (vide notification no. 92/2017).
 
I.Country-by-Country Report (CbC)
 
The Country-by-Country Report requires aggregate tax jurisdiction-wide information relating to the global allocation of the income, the taxes paid, and certain indicators of the location of economic activity among tax jurisdictions in which the MNE group operates. The report also requires a listing of all the Constituent Entities for which financial information is reported, including the tax jurisdiction of incorporation, where different from the tax jurisdiction of residence, as well as the nature of the main business activities carried out by that Constituent Entity. The format of the CbC report (Form No. 3CEAD available on department’s website) is aligned with the BEPS.
 
MNEs with annual consolidated group revenue equal to or exceeding INR 55,000 million (threshold of EUR 750 million as per OECD) are required to file the CbC. The due date for filing the CbC report in India continues to be the due date for filing the income-tax return i.e. 30 November following the financial year. However, for FY 2016-17, the due date is extended to 31st March 2018 (as per the CBDT Circular 26/2017 released on 25th October 2017).
 
The Country-by-Country Report will be helpful for high-level transfer pricing risk assessment purposes. It may also be used by tax administrations in evaluating other BEPS related risks and where appropriate for economic and statistical analysis.
 
CbC Notification – Further, every Indian constituent entity of an MNE headquartered outside India is required to file the CbC report notification in the prescribed format i.e. Form No. 3CEAC (available on department’s website). The CbC report notification is required to be filed atleast two months prior to the due date for filing the CbC report, that is aligned to the due date for filing the income-tax return of the Indian constituent entity. As mentioned above, the due date for filing the CbC report for FY 2016-17 has been extended to 31st March 2018 and accordingly, the due date for the first CbC report notification for FY 2016-17 has also been extended to 31st January 2018. However for subsequent years, the due date of filing the notification will be 30th September.
 
II.Master file
 
The Master file is a document which provides an overview of the MNE group business, including the nature of its global business operations, its overall transfer pricing policies, and its global allocation of income and economic activity in order to assist tax administrations in evaluating the presence of significant transfer pricing risk. In general, the master file is intended to provide a high-level overview in order to place the MNE group’s transferpricing practices in their global economic, legal, financial and tax context. The information in the master file provides a “blueprint” of the MNE groupand contains relevant information that can be grouped in five categories:
 
1.the group’s organisational structure;
2.a description of the group’s business;
3.the group’s intangibles;
4.the intercompany financial activities of the group; and
5.the financial and tax positions of the group.
 
The CBDT has prescribed that Master File has to be prepared as per the format given in Form 3CEAA (available on department’s website). The form comprises of two Parts i.e. Part A and Part B.
 
Part A of Master File – Part A comprises of basic information relating to the MNE and the constituent entities of the MNE operating in India (such as name, permanent account number and address). Part A of the Master File will be required to be filed by every constituent entity of an MNE, without applicability of any threshold;
 
Part B of Master File – Part B comprises of the main Master File information that provides a high level overview of the MNE’s global business operations and transfer pricing policies. Every constituent entity of an MNE that meets the following threshold will be required to file Part B of Master File:
 
-the consolidated group revenue for the accounting year exceeds INR 5,000 million; and
-for the accounting year, the aggregate value of international transactions exceeds INR 500 million, or aggregate value of intangible property related international transactions exceeds INR 100 million..
 
The Master File information required to be submitted as per Rule 10 DA of the Income tax Rules, 1962, is largely consistent with BEPS Action 13 requirements. However, few additional data requirements have been incorporated under Rule 10DA of the Income Tax Rules, 1962, requiring MNE to customise their Master File for India. The below table summarises the requirement as per OECD and Indian rules:
The Master File has to be furnished by the due date of filing the income-tax return i.e. 30th November following the financial year. However, for financial year 2016-17 (“FY 2016-17”), the due date is extended to 31st March 2018. MNEs with multiple constituent entities in India can designate one Indian constituent entity to file the Master File in India, provided an intimation to this effect is made in Form No. 3CEAB (available on department’s website), 30 days prior to the due date for filing the Master File in India i.e. March 1, 2018.
 
III.Local file

In contrast to the master file, which provides a high-level overview of the MNE group, the local file provides detailed pertaining to the intercompany transactions of the local entity. The local file supplements the master file and helps to meet the objective of assuring that the taxpayer has complied with the arm’s length principle in its material transfer pricing positions.
 
In India, the local file has to be maintained as prescribed under section 92D read with Rule 10 D of the Income Tax Act, 1961. No other specific requirements are prescribed for local file.
 
Practical Considerations

The CBDT has prescribed detailed rules on CbC reporting and Master File requirements in India however there are various aspects of the rules which will have practical considerations while implementing these rules. The ensuing paragraphs deal with some considerations that may come up while implementing the said rules.

 

Master
file
requirement

Summary
of OECD BEPS Requirement

Additional
requirements as per Indian final rules

Organization
structure

Chart illustrating
IG’s legal and ownership structure and
 geographical location of operating
entities

Address
of all entities of the IG (draft rules had earlier only prescribed details
of all operating entities)

Description
of IG’s business

    Description of important drivers of
business profit

    Description of supply chain for the
specified category of products

    Functional analysis of the principal
contributors to value creation

    Description of important business
restructuring transactions,

     acquisitions and divestments during the
reporting year

Functions,
assets and risk analysis of entities contributing at least 10% of the IG’s
revenue OR assets OR profits

IG’s
intangible property

    IG’s strategy for ownership, development
and exploitation of intangibles

    List of important intangibles with
ownership

    Important agreements and corresponding
transfer pricing policies in relation to R&D and intangibles

    Names and addresses of all entities of the
IG engaged in development and management of intangible property

    Addresses of entities legally owning
important intangible property and entities involved in important transfers of     interest in intangible property

IG’s

intercompany

financial
activities

 

    Description of how the IG is financed,
induding identification of important financing arrangements with unrelated
lenders

    Identification of entities performing
central financing

     function including their place of
operation and effective
management

    Names and addresses of top ten unrelated
lenders

    Names and addresses of entities providing
central financing functions including their place of  operation and effective management

 

Reporting year for CbC report: The requirement to file the CbC report is applicable to an MNE having consolidated group revenue exceeding the prescribed threshold in the immediately preceding financial year. Which means for Indian constituent entities of a foreign MNE where the ultimate parent entity has calendar year end i.e. 31st December, the CbC report is applicable for FY 2016-17 only if the prescribed consolidated group revenue threshold is exceeded for year ended 31st December 2016. In case of Indian constituent entities of an MNE headquartered in India where the ultimate parent entity has financial year end i.e. 31st March, the CbC report is applicable for FY 2016-17 only if the prescribed consolidated group revenue threshold is exceeded for year ended 31st March 2017.
 
Accounting year that should be considered in case of CbC and Master File:The accounting year for CbC would be an annual accounting period, with respect to which the parent entity of the international group prepares its financial statements. However where a foreign MNE appoints an alternate reporting entity resident in India the CbC report would be required to be prepared and filed in India for the accounting year followed by the alternate reporting entity resident in India i.e. the previous year (April to March).
 
Permanent establishment (PE): It is important to note that an Indian permanent establishment (PE) of a foreign MNEwill be said to be a “constituent entity resident in Indiafor the purpose of section 286 and Rule 10DB. Therefore, an Indian PE of a foreign entity should be treated as a constituent entity resident in India.
-Filing of CbC notification on behalf of other Indian Constituent entity: Where an MNE has more than one constituent entity in India, the rules currently do not prescribe to designate one constituent entity to file the CbC notification on behalf of other Indian Constituent entity. Therefore every constituent entity will have to file the CbC notification separately in Form 3CEAC.
 
Filing of Part A of the Master File: Where there are more than one constituent entity in India, the designated entity can file the Part A of the Master File on behalf of its constituent entities.
 
Threshold for filing the Part B of Master File:The Master file will be prepared for the group for the accounting year followed by the parent entity and therefore, the prescribed threshold for applicability of Part B of Master file should be determined based on the accounting year followed by the parent entity of the group. Accordingly, the threshold for determination of the consolidated group revenue and the aggregate value of international transactions ought to be considered using the period followed by the foreign parent as the Master File is being prepared for that period.
 
Penalties

The below table details the penalties in case of Non Compliance with the CbC and Master File requirements:

Sr. No

Particulars

Default

Penalty

CbC report

INR

Euro

1.

Non-furnishing of CbC report by Indian parent or the alternate
reporting entity resident in India

Each day upto a month from due date

5,000 per day

65 per day

Beyond a month from due date

15,000 per day

200 per day

Continuing default beyond service of penalty order

50,000 per day

665 per day

2.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3.

Non-submission of information

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Provision of inaccurate information in CbC report

Beyond expiry of the period for furnishing information

5,000 per day

65 per day

Continuing default beyond service of penalty order

50,000 per day from date of service of penalty order

665 per day from date of service of penalty order

Knowledge of inaccuracy at time of furnishing the report but
fails to inform the prescribed authority

 

 

 

 

 

500,000

 

 

 

 

 

6650

Inaccuracy discovered after filing and fails to inform and
furnish correct report within fifteen days of such discovery

Furnishing of inaccurate information or document in response to
notice issued

Master File

1.

Non-furnishing of information and documentation

Failure to furnish the information and document to the
prescribed authority

500,000

6650

Conclusion

The below table summarises the various forms and deadlines for CbC and Master File Compliance

Particulars

Form No

Applicability as per Rules

Indian Timelines for
Compliance

Cbc Report

Form 3CEAD

Consolidated revenue >
INR 55,000 million

First Year – 31 March 2018

Subsequent Year – 30
November

CbC report notification

Form 3CEAC

Indian constituent entities
of MNE Group

First Year – 31 January 2018

Subsequent Year – 30
September

Filing of the Master File

Form 3CEAA

Part A : Every Constituent
Entity of MNE having international / specified domestic transaction 

First Year – 31 March 2018

Subsequent Year – 30
November

Part B : Every Constituent
Entity of MNE meeting the prescribed threshold

Intimation of designated Indian
Constituent entity of a IG for filing Master File

Form 3CEAB

Indian Headquartered and
Foreign MNEs required to file Master File and having multiple constituent
entities resident in India

First Year – 1 March 2018

Subsequent Year – 31 October

Local Transfer Pricing Study
Report

As per section 92D read with
Rule 10D

Every Constituent Entity of
IG having international / specified domestic transaction 

01-Nov-30

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Heading Towards Global Best Practices – Section 94b

On the auspicious day of Vasant Panchami, when Finance Minister Arun Jaitley rose to give the Budget speech for 2017-18, he reaffirmed the government’s intent to make India stand out as a bright spot in the world economic landscape and to ensure that India aligns with best global tax practices.
 
Among several tax amendments, he addressed the issue of thin capitalisation, thereby introducing section 94B to the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’). The intent to introduce this section on thin capitalisation is discussed in the forthcoming paragraphs along with the key issues surrounding this amendment.
 
Limiting deduction of interest paid to Associated Enterprises
Interest expenditure in books of Indian taxpayers is a deductible expenditure u/s. 36(1)(iii) of the Act. Thus, claiming interest expenditure makes debt a more preferable option for taxpayers over equity, by helping them reduce their taxable profits. However, in the past few years, several cases have been identified where cash rich companies have borrowed funds, often from their overseas counterparts, with an intent to shift profits to a low/ no tax jurisdiction.
 
India had no thin-capitalisation rules in place prior to the introduction of Section 94B. Thus, there have been judgements, such as that in case of DIT vs. Besix Kier Dabhol SA {[2012] 26 taxmann.com 169 (Bom)}, wherein the Honourable Bombay High Court has allowed interest expenses to the taxpayer, on the ground that there are no thin capitalisation rules in place under the law. It is pertinent to note here, that in the case at hand, the debt to equity ratio was as typically and astronomically high as 248:1.
 
Further, in line with the recommendations of OECD BEPS Action Plan 4, it has been provided that when any Indian company, or the Permanent Establishment (PE) of a foreign company in India, being the borrower, incurs any expenditure in form of interest (or of similar nature) of INR One crore or more to its Associated Enterprises (AEs), the same shall be restricted to 30% of its earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA) or the interest paid or payable to AE, whichever is less.
 
Further, the debt shall be deemed to be treated as issued by an AE, where the related party provides an implicit or explicit guarantee to the lender or deposits a corresponding and matching amount of funds with the lender.
 
In other words, the restriction is applicable where interest or similar consideration incurred to a non-resident AE lender, exceeds INR 1 crore. The excess interest is defined to mean:
 
–    Total interest paid or payable in excess of 30% of EBITDA; or
–    Interest paid or payable to an AE, whichever is less.
 
Such disallowed interest expenditure shall be carried forward up to eight assessment years immediately succeeding the assessment year for which the disallowance is first made. The deduction in the subsequent assessment year is allowed from ‘business income, subject to same restrictions as stated above. Further, this provision is not applicable to entities engaged in the business of banking and insurance. It is also interesting to note here, that the newly inserted section does not harmoniously limit the withholding tax liability or taxability of the AE on such interest income earned.
 
While break-downing section 94B, following inferences can be drawn:

Parameters

Applicability

Payer

    Indian company, other than banking or
insurance company; or

    PE of a foreign company

Payee

– 
Non-resident
Associated Enterprise; or

 

–     Third party lender to whom Non-resident Associated
Enterprise has provided a guarantee or provided matching funds

Amount
of Interest

    Excess of INR 10 million in a particular
financial year

Nature
of Interest

    Deductible expenditure against income
taxable under the head ‘profits and gains from business or profession’

Global Best Practices
Section 94B is yet another attempt by India to assert its strong support to being an active participant in the OECD Action Plans for combating Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS). BEPS Action Plan 4 speaks about limiting base erosion via interest deductions and other financial payments and is primarily designed to limit the deductibility of interest and other economically equivalent payments made to related parties as well as third parties.
 
Some pertinent similarities and deviations between Action Plan 4 and section 94B are tabulated below:
 

Highlights

Particulars

Applicability to Action Plan
4

Applicability to section 94B

Gross/ Net

Whether Gross or Net
interest can be claimed

AP 4 prescribes thin
capitalisation rules to apply to net interest

Section 94B prescribes thin
capitalisation rules to apply to net interest

Fixed Ratio Rule

Prescribing/ Setting a limit
on amount that the taxpayer can claim as deduction in a certain year

10% to 30% of EBITDA

30% of EBITDA

Recipient of Interest

Prescribing disallowance
based on the recipient of interest

AP 4 prescribes disallowance
of net interest irrespective of whether the recipient of such interest is a
group entity or an independent third party

Section 94B prescribes
disallowance on the payment of interest to AEs, beyond the prescribed ceiling

Group Ratio Rule

Prescribing/ setting a limit
on amount that the group can claim as deduction in a certain year

Recommended in AP 4

No mention in Indian
provisions

Carry Forward

Disallowed interest or the
unused interest capacity allowed to be used in subsequent years

Recommended in AP 4

Disallowed interest expense
permitted to be carried forward up to 8 assessment years immediately
succeeding the assessment year for which the disallowance is first made

Carry Back

Disallowed interest or the
unused interest capacity allowed to be used in past years

Recommended in AP 4

No mention of carry back in
Indian provisions

De minimis threshold

Prescribing applicability of
provisions only to apply to transactions above the set limit

Recommended in AP 4; no
prescribed number

Threshold of INR 10
million          (1 crore) prescribed

Definition of Interest

Section 2(28A) of the
Income-tax Act, 1961 versus A  4

    Includes interest
payable in any manner in respect of moneys borrowed or debt incurred
(including deposit, claim or other similar right or obligation);

 

–      Includes
any services fee or other charge in respect of moneys borrowed;

 

–      Includes
debt incurred in respect of any credit facility that has not been utilised

Section 2(28A) defines
interest as interest payable in any manner in respect of any moneys borrowed
or debt incurred (including a deposit, claim or other similar right or
obligation) and includes any service fee or other charge in respect of the
moneys borrowed or debt incurred or in respect of any credit facility which
has not been utilised

 
Key Issues/Queries Surrounding Section 94B
 
1.    EBITDA as per tax or as per financial statements?
    EBITDA is neither defined in the Companies Act, 2013, nor in the Income-tax Act, 1961. There is also no clarification in the section whether such item be adopted at the time of disallowance of any interest and whether EBITDA can be used as the base number or based on tax computation.
 
    Action Plan 4 recommends basis of EBITDA as per Tax rules. The idea is that by linking interest deductions to taxable earnings would mean that it is more difficult for a group to increase the limit on net interest deductions without also increasing the level of taxable income in a country. However, the Income-tax Act does not recognise any term as EBITDA or gross total income, causing ambiguity. In such a scenario and in absence of clarity, it would be a better approach to rely on EBITDA as per books of accounts.
 
2.    Double taxation on the interest income element:
    BEPS Action Plan 4 suggests implementation of such thin capitalisation norms in cases where net interest exceeds a prescribed percentage of EBITDA. As against that, Section 94B mentions interest payments (gross payments). While provisions of Section 94B are simpler to implement (since it does not warrant detailed analysis of interest income that can be set off against relevant interest payment), to such extent, it implies enforcing double taxation at the group level. For example, in case an interest payment of India to the UK AE is partially disallowed u/s. 94B in India, to the extent of such partial disallowance, UK would still bear the tax on such interest income.
 
    Unless a specific provision is introduced in tax treaties/the Multilateral instruments signed by various countries, this shall remain an open issue. In absence of requisite clarifications, taxpayers may have to resort to dispute resolution mechanisms to eliminate double taxation.
 
3.    Deemed debt scenarios:
    The first proviso to section 94B(1) speaks of deeming fiction being triggered even in case of an implicit guarantee by an AE. However, the term implicit guarantee has not been defined anywhere in the Act. Also, no such reference is provided in BEPS Action Plan 4. It is therefore a matter of concern as to how the Revenue may evaluate the presence or otherwise of an implicit guarantee from an AE, with an underlying third party debt, especially in cases  when the AE is the parent of the Indian taxpayer.
 
    Assuming a scenario where the tax authorities may allege that an implicit guarantee exists only because a certain Indian company is subsidiary of an MNC, seems too farfetched. In such cases, the onus should be on the tax authorities to justify, with adequate supporting, that an implicit guarantee exists, based on actual arrangement/conduct of the parties involved.
 
4.    Corresponding and matching amount of funds:
    Proviso to Section 94B(1) suggests that debt shall be deemed to have been issued by an AE even where debt is issued by a third party lender but an AE deposits a corresponding and matching amount of funds with the lender. What is not well defined here is where the amount deposited by the AE ought to be equivalent to the amount of debt or a percentage thereof. For example, in a case where the base debt is INR 1 crore, but the amount deposited is INR 80 lakh, will proviso to section 94B(1) be triggered in such a case? Alternatively, would the answer be any different if the deposit was merely INR 5 lakh?
 
    The intent of the law here does not seem to be to cover only those cases where the guarantee is exactly corresponding to the debt involved.  In fact, imposing the criteria of matching funds would leave taxpayers with immense opportunity to immorally avoid any implication of section 94B on their transaction. Hence, keeping the intent of law in mind, it may be understood that corresponding and matching funds is not a mandate in such a case.
 
5.    Will only funds trigger the applicability of the proviso?
    Proviso to section 94B(1) suggests that debt shall be deemed to have been issued by an AE even where debt is issued by a third party lender, but an AE deposits a corresponding and matching amount with the lender. While reading the section, there appears no clarity in a case where the AE offers a collateral to the third party lender in any form other than funds. For example, in case the AE offers an asset as collateral which is not in the form of money/ funds, will proviso to section 94B(1) apply in such a case?
 
    Similar to the point above, the purpose of the law shall be defeated if restricted to only those cases where funds are maintained as collateral. The intent of the law may be read as any form of guarantee extended by an AE, for the applicability of this section to be imposed.
 
6.    Impact of Ind AS on reading of section 94B

    Ind As places focus on substance and contractual arrangement of financial instruments over its mere legal form. Accordingly, redeemable preference shares which were treated as shareholder capital under IGAAP shall be treated as debt under Ind AS since it encompasses all features of debt (i.e. fixed and determined payout; specified maturity date etc.). Also, dividend paid on redeemable preference shares shall be treated as interest in the books of accounts as per Ind AS, as against being treated as dividend as per IGAAP.
 
    One pertinent thing to note here is, whether change in characterisation of dividend as interest under Ind AS would have any direct impact on the interest as per section 94B. While there is no direct clarity on the topic at this stage, it is important to read the same in light of Circular 24 of 2017 (dated 25th July 2017), which clarifies that such dividend on redeemable preference shares, while may be considered as interest as per Ind AS, shall continue to be treated as interest for the purposes of MAT computation. Taxpayers may draw an analogy here that similar impact is to be given when it comes to computation of tax as per normal provisions.
 
In all the above cases, it would be helpful to receive clarification or objective guidelines from the CBDT, to avoid multiple cases of controversy and litigation, and to bring peace and clarity in the minds of taxpayers. _
 

Impact Of Multilateral Instrument On India’s Tax Treaties From An Anti-Abuse Rules Perspective

BACKGROUND

On 7th June 2017, representatives
of 68 jurisdictions met at the OECD headquarters in Paris to sign the
multilateral instrument[1]
(MLI). The MLI is an outcome of the Base Erosion and Profit Sharing (BEPS)
Action 15, which specifically addresses the issue of how to modify existing
bilateral tax treaties in order to implement BEPS tax treaty measures. The
MLI is an innovative and swift way of modifying bilateral tax treaties without
getting caught in the time-consuming process of re-negotiating each tax treaty.

The implementation of the MLI is expected to have a far-reaching impact on the
existing bilateral tax treaties. The OECD estimates that potentially 1,100
existing bilateral tax treaties are set to be modified. This is a turning
point in the history of international taxation.

 

SCOPE OF MLI FROM INDIA’S PERSPECTIVE

As of now, the MLI is signed but not yet
effective. The MLI will enter into force on the first date of the month after
three calendar months from the date when at least five countries deposit the
instrument of ratification, acceptance or approval; detailed provisions are
also there for entry into effect of the MLI.

 

Once the MLI is effective, it will modify an
existing bilateral tax treaty only if both the countries have notified the tax
treaty for the purposes of MLI. Under the MLI framework, such a tax treaty is
referred to as the covered tax agreement (CTA). India has notified all its tax
treaties (such as tax treaties with USA, UK, Singapore, Netherlands, Japan,
Luxembourg, etc.) as CTAs for the purposes of MLI. However, there are
some countries such as Mauritius, Germany and China who have chosen not to
notify their tax treaty with India – accordingly, the MLI will not apply to
India’s tax treaties with Mauritius, Germany and China. Further, USA and Brazil
are not signatories to the MLI itself. Accordingly, apart from tax treaties
with a few countries, most of India’s tax treaties will stand modified when the
MLI becomes effective
.

 

It may be noted that all tax treaties will
not stand modified at the same time. The effective date of MLI for each
signatory country will vary depending upon when that country signed the MLI.
The MLI provisions will apply only after the MLI has become effective for both
countries.

 

MINIMUM STANDARDS OF BEPS ACTION 6
IMPLEMENTED THROUGH MLI

The MLI implements two minimum BEPS
standards relating to prevention of tax treaty abuse (BEPS Action 6) and
improvement of dispute resolution (BEPS Action 14). In this article, we are
discussing the impact of MLI on India’s tax treaties with respect to BEPS
Action 6
.

 

The BEPS Action
6 identified treaty abuse, and in particular treaty shopping, as one of the
most important sources of BEPS concerns.Taxpayers engaged in treaty shopping
and other treaty strategies claim treaty benefits in situations where these
benefits are not intended to be granted, thereby depriving countries of tax
revenues. Therefore, countries have come together to include anti-abuse
provisions in their tax treaties, including a minimum standard to counter
treaty shopping. The BEPS Action 6 includes three alternative rules to address
tax treaty abuse:

 

1.  Principal purpose test
(PPT) rule (a general anti-abuse rule based on the principal purpose of
transactions or arrangements)

 

2.  PPT rule, supplemented with
either simplified or detailed limitation of benefits (LOB) rule (a specific
anti-abuse rule which limits the availability of treaty benefits to persons
that meet certain conditions)

 

3.  Detailed LOB rule,
supplemented by a mechanism that would deal with conduit arrangements not
already dealt with in tax treaties.

PPT rule

The MLI presents the PPT rule as the
default option (as the PPT rule meets the minimum standard recommended under
BEPS Action 6 on a standalone basis).
Being a
minimum standard, these are mandatory provisions of the MLI and therefore, the
countries who have signed the MLI cannot typically opt out of these provisions.
As an exception, the countries can opt out if a tax treaty already meets the
minimum standards or if it is intended to adopt a combination of a detailed LOB
provision and either rules to address conduit financing structures or a PPT.
Accordingly, generally speaking, PPT rule of the MLI will replace the existing
anti-abuse provision in the tax treaty, or will be inserted in the absence of
anti-abuse provision in the tax treaty. For example, India’s tax treaties with
Canada, Denmark, France, Ireland, Japan, Netherlands, and Sweden do not have an
anti-abuse provision and therefore, the PPT rule of the MLI will be inserted
into those tax treaties.

 

The PPT rule of the MLI provides that a
benefit under a tax treaty shall not be granted if it is reasonable to
conclude, having regard to all relevant facts and circumstances, that obtaining
the benefit was one of the principal purposes of any arrangement or transaction
that resulted directly or indirectly in that benefit. A classic example is
where the PPT rule addresses treaty shopping by multinational companies who set
up ‘letterbox’ or ‘conduit’ companies which do not have substance in reality
and exist only to take advantage of the tax treaty. With the operation of the
PPT rule, the tax treaty benefits would be denied to such ‘letterbox’ or
‘conduit’ companies which are set up primarily with the intention to take
advantage of a favourable tax treaty. However, such benefit may be granted if
it is established that granting that benefit in these circumstances would be in
accordance with the object and purpose of the relevant provisions of the tax treaty.

 

The explanatory statement to the MLI
clarifies that the PPT rule of the MLI will not only replace the existing PPT
rules that deny all tax benefits under a particular tax treaty (a general
anti-abuse rule) but also those existing rules that deny tax benefits under
specific articles such as dividends, royalties, interest, income from
employment, other income and elimination of double taxation. This will ensure
that narrower provisions are replaced by the broader PPT rule of the MLI. In
case of a tax treaty that does not already contain a PPT rule, the PPT rule of
the MLI will be added. All these changes to the tax treaty are going to make
treaty shopping difficult. The amendments to the tax treaty arising from
operation of MLI will be prospective. Further, there is no grandfathering
clause available under the MLI provisions for the existing structures. The taxpayers
may have to evaluate how to align their structures with the amended tax
treaties.

 

The PPT rule of the MLI refers to “one of
the principal purpose” as opposed to “principal purpose” or “main purpose” or
“primary purpose”. Thus, the PPT rule of the MLI is broader than some of the
existing PPT rules contained in tax treaties which only refer to main or
principal or primary purpose. Therefore, the PPT rule of the MLI, once
incorporated into the tax treaties may broaden the scope of anti-abuse provision.
Existing structures which have been put in place simply to take advantage of
the tax treaties and which do not have any substance would be adversely hit by
the amended tax treaties.

 

Simplified LOB rule

In addition to the PPT rule under the MLI, a
country may also opt to apply a simplified or detailed LOB rule. Under the MLI,
an optional provision will be applicable to a tax treaty only if both the
countries have opted for such provision. If one of the countries has not opted
for it, the optional provision will not be applicable to the CTA. Thus, the
simplified LOB rule (an optional provision) will be applicable to a particular
tax treaty only if both the countries to the tax treaty have exercised the
choice to opt for it. While India has chosen to apply the simplified LOB, very
few other countries[2]
have made a similar choice. Practically, simplified LOB will not get
incorporated into India’s tax treaties, except where the other country has also
opted for such rule (such as, Bulgaria, Colombia, Indonesia, Russia, Slovak
Republic and Uruguay). Though the inclusion of PPT rule and simplified LOB rule
makes the anti-abuse provisions in the tax treaty stronger, from an India tax
treaty perspective, the PPT rule is going to be relevant as very few countries
have opted for simplified LOB rule.

 

Detailed LOB

The detailed LOB is out of the ambit of the
MLI and does not provide for the text of the detailed LOB as it requires
substantial bilateral customisation. Instead, countries that prefer to address
treaty abuse by adopting a detailed LOB provision are permitted to opt out of
the PPT and agree instead to endeavour to reach a bilateral agreement that
satisfies the minimum standard.

 

IMPACT ON SELECT INDIA’S TAX TREATIES

 

India-UK

 

Article 28C of the India-UK tax treaty,
which is a general anti-abuse provision, will stand replaced by the PPT rule of
the MLI as India and UK both have notified Article 28C for the purposes of MLI.
The PPT rule of the MLI provides for a carve-out in case where the tax benefits
are in accordance with the purpose and object of the tax treaty whereas Article
28C of India-UK tax treaty does not have such a carve-out. Therefore, the
replacement of the PPT rule in place of Article 28C of the India-UK tax treaty
may lead to relaxation of the general anti-abuse provision in the tax treaty.

 

The UK has also notified anti-abuse
provisions contained in Articles 11(6), 12(11) and 13(9) of the India-UK tax
treaty for the purposes of application of MLI; however, India has not notified
these provisions leading to notification mismatch. Based on the step-by-step
process outlined by the OECD, the PPT rule of the MLI will supersede these
articles to the extent they are incompatible with the PPT rule. India and UK
are not on the same page in case of Articles 11(6), 12(11) and 13(9) of the
India-UK tax treaty.

 

India-Singapore

 

The India-Singapore tax treaty contains
specific anti-abuse provisions which deny tax treaty benefits in relation to
capital gains. These provisions are in the nature of a specific anti-avoidance
rule (SAAR) and will not be impacted by the PPT rule. The PPT rule will
accordingly co-exist with the capital gains SAAR. At this stage, it is unclear
as to how this will play out. It will suffice to say that MLI will make this
treaty one of the most complicated.

 

India-Mauritius

 

Mauritius has not notified the
India-Mauritius tax treaty as a CTA, and accordingly, the PPT rules will not be
included as part of the tax treaty.

 

India-Luxembourg

 

The general anti-abuse provision contained
under Articles 29(2) and (3) of the India-Luxembourg tax treaty can be regarded
as broader in scope than the PPT under the MLI. As India and Luxembourg have
notified the Articles 29(2) and (3), the PPT under the MLI will replace the
aforementioned articles of the India-Luxembourg tax treaty. Thus, there is a
relaxation of the threshold.

 

India’s tax treaties with Canada, Denmark,
France, Ireland, Japan, Netherlands, Sweden

 

These tax treaties do not have an anti-abuse
provision and therefore, the PPT rule of the MLI will be inserted into the tax
treaty.

 

INTERPLAY BETWEEN PPT RULE OF THE MLI AND
GENERAL ANTI-AVOIDANCE RULE (GAAR) UNDER THE INCOME-TAX ACT, 1961

 

Scope of PPT rule of the MLI and GAAR

 

The scope of operation of the PPT rule of
the MLI and GAAR are different; whereas the PPT rule applies only to tax treaty
abuse, the GAAR applies to all kinds of abuse of the tax provisions (including
tax treaty abuse). The PPT rule of the MLI is different than GAAR when it comes
to the use of the terms “one of the principal purposes” as opposed to “main
purpose” under the GAAR. An arrangement which has more than one principal/main
purpose (of which obtaining tax benefit is one, but is not the main purpose)
may get covered under the PPT rule of the MLI, but may not attract GAAR.
Moreover, for GAAR to apply, the transaction should also not be at arm’s
length/ result in abuse of provisions of law/lack or deem to lack commercial
substance/is not bona fide. In contrast, the PPT rule of the MLI
provides a carve-out in terms of which the tax benefits will not be adversely
impacted by the PPT rule of the MLI, if such tax benefits are in line with the
purpose and objects of the tax treaty. Therefore, it cannot be generalised
whether PPT rule of the MLI or GAAR is broader in scope.

 

Interaction between PPT rule and GAAR

 

Let’s consider a situation where if the PPT
rule were applied, the tax treaty benefits would be denied; however, if the
GAAR were invoked, the tax treaty benefits would not be denied. The Income-tax
Act, 1961 (ITA) broadly provides that a taxpayer can apply the provisions of
the ITA or the tax treaty, whichever is beneficial. Relying on this provision,
can a taxpayer contend that it wants to be governed by the provisions of the
GAAR under the ITA and not the PPT rule under the tax treaty? This seems a
difficult proposition, as once the taxpayer elects to claim the benefits of a
tax treaty (say, reduced withholding tax on technical service fees), the entire
treaty (including the PPT rule) has to be considered, leading to the benefit
not being available.

 

To summarise, once a taxpayer seeks to claim
a tax treaty benefit, the PPT rule is to be examined to see whether the benefit
is to be granted or not. Thereafter, even if the PPT rule is not triggered, it
may be open to the tax authorities to deny the tax treaty benefit by invoking
the GAAR.

 

Implementation and administration of GAAR

 

The Indian tax authorities have the right
to deny tax treaty benefits if the GAAR is invoked in a particular case.
It all boils down to how the Indian tax authorities will administer
the GAAR. In the context of the LOB rule, the Indian tax authorities have
clarified that GAAR will be invoked in cases where they believe that anti-abuse
rules under the tax treaty have fallen short of preventing the mischief of tax
treaty abuse. There are checks and balances provided under the GAAR in order to
prevent an overzealous tax officer from involving GAAR in every case. Any
proposal to invoke GAAR will be vetted by senior tax authorities at the first
stage and by another panel at the second stage that will be headed by a High
Court Judge. However, time will be the best judge of how Indian tax authorities
implement and administer the GAAR.

 

It is pertinent to note that these processes
and safeguards for invoking GAAR are strictly not applicable to the PPT rule.
We will need to see whether these processes and safeguards are
extended for applying the PPT rule as well – clarifications on this are awaited
from the Indian tax authorities.

 

CONCLUSION

India is at the forefront in the fight
against tax avoidance and black money. The BEPS project and its implementation
through the MLI is an important opportunity available to the Indian and foreign
governments to strengthen their tax treaties to tackle the issue of tax treaty
shopping. _



[1] Multilateral Convention to Implement Tax Related Measures to
Prevent Base Erosion and Profit Shifting

[2] Argentina, Armenia, Bulgaria, Chile, Colombia, Indonesia, Mexico,
Russia, Senegal, the Slovak Republic and Ururguay.

Investment Opportunities in Cambodia: India’s Advantages Tax & Legal

1.      Introduction

1.1.    Cambodia’s economy grew with a GDP of 7.1%
in 2016 and expects growth of 7.3% for FY 2017-18. The expected growth in GDP
resulted rapid in development in various sectors, namely retail, technology,
e-commerce, infrastructure projects etc. Cambodia’s strategic location
in the heart of ASEAN between Vietnam, Thailand, Laos along with coastline
having an easy regional accessibility makes it an attractive investments
destination. By treating foreign investors and local investors equally it gives
an access to ASEAN’s 600-million-strong consumer market. The present foreign
policy allows a foreign investor to incorporate or establish with 100 % foreign
ownership an entity any kind. The only restrictions are in respect of land
ownership. Further, there are no restrictions on repatriation of money. 

2.      Structuring of entity

2.1     For establishing a business in Cambodia, a
Private Limited Company (“PLC”) is always advisable and to process the
incorporation, the Ministry of Commerce (“MoC”) is the regulatory authority and
it takes approximately 7 days, after the necessary documents are submitted for
incorporation. After obtaining the approval from MoC within 15 days, the
documents along with the certificate of incorporation must be submitted to
General Department of Taxation (“GDT”) to obtain Value Added Tax Certificate
(“VAT”) and Patent Tax Certificate (PTC) which can be obtained within 30 days
from the date of submission of documents. The Patent Tax Certificate is issued
for a specific business activities only and need to be renewed on an annual
basis.

3.      Taxation in Cambodia

3.1     The Law on Taxation (“LoT”) in Cambodia is
very simple. The only chargeable tax is the withholding tax and value added
tax, while there is no capital gain tax but tax on profits are applicable.

4.      Structure of entities

4.1     The following are the entities recommended
for doing business in Cambodia

a)  Private Limited Company

     The number of shareholders in the private
limited company ranges between 2 to 30 shareholders. The shares or securities
cannot be offered to the public but can only be offered to the shareholders,
family members and managers.

b)  Public Limited Company

     Unlike Private limited companies, it can
have more than 30 shareholders and the shares or securities can be offered to
the public. In Cambodia, only Public Limited Companies can conduct banking
business, insurance business or be a financial institution.

c)  Representative Office:

     An eligible foreign investor may establish
a Representative Office to facilitate the sourcing of local goods and services
and to collect information for its parent company.

d)  Branch Office:

     A Branch Office is an office opened by a
company for conducting a commercial activity. All activities of the Branch
office are like that of Representative office but in addition, it may purchase,
sell or conduct regular professional services or other operations engaged in
production or construction in the country.

e)  Subsidiary Company: 

     A subsidiary is a company that is
incorporated with either 100% or at least 51% percent of its capital being held
by a foreign company.

5.      Tax System in Cambodia:

5.1     Previously, the Cambodian tax system was
divided into three regimes: real regime, simplified regime and estimated
regime. Recently, all the three regimes have been merged into one regime called
the “Real Regime” and divided into three categories (a) Small Taxpayers (b)
Medium Taxpayers and (c) Large Taxpayers.

5.2     The following are the categories that are
sub categories under which an individual or an entity can be taxed.

   Tax on Salary

          An individual resident in Cambodia is
liable for tax on salary on both foreign as well as Cambodian source, while a
non-resident person is liable to the tax on salary only on Cambodian source.

   Withholding Tax (“WHT”)

          The general withholding tax shall be
determined as follows:

          Any resident taxpayer carrying on
business makes any payment to a resident taxpayer shall withhold 15% on
management, consulting, and similar services and royalties for intangibles and
interest in minerals, Income from movable and immovable 10%. Interest paid by a
domestic bank or saving institutions for fixed term 6% and non-fixed term 4%.

          Any
resident taxpayer to a non-resident taxpayer shall withhold, 14 % on interest,
royalties, rent, and other income connected with the use of property;
compensation for management or technical services and dividends.

6.      Fringe Benefits Tax(“FBT”)

          The employer is required to withhold
and pay tax at the rate of 20% of the total value of FB given to all the
employees.

7.      Value Added Tax (“VAT”)

7.1     VAT is only a charge on taxable supply i.e.
supplies of good for tangible property and supply of services for something of
value other than goods, land or money.

7.2     The rates of VAT are as follows:

i)   0% for any goods exported from the Kingdom of
Cambodia and services consumed outside Cambodia

ii)  10% is the standard rate which applies to all
supplies other than exports and non-taxable supplies.

8.      DTAA Singapore – Cambodia (yet to be
ratified):

8.1     On May 20, 2016, an agreement was entered
into between Government of Republic of Singapore and the Royal Government of
Cambodia for prevention of evasion of taxes on income and to avoid any resident
being taxed twice on the income earned. This agreement applies to taxation of a
resident of Cambodia, in respect to taxes on profit including Tax on Salary,
Withholding Tax, Additional Profit Tax on Dividend Distribution and Capital
Gains Tax, while in terms of Singapore applies to the Income Tax.

8.2    Resident (Art. 4)

          Under Article 4 of the DTAA,
“resident” means any person or individual or entity liable to pay tax based on
their domicile, place of incorporation, place of management, principal place of
business or any other activities of similar nature but
also includes State and any local authority or statutory body.

          The article further defines the term
“resident”, by prescribing the following conditions:

a)  only of the state where he has a permanent
home available; or

b)  If there is a permanent home in both the contracting
states, then it is to be determined based on personal and economic relations
are closer i.e. centre of vital interest; or

c)  In the absence of centre of vital interest,
then the place where he has a habitat abode; or

d)  If habitat abode of both the states, then to
be determined based on nationality; or

e)  If otherwise, then the competent authorities
of the contracting states shall settle by agreement mutually.

8.3    Permanent Establishment (Art. 5)

          The term Permanent Establishment “PE”
is defined under Article 5 includes place of management; branch; an office;
factory; workshop; warehouse; mine, an oil or gas well, a quarry or any other
place of extraction of natural resources; and (h) farm or plantation.

          The terms have been further elaborated
by including:

(a) Any activities that last for more than 6 months
in terms of a building site, a construction, assembly or installation project,
or supervisory activities in connection;

(b) Any activities that last for more than 183 days
within any period of twelve months about any furnishing of services, including
consultancy services, by an enterprise of a Contracting State through employees
or other personnel engaged by the enterprise for such purpose, but only if
activities for same or connected project within the other Contracting State;

(c) The carrying on of activities (including the
operation of substantial equipment) for more than 90 days in any twelve months’
period in the other Contracting State for the exploration or for exploitation
of natural resources.

          The Law on Taxation in Cambodia
defines PE under Article 3 (4).

8.4    Immovable Property (Art. 6)

          The term “immovable property”,
shall be defined under the law of the Contracting State in which the property i
is situated. But also, includes property accessory to immovable property,
livestock and equipment used in agriculture and forestry, but not include
ships, boats and aircrafts.

          In addition, any income earned by a
resident from immovable property including agriculture or forestry and applies
to income from the direct use, letting, or use in any other form of immovable
property situated in the other Contracting State may be taxed in that other
State.

          There is no specific provision under
the Law on Taxation for immovable property.

8.6    Dividends (Art. 10)

          The terms as defined under this
agreement means income from shares, mining shares, founders’ shares or other
rights, but does not include debt claims, participating in profits, as well as
income from other corporate rights and be taxed to a resident of other
contracting state. .

          If beneficial owner of the dividend is
a resident of other contracting state, then tax on dividend not to exceed 10%
of the gross amount.

          Under Cambodian law, there is Tax on
Profit and Article 3 (8) defines the term dividends. Recently a new regulation
with respect to dividend distribution from a resident taxpayer in Cambodia to
their non-resident shareholders.

8.7    Capital Gains (Art. 14)

          Any gains derived by the resident of
the Contracting State to be taxable:

a)  Alienation of Immovable property in other
contracting state taxable in other state unless it is related to the Permanent
Establishment of the enterprise situated or any independent personal service to
be taxed in other state.

b)  Alienation of ships or aircrafts or movable
property pertaining to such operation of ships or aircraft shall be taxable in
the state where it is alienated.

c)  Alienation of Shares of more than 50 % of
their value directly or indirectly from immovable property situated in other
state, to be taxable in the other state.

d)  Alienation of any other property other than
above, to be taxable in the contracting state of which the alienator is a
resident.

          Under Cambodian Law on Taxation, no
specific provisions but 0.1 % tax is to be paid on transfer of shares.

8.8    Associated Enterprise (Art. 9)

          The term “associated” means an
enterprise that participates directly or indirectly in the management, control
or capital of other enterprise or a person or individual directly or indirectly
in the management, control or capital of an enterprise of a Contracting State
and an enterprise of the other Contracting State,

          The term associated enterprise has not
been defined but the “related person” under Article 3(10) which includes
families or any enterprise which controls or is controlled or is under the
common ‘control’. The term control means ownership of 51% or more in value or
voting rights. Article 18 of the Law on Taxation (“LoT”) provides, subject to
certain conditions, a wide power to the General Department of Taxation (“GDT”)
in Cambodia to adjust the allocation of income and expenses between related
enterprises. According to the applicable law, two or more enterprises are under
common ownership, if a person owns 20% or more of the equity interests of each
enterprise. In the event, a parent company provides either services, a loan or
any other transaction that will result in remuneration from the owned company,
the GDT will usually verify that the so-called transactions are real.

8.9    Royalties (Art.12)

          The term ‘royalties’ means payments of
any kind received as a consideration for the use of, or the right to use, any
copyright of literary, artistic or scientific work including cinematograph
films, or films or tapes used for radio or television broadcasting, any patent,
trade mark, design or model, plan, secret formula or process, or for the use
of, or the right to use, industrial, commercial, or scientific equipment, or
for information concerning industrial, commercial or scientific experience.

          Any income arising in a Contracting
State, paid to a resident of the other Contracting State may be taxed in that
other State and be taxed in the contracting state as per the local laws, if the
beneficial owner is a resident of the other then the tax not to exceed 10% of
the gross amount.

          Otherwise, if the beneficial owner of
the royalties carries a business through a permanent establishment or has a
fixed place of business in the other contracting state in which the royalties
arise, the same is to be treated as an income earned from the connected PE or
fixed place.

          In case the amount of royalties
exceeds the amount that was agreed by the payer or beneficial owner, the amount
of tax shall not exceed 10 % of the gross amount. Any excess amount is to be
taxed as per the local laws in which the income accrued.

          There is no specific provision about
royalties, but as defined in the Intellectual Property Laws.

9.         DTAA
India – Singapore (1994) 209 ITR 1 (St)

9.1     Immovable properties (Art. 6)

          The term “immovable
property” shall mean the term as defined under the law of the contracting
state and shall also include property accessory to immovable property,
livestock and equipment used in agriculture and forestry, rights to which the provisions
of general law respecting landed property apply usufruct of immovable property
and rights to variable or fixed payments as consideration for the working of,
or the right to work, mineral deposits, sources and other natural resources.
Ships and aircraft shall not be regarded as immovable property. Income from the
direct use of or letting or any other form of use of immovable property is
taxed in the country where the property is located, including real-estate
enterprises.

9.2    Dividends (Art. 10)

          The term “dividends” means
income from shares or other rights not being debt-claims, participating in
profits, as well as income from other corporate rights of which the company
making the distribution is a resident. Any dividends paid to a recipient’s
country of residence from the other country to be taxed in the country
received. The dividend taxed in the source country is as follows:

a)       15% of the gross amount of the dividends
only while the tax rate reduced to 10 % of the gross amount the 25% of the
shares are owned by the recipient’s company.

b)       No dividend tax to be paid by Indian
resident shareholders who derive any profit from the Singapore or Malaysian
resident company in Singapore.

          The dividend income article does not
apply if the company paying is a resident or performs independent personal
services from a fixed base situated in the country and will be treated as
income of the permanent establishment.

Case Laws Referred:

1] Roop Rasyan Industries (P.) Ltd. vs. ACIT [2014] 150
ITD 193 (Mum.) (Trib.).

Dividend was not taxable in Singapore of which company paying
dividend was resident and, therefore, para 2 of article 10 of DTAA was not at
all relevant. Moreover, in terms of Article 10 of DTAA, dividend received by an
Indian company from a Singapore based company was subjected to tax at normal
rate of 30 %.

9.3    Capital gains (Art. 13)

          A resident of one contracting state
from the alienation of immovable property situated in other contracting state
to be taxed in that state. A resident with PE or fixed base in other
contracting state to be taxed for any gains derived from alienation of movable
property. Recently India and Singapore signed the third protocol on December
30, 2016 to amend the DTAA and the amendment is along the lines of India and
Mauritius DTAA that was also recently entered. The Protocol amends the
prevailing residence based tax regime under the Singapore Treaty and gives
India a source based right to tax capital gains which arise from the alienation
of shares of an Indian resident company owned by a Singapore tax resident.

(i) Taxation
of capital gains on shares

Under 2005 Protocol any capital gains derived by a Singapore
resident from alienation of share of Indian resident company to be taxable only
in Singapore after complying with limitation of benefit “LOB” clause. However,
the Protocol marks a shift from residence-based taxation to source-based
taxation. Consequently, capital gains arising on or after April 01, 2017 from
alienation of shares of a company resident in India shall be subject to tax in
India. The change is subject to the following qualifications: –

(a) Grandfathering Clause

Any capital gains arising from sale of shares of an Indian
Company acquired before April 01, 2017 shall not be affected by the Protocol
and would enjoy the treatment available under the Treaty.

(b) Transition
period

The Protocol provides for a relaxation of capital gains
arising to Singapore residents from alienation of shares acquired after April
1, 2017 but alienated before March 31, 2019 (“Transition Period”). The tax rate
on any such gains shall not exceed 50% of the domestic tax rate in India (“Reduced
Tax Rate”).

(c) Limitation of benefits

The Protocol provides that grandfathered investments i.e.
shares acquired on or before 1 April 2017 which are not subject to the
provisions of the Protocol will still be subject to Revised LOB to avail of the
capital gains tax benefit under the Singapore Treaty, which provides that:

   The benefit will not be available if the
affairs of the Singapore resident entity were arranged with the primary purpose
to take advantage of such benefit;

   The benefit will not be available to a shell
or conduit company, being a legal entity with negligible or nil business
operations or with no real and continuous business activities.

Case Laws: 

1] Praful
Chandaria vs. ADDIT [2016] 161 ITD 153 (Mum.) (Trib.)

Capital gain could not be held to be taxable in India in
terms of para 6 of article 13 of India-Singapore DTAA under which taxing right
has been given to resident State, that is, State of alienator, which in this
case was Singapore.

2]  Credit Suisse (Singapore) Ltd. vs. Asstt
DIT. [2012] 53 SOT 306 (Mum.)(Trib.)

Gain earned on cancellation of foreign exchange forward
contracts is a capital receipt and must be treated as capital gains.

The Indian companies/ enterprise can look forward for
investment in emerging sectors like Information Technology & Ecommerce,
Infrastructure, venture capital, health care for supply of medical equipment’s,
tourism, education, technology transfer etc. 

11.    Conclusion

          To encourage India’s Act East Policy,
India and Cambodia signed a Bilateral Investment Treaties (BIT) to promote and
protect investments. In the absence of any such bilateral agreements or DTAA,
by incorporating company in Singapore. Indian entities could make an entry into
ASEAN Market or Cambodia and would be able to obtain the reliefs available
under the DTAA between Singapore – Cambodia DTAA using either of the countries as
a PE. In addition, the Cambodia grants tax holiday up to nine (9) years and
also 100 % exemption on export.

New Safe Harbour Provisions in Indian Transfer Pricing Regime

“Safe Harbour Rules”
were notified by the CBDT in the year 20131, which were applicable
to certain select International Transactions, prominent among them were
transactions relating to software, KPO, R&D, manufacturing of auto
components and intra-group loans and guarantees. These Rules aimed at reducing
litigation in the arena of Transfer Pricing. However, these Rules failed to
attract taxpayers due to prescription of high thresholds. A Committee was set
up to look into various aspects of safe harbor regime and based on its report
new safe harbor rules are notified by the CBDT on 7th June 2017. This
article analyses various provisions, their impact and potential issues that may
arise there from.

1.0   Introduction

Safe Harbour Rules (SHR) were first introduced in India vide CBDT
Notification No. SO 2810 (E) dated 18th September 2013. These Rules were
applicable only to international transactions for the Assessment Year (AY)
2013-14 and four AYs immediately following that, i.e. for and up to AY 2017-18.
A new set of SHR have been introduced with effect from 1st April 2017 which
shall apply with effect from the AY 2017-18 and two AYs immediately thereafter
i.e. for and up to AY 2019-20. Thus, new SHR will be effective for three years
only as oppose to five years in case of erstwhile SHR. These Rules are
discussed in the subsequent paragraphs.

It is provided that where a tax
payer is eligible for both the Rules (i.e. Old and New) (the same is possible
for the AY 2017-18, being an overlapping year), then he has an option to choose
the one which is most beneficial to him.

Explanation to section 92CB
of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (the Act) defines safe harbour to mean
circumstances in which the Income-tax authorities shall accept the transfer
price declared by the assessee.

The United Nation’s Practical Manual on Transfer Pricing for Developing
Nations released in the year 2013 defines “Safe harbour rules as rules whereby
if a taxpayer’s reported profits are below a threshold amount, be it as a
percentage or in absolute terms, a simpler mechanism to establish tax
obligations can be relied upon by a taxpayer as an alternative to a more
complex and burdensome rule, such as applying the transfer pricing
methodologies”.

OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines defines a safe harbour as “a provision
that applies to a defined category of the taxpayers or transactions and that
relieves eligible taxpayers from certain obligations otherwise imposed by a
country’s general transfer pricing rules.”

2.0   New SHR effective from 1st April 2017

A new category of
transactions being “Receipts of Low Value-Adding Intra-Group Services” has been
introduced. The peak rates of safe harbour margins have been reduced in many
categories. In respect of knowledge process outsourcing, (KPO) safe harbour margins
are slashed and divided in to three rates of 18%, 21% and 24% instead of single
rate of 25% in the earlier regime. Moreover, the new rates are linked to
employee cost to operating cost ratio. These and other changes are elaborated
in more detail in the table, which also carries comparison of the old and new provisions.

Comparative
Provisions of the Old and New SHR

 

 

Comparative
Provisions of the Old and New SHR

Sr. No

Eligible
International Transactions

Safe Harbour Margin –

New Provisions

Safe Harbour Margin –
Old Provisions

1

Provision of Software Development Services

[Rule 10TA(m)] read with

[Rule 10TC(i)]

 

Operating Profit Margin (OPM) in relation to Operating
Expenses (OE):

 

For Software Development Services

(i) 17% or more, where the value of international
transaction
does not exceed Rs. 100 crore;

 

(ii) 18% or more, where the value of international
transaction
exceed Rs. 100 crore but does not exceed Rs. 200 crore;

 

For ITES

(i) 17% or more where aggregate value of such
transactions
during the previous year does not exceed Rs. 100
crore; or

 

(ii) 18% or more where aggregate
value of such transactions during the previous year
exceeds Rs. 100 crore
but less than Rs. 200 crore.

 

[As the limit of Rs. 500 crore stands reduced, the
companies with high value transactions will have to per force opt for
unilateral or bilateral Advance Pricing Agreements (APAs) to have certainty
of arm’s length pricing]

Operating Profit Margin (OPM) in relation to Operating
Expenses (OE):

 

(i)         20% or
more where total value of such transactions during the previous year does not
exceed Rs. 500 crore; or

 

(ii)         22% or
more where total value of such transactions during the previous year exceeds
Rs. 500 crore.

 

 

Provision of Information Technology Enabled Services (ITES)

[Rule 10TA(e)]

read with

[Rule 10TC(ii)]

 

Remarks:

(i)   “OPM” in relation to “OE” means the ratio
of operating profit, being the operating revenue in excess of operating
expense, to the operating expense expressed in terms of percentage.

(ii)  Rule 10TA defines “Software Development
Services” as well as ITES. In both cases it is clarified that any research
& development (R&D) services will not be included in the definition
whether or not such R&D services are in the nature of contract R&D
services.

(iii)   It may be noted that for applying the
threshold of Rs. 100 crore or two crore, as the case may be, to the Software
Development Services, one need to consider the value of international
transaction (could be read as “single transaction”); whereas for ITES, one
need to consider the aggregate value of all transactions during the relevant
previous year. Earlier this distinction was not there and for both types of
services, the thresholds were computed by to the aggregate value of all
transactions during the previous year.

2

Provision of Knowledge Process Outsourcing Services (KPO)

[Rule 10TA(g)]

 

Value of the International Transaction should not exceed
Rs. 200 crore and the OPM to OE shall be as follows:

(i) 24% or more if Employee Cost (EC) to Operating Expense
(OE) is at least 60%;

 

(ii) 21% or more if EC to OE is 40% or more but less than
60%;

 

(iii) 18% or more if EC to OE is less than 40%.

 

OPM to OE shall be 25% or more.

Remarks:

(i)    Employee Cost (EC) has been defined in
Rule 10TA by insertion of clause (ca). OE has already been defined in clause
(j) of Rule 10TA.

       (Refer paragraph 3.1 below for further
details)

(ii)   Looking at the nature of highly skilled
employees in KPO industries, taxpayers are likely to fall in the higher
brackets of 21% or 24% as EC is higher for KPO services.

3

Provision of Contract R&D Services wholly or partly
relating to Software Development.

[Rule 10TA (aa)] read with

[Rule 10TC(vi)]

 

Value of the International Transaction should not exceed
Rs. 200 crore and the OPM to OE shall be 24% or more

OPM to OE shall be 30% or more.

Remark:

Though there is a reduction in SHR margin, the
applicability is restricted to small transactions and therefore tax payers
with large amount of transaction will have to opt for APA.

4

Provision of Contract R&D Services wholly or partly
relating to Generic Pharmaceutical Drugs.

[Rule 10TA(d)] read with

[Rule 10TC(vii)]

Value of the International Transaction should not exceed
Rs. 200 crore and the OPM to OE shall be 24% or more

OPM to OE shall be 29% or more.

Remarks:

(i)   Contract R&D services in relation to
Generic Pharmaceutical Drugs (GPD) is not defined. However, GPD is defined to
mean a drug that is comparable to a drug already approved by the regulatory
authority in dosage form, strength, route of administration, quality and
performance characteristics and intended use.

(ii)   Other comment relating to large
transactions as mentioned above at point no. 3 applies here also.

5

Manufacture and Export of Core Auto Components

[Rule 10TA(b)] read with

[Rule 10TC(viii)]

 

No change.

 

OPM to OE shall be 12% or more.

 

OPM to OE shall be 12% or more.

Remark:

Core Auto Components are
defined in Clause (b) of Rule 10TA.

6

Manufacture and Export of Non- Core Auto Components

[Rule 10TA(h)] read with

[Rule 10TC(ix)]

 

No change.

 

OPM to OE shall be 8.5% or more.

 

OPM to OE shall be 8.5% or more.

Remark:

Rule 10TA (h) defines non-core auto components as the ones
which are other than core auto components.

7

Advancing of intra-group loans in Indian Rupees

 

[Rule 10TA(f)] read with

[Rule 10TC (iv)]

 

Interest rate should not be less than the one-year marginal
cost of funds lending rate of SBI as on the 1st April of the relevant
previous year plus:

 

* 175 BPS where CRISIL rating of Associated Enterprise (AE)
is between AAA to A or its equivalent;

 

* 325 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is BBB-, BBB or BBB+ or
its equivalent;

 

* 475 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is between BB to B or
its equivalent;

 

* 625 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is between C to D or
its equivalent;

 

* 425 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is not available and
the amount of loan advanced to the AE including loans to all AEs does not
exceed Rs.100 crore as on 31st March of the relevant previous year (PY);

Interest rate should not be less than the base rate of SBI
as on 30th June of the relevant previous year plus 150 basis points (BPS)
where the loan amount is less than or equal to Rs. 50 crore and

 

300 BPS where the loan amount is exceeding Rs. 50 crore

 

Remarks:

(i)    Intra-group loan is defined in clause (f)
of the Rule 10TA. It covers loans advanced to Wholly Owned Subsidiary (WOS)
in Indian rupees. Banking and Financial Institutions are excluded.

(ii)   In Rule 10TA (f) ironically, the definition
of Intra-group loan is not amended which refers to only WOS whereas, the SHR
makes a reference of AE.

(iii)  It is good that the rate of interest is to
be determined based on the credit rating of the borrower. However, provision
of obtaining CRISIL rating for all borrowers may put them in undue hardships.

8

Advancing of intra-group loans in Foreign Currency (FC)

 

[Rule 10TA(f)] read with

[Rule 10TC (iv)]

 

Interest rate is not less than 6 months LIBOR of the relevant foreign
currency as on 30th September of the relevant PY plus:

* 150 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is
between AAA to A or its equivalent;

* 300 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is
BBB-, BBB or BBB+ or its equivalent;

* 450 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is
between BB to B or its equivalent;

* 600 BPS where CRISIL rating of AE is
between C to D or its equivalent;

* 400 BPS
where CRISIL rating of AE is not available and the amount of loan advanced to
the AE including loans to all AEs does not exceed Rs. 100 crore as on 31st
March of the relevant previous year (PY);

No such distinction between intra-group loans in INR or FC.

 

The rates prescribed above were applicable for all types of
intra-group loans.

 

Remarks:

(i)   
The determination of lending rate based on the currency of a loan is a
best international practice. However, the tenure of the loan and other terms
are not considered in determining the rate of interest.

(ii)   Requirement to obtain CRISIL rating for
all borrowers may put them into undue hardships.

9

Providing corporate guarantee

 

[Rule 10TA (c)] read with

[Rule 10TC (v) (a) (b)]

 

Guarantee commission or the fee charged should be minimum
1% per annum on the amount guaranteed.

Guarantee commission or the
fee charged should be minimum

(i) 2% per annum of the amount
guaranteed where the amount guaranteed does not exceed Rs. 100 crore.

(ii) 1.75% per annum where the amount guaranteed exceeds
Rs. 100 crore.

Remarks:

(i)    The reduction of guarantee commission up
to 1% is a welcome change.

(ii)    However, in number of decisions2  Tribunals have upheld 0.5% as the arm’s
length guarantee commission.

(iii)  Corporate Guarantee is defined to mean
explicit corporate guarantee extended by a company to its WOS being a
non-resident in respect of any short-term or long term borrowing.

(iv)  Unlike SHR for intra-group loans, which are
now extended to AEs and not just WOS, corporate guarantee continues to apply
only in respect of WOS.

10

Receipt of Low value-adding intra-group services

[Rule 10TA (ga)] read with

[Rule 10TC (x)]

The entire value of the
International Transaction, including a mark-up not exceeding 5%, should be
less than or equal to Rs. 10 crore.

Not There.

Remarks:

(i)   
A new Clause (ga) is inserted in Rule 10TA to define the meaning of
“Low Value-Adding Intra-group Services”. (Refer paragraph 3.4 below for
further details)

(ii)  
It is also provided that SHR provisions would apply only if the method
of cost pooling, the exclusion of Shareholder costs and duplicate costs from
the cost pool and the reasonableness of the allocation keys used for
allocation of costs to the assessee by the overseas AE, is certified by an
accountant. A new clause (a) has been added to Rule 10TA to define the
meaning of “accountant”.

3.0        Other
Important Changes in the new regime

       3.1 Employee Cost in relation to KPO
Services

       Employee
cost has been defined in the newly inserted clause (ca) of Rule 10TA which
besides normal employee expenses also includes expenses incurred on contractual
employment of person performing tasks similar to those performed by the regular
employees. Outsourcing expenses, to the extent of employee cost, wherever
ascertainable, which are embedded in the total outsourcing expenses should also
be considered as a part of the total employee cost. Wherever, the extent of
employee costs is not so ascertainable, they will be deemed to be 80 per cent
of the total outsourcing expenses.

       3.2 The
definition of Operating Expenses in clause (j) of Rule 10TA is amended to
include costs relating to Employee Stock Option Plan (ESOP) or similar
stock-based compensation provided by the AE of the assessee to the employees of
the assessee.

       3.3 Reimbursement of expenses to the AE
shall be considered at cost.

       3.4 Low Value-Adding Intra-group Services

       A new
service, namely, Low Value-Adding Intra-Group Services (LVA-IGS) has included
in the SHR. It is defined in the clause (ga) of Rule 10TA. The salient features
of this definition are as follows:

       LVA-IGS refers to services which are:

(i)    in the nature of support services;

(ii)    not part of the core business of the
multinational enterprise group;

(iii)   are not in the nature of shareholder services
or duplicate services;

(iv)   do not require use of unique intangibles nor
lead to creation of unique and valuable intangibles;

(v)   do not involve assumption or control of
significant risk by the service provider nor give rise to creation of
significant risk for the service provider; and

(vi)   do not
have reliable external comparable services that can be used for determining
their arm’s length price.

       However, it is specifically provided
LVA-IGS does not include the following services:

(i)    research and development services; (ii)
manufacturing and production services; (iii) information technology (software
development) services; (iv) knowledge process outsourcing services; (v)
business process outsourcing services; (vi) purchasing activities of raw
materials or other materials that are used in the manufacturing or production
process; (vii) sales, marketing and distribution activities; (viii) financial
transactions; (ix) extraction, exploration, or processing of natural resources;
and (x) insurance and reinsurance;”

       The
definition of LVA-IGS as mentioned above is by and large in sync with the
definition at the paragraphs 7.46. 7.47 and 7.48 of the Base Erosion and Profit
Shifting (BEPS) Action Plan 10 promulgated by the OECD. However, BPO/KPO
services and purchase activities of raw materials or other materials that are
used in the manufacturing or production process are excluded from the
definition of the Indian SHR pertaining to LVA-IGS, which is not so in case of
BEPS Action Plan. It may be noted that BEPS Action Plan excludes “Services of
corporate senior management” from the definition of LVA-IGS, which is not so in
case of Indian regulations.

4.0   SHR on Domestic Transactions

       In
2015, SHR 10TH to 10THD were introduced covering to following domestic
transactions:

_______________________________________________________________________________________________

In Bharti
Airtel Ltd (ITA No 5816/Del/201Z) dated 11 March 2014; Reliance Industries Ltd
(I.T.A. No. 4475/Mum/2007) and Four Soft Ltd. vs. DCIT [(Hyd. ITAT) – 62 DTR
308] respective honorable Tribunals upheld non-charging of guarantee
commission/fees.

 

S. No.

Eligible specified domestic Transaction

Circumstances

1.

Supply of electricity, transmission of electricity,
wheeling of electricity referred to in item (i), (ii) or (iii) of rule 10THB,
as the case may be.

The tariff in respect of supply of electricity,
transmission of electricity, wheeling of electricity, as the case may be, is
determined by the Appropriate Commission in accordance with the provisions of
the Electricity Act, 2003 (36 of 2003).

2.

Purchase of milk or milk products referred to in clause
(iv) of rule 10THB. [i.e. Purchase of milk or milk products by a co-operative
society from its members]

The price of milk or milk products is determined at a rate
which is fixed on the basis of the quality of milk, namely, fat content and
Solid Not FAT (SNF) content of milk; and—

(a) the said rate is irrespective of,—

(i)    the quantity of milk procured;

(ii)   the percentage of shares held by the
members in the co-operative society;

(iii)   the voting power held by the members in the
society; and

(b) such prices are routinely
declared by the co-operative society in a transparent manner and are
available in public domain.

 

Rule 10THC further
provides that no comparability adjustment and allowance under the second
proviso to sub-section (2) of section 92C shall be made to the transfer price
declared by the eligible assessee and accepted under sub-rule (1) and the
provisions of sections 92D (relating to Maintenance and keeping of information
and documents) and 92E (submission of Audit Report) in respect of a specified
domestic transaction shall apply irrespective of the fact that the assessee
exercises his option for safe harbour in respect of such transaction.

5.0   Summation/Way
Forward

       The
erstwhile SHR did not attract many taxpayers due to high rates. Lowering of
rates in some cases would definitely induce more taxpayers to opt for the same
and avoid litigation.

     The significant changes in intra-group
loans will attract many taxpayers. Inclusion of LVA-IGS is a welcome step and
in line with global trends. The acceptable threshold for the Corporate
Guarantee could have further been lowered. Manufacturers and exporters of core
and non-core auto components may continue to avoid SHR due to prescription of
high margins.

All
in all, it is a positive move on the part of Government in the direction of
reduction in litigation, though reduction in the value of the eligible
international transactions will push away many taxpayers out of the ambit of
Safe Harbour Regulations.

Section 92CE and Section 94B – Analysis and Some Issues

This article deals with some of the issues which warrant
attention with respect to section 92CE and section 94B of the Income-tax Act
1961, (Act) as introduced by the Finance Act 2017. 

                                                        
                               

Section 92CE – Secondary adjustment in certain cases

1.      As per the memorandum explaining the
provisions of the Finance Bill 2017, the provision has been introduced to align
transfer pricing provisions with the OECD transfer pricing guidelines and the
international best practices. The said memorandum explains that “Secondary
adjustment” means an adjustment in the books of accounts of the assessee
and its associated enterprise to reflect that the actual allocation of profits between
the assessee and its associated enterprise are consistent with the transfer
price determined as a result of primary adjustment, thereby removing the
imbalance between cash account and actual profit of the assessee. The OECD
recognises that secondary adjustment may take the form of constructive
dividends, constructive equity contributions, or constructive loans. India has
opted for form of secondary adjustment i.e. constructive advance.

2.1.   The section provides that the assessee shall
make a secondary adjustment in certain cases only i.e. where the primary
adjustment to transfer price,

a)  has been made suo motu by the assessee
in his return of income; or

b)  has been made by the Assessing Officer (AO)
and accepted by the assessee; or

c)  is determined by an advance pricing agreement
entered into by the assessee u/s. 92CC; or

d)  has been made as per the safe harbour rules
framed u/s. 92CB; or

e)  is arising as a result of resolution of an
assessment by way of the mutual agreement procedure under an agreement entered
into u/s. 90 or 90A.

2.2.    The provisions will apply only if the
primary adjustment exceeds INR one crore and the excess money attributable to
the adjustment is not brought to India within the prescribed time. From the
above, it is clear that the provision will have a limited applicability and
hence there is no need for the panic. In fact, it will be interesting if the
Government publishes the data that in the last decade of transfer pricing
scrutiny, how many cases were covered by aforesaid clauses.

2.3.    As regards clause (b), once the primary
adjustment made by the AO is contested by the assessee in appeal, he will not
be covered by the same even if the appellate authority upheld the adjustment
made by the AO and assessee accepts the said addition.

2.4.    The taxpayer invoking the MAP to resolve the
transfer pricing dispute needs to be mindful of this provision. In fact, there
is a possibility that the taxpayer may be discouraged to resolve the transfer
pricing dispute through MAP because of this provision.

3        The assessee is not required to make any
secondary adjustment in respect of any primary adjustments made in the
assessment year 2016-17 or any of the earlier years. In other words, the
assessee shall make secondary adjustment only in respect of primary adjustment
made in the assessment year 2017-18 and subsequent years. The provision is
applicable in relation to the assessment year 2018-19 and subsequent years.
Thusfore, the assessee is expected to make a secondary adjustment from   AY 18-19 in respect of primary adjustments
made in AY 17-18 or subsequent years.

4        Section 92CE(3) (iv) provides that
“primary adjustment” to a transfer price means the determination of transfer
price in accordance with the arm’s length principle, resulting in an increase
in the total income or reduction in the loss, as the case may be of the
assessee. The wordings of the definition are not clear and do not seem to
reflect legislative intent.

          In my view, primary adjustment is the
increase in the income or reduction in the loss of the assessee as a result of
the computation of income u/s. 92C(4) r.w.s 92. i.e. if the taxpayer has
imported the goods worth INR 100 from its AE and if the AO computes the ALP of
such import at INR 95, he will increase the income of the taxpayer by INR 5 and
the same would be regarded as the primary adjustment. If the case of the
taxpayer falls in any of the cases listed in paragraph 2.1 above, he is
required to make a secondary adjustment.

5.1     What
secondary adjustment is envisaged? and when should the assessee make the
secondary adjustment? In the above case, the assessee has already made payment
of INR 100 towards the import to the AE and the AE is sitting with the fund
representing the primary adjustment i.e INR 5 .The assessee is required to
debit the account of the AE and credit the profit and loss account (P&L
A/C) with the amount of the primary adjustment. If the amount representing the
debit balance in the account of the AE is repatriated to India within the
stipulated time, no further consequence arises. However, if the amount is not
repatriated to India, the said debit balance in the account of the AE would be
deemed to be an advance made by the assessee to the AE and the interest on such
advance is required to be computed in a prescribed manner.

5.2     The timing of the secondary adjustment in
the books would possibly vary from case to case and would depend on the exact
clause of section 92CE(1) under which the primary adjustment is made. If the
primary adjustment is made suo motu by the assessee in his return of
income, the same should be done in the same year. However, if the assessee is a
company and its accounts are closed, it will have to comply with provisions of
the Companies Act and make the adjustment in the books in accordance with the
Companies Act. 

6        Further issues that may arise in this
regard are:

6.1     Whether the credit to P&L A/C would
form part of book profit for the purpose of section 115JB? Considering the
provision of section 115JB and 92CE, it appears that the said credit would form
part of the book profit.

6.2     Whether the section envisages a
identification of the AE which can be correlated to the primary adjustment and
rule out the mandate to carry out secondary adjustment in other cases?

          In practice, an assessee enters into
various transactions with different AEs and the TPO makes an overall adjustment
following TNM method without identifying the exact transaction or the AE. In
such cases, a question will arise as to which AE’s account is to be debited for
secondary adjustment. Should the adjustment be prorated to various AEs? If the
primary adjustment cannot be identified with an AE, a view may be taken that
the obligation to carry out secondary adjustment does not arise.

6.3   Whether the debiting the account of the AE
with the primary adjustment be regarded as constructive payment? If yes, it may
further require examining the applicability of the provisions of section
2(22)(e) especially when the AE holds more than the threshold level of shares in
the Indian company.

          It must be noted that the deeming
fiction are to be strictly construed and should be confined to the purpose for
which they are enacted. Hence, the primary adjustment which is deemed to be an
advance made by the assessee to its AE should be confined to that only and
should not be extended to any other provision.

6.4     The section requires adjustment in the
books of account of the AE also. Whether the same is warranted, whether the
same is in the control of the assessee and what if it is not carried out in the
books of the AE? If the adjustment is not carried out in the books of the AE,
then the assessee has not carried out the secondary adjustment as envisaged
u/s. 92CE(1) and further consequences in accordance with law should follow.

6.5     The section provides that the assessee
shall make the secondary adjustment, i.e. the assessee is under an obligation
to carry out secondary adjustment. What if the assessee does not make such
adjustment? Whether the existing provisions under the Act are enough to empower
the revenue authorities to make such adjustment when the assessee does not make
such adjustment?

        Currently, there is no separate penal
provision for non-compliance with section 92CE. However, one needs to examine
whether there is an under reporting or misreporting of the income within the
meaning of section 270A when the assessee does not carry out the secondary
adjustment when it is under an obligation to carry out the same.

7    Recently, revenue has made primary
adjustment in the case of nonresident associated enterprises (AE) and such
adjustment has been upheld by the Tribunal i.e. the non-resident should have
earned more royalty from the Indian resident assessee. The newly inserted
section 92CE requires the assessee to repatriate the excess money attributable
to primary adjustment to India. Thus, obviously there cannot be any secondary
adjustment when the primary adjustment is made in the case of foreign AE, since
there cannot be any question of repatriation to India in such cases. In fact,
logically it may require the Indian resident to remit the amount to the non
resident AE representing primary adjustment. This becomes an additional
argument to advance the case of the assessee that primary adjustment cannot be
made in the case of foreign AE.

8       The language of the section needs
attention of the draftsmen so as to bring home the intent and also to provide
clarity and certainty. The following may be noted in this respect:

8.1     In addition to the other terms, the section
defines the term “primary adjustment” and “secondary adjustment”. It may be
noted that sub-section (1) provides that the assessee shall make a secondary
adjustment where there is a primary adjustment to transfer price in certain
cases. However, neither the term “transfer price” nor the term “primary
adjustment to transfer price” is defined either in the section or in the
relevant chapter.

8.2     There is no link between sub-section (1)
and sub-section (2) of the section and hence there is an apprehension that the
deeming fiction of treating the amount representing the primary adjustment as
advance and further consequence as provided in sub-section (2) is applicable to
all cases and not confined to those covered by sub-section(1). However, If
sub-section (2) is interpreted in this manner, then consequence of sub-section
(1) would stop at passing the entry in the books of the assessee. The debit
balance in the books need not be repatriated and would be treated in accordance
with the other provisions. The above does not seem to be the intention. The
intention of the legislature is achieved only when both sub sections are read
together. However, this anomaly in the drafting needs to be corrected.

Section 94B – Limitation on Interest deduction in certain
cases

9        The provision has been introduced to
address the issue of thin capitalisation. The memorandum explaining the
provisions of the Finance Bill 2017 states “A company is typically financed or
capitalised through a mixture of debt and equity. The way a company is
capitalised often has a significant impact on the amount of profit it reports
for tax purposes as the tax legislations of countries typically allow a
deduction for interest paid or payable in arriving at the profit for tax
purposes while the dividend paid on equity contribution is not deductible.
Therefore, the higher the level of debt in a company, and thus the amount of
interest it pays, the lower will be its taxable profit. For this reason, debt
is often a more tax-efficient method of finance than equity. Multinational
groups are often able to structure their financing arrangements to maximise
these benefits. For this reason, the country’s tax administrations often
introduce rules that place a limit on the amount of interest that can be
deducted in computing a company’s profit for tax purposes. Such rules are
designed to counter cross-border shifting of profit through excessive interest
payments, and thus aim to protect a country’s tax base……….”

        In view of the above, it is proposed
to insert a new section 94B, in line with the recommendations of OECD BEPS
Action Plan 4, to provide that interest expenses claimed by an entity to its
associated enterprises shall be restricted to 30% of its earnings before
interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA) or interest paid or
payable to associated enterprise, whichever is less.

10.1   It provides that the deduction towards interest
incurred by an Indian company or permanent establishment of a foreign
company (specified entity or borrower) in respect of any debt issued by its non-resident
AE (specified lender) will be restricted while computing its income under the
head “profits and gains of business and profession”. The deduction will be
restricted to 30% of earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and
amortisation (EBITDA) or the actual interest whichever is less.

10.2   The restriction will be applicable only if
the borrower incurs expenditure by way of interest or of similar nature
which exceeds INR one crore in respect of debt issued by the specified lender.
In other words, when such payment is less than INR one crore, the claim for
interest will not be restricted to 30% of EBIDTA. i.e If the EBIDTA is one
crore and such payment is 40 lakh, the claim for interest will not be
restricted under this section. The restriction is also not applicable to
borrower which is engaged in the business of banking or insurance.

10.3   At times, the restriction will apply even if
the debt is issued by a third party which is not an AE. This will be the case
when the AE (resident or non-resident) provides an express or implicit
guarantee in respect of the debt or it places deposit matching with loan fund
with the third party. In such a case debt which is issued by a third party shall
be deemed to have been issued by an AE.

11    The amount so disallowed will be carried
forward and will be eligible for deduction for the next eight assessment years.
However, the deduction for the carried forward amount will be allowed in the
same manner subject to the same upper limit.

12.1   The provision is applicable only when the
expenditure towards “interest or of similar nature” exceeds INR one
crore. The term interest is defined u/s. 2(28A) of the Act. However, a question
may arise as to what can be included within the term “of similar nature”? It
may be noted that the term “debt” has been defined and one can draw on this
definition so as to understand what other nature of payments are likely to be
covered by the term “of similar nature.”

12.2   Section 94B(5)(ii) states that “debt” means
any loan, financial instrument, finance lease, financial derivative, or any
arrangement that gives rise to interest, discounts or other finance charges
that are deductible in the computation of income chargeable under the head
“Profits and gains of business or profession.”

12.3   It needs to be noted that the restriction
towards deduction is applicable to only “interest” expenditure, though for the
purpose of applying threshold limit of INR one crore, one needs to take into
account expenditure of similar nature together with interest.

13      The section provides for the cases when
the debt will be deemed to be issued by the AE. One such case is when there is
an implicit guarantee provided by the AE to the third party lender.
This provision has the potential to create litigation and hence there needs to
be a very clear guidance as to what are the circumstances that could be
regarded as provision of implicit guarantee.

14.1   Whether a special provision dealing with
interest in section 94B excludes applicability of section 92 to such interest
payment? It does not seem to be so. Thus, there can be situations when there is
interplay of both the sections. i.e EBIDTA of the Indian company is INR 20
crore and the interest payment to AE is INR 10 crore. Such interest is paid
@10%. Arm’s length interest rate determined u/s. 92 is 6.5%. This would lead to
an adjustment of INR 3.5 crore u/s. 92. Section 94B would restrict the
deduction of interest to 30% EBIDTA i.e 6 crore. Thus, the income of the Indian
company would be increased by INR 7.5crore.(3.5 crore u/s. 92 and 4 crore u/s.
94B). This leads to an absurd result and does not seem to be intention of the
law.

14.2   In my view, the base for disallowance u/s.
94B should be substituted after giving effect to the adjustment u/s. 92 i.e to
6.5 crore from 10 crore. This will have the effect of restricting the
disallowance u/s. 94B to 50 lakh resulting into an aggregate adjustment of only
4 Crore. Thus, any increase or decrease in the adjustment u/s. 92 will have
consequential impact on the limitation u/s. 94B. The interplay needs to be
clarified by CBDT with examples. 

15      In the above example, section 92CE
requires the assessee to make a secondary adjustment of 3.5 crore in respect of
the primary adjustment made u/s. 92. The Indian company is required to charge
interest on the said deemed advance. Thus, there will be a debit to the
interest account and credit to the interest account in respect of the same
lender in subsequent years. Can such debit and credit be net off while applying
provisions in subsequent years? This question will not arise if the assessee
maintains only one account of the AE in its books and passes the debit entry
for the deemed advance in the same account.

16      The deduction towards interest is
restricted only when the lender is non-resident. In other words, if the lender
is a resident AE, the restriction will not apply. Would it meet the provision
of non-discrimination article in a treaty when the non-resident is a resident
of a treaty country?

          Relevant extract of Article 24(4) of
the OECD and UN model convention (both are identical) is reproduced hereunder
for ready reference:

24(4)
Except where the provisions of paragraph 1 of Article 9, paragraph 6 of Article
11 or paragraph 4 of Article 12, apply, interest, royalties and other
disbursements paid by an enterprise of a Contracting State to a resident of the
other Contracting State shall, for the purpose of determining the taxable
profits of such enterprise, be deductible under the same conditions as if they
had been paid to a resident of the first-mentioned State…..

From the above text, it is clear that the model
article 24(4) prohibits such discrimination when the deduction is restricted
only to non-residents. However, the article provides exceptions when such
nondiscrimination is permitted. Section 94B possibly may fall into such
exception if it excludes application of section 92 when 94B is applied.

HOME OFFICE AS PE

Background

Permanent Establishment (PE) confers taxation right
to host country to tax business profits. Once PE is constituted, business
profits are taxable at rate applicable to non-resident. Most common is the
creation of fixed place PE, Agency PE, Service PE, rules of which are designed
to cater to different forms of business. Increasingly, transactions entered
into by non-residents are scrutinised from PE perspective. Often, a foreign
enterprise appoints employees/agents in India to conduct its business. Such employees
use their home as office to work for foreign enterprise. Recently, the Chennai
Tribunal in case of Carpi Tech SA (TS-587-ITAT-ITAT-2016) held that residence
cum office of Indian director creates permanent establishment in India for
activities carried out in India for short period of time. This article proposes
to analyse some of the nuances of the decision.

Facts of the case:

–  The Taxpayer, a company resident in
Switzerland, undertook Geo Membrane waterproofing project for NHPC in India
(the NHPC project). The NHPC project lasted for less than 40 days.

–  Mr. V. Subramanian (Mr. V) is one of the
directors of the Taxpayer since its incorporation. He was designated as project
representative and/or project coordinator of the Taxpayer in India. He held a
Power of Attorney to undertake all activities on behalf of the Taxpayer.

   I Co was engaged in the same business as the
Taxpayer. Further, I Co was also given a Power of Attorney to represent the
Taxpayer in its projects in India. Additionally, Mr. V is the Managing Director
of I Co.

–    Mr. V’s residential address is also used as
office address of I Co. Further, the same address is also used as communication
address by the Taxpayer in India for all its official purposes.

   The Taxpayer was of the view that in the
absence of a PE under the India – Swiss DTAA (‘DTAA’), its income from NHPC
project was not taxable in India. Hence, it disclosed NIL income in its tax
return for the tax year under consideration.

The Tax Authority, based on the directions received
by the Dispute Resolution Panel (DRP) in India, held that the Taxpayer created
a PE in India in terms of Article 5 of the DTAA as below:

  Fixed place PE at the residential-cum-office
address of Mr. V/ I Co

Agency PE due to functions performed by Mr. V
/ I Co on behalf of the Taxpayer

The Taxpayer filed an appeal before the Chennai
Tribunal against the DRP order.

Issue before the Tribunal

Whether income of the Taxpayer from the NHPC
project was taxable in India under provisions of the DTAA?

Key arguments of the Taxpayer

–   Duration of the NHPC project was very short
(40 days). Such duration also does not meet six months threshold to create a PE
in India. Taxpayer’s earlier projects in India were undertaken three years back
and such previous projects may not be relevant for examining PE in the current
tax year.

  Type of activities undertaken in India by Mr.
V on behalf of the Taxpayer (i.e. design, manufacture, supply and installation
of exposed PVC Geo composite Membrane) fell under installation PE provisions of
the DTAA. However, the threshold of six months is not fulfilled to create a PE.

–    Mr. V’s residential-cum-office address is
merely a mailing address. Mere existence of books of account and bank account
at Mr. V’s residence-cum-office cannot either conclusively or inferentially
point to emergence of a fixed PE.

   Mr. V is an independent
agent of the Taxpayer. He is representing other unrelated companies also in
India in the ordinary course of his business and is not exclusively working for
the Taxpayer. The POA provided to Mr. V was a specific one and it did not
provide any continuous or general authority to Mr. V to act on behalf of the
Taxpayer. Hence, it does not create an Agency PE also.

Tribunal’s ruling

Fixed
PE

   Residence-cum-office premises of Mr. V
created a fixed PE of the Taxpayer, due to the following reasons:

    Business of the Taxpayer is conducted from
the address of Mr. V.

   All correspondences related to participation
in bids, correspondence with customers, signing of contracts, execution of the
project and closure of the project etc. were initiated or routed through
the same address.

   Authority of Advance Rulings (AAR) in the
case of Sutron Corporation (268 ITR 156) supports that residence of country manager
can create a fixed PE if the same was used as an office address by taxpayer.

   Once Fixed PE test is satisfied, there is no
need to evaluate Construction PE clause under the special inclusion list.

   In any case, services rendered by the
Taxpayer were more in the nature of repair and supply of material rather than
building site, construction, installation or assembly project to fall under the
Construction PE provisions. Hence, the 182 days threshold of Construction PE
was not relevant.

   I Co also created a PE of the Taxpayer for
the following reasons:

    Activities of I Co and the Taxpayer are
interlinked such that the role played by the director as an agent of the
Taxpayer and I Co (which rendered similar services) cannot be easily separated.
Further, I Co participates in the economic activities of the Taxpayer.

    I Co and the Taxpayer were carrying out
identical nature of work in India. Their names and letter heads were also
similar.

    I Co was the face of the Taxpayer in India.
I Co held POA and was the authorised representative of the Taxpayer for the
NHPC project.

    I Co incurred all expenses in India to
execute the NHPC project which were later reimbursed by the Taxpayer. I Co
appointed vendors to render services locally and made payments to them.

Agency PE

   Mr. V was held to be acting as a dependent
agent of Taxpayer, based on the following:

    Mr. V was holding a POA on behalf of the
Taxpayer and was also the project coordinator/representative for NHPC project.

    The Taxpayer was relying on the skills and
knowledge of Mr. V. His role was critical to all the aspect of the contract
through the stage of signing to its execution.

    Mentioning Mr. V’s address on the website as
well as letterheads of the Taxpayer were indicating the fact that Mr. V was the
face of the Taxpayer in India and was representing the Taxpayer in all
practical matters.

    No evidence was provided to prove that Mr. V
was an independent agent. On the other hand, he was acting exclusively or
almost exclusively for the Taxpayer. Hence, to that an extent, the same is not
in furtherance of his ordinary course of business.

–      The role of Mr. V for the Taxpayer and I Co
was such that it cannot be separated. There existed a unison of interest to a
great extent, while as an independent agent there would be required an
objectivity in execution of the tasks of the non-resident company.

–      Activities performed by I Co and Mr. V cannot
be said to be of preparatory or auxiliary character to qualify for PE
exclusion.

   I Co represented by Mr. V or Mr. V himself
created a PE of the Taxpayer in India.

Analysis of The Tribunal decision:

In summary, the Tribunal held that Mr V. as also I Co
constituted PE in India based on following reasoning:

   Residence-cum-office premises of Mr. V
created a fixed PE of the Taxpayer on account of its usage for business purpose
of Taxpayer.

   Fixed place PE can be constituted even if its
activities in India are for 40 days.

  Once fixed place PE is constituted there is
no need to analyse Construction PE. In any case, repair and supply of material
does not fit within Construction PE.

   I Co created PE of Taxpayer on account of
similarity of activities, identical nature of work and reimbursement of all
expenditure incurred in India by I Co.

   Mr V. created agency PE as it held POA on
behalf of Taxpayer; Taxpayer relied upon the skills of Mr V; Mr V worked
exclusively or almost exclusively for Taxpayer.

Aforesaid aspects have
been analysed in the ensuing paragraphs-

Place of disposal test:

   Indian jurisprudence as also OECD Commentary
has considered satisfaction of disposal test as pre-requisite for constitution
of fixed place PE. Disposal test postulates that foreign enterprise has right
or control over premises which constitutes fixed place PE. In this case,
Tribunal has not specifically provided any positive observation on satisfaction
of disposal test. Perhaps Tribunal has presumed satisfaction of disposal test
given the dependence of Taxpayer on Mr V. and use of premises of Mr V for official
purpose/communication.

–    OECD’s revised proposal concerning the
interpretation & application of Article 5 (Permanent Establishment) of the
OECD Model Tax Convention (2011) stated that home office can constitute PE in
limited situations. OECD revised proposal stated that home office of employee
should not lead to an automatic conclusion of PE and would be dependent on
facts of each case. It is further stated that where a home office is used on a
regular and continuous basis for carrying on business activities for an
enterprise and it is clear from the facts and circumstances that the enterprise
has required the individual to use that location to carry on the enterprise’s
business (e.g. by not providing an office to an employee in circumstances where
the nature of the employment clearly requires an office), the home office may
be considered to be at the disposal of the enterprise.

   Incidentally, disposal test is also not dealt
with by AAR in Sutron Corporation (supra) which is relied upon by
Tribunal.

Duration
Test:

–     A fixed place PE can exists only if place of
business has certain degree of permanence. There is no standard time threshold
provided by treaty and thus duration test involves subjectivity. Much depends
upon individual facts and nature of operations of Taxpayer.

   Conventionally, it is understood that six
months’ time period should be satisfied for constitution of PE. However, there
are special situations where nature of a business of a foreign enterprise
requires it to be carried on only for a short period of time, then in such
cases a shorter period will suffice duration test.

   The Tribunal relied upon decision of Fugro (supra)
wherein PE was constituted for 91 days of work carried on in India. As against
that there are other precedents which has held that no PE is constituted in
India in following situations:

    a foreign enterprise in State S for 27 days
for one project and 68 days for another project [ABC, In re (1999) 237
ITR 798 (AAR)]

    a vessel in India for 2.5 months [DCIT
vs. Subsea Offshore Ltd, (1998) 66 ITD 296 (Mum) ]
or a sailing ship
crossing over to Indian waters for 10 days [Essar Oil Ltd vs. DCIT, (2006)
102 TTJ 614 (Mum)
]

    A foreign enterprise engaged in dredging and
which had its project office in India for 153 days [Van Oord Atlanta B. V.
vs. ADIT, (2007) 112 TTJ 229 (Kol)
]

  The performance of work under an agreement
had been accomplished by the occasional visits of the applicant’s personnel for
site visits and meetings. The nature of service was such that most of the
services were rendered outside India. The aggregate period spent in India by
the personnel was 24 days in the first year and 70 days in the next year. Two
or three employees of the applicant stayed in India for about a month [Worley
Parsons Services Pty. Ltd, In re (2009) 312 ITR 317 (AAR)]

    The assessee was engaged in the business of
telecasting cricket events. Its employees and representatives (TV crew,
programmer and engineers, other technical personnel, etc.) cumulatively stayed
in India for less than 90 days [Nimbus Sport International Pte. Ltd. vs.
DDIT, (2012) 145 TTJ 186 (Del)]

    The assessee was engaged in the activity of
supervision of plant and machinery for steel and allied plants in India. For
one project, it deputed foreign technicians to India who stayed in India for
220 days [GFA Anlagenbau Gmbh vs. DDIT, TS-383-ITAT-2014-HYD]

Interplay between fixed place PE and Construction
PE

   The Tribunal held that once fixed place PE is
constituted there is no need to analyse Construction PE. In other words, the
Tribunal held that fixed place PE overrides Construction PE.

   Aforesaid observations are not in sync with
following illustrative decisions of the Tribunal and AAR which has held that
Article 5(3) overrides article 5(1). In other words, there cannot be fixed
place PE unless time threshold specified under Construction PE is satisfied.

    GIL Mauritius Holdings Ltd. vs. ACIT
(2012) 143 TTJ 103 (Del)

    ADIT vs. Valentine Maritime (Mauritius)
Ltd. (2010) 3 taxmann.com 92 (Mum)

    Sumitomo Corporation vs. DCIT (2007) 110
TTJ 302 (Del)

    DCIT vs. Hyundai Heavy Industries Ltd.
(2010) 128 TTJ 4 (Del)

   The Tribunal additionally held that repair
and supply of material does not fall within the purview of installation,
construction or assembly project. As against that OECD and UN Commentary on
Article 5 at para 17 observed that renovation involving more than maintenance
or redecoration would fall within Construction PE.

Agency PE

  The Tribunal held that Taxpayer had Agency PE
in India on account of factors like Taxpayer reliance on Mr V’ skills, granting
of POA to Mr V and exclusive service to Taxpayer.

   Mr V was dependent on the Taxpayer and he was
taxpayer’s Indian representative.

   Whilst the aforesaid may be sufficient for
creation of dependent agent but for creation of dependent agent PE following
additional condition needs to be satisfied:

              agent has and habitually
exercises in that State, an
authority to negotiate and enter into
contracts for or on behalf of the enterprise.

   The Tribunal has not dealt explicitly with
satisfaction of aforesaid conditions of authority to enter contracts by Mr V or
by ICo.

Conclusion

Decision of the Tribunal is likely to create
litigation for foreign enterprise which has a minuscule presence in India and
is dependent upon Indian agent/employee for Indian business. The Tribunal has
considered overall presence of Taxpayer in India as also surrounding circumstances
like commonality of directors; active role paid by Mr V; holding of POA;
exclusive nature of arrangement with Mr V; similarity in names of Indian
company; reimbursement of all expenditure of Indian company by Taxpayer to
reach to the conclusion that Taxpayer has PE in India.

Similar was the decision of Aramex International
Logistics Pvt Ltd (2012) 22 taxmann.com 74 (AAR) wherein AAR held that
dependence of group company in conducting business in India creates PE. In this
case, Taxpayer a Singaporean Company engaged in business of door-to-door
express shipments by air and land entered into an agreement with its Indian
subsidiary (ICO) to look after movement of packages within India, both inbound
and outbound. AAR held that where a subsidiary is created for purpose of
attending business of a group in a particular country, that subsidiary must be
taken to be a permanent establishment of that group in that particular country.

It may be noted that none of the decisions have
dealt with base conditions which are the pre-requisites for constitution of PE.
It will be interesting to see how decisions will be dealt with by higher forums
where satisfaction of fundamental conditions of PE will be tested.
 _

AMP: A CONTROVERSY FAR FROM OVER

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background
Over the past decade, Indian Revenue has been the centre of global attention for its positions on controversies surrounding tax and transfer pricing. In the last few rounds of Transfer Pricing assessments, taxpayers promoting international brands in India have been scrutinised for the level of Advertising, Marketing and Promotion (‘AMP’) expenses incurred by them. These issues largely affected multinational enterprises (‘MNEs’) in consumer durables, electronics, automotive and media sectors. The controversy snowballed, leading to constitution of a three-member Special Bench of the Income-tax Appellate Tribunal (‘Appellate Tribunal’), for expert examination of the issues involved. Dissatisfied taxpayers later escalated the issue to the High Court and the same is now pending with the Indian Supreme Court. The most interesting aspect of the AMP controversy is the manner in which this issue has evolved in the judicial hierarchy. While some contentious issues are gradually dwindling as they move up the appellate forums, some issues remain unresolved and with each resolution come new challenges in practical implementation. In the next few paragraphs, we have attempted to summarise the controversy, the evolving judicial elucidation and some unresolved issues.

AMP in the Indian landscape
Under a typical license/distributor arrangement, the Indian entity of a MNE group uses the international brand/ trademark to sell its products in India. For doing so, the Indian entity would pay royalty for using such brand/ trademark. In order to spread awareness of the products and increase/maintain the market share of the products manufactured or distributed by them in India, the Indian entity would incur expenses on advertising, marketing and promotion of such brand/trademark.

During the course of Transfer Pricing assessments, the Indian Revenue has consistently been taking a position that the Indian entity of the MNE group provides assistance to the overseas affiliate, legal owner of the brand/trademark, by enhancing or building the international brand/trademark in India. According to the Revenue, AMP expense beyond the level of expense incurred by comparable businesses (termed as ‘Bright Line Test’ or ‘BLT ’) is non-routine and the same results in creation of marketing intangibles for the legal owner of the brand. Transfer Pricing adjustments have been made on the premise that the Indian entity ought to recover the excess costs along with an appropriate mark-up for such assistance.

Advent of the AMP controversy
The issue of AMP came to limelight in 2010, when the Delhi High Court pronounced a ruling in response to a writ petition filed by Maruti Suzuki1 challenging the show cause notice issued by the Transfer Pricing Officer. The High Court remarked that if the intensity of AMP expenses (defined by a ratio of AMP expense to sales) by the Indian taxpayer is more than what a comparable company would incur, the Indian taxpayer should be compensated at arm’s length, particularly when the use of trademark or logo of the foreign affiliate is obligatory on the part of the Indian taxpayer. With a shot in the arm, the Revenue Authorities made several transfer pricing adjustments in cases of distributors, licensed manufacturers, service providers, etc. using international brands. Without appreciating the difference in functional characterisation, business model and industry life-cycle of the Indian taxpayers, the Indian Revenue painted everyone with the same broad brush and made transfer pricing adjustments for excess AMP expenses.

The Indian Revenue seems to have taken inspiration from the US Tax Court ruling in the year 1998 in the case of DHL2, which was subsequently reversed by Ninth Circuit US Court of Appeal3. In the case of DHL, the Tax Court asked the taxpayer to prove that it incurred more than routine AMP expenses outside US, in order to substantiate that it was the developer of the non-US rights of trademark/brand. However, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeal rejected the approach of the Tax Court holding that there was no such requirement of comparing the AMP expenses incurred by the taxpayer with comparable companies under 1968 Regulations.

Evolution of Transfer Pricing Jurisprudence on AMP in India:
As the Delhi High Court ruling on Maruti Suzuki’s writ petition led to a plethora of transfer pricing adjustments for AMP spends, affected taxpayers filed appeals to challenge their legality. The Appellate Tribunal, in one such case, deleted the transfer pricing adjustment on the technical ground that the Transfer Pricing Officer had no jurisdiction to assess any transaction which was not specifically referred by the tax officer assessing the case. The Revenue challenged this technical ground before the High Court but failed, with no discussion being recorded on merits of the transfer pricing adjustment. To overturn this defeat in 2012, the Indian Government amended the transfer pricing provisions through Finance Act, 2012. In the amended provisions, the term ‘intangible property’ was defined to include, inter alia, ‘marketing related intangible assets’, such as trademarks, trade names, brand names, logos, etc. Further, Transfer Pricing Officers were bestowed with the right to test transactions even if not specifically referred by the tax officer. After these amendments, the Appellate Tribunals started adjudicating the AMP issue on merit. However, a disparity in the decisions in different cases created uncertainty around the transfer pricing implication of AMP expenses. Considering the conflicting decisions, the importance and the complexity of the issue, a three-member special bench was constituted by the Appellate Tribunal to adjudicate on the transfer pricing aspects of AMP expenses.

Special Bench Ruling in the case of LG Electronics India Private Limited4 (LG India):

The appeal before the Special Bench of the Appellate Tribunal was led by LG India, while other Indian taxpayers5 also affected by the issue joined as interveners to the case. The key findings of the Special Bench were as under:

AMP expenses incurred by an Indian taxpayer result in creating and improving marketing intangibles for the overseas affiliates

Expenses for the promotion of sales directly lead to brand building, the expenses incurred directly in connection with sales are only sales specific

In addition to promoting its products through advertisements, LG India simultaneously promoted the foreign brand

The concept of economic ownership does not find place under the Indian tax law. It is the legal owner of the brand who is benefitted

If the level of AMP expenses incurred by the Indian taxpayer is in excess of that of comparables, the excess AMP ought to be recovered by the Indian taxpayer from the overseas affiliate along with appropriate mark up

Selling expenses which do not lead to brand promotion do not form part of AMP expenses and hence to be excluded for the purpose of benchmarking.

Subsequent to the decision of the Special Bench, most cases pending before the Appellate Tribunal were sent back to the Transfer Pricing Officers with specific direction to follow the principles laid down by the Special Bench in the LG India case. This resulted in transfer pricing adjustments in many cases, barring some relief on account of exclusion of routine sales expenses from the ambit of AMP spends.

Delhi High Court rulings

In the case of Sony Ericsson:
Aggrieved by the order of the Appellate Tribunals following the decision in LG India, taxpayers (including consumer electronics and consumer durables giants like Daikin, Haier, Reebok, Canon and Sony) appealed before the High Court. While adjudicating the case of Sony Ericsson, the High Court laid out the following broad principles:

Upholding the decision in LG India, AMP expenses were treated as an international transaction with associated enterprise (‘AE’) and thus subject to Transfer Pricing Regulations in India

Excess AMP expenses incurred by Indian taxpayers warrant a compensation, but BLT is not well suited for computing the same

Distribution and marketing are intertwined functions and should be analysed in a bundled manner for determining arm’s length remuneration, unless need for de-bundling is adequately demonstrated

If under bundled approach, the gross margins or net margins of the Indian taxpayers are sufficient to cover the excess AMP expenses, then a separate remuneration for such excess from the foreign affiliate is not required

If the distribution and marketing functions are to be debundled then the taxpayer should be allowed a set-off for additional remuneration in one function against a shortfall in the other function

In order to apply bundled approach using an overall Transactional Net Margin Method (‘TNMM’) / Resale Price Method (‘RPM’), it must be ensured that the level of AMP functions in comparables should be similar to that of the Indian taxpayer or the tested entity

An attempt be made to find comparables with similar level of AMP functions and if such comparables cannot be found then proper adjustment be made to even out the differences

All the AMP may not necessarily result in brand building

The concept of economic ownership of intangibles was recognised.

The High Court also suggested that the Appellate Tribunals try to adjudicate the pending cases (rather than remitting the same to the Transfer Pricing Officer) following the broad principles laid down in the case above. However, the Appellate Tribunals have been remitting the issue back to the Transfer Pricing Officer on the ground that no analysis has been carried out in respect of comparability in the level of AMP functions.

In the case of Maruti Suzuki
The case of Maruti Suzuki was also made a part of the appeals heard by the Delhi High Court along with that of Sony Ericsson (supra). However, as against the other appellants alongside Sony Ericsson, who were primarily distributors of their AEs’ products, Maruti Suzuki was a manufacturer. The appeal of Maruti Suzuki was thus de-linked and heard separately by the High Court. In its ruling, the High Court clearly distinguished the facts of the case from its earlier decision in Sony Ericsson. The High Court’s observations were made taking into consideration the specific profile of a manufacturer in the AMP scenario. Further, the High Court re-examined the applicability of Chapter X of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘Act’) to the AMP issue, since the existence of an international transaction was specifically questioned by the taxpayer. The observations of the High Court were as under:

The Court noted that Chapter X of the Act makes no specific mention of AMP expenses as one of the items of expenditure which can be deemed to be an international transaction.

Even if the same is considered to be covered under “any other transaction having a bearing on its profits, incomes or losses”, for a transaction to exist there has to be two parties. Therefore, the onus is on the Revenue authorities to show that there exists an ‘agreement’ or ‘arrangement’ or ‘understanding’ between Maruti Suzuki and its AE, whereby Maruti Suzuki is obliged to spend excessively on AMP in order to promote its AE’s brand8.

A transfer pricing adjustment envisages substitution of price of an international transaction with ALP. An adjustment is not expected to be made by deducing that an international transaction exists based on difference between AMP expenses of the taxpayer and comparable entities.

By applying BLT , the Revenue Authorities had deduced the existence of an international transaction on excessive AMP spend of Maruti Suzuki, and then added back the excess expenditure as transfer pricing adjustment. This was contrary to the High Court’s approach, which required the Revenue Authority to examine an international transaction. The High Court observed that the very existence of an international transaction cannot be matter for inference or surmise.

 In the absence of international transaction involving AMP spend with an ascertainable price, neither the substantive nor machinery provisions of Chapter X of the Act are applicable to the transfer pricing adjustment exercise.

In the cases of Honda Siel9 and Whirlpool10

The Maruti Suzuki ruling has apparently set the precedence for the interpretation of AMP spend in the case of manufacturers. Subsequent rulings have followed the distinct perspective of the High Court and questioned the existence of an international transaction merely on account of excessive AMP expenditure:

In the case of Honda Siel:

  •  The High Court observed that the Revenue Authorities ascertained existence of an International transaction only by applying the BLT. Accordingly, the High Court distinguished the case from its earlier Sony Ericsson ruling.

  • The High Court also observed that mere existence of a license for use of the AE’s brand name would not ipso facto imply any further understanding or arrangement between the taxpayer and its AE regarding the AMP expense for promoting the brand of the foreign AE.

  • Further, the High Court also noted that since the taxpayer was an independent manufacturer, it was incurring AMP expenses for its own benefit and not at the behest of the AE.

  • In the absence of any categorical evidence provided by the Revenue Authorities, the High Court followed the Maruti Suzuki decision and ruled out the existence of an International transaction.

In the case of Whirlpool:

  • The High Court observed that the provisions under Chapter X of the Act do envisage a ‘separate entity concept’. Therefore, there cannot be a presumption that since the taxpayer is a subsidiary of the foreign AE, its activities are dictated by the AE.

  • Once again, the High Court put the onus on the Revenue Authorities to factually demonstrate through some tangible material that the two parties acted in concert, and further, that there was an agreement to enter into an International transaction concerning AMP expenses.
  • Regarding the deductibility of AMP expenses u/s. 37 of the Act, the High Court ruled in favour of the taxpayer and held that merely because the AE is also benefitted by the AMP expenses, their allowability is not precluded.


Subsequent cases

The Delhi High Court as well as the Appellate Tribunal have been speedily disposing cases covering AMP issues by following the ratio laid down in the Sony Ericsson and Maruti Suzuki rulings. An unspoken trend seems to have been set in the pattern of disposal – while the Sony Ericsson ruling is being followed in the case of appellant who are distributors, the Maruti Suzuki ruling is being followed in the case of manufacturers.

  • In the case of Haier Appliances11, the Appellate Tribunal observed that for application of RPM, it is necessary to examine the comparability of the AMP functions performed by the Appellant with those of the comparables. In the absence of adequate information to this effect, the case was remanded back to the Revenue Authorities for fresh consideration. However, the Appellant being a distributor, the presence of an international transaction was not negated (following the ruling in Sony Ericsson case).

  •  Similarly, in the case of Johnson & Johnson12, the Appellate Tribunal held that the Revenue Authorities are duty bound to apply the existing methods under the Act (as against BLT, which has been rejected in the Sony Ericsson ruling).

  • The case of Yum Restaurants13, was remitted back by the High Court for further examination of the franchise marketing model in question. The Sony Ericsson ruling was followed in this case as well. However, here the High Court held that once a transfer pricing adjustment has been made for AMP expenses, the said expenses cannot be disallowed again u/s.40A(2)(b) of the Act.
The case of Bausch & Lomb14 involved manufacturing as well as trading activities. Here, the High Court ruled out the existence of an international transaction, following the Maruti Suzuki ruling. Further, the High Court also observed that ‘function’ needs to be distinguished from ‘transaction’ and that every expenditure forming part of a function cannot be construed as a ‘transaction’.

Is It The End Of The AMP Controversy?
The year 2015 witnessed disposal of several cases by the Delhi High Court and various benches of the Appellate Tribunal. While moving steadily ahead in its appellate journey, the AMP controversy still seems to be far from over.

A special leave petition (‘SLP’) has been filed before the Indian Supreme Court by affected taxpayers challenging the ruling of the Delhi High Court in the case of Sony Ericsson. The coming months are likely to reveal the taxpayers’ and Revenue’s responses to the other rulings of the High Court.

The High Court has not negated the existence of an international transaction where there is excessive AMP spend by Indian distributors. In such cases, the High Court has emphasised the need for comparability of the level of AMP function between the taxpayer and the independent comparable companies. If companies with comparable AMP functions cannot be found, the High Court directed necessary adjustment to even out the difference in the AMP functions. However, neither the High Court nor the Appellate Tribunals have provided any guidance on determining the level of AMP function or computing adjustment for difference in AMP functions. In absence of clear guidance, another round of litigation seems inevitable.

In the case of manufacturers, the existence of an International transaction has been ruled out in absence of specific provisions under Chapter X of the Act. The High Court has also explicitly expressed the need for a clear statutory scheme to check arbitrariness and address existing loopholes. In view of the same, one could expect some legislative amendments in the transfer pricing provisions in the upcoming budget.

The key issue that needs consideration and deliberation is whether the Indian taxpayers have incurred the AMP expenses in their capacity as service providers or as entrepreneurs on their own account. The issue of compensating for AMP function at arm’s length would arise only in case where the Indian taxpayer is incurring AMP expenses in the capacity of a service provider. The answer to this may lie in the functional analysis and conduct of the Indian tax payer and the overseas affiliate. Further, indicative facts like exclusivity, longevity of contract, premium pricing and increase in the market share, etc. could be used to demonstrate the economic ownership of the brand. Documentation by the MNE group would play the key role in helping the MNE find answers, determine the course of action and/or build appropriate defense.

Consideration also needs to be given to the mode of remunerating such service. In place of recovering the AMP expenses from the overseas affiliates, MNEs could consider remunerating the Indian taxpayers by way of higher gross margin to cover the AMP expenses. Lastly, while the MNE groups evaluate their value chains in the wake of BEPS, it may be worthwhile to consider the above implications while aligning ownership of intangible property, compensation and related structures.

1. Maruti Suzuki India Limited vs. Addl. CIT TPO [W.P.(C) 6876/2008] [2010] 328 ITR 210 (Del)

2. DHL Corporation & Subsidiaries vs. Commissioner of Internal Revenue (T.C. Memo.1998-461, December 30, 1998)

3. DHL Corporation & Subsidiaries vs. Commissioner of Internal Revenue (Ninth Circuit Court ruling, April 11

4. L.G. Electronics India Private Limited vs. Asstt. Commissioner of Income Tax (ITA No. 5140/Del/2011)

5. Haier Telecom Pvt. Ltd; Goodyear India; Glaxo Smithkline Consumer India;
Maruti Suzuki India; Sony India; Bausch & Lomb; Fujifilm Corporation; Canon
India; Diakin India; Amadeus India; Star India; Pepsi Foods India

6. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communication India Pvt. Ltd vs. Com-missioner of Income-tax (ITA No. 16/2014) (Del)

7. Maruti Suzuki India Limited vs. Commissioner of Income-tax (ITA 110/2014; ITA 710/2014) (Del)

8. With reference to meaning of ‘international transaction’ u/s. 92B(1) if the Act and meaning of ‘transaction’ u/s. 92F(v) of the Act

9. Honda Siel Power Products Limited vs. Deputy Commissioner of Income-tax [2015] 64 taxmann.com 328 (Delhi)

10. Commissioner of Income-tax – LTU vs. Whirlpool of India Limited [2015] 64 taxmann.com 324 (Delhi)

11. Haier Appliances India Limited vs. DCIT, OSD, CIT-IV [2016] 65 taxmann.com 74 (Delhi – Trib.)

12. Johnson & Johnson Limited vs. Addl. CIT – LTU (ITA No. 829/M/2014)

13. Yum Restaurants (India) (P.) Ltd. vs. Income-tax Officer [2016]
66 taxmann.com 47 (Delhi)

14. Bausch & Lomb Eyecare (India) (p.) Ltd. vs. Addl. CIT [2016] 65 taxmann.com 141 (Delhi)

Transfer Pricing – Use of Range and Multiple Year Data for Determining Arm’s Length Price

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background:
Presently, over 60 jurisdictions the world over have transfer pricing provisions in place, to curb the erosion of their tax bases by potential mispricing of intra-group transactions. While India has had limited generic provisions in place to check price manipulations, the formal “transfer pricing regulations”, as we have today, are also fifteen years old now. Right from the time of introduction, these provisions were built upon the international experience and yet, were relatively more restrictive than most of their counterparts.

Two of the areas where Indian transfer pricing regulations (‘TPR’) glaringly deviated from international best practices were use of inter-quartile range and multiple year data for benchmarking. Till less than a year ago, the TPR suggested the use of arithmetic mean of multiple comparable prices with a deviation of a small percentage (a mere 5%, further brought down to 1% in case of wholesalers and 3% for other assessees) for calculation of the arm’s length price (‘ALP’). It also did not permit the use of multiple year data, unless such data was shown to have a bearing on the determination of the transfer prices.

These provisions were challenged time and again in practice and before the appellate authorities, but in vain. While the learning curve of the Indian legislature and the tax authorities in transfer pricing has been quite steep, the need for use of range of arm’s length prices and multiple year data was acknowledged only in the finance minister’s budget speech in 2014, followed by necessary amendments to the law, applicable to transactions undertaken on or after 1st April 2014, i.e., from A.Y. 2015- 16 onwards. The enabling rules for the same, however, were notified only on 19th October 2015.

Need for the amendment:

Multiple year data –
Although broadly comparable companies are identified based on the functions, assets and risks (‘FAR ’) analysis, their profits will be a result of the returns normally commensurate with such FAR , coupled with any factors affecting the returns of the industry as a whole, as well as the returns of the individual company. The company specific factors, say merger, demerger or any other corporate action, which are normally restricted to a single year, will result in the rejection of an otherwise comparable company. Alternatively, these factors will distort the profits of that particular comparable, impacting the overall ALP calculation.

Assuming no material variation in the FAR of the comparable companies, the use of multiple year data helps to eliminate or “iron out” the impact, if any, of the extraordinary factors occurring in any of the years, yielding the normal profit margins of the industry and thereby, producing more reliable results.

Range concept –
While the transfer pricing methods try to objectively compute the ALP, it will seldom be the case that the actual price of the transaction will exactly match a single ALP. Deriving arithmetic mean in case of multiple comparable prices, with a small range of deviation, implies that the transaction price must nearly match with the mean, often leading to inequitable results. On the contrary, as per the international practice of adopting the inter-quartile range, the transaction price has to be compared to a range of prices between the start of the second quarter and the end of the third quarter of the comparable prices, when arranged in an ascending order.

For instance, say eight comparable prices – P1 to P8 are obtained as a part of the benchmarking exercise. As per the arithmetic mean concept, the simple average of P1 to P8 will be considered to be the ALP, with an allowable deviation of 1/3%, as the case maybe. However, as per the concept of inter-quartile range, these eight prices will be divided into 4 quarters and the entire range of second and third quarter (i.e., P3 to P6) will be considered to be arm’s length. Evidently, a range of prices is a better measure of the ALP than the arithmetic mean.

Draft Rules:
The draft scheme for applying the range concept and use of multiple year data, inviting comments, was released on 21st May 2015. Its highlights were as under –

Multiple year data –
Applicable only if, and mandatory if, the most appropriate method (‘MAM’) used for computation of ALP is Resale Price Method (‘RPM’) or Cost Plus Method (‘CPM’) or Transactional Net Margin Method (‘TNMM’).

Data for three years, including the year of transaction or current year should be considered.

Data for two out of the three years shall be used in case the data for the current year is not available at the time of filing of return of income, or a comparable does not clear the quantitative filter in any one year, or data is available only for two years on account of commencement or closing down of operations.

If the data for current year becomes subsequently available, the same can be used at the time of the assessment by the assessee as well as the department.

Applies irrespective of whether range concept or arithmetic mean is used.

Range concept –

Applicable only if the MAM used for computation of ALP is RPM or CPM or TNMM.

At least nine comparable companies, based on FAR analysis, should be available.

Weighted average margins of last three years (or two years in certain circumstances), shall be calculated using the denominators of the Profit Level Indicator (‘PLI’) as the weights.

Arranging the above margins in an ascending order, the values between 40th and 60th percentile of such margins shall be considered as the arm’s length range.

If the transaction price is within such range, then no adjustment shall be made. However, if the transaction price is outside the range, then the entire difference between the transaction price and the median or central value of the range shall be adjusted in the income.
In cases where the range concept does not apply, i.e., in case of benchmarking as per Comparable Uncontrolled Price (‘CUP’) Method or Profit Split Method (‘PSM’) or any other method as per Rule 10AB, or where number of comparable companies is less than nine, the earlier computation as per arithmetic mean and the tolerance range shall continue to apply.

Final Rules:
The final rules on the subject have been notified vide Notification No. 83/2015 dated 19th October 2015. The implications of these rules are as under –

Multiple year data –
A second proviso has been added to sub-rule (4) of Rule 10B to provide that the first proviso, dealing with the use of earlier years’ data where it has a bearing on the determination of the transfer prices, shall not apply in case of transactions entered into on or after 1st April 2014.

Also, sub-rule (5) has been inserted to provide that where, in respect of transactions entered into on or after 1st April 2014, the MAM selected is either RPM or CPM or TNMM, then, the comparability of an uncontrolled transaction with the controlled transaction shall be analysed based on the data pertaining to the current year (i.e. the year in which the transaction was entered into, say F.Y. 2014-15) or the immediately preceding financial year (F.Y. 2013-14) if the data for the current year is not available at the time of furnishing the return of income for that year.
Further, the proviso to sub-rule (5) states that if the data relating to the current year (F.Y. 2014-15) becomes subsequently available at the time of assessment of the said year, then, such data shall be used for computation of ALP, even though it was not available at the time of furnishing the return of income. This proviso intends to settle the persisting issue of inappropriateness of the use of that data at the time of assessment, which was not available to the assessee at the time of filing of return of income.

Rule 10CA, inserted by the above notification, deals with the application of range concept as well as multiple year data, in detail along with illustrations. The provisos to sub-rule (2) of Rule 10CA lay down the following mechanism for use of multiple year data –

i)    Where the comparable uncontrolled transaction has been identified using current year (F.Y. 2014-
15) data as per Rule 10B(5), and the comparable entity (and not the assessee) has entered into same or similar uncontrolled transaction in either or both of the immediately preceding financial years (F.Y. 2012-13 and F.Y. 2013-14), then,

•    the price of the uncontrolled transactions for the preceding financial years (F.Y. 2012-13 and F.Y. 2013-14) shall be computed using the same method as is applied for the current year (F.Y. 2014-15), and

•    weighted average price shall be computed by assigning weights to the sales/costs/assets employed or the respective denominator, used in computing the margins as per the MAM.

ii)    Due to non-availability of current year data (F.Y. 2014-15) at the time of filing of return of income, if the comparable uncontrolled transaction has been identified using the data for the immediately preceding financial year (F.Y. 2013-14) as per Rule 10B(5), and the comparable entity (and not the assessee) has entered into same or similar uncontrolled transaction in the immediately preceding financial year of that year (F.Y. 2012-13), then,

•    the price of the uncontrolled transactions for that preceding financial year (F.Y. 2012-13) shall be computed using the same method as is applied for the financial year immediately preceding the current year (F.Y. 2013-14), and

•    weighted average price shall be computed in the same manner as above.

iii)    Further, where data for current year was not available at the time of filing the return of income but was subsequently available at the time of assessment, and it is found that the uncontrolled transaction of the current year (F.Y. 2014-15) is not same or similar or comparable to the controlled transaction, then, that entity shall be excluded from the set of comparables, even if it had carried out comparable uncontrolled transaction in any of the preceding two financial years (F.Y. 2012-13 and F.Y. 2013-14).

In other words, an entity selected as comparable on the basis of comparable uncontrolled transaction entered into in the year preceding the current year (F.Y. 2013-14), shall be outright rejected if it is later found out that it does not have comparable uncontrolled transaction during the current year (F.Y. 2014-15).

The above calculation of weighted average prices of multiple year data will apply in all cases where RPM, CPM or TNMM have been selected as the MAM and comparable uncontrolled transactions are available in the current year as well as any or both of the immediately preceding two financial years, irrespective of whether the range concept or the arithmetic mean is applicable.


Range concept –

As per sub-rule (4) of Rule 10CA, the concept of range shall apply in case of transactions where the MAM selected is not PSM or any other method and where the dataset of prices of comparable uncontrolled transactions consists of at least six entries. The entries in the dataset will be the weighted average prices of the comparable uncontrolled transactions where RPM, CPM or TNMM was selected as the MAM and comparable uncontrolled transactions were also entered into during the preceding financial years. In other cases, i.e., where CUP is selected as the MAM or where no comparable uncontrolled transactions are available in the preceding financial years, the prices calculated using the MAM for the current year will form part of the dataset.

To apply the range concept, the dataset has to be first arranged in an ascending order and the prices starting from the thirty-fifth percentile and ending with the sixty-fifth percentile shall be considered to be the arm’s length range. If the transaction price is within the above arm’s length range, it shall be considered to be at arm’s length. However, if the transaction price is outside the range, then, the median or central value or fiftieth percentile of the dataset will be considered to be the ALP and the difference between the transaction price and such ALP shall be the amount of adjustment.

As a corollary to sub-rule (4), the range concept shall not apply where the dataset has less than six entries or where PSM or any other method is selected as the MAM. In such cases, sub-rule (7) states that the existing computation of arithmetical mean of the values in the dataset and tolerance range of 1/3%, as the case may be, will apply.

The chart on the next page, summarises the provisions relating to range concept and use of multiple year data – (In the chart, Year 3 refers to the current year)

At the end of Rule 10CA, three illustrations have been provided to explain the calculation of weighted average price, selection and rejection of comparable where current year data is not available and calculation of percentile. These are self-explanatory and hence, are not covered in this article.

Issues:

Some of the issues that arise from the rules are as set out below the chart .

Chart: Use of Range concept and Multiple year data

i)    Use of earlier years’ data in cases not covered under Rule 10B(5):

Rule 10B(4), prior to the amendment, provided that only data pertaining to the year, in which the transaction has been entered into, should be used for the purposes of benchmarking, unless earlier years’ data has a bearing on the determination of transfer prices. As per the second proviso to Rule 10B(4) now inserted, the provision relating to use of earlier years’ data shall not apply to transactions entered into after 31st March 2014. Further, sub-rule (5) provides for use of data of current year or immediately preceding financial year in case of transactions entered into after 31st March 2014, where RPM, CPM or TNMM is selected as the MAM. Thus, it appears that earlier years’ data cannot be used for transactions entered into after 31st March 2014, where CUP, PSM or Rule 10AB has been selected as the MAM, even though earlier years’ data is shown to have a bearing on the transfer prices.

ii)    Chaos during assessments:

The use of data relating to immediately preceding financial year at the time of filing return of income and use of current year data at the time of assessments will invariably lead to changes in comparables. Consequently, if the number of comparables reduces below six, or a different MAM is adopted during the course of the assessment, the ALP computation may show wild variations, especially due to parallel usage of range concept and arithmetic mean. This will only increase the uncertainty surrounding transfer pricing.

iii)    Acceptance of consistent loss making companies: It is nearly a settled principle that companies that are consistently loss making cannot be accepted as comparable companies since it indicates improper functioning or inefficiencies or discrepancies, etc.

Similarly, several tribunals have held that high profit making companies should also be rejected. With the use of multiple year data, the year on year aberrations are meant to even out. Would it then imply that loss making or high profit making companies can be accepted? It is worth noting that an entity with losses in two out of three years has been accepted as a comparable illustration 1. Logically, consistently loss making or high profit making companies will still need to be excluded, as these entities will have operational differences that cause the substantial deviations, which in turn will translate into differences in FAR.


Conclusion:

The attempt to align the Indian TPR with international practices by introducing provisions for use of the long debated range concept and multiple year data is a welcome move. The final rules are even slightly more liberal as compared to the draft scheme released a few months ago. However, it appears that the complicated drafting of the rules and possibility of re-doing the entire benchmarking process during assessment may end up doing more harm than good.

BEPS and the Likely Impact on Indian Tax Laws

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction

The recent tax investigations by the British Parliamentary Committees, U. S. Senate and the Australian Senate Economics References Committee on the tax-avoidancedriven structures of multi-national corporations, such as Starbucks, Apple, Google and Microsoft among others, have shifted the focus from prevention of tax evasion to prevention of tax avoidance and aggressive tax planning. Today, countries, whilst trying to maintain a certain form of tax competitiveness, have realised the effect that the tax loss on account of the aggressive tax planning structures is having on the recovering economies, and are trying hard to crack down on aggressive tax planning structures, which result in the erosion of their sovereign tax base. Closer home, this shift is also reflected in the big-bang amendments to the Finance Bill, 2012 in the aftermath of the Vodafone judgement.

However, there was a growing consensus among the member countries of the G20 that there would need to be a common set of guidelines to be enacted by all the countries so as to effectively tackle such aggressive structures. Hence, the OECD on request by the leaders of the member countries of the G20, in 2013, formulated a 15 – point Action Plan under the Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (‘BEPS’) Project. On 5th October 2015, the OECD issued the final reports on the BEPS Project. During the 2 years, the OECD released discussion drafts for public comments under each of the Action Plans. The final reports were issued after taking into consideration the public comments received on the discussion drafts as well as on the basis of discussion with various other organisations such as the United Nations, African Tax Administration, Centre de recontre des administrations fiscales and the Centro Interamericano de Administraciones Tributarias, the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank.

This article attempts to briefly summarise all the Action Plans of the BEPS Project and the possible impact in India, due to likely amendments in the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘Act’) in light of the BEPS Project. In this regard, it may be pointed out that it would be worthwhile for a practitioner in the field of international tax to understand all the Action Plans, irrespective of their effect in an Indian context, as international tax involves the interaction of the domestic tax laws of various countries. It may be possible that while not implemented in India, some of the Action Plans may have been implemented in various other countries, involved in future transactions with India, and would therefore impact such transactions.

Action 1: Addressing the Tax Challenges of the Digital Economy

While recognising that in today’s world of the digital economy, the international tax laws, many of which are nearly a century old, would need to be amended, the report on Action 1 states that it is difficult to ring fence the digital economy from the non–digital economy and therefore, in respect of direct taxes, the recommendations have been incorporated in the other Action Plans of the BEPS Project.

Action 2: Neutralising the Effects of Hybrid Mismatch Arrangements

A hybrid financial instrument is generally treated as a debt instrument in the country of the payer, thus leading to a deduction of the interest, but as equity in the country of the recipient, thus leading to be considered eligible for a participation exemption. A hybrid entity on the other hand is one which varies in respect of it’s opacity from a tax perspective in different jurisdictions. One country treats such entity as transparent under its tax laws, whereas another country treats the same entity as opaque under its tax law.

The OECD recognises that hybrid mismatch arrangements can be used to achieve double non – taxation or long – term deferral by exploiting the differences in the tax treatment of instruments or entities under the laws of two or more tax jurisdictions. The Action Plan clearly defines the scope as covering only those mismatch arrangements which involve a hybrid element. Therefore, payments made to exempt entities have not been considered in this Action Plan. Hybrid mismatch arrangements generally involve the use of hybrid financial instruments or hybrid entities. The Action Plan states that the use of hybrid mismatch arrangements leads to lower tax by way of three outcomes, namely

(a) Deduction and Non – Inclusion of Income (D/NI Income): This generally refers to a deduction being claimed in one country for a particular payment with no corresponding income being considered in the country of the recipient.

(b) D ouble Deduction (DD): This generally refers to a single payment being claimed twice as a deduction in two different countries.

(c) Generation of multiple foreign tax credits for one amount of foreign tax paid.

One example of such a possible hybrid mismatch arrangement is provided in order to understand the term better. A partnership firm in India, ABC is treated as an entity, liable to tax in India (as it is a person defined in section 2(31) of the Act), whereas such a firm is treated as transparent in the UK, i.e. the partners are liable to tax on the income of the partnership in the UK. In case, ABC, which has its partners in the UK, makes a payment to a third party, the payment would be considered as a deduction in India while computing the income of ABC. Similarly, at the same time, the UK would disregard the existence of ABC and therefore, would grant the deduction of such payment to its partners, leading to a case of double deduction for the same payment in two different jurisdictions through the use of a hybrid entity, in this case, an Indian partnership.

The OECD has provided the following recommendations in respect of hybrid mismatch arrangements:

(a) I n the case of use of hybrid instruments or hybrid entities giving rise to a D/NI outcome, it is recommended that the payer jurisdiction deny the deduction in the hands of the payer. However, in case the payer jurisdiction does not deny the deduction in the hands of the payer, a secondary rule is recommended whereby the recipient jurisdiction is required to consider the payment as income in the hands of the recipient.

(b) I n the case of payment made to a reverse hybrid (an entity which is transparent under the tax laws of the country in which it is incorporated but opaque under the tax laws of other countries) giving rise to a D/NI outcome, it is recommended that the payer country deny the deduction.

(c) I n the case of payment made by a hybrid entity giving rise to a DD outcome, it is recommended that the jurisdiction of the parent deny the deduction. In case the jurisdiction of the parent is unable to deny the deduction, it is recommended that the jurisdiction of the payer deny the deduction.

(d) In the case of a payment made by a dual resident giving rise to a DD outcome, it is recommended that the jurisdiction of the residence deny the deduction.

 In this regard, it may be pointed out that the recommendations provided require amendments in the domestic tax laws of various countries.

Therefore, there is a possibility of the Act being amended to incorporate these recommendations, especially the primary rule of denying the deduction which gives rise to a D/NI outcome. Moreover, the use of primary and defensive or secondary rule may result in an additional compliance burden on the taxpayer as well as the tax administration, as information would be required as regards the taxation of the payments in the corresponding countries, in order to determine if there is a hybrid mismatch arrangement on a case-by-case basis. It is also believed that even in case there is no specific amendment in order to incorporate the recommendations in respect of the hybrid mismatch arrangements, the GAAR in the Act, which is currently proposed to be effective from AY 2018-19, can be used to tackle such structures.

Action 3: Designing Effective Controlled Foreign Company Rules

Action 3 of the BEPS Project provides recommendations regarding the design of CFC rules. It does so by breaking down the CFC rules into building blocks:

a. Definition of CFC

b. Threshold requirements

c. Definition of CFC income

d. Rules for computing income

e. Threshold for attribution of income

f. Rules to prevent or eliminate double taxation

The report states that the main objective of CFC rules is to prevent the income from being shifted either from the parent jurisdiction or the parent as well as other jurisdictions. This would need to be kept in mind while formulating a policy. In respect of the definition of a CFC, it is recommended to broadly define the entities covered under the CFC regime, in order to include even the permanent establishments and transparent entities. With regards to the definition of control for the purpose of determining as to whether an entity is a CFC or not, the report recommends that the CFC rules should provide a combination of both legal and economic control, and supplement that with a de facto test (decision making) or a test based on consolidation for accounting purposes. Further, the report also provides that control should be defined to include both direct as well as indirect control. The report also recommends inclusion of a modified hybrid mismatch rule, which requires an intragroup payment to a CFC to be taken into account for calculation of the income under the CFC rules. Under this modified hybrid mismatch rule, an intragroup payment may be taken into account if the payment is not included in the CFC income and if the payment would have been included in the CFC income if there was no hybrid mismatch. With regards to threshold limits, the report recommends that the CFC rules only apply in case of those foreign companies who are effectively taxed at a rate meaningfully lower than that applied in the parent jurisdiction.

With regards to the CFC income, the report recommends that the rules cover at least the following types of income:

a. Dividends;

b. Interest and other financing income;

c. Insurance income;

d. Sales and services income;

e. Royalties and other IP income.

In respect of computation of income, the report recommends that the rules of the jurisdiction of the parent company apply. It also recommends that the losses of a CFC should be offset against the profits of the same CFC or against the profit of another CFC from the same jurisdiction. Finally, in respect of the attribution of the CFC income to the appropriate shareholders of the CFC, the report recommends that the attribution should be tied to the minimum control threshold and the amount of income to be attributed to each shareholder should be determined in reference to their proportionate shareholding or influence. It may be worthwhile to point out that the proposed Direct Taxes Code Bill, 2010 included CFC rules. The Finance Minister, while presenting the Finance Bill, 2015, stated that the work on DTC would be abandoned as most of the proposed amendments have already been enacted in the Income-tax Act, 1961. However, the legislation in relation to CFC has not yet been enacted in the domestic tax law, and therefore, it is only a matter of time before the same is introduced in the Act.

Action 4: Limiting Base Erosion Involving Interest Deductions and Other Financial Payments

Action 4 relating to limitation of interest deductions attempts to address three main risks:

(a) High level of debts being shifted to high tax countries thus leading to an overall lower tax burden for the group;

(b) Intragroup loans being used to generate interest deductions in excess of the group’s actual third party interest expense;

(c) Third party debt or intragroup financing being used to fund the generation of tax exempt income.

In order to address these risks, the report recommends a fixed ratio rule whereby the interest deduction available is linked as a percentage (recommended range of 10% to 30%) of the profits of the entity before taking into account the interest deduction, tax expenditure, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA). Additionally, the report also recommends that in case the interest expense of an entity exceeds the fixed ratio rule, a country may still allow the deduction up to a limit of the ratio of the overall group’s net interest/EBITDA. In this regard, it may be pointed out that this limit on deduction of interest will apply to all interest expenditure and not just that involving related entities. The Act currently allows deduction of the interest only to the extent it qualifies for a business purpose. There are no rules in the Act specifically limiting the deduction of interest to a specified percentage of profits or earnings. Such a limitation, if introduced, would have a significant tax impact on many Indian companies, which are highly leveraged. Such an amendment may also make it difficult to monitor the overall group’s interest deductions and ratio, and therefore, may lead to an increase in the administrative as well as compliance burden of the taxpayer, as well as that of the tax authorities.

Action 5: Countering Harmful Tax Practices More Effectively, Taking Into Account Transparency and Substance

The report on Action 5 deals with preferential tax regimes, such as the IP Box regime, and the amendments required in such regimes, in order to ensure that there is a fair tax competition between the countries. One of the approaches recommended is the nexus approach, which provides that a taxpayer can avail the benefit of the preferential regimes (mainly IP regimes) only to the extent it incurred qualifying R&D expenditure, which gave rise to IP income. The report also recommends the exchange of information in relation to rulings where BEPS may be an issue between countries. Finally the report reviews the preferential regimes of a few countries to determine if they are amounting to harmful tax competition. In this regard, the report provides that the special tax regimes available to certain taxpayers in India such as those in the SEZ, for shipping companies, offshore banking units and life insurance business are not harmful. Therefore, no amendment is expected in respect of this recommendation.

Action 6: Preventing the Granting of Treaty Benefits in Inappropriate Circumstances

The Action Plan released in July 2013 by OECD on Action 6 read, “Develop model treaty provisions and recommendations regarding the design of domestic rules to prevent the granting of treaty benefits in inappropriate circumstances. Work will also be done to clarify that tax treaties are not intended to be used to generate double non – taxation and to identify the tax policy considerations that, in general, countries should consider before deciding to enter into a tax treaty with another country. The work will be co – ordinated with the work on hybrids.” In order to combat treaty shopping, the report follows a three-pronged approach:

a. A mendment in Preamble to treaties;

b. LOB clause; and

c. PPT rule

The report recommends the introduction of the LOB clause in the tax treaties. There are two versions of the clause provided in the report – a simplified version and a detailed version, with the choice given to the Contracting States.

The detailed version, as the nomenclature suggests, provides specific conditions to be satisfied, instead of the more generic ones provided in the simplified version. The LOB clause is a refined residence concept, as it goes beyond the concept of residence for the purposes of claiming the benefit of the treaty. The LOB clause provides that only a qualified person would be entitled to the benefits of the treaty. A qualified person is a person who has satisfied certain ownership and business requirements to provide sufficient link between the person and the Contracting State, the benefit of whose treaty network is being utilised. In addition to the LOB clause, the draft also includes a PPT clause as provided below, “Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Convention, a benefit under this Convention shall not be granted in respect of an item of income or capital if it is reasonable to conclude, having regard to all relevant facts and circumstances, that obtaining the benefit was one of the principle purposes of any arrangement or transactions that resulted directly or indirectly in that benefit, unless it is established that granting that benefit in these circumstances would be in accordance with the object and purpose of the relevant provisions of this Convention”.

Thus, the PPT clause makes it clear that no benefit shall be provided for an income if one of the purposes (and not necessarily the sole purpose) was to obtain the benefits of the treaty. Further, the report also attempts to tackle the abuse of the lower rate of tax in the country of source, in the case of dividends paid to parent companies exceeding a certain threshold of ownership under Article 10(2)(a) of the OECD Model Convention. The report provides that the required percentage of holding for obtaining the benefit of the lower rate of tax should also include a minimum period, for which such shareholding should be maintained, before the dividend is paid. Currently, Article 13(4) of the OECD Model Convention provides that gains derived by a company from the sale of shares, of which an immovable property constituted more than 50% of the value, is taxable in the country of source. The report recommends that this clause should be extended to include comparable interests in other forms of entities such as partnership. Additionally, the report also recommends that there should be a provision for considering a period for which the percentage of value of the immovable property must be considered, in order to tackle situations wherein assets are transferred from other entities in order to dilute the percentage of value of the immovable property to that of the shares or comparable interest being alienated. In the case of dual resident companies, Article 4(3) of the OECD Model Convention provides that for the purposes of the Convention, a dual resident company shall be deemed to be a resident of the Contracting State in which the place of effective management is situated. However, in order to combat tax avoidance through this area, the report recommends that the residence of a dual resident company for the purposes of a tax treaty be determined by competent authorities, and not where the place of effective management is situated. In respect of abuse of the domestic tax laws, the report recommends the enactment of the GAARs along with specific anti – abuse rules, such as thin capitalisation rules, in the domestic tax laws. Finally, the report recommends the change in the Preamble to the treaty to include non – creation of opportunities for non – taxation or reduced taxation through tax evasion or tax avoidance. This would enable the reader to understand the object of the treaty in accordance with Article 31(1) of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties. From an Indian context, the Act has already provided for GAARs which would come into effect from Assessment Year 2018-19. Currently, India’s treaty with the US (the LOB clause was first introduced in the US Model Convention) has an LOB clause which prevents tax avoidance to a certain extent.

Action 7: Preventing the Artificial Avoidance of Permanent Establishment Status

Currently, business carried on by a resident of a Contracting State through a commissionaire structure in the other Contracting State is not taxable in the latter State on account of the absence of a permanent establishment. Under Article 5 of the OECD Model Convention, an agent can said to constitute a PE for the principal if he habitually concludes contracts which are binding on the principal. This lead to many abusive transactions wherein the agent (commissionaire) negotiated the major terms of the contract but would be officially concluded only by the principal. In order to counter such abusive transactions, the report has recommended an amendment in Article 5(5) of the Model Convention to extend the definition of permanent establishment to these commissionaire structures as well, by providing that in case a person plays an important role in the conclusion of the contract which is concluded by the principal without any material modifications, such person or agent shall be deemed to be considered as the permanent establishment of the principal. Further, it has been recommended that the meaning of the term “independent agent” under Article 5(6) of the OECD Model be amended to exclude an agent, which satisfies certain ownership criteria in respect of the holding of the principal in the agent. Currently, Article 5(4) of the OECD Model provides a list of activities which do not constitute a fixed – place permanent establishment in a Contracting State. These activities included use of facilities and maintenance of stock of goods for storage, delivery or display of goods, maintenance of a fixed place of business for processing by another enterprise or for collecting information. These activities were considered to be excluded from the definition of the permanent establishment, irrespective of whether the activities were considered to be of a preparatory or auxiliary nature in respect of the business of a taxpayer. The report now has recommended that the aforementioned activities be excluded from being considered as a permanent establishment only if they are of a preparatory or auxiliary nature to the business of the taxpayer. In order to ensure that there is no abuse of the exclusion of the activities from the definition of a permanent establishment by splitting up the activities of the group, the report recommends that a new paragraph of anti – fragmentation be added to Article 5(4), which provides that in case the activities of the enterprise along with its related enterprise together do not constitute activities of a preparatory or auxiliary nature, the enterprise would not be eligible to claim the benefit of Article 5(4). As these recommendations refer to the OECD Model and the tax treaties, no amendment is expected in this regard in the Act.

Actions 8-10: Aligning Transfer Pricing Outcomes with Value Creation

The reports on Actions 8, 9 and 10 attempt to revise the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines (‘TPG’) in order to ensure that the transfer pricing outcomes are linked to value creation.

Some of the major amendments recommended in the TPG are as follows:

a. Contractual arrangements would need to be matched with actual conduct of the parties to the contract/ transaction. In case the contract and the conduct does not match, the contractual arrangements would need to be ignored for determining the arm’s length price;

b. An entity would not be entitled to higher returns if it undertakes risks which it does not control, or it does not have the financial capacity to control the risks.

 In other words, it is not just the undertaking of the risk, but also the control over the risk and ability to control the risk, that would entitle an entity to higher returns in the case of determination of the arm’s length price;

c. In the case of the synergistic benefits available for being a member of a group, the benefit of the synergies should be allocated only to those parties, which have contributed to such benefit being available;

d. In the case of funding without any additional economic activities, the entity funding would be only entitled to a risk – free return and no additional return is to be provided while determining the arm’s length price, specifically under the profit split method.

The report recommends the following steps for analysing the transactions involving intangibles:

a. Identifying the legal owner of the intangibles;

b. Identifying the parties performing the functions, using the assets and assuming risks relating to the development, enhancement, maintenance, protection and exploitation of the intangibles (‘DEMPE functions’);

c. Confirming the actual conduct of the parties in accordance with legal arrangements;

d. Identifying the controlled transactions related to the above activities;

e. Determining the arm’s length price in accordance with each party’s contributions to the functions, assets and risks.

The report further provides that the legal owner of the intangibles is entitled to all the anticipated returns from the exploitation of the intangible if it performs functions, provides assets and controls as well as bears the risks in relation to the development, enhancement, maintenance, protection and exploitation of the intangible. As the recommendations discussed above involve an amendment to the TPG, which is merely guidance in respect of determining the arm’s length price, no major amendment in the Act is expected in this regard. However, one may see an impact of this change in the future assessments in transfer pricing cases.

Action 11: Measuring and Monitoring BEPS

Understanding the effect that base erosion and profit shifting has on the economic activity of a country, Action 11 provides guidance and recommendations on how to measure and monitor BEPS.

The report provides the following indicators of BEPS behaviours and activity in a country:

 a. The profit rates of an MNE group is higher in a lowtax country as compared to the average worldwide profit rate;

b. T he effective tax rate of an MNE entity is substantially lower than similar enterprises having only domestic operations;

c. T he FDI is heavily concentrated;

d. The taxable profits of an entity are not higher where the intangible assets are situated in a commercial or economic sense;

e. T here is a high intragroup and third – party debt specifically in the high – tax countries

As this would require high co-ordination between the countries, the report recommends that the OECD work closely with the participating countries and provide corporate tax statistics. As this report merely refers to how BEPS can be monitored, major amendment is expected in this regard in the Act.

Action 12: Mandatory Disclosure Rules

The report on Action 12 provides a framework for formulation of mandatory disclosure rules of international tax schemes in order to enhance transparency, provide timely information and act as a deterrence. As the reports only provides the framework for such rules, they have not been analysed in this article.

Action 13: Transfer Pricing Documentation and Country-by-Country Reporting

In order to provide the necessary tools to the tax authorities in order to ensure that the profit attributed is linked to value creation, the report on Action 13 recommends certain changes in the transfer pricing documentation.

The three – tiered approach recommended in respect of the transfer pricing documentation is as follows:

a. A “master file” containing information of the global operations of the MNE group and the transfer pricing policies shall be made available to all the tax authorities in which the group does business;

b. A “local file” containing detailed information about the transactions and related parties in respect of each entity shall be made available to the tax authorities in which the entity is situated.

This local file is similar to the transfer pricing documentation that is available today; c. A “Country – by – Country Report (CBCR)” shall be made available to the tax authorities of the jurisdiction in which the parent company of the group is situated. The CBCR will contain information concerning business activity, profits before tax, income tax paid, number of employees, capital structure, retained earnings and tangible assets of each entity in the group irrespective of the jurisdiction in which it is situated. A number of countries have begun implementation of the CBCR. It is expected that India may also amend the transfer pricing regulations in order to ask for this information from the taxpayer. One of the major concerns in the introduction of the CBCR is that it enables the tax authorities to ascertain the transfer prices beyond the principle of the arm’s length price. However, the report clearly states that this information should not be used by tax authorities to conduct complementary audits.

Action 14: Making Dispute Resolution Mechanisms More Effective

The report on Action 14 recommends minimum standards for countries to adhere to in order to ensure that the Mutual Agreement Procedure provided in the tax treaties through Article 25 has been effectively implemented. The minimum standards recommended are:

a. Treaty obligations in respect of Mutual Agreement Procedures have been fully effected in a timely manner and with good faith;

b. Administrative issues in relation to treaty disputes should be resolved in a timely and effective manner;

c. Taxpayers should face minimum administrative and procedural burden to request for a MAP.

In order to ensure that corresponding adjustments in respect of transfer pricing adjustments do not face any hurdles, the report recommends that Article 9(2) of the OECD Model should be incorporated in all tax treaties. A group of countries (which notably does not include India) have agreed to incorporate a mandatory arbitration clause in the MAP Article in their tax treaties. No major amendment to the Act is expected in respect of this recommendation.

Action 15: Developing a Multilateral Instrument to Modify Bilateral Tax Treaties

The report on Action 15 recommends incorporating the recommendations discussed above in the existing tax treaties through a multilateral instrument. This will ensure that the lengthy procedure of negotiating each bilateral tax treaty is not required. India is one of the expected signatories to the multilateral instrument, which is expected to be open for signatures from December 2016. However, the major challenge in this multilateral instrument is that bilateral treaties in most countries, including India, come into effect after they have been approved by the Parliament. Therefore, the concern in signing a multilateral treaty to override the existing bilateral tax treaties without approval from the Parliament is genuine. In this regard, it is believed that the Income -tax Act, 1961 will be amended to allow the multilateral treaty to override the bilateral tax treaties signed by India without any approval of the Parliament. Moreover, in the case of a multilateral instrument, the wordings of the instrument would need to be carefully written in order to ensure that all the treaties, which may not necessarily have the same wordings, are appropriately modified. Similarly, it would be important to ensure that all the countries, which would be a signatory to the instrument, come to a consensus in respect of the wordings of the instrument as well as the recommendations itself. Additionally, all the countries in the world are not signatories to the multilateral instrument. Therefore, it would be interesting to see how the countries which are not signatories would react in respect of treaties with the countries which are signatory to the instrument.

Conclusion

To conclude, there is a question mark over the success of the BEPS Project, especially in respect of the implementation of the recommendations. However, that has not stopped countries from viewing tax avoidance very seriously. It is only a matter of time before countries start amending their tax laws to implement some, if not all, of the recommendations. India, being an active member in the BEPS Project, is almost certain to do so, and we may see quite a few amendments in the Finance Act, 2016 in respect of some of the recommendations. This will significantly alter the way multinational enterprises and we, as tax advisors will have to function. It will give rise to a new line of thought in the evolving world of tax planning wherein one would need to balance value creation and substance along with transparency with tax efficiency. _

TRANSFER PRICING DOCUMENTATION

fiogf49gjkf0d
BACKGROUND
The Indian transfer pricing regulations require taxpayers to maintain, on an annual basis, a set of extensive information and documents relating to international transactions undertaken with associated enterprises (AEs) or specified domestic transactions undertaken with related parties. Given that the burden of demonstrating the arm’s length nature of transactions between associated enterprises/ related parties rests with the taxpayer, one of the pivotal constituents of transfer pricing is documentation of the economic and commercial realities of business, methodology used, assumptions, etc. that aided in arriving at the transfer price.

In a world where multinationals are seated across various locations around the globe, with centralised functions, varied operations and complex inter-company transactions, documentation assumes a crucial role for taxpayers. India, with regard to documentation has been no different. Indian revenue authorities, with regards to documentation, have always been stringent, leading to significant litigation for multinational organisations. Rule 10D of the Income Tax Rules, 1962 (the Rules) prescribes detailed information and documentation that has to be maintained by the taxpayer. While some of the requirements are general in nature, others are more specific to the relevant international transactions.

Further, in recent years, the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) has been concerned with the effectiveness of current transfer pricing documentation guidance. As part of the several initiatives around Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS), the OECD has released its action plan on transfer pricing documentation. Action 13 of the BEPS Action Plan relates to re-examination of transfer pricing documentation seeking to enhance transparency to tax administrations, taking into consideration compliance costs for business. Action 13 of the BEPS Action Plan proposes a replacement to ‘Chapter V- Documentation” of the OECD transfer pricing guidelines providing a general guidance on documentation process from the perspective of both the taxpayer and the tax administration and consists of the following three parts:

i) Master file containing information relevant for all Multinational group members;

ii) Local File referring specifically to material transactions of the local taxpayer, and analysis of the same; and

iii) T emplate of country-by-Country report (CBC) illustrating global allocation of profits, taxes paid, and other indicators of economic activity.

REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
Section 92D of the Income-tax Act, 1962 (The Act) read with Rule 10D(1) of the Rules deal with maintenance of prescribed information and documentation by the taxpayer. The said requirement can be broadly segregated into two parts: I. The first part of the Rule lists out mandatory documents/ information that a taxpayer must maintain. The extensive list under this part can be further classified into the following three categories:

Enterprise-wise documents (capturing the ownerships structure, group profile, business overview of the tax payer and the AEs etc.). These documents would typically cover requirements of Rule 10D(1)(a) to (c) of the Rules

Transaction-Specific documents [capturing the nature and terms of contract description of the functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed (popularly known as ‘FAR ’ Analysis) of the each party to the transaction, economic and market analyses etc.] These documents would typically cover requirements of Rule 10D(1)(d) to (h) of the Rules; and

Computation related documents (capturing the methods considered, actual working assumptions, adjustments made to transfer prices, and any other relevant information/data relied on for determining the arm’s length price etc.). These documents would typically cover requirements of Rule 10D(1) (i) to (m) of the Rules.

II. The second part of the Rule provides that adequate documentation be maintained such that it substantiates the information/analysis/studies documented under the first part of the Rule. Such informationcan include government publications, reports, studies, technical publications/ market research studies undertaken by reputable institutions, price publications, relevant agreements, contracts, and correspondence, etc.

While the transfer pricing regulations have laid down the requirement for maintenance of various types of documents, tax payers need to assess and ensure that the extensiveness of each of the above documents/ information should be in sync with the nature, type and complexity of the transaction under scrutiny.

Further, Rule 10D(4) of the Rules require that all the prescribed information and documents maintained by the tax payer to demonstrate the arm’s length nature of the transactions documents and information have to be contemporaneously maintained (to the extent possible) and must be in place by the due date of the tax return filing. E.g.,Companies to whom transfer pricing regulations are applicable are currently required to file their tax returns on or before 30th November following the close of the relevant tax year. The prescribed documents must be maintained for a period of nine years from the end of the relevant tax year, and must be updated annually on an ongoing basis.

As an exception to the above, the Proviso to Rule 10D(4) of the Rules provides that if a transaction continues to have effect over more than one previous year, fresh documentation need not be separately maintained in respect of each year, unless there is a change in nature and terms of the transaction, assumptions made and/ or any other factor that would have a bearing on the transfer price. Given this, it is extremely important for tax payers to scrutinise, on a yearly basis, whether any fresh documentation is required to be maintained for any of the continuing transactions.

Further, there is relaxation provided in case of the taxpayers having aggregate international transactions below the prescribed threshold of Rs. 1 crore and specified domestic transactions below the threshold of Rs. 5 crore from the requirement of maintaining the prescribed documentation. However, even in these cases, it is imperative that the documentation maintained should be adequate to substantiate the arm’s-length price of the international transactions or specified domestic transactions.

The above documentation requirements are also applicable to foreign companies deriving income liable to tax in India.

The regulations entail penal consequences in the event of non-compliance with documentation requirement. Failure to maintain the prescribed information/document/reporting covered transaction/ furnishing incorrect information or document attracts penalty @ 2% of transaction value.

MAINTENANCE OF INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTATION

Typically, taxpayers undertake transfer pricing exercise culminating in a Transfer Pricing Study Report, which can be said to be meeting the information and documentation required to be maintained under law. Further, such Report would also form the basis of obtaining and furnishing the required Accountants’ Certificate (Section 92E of the Act). Such exercise generally involves the following steps: Information gathering

General information

This would include structural, operational /functional set up of the tax payer and the related parties and the group to which they belong to,information in the form of global transfer pricing policy, if any, etc.

Industry details

This would include tax payers’ key competitors’ information, pricing factors, etc.

Financial

Budgets (including process followed and assumptions) and earlier years’ financial statements (including segmental information if available). Further, details of government policies, approvals, any tax exemptions availed and past assessment would be relevant to understand.

Transaction specific

List of transactions with associated enterprises alongwith related commercial parameters, pricing methodology followed details of similar product dealings with third parties (by tax payer and associated enterprises), availability of comparable prices in public domain, etc.

Functional, Asset and Risk Analysis

Typically referred to as the “FAR analysis”, this is the key element to any transfer pricing exercise. It involves identifying functions performed, assets deployed and risks assumed by the parties to the transaction. The exercise entails determining income attribution between entities basis functions performed, assets deployed and risks assumed by the entities to the transaction.

Further, the above analysis facilitates process of determination of the “Most Appropriate Method” (‘MAM’), identifyingthe “tested party” and ultimately leading to economic/comparability analysis [determination of the Arm’s Length Price (‘ALP’)].

Determination of the MAM and the computation of the ALP

These are concluding steps of the transfer pricing exercise with following key elements:

Determination of the MAM for each tested transaction basis prescribed factors.

Identifying the tested party ie. one of the party to the transaction, which is the one that is least complex (functionally), not owning/owning few intangibles and in respect of which data is more reliable.

Having identified the tested party, one needs to undertake the comparability analysis and compute the ALP.

While undertaking the comparability analysis, it is important that right comparables are used. Further, in this regard, wherever required it is necessary to carry out necessary adjustments so as to have more robust comparability analysis.

As    regards    computation    of    the  ALP,    an    important component for the same is use of appropriate “Profit Level Indicator” (‘PLI’). There are no specific guidelines on the choice of PLI under law; hence, giving taxpayers an option. Further, in the context of Resale Price Method or the Cost Plus Method, the PLI usually adopted is gross margin on operating revenue and gross margin (mark up) on operating cost respectively. Under the Transactional Net Margin Method, the PLI depends on the nature of the transaction (ie, revenue or expense) in the hands of the tested party.

The whole of the above process (step wise) would need to be documented in detail with back up information/ details. Such documentation is typically maintained in the form of a Transfer Pricing Study Report from compliance perspective. Taxpayers undertake such studies on a yearly basis as required under law.

    CONCLUSION

Documentation is the most important and essential element of transfer pricing. From taxpayers perspective, documentation is critical to demonstrate compliance/ meeting with the arm’s length principle. From tax department’s perspective, it has the right to call for the documentation for verifying the compliance with the arm’s length principle.

Further, as discussed earlier, documentation has time and again been a matter of discussion/debate across jurisdictions and has been continues evolving process. The recent development at OECD (BEPS initiative discussed earlier) which seeks to replace its earlier guidance on transfer pricing documentation and proposing information to be provided in the master file and the CBC report; it is believed that the tax administrations will have the resources and information required to conduct a detailed analysis and focused audit.

    JUDICIAL PRECEDENTS

There have not been many precedents per se in the context of adequacy of the prescribed information and documentation maintenance requirements.

    In case of Cargill India Pvt. Ltd, the Delhi Tribunal had adopted a practical interpretation of documentation requirements laid u/s. 92D(3) read with Rule 10D of the Rules. The Tribunal had observed as under:

“It is clear from the consideration of Rule 10D and its various sub-rules, that documents and information prescribed under the above rule is voluminous and it would only be in the rarest cases that all the clauses of sub-rules would be attracted.

….

It is, therefore, clear that one or more clauses of Sub-rule (1) are applicable and not all clauses of the Rule in a given case. It would all depend upon the facts and circumstances of the case more particularly the nature of international transaction carried or service involved.”

As it can be seen from the above, the Tribunal noted that all kinds of information mentioned in Rule 10D of the Rules need not be maintained in each and every case. The nature of information that is relevant would vary depending upon the facts and circumstances of each case. Further, the Tribunal also observed that since the penalty leviable for non-compliance with requirements u/s. 92D(3) of the Act is onerous, its conditions must be strictly met. The notice u/s. 92D(3) of the Act cannot be vague and must require only information prescribed under Rule 10D of the Rules. It must also specify on which particular points the information is required.

Having stated as above, on the other hand, there are various decisions dealing with the importance of documentation in the context of determination of the MAM, selection of tested party and PLI, aggregation of transactions, relevance of FAR analysis, comparability analysis, including manner of identification of comparables, economic and other adjustments carried out so as to undertake meaningful profitability analysis, etc. The underlying principle in each of these precedents has been the need to have adequate and robust documentation, which ultimately assists both, the tax department and the tax payer. Wherever the tax payer has been found to having maintained such information and documentation, it has been able to successfully defend the transfer pricing adopted.

Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act

fiogf49gjkf0d
FATCA
FATCA is the acronym for Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act, which was introduced in the United States (US) legislature in October 2009. The US Congress did not approve this as standalone legislation but its provisions were later enacted as part of the Hiring Incentives to Restore Employment (HIRE) Act on March 18, 2010. The broad provisions of FAT CA are found in Sections 1471 to 1474 of the (US) Internal Revenue Code, 1986 as amended from time to time and under regulations issued.

FATCA was the US Government response to a series of investigations into US tax evasion scandals in or around 2006. Those interested may refer to report released in August 2006 titled ‘Tax Haven Abuses: The Enablers, the Tools and Secrecy’ and to the report titled ‘Tax Compliance and Enforcement Issues with respect to Offshore Accounts and Entities’ released in March 2009. In substance, these reports conclude that US taxpayers were not necessarily reporting their correct offshore incomes in their US tax returns.

FATCA is intended to increase transparency with respect to US taxpayers investing or earning income through non- US institutions and non-US investment entities. There is the underlying assumption that the US institutions are not encouraging tax evasion by US persons owing to the obligations that the Internal Revenue Code casts upon US institutions and US taxpayers are not omitting from their tax returns details of investments made or income earned through US institutions. It may be noted that US institutions have been subject to significant US regulations in so far as their transactions with US persons are concerned.

Obligations under FATCA
FATCA creates a tax information reporting regime under which financial institutions (FIs), both US (USFIs) and foreign (FFIs) are expected to report certain financial information in respect of a US taxpayer (generally referred to as a ‘US person’). If an FI does not report such information, the FI could be subject to 30% withholding in respect of its own US sourced income. The provisions of FAT CA and the regulations issued initially in February 2012 generated a lot of debate. The original implementation date was pushed back and FAT CA came into effect in two stages on July 1, 2014 and on January 1, 2015.

The global financial community questioned both subtly and overtly, the perceived extra-territorial nature of the FAT CA regulations. Even while this was happening, the enquiry into the nature of business models especially followed by certain businesses came under scrutiny by various Governments around the world. In the US, there were enquires into the US corporations keeping profits outside the US or restructuring themselves under ‘inversion’ structures to get out of the tax rigours applicable to US corporations. In the UK, there were enquires into the way some of the new technology product companies had large sales in the UK but were based out of Ireland. Closer home, the revelation of Indians having accounts in Swiss banks and the directive of the Supreme Court to appoint a Special Investigation Team (SIT) meant that a new era of global transparency in respect of financial transparency was arriving. The G20 endorsed the need for transparency and the OECD even mooted the idea of a multi-lateral tax information exchange agreement (TIEA).

The FATCA regime allowed for the US Internal Revenue Service to enter into agreements with other governments for sharing of information either on reciprocal basis or on unilateral basis. These are called Inter-Governmental Agreements (IGAs) on Model 1 and Model 2 respectively. Since completing negotiations with governments and signing agreements was time consuming, the approach taken was to agree to broad terms i.e. to arrive at an agreement ‘in substance’ with the intent to sign the final agreement by end of December 2014. This approach addressed several objections of various governments and of the financial institutions. In November 2014, the US IRS announced that the agreement in substance would be treated as being in force till the final agreement had been signed. India worked out an agreement ‘in substance’ in April 2014.

FFIs and US person
As stated earlier, FATCA requires reporting by FFIs in respect of certain financial transactions of US persons. The term ‘foreign financial institution’ is very broadly defined and encompasses a number of entities that have not traditionally been considered to be financial institutions. An FFI is any entity organised in a country (including a US possession) other than the US that:

Accepts deposits in the ordinary course of banking or similar business; or

As a substantial portion of its business, holds financial assets for the account of others; or

Is an investment entity; or

Is an insurance company (or the holding company of an insurance company) that issues or is obligated to make payments with respect to a cash value insurance or annuity contract; or

• Is an entity that is a holding company or treasury centre that is part of an expanded affiliated group that includes a depository institution, a custodial institution, a specified insurance company or an investment entity or is formed in connection with (or availed of by) a collective investment vehicle, mutual fund, exchange traded fund, private equity fund, hedge fund, venture capital fund, leveraged buyout fund or similar investment vehicle.

As we can see above, the coverage is quite wide and the definition quite complex. There are certain exclusions e.g. group entities that are non-financial foreign entities (NFFEs) and non-financial start-up companies for the first 24 months after the latter type of entities are organised. We now turn to who or what is a US person. The term ‘US person’ means:

An individual who is a US citizen or resident of the US; or

A partnership created or organised under the laws of the US or a State of the US; or

A corporation created or organised under the laws of the US or a State of the US; or

An estate of the decedent, who is a US person; or

Any trust if:

1. A court within the US is able to exercise primary supervision over the administration of the trust (i.e. the “Court test”); and

2. One or more US persons have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust (i.e. the ‘Control test”); or

The Government of the US, any State, municipality or other political subdivision, any whole owned agency or instrumentality of such governments.

Registration of FFI and FFI
Agreement

An FFI is, on application to be made electronically, allotted a ‘Global Intermediary Identification Number’ (GIIN). The GIIN is 20 character identification unique to each FFI. An FFI, whose application for GIIN is under process with the IRS, may provide a Form W-8 to its counterparty and state that it has ‘applied for’ against the GIIN field. Such a Form W-8 will be valid for 90 days during which it is expected that the FFI will be granted the GIIN.

An FFI will agree with the IRS to undertake, amongst others, account holder due diligence, reporting and withholding. The nature of the obligations of the FFI varies depending upon whether the FFI is located in an IGA country or outside.

An FFI which agrees to sign (or signs) the agreement with the US IRS is called a participating FFI (PFFI) and one which does not do so in non-participating FFI (NPFFI). A PFFI may also agree that it will do the FAT CA reporting on behalf any other FFI within the group.

Account Holder Due Diligence most FIS have historically never captured data which reveals the tax residency of the account holder. Generally, Know your Customer (KYC) norms have focussed on proof of identity, proof of address, nature of business. more recently, KYC norms tied in with anti- money laundering (AML) initiatives meant that FIs require information about nature of business of the account holder although there may be no loan or credit facility given to the account holder. this is now being further enhanced to capture information about whether the account holder is  a  US  person.  While  FATCA allows  for  FIS  to  accept customer self-declarations, the institution is expected to make sufficient due diligence in respect of new accounts (nadd) opened after the coming into force of FATCA.  it also requires the institutions to do due diligence in respect of pre-existing accounts (Padd). in particular, the due diligence has to focus on uS indicia appearing in the data relating to accounts of individuals. Generally, US indicia in the context of individual accounts are one or more of the following viz.,

  •    US citizenship

  •     Lawful permanent resident of  the  uS  (i.e.  a  non-uS citizen with a ‘green card’)

  •    US place of birth

  •     Residence address or correspondence address in the US (this could include a US post box office)

  •     US telephone number with no non-uS telephone number associated with the account

  •     Standing instructions to transfer funds to an account in the uS

  •     Current  power  of  attorney   or   signatory   authority granted to a person with a uS address
  •     Care of’ mailing address is the sole address for the account or ‘hold mail’ instruction applies in respect of the account.

In such cases, the institution has to exercise additional due diligence and obtain appropriate ‘cure’ documentation, which differs on the basis of the nature of the defect. For example, uS citizenship cannot be ignored unless the uS certifies that the individual concerned has given up his US citizenship. in the absence of cure documentation, it is presumed that the account holder is a uS person. For non-individuals, the nadd, Padd focuses on whether the entity is an FFI or it is non-financial foreign entity (NFFE). An FFI will have to provide its GIIN     whereas an  NFFE  will have to provide information about its ownership in particular whether it has uS person(s) having substantial i.e. greater than 10% interest in the nFFe.

    An account holder with a PFFI

  • Who or which is not an FFI and who fails to comply    with reasonable requests for information necessary to determine if the account is held by a US person; or
  •    Fails to provide a valid self-declaration of being a US person (Form W-9); or
  •     Fails to   provide   the   correct   name   and   (US)  tax Identification Number (TIN) combination; or
  •     Fails to waive the secrecy law which would prevent the participating FFI from reporting information required to reported under FATCA; or

    Is an NFFE which fails to provide the required certification regarding substantial US owners or lack of such ownership; or
 

  •   Has a dormant account is treated as a ‘recalcitrant account holder’.

There  are  a  few  peculiar  situations  that  arise  owing  to difference in US law and indian law. For example, a company incorporated under indian law could still be treated as a US person under US tax law. Similarly, the US law does not have any specific provision to address a hindu undivided Family (HUF), which is a traditional family institution peculiar to india.

Reporting
A PFFI will have to report, with respect to the financial accounts of uS persons, the following information in various stages viz.

1.    for the period from july 1, 2014 to december 31, 2014
– name, address, uS tin, account balance for such accounts;

2.    for 2015 – in addition to the information at 1 above, the income associated with such accounts;

3.    for 2016 – in addition to the information at 1 and 2 above, gross proceeds from securities transactions.

The reporting is in all cases required to be done after the end of the calendar year. For FFIs located in countries with an IGA, the reporting deadline is September.

Withholding

As stated earlier, non-compliance with FatCa may result in a FatCa withhold being imposed on an FFI. A PFFI will not be subject to FATCA withholding. FATCA withholding would be imposed in respect of withholdable payments made to NPFFIs, non-compliant NFFE and recalcitrant account holders. after december 31, 2016, withholding may also extend to foreign pass-through payments.

a withholdable payment is a payment of uS  source  fixed or determinable, annual or periodical (FDAP) income.  the  term  FdaP  refers  generally  to  income other than gains from the sale or disposition of property.

It includes interest (discount on issue of debt securities is treated as ‘interest’), dividends, substitute payments (quasi dividends not treated as employment income), royalties, payments on notional principal contracts (derivatives) and annuities.

In addition, from january 1, 2017, gross proceeds from sale or other disposition of property that can produce US source interest or dividend income could subject to FATCA withholding.

The US law treats an FDAP as being US source income on the basis of residence of the obligor. For example, interest paid to an account holder on uS treasury bond or where the borrower is a US corporation is a withholdable payment. in the same manner, dividend in respect of US stocks is a withholdable payment. After december 31, 2016, sale proceeds of stock of a US corporation or of US treasury bond or a bond where the borrower is a US corporation could be treated as withholdable payment.

The complex rules of foreign passthru payments are not discussed here. In the next part of the write up, we will touch upon the local regulatory aspects covering FatCa compliance in india.

Summary

FATCA  is  not  a  tax  but  a  mechanism  adopted  by  the US Government to get information about US persons’ financial accounts with FFIs. It requires due diligence in respect of financial account holders, obtaining relevant documentation and reporting certain information about the US persons financial accounts with the FFI.

Evolving Transfer Pricing Jurisprudence in India

fiogf49gjkf0d
Transfer Pricing practice in India has evolved a long way. In thirteen years of implementation of the transfer pricing regulations (TPR) and nine rounds of completed audits (assessments), transfer pricing (TP) has depicted a changing landscape, wherein the revenue authorities position on various issues have highlighted the future course that practice of transfer pricing is going to tread, albeit full of controversies.

The buoyant Indian economy and impressive financial performance of Indian companies have guided the revenue authorities’ outlook that multinational enterprises (MNEs) operating in India should have robust transfer pricing between group companies, resulting in healthy margins for the India operations.

Laws were not made in a day. They have evolved over years. Its birth had reasons; growth was a straddle, but existence inevitable. Law today personifies a magic stick which guides the obedient and whips the one who dares to cross it.

Transfer pricing provisions are reflective of such transition. Though seemingly simple, the intricacies in its implementation have caught many unaware. Various amendments have been made post 2001 in Chapter X of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (the Act), dealing with the transfer pricing legislation both in respect of substantive and procedural law. The amendments have far reaching consequences and have nullified some of the decisions of the Income-tax Appellate Tribunal (ITAT )/Courts. Even after a decade, the transfer pricing law is still evolving. It is volatile and unpredictable and its practice demonstrates the contrasting positions taken by the taxpayer and the revenue authorities.

The introduction to transfer pricing provisions and the detailed explanation of the six specified methods for benchmarking the controlled transaction i.e., comparable uncontrolled price (CUP) method, resale price method (RPM), cost plus method (CPM), profit split method (PSM), transactional net margin method (TNMM) and the Other method as prescribed by Rule 10AB were explained earlier in various articles. Further, this article analyses the legal jurisprudence landscape that is slowly emerging, which throws light on the various intricacies of transfer pricing law in India.

Recent important transfer pricing judgments have been analysed to bring out these intricacies.

1. Toll Global Forwarding India Pvt. Ltd.1

Facts of the case:
Toll Global Forwarding India Pvt. Ltd. (the taxpayer) is a joint venture between BALtrans International (BVI) Limited, a company listed in Hong Kong Stock Exchange, holding 74% equity, and KapilDevDutta, holding balance 26% equity. The taxpayer was primarily engaged in the business of freight forwarding through air and ocean transportation which includes rendition of related services outside India as well. In the course of conducting this business, the taxpayer picked up/received freight shipments from its customers, consolidated these shipments of various customers for common destinations, and, at destination, distributed these shipments and effected delivery to the consignees.

The taxpayer entered into two types of international transactions:

a) Arranging import of cargo from other countries to India by air and sea transportation and delivering the same to consignees in India and

b) A rranging export of cargo from India to other countries by air and sea transportation wherein consignments are picked up in India by the taxpayer and are sent to the destination as per instructions of consigners for the purpose of delivering to consignees through its AEs The taxpayer controlled the pricing to the end customers in domestic market and pricing for the end customers in connection with consignment picked up abroad was essentially determined by the AEs. The global practices followed by the similar companies in freight forwarding industry was such that the profits earned after deducting transportation costs, in respect of import and export of cargo, were to be shared equally i.e., 50:50 ratio between the taxpayer and its AEs or independent third party business associates.

In the transfer pricing study report submitted by the taxpayer, for the AY 2006-07, the taxpayer adopted the CUP method for determining the arm’s length price (ALP). However, the Transfer Pricing Officer (TPO) rejected the business model and applied TNMM and proposed an adjustment of Rs. 2.09 crore. The adjustment was confirmed by Dispute Resolution Panel (DRP). Aggrieved, the taxpayer appealed before Delhi bench of ITAT .

Key Observations and decision of the Delhi ITAT: –
ITAT observed that in the taxpayer’s industry it was a standard practice to share profits in 50:50 ratio, even for transactions with unrelated parties, and that the CUP method was the most direct method of ascertaining ALP. The ITAT observed that “the trouble however is that while there is a standard formulae for computing the consideration, the data regarding precise amount charged or received for precisely the same services may not be available for comparison.”

‘Price’ as per Rule 10B – purposive and realistic interpretation

– ITAT proceeded to analyse the definition of ALP determination under Rule 10B of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 (the Rules) which sets out that the CUP method cannot be applied unless the amount charged for similar uncontrolled transaction was the same as international transaction between the AEs. However, the ITAT questioned whether ‘price’ as per Rule 10B(1) (a) covers not only the amount but also the formulae according to which price was quantified.

– ITAT thus relying on the decision of Agility Logistics Pvt Ltd2 and DHL Danzas Lemuir Pvt Ltd3 noted that in both cases, ‘price’ under rule 10B(1)(a) was treated to include even the mechanism in terms of formulae to arrive at the consideration. ITAT also held that this was a very ‘purposive and realistic interpretation’.

Price vs. Amount
– ITAT distinguished the use of the expression ‘amount’ as per US TP Guidelines, with the term ‘price’ in Indian domestic TP regulation, in cases when “agreed price or service rendered to, or received from, an associated enterprise is not stated in terms of an amount but in terms of a formulae which leads to quantification in amount.”

– On a conceptual note, ITAT noted that ‘price’ in economic and business terms, could be interpreted as rewards for functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed (FAR ), while ‘amount’ is a relatively mundane quantification in terms of a currency. Providing various examples, ITAT extended the application of the expression ‘price’ beyond specific ‘amounts’ and held that the stand of revenue authorities that in such cases CUP method cannot be applied, because of non availability of data in terms of comparable amount having been charged for the same service is irrelevant.

Procedural issues
– The ITAT expressed that there could be procedural issues, owing to limitations of methods prescribed under Rule 10B, and stated that “transfer pricing, by itself, is not, and should not be viewed as, a source of revenue; it is an anti –abuse measure in character and all it does is to ensure that the transactions are not so artificially priced with the benefit of inter se relationship between associated enterprises, so as to deprive a tax jurisdiction of its due share of taxes. Our transfer pricing legislation as also transfer pricing jurisprudence duly recognize this fundamental fact and ensure that such pedantic and unresolved procedural issues, as have arisen in this case due to limitations of the prescribed methods of ascertaining arm’s length price, are not allowed to come in the way of substantive justice, particularly when it is beyond reasonable doubt that there is no influence of intra AE relationship on the determination of prices in respect of intra AE transactions.”

The “Other Method” – A Flexible Recourse?

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background
Transfer pricing provisions in section 92 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’) prescribe that the arm’s length price (‘ALP’) of international/specified domestic transactions between associated enterprises (‘AEs’) needs to be determined having regard to the ALP, by applying any of the following methods:

– Price-based methods: Comparable Uncontrolled Price (‘CUP’) Method
– Profit-based methods: Resale Price Method (‘RPM’), Cost Plus Method (‘CPM’), Profit Split Method (‘PSM’) and Transactional Net Margin Method (‘TNMM’)
– A ny other prescribed methods

 The provisions of the Act prescribe the choice of the most appropriate method having regard to the nature of the transaction, availability of relevant information, possibility of making reliable adjustments, etc., and do not prescribe a hierarchy or preference for any method. Given the concern that it is not possible to obtain reliable comparable financial data in the public domain, in the case of a number of transactions between associated enterprises (including inter-alia, unique transactions, where the determination of independent third party comparables is a major challenge), the OECD member countries as well as non-member OECD countries needed to have recourse to a more “flexible” method, which in essence establishes a better standard of arm’s length transfer prices between associated enterprises, given its purposive application.

Internationally, Para 2.9 of the OECD Guidelines permitted the use of the “other method” and states that the taxpayers retain the freedom to apply methods not described in the guidelines to establish prices provided those prices satisfy the arm’s length principle. Furthermore, it also states the following:

– Such other methods should however not be used in substitution for OECD-recognised methods where the latter are more appropriate to the facts and circumstances of the case.

– In cases where other methods are used, their selection should be supported by an explanation of why the other recognised methods were rejected and the reason why the other method was regarded as more appropriate.

– Taxpayers should maintain and be prepared to provide documentation regarding how their transfer prices were established

The US Regulations also approve the use of so-called unspecified methods and discuss some parameters and situations where the unspecified method could be applied. The same are listed below:

– The unspecified method should provide information on the prices or profits that the controlled taxpayer could have realised by choosing a realistic alternative to the controlled transaction

– The unspecified method will not be applied unless it provides the most reliable measure of an arm’s length result under the principles of the best method rule. Therefore, a method that relies on internal data rather than uncontrolled comparables will have reduced reliability.

Probably taking cue from the above, the Central Board of Direct taxes (CBDT) prescribed the use of the “sixth method”/“the other method” for the purposes of comparison under the Indian transfer pricing regulations, in notification no. 18/2012 issued on 23rd May 2012.

2. Deconstructing the statutory provisions – Rule 10AB

The CBDT prescribed the use of the “other method” by introducing Rule 10AB of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 which reads as under:

“ Other method of determination of arm’s length price:

10AB. For the purposes of clause (f) of sub-section (1) of section 92C, the other method for determination of the arm’s length price in relation to an international transaction or specified domestic transaction shall be any method which takes into account the price which has been charged or paid, or would have been charged or paid, for the same or similar uncontrolled transactions, with or between non-associated enterprises, under similar circumstances, considering all relevant facts.”

The authors have identified some frequently asked questions in respect of the various nuances considering the application of the “other method” and laid down points for consideration below:

3. Application of the Other Method
In view of the above analysis of Rule 10AB, the use of the sixth method in benchmarking certain unique transactions (especially considering the amendments to the definition of international transactions u/s. 92B of the Act and the introduction of specified domestic transactions u/s. 92BA of the Act) in a few illustrative cases can be considered as under:

Conclusion
The Other Method is undoubtedly a flexible recourse for taxpayers to consider and apply various plausible comparability indicators/alternatives other than the ones prescribed under the statute, in order to compare controlled transactions (whether or not unique) with associated enterprises. Furthermore, the intention of the Tribunals as regards the application of the Other Method with retrospective effect (given its curative intent) and supporting its “purposive interpretation” to cover the expanded definition of “price” is positively appreciated, however, there may be consequent challenges, by the Revenue Authorities, to the application of the other method, especially in cases where ad hoc attributions or allocations are made to the profits/incomes of Indian taxpayers. In the absence of uncontrolled comparables, the Revenue Authorities could argue that the application of the Other Method as the most appropriate method accords a flexibility to use their own “formula based mechanism” of allocation of prices/profits, as opposed to the transfer pricing methodology selected by taxpayers. Accordingly, taxpayers would be required to consider all these aspects and maintain the right level of documentation to substantiate their claims.

levitra

PROFIT SPLIT METHOD – EXAMINING THE SPLIT

fiogf49gjkf0d
1. Background

The fast growth in the technology, communication and transportation has led to a number of multinational national enterprises (MNEs) having the flexibility to conduct their operations through enterprises set up anywhere in the world. This has given rise to significant global trade such as international transfer of goods and services, capital, intangibles within the entities in the MNE. The MNE group’s transaction structure is determined by a combination of market forces, group policies which could differ from open market conditions operating in independent entities. In such a scenario it becomes important to establish appropriate ‘transfer price’ for the transactions within the MNE group.

2. Introduction

Internationally “arm’s length principle” or the “arm’s length price” has been accepted as a benchmark for establishing transfer price for intercompany transactions. The arm’s length principle is based on ‘separate entity approach” wherein each entity is regarded as a separate entity in the group. Arm’s length principle applies to transactions between related parties i.e. the associated enterprises (AE). Each country has prescribed various criteria’s to determine the AE relationship. Different transfer pricing methods have been prescribed for implementation of the arm’s length principle and the same can be applied by both the taxpayers and the tax authorities to determine the appropriate arm’s length price. While the OECD guidelines1, UN Manual2 and the approaches followed across various jurisdictions provide guidance on the various methods adopted, however, the evolving business practices and the indigenous methods adopted by the companies make it imperative to bring about harmonisation of the methods applied in line with the changing business and commercial environment.

The Indian transfer pricing regulations have recognized six methods which can be applied by the tax payers to demonstrate the arm’s length price of the international transactions. Earlier under the OECD guidelines, the Transactional profit methods were to be resorted to only when the traditional transaction methods could not be reliably applied alone or exceptionally could not be applied at all. Now the transactional profit methods (namely TNMM and PSM) have been accorded status of an acceptable method of transfer pricing. The Indian TP regulations follows the “most appropriate method” principle to demonstrate the arm’s length principle, whereby the tax payer has to test all the methods in order to select the most appropriate method that justifies the arm’s length measure for the international transactions. PSM is also one of the methods that have been prescribed in the Indian TP Regulations.

In the ensuing paragraphs discussion is focused on PSM:

3. Transaction Profit Split Method

3.1 History

The PSM, wherein the arm’s length price is determined through division of consolidated profits between the members of the group, has had a long history in terms of actual use by both the taxpayers and tax authorities. In the 1979 OECD Guidelines, PSM was excluded as an acceptable arm’s length pricing method, although reference to profit allocations based on proportionate contribution to final profit in the said guidelines can be implied as allowance of this approach. However in the 1995 version of the OECD Guidelines, PSM was included as second best option to the traditional transaction based methods. Across the OECD delegates there was been reluctance to accept PSM as an apt method to determine arm’s length price as there was lack in well articulated economic theory or practical experience justifying the application of the method in specific transactions or application of global formulary apportionment3. Nevertheless, PSM when correctly applied offers an important alternative to the traditional one sided transactional or profit based valuation approaches and it addresses the exceptional bilateral aspects of certain transactions while being in compliance with the arm’s length principle.

3.2 Concept

The OECD guidelines define PSM as “A transactional profit method that identifies the combined profit to be split for the associated enterprises from a controlled transaction …. And then splits those profits between the associated enterprises based upon an economically valid basis that approximates the division of profits that would have been anticipated and reflected in an agreement made at arm’s length.”

The PSM seeks to eliminate the effect on profits of special conditions made or imposed in controlled transaction (or in controlled transactions that it is appropriate to aggregate) by determining the division of profits that independent enterprises would have expected to realise from engaging in the transaction or transactions.

The PSM first identifies the profits (i.e. combined profits) to be split between the associated enterprises from the controlled transactions in which the associated enterprises are engaged. The said combined profits are then split on an economically valid basis that approximates the division of profits that would have been anticipated and reflected in an agreement made at arm’s length.

The PSM is generally applied when there is significant contribution of intangible property by the parties of the controlled transactions.

3.3 PSM under the Indian TP Regulations

The Indian Transfer pricing Regulations are covered in Chapter X of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’). Section 92C of the Act has provided PSM as one of the methods to determine the arm’s length price of the international transaction. Further, Rule 10B(1)(d) of the Income tax Rules, 1962 (‘the Rules’) provides guidance on the identification and application of PSM.
The Indian TP Regulations provide that PSM is mainly applicable to the following transactions:

(a) International transaction involving transfer of unique intangibles or in circumstances where two or more enterprises perform functions which involves unique or valuable contributions.
(b) In multiple international transactions which are so interrelated that they cannot be evaluated separately for the purpose of determining the arm’s length price of any one transaction.

It is clear that PSM cannot be a most appropriate method where the transactions employ only routine functions and comparables can be found. PSM is the most appropriate method only when the operations involve high integration.

For the purpose of determining the arm’s length price under the PSM, the following steps are required:
(a) Determination of the combined net profit of the AEs arising from the international transaction in which they are engaged.
(b) E valuation of the relative contribution made by each of the AE to the earning of such combined net profit on the basis of the following:

a. functions performed, assets employed or to be employed and risks assumed by each enterprise; and,
b. reliable external market data which indicate how such contribution would be evaluated by unrelated enterprises performing comparable functions in similar circumstances.
(c) The combined net profit is then split amongst the enterprises in proportion to their relative contributions, as evaluated in (b) above;
(d) The profit thus apportioned to the taxpayer is taken into account to arrive at an arm’s length price in relation to the international transaction.

The   indian   TP   regulations   also   provide   that   the combined net profit referred to in sub-Clause (a) may, in the first instance, be partially allocated to each AE so as to provide it with a basic return appropriate for the type of international transaction in which it is engaged, with reference to market returns achieved for similar types of transactions by independent enterprises and thereafter, the residual net profit remaining after such allocation may be split amongst the aes in proportion to their relative contribution in the manner specified under sub-Clauses (b) and (c). In such a case the aggregate of the net profit allocated to the AE in the first instance together with the residual net profit apportioned to that AE on the basis of its relative contribution shall be taken to be net profit arising to that enterprise from the international transaction.

3.4    Approaches for splitting profits

For the purpose of splitting the profits to determine the arm’s length price under PSM, generally following two approaches namely contribution analysis and residual analysis  are  considered.  The  said  approaches  are  not necessarily exhaustive or mutually exhaustive.

(a)    Contribution analysis – under the contribution analysis, the combined profits from the controlled transactions are allocated between the  aes  on  the basis of the relative values of the functions performed, assets employed and  risk  assumed  by each of the ae engaged in the controlled transaction. External market  data  that  reflects how the independent enterprises allocate the profits in similar circumstances should supplement the analysis to the extent possible. The profit so apportioned is used to arrive at the arm’s length price in relation to the international transaction.  The said profit of the AE when added to the costs incurred in relation to the international transaction would result in arm’s length price.

Contribution analysis may apply to various circumstances and various techniques apply to a contribution analysis. these techniques endeavor to evaluate quantitatively the contribution of each party to the transaction. Some of the techniques applied globally are discussed below:

i.    Capital  investment  approach  –  The  said  approach consists of assessing the relative contribution of the parties to the transaction based on the capital invested in  the  intangibles  by  both  parties.  For  determining the basis for profit split, reliance is placed on the economic relationship between the capitals invested by the parties to the transaction. Investment includes investment in intangible capital and operating profits. For applying this technique, it would be relevant that the intangibles as well as the economic owners of such capital are well defined. Also, it is necessary to have an indepth understanding of the circumstances relating to the transaction. This technique can be applied to cases where the expenditures building up the capital can provide a realistic picture of the contribution made by the parties to the transaction.

ii.    Compensation approach – Under this technique the labour cost data (including salary, fringe benefits, bonuses, etc.) of each party is taken into consideration to determine the contribution towards the transaction. Once the labour costs of one party are collated they are captialised in order to capture the amount of time required to build the corresponding intangible asset. The assumption for taking into consideration the labour cost data is that it is a representative of the economic value to the company created by an employee. The principle underlying this technique is in line with the “significant people function” concept discussed in the OECD report on the “Attribution of profits to permanent establishment Part i (december 2006). This technique can be adopted only in a scenario where labour resources are critical value drivers for the transaction. This technique requires specific attention as it is based on an indepth understanding of the market/ industry, group’s value chain and key drivers, the nature of the functions/roles and responsibilities of the persons, related costs which are the basis for the assessment of the contribution.

iii.    Bargaining theory approach – Under this technique, the bargaining positions of each of the parties to the transactions are analysed to assess the contribution made. Bargaining theory if used effectively could be a powerful tool to determine the contribution of each party as it evaluates the roles of each party and thereby the corresponding function towards adding value to the transaction.

iv.    Survey  approach  – This  technique  is  adopted  when identification of the internal and external data to be considered for determining the contribution is not possible. under this approach, opinions on the assumptions for splitting the profits are obtained from  both inside and outside the  company. the key challenge of this approach is the identification of the internal and external experts whose opinions have to be considered and also the compilation of the set of questions that would be relevant. Statistical tools can be employed to analyse the opinions sought from the internal and external experts to arrive at a numerical valuation.  This  approach  to  be  effective  requires robust documentation of the opinions, survey design and the survey answers.

In applying the contribution analysis, the above techniques can be effective tools in quantifying the contribution of the group entities in the transaction. In most cases, a conjunction of these techniques could allow determining the appropriate arm’s length pricing for the transaction.

(b)    Residual analysis – under the residual analysis, the combined profits from controlled transactions are allocated between AEs based on two step approach:
a.    Step 1: depending on the functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed, the basic return appropriate to the respective ae is determined. The combined profit is allocated on this basis which results in partial allocation of the combined net profits to each AE.
b.    Step 2: The residual profits is allocated on the basis of an analysis of the facts and circumstances (reference can be made to contribution analysis).

The said profit of the AE when added to the costs incurred in relation to the international transaction would result in arm’s length price.

In practice, generally residual analysis is adopted more as compared to contribution analysis. This is so as the residual analysis is a two step process wherein the first step determines a basic return for routine functions based on comparables and the second step analyses returns to unique intangible assets based not on comparables but on relative value. Further, the possible dispute before the tax administration is reduced as the profits to be attributed based on relative value post the first step is reduced.

Comparable Profit Split Method (CPSM)
In some countries, a different version namely CPSM of PSM is applied. Here, the profit is split by comparing the allocation of operating profits between the AES to the allocation of operating profits between independent enterprises  participating  in  similar  circumstance.  The Indian Regulations also hint at comparable profit split method.  however,  the  tribunal  in  one  of  the  recent ruling in the case of Global one india Private Limited (discussed later) has held that mandatory direction in the rules  to  mandatorily  use  the  comparable  PSM  to  split profits would make the PSM redundant in most case as obtaining relevant market data on third party for splitting profits would be difficult.

Contribution analysis and CPSM are different as CPSM depends on availability of external market data to directly measure the relative value of contribution, while the contribution analysis can be applied even if such a direct measurement is not available. However, both contribution analysis and CPSM are difficult to apply in practice as the reliable external market data required to split the combined profits are often not available.

3.5    Identification of key value drivers – robust functional analysis

Functional analysis is of prime importance in the arm’s length principle. Functional analysis identifies the significant functions performed, assets employed and risks assumed by the parties to the controlled arrangement.   it assists in assessing the values of the contributions of the parties in the controlled arrangement. The functions that need to be identified and compared includes design, manufacturing, assembling, research and development, servicing, purchasing, distribution, marketing, advertising, transportation, financing and management. The types of assets used to be considered includes plant and machinery, use of valuable intangibles, financial assets, etc. and also the nature of the assets used needs to be considered such as the age, market value, location, property right protections available etc. further, the functional analysis has to consider the material risks assumed by the parties as the assumption and allocation of risk would influence the conditions of the transactions between the ae. The risks to be considered could include market risks, such as input cost and output price fluctuations; risks of loss associated with the investment in and use of property, plant and equipment, risks of the success or failure of investment in research and development, financial risks such as caused by currency exchange rate and interest rate variability, credit risks, etc.

Robust functional analysis assists in identifying the key value drivers of each party to the transactions thereby highlighting where the value is created.

3.6    Methodology to split profits – relevant factors

It is imperative that the arm’s length allocation of the combined or residual profits is resultant of robust functional analysis and knowledge  of  the  entire trade of the parties to the transaction and the profits made by  the  said  parties.  The  OECD  guidelines  recommend approximating as closely as possible the split of profits that would have been realised had the parties been independent enterprises.

Some of the methods and the factors impacting the profit split are discussed below:

Methods:

3.6.1    Reliance on data from comparable uncontrolled transactions

Here, the splitting of profits is based on the division of profits actually arising from comparable uncontrolled transactions. Instances of sources of information on uncontrolled transactions that could assist determination of mechanism to split profits based on facts and circumstances includes joint venture arrangements between independent parties, development projects in the oil and gas industry, arrangements between independent music record labels, uncontrolled arrangements in financial services sector, etc.

3.6.2    Allocation keys

Splitting of profits can be achieved using appropriate allocation keys. Based on the facts and circumstances  of the case, the allocation keys can be fixed or variable. In a scenario where there are more than one allocation key used, then it is necessary to weight the allocation keys used in order to determine the relative contribution that each allocation key represents to the earning of the combined profits. The key requirement being that the allocation keys used to split the profits should be based on objective data and supported by comparables data or internal data or both.

Generally used allocation keys are based on assets/ capital (operating assets, fixed assets, intangible assets, capital employed) or costs (relative spending on key areas such  as  marketing,  r&d,  etc.).  Other  allocation  keys based on incremental sales, headcounts, time spent by and salary costs of certain set of people for the creation of the combined profits, etc.

Asset/capital based allocation keys can be used where there is strong correlation between tangible or intangible assets or capital employed and creation of value in the context of controlled transaction.

Cost based allocation key i.e. allocation based on expenses can be used where it is possible to identify a strong correlation between relative expenses incurred and relative value added. Cost based allocation is simplistic. however, cost based allocations are sensitive to the accounting classification of the costs. Hence, it becomes pertinent to select the costs that will be taken into consideration for the purpose of determining the allocation key consistently among the parties to the controlled transaction.

3.6.3    Assignment of weights

Here, the profits are split between the relevant entities by assigning of weights to the relative contributions of the parties involved against the value drivers created from the transactions. However, assignment of weights to the value drivers  would  be  subjective.  the  process  of  assigning weights can be backed up by conducting interviews with the employees of both the parties, analysis of the industry, etc in order to determine the weights to be assigned to the value drivers. regression analysis can also be adopted to estimate the relative contribution of the value drivers in enhancing the profits.

3.6.4    Bargaining capacity

Under this approach, the outcome of the bargaining between independent enterprises in the open market can be the criteria to allocate the residual profits. This is a two step approach. In the first step, post the determination  of the combined profits, the lowest price available in the open market should be given to the entities involved in the  transaction.  thereafter,  the  highest  price  available that the buyer is willing to pay should be estimated. The difference between such highest and the lowest price should be considered as the residual profit. In the second step, the residual profit should be allocated amongst the entities involved in the transaction on the basis of how the independent enterprises would have split the said differential profits.

however, this approach has not seen much practical application in india.

Factors impacting profit split

3.6.5    Timing Issues

Timing is an important aspect that needs to be factored while determining the relevant period from which the elements of determination of the allocation keys is based. Difficulty could be on account of the time gap between the incurring of the expenses and time when the value  is created. Also, in certain instances, it could be difficult to identify which period’s expenses are to be considered. This  determination  is  of  prime  importance  in  order  to appropriately allocate the  profits  between  the  parties to the controlled transactions based on the facts and circumstances of the case.

3.6.6    Estimation of projected profits

In a scenario where PSm is applied by the ae to determine the transfer price in controlled transactions, then each AE would have to achieve the profits that independent enterprise would have expected to realize in similar circumstances. Generally, such transfer prices would be based upon projected profits rather than actual profits as it would not be possible for the taxpayers to know what the profits of the business activity would be at the time of establishing the transfer price. When the tax authority analyses the application of PSM to assess if the method has reliably established the arm’s length transfer price then it is critical to acknowledge that the tax payer at the point of establishing the transfer price would not have known the actual profit of the business activity. In such a scenario the application of PSm would be contrary to the arm’s length principle because the independent parties in similar circumstances would have only relied on projections.

3.7    Example of PSM under the residual profit split approach

Facts of the case

a.    FCO  is  engaged  in  manufacturing  and  selling  of semiconductor products. It developed an original semiconductor and holds the patent for the manufacturing technology.
b.    FCO  has  an  overseas  subsidiary  ICO which  is engaged in developing and manufacturing digital equipment using the new semiconductors as well as additional technology developed by itself.
c.    Company ICO is the only manufacturer licensed by FCO to manufacture the new semiconductor.
d.    FCO   purchases   all   of   the   digital   equipment manufactured by ICO and sells them to third parties.

Key aspect of the transaction

Both FCO and ICO contribute to the success of the digital equipment through their design of the semiconductor and  the  equipment.  The  key  driver  of  the  transaction is  the  technology.  The  products  are  very  advanced  in technology and unique in design and concept.

Independent comparables with similar profile or intangible assets could not be obtained due to the uniqueness of the  transaction.  Therefore,  none  of  the  methods  being CUP, CPM or TNMM could be considered as the ‘most appropriate method’ in this case. Accordingly, PSM was considered as the most appropriate method.

Upon screening of various external data sources, the group is able to obtain reliable data on digital equipment contract manufacturers and its wholesalers. However, upon analysis it was noted that these  manufacturers and wholesalers did not own any unique intangibles. Comparable external data revealed that the manufacturers ordinarily earn a mark-up of 10% while the wholesalers derive a 25% margin on sales.

Application of PSM

Step 1 – Determining the basic return

Particulars

ICo

FCo

Sales

125

150

Cost
of Goods Sold

85

125

Gross margin

40

25

Less
: Operating expenses

5

15

operating margin

35

10


The simplified accounts of FCO and ICO are as under:

The total operating profit for the group is $ 45 (35+10)

Calculation of returns for contract manufacturer function

ICO (Contract Manufacturer)

Cost of goods sold

$ 85

Margins
earned by contract manufactures in ICO country

10%

Cost mark-up of ICO

(10% x 85) 8.5

Transfer
price based on independent compa- rables (without intangibles)

$ 93.50

FCO (intangible owner)

Sales to third party customers

$ 150

Resale
margin of wholesalers comparables (without intangibles)

25%

Resale margin (or gross margin)

$ 37.50

Computation of basic return based on comparables (without intangibles)

Particulars

ICo (in $)

FCo (in $)

Sales

93.5

 

Cost
of Goods Sold

85

 

Gross margin

8.5

37.5

Operating
expenses

5

15

Routine operating margin

3.5

22.5

The total Routine operating margin of the group is $ 26.

Step 2: Dividing the residual profit

The residual profit of the group is Operating Profit – routine operating margins given to both entities = $45 –
$26 = $19

Identifying intangibles (i.e. key value drivers): detailed analysis of the two companies demonstrated that two particular expense items namely r&d expenses and marketing expenses are key intangibles critical to the success of the digital equipment.

the r&d expenses and marketing expenses incurred by each company are (assumed):
FCO $12 (80%)
ICO $ 3 (20%)

Assuming  that  the  r&d  and  marketing  expenses  are equally significant in contributing to the residual profits, based on the proportionate expenses incurred:
FCO’s share of residual profit (80% x 19) $15.20 ICO’s share of residual profit (20% x 19) $ 3.80

Apportionment of adjusted profit Therefore, the adjusted operating profit of FCO is = $22.50 + $15.20 = $37.70
ICO is = $3.50 + $3.80 = $7.30

The adjusted tax accounts are as follows:

Particulars

ICo

FCo (in $)

Sales

97.3

150

Cost
of Goods Sold

85

97.3

Gross margin

12.3

52.7

Sales,
General & Admin

5

15

operating margin

7.3

37.7


hence, the transfer price for iCo sales to fCo determined using the residual analysis approach should be $97.30.
 
Key factors to be considered for PSM
(a)    robust   far   analysis   is   basis   on   which   the contribution of the parties to the key value drivers of the transaction would be determined
(b)    in depth knowledge of industry is necessary in deciding on the key value drivers
(c)    detailed discussion with the personnel of the parties to the international transaction would be crucial in concluding on the key value drivers and the weights that could be assigned based on the contribution of each party to the transaction.

3.8    Practical difficulties when applying PSM

Application of PSM could pose certain difficulties which could restrict the determination of the combined profits for the purpose of allocation amongst the enterprises involved in the transactions.

Some of the practical difficulties are mentioned below:

(a)    ascertaining the basis to split that is economically valid could be a difficulty that the AE could face.
(b)    disaggregating the controlled transaction in a case of highly integrated transactions could be difficult considering the levels of integration within the group entities.
(c)    availability of external comparables  for  valuation  of intangibles and other unique contributions could pose challenges.
.
3.9    Strengths and weaknesses

3.9.1    PSM includes the following strengths:

?    offers solution for highly integrated operations for which one-sided method would not be appropriate. also appropriate to transactions where both parties make unique and valuable contributions to the transaction.
?    Best suited for transactions where the traditional methods prove inappropriate due to lack of comparable transactions.
?    Offers flexibility by taking into account specific, possibly unique, facts and circumstances of the associated enterprises that are not present in independent enterprises while still constituting an arm’s length approach to the extent that it reflects what independent enterprises would have done under same circumstances.
?    application of this method does not result in either party to the controlled transaction being left with an extreme and improbable profit result as both the parties to the transaction are evaluated.
? able to deal with returns to synergies between intangible assets or profits arising from economies of scale.

3.9.2    PSM includes the following weaknesses:

?    Splitting of residual profits under the residual analysis on the basis of relative value is weak considering the assumption that synergy value is divided pro rata to the relative value of the inputs.
?    Dependency on access to data from foreign affiliates to determine the combined profits. Difficulty to  the aes and tax administrators to obtain information from foreign affiliates.
?    Difficulty in ascertaining the combined revenues and costs for all the associated enterprises taking part in the controlled transactions due to difference in accounting practices. also allocation of the costs to the controlled transaction vis-à-vis other activities of the aes would be difficult.

3.10    Indian tax authorities views on certain transactions

3.10.1    Captive research and development centers

India’s pool of scientific and engineering talent has attracted several global corporations to set up research and development (r&d) centers in india. these set ups generally operate as a limited risk captive center being compensated on a cost plus mark-up basis by their overseas parent companies. The influx of such centers has generated employment opportunities, large scale capital investment in state of art facilities and made path for cutting edge technologies. However, the indian tax authorities have challenged the business models and pricing mechanisms adopted by such centers and have resorted to attributing higher compensation for the r&d activities performed by indian entity. The higher margins applied by the tax authorities has stirred dispute and uncertainty amongst the key players in this sector.

The  rangachary  committee  was  set  up  by  the  indian Government to make recommendation on the transfer pricingissues faced by r&d centers. The said committee’s report prompted the Central Board of direct taxes (CBDT) to issue following circulars with an aim to provide certainty on such issues:

(a)    Circular No. 2 of 2013 – made the application of PSM almost mandatory for determining the profits attributable  to  the  r&d  centers  especially  those which perform r&d activity involving generation and transfer of unique tangibles or engaged in multiple and highly integrated international transactions.
(b)    Circular No. 3 of 2013 – prescribed certain conditions on fulfillment of which the R&D centers could be treated as entities bearing insignificant risks and would not be required to apply PSM.

The  said  circulars  was  not  accepted  by  the  taxpayers and based on various representations made by the stakeholders the CBDT rescinded Circular no.  2  to  state there were hierarchy of methods and that PSm  was preferred method to determine arm’s length price of intangibles or multiple inter-related transactions. Further Circular no. 6 was introduced in place of erstwhile Circular No. 3. The circular also classified R&D centres into following 3 categories:

?    Centres which are entrepreneurial in nature
?    Centres based on cost sharing arrangements
?    Centres which undertake minimal insignificant risks in the r&d activities in india.

The  amended  circulars  3  and  6  states  that  PSm  is  not the  most  appropriate  method  for  the  r&d  centers  with insignificant risks bearing and that TNMM can be applied for determining the arm’s length .

3.10.2    Location savings

Location savings refers to the cost savings in a low cost jurisdictions like india are instrumental in increasing the profits of the parent companies. The Indian tax authorities are of the view that such savings should be factored while determining the arm’s length price for the indian entity. Accordingly, the tax authorities have proposed high mark- ups for captive iteS/ it sectors.

The tax authorities are of the opinion that in addition to the operational advantages leading to location savings, India offers location specific advantages (LSA) such as highly specialised and skilled manpower and knowledge, access and proximity to growing markets, large consumer base, etc. The incremental profit from LSA is known as location  rents.  The  tax  authorities  have  acknowledged that an arm’s length compensation should factor an appropriate split of cost savings between the parties. Hence, the tax authorities recommend profit split method as most appropriate method to determine the arm’s length compensation for cost savings and location rents between the parties.

3.10.3    Investment banking

By nature the investment banking transactions are complex, integrated and require contributions from different locations within the group to co-ordinate and interact with each other to complete a transaction and deliver efficient solutions to the client. The services cannot be easily segregated and accordingly assignment of fees towards each of the service is a difficult proposition.

Over the years, india’s role has evolved from being a support service provider providing routine services like back-office and administration to performing high end functions like origination, underwriting and execution. Accordingly, the indian investment banking companies have to adopt global pricing policies followed at group level. the Global policy generally provides for an allocation of income/revenue of the group to various group entities. It reflects the factor approach discussed in the Guidelines on Global trading discussed in the oeCd report on the Attribution of Profits to Permanent Establishments.

Considering that the investment  banking  operations  are highly integrated and also involve contributions by various group entities, PSM could be considered as the most appropriate method. However, since the policies of investment banking call for split of gross revenues or split of revenues on a deal by deal basis, as such they do not strictly fall under the PSM according to the indian transfer pricing regulations. However, the other method (i.e. sixth method notified) could be evaluated for this purpose.

3.11    Indian judicial precedence

Global One India Private Limited vs. ACIT [TS-115- ITAT-2014(Del)

The PSm prescribed in the indian TP regulations is quite unique as compared to the OECD guidelines and UN TP manual. While the OECD Guidelines and the un TP Manual allow flexibility to the taxpayer to adopt any of the sub methods namely – contribution PSM, residual PSM or  comparable  PSM,  the  indian  TP  regulations  require the residual/contribution PSM to be substantiated by comparable PSM.

The    tribunal    observed    that    allocation    based    on benchmarking with external uncontrolled transactions would result in impossibility of application as it is not possible to obtain comparables for allocating residual profits. Further, the Tribunal observed that the prescription in  the  rules  to  mandatorily  use  the  comparable  PSM to split profits would make the PSM redundant in most case as obtaining relevant market data on third party for splitting profits would be difficult. Such data would be available in cases of joint venture arrangements.

The  tribunal  in  this  landmark  ruling  held  that  residual PSM was the most appropriate method. By placing reliance on the OECD Guidelines, UN TP manual and US TP regulations, the Tribunal held that the residual profits should be allocated based on relative value of each enterprises contribution.

The  tribunal  also  accepted  that  if  the  PSM  applied  by the taxpayer did not fit within the definition of PSM then the same could be considered as the ‘other method’ as provided in rule 10AB of the rules. The tribunal observed that the ‘other method’ applicable retrospectively, was introduced with the intention of enabling the determination of the arm’s length price for cases where prescribed methods posed practical difficulty in application.

ITO vs. Net Freight (India) Pvt. Ltd.[TS-363-ITAT- 2013(DEL)-TP]

The application of the PSm under the indian tP regulations is  detailed  in  rules  10B  and  10C.  the  tribunal  in  this ruling explained the application of PSm based on the guidance  provided  in  rule  10B(1)(d)  and  observed  the following:

•    A plain reading of the Rule 10(b)(1)(d) demonstrates that PSm is applicable mainly in international transactions – (a) involving transfer of unique intangibles; (b) in multiple international transactions which are so interrelated that they cannot be evaluated separately.
•    Under the transfer pricing rules described the assessee can adopt either contribution PSM, where the entire system profits are split among the various aes swho are parties to the transaction in question or residual PSM, where each of the aes who are parties to the transaction in question are first assigned routine basic returns for the routine functions performed by the, and there after the residual profits are split among the AES.

Aztek Software (TS-4-ITAT-2007(Bang)-TP)

In special bench ruling the application of PSm was explained in detail. The Tribunal observed that the profits needs to be split among the associated enterprises on the basis of reliable external market data, which indicates how the unrelated parties have split the profits in similar circumstances. Further, the tribunal held that for practical application, benchmarking with reliable external market data is to be done in case of residual PSM, at the first stage, where the combined net profits are partially allocated to each enterprise so as to provide it with an appropriate base return keeping in view the nature of the transaction. The residual profits may be split as per the relative contribution of the associated enterprise. also, for splitting the residuary profits a scientific basis for allocation may be applied.

3.12    Conclusion

The  PSM  has  recently  become  more  acceptable  as  an appropriate method and the revenue authorities are applying the method more frequently to determine the arm’s length price of controlled transactions. Correctly structured application of PSm is fully consistent with arm’s length economies and the separate enterprise standard. however, application of multiple methods as a corroborative to evaluate the arm’s length result of the most appropriate method has found place in practice. PSM can be used along with one or more transfer pricing methods to arrive at an arm’s length result. it is of importance to note that PSm as a method brings out principles on how to split profits among the AEs involved in the transaction, however it is a question whether under the domestic laws the adjusted profits (post allocation) should be taxed or not. Given the current complexity of the transactions and evolving business atmosphere, flexibility in application of methods is of utmost importance in order to determine the arm’s length pricing and arrive at firm and robust solution to the group.

Indian Transfer Pricing – The Journey So Far

fiogf49gjkf0d
1 Introduction

1.1. In 1920-1923,
the International Chamber of Commerce (‘ICC’) commenced a process to
develop a model income tax treaty in the immediate aftermath of World
War I. It was the period of conception for the model treaties of today.
Though the work has been lost as the world has evolved, it is
instructive with respect to the current tax policies being espoused by
Source Countries.

1.2. T he repercussions of the World War I
left England with enormous war debt. There was a material flow of
commerce between England and India. For the most part, England
transferred capital, technology, and access to global markets to
affiliates in India. India responded with commodities and produced
goods. England became a creditor and India a debtor. These dealings led
to a major concern as to how income from these activities should be
shared between “Resident” and “Source” countries.

1.3.
D iagram ‘A’ is still prevalent in present day scenario where tax
havens like BVI, Cayman, Netherlands, Luxembourg, Bermuda, Costa Rica,
etc. are used as a means to drain all the profits generated in developed
and developing countries. 1.4. I CC in its interim report in 1923
proposed what we would call today a profit split or formulary allocation
methodology, to address income allocation between Residence (Creditor)
and Source (Debtor) countries. The proposal was similar to the combined
income methodologies typically used today, to resolve major Competent
Authority cases under treaty mutual agreement procedures cases between
countries with Multinational Enterprise (MNE) in the middle. Frankly, it
is also similar to the methodologies for evaluating intangibles in the
2012 OECD discussion draft. 1.5. T he OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines
(OECD Guidelines) as amended and updated, were first published in 1995;
this followed previous OECD reports on transfer pricing in 1979 and
1984. The OECD Guidelines represent a consensus among OECD Members,
mostly developed countries, and have largely been followed in domestic
transfer pricing regulations of these countries. Another transfer
pricing framework of note which has evolved over time is represented by
the USA Transfer Pricing Regulations (26 USC 482). The European
Commission has also developed proposals on income allocation to members
of MNEs active in the European Union (EU). Some of the approaches
considered have included the possibility of a “common consolidated
corporate tax base (CCTB)” and “home state taxation.” 1.6. The United
Nations for its part published an important report on “International
Income Taxation and Developing Countries” in 1988. The report discusses
significant opportunities for transfer pricing manipulation by MNEs to
the detriment of developing country tax bases. It recommends a range of
mechanisms specially tailored to deal with the particular intra-group
transactions by developing countries. The United Nations Conference on
Trade and Development (UNCTAD ) also issued a major report on Transfer
Pricing in 1999.

1.7. T he Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development (“OECD”) has had an absolute presence as a
provider of global guidelines for international taxation area. While the
OECD is based on the consensus of 34 developed countries, it has
played an enormous role on the international taxation issues such as
setting guidelines for model tax treaty, transfer pricing and permanent
establishment, and tackling the international tax avoidance issue.

1.8.
O n the other hand, the role of the United Nations (UN) having a
membership of 193 economies (whose working is not consensus based), on
the taxation issue had been limited such as making the model tax treaty
for developing countries. However, the UN has recently increased the
presence on this area especially in the field of transfer pricing and
has released its Manual on Transfer Pricing in May, 2013.

2. Evolution of Transfer Pricing in India

2.1.
T he year 1991 is considered a watershed year in modern India’s
economic history. It was after all the year in which the Indian economy
was “opened up,” i.e., liberalised by the then widely hailed Finance
Minister, Dr. Manmohan Singh, the former Indian Prime Minister. The
economic reforms of 1991 were far-reaching including opening up India
for international trade and investment, taxation reforms, inflation
controls, deregulation and privatisation. These reforms opened the
floodgates and caused over the next two decades huge amounts of foreign
cash flows into and out of India.

2.2. From a taxation
perspective, these huge foreign cash flows brought into bright spotlight
the issue of transfer pricing wherein the Indian companies ought to
price their services, or imports as the case maybe, to their group
companies outside India at arm’s length, i.e., what they would charge,
or pay for in case of imports, to an unrelated third party in the open
market.

2.3. The underlying logic is that Indian companies might
under-charge their services or over-price their imports to group
companies and thereby shift their profits abroad for various reasons
such as for saving taxes if the tax rate abroad is lower, etc. The
Indian Government, like most others, is heavily dependent on tax revenue
and simply cannot ignore tax avoidance issues on this scale. So it
stepped up in 2001 and amended the Indian Income-tax Act of 1961 (‘ITA
’) via the Finance Act of 2001 and added a new chapter titled “Chapter
X: Special Provisions Relating to Avoidance of Tax” and introduced
section 92 in Chapter X containing s/s. 92A to 92F and Income Tax Rules
(Rule 10A-10E) laying out specific TP provisions for the first time. In other words, the foundations of the Indian TP maze were laid!

2.4.
In India, under the ITA , prior to the introduction of TPR in 2001,
section 92 was the only section dealing with the Transfer Pricing and
that was the only statutory provision available to the Revenue
Authorities for making certain adjustments in the income of a resident
arising from the business carried on with a non-resident as provided in
the said section 92. Rules 10 and 11 in the Income-tax Rules,1962 (‘the
IT Rules’) were also available for this purpose, i.e., Old Provisions.
However, these statutory provisions and the Rules were not giving
sufficient powers to the Revenue Authority to find out whether the
foreign companies/non-residents operating in India or earning in India
were being taxed on their Indian income on an arm’s length basis and at
the same time, necessary powers were also lacking in most cases, for
making appropriate adjustments in the Indian income of such entities in
cases where the transaction appeared to be not on an arm’s length basis.
At the same time, under the ITA , another provision contained in
section 40A(2) which deals with the disallowance of expenses to the
extent they are found unreasonable where the payments are made to
related parties was also limited in scope to deal with the cases of
cross border transactions. With the liberalisation of policies with
regard to participation of the MNE in the Indian economy, need for
comprehensive provisions to protect the interest of the Indian Revenue
and collect the legitimate due share of taxes in cross border
transactions as also a need to streamline the Law and procedure in that
respect was felt. That is how, new provisions relating to Transfer
Pricing have been introduced by the Finance Act, 2001 (in place of the
above referred section 92) w.e.f. Asst. Yr. 2002-03 i.e., New Provisions.

Objects of the New Provisions

2.5.    As stated in the earlier para, the new provisions have been introduced in the act to overcome the limi- tation of the old provisions and also to make more comprehensive provisions in the act and the rules relating to transfer pricing to safeguard the interest of indian revenue with regard to income arising in cross border transactions. the new provisions (sec- tions 92 to 92f) are contained in Chapter-X of the it act with the heading “special provisions relating to avoidance of tax” and therefore, the introduction of the new provisions is primarily an anti tax avoidance measure. This is also further fortified by the fact that CBdt Circular no.14 of 2001, while explaining these new provisions, also explains the same under the head “new legislation” to curb tax avoidance by abuse of “transfer pricing.” the object of these pro- visions gets clarified from the following two paras of the said Circular:

“55.1. The increasing participation of multinational groups in economic activities in the country has given rise to new and complex issues emerging from transactions entered into between two   or more enterprises belonging to the same multi- national group. The profits derived by such enterprises carrying on business in India can be controlled by the multi-national group by manipulating the prices charged and paid in such intra-group, transactions, thereby, leading to erosion of tax revenues.

55.2. Under the existing section 92 of the IT Act, which was the only section dealing specifically with cross border transactions, an adjustment could be made to the profits of a resident arising from a business carried on between the resident and a non-resident, if it appeared to the Assessing Officer that owing to the close connection between them, the course of business was so arranged so as to produce less than expected profits to the resident. Rule 11 prescribed under the section provided a method of estimation of reasonable profits in such cases. However, this provision was of a general nature and limited in scope. It did not allow adjustment of income in the case of nonesidents. It referred to a “close connection” which was undefined and vague. It provided for adjustment of profits rather than adjustment of prices, and the rule prescribed for estimating profits was not scientific. It also did not apply to individual transactions such as payment of royalty, etc., which are not part of regular business carried on between a resident and a non-resident. There were also no detailed rules prescribing the documentation required to be maintained.”

2.6.    The above object would be very relevant for the purpose of interpreting the new provisions because the provisions deal with the computation of income from an “international transaction” between “associated enterprises” (‘AES’) and provide the basis of such computation.

3.    Transfer Pricing regime in India

3.1.    Under the new provisions, any income arising from an “international transaction” is required to be computed having regard to the arm’s length price (alp). The ALP is defined to mean a price which is applied (or proposed to be applied) in a transaction between the persons other than aes, in uncontrolled conditions. It is also clarified that the allowance for any expense or interest arising from an “international transaction” shall also be determined having regard to the alp. in short, the law now expects that computation of income in such cases (including allowance for expense) should be based on a price which one would consider for the purpose of entering in to a transaction with an unrelated party (i.e., not “associated Enterprise” as defined). – [Section 92(1) and explanation thereto and section 92f(ii)].

3.2.    It is also provided that in an “international transaction” or “Specified Domestic Transaction” (“SDT”), if under mutual agreement or arrangement between aes any arrangement for sharing cost, expenses etc. incurred (or to be incurred) in connection with   a benefit, service or facility for the benefit of such aes is made, the same will also be covered within the new provisions (hereinafter such arrangement  is referred to as Cost sharing arrangement) and accordingly, such Cost sharing arrangement between the aes should also be determined having regard to ALP of such benefit, service or facility, as the case may be. accordingly, the allocation or apportionment of cost or expense under such arrangement amongst various aes is also required to be made having regard to the ALP of such benefit, service or facility, as the case may be. – [Section 92(2)]

3.3.    s/s. (2a) of section 92 provides that in relation to the SDST would be computed having regard to ALP:
1)    Any allowance for an expenditure, 2) any allowance for interest, 3) allocation of any cost or expense and 4) any income. The first two clauses would be relevant from viewpoint of an assessee who incurs the expenses or interest in relation to sdt. the third clause would be relevant in case of cost sharing arrangements, whereby the cost or expense needs to be allocated between two or more assessees having regard to alp. The fourth clause would be relevant from the angle of determining the income of an assessee undertaking an sdt.

3.4.    A specific provision has also been made stating that the above referred provisions providing for determining income or Cost sharing arrangement in an “international transaction” on the basis of alp shall not apply if the application of those provisions has the effect of reducing the taxable income or increasing the loss under the act which may otherwise be comput- ed on the basis of entries made in the relevant books of account. Therefore, in effect, the above provisions will have to be applied only if the application thereof results into tax advantage to the Revenue. – [Section 92(3)]

3.5.    Considering the definition of the term “International transaction” and “associated enterprises,” the pro- visions of section 92 will be attracted only in cases where any income arises (including allowance of ex- penses), or in cases of Cost sharing arrangement, only if the transaction is between two AEs [except in exceptional cases, referred to section 92B(2)], and at least one of the parties to the transactions is non-resident and the transaction is regarded as “international Transaction” as defined in the Chapter. Consider- ing the very wide definition of the terms “Associated enterprises”  and the “international transaction,” the scope of the applicability of the provisions of section 92 is very wide and therefore, one has to be very careful before coming to conclusion as to non-applicability thereof, particularly in cases where the transaction involves a related non-resident.

?    Associated enterprise (AE)

3.6.    the provisions relating to computation of income or Cost sharing arrangements will be attracted only if the transaction is between “associated enterprises” and therefore, the understanding of the term “associ- ated enterprise” (ae) is very crucial. this has been exhaustively defined in section 92A.

3.7.    The tests to be applied for determining whether an enterprise is an AE or not [as contained in section 92a] can be divided into two parts viz. General tests and Specific Tests.

3.8.    Under  the  General  tests,  in  substance,  it  is  provided that if one enterprise, directly or indirectly (or through one or more intermediaries), participates in the management, control or capital of the other enterprise or if common persons similarly participate in the management, control or capital of both the enterprises, then, such enterprise could be regarded as “associated enterprise” (ae). these General tests do not lay down any specific method or percentage to determine as to when the same should be applied.  therefore, the application of General tests for such purposes will depend on the facts of each case. this will have to be understood in the context of these provisions. Broadly, these provisions are similar to the provisions contained in article 9 of the Model Conventions (OECD as well as UN). – [Sec- tion 92a(1)]

3.9.    Under the Specific Tests, it is provided that two enterprises shall be deemed to be aes if, at any time during the year any of the Specific Tests is satisfied. for  this  purpose,  twelve  different  tests  have  been provided and the power has also been given to pre- scribe further tests based on a relationship of mutual interest between the two enterprises. however, till date no such additional test has been prescribed. a debate is on as to whether the Specific Tests are the examples  of  the  General tests  or  each  one  of  the Specific Tests is exhaustive in the sense that once the same is satisfied, the enterprise should be regarded as ae irrespective of the fact as to whether the test of participation in management, control or capital (referred to in the General Tests) is satisfied or not. – [Section 92A(2)]

3.10.    With regard to independent application of the General tests,  an  important  question  is  whether  provi- sions contained in section 92a(1) are in any way controlled by the provisions of section 92a(2). in this context, the issue was under debate as to where the two enterprises do not become aes under any  of the Specific Tests, then, whether by applying the General  tests  independently,  two  enterprises  can be brought within the meaning of aes u/s. 92a(1). it seems that this issue gets resolved on account of the amendment made in section 92a(2) by the finance act, 2002 read with the memorandum explaining the relevant provisions of the finance Bill, 2002, which reads as under:

“The existing provisions contained in section 92a of the income-tax act provide as to when two enterprises shall be deemed to be associated enterprises.

It is proposed to amend s/s. (2) of the said section to clarify that the mere fact of participation by one enterprise in the management or control or capital of the other enterprise, or the participation of one or more persons in the management or control or capital of both the enterprises shall not make them associated enterprises, unless the criteria specified in s/s. (2) are fulfilled.”

3.11.    In cases where two enterprises have become aes by applying the provisions of section 92a of the act, an interesting issue is under debate as to whether, by taking recourse to article of the relevant treaty dealing with AE [similar to Article 9 of the OECD/ un model treaties], it is possible to argue that such enterprises are not be regarded as aes if, by ap- plication of the provisions of article 9 of the relevant treaty, they do not become aes.

3.12.    For  the  purpose  of  this  Chapter,  the  term  “enter- prise” has already been exhaustively defined and the definition of the term is very wide. In effect, the term “enterprise” would include every person carrying on any activity (which may or may not amount to business) relating to the production, storage, supply, distribution, acquisition or control of articles or goods or know how, patent etc. in fact, list of the activities is so wide that, by and large, every activity may get covered. even a “permanent establishment” (pe) carrying on such activity is also treated as an “enterprise” for the purpose of this Chapter. Therefore, even a Branch of a foreign Bank carrying on any activity in india will be regarded as “enterprise.”

3.13.    The term PE, for this purpose, is defined to include a fixed place of business through which the business of the “enterprise” is wholly or partly carried on. therefore, it appears that the `pe’ would be regarded as an “enterprise” only when it carries on business and that too through a fixed place of business. – [Section 92F(iii) and (iiia)].

?    International Transaction

3.14.    for  the  purpose  of  applicability  of  section  92  a transaction giving rise to income or a transaction relating to Cost sharing arrangement has to be an “international transaction.”

3.15.    The term “international transaction” has been ex- haustively defined to mean transaction between two or more aes (of which at least one of them should be non resident) in the nature of purchase, sale or lease of any tangible or intangible property or provision of services or lending or borrowing of money, or any other transaction having a bearing on the profits, income, losses or assets of such en- terprise etc. and includes a Cost sharing arrange- ment between two or more aes. Considering the wide  meaning  of  the  term  “international  transac- tion,” by and large, every transaction between two aes involving at least one non resident will get covered. it is not necessary that for a transaction to be an “international transaction,” it must be cross border transaction. even a transaction between head Office of a Foreign Company outside India and its ae in india may get covered. a transaction between a pe of a foreign Company in india and its ae in in- dia (say, subsidiary of such foreign Company) may also get covered. even a transaction between two non residents giving rise to taxable income under the ita may get covered. on the other hand, transaction between two resident aes will fall outside the scope of the term “international transaction,” e.g. a transaction between an indian Bank and its foreign Branch though regarded as transaction between two aes, the same will not be regarded as “interna- tional transaction” since the same is between two resident enterprises. – [Section 92B(1)]

3.16.    A deeming fiction has also been provided to treat even a transaction between one enterprise and another unrelated enterprise (which is not ae) as  a transaction entered in to between two aes in a case where there exists a prior agreement between the ae of the enterprise and the unrelated enter- prise in relation to the transaction entered into with such unrelated enterprise or the terms of the rel- evant transaction are determined in substance be- tween such ae and the unrelated enterprise. para 55.8 of the CBDT Circular no.14 of 2001 explains this with an illustration of a case where a resident enterprise exports goods to unrelated persons abroad and there is a separate agreement or an arrangement between such unrelated person and an AE of the resident enterprise which influences the price at which those goods are exported. such a transaction will also be regarded as “international transaction” though the same is entered into with unrelated enterprise by virtue of this deeming fiction provided in the act. it seems that the deeming fiction is attracted only in a case where there exists a prior agreement in relation to the relevant transaction between the unrelated party and such ae. other transactions with such unrelated party would not get covered within the scope of the term “inter- national Transaction.” – [Section 92B(2)]

3.17.    The Finance Act, 2012 has now expanded the definition by bringing in specific transactions. The trans- actions that are covered now include purchase, sale, transfer or lease of various kinds of tangible and intangible properties; various modes of capital financing; provision of services; and business re- structuring or reorganisation transactions. further, as per the revised definition, business restructuring transactions include all transactions, whether they have a bearing on profit or loss or not, either at the time of the transaction or at any future date. this has been done in light of recent judicial precedents in Dana Corporation ([2010] 186 Taxman 00187 (AAR)), Amiantit International Holding Ltd. ([2010] 189 taxman 00149 (aar)), Vanenburg Group B.V. (289 itr 464), which held that transfer pricing provisions cannot apply in a case where there is no impact on profit or loss or income.

3.18.    The term ‘international transaction’ included transactions in the nature of purchase, sale or lease of intangible  property.  The  term  ‘intangible  property’ was not defined. The term ‘intangible property’ has now been defined and expanded to a large extent, by including various types of intangible properties related to marketing, technology, artistic, data processing, engineering, customer, contract, human capital, location, goodwill, and any similar item which derives its value from intellectual content rather than physical attributes.

3.19.    Presently, transactions entered with an unrelated person is deemed as a transaction between associ- ated enterprises if there exists a prior agreement in relation to such transaction between such unrelated person and an associated enterprise or the terms of the relevant transaction are determined in substance between such unrelated person and the associated  enterprise  the  present  provisions  do not provide whether or not such unrelated person should also be a non-resident. The Finance act, 2014 has amended such transaction deemed to be an international transaction irrespective of whether such unrelated person is a resident or non-resident as long as either the enterprise or the associated enterprise is a non-resident.

?    Arm’s length Price (ALP)
3.20.    As stated earlier, the ultimate object of the new pro- visions is to ensure that the “international transac- tions” between aes take place at the alp so that the interest of the revenue is safeguarded and the Country gets its due share of taxes from the income arising in such transactions.

3.21.    The methods for determination of ALP are specifi- cally provided.  for this purpose, the alp in relation to “international transaction” is required to be de- termined by selecting the most appropriate method out of the following methods:

a)    Comparable Uncontrolled Price Method (CUP) – the Cup method compares the price charged for a property or service transferred in a controlled transaction to the price charged for a comparable property or service transferred in a comparable uncontrolled transaction in com- parable circumstances.

b)    resale  Price  Method  (RPM)  –  the  resale price method is used to determine the price to be paid by a reseller for a product purchased from an associated enterprise and resold to an independent enterprise. the purchase price is set so that the margin earned by the reseller  is sufficient to allow it to cover its selling and operating expenses and make an appropriate profit.

c)    Cost Plus Method (CPM) – the Cost plus meth- od is used to determine the appropriate price to be charged by a supplier of property or services to a related purchaser. the price is determined by adding to costs incurred by the supplier an appropriate gross margin so that the supplier will make an appropriate profit in the light of market conditions and functions performed.
d)    Profit Split Method (PSM) – Profit-split methods take the combined  profits  earned  by two related parties from one or a series of transactions and then divide those profits using an economically valid defined basis that aims at replicating the division of profits that would have been anticipated in an agreement made at arm’s length. arm’s length pricing is therefore derived for both parties by working back from profit to price.

e)    Transactional Net Margin Method (TNMM) – these methods seek to determine the level of profits that would have resulted from controlled transactions by reference to the return realised by the comparable independent enterprise. the TNMM determines the net profit margin rela- tive to an appropriate base realised from the controlled transactions by reference to the net profit margin relative to the same appropriate base realised from uncontrolled transactions.

f)    Any other method as may be prescribed – recently  vide  Circular  dated  23rd  may,  2012 the CBdt has prescribed a sixth method, i.e., rule 10aB for computation of the arm’s length price operative from 1st april, 2012 and applicable from assessment year 2012-13. for analytical purposes, the new method may be split into two parts:

i.    any method which takes into account the price which has been charged or paid; or
ii.    any method which takes into account the price which would have been charged or paid

The first part refers to a price that has actually been charged or paid and in that sense necessitates the ex- istence of a real or actual same or similar uncontrolled transaction. this  is  similar  to  the  existing  Cup  method though  broader  in  scope.  the  second  part  –  ‘or  would have been charged or paid’ – is more significant with wider ramifications.

3.22.    The  above  referred  methods  hereinafter  are  referred to as Specified Methods. Out of the above referred five Specified Methods, the Most Appropriate method is required to be selected having regard to the nature of the transaction, class of transactions or aes, functions performed by such persons or such other relevant factors as may be
prescribed. -[Section 92C(1)]

3.23.    For   the   purpose   of   determining   the  alp   and selecting the most appropriate method out of the Specified Methods for the International Transac- tions, rules 10B and 10C are relevant.

3.24.    Each of the Specified Methods and the manner of determining alp under each one of them has been provided in the Rules. Each of the Specified Methods has been explained and it is also provided that the differences, if any, between the comparable uncontrolled prices/transactions and the relevant transaction should be determined and such dif- ferences should be adjusted to arrive at the alp.
– [Rule 10B(1)]

3.25.    Since under each of the Specified Methods, primar-ily, the alp is required to be determined by making comparison with the uncontrolled prices/transactions, necessary general criteria have also been given in the rules to enable the entity as to how to judge the comparability of uncontrolled transactions  with  the  “international  transaction.”  effec- tively, these criteria are based on general economic and commercial sense approach and the same will have to be used while determining such compara- bility e.g. for determining comparability of transac- tion, the terms and conditions of both the transac- tions also will have to be the same and if there is any difference between the same, the necessary adjustments will have to be made in respect of such difference. – [Rule 10B(2)]

3.26.    It has also been specifically provided that the un- controlled transaction shall be treated as compa- rable with the “international transaction” if the dif- ference between the two are not likely to materially affect the price, or cost, charged or paid etc. in such transaction in the open market or alternatively, reasonably accurate adjustment can be made to elimi- nate the material effect of such difference. this, in effect, provides that the uncontrolled transaction ultimately has to be commercially comparable either without material differences or with reasonably accurate adjustments for such differences with the “International Transaction.” – [Rule 10B(3)]

3.27.    It has also been  provided  that  for  the  purpose of determining the comparability of uncontrolled transaction  with  the  “international  transaction,”  the data relating to the financial year of the “International transaction” should be used to analyse the comparability with the uncontrolled transaction. under certain circumstances, the data of earlier two financial years can also be used for this purpose. – [Rule 10B(4)]

?    Most appropriate method
3.28.Since the alp is required to be determined on the basis of the most appropriate method out of the Specified Methods, the basis of selection of the most appropriate method and the manner of appli- cation of the method so selected have also been prescribed in Rule 10C. – [Section 92C(2)]

3.29.    It is provided that the most appropriate method shall be selected considering the facts and cir- cumstances  of  “international  transaction”  where the same becomes the basis for determining the most reliable measure of alp in relation to rel- evant “international transaction.” for the purpose of making such selection, necessary general crite- ria have also been given in the rules. such crite- ria are primarily based on general economic and commercial common sense approach and also on availability of reliable data, the degree of compa- rability between the “international transaction” and uncontrolled transactions as well as between the enterprises entering into such transactions etc. – [Rule 10C(2)]

3.30.    A specific provision has also been made that while determining the alp by applying the most appropri- ate method, if the variation between alp determined and price at which the international transaction has actually been undertaken does not exceed 3 %, the price at which the international transaction has actually been undertaken shall be deemed to be alp. it may be noted that this provision will be applicable only where more than one price is determined un- der the most appropriate method and not in cases where different prices are determined under different Specified Methods.- [Proviso to section 92C(2)]

?    Determination of ALP by the assessing officer (AO)

3.31.    power has also been given to the ao to determine alp other than the alp determined by the assessee under certain circumstances. the ao is empowered to determine such alp where, on the basis of material, information or document in his possession, the ao is of the opinion that :

•    the price charged or paid in an “International Transaction” or sdt has not been determined in accor- dance with section 92C(1) and(2); or

•    the prescribed information and document have not been kept and maintained by the assessee; or

•    the information or data used in computation of ALP is unreliable or incorrect; or

•    the assessee has failed to furnish within 30 days (or extended period of further 30 days) the required information or document.

3.32.    The AO  can  determine  such alp  only  under  the above referred circumstances. in this context, the CBDT has clarified that the AO can have recourse to section 92C(3) only under the circumstances enumerated in the section and in the event of mate- rial information or document in his possession on the basis of which an opinion can be formed that any such circumstance exists. In other cases, the value of international transaction should be ac- cepted without further scrutiny [Cir No. 12 dated 23-08-2001]. Therefore, the onus will be on the ao to prove the existence of any of the above circumstances which should become the basis of forming his opinion and he has to be in possession of some relevant material or information or document for the same. – [Section 92C(3)]

3.33.    It has been specifically provided that the AO should give proper opportunity of being heard to the as- sessee before determining the alp under the above referred provisions. for this purpose, the ao should also disclose the material or information or docu- ment on the basis of which he proposes to exercise his power u/s. 92C(3) and determine the alp. it seems that even if there is no such specific provi- sion, the ao will have to give such opportunity and disclose the material etc. on which he proposes to rely. there can be some debate as to whether and extent to which the information etc. in respect of other assessees in possession of the ao can be disclosed to the assessee on account of the requirement of confidentiality to be maintained in respect of such information gathered by him in respect of other assessees. However, if the ao decides to use the same, the principle of natural justice demands that sufficient information etc. Pertaining to such other assessee will have to be provided to the assessee to enable him to properly explain and defend his case. Of course, the basic issue is still under debate as to whether the material or information or document received or collected by the ao in respect of one assessee, say mr. a, (either in the course of determining alp of mr. a or otherwise) can at all be used for the purpose of determining the alp u/s. 92C(3) of another assessee, say mr. B. this issue merits consideration because Mr. B would never have had any material information about the transactions of Mr. A at the time when Mr. B had determined the transfer prices between himself and his associated enterprises. – [Proviso to section 92C(3)]

3.34.    Once the alp is determined by the ao by exercis- ing his power u/s. 92C(3), he may compute the total income of the assessee having regard to such ALP. It has also been specifically provided that no deduction u/s.10a/10aa/10B or under Chapter Via shall be allowed in respect of the increase in the total income on account of determination of such alp. It may be noted that the ao will not make any adjustment  which  results  in  decrease  in  the total income (or increase in the loss) because of provi- sions contained in section 92(3). – [Section 92C(4) and first Proviso thereto]

3.35.    A specific provision has also been made to prohibit any corresponding adjustment in the hands of the recipients of income where any downward adjust- ment is made in the alp in respect of any payment under the above referred provisions where the tax was deducted or deductible under Chapter XViiB e.g., a royalty at the rate of 5% is paid by a ltd. (resident) to B ltd. (non-resident) treating the same as the alp and the tax is deducted while making such payment to B ltd. if in this case, the ao determines the alp at 4% in respect of such royalty by exercising his power u/s. 92C(3), then, the income of the B ltd., in respect of such royalty shall not be recomputed at 4%. however, in this context, one may consider whether recourse can be taken to the relevant treaty for seeking such recomputation. – [2nd Proviso to section 92C(4)]

3.36.    Use of multiple year data for comparability analysis Presently, the Indian transfer pricing regulations allow the use of single year data for comparability analysis and multiple year data in exceptional cases

The Income Tax rules, 1962 has been amended vide Finance act, 2014 to introduce the regulations to allow use of multiple year data for comparability analy- sis. rules to be issued on this aspect.

3.37.    Inter-quartile range
In India, aLP is determined as the arithmetic mean of the range of prices/margins leading to disputes in majority of the cases. It is a fact that no comparable enterprise can operate at the exactly at the identical level of comparability as the taxpayer/comparables so as to transact at the same price or earn the same margin. Moreover, there are limitations in information available of the comparables and some comparability defects remain that cannot be identified and adjusted. Computing of arithmetic mean as an average of the prices/margins obviously gets distorted by the extreme values and hence does not give a true arm’s length price/margin.

Tax payers as well as tax administrators have gained significant understanding and learning in the data analysis and for the benchmarking processes.

The Finance act, 2014 has introduced the con- cept of inter-quartile range, an internationally accepted concept of range to enhance the reliability of the analysis which includes a sizable number of comparables (statistical tools that take account of central tendency to narrow the range) of such prices/margin will be a step in right direction. This will also reduce disputes at the assessment stage itself.

?    Transfer Pricing officer (TPO)
3.38.    Since specialised knowledge and expertise is re- quired for the purpose of verification and/or deter- mination of ALP, a specific cell is created in the De- partment to deal with major transfer pricing cases. accordingly, the power has been taken by the Gov- ernment for assigning the job of verification or determination of the alp u/s. 92 C and documentation u/s. 92D to specified categories of officers called as tpo  who  could  be  a jt.  Commissioner  or dy. Commissioner  or asst.  Commissioner  of income- tax authorised by the Board. – [Explanation to
section 92Ca]

3.39.    In the last few years, the Government of india has taken many steps in order to strengthen the transfer pricing (taxation) regime in india. a series of amendment has been introduced in order to enhance the ambit of tax base and consequent increase in the revenue. the latest step in this direction was the extension of the transfer pricing provisions to Specified domestic  transaction  w.e.f.  01-04-2012.  another area in which the government achieved considerable success was widening of the scope of the pow- ers of Transfer Pricing Officer. The basic intention of this article is to highlight the latest development that has resulted in strengthening of the powers of the Transfer Pricing Officers along with a summary discussion on section 92 Ca of ita.

3.40.    Section 92Ca deals with role tpo under the trans- fer pricing regime. according to section 92 Ca, the assessing officer (AO) may refer the computation of the arm’s length price (alp) u/s. 92C to the tpo if he considers it necessary and expedient and an approval of the commissioner has been obtained.

section 92 CA also casts an obligation on the tpo to provide an opportunity of being heard to the assessee. tpo shall serve a notice to the assessee requiring him to produce (or cause to be produced) on a specified date, any evidence on which the assessee may rely in support of the calculation made by him of the alp in relation to the international transaction. a distinction has to be drawn while interpreting this section with reference to section 92C (3), wherein the ao is obliged to disclose the method adopted by him to compute alp in the show cause notice issued to the assessee but where the ao is referring the computation of alp to tpo, he is not required to disclose the reason for such refer- ring to the assessee. after conducting the hearing and taking into consideration all the relevant facts, the tpo shall by order in writing determine the alp in relation to the transaction in accordance with the provision of section 92C (3) and send a copy of his order to the ao and the assessee. on receipt of the order, the ao shall proceed to compute the total income of the assessee u/s. 92C (3) having regard to the alp determined by the tpo.

3.41.    Where any other international transaction other than an international transaction referred under 92Ca(1), comes to the notice of tpo during the course of the proceedings before him, tpo shall apply as if such other international transaction is an international transaction referred to him under 92CA(1). [Section 92CA(2A)]

Where in respect of an international transaction, the assessee has not furnished the report u/s. 92e and such transaction comes to the notice of tpo during the course of the proceeding before him, tpo shall apply as if such transaction is an international transaction referred to him under 92CA(1). [Section 92Ca(2B)]

The Assessing Officer is empowered to either to assess or reassess u/s. 147 or pass an order enhancing the assessment or reducing a refund already made or otherwise increasing the liability of the assessee u/s. 154, for any assessment year, proceedings for which have been completed before the 1st day of July, 2012. [Section 92CA(2C)]

3.42.    The Finance Act, 2014 has been amended to ex- tend the power to levy a penalty of 2% of value of international transaction or SDT for failure to furnish information or documentation under 92D(3) of ITA.

?    Maintenance of information and documents
3.43.    A specific provision has been made requiring every person who has entered into “international transaction” to keep and maintain the prescribed information and documents. such information and documents should be, as far as possible, contem- poraneous and should exist by the date specified for the submission of report u/s. 92F [i.e., due date of furnishing return of income u/s. 139(1)]. it has also been provided that fresh documentation need not be maintained separately in respect of each previous year in cases where an “international transaction”  continues  to  have  effect  over  more than one previous year so long as there is no sig- nificant change in the nature or terms thereof, other factors having influence on the transfer price, etc. such information and documents are required to be kept and maintained for a period of eight years from the end of the relevant assessment year. relaxation   has   also   been   provided     from   the requirements of keeping and maintaining such information and documents in cases where the ag- gregate   value  of   “international  transaction”  entered into by the assessee in the previous year does not exceed rupees one crore (i.e., small cases). however, in such small cases, the assessee  is still required to substantiate that income arising from such transaction has been computed having regard to the ALP. – [Section 92D(1) and (2) read with rule 10d(2)/(4)/(5)]

3.44.    The  assessee  is  required  to  keep  and  maintain various information and documents as provided in the rule 10d. such information and documents can be divided into two parts viz. (i) primary infor- mation and documents and (ii) supporting docu- ments.  the  primary  information  and   documents required to be maintained by the assessee can be classified into three categories viz. (a) documents relating to the enterprise such as the description of ownership structure of the assessee, profile of the multinational group of which the assessee is a part etc., (b) Transaction specific documents such as  the   nature  and  terms  of  “international  transaction”, description of the functions performed, the risks assumed and assets employed etc and (c) Computation related documents such as methods considered for determining the alp, the method selected as most appropriate method with the rea- sons for such selection, record of the actual work carried out for determining the alp, assumptions, policies and price negotiations, if any, which have critically affected the determination of the alp etc. the supporting documents would primarily include the official publications, reports, studies etc. of the Government of the country of ae or other country, market research studies, reports and technical publications of reputed institutions (national and international), price publications etc. to support the primary information and documents kept and maintained by the assessee. such information and documents should be furnished before the ao or Cit(a) as and when he requires within a period of 30 days which period can be further extended by another 30 days – [Section 92D (3) and Rule 10D(1) and (3)]

3.45.    OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines, in particular comparability analysis, gives importance to FAR analysis which is primarily based on residency based taxation principle developed by them and   is suitable for the developed countries. In fact, the functional analysis is set on a pedestal through FAR Analysis (Functions performed, Assets em- ployed and Risks assumed). But OECD TPG pri- marily pays no heed to the importance of ‘market place’ where consumption takes place. Conversely, United Nations Model Tax Convention is sourced based and has taken into account the primary interest of developed countries’ right to tax such incomes sourced from these countries, id est, market place is recognised by UN in its Model Treaty. However this issue is not fully captured in Article 5 (Permanent Establishment) and Article 7 (Business Profits). If one looks at experience shared by India, China and Brazil, these countries want to retain justifiably their right of taxation through attribution theory by giving importance to market place. United Nations released its Practical Manual on Transfer Pricing for developing countries wherein Comparability Analysis also gives importance to concepts like Location Savings, Location Specific Advantage, Location Rent and Market Premium. The experience shared by three major developing coun- tries (India, China and Brazil) will enable readers to understand the philosophy behind those concepts which are dealt in greater detail in subsequent part of the article. Therefore, in my opinion, these devel- oping countries as well as UN TP Guidance gives importance to FARM Analysis (Functions performed, Assets employed, Risks assumed and Market premium) as against FAR Analysis.

?    Accountant’s Report
3.46.    Every person entering into “international transac- tion” is also required to obtain and furnish a report from a   Chartered accountant in form no. 3CeB on or before the specified date [viz. due date of furnishing Return of Income u/s.139(1)]. – [Sec.92E and rule 10e]

3.47.    For the purpose of maintenance of the prescribed information and documents and obtaining and furnishing accountant’s report, reference may also be made to the Guidance note of the institute of Chartered accountants of india (ICAI).

?    Penalty
3.48.    For non-compliance with the provisions relating to transfer pricing referred to herein before, penalty provisions have been made in the ita in respect of various defaults. 3.49.    as stated above, the assessee is required to keep and maintain specified information and documents in respect of international transactions. the same are also required to be produced whenever called for by the AO or the CIT(A) within the specified time limit. If the assessee fails to maintain and/or furnish such information or documents before the authorities as may be required, a penalty can be imposed of an amount equal to 2% of the value of interna- tional transaction or sdt for each such failure.  it seems that once the authority is satisfied about such default, the quantum of penalty is fixed under the act. however, no such penalty can be imposed if the assessee proves that there was a reasonable cause for such failure. – [Section 271AA, Section 271G and section 273B.]

3.50.    As stated above, the assessee is required to obtain and furnish a report from Chartered accountant in the prescribed form within the specified time limit. in the event of failure to comply with this requirement, without a reasonable cause, a penalty of ru- pees One lac can be imposed. – [Section 271BA and section 273B]

3.51.    A penalty for concealment of income or for furnishing inaccurate particulars of income can levied under the it act of an amount equal to 100% to 300% of the amount of tax sought to be evaded by reason of the concealment of income or furnishing of inaccurate particulars of such income u/s. 271(1)(c) (‘Concealment Penalty’). A specific provision has been made to provide that if an addition is made to the total income of the assessee by ex- ercising power vested in the ao u/s.92C(3), then, for the purpose of provisions relating to Conceal- ment penalty, the amount of such addition to the total income shall be deemed to represent the con- cealed income or the income in respect of which inaccurate particulars have been furnished unless the assessee proves to the satisfaction of the ao or the Cit(a) or the Cit that the price charged or computed in the relevant international transaction was computed in accordance with the provisions contained in section 92C and in the manner prescribed under that section in good faith and with due diligence. – [Explanation 7 to section 271(1)]

?    Advance Pricing Arrangements – sections 92cc anD 92cD

3.52.    The  taxation  tug-of-war  between  mnes  and  the indian tax authorities has been a never-ending story. the transfer pricing regulations, which have been a long-drawn contentious issue between the tax authorities and mnes, recently came into the limelight after certain multinationals were slapped with hefty tax demands for allegedly entering into international transactions with their associated enterprises at non-arm’s length prices.

3.53.    In each round of audit, the indian tax authorities have ventured into new controversies in areas such as marketing intangibles, share valuation, corpo- rate guarantees, business restructuring and loca- tion savings, in addition to attributing high markups for routine activities. With close to usd 10 billion of adjustments being made in the eighth round of transfer pricing audits, transfer pricing has gained paramount importance for both taxpayers and the tax authorities. With such huge adjustments, the indian tax authorities are reckoned as tough in transfer pricing matters, with india accounting for approximately 70% of all global transfer pricing dis- putes by volume.

3.54.    With significant uncertainties existing in the approach of the indian tax authorities towards several complex transactions undertaken by multinationals, an advance pricing agreement (apa) programme has clearly been the need of the hour for multinationals in india. APAS appear to be the best possible solution for obtaining stability and certainty in transfer pricing matters. the apa programme is expected to introduce a whole new dimension to the transfer pricing landscape in india. With taxpayers looking for increased tax certainty, many are opting for the apa route.

3.55.    APAs were first showcased as a part of the proposed direct taxes Code back in 2009 and were again mentioned in the direct taxes Code, 2010. however, with the uncertainty surrounding the introduction of the direct taxes Code, the introduction of apas was also deferred. for the highly litigious transfer pricing regime in india, this uncertainty regarding the fate of apas raised much concern amongst large taxpayers. in a much appreciated move, the ministry of finance introduced apas in the finance act, 2012.

3.56.    An APA is an agreement between the tax authori- ties and the taxpayer that determines in advance the most appropriate transfer pricing methodology or the arm’s length price for covered intercompany international transactions. the indian apa regime allows multinationals to ascertain the potential price for their international transactions beforehand. Taxpayers are also relieved of many compliance obligations for a period of five years, providing taxpayers with stability and certainty with regard to their tax liability.

3.57.    The tax authorities have proved their claim that the apa programme is a big success, by concluding the first number of APAs in just one year since the APA program was introduced in india. india is undoubtedly the first country in the world to achieve this success in the very first year. The tax authorities believe that the apa programme will help to avoid disputes arising from the country’s increasingly aggressive positions on transfer pricing matters.

3.58.    Till now, most apa requests in india are from companies belonging to the information technology and information  technology  enabled  services  (ITES), automobile, pharmaceuticals and financial sectors, on issues that pertain to captive outsourcing centres, share valuation, the extension of corporate guarantees, royalties, management fees and interest income. these issues have been at the heart of virtually all transfer pricing disputes.

3.59.    APAS offer better assurance regarding the taxpayer’s transfer pricing method. another effect is that they reduce risk and assist in the financial reporting of possible tax liabilities. apas also decrease the incidence of double taxation and costs linked with audit defence and transfer pricing documentation preparation. APAS can provide risk management, certainty, avoidance of double taxation and reduced litigation. The bilateral or multilateral approach is far more likely to ensure that the apa will reduce the risk of double taxation.

3.60.    However, a significant challenge of an APA is that it relies on predictions about future events. Criti- cal assumptions should provide possible scenari- os and should be appropriately worded to ensure that an apa remains workable. the tax authorities may become privy to highly sensitive information and documentation which could present its own challenges.  further,  the  taxpayers  also  need  to have assurance that past closed years will not be reopened for an audit based on the transfer pricing agreed in the apa.

3.61.    The  success  of  the  apa  programme  will  be  de- termined by its ability to distinguish itself from traditional audits, and to act as a means to facili- tate expedited dispute resolution for international transactions. an apa is certainly a positive step towards a more certain economy; however it is imperative for taxpayers to perform a cost-benefit analysis of all aspects before taking a step forward towards an apa.

?    Safe harbour rules
3.62.    With the introduction of safe harbour rules, akin to the apa mechanism, taxpayers expect a reduction in litigation. However, as this is the first year for In- dia, taxpayers suffer from the ambiguity surround- ing these rules, including the following:

–    As the apa option was only recently introduced in india, taxpayers will have to cleverly evaluate the two available alternatives, namely the apa mechanism or the safe harbour rules, considering the cost and time involved; and

–    The eligibility of taxpayers to opt to apply the safe harbour rules is debatable as, although the eligible activities are defined, clarity is still lacking regard- ing which parties fall under those activities.

3.63.    The  rates  indicated  in  the  safe  harbour  rules  are not tantamount to an arm’s length price. However, these rates are provided so as to avoid the litigation process as a whole by the indian tax authorities while jointly achieving consensus on the transfer price.

3.64.    The introduction of safe harbour rules is surely a welcomed step, moving towards reducing substantial transfer pricing litigation and building a proper tax environment. Nevertheless, it would have been better if the safe harbour rules had allowed dispensation from compliance with documentation requirements.

3.65.    However, from a taxpayer perspective, considering the pressures on profitability and solid competition from other jurisdictions, it might be challenging for many groups to opt to apply the safe harbour regime. It is anticipated that the assessing officer and transfer pricing officer will focus on the functions, assets and risks analysis of the taxpayer to validate the taxpayer’s eligibility to apply the safe harbour rules. Also, no time limit is prescribed within which such validation must be conducted, thereby leaving it open to experience during the time to come.

3.66.    Nevertheless, considering that the markup rates are on the higher side, it would be interesting to observe the actual application of the safe harbour rules by taxpayers, more specifically whether the taxpayer opts to apply a higher markup and achieve relief from the lengthy litigation process or prefers to defend its lower markup through the existing litigation mechanisms.

4.    Special Issues related to Transfer Pricing

4.1.    documentation requirements

a.    Generally, a transfer pricing exercise involves vari- ous steps such as:
•    Gathering background information;
•    Industry analysis;
•    Comparability analysis (which includes functional
analysis);
•    Selection of the method for determining Arm’s length pricing; and
•    Determination of the Arm’s Length Price.

b.    At every stage of the transfer pricing process, vary- ing degrees of documentation are necessary, such as information on contemporaneous transactions. one pressing concern regarding transfer pricing documentation is the risk of overburdening the taxpayer with disproportionately high costs in ob- taining relevant documentation or in an exhaustive search for comparables that may not exist. ideally, the taxpayer should not be expected to provide more documentation than is objectively required for a reasonable determination by the tax authorities of whether or not the taxpayer has complied with the arm’s length principle. Cumbersome documentation demands may affect how a country is viewed as an investment destination and may have particularly discouraging effects on small and mediumsized enterprises (smes). c.    Broadly, the information or documents that the tax-payer needs to provide can be classified as:

1.    Enterprise-related  documents  (for   example the ownership/shareholding pattern of the tax- payer, the business profile of the MNE, industry profile etc);

2.    Transaction-specific documents (for example the details of each international transaction, func- tional analysis of the taxpayer and associated enterprises, record of uncontrolled transactions for each international transaction etc); and

3.    Computation-related documents (for example the nature of each international transaction and the rationale for selecting the transfer pricing method for each international transaction, computation of the arm’s length price, factors and assumptions influencing the determination of the Arm’s Length price etc).

d.    The  domestic  legislation  of  some  countries  may also require “contemporaneous documentation.” Such countries may consider defining the term “contemporaneous” in their domestic legislation. The  term  “contemporaneous”  means  “existing  or occurring in the same period of time.” different countries have different interpretations about how the word “contemporaneous” is to be interpreted with respect to transfer pricing documentation. some believe that it refers to using comparables that are contemporaneous with the transaction, regardless of when the documentation is produced or when the comparables are obtained. Other countries interpret contemporaneous to mean using only those comparables available at the time the transaction occurs.

4.2.    Intangibles
a.    Intangibles (literally meaning assets that cannot be touched) are divided into “trade intangibles” and “marketing intangibles.” trade intangibles such as know-how relate to the production of goods and the provision of services and are typically developed through research and development. Marketing intangibles refer to intangibles such as trade names, trademarks and client lists that aid in the commercial exploitation of a product or service.

b.    The Arm’s Length Principle often becomes difficult to apply to intangibles due to a lack of suitable comparables; for example intellectual property tends  to relate to the unique characteristic of a product rather  than  its  similarity  to  other  products.  this difficulty in finding comparables is accentuated by the fact that dealings with intangible property can also occur in many (often subtly different) ways such as by: license agreements involving payment of royalties; outright sale of the intangibles; compensation included in the price of goods (i.e., selling unfinished products including the know-how for further processing) or “package deals” consisting of some combination of the above.

c.    The Profit Split Method is typically used in cases where both parties to the transaction make unique and valuable contributions. however, care should be taken to identify the intangibles in question. experience has shown that the transfer pricing methods most likely to prove useful in matters involving transfers of intangibles or rights in intangibles are the CUP Method and the Transactional Profit Split method. Valuation techniques can be useful tools in some circumstances.

4.3.    Intra-group Services

a.    An intra-group service, as the name suggests, is a service provided by one enterprise to another  in  the  same  mne  group.  for  a  service to be considered an intra-group service it must be similar to a service which an independent enterprise in comparable circumstances would be willing to pay for in-house or else perform by itself. if not, the activity should not be considered as an intra-group service under the arm’s  length  principle.  the  rationale  is  that  if specific group members do not need the activity and would not be willing to pay for it if they were independent, the activity cannot justify a payment. Further, any incidental benefit gained solely by being a member of an mne group, without any specific services provided or performed, should be ignored.

b.    An arm’s length price for intra-group services may be determined directly or indirectly — in the case of a direct charge, the Cup method could be used if comparable services are pro- vided in the open market. in the absence of comparable services the Cost plus method could be appropriate.

c.    If a direct charge method is difficult to apply, the mne may apply the charge indirectly by cost sharing, by incorporating a service charge or by not charging at all. such methods would usually be accepted by the tax authorities only if the charges are supported by foreseeable benefits for the recipients of the services, the methods are based on sound accounting and commercial principles and they  are  capable of producing charges or allocations that are commensurate with the reasonably expected benefits to the recipient. In addition, tax authorities might allow a fixed charge on intra-group services under safe harbour rules or a pre- sumptive taxation regime, for instance where  it is not practical to calculate an arm’s length price for the performance of services and tax accordingly.

4.4.    Cost-contribution agreements

a.    Cost-contribution  agreements  (CCas)  may be formulated among group entities to jointly develop, produce or obtain rights, assets or services. each participant bears a share  of the costs and in return is expected to receive pro rata (i.e., proportionate) benefits from the developed property without further payment. such arrangements tend to involve research and development or services such as central- ised management, advertising campaigns etc.

b.    In a CCA there is not always a benefit that ulti- mately arises; only an expected benefit during the course of the CCa which may or may not ultimately materialise. the interest of each participant should be agreed upon at the outset. the contributions are required to be consistent with the amount an independent enterprise would have contributed under comparable cir- cumstances, given these expected benefits. the CCa is not a transfer pricing method; it is a contract. however, it may have transfer pricing consequences and therefore needs to comply with the arm’s length principle.

4.5.    Use of “secret comparables” a.    there  is  often  concern  expressed  by  enterprises over aspects of data collection by tax authorities and its confidentiality. Tax authori- ties need to have access to very sensitive and highly confidential information about taxpayers, such as data relating to margins, profitability, business contacts and contracts. Confidence in the tax system means that this information needs to be treated very carefully, especially as it may reveal sensitive business information about that taxpayer’s profitability, business strategies and so forth.

b.    Using a secret comparable generally means the use of information or data about a taxpayer by the tax authorities to form the basis of risk assessment or a transfer pricing audit of another taxpayer. that second taxpayer is often not given access to that information as it may reveal confidential information about a compet- itor’s operations.

c.    Caution should be exercised in permitting the use of secret comparables in the transfer pricing audit unless the tax authorities are able to (within limits of confidentiality) disclose the data to the taxpayer so as to assist the taxpayer to defend itself against an adjustment. taxpayers may otherwise contend that the use of such secret information is against the basic principles of equity, as they are required to benchmark controlled transactions with comparables not available  to them — without the opportunity  to question comparability or argue that adjustments are needed.

4.6.    Controlled foreign corporation provisions

Some  countries  operate  Controlled  foreign  Cor- poration  (CfC)  rules.  CfC  rules  are  designed  to prevent tax being deferred or avoided by taxpayers using foreign corporations in which they hold a controlling shareholding in low-tax jurisdictions and “parking” income there. CfC rules treat this income as though it has been repatriated and it is therefore taxable prior to actual repatriation. Where there are CfC rules in addition to transfer pricing rules, an important question arises as to which rules have priority in adjusting the taxpayer’s returns. due to the fact that the transfer pricing rules assume all transactions are originally conducted under the arm’s length principle, it is widely considered that transfer pricing rules should have priority in applica- tion over CfC rules. after the application of transfer pricing rules, countries can apply the CfC rules on the retained profits of foreign subsidiaries.

4.7.    Thin Capitalisation

When the capital of a company is made up of a much greater contribution of debt than of equity, it is said to be “thinly capitalised”. this is because it may be sometimes more advantageous from a taxation viewpoint to finance a company by way of debt (i.e., leveraging) rather than by way of equity contributions as typically the payment of interest on the debts may be deducted for tax purposes where- as  distributions  are  non-deductible  dividends.  To prevent tax avoidance by such excessive leveraging, many countries have introduced rules to prevent thin capitalisation, typically by prescribing a maximum debt to equity ratio. Country tax administrations often introduce rules that place a limit on the amount of interest that can be deducted in calculating the measure of a company’s profit for tax purposes. Such rules are designed to counter cross-border shifting of profit through excessive debt, and thus aim to protect a country’s tax base. From a policy perspective, failure to tackle excessive interest payments to associated enterprises gives mnes an advantage over purely domestic businesses which are unable to gain such tax advantages.

4.8.    Documentation

a.    Another important issue for implementing do- mestic laws is the documentation requirement associated with transfer pricing. Tax authorities need a variety of business documents which support  the  application  of  the  arm’s  length principle by specified taxpayers. However, there is some divergence of legislation in terms of the nature of documents required, penalties imposed, and the degree of the examiners’ authority to collect information when taxpayers fail to produce such documents. There is also the issue of whether documentation needs to be “contemporaneous.”

b.    In deciding on the requirements for such documentation there needs to be, as already noted, recognition of the compliance costs imposed on taxpayers required to produce the documentation. another issue is whether the benefits, if any, of the documentation require- ments from the administration’s view in dealing with a potentially small number of non-compliant taxpayers are justified by a burden placed on taxpayers generally. A useful principle to bear in mind would be that the widely accepted international approach which takes into account compliance costs for taxpayers should be followed, unless a departure from this approach can be clearly and openly justified because of local conditions which cannot be changed immediately (e.g. constitutional requirements or other overriding legal requirements). In other cases, there is great benefit for all in taking a widely accepted approach.

4.9.    Time Limitations

Another important point for transfer pricing domestic legislation is the “statute of limitation” issue — the time allowed in domestic law for the tax administration to do the transfer pricing audit and make necessary assessments or the like. since a transfer pricing audit can place heavy burdens on the taxpayers and tax authorities, the normal “statute of limitation” for taking action is often extended compared with general domestic taxation cases. however, too long a period during which adjustment is possible leaves taxpayers in some cases with potentially very large financial risks. Differences in country practices in relation to time limitation may lead to double taxation. Countries should keep this issue of balance between the interests of the revenue and of taxpay- ers in mind when setting an extended period during which adjustments can be made.

4.10.    Lack of comparables

One of the foundations of the arm’s length princi- ple is examining the pricing of comparable transactions. Proper comparability is often difficult to achieve in practice, a factor which in the view of many weakens the continued validity of the principle itself. the fact is that the traditional transfer pricing methods (Cup, rpm, Cp) directly rely on comparables. these comparables have to be close in order to be of use for the transfer pricing analysis. It is often extremely difficult in practice, especially in some developing countries, to obtain adequate information to apply the arm’s length principle for the following reasons:

1.    There  tend  to  be  fewer  organised  operators  in any given sector in developing countries; finding proper comparable data can be very difficult;

2.    The comparable information in developing countries may be incomplete and in a form which is difficult to analyse, as the resources and process- es are not available. in the worst case, information about an independent enterprise may simply not exist. Databases relied on in transfer pricing analysis tend to focus on developed country data that may not be relevant to developing country markets (at least without resource and informa-tion-intensive adjustments), and in any event are usually very costly to access; and

3.    Transition countries whose economies have just opened up or are in the process of opening up may have “first mover” companies who have come into existence in many of the sectors and areas hitherto unexploited or unexplored; in such cases there would be an inevitable lack of comparables.

Given these issues, critics of the current transfer pricing methods equate finding a satisfactory comparable to finding a needle in a haystack. Overall, it is quite clear that finding appropriate comparables in developing countries for analysis is quite possibly the biggest practical problem currently faced by enterprises and tax authorities alike.

4.11.    Lack of knowledge and requisite skill-sets

Transfer  pricing  methods  are  complex  and  time- consuming, often requiring time and attention from some of the most skilled and valuable human re- sources in both mnes and tax administrations. transfer pricing reports often run into hundreds of pages with many legal and accounting experts employed to create them. this kind of complexity and knowledge requirement puts tremendous strain on both the tax authorities and the taxpayers, espe- cially in developing countries where resources tend to be scarce and the appropriate training in such a  specialized  area  is  not  readily  available.  their transfer pricing regulations have, however, helped some developing countries in creating requisite skill sets and building capacity, while also protecting their tax base.

4.12.    Complexity

a.    Rules based on the arm’s length principle are becoming increasingly difficult and complex to administer. transfer pricing compliance may in- volve expensive databases and the associated expertise  to  handle  the  data. transfer  pricing audits need to be performed on a case by case basis and are often complex and costly tasks for all parties concerned.

b.    In developing countries resources, monetary and otherwise, may be limited for the taxpayer (especially small and medium sized enterprises (smes)) which have to prepare detailed and complex transfer pricing reports and comply with the transfer pricing regulations, and these resources may have to be “bought-in.” similarly, the tax authorities of many developing countries do not have sufficient resources to examine the facts and circumstances of each and every case so as to determine the acceptable transfer price, especially in cases where there is a lack of comparables. Transfer pricing audits also tend to be a long, time consuming process which may be contentious and may ultimately result in “estimates” fraught with conflicting interpretations.

c.    In case of disputes between the revenue authorities of two countries, the currently available prescribed option is the mutual agreement procedure as noted above. This too can possibly lead to a protracted and involved dialogue, often between unequal economic powers, and may cause strains on the resources of the companies in question and the revenue authorities of the developing countries.

4.13.    Growth of the “e-commerce economy”

a.    The internet has completely changed the way the world works by changing how information is exchanged and business is transacted. physical limitations, which have long defined traditional taxation concepts, no longer apply and the application of international tax concepts to the internet and related e-commerce transac- tions is sometimes problematic and unclear.

b.    The different kind of challenges thrown up by fast-changing web-based business models cause special difficulties. From the viewpoint of many countries, it is essential for them to be able to appropriately exercise taxing rights on certain intangible-related transactions, such as e-commerce and web-based business models

4.14.    Location savings

a.    Some countries like China, india and other developing countries are taking the view that the economic benefit arising from moving operations to a low-cost jurisdiction, i.e., “location savings”, should accrue to that country where such operations are actually carried out.

b.    Accordingly, the determination of location sav- ings, and their allocation between the group companies (and thus, between the tax authori- ties of the two countries) has become a key transfer pricing issue in the context of developing countries. unfortunately, most interna- tional guidelines do not provide much guidance on this issue of location savings, though they sometimes do recognise geographic conditions and ownership of intangibles. The us section 482 regulations provide some sort of limited guidance in the form of recognising that adjustments for significant differences in cost attributable to a geographic location must be based on the impact such differences would have on the controlled transaction price given the relative competitive positions of buyers and sellers in each market. the OECD Guidelines also consider the issue of location savings, emphasising that the allocation of the savings depends on what would have been agreed by independent parties in similar circumstances.

c.    The  un  tp  manual  states  that  arm’s  length attribution of location savings depends on the competitive factors relating to the access of location specific advantages and on the realistic alternatives available to the associated enterprises (aes) given their respective bargaining power.

d.    However, the indian tax administration ac- cording to the India Country specific chapter  in the un tp manual, believes that apart from locations savings, profit from location specific advantages (referred to as “location rent”) such as skilled manpower, access to market, large customer base, superior information and distribution network should also be allocated be- tween aes. the price determined on the basis of local comparables does not adequately al- locate location savings and it is possible to use profit split method to determine arm’s length allocation of location savings and location rents where comparable uncontrolled transactions are  not  available.  functional  analysis  of  the parties to the transaction and the bargaining power of the parties should both be considered appropriate factors.

5.    Future of Transfer Pricing in Developing Countries

a.    The economic significance of the OECD is in rapid decline. in 2000, oeCd nations controlled 60% of gross world product. Now it is at 50% and is expected to drop to about 40% in 2030.

b.    Power and influence will need to be shared between developed and developing countries. With new players such as Brazil, russia, india, China, and south africa (BriCs), and the un entering the fray, india and China see themselves as “exceptional countries” and will want a say in writing the rules, whether it is greenhouse gases, transfer pricing, or intellectual property, and that is the way it will be.

c.    Confidence levels among Indian and Chinese tax authorities are growing it is clear that these developing countries will not allow themselves to be pushed around much longer. over 70% of the global transfer pricing litigation worldwide is in india a sign of that country’s independent thinking.

d.    The  big  question  is  whether  india  and  China will pass new regulations to incorporate the po- sitions expressed in the un manual. If so, the nature of global transfer pricing will shift. e.    location  rents  and  local  intangibles  will  become part of the analysis. Finally, every global tax director of an MNE will need to figure out a new strategy. Because the principal structure used to provide developing countries a routine profit will get terminated.

6.    Key Takeaways

6.1.    Transfer pricing is generally considered to be the ma- jor international taxation issue faced by mnes today. Even though responses to it will in some respects vary, transfer pricing is a complex and constantly evolving area and no government or mne can afford to ignore it. Transfer pricing is a difficult challenge for both gov- ernments and taxpayers; it tends to involve significant resources, often including some of the most skilled human resources, and costs of compliance. It is often especially difficult to find comparables, even those where some adjustment is needed to apply the transfer pricing methods.

6.2.    Overall, it is a difficult task to simplify the international taxation system, especially transfer pricing, while keeping it equitable and effective for all parties involved. However, a practical approach will help ensure the focus is on solutions to these problems. it will help equip developing countries to address transfer pricing issues in a way that is robust and fair to all the stakeholders, while remaining true to the goals of being internationally coherent, seeking to reduce compliance costs and reduce unrelieved double taxation.

6.3.    Recent decisions passed by tribunals and Courts demonstrate that there has been a lot of shifting sands due to various retrospective amendments and controversial statements by revenue department. If such things persist then the indian tax laws are in choppy waters which may impede and become a logjam for foreign investments in india.

6.4.    Further, there has been a constant capacity building in the Revenue department. Tax officers are apparently bringing all their investigative skill to the fore for coming up with information which may help them to enhance the quality of their assessments. The department has now sought to use social me- dia (Linkedin profiles) to lend support to their con- tention on the existence of a permanent establish- ment  (pe). the tribunal  has  also  admitted  these as evidence and has passed an interim order in the case of GE Energy Parts Inc vs. Addl DIT [ITA No  671/Del/2011]/[TS-400-ITAT-2014(DEL)]  dated 4th july, 2014. Going forward, it is therefore important for taxpayers to focus and review information published on corporate and business networking websites, as information from these sources can potentially impact their assessments. the internet and social networking sites have really opened up new vistas for not only people to communicate with one another but also to obtain and use information for various purposes. The importance of selection of privacy options on these sites is also paramount as information available thereon can potentially be misused by mischievous and harmful  elements. executives in senior positions need to be particularly careful and vigilant about information that is put out in their cases on these websites.

6.5.    The “Gurumantra” for tax professionals today would be to closely track business activities, major and minor, identify risks, align with new regulations or prepare defense strategies well in advance in order to ensure minimal potential disputes.

And, dare to hope for the possible stability that na- mo’s entourage would bring a regime of reduced taxes, simplified laws, attenuate its hunger in mak- ing adjustments and have assuaged approach towards litigation, et al!!

Sting of Transfer Pricing

fiogf49gjkf0d
The philosophy of transfer pricing is fairly old under which a country attempts to tax a fair share of revenue arising in the course of cross-border transactions. The Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD), of which the United States and other major developed countries are members, had formulated some guidelines about transfer pricing by 1979. The US led the development of the detailed comprehensive transfer pricing guidelines with a White Paper in 1988 and with proposals in 1990-1992, which ultimately became regulations in 1994. In India, The Finance Act, 2001 substituted section 92 with new sections 92 to 92F with effect from 1st April, 2002, Rules 10A to Rule 10E of the Income Tax Rules were notified and that marked the beginning of the transfer pricing era. Over the last 10 years, the interpretation of the relevant provisions has gradually evolved in India. In the last few years the tax administration has suddenly become very aggressive in respect of transfer pricing additions termed as adjustments, as they find it to be a very lucrative tool for meeting their ever-increasing revenue targets. The provisions on transfer pricing are fairly subjective and can be interpreted and implemented with flexibility. There are no safe harbour rules for transfer pricing in India. As the provisions in the Act are subjective and open to diverse interpretations, the tax authorities interpret them in a way beneficial to the Revenue and thereby demand higher taxes from assessees who have entered into international transactions with their associate enterprises. This is posing a major risk to foreign multinationals doing business in India, as well as Indian multinationals having businesses in foreign countries.

The Income-tax Act has given a liberal time frame of 31 months to the tax authorities to determine the Arm’s- Length Price (ALP) from the end of a financial year. By 31st October, 2011, the tax authorities determined the ALPs for the year ended 31st March, 2008. For the year ended 31st March, 2008, they have assessed transfer pricing additions of a staggering amount of Rs.44,500 crore. Such additions were only to the tune of around Rs.22,000 crore for the F.Y. 2006-07 and just around Rs.10,000 crore for the F.Y. 2005-06. The phenomenal increase in the adjustments over the last few years clearly indicates how eager and aggressive the Tax Department is to mop up revenues on account of transfer pricing additions. The Finance Ministry also seems to be very supportive to these efforts of the income-tax authorities as it is usually lagging on controlling budgetary deficits and wants to be innovative in its efforts of mopping up more tax without apparently affecting the common man. However, a balanced approach is the need of the hour.

Multinational companies having presence in various parts of the world with different tax laws and tax rates, try to take advantage of those differences to boost their post-tax profits for maximising shareholders’ value. Transfer pricing mechanism was initially introduced by the developed countries for enhancing their tax revenues from such multinationals. These countries realised that tax on some part of the revenues which could have been taxed in their jurisdiction was being siphoned off to low-tax jurisdictions by such companies. They made various laws for protecting the tax on these revenues. Encouraged by the revenue gains realised by these countries pioneering transfer pricing regulations, many other countries gradually introduced transfer pricing provisions in their tax laws. Over the years, their implementation is becoming aggressive and at times beyond justification.

The multinational companies, who had great moneymaking run till the end of the 20th century, have realised that the times are changing. Their global presence makes them deal with number of countries and their respective diverse laws. There is an increased possibility that two or more countries may tax the same profit by trying to justify that it was earned in their respective jurisdiction or such profit being even otherwise taxable under their tax laws. In such a situation, a multinational entity faces grave risk of being subject to duplicity of taxation.

Today, many multinationals are encouraged to come to India considering the huge market, skilled labour and technical and managerial talent that India offers. Multinationals already present in India are further encouraged by the growth of their businesses in India, in spite of the worldwide recession. Many of these companies are today suffering due to the aggressive stands on issues regarding transfer pricing by the Income Tax authorities. The Government needs to be mindful and cannot be oblivious to the fact that these multinationals can create employment and can also increase exports, which are the two critical needs of Indian economy. In the zeal of increasing the revenue, one should not slay the hen that lays golden eggs. India should not just copy the attitude of some developed countries in respect of transfer pricing as it may harm the economy and destroy some stable sources of revenue.

The brunt of transfer pricing provisions in India is equally faced by Indian companies expanding their business footprints outside India. The regime is also affecting the ambitions of Indian industry to set up Greenfield operations abroad or to acquire foreign businesses. They are not able to support the operations of their foreign subsidiaries through interest-free lending or giving bank guarantees for their borrowings, which is extremely important for the survival and sustainability of their operations. Genuine business efforts are adversely affected by the aggressive transfer pricing additions. The action of the tax authorities may be within the provisions of law but can be very harmful for a developing country like India. Indian policy makers as well as the policy implementers need to take the cognizance of the facts before it is too late. It also needs to urgently notify and implement the ‘safe harbour rules’.

Some of the major reasons of additions made on account of transfer pricing provisions in India are as follows:

  • Recommendation of higher margin at net operating level.

  • Disallowance of fees paid to associate enterprises for use of intangibles.

  • Payment for inter-company services to associated enterprises disallowed.

  • Indian company treated as creator of intangible assets owned by associated enterprises, thereby making addition on account of notional income.

  • Notional fees being attributable to corporate guarantees given by Indian companies.

  • Notional interest on advances given or outstanding of recoverable reimbursements by an Indian company to its associated enterprises.

  • Notional fees being attributable to pledge of shares given as security to lender by Indian companies for the borrowings made by its associated enterprises.

The list is not exhaustive but only indicative and it is expanding year after year with the novel ideas of the income-tax authorities.

Newly set up businesses outside India have their own teething problems like a new-born child. They are subjected to brutal global competition and need to withstand it in order to survive. They need to be aptly supported by their parents till they take off and are able to sustain on their own. The support given by the parent in the form of interest-free/low-interest loan, corporate guarantees, preferential pricing, longer credit period, technology support and even manpower support is looked at by the transfer pricing authority as unfair practices and notional income from such practices are added as adjustments. While doing so, adequate cognizance of the gain that the parent makes by being full or part owner or being an economic beneficiary of the associated enterprise is not taken.

It seems that the time has come for the Government to review the provisions of transfer pricing in India and also to do introspection of the methodology of the implementation of the provisions for the health and faster growth of Indian businesses. The current attitude will not only dampen the interest of foreign multinationals to do business in India, but it will also damage the enthusiasm of Indians to fare overseas in search for opportunities. India is trying to project herself as a service hub to the global community. It is trumpeting the skill of its manpower and its cost advantage to the developed world in service-orientated businesses. If the aggression in implementation of transfer pricing does not subside to a reasonable level, India will fast gain a reputation of being an unfriendly and high-risk tax jurisdiction. The advantage which India gathered over the last couple of decades in the service sector may vanish overnight. In case of such an unfortunate situation, other developing nations who are waiting in the wings to compete with India in the service sector will have the last laugh and India may have one more story of a lost opportunity to tell.

Though various countries may have their points of view and justification for taxing an income which is also taxed in the other country, it can make the taxpayer suffer. To give respite to such a harassed taxpayer, Double Taxation Avoidance Agreements (DTAA) between many countries provide for ‘Mutual Agreement Procedures’. A taxpayer who gets torn between the taxation laws and transfer pricing regimes of two countries in respect of the same income, may make an application under the procedure. In such cases, the authorities of the two countries try to provide a solution which is acceptable to both the countries so that the taxpayer does not get into a double jeopardy of being made liable to pay double tax on the same income. However, if they fail to agree, the poor taxpayer may suffer tax in both the countries.

For the speedy resolution of transfer pricing disputes between the tax authorities and taxpayers in India, the Finance Act, 2009 introduced the provisions relating to Dispute Resolution Panel (DRP). Though the process was expected to speedily resolve the transfer pricing disputes, the response of the taxpayers, based on their recent experience of the panel is not very encouraging. Today, many taxpayers stung by the transfer pricing additions are not inclined to take advantage of these provisions as they are fairly certain of not getting relief, even in deserving cases. Such thinking amongst the taxpayers is harmful for speedy settlement of tax disputes, as the normal appeal process takes a long time. The delays increase the uncertainty of the taxpayers and also negatively affect the due tax collections by the authorities. To make DRP more assessee-friendly and meaningful, it is essential that the members of DRP are assigned the duty on a full-time basis and they should be as independent as possible.

The methodology used for implementation of transfer pricing regulations has far-reaching ramifications on an economy. The Indian Government as well as the authorities should not lose sight of the fact that business in India needs support and encouragement to achieve the targeted growth rate. They need to take a holistic view. At the same time businesses have to realise that attempt to artificially accrue income in low-tax jurisdiction is not beneficial in the long term.

Protocol to India-UK Tax Treaty – Impact Analysis

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction

During the calendar year 2012, the Indian Government put a lot of focus on improving bilateral relationships with countries across the globe. In this regard, it entered into some new Double Tax Avoidance Agreements (‘Tax Treaty’) by extending its treaty network and entered into Protocols with countries with whom it already had Tax Treaties. Last in this list (but a significant one) is the Protocol entered into with the UK. This Protocol due to Articles on Exchange of Information and Collection of Taxes dealing with procedural aspects, apart from some changes in the aspects of taxation as well is important. In this article, we have tried to broadly capture impact of the Protocol on tax payers from both the countries.

Treaty Benefits to UK Partnerships:

The India-UK Tax Treaty (prior to insertion of the Protocol) specifically excluded ‘partnership’ from the definition of ‘person’ under Article 3(1) (f). However, an Indian partnership, which is a taxable unit under the Indian Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’), was considered as ‘person’ as per Article 3(2).

Under the UK domestic law, a UK partnership is not treated as an entity separate and distinct from the partners. Hence, the UK partnership is considered as tax transparent or a pass-through entity, and the income of the partnership is directly taxed in the hands of the partners based on their residential status and their share in the partnership income.

Due to the tax transparent status of the partnership in the UK, a UK partnership was specifically excluded from the definition of ‘person’ under Article 3(1)(f) of the India-UK Tax Treaty. The effect of such specific exclusion suggested that in case a UK partnership earns income from India, it was not eligible to have access to the India-UK Tax Treaty, even though such income was taxed in the UK (in the hands of its partners).

In this regard, contrary to the literal interpretation, Mumbai Income-tax Appellate Tribunal (‘Tribunal’) in the case of Linklaters LLP vs. ITO (132 TTJ 20) extended the benefits under the India-UK Tax Treaty to a UK Limited Liability Partnership (‘LLP’). The Hon’ble Tribunal observed that where a partnership is taxable in respect of its profits, not in its own right but in the hands of partners, as long as the entire income of the partnership firm is taxed in the country of residence (i.e. UK), treaty benefits could not be denied. The Article 3(1)(f) of India-UK Tax Treaty clearly excluded a UK partnership from the definition of ‘person’, and hence, the Tribunal had to analyse this aspect in greater detail. By applying legal analogy based on past judicial precedents, it granted the Treaty benefit to a UK LLP. Thus, this aspect was highly debatable and involved an extensive legal analysis of interpretation of the international tax framework.

Similarly, the Mumbai Tribunal in the case of Clifford Chance vs. DCIT (82 ITD 106) [which was subsequently affirmed by the Bombay High Court (318 ITR 237)] also granted benefits of the India-UK Tax Treaty to a UK partnership firm comprising lawyers. However, a detailed evaluation of the eligibility of the UK partnership claiming benefits under the India- UK Tax Treaty was not done in the said decision.

This controversy has now been put to rest by the Protocol, which has proposed to amend the definition of ‘person’ under the India-UK Tax Treaty by deleting the specific exclusion of partnership from the definition.

 Further, an amendment is also proposed in Article 4(1), which defines the term ‘resident of a Contracting State’, to provide that, in case of a partnership, only so much of income as derived by such partnership, which is subject to tax in a Contracting State as the income of the resident of such Contracting State either in its hands or in the hands of its partners, would be eligible for claiming benefits under the India-UK Tax Treaty. Hence, in the case of a UK partnership earning income from India, only so much of income which is subject to tax in the UK as the income of the UK resident partner would be eligible for India-UK Tax Treaty benefits.

It is interesting to note that similar to the UK, US partnerships are also treated as tax transparent entities under the US domestic tax law, and their income is taxed in the hands of partners directly. The definition of the term ‘resident of a Contracting State’ is pari-materia to the India-USA Tax Treaty. In this context, it would be noteworthy to refer to the definition of the term ‘person’ provided under Article 4(1)(b) of the India-USA Tax Treaty and the Technical Explanation thereof issued by the Treasury Department, which acts as guidance for the interpretation of the terms referred in the India-USA Tax Treaty. The Technical Explanation clarifies that to the extent the partners of a US partnership are subject to tax in US as US residents, the income received by such US partnership will be eligible for India-USA Tax Treaty benefit. Hence, the eligibility of a US partnership to access the India- USA Tax Treaty depends upon the residential status of the partners in such partnership.

Considering the Technical Explanation to the India- USA Tax Treaty and the wordings of the proposed amendment to the definition of ‘resident of Contracting State’ under the India-UK Tax Treaty, an analogy may be drawn that a UK partnership may not be granted benefits under the India-UK Tax Treaty in respect of income that belongs to a person who is not a tax resident of the UK. In other words, if, a UK partnership firm has a Canadian individual as a partner who is not a tax resident of UK (as his income is not taxable in the UK on account of his residence or similar criteria) then, the income earned by the UK partnership (from India), to the extent of such Canadian partner’s share would not be eligible for the India-UK Tax Treaty benefit.

It is pertinent to note that the Technical Explanation issued with reference to the India-USA Tax Treaty though, not binding while interpretating of the terms under India-UK Tax Treaty, it would be of relevance since, the Indian Government had agreed to such interpretation in the past while signing the Technical Explanation to the India-USA Tax Treaty. Hence, it will have a persuasive value on the application of India-UK Tax Treaty as well.

In light of the above, once the Protocol to India-UK Tax Treaty comes into force, an Indian entity will have to consider the tax residence of the partners of the UK partnership at the withholding stage, while granting Treaty benefits to the UK partnership. In this context, attention is invited to the recently introduced section 90(4) of the Act, which requires a non-resident claiming Treaty benefits in India to obtain a certificate containing prescribed particulars (i.e. Tax Residency Certificate or TRC) from the Government of the home country. It would be interesting to observe how a TRC would be issued by the UK Government to a UK partnership earning income from India (specifically, where one of the partners therein is a non-resident).

Treaty benefits to Trusts and Other Entities

Under the current India-UK Tax Treaty, a ‘trust’ or an ‘estate’ may qualify as a ‘person’ under Article 3(1) (f) of India-UK Tax Treaty, only if they are treated as a separate taxable unit under the taxation laws in force of the concerned country. Hence, in a scenario, where a UK trust is treated as a pass-through entity (and not a separate taxable unit) for taxation purposes in the UK and its income is taxable in the hands of its beneficiaries, then the income derived by such a trust from India may not be eligible for the India-UK Tax Treaty benefits.

The Protocol has proposed to amend the definition of the ‘resident of the Contracting State’ in Article 4(1) to provide that in case of an income derived by a ‘trust’ or an ‘estate’, if such income is subject to tax in tge resident country in the hands of its beneficiaries as tax resident of that country, then to that extent it would be eligible for benefits under the India-UK Tax Treaty. Hence, even if the UK trust is not treated as a separate taxable unit under the UK domestic tax laws, if certain portion of the income of the UK trust is taxable in the UK in the hands of beneficiaries who are residents of the UK, then to that extent, income of the UK trust would be eligible for benefits under the India-UK Tax Treaty.

Tax Withholding on Dividend:

One of the much discussed benefits proposed to be granted under the Protocol is the reduced rate of tax withholding on payment of dividend by replacing the existing Article 11 of the India UK Tax Treaty. The Protocol has provided for revised withholding tax rate as follows –

a.    15% of the gross amount of dividends where such dividend is paid out of income derived directly or indirectly from immovable property by an investment vehicle which distributes most of its income annually and whose income from such immovable property is exempted from tax;

b.    10% of gross amount of dividends in all other cases.

Dividend by Investment Vehicle Earning Income from Immovable Property

The new Article 11(2)(a) proposed to be introduced by the Protocol provides 15% withholding rate on declaration of dividend by an investment vehicle earning income from immovable property where such income is exempt in its hands. It seems to cover investment vehicle like Real-Estate Investment Trusts (REITs) registered in India, even though the income earned by such REITs are not currently exempted in India. Hence, it does not seem to have any significant impact from the Indian perspective. However, an investment vehicle in the UK (like UK REITs) earning income from immovable property, which is exempt in its hands in UK, may fall within the ambit of this provision.

Dividend in Other Cases

The Protocol proposes to amend the withholding tax on dividend (other than the dividends covered above) to 10% vide Article 11(2)(b) in line with the withholding tax rate applicable for other OECD countries.

This amendment does not appear to bring any impact on the investors from either country (except in certain cases)n due to the current tax regime under the domestic tax laws of India and the UK.

UK Shareholder Earning Dividend from Indian Company
Under the Income-tax Act, 1961, an Indian company declaring dividend has to pay Dividend Distribution Tax (DDT) . Such dividend is tax exempt in India in the hands of resident as well as non-resident share-holder and there is no withholding tax. Hence, under the current domestic tax law, the reduction in with-holding tax rate will not have any impact, though it would be critical if in the future, the DDT regime is withdrawn from the domestic tax law in India.

Interestingly, the Protocol does not throw any light on tax credit to UK shareholder in the UK with respect to DDT suffered on distribution of dividend by an Indian company. It has been over a decade now since the concept of DDT has been in place under the Income-tax Act. Issue of credit for the DDT paid in India in the hands of foreign investor in their home country is unclear and has been a matter of debate. In the past, while entering into a Protocol with Hungary, some clarity has been provided to this effect.

It is pertinent to note that the UK domestic tax law provides for the underlying tax credit for taxes paid on income earned in overseas country (i.e. corporate tax). Hence, the UK shareholder earning dividend from an Indian company would be entitled to tax credit for corporate tax paid by the Indian company on its profits from which dividends are distributed. Hence, uncertainty on the tax credit for DDT practically does not have a serious bearing.

Indian Shareholder Earning Dividend from a UK Company
Under the current UK domestic tax laws; in most of the cases, there is no tax withholding on distribution of dividend by a UK Company (subject to satisfaction of certain conditions).

In a scenario, where the Indian shareholder does not satisfy any of the prescribed conditions and is unable to claim exemption under the UK domestic tax laws, he suffers tax withholding in the UK. Only in such case, the UK company will have to withhold tax on distribution of dividend to Indian shareholder. Currently, the tax withholding rate on dividend as per the India-UK Tax Treaty is 15% which is proposed to be reduced to 10% by the Protocol.

Article on Limitation of Benefits (LOB):

UK government as well as the Indian government intend to introduce General Anti-Avoidance Rules (GAAR) under their respective domestic tax laws. UK is intending to implement the same from the next fiscal year and the Indian gvernment has recently deferred the implementation of GAAR by two years and is proposed to be introduced with effect from 1st April, 2016. Pending this, GAAR provisions have been introduced under the Protocol. Article 28C on LOB clause proposes to deny the Treaty benefits with respect to a transaction if the main purpose or one of the main purposes of the transaction was to obtain benefits under the India-UK Tax Treaty. Further, it is also provided, that the treaty benefits may also be denied if the main purpose or one of the main purpose of creation or existence of any entity in either of the country was to obtain benefits under the India-UK Tax Treaty.

This type of LOB clause is also inserted in many recently concluded Indian Tax Treaties, for example, treaties with Georgia, Uzbekistan, Nepal, Iceland, Finland, etc. The effect of the LOB clause can be far-reaching and its implementation would depend largely upon the implementation of GAAR provisions by both the countries in their domestic tax laws.

Exchange of Information and Assistance in Collection of Taxes:

The Protocol also proposes to introduce certain other measures to curb tax evasion practices by introducing Article 28 on Exchange of Information, Article 28A on Tax Examinations Abroad and Article 28B on Assistance in Collection of Taxes in the India-UK Tax Treaty.

As one of the purposes of double tax avoidance agreements is to enable and facilitate the exchange of information between the tax authorities, Article 28 on Exchange of Information gives a statutory recognition to the formal process of information exchange between the competent authorities. The information that can be exchanged under this Article is that which enables the carrying out the provisions of the Treaty or enforcement of domestic law of the Contracting States effectively. However, inspite of exchange of information, under the principle of procedural autonomy, collection of taxes by one Contracting State from the residents of the other Contracting state remains a difficult task. Thus, to overcome this, Protocol proposes to introduce Article 28B on Assistance in Collection of Taxes in the Treaty for smoothing the process of recovery of taxes. This Article is also found in tax treaties entered into by India with countries like Norway, Denmark, Sweden, Ukraine, South Africa, etc.

Entry into force:

The provisions of this Protocol will take effect only when both the governments complete the necessary implementing measures by notification to this effect.

Conclusion:

The clarity on allowability of Treaty benefits to the UK partnerships and other tax transparent entities (like trust, estates, etc.) is a welcome step; though the Indian Judicial Authorities have evaluated this aspect in the past. The reduced withholding rate on dividend seems to suggest very limited applicability. However, the implementation of LOB clause with respect to invocation of GAAR may have a far reaching impact and guidelines under the domestic tax laws on this aspect would bring in more clarity.

The procedural amendments like Article on exchange of information and assistance in collection of taxes would help to bring more transparency for the Governments of both the countries.

US Tax Goes Global

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction

Ensuring tax compliance and establishing tax discipline is the basic objective of lawmakers and for some unexplained reasons, jumping the tax payments is many tax payers’ delight across the world. Eventually when law enforcers realise the weakness of the stick, they offer carrots of amnesty schemes now and then and the United States of America is no exception.

In 2009 and 2011 the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) offered schemes of Overseas Voluntary Disclosure Initiatives (OVDI) for tax defaulters to come clean about paying their taxes on their hitherto undisclosed foreign income and also to adhere to the requirements of yearly disclosure of foreign financial assets under the Foreign Bank Account Reporting (FBAR). Having received a lukewarm response to the OVDI, the IRS introduced Overseas Voluntary Disclosure Programme (OVDP), which is presently open. Apart from this, Foreign Assets Tax Compliance Act (FATCA) has become effective from the year 2011.
Under FATCA, tax payers who are US citizens, Green Card holders or resident aliens are required to declare their foreign financial assets to the IRS. However, through FATCA, US lawmakers have, probably for the first time, also sought to stretch the geographical limits of the IRS jurisdiction to almost all the nations, and the responsibility of collecting taxpayer’s information is cast on global institutions. No doubt, Double Tax Treaties grant abundant rights to tax authorities to seek tax payer’s information, but FATCA turns the tables by entrusting the responsibility of collecting and providing information as regarding financial affairs of all US citizens and US address accounts on banks, mutual funds, insurance companies, broking houses and other financial institutions across the world, thereby tightening the IRS grip to control possible tax evasion.
[http://www.treasury.gov/press-center/press-releases/ Pages/tg1759.aspx]
Effective 1st January, 2014 many Non-Resident Indians (NRI) of US who by ignorance or otherwise have failed to submit FBAR and FATCA reports or declare Indian income in US tax returns may face punitive action. It would therefore, be prudent for every NRI to understand and address these important changes being implemented next year. The most innocent mistake NRIs residing in the US tend to make is the non-declaration of their Indian assets owned prior to migration and financial assets inherited or received through partition of family which are otherwise covered by reporting requirements of FBAR and FATCA and non-payment of tax on income generated out of such assets.
US Engaging with India for compliance
US Treasury has initiated the signing of agreements with various Governments requiring domestic financial institutions operating in their country to provide requisite information for the calendar year 2013 of all US citizens and US addressee customers to the IRS from 1st January, 2014. While governments of UK, Denmark and Mexico have already signed such an agreement. France, Germany, Spain, and Italy are in the process of concluding the agreements. Efforts are being made to enter into similar agreements with many other countries.
As posted in the US Embassy report, US Treasury Secretary Mr. Timothy Geithner and US Federal Reserve Chairman Mr. Ben Bernanke met the Finance Minister of India and the Prime Minister of India on the 9th October, 2012 and discussed various options and possible actions for combating tax evasion by US-based NRIs.[http://newdelhi.usembassy.gov/sr100913.html].
As a consequence, the Reserve Bank of India has been asked to draft a domestic legislation requiring Indian banks, mutual funds, insurance companies, broking houses and other financial institutions to provide information of investments of US citizens and US addressees to the IRS from 1st January, 2014. [http://articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2012-11- 27/news/35385827_1_financial-assets-fatca-financialinstitutions ]

To take an overview of the subject, salient features of the FBAR, FATCA and taxability of global income under US tax laws are briefly discussed below.

FBAR
It is a simple form to collect basic information of US citizens or US residents of their overseas financial accounts in their names or wherein they have signing authority or control.
Applicability: The FBAR is required to be filed by a person who is a US citizen, resident of US, a US partnership firm, a Limited Liability Company (LLC) or trust (referred as United States Person) which has financial interest or signing authority in overseas financial investment exceeding INR621,672 during a calendar year. It may be noted that filing of tax returns jointly by a married couple is common in US but the limit of INR621,672 is for each individual.
Foreign Financial Account:
It includes all accounts maintained with a financial institution and also includes:
• Securities or brokerage account;
 • Bank account including savings, current or deposits held as NRE, NRO, FCNR account and also Resident account.
• Commodity Futures & Options Accounts;
• Whole life insurance policy and any annuity with cash value;
 • Mutual fund or similar pooled fund and
• Any account maintained with a foreign financial institution or other person performing the services of a financial institution. It may be noted that investment in a partnership or proprietorship firm, private limited company, personal loans and personal assets like jewellery are not included and hence not required to be reported. Immovable properties are also not covered under FBAR but bank balances generated by funds remitted for purchase of immovable property in India need to be reported. Financial Interest: A United States person is said to have a financial interest in a foreign financial account if:
 • He is the owner of record or holder of legal title, or
• The owner of record or holder of legal title is another person who may be:

a) an agent, nominee, attorney or a person acting on behalf of the US person with respect to the account;

 b) a corporation/company in which the US person owns directly or indirectly more than 50% of the total value of shares or voting power;

 c) a partnership in which the US person owns directly or indirectly or has interest greater than 50% of the profits or capital;

d) a trust of which the US person is the trust grantor and has an ownership interest in the trust for US federal tax purposes;

e) a trust in which the US person has a more than 50% beneficial interest in the assets or income of the trust for the calendar year; or

f) any other entity in which the US person owns directly or indirectly more than 50% of the voting power or total value of equity interest or total assets or interest in profits.

Joint Owners: A husband and wife owning a joint account need not file separate reports. But if either spouse has a financial interest in any other account not held jointly then such a person should file a separate report for all accounts including those owned jointly with the spouse.

Form and Filing: The report is to be submitted in form TD F 90-22.1 with the US Department of the Treasury, Detroit by June 30 of the following year.

Penalty:
Improper filing of FBAR attracts penalty of $10,000 whereas wilful failure to file FBAR is liable to penalty of greater of $100,000 or 50% of the balance at the time of violation and also is subjected to criminal penalties.

FATCA

FATCA is enacted with the primary goal to gain information about US persons and requires US persons to report their foreign financial assets to the IRS and also requires foreign financial institutions to report directly to the IRS details of financial accounts of US persons held with them.

Applicability: Individuals who are US citizens, tax residents, non-residents who elect to be resident aliens and non-residents who are bonafide residents of American Samoa or Puerto Rico having foreign financial assets above the threshold limit.

Foreign Financial Assets:
It includes following financial assets:

•  Checking, savings and deposit accounts with banks held as NRE, NRO, FCNR or Resident accounts;

•    Brokerage accounts held with brokers & dealers;

•    Stocks or securities issued by a foreign corporation;

•    Note, bond or debenture issued by a foreign person;

•    Swaps of all kinds including interest rate, currency, equity, index, commodity and similar agreements with a foreign counterparty;

•    Options or other derivative instruments of any currency, commodity or any other kind that is entered into with a foreign counterparty or issuer;

•    Partnership interest in a foreign partnership;

•    Interest in a foreign retirement plan or deferred compensation plan;

•    Interest in a foreign estate;

•    Any interest in a foreign-issued insurance contract or annuity with a cash-surrender value; and

•    Any account maintained with a foreign financial institution and every foreign financial asset, income or gain whereof is to be reported in the tax return to be filed with the IRS.

It is significant to note, that unlike FBAR, FATCA covers investments of any and every size in equity shares of a private limited company, capital in partnership or proprietorship, loans and advances including personal loans, etc. Immovable properties are excluded. If the US person is not required to file US tax return for any reason, then he is not required to file the FATCA report.

Both FBAR and FATCA cover erstwhile investments in India and inherited or partitioned family assets.

Reporting Threshold: Individuals are covered by FATCA if the value of foreign financial assets exceeds $50,000 as on 31st December or $75,000 during the tax year and in case of married couple tax-payers $100,000 and $150,000 respectively.

For individual tax-payers living abroad these limits are raised to $200,000 and $300,000 respectively and $400,000 and $600,000 for a married couple filing joint return.

Joint Owners: The tax return of a married couple will include assets of both the spouses.

Form and Filing:
The report is to be submitted in form 8938 with the IRS with the tax return. The due dates for filing tax returns with the IRS including extension provisions will apply accordingly.

Penalty: Failure to file Form 8938 by the due date or filing an incomplete form attracts a penalty of $10,000. Additional penalty of $10,000 per month up to a maximum penalty of $ 50,000 may become payable for failure to file inspite of IRS notice.

Tax Withholding: FATCA also requires 30% tax withholding on certain payments of US source income paid to non participating foreign financial institution or account holders who fail to provide requisite information. [http://www.irs.gov/uac/Treasury,-IRS-Issue-Proposed-Regulations-for-FATCA-Implementation]

Global Income of US Persons being Taxed in the US

Internal Revenue Code (IRC) requires a US citizen irrespective of his place of residence or resident of the US to declare and pay income tax on worldwide income. Of course, taxpayers having income in India can choose between the IRC and the regulations of India-USA Double Tax Treaty for income arising in India, and opt to be governed by provisions which are more beneficial to him, subject to conditions as may be applicable.

US Offshore Voluntary Disclosure Programme

The IRS has once again given an opportunity for voluntary disclosure of overseas assets and income thereon under the OVDP.

The OVDP is similar to the earlier OVDI under which tax payers are required to pay tax on hitherto undisclosed income of earlier eight tax years together with interest thereon, and in addition to a penalty of 27.5% of the highest balance of hitherto undisclosed foreign bank accounts and/or value of foreign assets over the last eight years. For balance upto $ 75,000 reduced penalty of 12.5% applies. In cases of tax payers disclosing and paying tax on foreign incomes but failing only to file FBAR returns, delinquent reports may be filed possibly saving oneself from penal provisions. [http://www.irs.gov/uac/2012-Offshore-Voluntary-Disclosure-Program]

Many NRIs may not have abided by the FBAR provisions and few by ignorance have also failed to pay tax on their Indian income in the US but ignorance of law cannot be an excuse, and therefore, it would be appropriate for US-based NRIs and Chartered Accountants advising them to take advantage of the OVDP before the programme is discontinued.

UK’s drive for competitiveness

fiogf49gjkf0d
The UK has undertaken a series of changes in its tax policy in recent years with the aim of improving the attractiveness of the UK as a place to do business. These changes are continuing with a key goal of making the UK tax system the most competitive in the G20. This is becoming a reality as a result of a number of measures that have recently been introduced.

The change in tax policy was brought about by the threat that existing UK businesses were considering moving their headquarters outside the UK (referred to as ‘inversions’) and that international businesses were choosing other locations for investment. As a result the UK government has three clear goals in making the changes it has made:

1. To keep existing business activities in the UK (both UK groups and international groups with existing UK businesses);

2. To stimulate new business activity by existing UK businesses; and

3. To attract new business activity to the UK. One of the countries which the UK government is specifically targeting for new investment in the UK is India. Historically, Indian groups have made significant investments into the UK and the UK government is keen for this to continue.

In this article, we will look at the key changes that have been implemented in the UK under the tax reforms and how the UK is positioned today as a holding company and regional hub location.

Perceived “barriers” to the UK’s competitiveness The UK tax regime has traditionally had some key attributes that groups look for in headquarter or holding company jurisdictions. For example, the UK does not, under its domestic tax law, levy withholding tax on dividend distributions paid to overseas investors in UK companies. It also exempts capital gains derived from share disposals from tax.

However, several areas of UK tax law continued to make the UK appear uncompetitive especially when viewed against territories such as Singapore, Ireland and the Netherlands. These included the UK’s comparatively high corporation tax rate, the system of taxing dividends received by UK companies, the taxation of overseas branch profits and the CFC rules.

Foreign profits reform

Reduction in corporation tax rate

The “Corporate Tax Roadmap” released by the HM Treasury in November 2010 set out the plans for the reduction in the corporation tax rate. The rate at that time was set to steadily decline to 22% by 2014. The government has since announced a further reduction to 20% from April 2015. This would make the UK’s main corporation tax rate the lowest in the G20 alongside Russia, Turkey and Saudi Arabia.

Introduction of the UK’s foreign dividend exemption

Prior to the introduction of this new regime, the UK taxed the receipt of foreign dividends with credits potentially available for overseas and withholding tax suffered under the UK’s “double taxation relief” regime. This regime grew increasingly complex – creating an administrative and commercial burden on UK plc, which required reserves and cash to fund shareholder distributions. In many cases, the regime resulted in UK companies having to “top up” corporation tax payable even after taking credits, particularly when the headline UK corporation rate was as high as 30%.

Following representations from business and a consultation period, the UK’s dividend exemption was introduced with effect from 1 July 2009. The system introduced a number of “exempt classes” into which the vast majority of distributions should now fall. The main areas where dividends may still be taxable are if the distribution is itself deductible for overseas tax purposes, or where a distribution is funded from a previous structure designed to erode the UK corporation tax base.

Introduction of the “branch profits exemption”

Another area where the UK was seen as lagging behind other more competitive territories was the taxation of overseas branches of UK companies. As with distributions from overseas companies, the UK taxed the overseas branch profits of UK companies, with a credit for local tax suffered. Again this was a complex regime which often meant that additional UK corporation tax was payable, and impacted a purely commercial decision as to whether it was more efficient to enter a new territory via a branch or an overseas incorporated company.

To remove this barrier the UK authorities introduced an extremely flexible “branch profits exemption” with effect from 2011. Broadly, the regime allows a UK company to elect for its overseas branches to be exempt from UK tax. Electing companies will be exempt from UK tax on branch profits, but will not receive loss relief in respect of branch losses. There are certain conditions which need to be met in order to qualify for the election. For example, the branches must be ‘good’ branches as determined by applying the principles under the CFC rules. Also, if the UK company had taken the benefit of the losses of the branch, these losses must first be offset with taxable profits before the company can elect into the branch exemption rules. The branch profits are calculated using tax treaty principles. With this “optin” system, groups have the choice of applying the regime on a UK company-by-company basis through an election system. This is particularly useful as it allows groups to maintain the “old” position where it makes sense to do so – for example where a UK company has branches, or a majority of branches, with losses or “high tax” profits.

Fundamental relaxation of the UK CFC rules

Compared to the above changes, which could be termed “easy wins”, the relaxation of the UK CFC rules has been the most discussed and involved process. The previous incarnation of these rules was one of the primary drivers behind some of the corporate “inversions” mentioned earlier (where existing UK businesses were moving their headquarters outside the UK), and in some cases prevented overseas groups from viewing the UK as a viable holding or regional holding company jurisdiction. A particular complaint of UK groups was that the rules were applied in a disproportionate manner. In order to tax profits artificially diverted from the UK they also often caught profits generated overseas through genuine commercial operations, i.e., amounting to an effective system of “worldwide taxation” employed by the UK.

After significant consultation, the revised CFC rules are now on the statute book and have taken effect from 1 January 2013. The driving principle behind the new rules is one of “territoriality”. The revised CFC rules have been carefully crafted only to apply to target profits which are shown to have been “artificially diverted” from the UK. Profits which have been generated overseas through genuine economic activities and through activities which pose no risk to the UK corporation tax “base” should be left untaxed by the new UK CFC rules.

The rules remain relatively detailed, but include a wide-range of exemptions from the CFC rules, only one of which has to apply to prevent a CFC charge. As such, we anticipate that a majority of overseas subsidiaries of UK companies should be exempt under the new CFC rules. For overseas trading activities, only where it can be shown that profits have arisen, to a significant extent, due to UK activities (such as key decision makers or developers of intellectual property being in the UK) do we expect to see taxation of profits under the UK CFC provisions.

For interest income, the UK regime includes UK CFC taxation at one quarter of the UK headline corporation tax regime (which would be a rate of 5% by 2015), with the potential for 0% under certain specific conditions.

Whilst the UK has chosen to retain CFC rules and is therefore at a disadvantage compared to other territories which does not have such rules, the practical impact of the UK CFC rules for groups which choose to locate their headquarters or holding or regional holding companies in the UK is likely to be limited to that of compliance going forward.

‘Above the line’ research and development (“R&D”) tax incentive

The UK has had an R&D tax incentive for large companies for over 10 years but following a series of consultations it was decided by the government that a fundamental change is required in order to make the incentive more attractive to innovative businesses. Under the old rules, a ‘super deduction’ was available, i.e. a deduction in addition to that for the qualifying R&D expenditure was available. For example 130% of qualifying expenditure was deductible in certain cases.

Under the new rules, the benefit by way of credit will be ‘above the line’. This will allow the benefit of the R&D relief to be accounted for as a reduction of R&D expenditure within the Profit & Loss account. The associated tax credit is offset against corporation taxes payable.

The change to an above the line credit is being made in order for the benefit of the incentive to be more directly linked to the amount of R&D expenditure and also to show an improved pre -tax profit as a result. By applying the credit against the R&D expense, thus reducing the cost of the R&D in the accounts of the company and reflecting the impact within the pre-tax profit, it is thought that the incentive will have more of an effect in encouraging R&D activity in the UK.

The new credit will be a taxable credit of 10% of qualifying expenditure. The credit will be fully payable to companies which have no corporation tax liability, subject to a cap equivalent to the Pay As You Earn/National Insurance Contributions (PAYE/NIC – employment and social security) liabilities of the company. The new credit will be available for qualifying expenditure incurred on or after April 1, 2013 and will initially be available as an alternative to the current super deduction, before completely replacing the super deduction from April 1, 2016.

This is of great benefit to loss making groups in that they will be able to obtain payment for the credit, subject to the PAYE/NIC cap.

Patent Box

As part of the UK Government’s aim to encourage innovation in the UK and ensure the commercialisation of UK inventions in the UK, a new 10% tax rate has been introduced from 2013 and will apply to Patent Box profits. This is a significant saving as compared to the main headline tax rate of 20% (by 2015).

The relief applies to worldwide profits from pat-ented inventions protected by the UK Intellectual Property Office of the European Patent Office as well as patents granted by other recognised patent offices. It is not only royalties and income from the sale of IP that qualifies for this regime – all profits (less a routine profit and marketing charge) from sales of products which incorporate a patented invention qualify. This is a very broad definition and is intended to ensure that the tax rate of 10% applies to all profits arising from patents and not just the profits attributable to the patent itself.

A company qualifies if it has the ownership (or an exclusive licence) of patents and the company (or the wider group) has performed qualifying development and has the responsibility for and is actively involved in the ongoing decision making concerning the further development and exploitation of the IP. This allows a business to benefit from the regime even where they did not develop the IP originally. This supports the objectives of the Patent Box to encourage continuing development and commercial exploitation of patents by UK businesses.

The new Patent Box provides an attractive opportunity for businesses to reduce the costs associated with the commercial exploitation of patented IP. The regime is flexible and generous and should prompt global businesses to favourably consider using the UK as a place to invest in innovation.

Substantial Shareholdings Exemption (SSE)

The Substantial Shareholdings Exemption (SSE) regime was introduced in 2002. The SSE broadly exempts from UK corporation tax any capital gain on disposals by trading companies or groups, of substantial shareholdings in other trading companies or groups. Generally speaking, ‘trading’ refers to operating companies/groups with an active trade/business. The important point here is that the business should be an operating business with income from its operations (as against a business with minimal operations receiving mainly passive income). However, the legislation has also set out detailed technical conditions for the exemption to apply, and anti-avoidance provisions, all of which must be met. Care in particular cases is therefore needed in order to determine the availability of this relief.

Broadly, there are three sets of conditions which must be satisfied in order to obtain the exemption:

1.    The substantial shareholding requirement – The investing company (the company making the disposal) must own at least 10% of the ordinary share capital of the investee (company whose shares are being disposed) for a continuous period of 12 months preceding the disposal

2.    Conditions relating to the ‘investing’ company/ group, i.e., the company/group making the disposal – The investing company must be a ‘sole trading company’ or a member of a ‘qualifying group’. This condition must be met from the start of the latest 12 months period for which the substantial shareholding requirement (above) is satisfied, until the time of the disposal. It must also be met immediately after the disposal takes place. A ‘sole trading company’ is a company which is not a member of a group, which is carrying on trading activities and whose activities do not to a substantial extent include activities other than trading activities. A ‘qualifying group’ is a group, the activities of whose members, taken together, do not to a substantial extent include activities other than trading activities. Intra-group activities, such as intercompany loans, rental streams or royalty charges are ignored for this purpose. As stated earlier, ‘trading’ here refers to operating companies/groups with an active trade/business, i.e. the business should be an operating business with income from its operations. Whether a company or group is carrying on trading activities requires a consideration of the activities, income, assets, liabilities and people functions of the relevant company/group.

3.    Conditions relating to the ‘investee’ company/ sub-group, i.e., the company/sub-group being disposed of – The investee must have been a ‘qualifying company’ from the start of the latest 12 month period for which the substantial shareholding requirement (above) is satisfied, until the time of the disposal. This condition must also be met immediately after the disposal. A ‘qualifying company’ means a trading company or the holding company of a trading group or a trading sub-group. Broadly, this means that the activities of the company being sold and its 51% subsidiaries (if any) will be considered. To qualify for the exemption, at least one of these companies must be carrying on trading activities. Also, the activities of all the group/subgroup companies, taken together, must not include to a substantial extent activities other than trading activities. As stated earlier, ‘trading’ here refers to operating companies/groups with an active trade/business, i.e. the business should be an operating business with income from its operations. Whether a company or group is carrying on trading activities requires a consideration of the activities, income, assets, liabilities and people functions of the relevant company/group.

Where these conditions are met, gains arising on the disposal of shares will be exempt from corporation tax on chargeable gains. Equally, capital losses arising on such disposals are not allowable. Where there is significant uncertainty on the applicability of the SSE to a proposed transaction, an application can be filed with the UK tax authorities, Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (HMRC) to obtain a clearance that the conditions of the SSE would be considered to be met.


General Anti-Abuse Rule (GAAR)

There has been substantial consultation by the UK government on the introduction of a GAAR.

The GAAR is not part of the package of measures (discussed above) which have a key goal of making the UK tax system the most competitive in the G20. While the introduction of a GAAR could be considered to introduce some uncertainty, the government has clearly stated that the aim of the GAAR is to target only artificial and abusive schemes.

In addition, the introduction of the UK GAAR will bring the UK in line with most other European (and other) countries, which already have GAARs.

The government has confirmed that the GAAR should only apply to arrangements which begin after the legislation becomes the law (expected to be by July 2013) and it will apply only to arrangements which pass two tests. Arrangements will pass the first test if one of their main purposes is to obtain a tax advantage, judged objectively. The second test is a reasonableness test which will only be met if the arrangements entered into cannot be regarded as a reasonable course of action, having regard to the consistency of the substantial results of the arrangements with the principles and policy underlying the relevant tax provisions. Tax advantages which are caught by the GAAR will be counteracted on a just and reasonableness basis.

As part of the GAAR being introduced, an advisory panel will be formed which will have two main roles. Firstly, to provide opinions on the potential application of the GAAR, after representations have been made to them, and secondly to approve the guidance which HMRC will prepare on the GAAR.

It is the stated aim that the GAAR should target and counteract only artificial and abusive schemes. On the basis that any tax planning undertaken by Indian businesses generally has commercial substance, the GAAR is not expected to have any significant impact on normal commercial transactions undertaken by Indian groups in the UK.

The UK is ‘open for business’


As mentioned above, the recently announced changes to the UK corporate tax system are part of a package of measures which have been introduced over the last few years. To summarise, the most significant of the changes include:

•    A continued reduction in the UK’s main rate of corporation tax to 20% from 1 April 2015 (the rate is currently 23% and was 30% before April 2008).

•    A Patent Box regime, from 1 April 2013, which will result in qualifying patent box profits being taxed at a significantly reduced rate of only 10%, the aim being to encourage the development and exploitation of patents and other similar intellectual property in the UK.

•    An exemption system for most dividends received by UK companies and for gains made on the sale, by a UK company, of most shareholdings in trading companies.

•    An elective exemption system for overseas activities of a UK company (overseas branches).

•    A reformed controlled foreign companies (CFC) regime which is targeted at only taxing profits that have been artificially diverted from the UK.

•    The introduction of the new ‘above the line’ R&D tax incentive.

These changes have resulted in the UK’s tax system becoming more territorial and making the UK a very attractive location for regional holding and “hub” companies, acquisition companies and publicly listed parent companies, particularly when combined with a number of long standing attractive features, including being the G20 country with the most double tax treaties and the absence of a withholding tax on dividends paid by a UK company.

The UK as a headquarter and holding company jurisdiction

Over the last three years, a number of groups, particularly US groups (for example – Ensco Inter-national and Rowan Companies), have relocated their headquarters to the UK, partly because they understood that there should no longer be adverse UK corporation tax implications from doing so. Other US and non- US groups have also been actively using the UK as a regional holding company jurisdiction, particularly since the structure of the new UK CFC rules has been settled. The interaction between HMRC and these groups has also been encouraging, with HMRC actively engaging in pre-transaction discussions with businesses and offering pre-transaction clearances.

For Indian groups investing overseas, particularly into Europe and the US, the UK is now competitive with other more traditional holding company jurisdictions such as Singapore, Netherlands and Luxembourg. In addition to offering similar benefits in terms of low or zero holding company corporation tax, many groups often have substantial existing operations in the UK. This, combined with the UK’s extensive double tax treaty network, offers plenty of potential for multinationals to use the UK as an efficient regional management and financing hub.

Interest-free loans to subsidiaries — Another addition to transfer pricing controversies

Article 2

In
this era of globalisation, many Indian companies are setting up with the thrust
of capturing global market. In order to expand globally, many Indian companies
have either acquired companies abroad or have set up their own subsidiaries.


Equity could be one of the ways of funding this overseas expansion. However, in
certain instances, loan funding from parent company could require lesser
documentation, could be easier from a repayment perspective and hence relatively
simple. Where such loans to the subsidiaries are interest free, a point to be
considered is whether pursuant to the provisions of the transfer pricing
regulations as contained in S. 92 to 92F of Chapter X of the Income-tax Act,
1961, any interest income is to be imputed in the hands of the Indian parent
company.


There are recent rulings on this subject. For example, in the case of Perot
Systems TSI India Ltd. v. DCIT,
(2010 TIOL 51) (Delhi Tribunal) and VVF
Limited v. DCIT,
(2010 TIOL 51) (Mumbai Tribunal). It would be interesting
to note the observations made by the Tribunal while deciding the matter and the
key points for consideration emerging out of these rulings.


1. Perot Systems TSI India Ltd.
v. DCIT,


(2010 TIOL 51) (Delhi Tribunal) :


Facts :


The assessee was engaged in the business of designing and developing
technology-enabled business transformation solutions, providing business
consulting, systems integration services and software solutions and services.


The assessee had extended foreign currency loans to its associated enterprises
(‘AEs’) situated in Bermuda and Hungary. Both the entities were in start-up
phase. The loans were used by AEs for long-term investment in step-down
subsidiaries. The loans, which were interest free in nature, were granted after
obtaining the relevant approval from the Reserve Bank of India (‘RBI’).


The Assessing Officer (‘AO’) made a reference to the Transfer Pricing Officer (‘TPO’)
for determination of the arm’s-length price (‘ALP’). The TPO held that the loan
transaction was not at arm’s length. The TPO imputed interest on the loan
transaction as part of the transfer pricing assessment.


The TPO applied the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (‘CUP’) method for
determination of the ALP. The TPO used the monthly LIBOR rate and added the
average basis points charged by other companies while arriving at the
arm’s-length interest rate of LIBOR + 1.64% and thereby proposed an upward
adjustment for interest in relation to the loan transaction. The AO gave effect
to the adjustment made by the TPO in his order.


The assessee appealed before the Commissioner of Income-tax (Appeals) [‘CIT(A)’]
against the transfer pricing adjustment made. The CIT(A) upheld the order of the
AO and also denied the benefit of plus/minus 5% as provided under the proviso to
S. 92C(2) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’).


Assessee’s contentions :


The assessee raised the following key contentions especially on the economic and
business expediency front to substantiate the reasons for not charging
interest :


(a) The loans provided were in the nature of quasi-equity and were used for
making long-term investments in step-down subsidiaries. The intent of extending
loan was to earn dividends and not interest.


(b) Both the entities were in the start-up phase and no lender would have lent
money to a start-up entity.


(c) The loans were granted after seeking RBI approval.


(d) The loan granted to the Hungarian subsidiary is treated as equity under the
Hungarian thin capitalisation rules and no deduction is allowed to the Hungarian
entity on payment of interest.

   e) The income connotes real income and not fictitious income. The assessee placed reliance on Authority for Advance Rulings delivered in the case of Vanenburg Group B.V. for the proposition that in the absence of any income, transfer pricing being machinery provisions shall not apply.

Tribunal ruling:

The Tribunal upheld the ruling of the CIT(A) and decided the matter in favour of the Revenue. The Tribunal made the following comments/observations while ruling in favour of the Revenue:

 a)   The Tribunal examined the loan agreement and stated that they could not find any feature in the loan agreement which supports the contention that such a loan was in the nature of quasi-equity. The Tribunal further observed that it was not the case that there was any technical problem that the loan could not have been contributed originally as capital if it was actually meant to be capital contribution.

  b)  The Tribunal stated that if the assessee’s contention that interest-free loans granted to AEs should be accepted without adjustment for notional interest, it would tantamount to taking out such transactions from the purview of S. 92(1) and S. 92B of the Act.

  c)  The Tribunal dismissed the assessee’s contention that the loans were granted out of commercial expediency and economic circumstances did not warrant the charging of interest. The Tribunal also dismissed the assessee’s proposition that only real income should be taxed and noted that these arguments could not be accepted in the context of Chapter X of the Act.

 d)   The Revenue contended that the loan granted to the group entity in Bermuda was made with the intention of shifting profits to Bermuda which is a tax haven. The Tribunal concurred with the Revenue’s contention that this transaction would result in shifting profits from India, resulting in bringing down the tax incidence for the group and hence this was concluded to be a case of violation of transfer pricing norms.

    e) The Tribunal agreed with the Revenue’s contention that the RBI approval of any transaction is not sufficient for Indian transfer pricing purposes and the character and substance of the transaction needs to be judged in order to determine whether the transaction is at arm’s length. The RBI approval does not put a seal of approval on the true character of the transaction from an Indian transfer pricing perspective.

   f) The Tribunal also held that the assessee would not be entitled to the benefit of plus/ minus 5% as provided under the proviso to S. 92C(2) of the Act. The Tribunal held that only one LIBOR rate has been applied, which has been adjusted for some basis points and this cannot be equated with more than one price being determined so as to apply the aforesaid proviso.

   2. VVF Limited v. DCIT (2010 TIOL 51) (Mumbai Tribunal):

Facts:

The assessee had two wholly-owned subsidiaries (associated enterprises) in Canada and Dubai, to whom interest-free loans had been extended. The assessee used CUP as the most appropriate method to benchmark this transaction and determined the arm’s-length price for the interest as Nil. It is pertinent to note that the assessee had taken foreign currency loan from the ICICI Bank at the rate of LIBOR plus 3% for investing in subsidiaries abroad.

The case was referred to the TPO. The TPO took into account details of borrowings by the assessee from different sources and arrived at a conclusion that the loan transactions were made out of a cash credit facility extended by Citibank at an interest rate of 14%, the same rate should be considered as ALP. Accordingly, the AO made an upward adjustment by adopting a rate of interest of 14% per annum as the ALP.

The assessee preferred an appeal before the CIT(A) and the CIT (Appeals) upheld the action of the AO.

Assessee’s contentions:

The assessee contended that since it had sufficient interest-free funds, it was justified in not charging the interest on loans given to the overseas group entities. Further, the loan was given out of commercial expediency. The assessee also argued on the principle of real income as there was no real income which can be brought to tax.

Tribunal ruling:

The Tribunal upheld the stand of the AO. While up-holding the stand of the AO, the Tribunal made the following observations:

   a) The purpose of making arm’s-length adjustments is to nullify the impact of the inter-relationship between the enterprises.

    b) The Tribunal held that it was irrelevant whether or not the loans were provided from interest-free funds or out of interest-bearing funds. It went on to say that CUP method seeks to ascertain the arm’s-length price taking into consideration the price at which similar transactions have been entered into. CUP method has nothing to do with the costs incurred. Thus, whether there is a cost to the assessee or not in advancing interest-free loan or whether it was commercially expedient is irrelevant in this context.

    c) The Tribunal held that the appropriate CUP for benchmarking this transaction would be the interest rate charged on foreign currency lending. Thus, interest rate charged on the domestic borrowing is not the appropriate CUP in the instant case.

    d) The Tribunal considered the financial position and credit rating of the subsidiaries to be broadly similar to the assessee. Accordingly, the Tribunal considered the rate at which the ICICI Bank has advanced the foreign currency loan to the assessee as ALP in the instant case.

Analysis:

The aforesaid rulings are very crucial for the simple reason that both the rulings stipulate that interest-free loan given by the Indian entity may not be viewed as at arm’s length from Indian transfer pricing perspective. This could have a significant impact on the Indian companies providing financial assistance to its overseas subsidiaries/group entities without charging any interest. Accordingly, a number of issues arise, which need to be analysed.

It is true that ordinarily, independent parties dealing with each other will not provide interest-free loans to each other. However, it would be incorrect to lay down a general principle of law that all cases of interest-free loan to subsidiaries would be non-compliant with the arm’s-length principle. The facts of each case could vary and there could be economic or commercial reasons for not charging the interest. These should be analysed independently before reaching the conclusion on the arm’s-length nature of the interest-free loan transaction.

The substance of the transaction should be given due credence. It is relevant to note that the argument on ‘quasi-equity’ was not per se rejected by the Tribunal in the case of Perot Systems. In fact, the Tribunal examined the loan agreement to as-certain the true nature of the loan transaction. The Tribunal could not find anything in the agreement which was suggestive of the fact that the loan was in effect quasi-equity. Thus, the moot point here is to demonstrate that in substance the funding instrument has characteristics of an equity as against debt. If it can be demonstrated that the economic substance of the loan is closer to equity than debt, an issue for consideration would be whether the loan is in the nature of equity so as to justify non-charging of interest. For example, if it can be demonstrated that no independent lender would have lent money to a subsidiary (on the basis of its stand-alone financial status) and the parent entity lends money to such a subsidiary, and hence the parent entity is exposed to significant risk, then the risk so assumed by the parent company could be far higher than what a pure lender of funds would be willing to undertake. The moot point therefore is whether the risk profile of such a loan transaction is closer to that of an equity transaction, and thereby making the same ‘quasi-equity’ in economic substance.

Para 1.37 of the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines is relevant to note in this context as it states that:

“However, there are two particular circumstances in which it may, exceptionally, be both appropriate and legitimate for a tax administration to consider disregarding the structure adopted by a taxpayer in entering into a controlled transaction. The first circumstance arises where the economic substance of a transaction differs from its form. In such a case the tax administration may disregard the parties’ characterisation of the transaction and re-characterise it in accordance with its substance. An example of this circumstance would be an investment in an associated enterprise in the form of interest-bearing debt when, at arm’s length, having regard to the economic circumstances of the borrowing company, the investment would not be expected to be structured in this way. In this case it might be appropriate for a tax administration to characterise the investment in accordance with its economic substance with the result that the loan may be treated as a subscription of capital.”

In fact, the Australian transfer pricing rules have laid down certain guiding principles to determine whether a particular loan transaction should be treated as equivalent to equity. Some of these factors are rights and obligations of lender and similarity with the rights and obligations of an equity holder, repayment rights whether subordinate to claims of other creditors, the debt equity ratio of the borrowing entity, etc.

In order to demonstrate the economic substance of the transaction, it would thus be important to appropriately document all the features of the funding instrument in the agreement/arrangement.

Moreover, the observation of the Tribunal in case of VVF that the credit rating of the subsidiary is broadly similar to that of the parent entity is in contradiction to the ruling of the Tax Court of Canada in its recent landmark ruling in case of GE Canada, on the subject of guarantee fees. The Court in this case, after examining the evidence and testimony of several expert witnesses, stated that the higher credit rating for the parent company does not automatically translate into a similar credit rating for the subsidiary. This essentially means that the risk profile of a subsidiary from a lender’s perspective could be quite different from that of the parent company, and this factor would need to be considered while determining the economic substance of the loan to the subsidiary i.e., debt or ‘quasiequity’.

Further, it is noteworthy that the Tribunal, while denying the benefit of plus/minus 5% in the case of Perot Systems, failed to recognise that the aver-age basis points figure added to LIBOR was arrived at considering the average of various basis points charged by a set of comparable companies. The Tri-bunal proceeded on the basis that LIBOR reflects only one rate and since only one rate has been used, the proviso to S. 92C(2) does not apply. LIBOR1 is a daily reference rate based on the interest rates at which banks borrow unsecured funds from other banks in the London wholesale money market. Thus, it is pertinent to note that LIBOR itself is determined based on the average of certain rates prevalent at a particular point of time. Thus, the assumption that LIBOR is only one rate may not be correct. Further, the ‘plus figure’ to LIBOR was determined based on the average of various basis points. Thus, consider-ing that a set of prices was considered, it is arguable, with due respect, that the benefit of plus/ minus 5% should have been given to the assessee.

Another important point emerging out of this ruling is that the approval obtained from other Govern-ment authorities does not necessarily approve the arm’s-length nature of the given transaction under the Indian TP regulations. In cases of payment of interest on ECB or royalty payout, quite often the RBI approval or the ceiling rate prescribed by the RBI under the respective regulation is taken as a bench-mark for determining the arm’s-length nature of such transaction. In view of this ruling, the approach of benchmarking placing reliance on approval from government authorities may need to be revisited.

The Tribunal in the case of Perot Systems also discussed the aspect of thin capitalisation rules prevalent in the borrower’s jurisdiction. In view of the Tribunal, the thin capitalisation rules prevalent in the borrower’s jurisdiction would not have any impact on the arm’s-length determination of the interest transaction in India. It is relevant to note that thin capitalisation rules in most of the jurisdictions generally prescribe the acceptable debt equity ratio. These rules only restrict the deductibility of interest for tax purposes if the debt exceeds the prescribed debt equity ratio but there is no restriction on the interest payout. This could be one of the factors which could have led the Tribunal to disregard the contention on thin capitalisation. Having said that, it is important to note that so far as thin capitalisation aspects are concerned, the grant of interest-free loan could incidentally lead to double taxation situation. The interest is deemed to accrue at arm’s length in the hands of the Indian lender and yet the loan recipient entity is unable to claim a deduction due to local thin capitalisation regulations in the home country resulting in double taxation. Thus, this aspect should also need to be taken into consideration.

Conclusion:

The rulings discussed hereinabove could have significant practical implications. The rulings on grant of interest-free loan would impact many Indian companies which have given interest-free loan to its overseas subsidiaries/group companies on account of various business reasons.

Though the aforesaid rulings stipulate that interest-free loan given to overseas group entities may not be viewed as at arm’s length, it is important to look at the economic substance of the transaction. A generalised principle cannot be laid down that in all cases of interest-free loan, interest needs to be imputed. It is thus important that the business case around such transaction is robustly built adducing sufficient economic and commercial basis. It is equally important to document the nature of the funding instrument appropriately in the agreement such that it clearly brings out the true character of the funding instrument i.e., whether it is a debt or a quasiequity. Needless to say, a robust transfer pricing study covering these aspects would be of para-mount importance.

Finally, one needs to wait and watch to see how the higher appellate authorities adjudicate on some of the observations made by the Tribunal and whether the higher appellate authorities would give some respite to the taxpayers. Till then, the taxpayers have to be extremely cautious while entering into interest-free transactions, especially in light of the aforesaid rulings.